I 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • ' * f . +* 
 
 
 . -ψ. -m ** f · ··. 
 
 * -it V · * 
 
Tee Students Greek Grammar 
 
 A GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 GREEK LANGUAGE 
 
 By DR. GEOKGE CURTIUSf 
 
 PROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF LEIPZIG 
 
 TRANSLATED UNDER THE REVISION OF THE AUTHOR 
 
 EDITED BY 
 
 WILLIAM SMITH, LL.D. 
 
 CLASSICAL EXAMINER IN THE UNIVERSITY OF LONDON, AND EDITOR OF THE CLASSICAL 
 
 AND LATIN DICTIONARIES 
 
 ^OSTO.V 
 
 \ * ··< ; · t 
 
 IBiilj nn Slpprnto 
 
 LIST OFj¥El^S| t ■ ί ££ 'TjZS* 
 By J. B. SEWALL, A.M. 
 
 CONTAINING VERSIFICATION AND 
 
 PROFESSOR OF ANCIENT LANGUAGES. BOWDOIN COLLEC 
 
 c OLl£* 
 
 NEW YORK 
 
 HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS 
 
 FRANKLIN SQUARE 
 
 1882 
 
 BOSTON OOLLEGE LIRRARY 
 CHESTNUT HILL, MASS, 
 
EDITOR’S PREFACE. 
 
 The Greek Grammar of Dr. Curtins is acknowledged 
 by the most competent scholars, both in this country and 
 in Germany, to be the best representative of the present 
 advanced state of Greek scholarship. It is, indeed, almost 
 the only Grammar which exhibits the inflexions of the lan¬ 
 guage in a really scientific form; while its extensive use 
 in the schools of Germany, and the high commendations 
 it has received from practical teachers in that country, are 
 sufficient proof of its excellence as a school-book. It is 
 surprising to find that many of the public and private 
 schools in this country continue to use Grammars which 
 ignore all the improvements and discoveries of modern 
 philology, and still cling to the division of the substantives 
 into ten declensions, the designation of the Second Perfect 
 as the Perfect Middle, and similar exploded errors. Dr. 
 Curtius has stated so fully in his Preface the principles on 
 which this Grammar is constructed, that it is unnecessary 
 to say more by way of introduction. It only remains to 
 add that the translation has been made from the fifth edi¬ 
 tion of the original work ( 1862 ), with the author’s sanction, 
 and that the proof-sheets have enjoyed the advantage of 
 his final correction and revision. 
 
 An abridgment for the use of the lower forms is pub¬ 
 lished simultaneously with the present work. 
 
 London, March, 1863. 
 
 w. s. 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 ■ 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ - 
 
 . 
 
 ') S ’ 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FROM THE AUTHOR’S PREFACE. 
 
 The fact that within a few years the present Grammar 
 has found its way into a large number of schools in various 
 countries of Europe seems to me a satisfactory answer to 
 the question whether a thorough knowledge of Greek is 
 attainable by the method I have adopted. Much, there¬ 
 fore, of what I thought it necessary to state on the first 
 appearance of the book does not now require to be repeat¬ 
 ed; but I consider it incumbent upon me to make some 
 observations upon the objects and the use of the Grammar, 
 and I beg to recommend these to the careful consideration 
 of teachers. 
 
 Few sciences have within the last half century been so 
 completely reformed as the science of language. Not only 
 has our insight into the nature and history of human speech 
 been greatly advanced, but—and this is justly regarded as 
 a matter of still greater importance — quite a different 
 method in treating language in general has been discov¬ 
 ered, after a new era had been opened up by the philo¬ 
 sophical inquiries of William von Humboldt, and the his¬ 
 torical investigations of Francis Bopp and Jacob Grimm. 
 No one, unless he desires to exclude schools from the prog¬ 
 ress thus made, and to confine them to the mechanical 
 repetition of imperfect and antiquated rules, will probably 
 doubt that the new knowledge, the principles of which 
 have stood the test of nearly half a century, ought to exer¬ 
 cise its influence on the teaching of lan£ma<re. 
 
 If the teaching of a language in our schools is intended 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 to lead not only to a thorough understanding of the mas¬ 
 ter-works of literature, but at the same time to cultivate 
 and stir up the youthful mind by independent exertion, 
 and by occupation with a subject so immensely rich, and so 
 harmoniously quickening the most different mental powers 
 as language, such teaching can not possibly continue to 
 keep aloof from the progress of scientific inquiry, which is, 
 unfortunately, still the case in many places. The teaching 
 of Greek, however, seems to be specially called upon to 
 make a commencement. The modern science of lan<nia2;e 
 has, indeed, exercised its influence on every part of gram¬ 
 mar, but none has been more affected by it than the first, 
 commonly called the accidence. In Latin, scientific in¬ 
 quiry into the structure of the forms has not yet reached 
 the same completeness as in Greek. The structure of the 
 Latin language is less transparent, and we miss so many 
 aids which we possess for the Greek in the high antiquity 
 of its literature and in its dialects. A scientific treatment 
 of the structure of the Latin language in schools is, more¬ 
 over, a matter of great practical difficulty, on account of 
 the early age at which the elements must necessarily be 
 learned. We ought not, however, on this account, to sep¬ 
 arate the teaching of Latin from all contact with scientific 
 inquiry, the influence of which can show itself with advan¬ 
 tage, at least, in a more suitable arrangement and distribu¬ 
 tion of the matter. Granting, therefore, that our boys, as 
 heretofore, must commit to memory a large portion of Latin 
 forms; granting that the most important object in learning 
 Latin consists, perhaps, more in the acquisition of fixed 
 laws of syntax, which obviously form the principal strength 
 of the Latin language, the case of the Greek is different. 
 The Greeks are justly called an artistic people, and the 
 Greek language is the most ancient work of art which they 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Vll 
 
 have reared upon a very primitive basis. The student, 
 who approaches the Greek after he has already gone 
 through a considerable preparation by the study of Latin, 
 ought to be impressed with the idea that the structure of 
 this language is one of the most marvelous productions of 
 the intellectual powers acting unconsciously/ Every thing 
 lies here clear before us: the sources of our knowledge are 
 more varied, and the necessity of analyzing the given forms 
 is rendered so absolute, even on account of the Homeric 
 dialect, that this analysis has, in fact, never been entirely 
 wanting, and after the first appearance of Buttmann, in 
 1782 , made considerable progress. The attempt, therefore, 
 to connect in a still higher degree the practice of the school 
 with the spirit of science, can here point to numerous 
 precedents; and it is, no doubt, mainly owing to this cir¬ 
 cumstance that it has met with so favorable a reception. 
 My object has been to produce a consistent system, a care¬ 
 ful selection, and a clear and precise exposition, rather 
 than an entirely new system. 
 
 In selecting and expounding the results of scientific in¬ 
 quiry, I have always kept in view the idea that the book 
 was intended for practical use in schools. The first requi¬ 
 site, therefore, was not to admit any thing which is beyond 
 the sphere of the school, to explain only that which is nec¬ 
 essary, and to admit only that which is absolutely certain; 
 for a school-book must speak categorically, must exclude 
 all matters of mere opinion, and has no space for discussion 
 and inquiry. It is, however, perfectly indifferent whether 
 a result has been obtained by special researches into the 
 Greek language or by the more general inquiries of com¬ 
 parative philology. 
 
 I was farther obliged to admit only those things which 
 find their explanation in the Greek language itself, or at 
 
Vlll 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 most in a comparison with the Latin ; but even within 
 these limits I have confined myself to such innovations as 
 really afford an important insight into the structure of the 
 forms, whereas all that belongs to philological learning and 
 many other things have been passed over because they 
 seemed unnecessary. Among such superfluous innovations 
 I include especially all changes of terminology, and the 
 entire alteration of whole parts of grammar which are often 
 still less necessary, but to which formerly too much impor¬ 
 tance used to be attached. 
 
 The new technical terms I have introduced have gen¬ 
 erally been approved of, and the principle stated in my 
 Preface to the first edition, though not followed with pe¬ 
 dantic consistency, “ if possible, to put significant names in 
 the place of dead numbers,” as, for e. g ., A Declension, O 
 Declension, instead of First and Second Declension, will 
 scarcely be found fault with, for a name with a meaning at 
 once gives a piece of information, and therefore facilitates 
 learning. Doubts have been raised only about the expres¬ 
 sions strong and weak, which I have employed to distin¬ 
 guish the two Aorists and Perfects. I am as well aware 
 now as I was at the first that, from the point of view of 
 scientific inquiry, much may be said against the expressions, 
 but I nevertheless feel that I can not give them up. For 
 the old designation by numbers is unsatisfactory, unless 
 we are prepared for its sake either to sacrifice a more con¬ 
 sistent arrangement of the verb, or to mislead the pupil by 
 calling the Aorist which is treated of first the second, and 
 first the one with which he is made acquainted afterward. 
 But a common name to distinguish the two forms of the 
 Aorist Active Middle and Passive, and of the Perfect 
 Active, is indispensable in a system of Greek Grammar. 
 An innovation had here become necessarv, for both neg^ 
 
 J J o 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 IX 
 
 ative and positive reasons. The expressions strong and 
 weak have this advantage—that, after being introduced by 
 Grimm into his German Grammar, they have also been 
 adopted by English grammarians; and, though I use them 
 not quite in the same sense, they are easily intelligible. 
 It will surely not be difficult to make a pupil understand 
 that those forms are called strong which spring from the 
 root, as it were, by an internal agency, and weah those 
 which are formed by syllables added externally, especially 
 as he may easily compare the English take , took, and love , 
 loved. I still know of no designation which, with so few 
 disadvantages, offers so many advantages as this, and I shall 
 retain it until a better one is suggested; and, after all, in 
 necessary innovations, it is often more important that men 
 agree than on what they agree. 
 
 The fact that the most essential changes I have made in 
 the arrangements of the subjects—as, for example, the strict 
 adherence to the system of Stems in all the inflexions, and 
 especially the division of the verb according to temporal 
 Stems—have met with the approval of practical teachers, 
 has been to me a source of great gratification, it being a 
 clear proof that the demands of scientific inquiry are by no 
 means so much opposed to a right system of teaching as 
 is still imagined by many. The arrangement of temporal 
 Stems is made less upon scientific than upon didactic 
 grounds, in such a manner that kindred forms are joined 
 together, and due regard is paid to the progress from that 
 which is easy to that which is more difficult. 
 
 The chapter on the formation of words, though somewhat 
 enlarged, has, for the same reasons, still been kept very brief. 
 But, in treating of the verbs, I have directed attention to 
 the formation of verbal nouns: in treating of the verbs of 
 the different classes, I have always directed attention, by a 
 
 l* 
 
X 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 number of characteristic examples, to the application of the 
 different Stems in the formation of words. By this means 
 the learner has an opportunity, during the study of his 
 grammar, of making himself acquainted with a number of 
 words, and I have no doubt that teachers will give their 
 sanction to this arrangement. 
 
 In regard to Syntax, the positive results of recent lin¬ 
 guistic inquiries are as yet less numerous. In this part of 
 the Grammar, therefore, I follow the principle of stating 
 the essential idioms of the Greek language with the utmost 
 possible precision and in the utmost logical order. Only 
 in some chapters, especially in that on the use of the tenses, 
 does my system present considerable differences from the 
 usual one. All minute disquisitions, conjectures, and more 
 or less probable theories—among them especially the ever- 
 repeated theory about the original local meaning of the 
 cases, with which I can not agree at all—have been rigor¬ 
 ously excluded. In this part, also, I have never neglected 
 to compare the phenomena of the Greek language with the 
 corresponding ones of Latin, and occasionally also of En¬ 
 glish, where this could be done with brevity and advan¬ 
 tage; for as the usage of a language must be mainly com¬ 
 prehended by a feeling of language, I imagine that every 
 appeal to a Latin usage already embodied with our feeling 
 of language, or to an English usage familiar to us from 
 childhood, advances our knowledge much more than philo¬ 
 sophical definitions or technical terms of vague or various 
 meanings. For the same reason, I every where attach 
 great importance to an accurate translation of a Greek 
 idiom into English or Latin. I need hardly guard myself 
 against the opinion that I considered such a translation to 
 be a philosophical explanation of a linguistic phenomenon. 
 A real explanation is beyond the problem of a Grammar. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 XI 
 
 I scarcely need repeat here that the present book is not 
 intended, like an Elementary Grammar, to be committed 
 to memory paragraph by paragraph; but, in teaching, a 
 suitable selection, according to the degree of the pupil’s 
 advancement, should be made by the teacher. By a dif¬ 
 ference in type I have myself, at least partially, indicated 
 this. 
 
 It may be remarked in general that the first business 
 
 ♦ 
 
 every where is that of mem ory, and only when the actual 
 forms, with the aid of the paradigms, have been committed 
 to memory, analysis may be added. First knowledge , then 
 understanding: this ought to be the leading principle; 
 but, as I have said in another place, “ Memory can neither 
 accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor re¬ 
 tain them, unless it be supported by an analyzing and com¬ 
 bining intelligence, which furnishes, as it were, the hooks 
 and cement to strengthen that which has been learned, 
 and permanently to impress it upon the mind.” If details 
 learned at different times and carefully committed to mem¬ 
 ory, during a subsequent repetition variously combine with 
 one another and form various groups ; if, then, many things, 
 at first sight strange, appear to the pupil in the light of a 
 law pervading the language, such insight is certainly not a 
 mere support of memory, but animates the desire to learn, 
 and incites to exercise the power of thought in a variety 
 of ways. The present book offers to teachers abundant 
 opportunities for such exercises, and acquires its highest 
 efficacy under the guidance of thinking teachers who are 
 truly familiar with it, and take a delight in its subjects. 
 That the book has actually found such teachers has been 
 proved to me in various ways, and caused me sincere grat¬ 
 ification. G. C. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 
 
 FIRST PART.—ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 I. Letters and Sounds. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE GREEK CHARACTERS. 
 
 A. Letters. § 1-9 
 
 B. Ollier Characters. 10-16 
 
 C. Accents. 17-22 
 
 D. Punctuation. 23 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 THE SOUNDS. 
 
 A. The Vowels. 24-29 
 
 B. The Consonants. 30-34 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 COMBINATIONS AND CHANGES OF SOUNDS. 
 
 A. Vowels in Combination. 35-39 
 
 B. Other kinds of Vowel Changes.40-43 
 
 C. Consonants in Combination with one another.44-54 
 
 D. Other Changes in the Middle of a Word.55-62 
 
 E. Changes of Sound at the End of a Word .. 63-69 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 DIVISION OF SYLLABLES AND THEIR QUANTITY. 
 
 A. Division of Syllables. 70-73 
 
 B. Quantity. 74-78 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 ACCENTS 
 
 79-99 
 
XIV 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 II. Inflexion. 
 
 A. Inflexion of Nouns and Pronouns. 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 
 
 First Principal (or Vowel) Declension. 
 
 A. The A Declension.§ 112-113 
 
 (commonly called the First Declension .) 
 
 1. Feminines. 114-119 
 
 2. Masculines. 120-123 
 
 B. The O Declension. 124-131 
 
 {commonly called the Second Declension.) 
 
 Attic Declension. 132-133 
 
 Second Principal (or Consonant) Declension .135-143 
 
 {commonly called the Third Declension .) 
 
 1. Consonant Stems: 
 
 a. Guttural and Labial Stems. 144-145 
 
 h. Dental Stems.,.1-4G-149 
 
 c. Liquid. Stems.. 150-153 
 
 2. Vowel Stems: 
 
 a. Soft Vowel Stems. 154-158 
 
 l·. Diphthong Stems ... 159-161 
 
 c. O Stems. 162-163 
 
 3. Stems suffering Elision: 
 
 a. Sigma Stems. 164-167 
 
 l·. r-Stems. 168-169 
 
 c. ^-Sterns. 170-171 
 
 Irregularities in Declension. 174-177 
 
 Case-like Terminations. 178-179 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 OTHER INFLEXIONS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 A. Gender. . 180-191 
 
 B. Comparison. 192-200 
 
 C. Adverbs of Adjectives. 201-204 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 INFLEXION OF PRONOUNS . 205-219 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 THE NUMERALS . 220-224 
 
CONTENTS. XV 
 
 B. Inflexion of Verbs. 
 
 General Remarks.§ 225-230 
 
 LIST OF PARADIGMS. Table. 
 
 E Ιμί, I am . I. 
 
 Synopsis of λύω, I loose (exhibiting the meanings of the Tenses) II. 
 
 verbs in Ω. 
 
 A. Vowel Stems: 
 
 1. Uncontracted, λύω . III. 
 
 2. Contracted, τιμάω, ποιεω, δονλόω . IV. 
 
 B. Consonant Stems: 
 
 1. Guttural Stems, 7τλεκω, φεύγω, τάσσω .. V. 
 
 2. Dental Stems, ψεύδομαι, πείθω, κομίζω . VI. 
 
 3. Labial Stems, πέμπω, Χείπω, καλύπτω . VII. 
 
 4. Liquid Stems, δέρω, αγγέλλω, σπείρω .VIII. 
 
 VERBS IN MI. 
 
 First Class, τίθημι, δίδωμι, ίστημι ._. IX. 
 
 Second Class, δείκννμι . X. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 FIRST PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN Ω. 
 
 I. The Present-Stem: 
 
 A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem.§ 231-233 
 
 B. The Augment. 234-242 
 
 C. Contracted Verbs. 243-244 
 
 D. Distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal 
 
 Stem. 245-253 
 
 II. The Strong Aorist-Stem. 254-257 
 
 III. The Future-Stem. 258-2G6 
 
 IV. The Weak Aorist-Stem. 267-271 
 
 V. The Perfect-Stem. 272 
 
 1. Perfect Active. 276-282 
 
 2. Pluperfect Active. 283 
 
 3. Perfect Middle and Passive. 284-289 
 
 4. Pluperfect Middle and Passive. 290-291 
 
 VI. Forms of the Strong Passive Stem. 292-295 
 
 VII. Forms of the Weak Passive Stem. 296-299 
 
 V erbal Adjectives. 300 
 
 Verbs which leave their Stem-Vowel short. 301 
 
XVI 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN MI. 
 
 Preliminary Remarks.§ 302-304 
 
 1. First Class. 305-317 
 
 2. Second Class. 318-319 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF TIIE FIRST CONJUGATION . 320-327 
 
 Anomalies in Signification. 328-330 
 
 Outlines of the Accentuation of Verbal Forms. 331-333 
 
 Peculiar Verbal Forms of the Ionic Dialect. 334 D.-338 D. 
 
 III. Derivation. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 A. Simple Derivatives . 339-340 
 
 1. The most important Suffixes for forming Substan¬ 
 tives. 341-349 
 
 2. The most important Suffixes for forming Adjectives.. 350-352 
 
 3. Derivative Verbs. 353 
 
 B. Compound Derivatives : 
 
 1. Form of the Combination. 354-358 
 
 2. Meaning of Combination... 359-360 
 
 SECOND PART.—SYNTAX. 
 
 Preliminary Remarks... 361 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 NUMBER AND GENDER .. 362-367 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 THE ARTICLE . 368-391 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 USE OF cases: 
 
 A. Nominative. 392-393 
 
 B. Vocative .. 394 
 
 C. Accusative. 395-406 
 
 D. Genitive. 407-428 
 
 E. Dative. 429-443 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 XVII 
 
 CHAPTER XYII. 
 
 THE PREPOSITIONS . § 444 
 
 General View of the Prepositions. 448 
 
 1. Prepositions which take only One Case. 449-457 
 
 2. Prepositions which take Two Cases. 458-461 
 
 3. Prepositions which take Three Cases. 462-468 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 THE PRONOUNS . 469-475 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 THE KINDS OF VERBS . 476-483 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 USE OF ΤΠΕ TENSES . 484 
 
 1. The forms for the Incomplete Action. 486-491 
 
 2. The forms for the Indefinite (Aorist) Action. 492-498 
 
 3. The Future. 499-501 
 
 4. The forms for the Complete Action. 502-506 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 USE OF THE MOODS. 
 
 A. In Simple Sentences: 
 
 1. Indicative. 507 
 
 2. Subjunctive. 508-513 
 
 3. Optative. 514-517 
 
 4. Imperative. 518 
 
 B. In Compound Sentences: 
 
 Connexion of Sentences with one another.519-524 
 
 1. Dependent, Declarative, and Interrogative Sentences 525-529 
 
 2. Sentences expressing a purpose. 530-533 
 
 3. Conditional Sentences.. 534-550 
 
 4. Relative Sentences. 551-555 
 
 5. Temporal Sentences. 556-558 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 1. Use of the Infinitive in general. 559-566 
 
 2. The Case of the Subject and Predicate with the Infinitive 567-572 
 
 3. The Infinitive with the Article. 573-574 
 
 4. The Infinitive with av . 575-576 
 
 5. The Infinitive instead of the Imperative. 577 
 
XV111 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 OX PARTICIPLES. 
 
 1. Attributive Use... § 578 
 
 2. Appositive Use. 579-583 
 
 3. The Participle with an Absolute Case. 584-586 
 
 4. Supplements to Participles. 587-588 
 
 5. The Predicative Participle. 589-594 
 
 G. The Participle with av . 595 
 
 7. Verbal Adjectives. 596 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 SOME PECULIARITIES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES.. 597-605 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES . 606-611 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 ΤΠΕ NEGATIVES. 
 
 1. Use of Simple Negatives.612-618 
 
 2. Several Negatives combined.619-621 
 
 3. Some Negative Phrases. 622 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 * 
 
 ΤΠΕ PARTICLES. 
 
 A. Conjunctions. 623 
 
 1. Copulative Conjunctions. 624-625 
 
 2. Disjunctive “ 626-627 
 
 3. Adversative “ 628-630 
 
 4. Comparative “ 631-632 
 
 5. Declarative “ 633 
 
 6. Temporal “ 634-635 
 
 7. Causal “ 636 
 
 8. Inferential “ 637 
 
 9. Final “ 638 
 
 10. Hypothetical “ 639 
 
 11. Concessive “ 640 
 
 B. Emphatic Particles. 641-643 
 
 Page 
 
 English Index. 353 
 
 Greek Index. 357 
 
THE 
 
 STUDENT’S GREEK GRAMMAR. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 
 
 The Greek language is tlie language of the Ancient 
 Hellenes ^Έλληνες), the inhabitants of Greece, with all 
 its islands and numerous colonies. It is related to the 
 languages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, Slavonians, 
 Lithuanians, Germans, and Celts. These are all sister- 
 languages, and together form the Indo-European family. 
 
 The Greeks were early divided into races, each of which 
 spoke a different dialect. The chief dialects of the Greek 
 language are the Aeolic, Doric, and Ionic. At first each 
 race employed its own dialect both in poetry and in prose. 
 
 1. The Ionic dialect w r as spoken by the Ionic race, es¬ 
 pecially in Asia Minor and Attica, in numerous islands, 
 and in the Ionic colonies. It was the first of the dialects 
 developed by poetry, and produced three different but 
 nearly related dialects, viz.: 
 
 a ) The Old-Ionic or Epic dialect, which is preserved 
 in the poems of Homer and Hesiod as well as of their fol¬ 
 lowers. 
 
 V) The New-Ionic dialect, which we know chiefly from 
 the history of Herodotus. 
 
 Ohs .—Tlie Old and New Ionic dialects are also designated by the 
 common name Ionic , as distinguished from the Attic. 
 
 c) The Attic dialect, in which are written the numerous 
 works in poetry and prose produced at Athens in the time 
 
 A 
 
2 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 of her glory. The principal writers of the Attic dialect 
 are — the tragedians TEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, the 
 comic writer Aristophanes, the historians Thucydides and 
 Xenophon, the philosopher Plato, the great orators Lysias, 
 Demosthenes, and TEschines. Through the importance 
 of Athens in Greece, and the excellence of the Attic lit¬ 
 erature, the Attic became the chief dialect of the Greek 
 
 language. 
 
 © © 
 
 Ohs .—A less important distinction is made between the earlier and 
 later Attic writers. The tragedians and Thucydides belong to 
 the earlier Attic, and the remaining authors to the later. The 
 language of Plato is intermediate between the two: that of the 
 tragedians has also many other peculiarities. 
 
 2. The TEolic dialect was spoken by the iEolians, par¬ 
 ticularly in Asia Minor, Boeotia, and Thessaly. Alcaeus and 
 Sappho wrote in this dialect. 
 
 3. The Doric dialect was spoken by the Dorians, chief¬ 
 ly in Xorthern Greece, in the Peloponnesus, in Crete, and 
 in the numerous Doric colonies, especially Sicily and Lower 
 Italy. Doric is essentially the dialect of Pindar’s lyric 
 poems and Theocritus’s bucolics (herdsman’s poetry). The 
 choruses in the tragedies also contain some Doric forms. 
 
 4. After Athens ceased to be the leading city in Greece, 
 the Attic dialect still remained the language of educated 
 Greeks. But it soon began to degenerate from its primi¬ 
 tive purity and excellence, and thus, from the third century 
 before Christ, the common Greek dialect (?j κοινή ΰιάΧίκτος) 
 was distinguished from the Attic. 
 
 On the boundary-line between the older Attic and the 
 common Greek dialect stands the great philosopher Aris¬ 
 totle. Among later authors, the most important are—the 
 historians Polybius, Plutarch , Arrian, Dion Cassius ; the 
 geographer Strabo / the rhetoricians Dionysius of Hali¬ 
 carnassus and Lucian. 
 
PART FIRST. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 I. LETTERS AND SOUNDS. 
 
 Chap. I.— The Greek Characters. 
 
 A. Letters. 
 
 § 1. The Greek letters are the following: 
 
 Large Character. Small Character. Name. Pronunciation. 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 Alpha 
 
 a (short or long). 
 
 B 
 
 β 
 
 Beta 
 
 b. 
 
 Γ 
 
 Ύ 
 
 Gamma 
 
 g· 
 
 Δ 
 
 δ 
 
 Delta 
 
 d. 
 
 E 
 
 ε 
 
 Epsilon 
 
 e (only short). 
 
 Z 
 
 ζ 
 
 Zeta 
 
 z. 
 
 H 
 
 *1 
 
 Eta 
 
 e (only long). 
 
 Θ 
 
 0 
 
 Theta 
 
 th. 
 
 I 
 
 ί 
 
 Iota 
 
 i (short or long). 
 
 K 
 
 κ 
 
 Ivappa 
 
 k. 
 
 Λ 
 
 λ 
 
 Lambda 
 
 1 . 
 
 M 
 
 μ 
 
 Mu 
 
 m. 
 
 N 
 
 V 
 
 Ku 
 
 n. 
 
 IS 
 
 ζ 
 
 Xi 
 
 X. 
 
 0 
 
 ο 
 
 Omlkron 
 
 o (only short). 
 
 Π 
 
 7Γ 
 
 Pi 
 
 P· 
 
 P 
 
 Ρ 
 
 Rho 
 
 r. 
 
 Σ 
 
 σ, ς 
 
 Sigma 
 
 s. 
 
 T 
 
 τ 
 
 Tau 
 
 t. 
 
 r 
 
 V 
 
 Upsilon 
 
 ii (short or long). 
 
 φ 
 
 Φ 
 
 Phi 
 
 ph. 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 Chi 
 
 ch. 
 
 \Jr 
 
 Ψ 
 
 Psi 
 
 ps. 
 
 Ω 
 
 ω 
 
 Omega 
 
 ΰ (only long). 
 
4 
 
 LETTERS. 
 
 § 2. For s there is a double sign in the small character: 
 σ at the beginning and in the middle, and ς at the end of 
 a word. Hence συν , σείω, ησαν, but πόνος, κεράς. In 
 compound words ς* may also stand at the end of the first 
 word in the compound: προς-ερχομαι , δύς-βατος. 
 
 § 3. From the names of the first two letters arose the 
 expression “Alphabet.” The characters of the Greek al¬ 
 phabet do not essentially differ from those of the Latin 
 and of modern languages. All come from the alphabet of 
 the Phoenicians. 
 
 In regard to pronunciation, the following points are to 
 be observed: 
 
 § 4. All Greek letters are always pronounced alike. 
 But y is an exception, since, before γ, κ, χ, or ξ, it is 
 pronounced ng . Hence in Latin it is represented by n : 
 τεγγω is pronounced tengo· συγκαλώ, syngJddo / λόγχη, 
 longche, · φόρμιγζ, phorminx. 
 
 § 5. ζ is pronounced like the English z, It is of very 
 different origin in different cases. Compare μείζων (for 
 μεγιων) from μεγας ; ζυγόν with Latin jugum , English 
 yoke, etc. 
 
 § 6. φ we pronounce as f, but probably the Greeks pro¬ 
 nounced the p and h separately ; hence ph, not f, is used 
 in Latin for φ: φιλοσοφία, philosophic / Φιλοκτήτης, Phi- 
 
 loctetes. 
 
 §7 . 0 we pronounce like the English th. 
 
 § 8. Of the diphthongs, ai and el are both pronounced 
 as ei in height / oi, as oy in hoy; av, as on in sour; ου, 
 as ou in tour; vi, as wi in wing / ευ and ηυ, as ew in few. 
 The iota subs crip turn ( underwritten ) is not pronounced in 
 
 § 8. Dialects.—The Greek language had in the most ancient times 
 another letter, f, which was called Digamma (δίγαμμα=“ double gam- 
 ma”) from its fonn, and Van (Pav) from its pronunciation. It was 
 pronounced like the Latin v: P οίνος, wine = Lat. einum. At a later 
 time it was written only by the dEolians and Dorians. 
 
14 . 
 
 OTHER CHARACTERS. 
 
 a, y, ω. It is not written under, but after capitals, as Ai, 
 Hi, Ωί, but still remains unpronounced. 
 
 § 9. When two vowels, usually pronounced together, are 
 to be pronounced separately, the latter has over it a diaere¬ 
 sis (βιαίρεσις= separation): thus τταίς is pronounced pa-is; 
 αϋττνος, a-upnos. 
 
 B. Other Characters. 
 
 § 10. Besides the letters, the Greek language has also 
 the sign c , which is placed over the initial vowel to which 
 it belongs, and represents the h: εξ is pronounced hex; 
 ατταζ, hapax. This sign is called spirit us asper, “ rough 
 breathing.” 
 
 O 
 
 § 11. For more exact distinction, the Greeks also mark 
 those initial vowels which have not this breathing with the 
 sign \i.e., the spiritus lenis , “gentle breathing.” This 
 sound indicates only the raising of the voice which is nec¬ 
 essary for the pronunciation of a vowel when no consonant 
 precedes: εκ is pronounced eh / αγω, ago. 
 
 § 12. In diphthongs the breathing stands over the second 
 vowel: ουτος — houtos / εΐδον — eidon. But when the first 
 vowel is in large character, the breathing stands before it: 
 f/ Αιδης = Hades y "ίΐιδη = Ode. 
 
 § 13. Every initial p -has the spiritus asper over it: 
 ραψωδός, ρεύμα. In Latin the aspirate is written after 
 the p: rliapsodus , rheuma . When two p’s come together 
 in a word, ’ is usually placed over the first, and f over the 
 second: Π νρρος —Pyrrhus ; Καλλιρρόη = CalUrrhoe. 
 
 Obs .—Many write tlie double q without any breathing: Tltppor ; 
 
 Καλλιρρόη. 
 
 § 14. As in Latin, so in Greek, the sign “ over a vowel 
 denotes that the vowel is long, w that it is short, and - that 
 it is sometimes one, sometimes the other. In Greek they 
 arc used only with the vowels a, i, v, since ε, η, ο, ω, are 
 distinguished by tlieir form. 
 
6 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 15 . 
 
 § 15. The sign ’ at the junction of two words indicates 
 the omission of a vowel or diphthong, and is then called 
 an apostrophe : παρ εκείνω for παρά έκείνω, with that one y 
 μη ’γώ for μη εγώ (pie ego). 
 
 § 16. The same sign has the name coronis ( κορωνίς ) 
 when it stands over the junction of two words contracted 
 /into one: τοάνομα for το ονομα, the name / καγαθος* for 
 καί ayaQog, and good. It indicates that a crasis ( κράσις , 
 mixture) or contraction of two words has taken place, and, 
 like the breathing, stands over the second vowel of a diph¬ 
 thong : ravro for το αυτό , the same. 
 
 C. Accents. 
 
 § 17. The Greeks also indicate the tone or Accent 
 ( 7 τροςωΰ'ια) of words. The sign ' over a vowel is called 
 the acute accent (οζεία προςωΰία), that is, the sharp or 
 raised tone : λογος, τούτων, παρά, έτερος. The syllable 
 thus marked must be raised above the rest. 
 
 A word having the acute accent upon the last syllable is 
 called oxytone (οξύτονοι/): παρά, είπε, βασιλεύς. 
 
 A word having the acute accent upon the last but one is 
 called paroxytone (παροζντονον) : λέγω, φαίνώ. 
 
 A word having the acute accent upon the last but two 
 is called proparoxytone (προπαροζντονον) : λέγεται, είπετε 
 
 § 18. Obs .—A proparoxytone, having a long vowel or diphthong in 
 the second syllable of the word, ought to be pronounced so as to 
 give the accent on the third syllable, and yet preserve the length 
 of the second syllable: βεβηκα should be pronounced bebeka; 
 άπόβαινε, apbbaine. 
 
 § 19. The sign ' over a vowel is called the grave accent 
 ( βαρεία προςωΰία). It indicates a loio tone, that is, that 
 a syllable is not raised in tone. Thus in άπυβαίνε, the 
 last two might have the grave accent. The marking of 
 them, however, would be superfluous, the absence of the 
 acute being a sufficient guide. All words without an 
 
PUNCTUATION. 
 
 1 
 
 9Q 
 
 accent on the final syllable are therefore called barytone 
 (βαρύτονα) : λέγω, 'έτερος. 
 
 § 20. The sign however, also denotes a subdued acute, 
 and occupies the place of an acute in every oxytone not 
 immediately followed by a pause : από, from , but euro 
 τούτου, from this / βασιλεύς, a Icing, but βασιλεύς έγένετο, 
 he became Icing. Oxytones, therefore, retain their accent 
 unchanged only at the end of a sentence. 
 
 § 21. The sign " over a vowel is called the circumflex 
 accent ( περισπωμένη τ τροςωϋία), from its shape. The cir¬ 
 cumflex is a combination of the acute and the grave, /v . 
 
 A word having a circumflex on the last syllable is called 
 jperisjoomenon (περισπώ μενον) : αγαθοΤς, σκιάς. 
 
 A word having a circumflex on the last syllable but 
 one is called ppvojperisyyomenon (προπερισπώμενοι 1 ) : φεύγε, 
 βητε. 
 
 § 22. In diphthongs, the accent, like the breathing (§ 12), 
 is put over the second vowel: φεύγει, τούτο. 
 
 When the circumflex accent and the breathing meet upon 
 the same vowel, the accent is placed over the breathing : 
 ούτος, ήθος, r Ωτος . The acute, in a similar case, stands to 
 the right of the breathing : αγε, εργομαι,’Ίων. 
 
 Obs .— The acute is placed between the two points of a diaeresis (9), 
 άωιος , but the circumflex over them, πρανναι. 
 
 I). Punctuation. 
 
 § 23. For the purpose of dividing sentences and periods, 
 the Greeks employ the comma and the full-point. For 
 the sign of interrogation they use the semicolon: τι εΐπας ; 
 what did you, say? ' For the colon or semicolon they 
 place a point at the upper part of the line: ερωτώ υμάς * 
 τι εποιησατε ; I ask you : what did you do ? εσπέρα ην ’ 
 τότε ηλθεν άγγελος, it was evening ; then a messenger 
 came . 
 
8 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 24 . 
 
 Chap. II. —The Sounds. 
 
 A. The Vowels. 
 
 § 24. The Greek language, like the Latin, has five vow¬ 
 els, of which the first four are like the Latin, a, e, o, i. 
 But instead of the Latin u, the Greeks have v (pronounced. 
 nearly like the French u and the Qerman it). 
 
 § 25. The vowels, apart from the distinction of long and 
 short, are divided into two classes—the hard and the soft 
 vowels : α, e, η, ο, ω, are hard; v, i, soft. 
 
 § 26. From the union of hard and soft vowels together 
 arise diphthongs (fi^Qoyyoi, i. e., double-sounds). They 
 are: 
 
 av, from 
 
 a 
 
 and 
 
 V. 
 
 ov, 
 
 from 
 
 o 
 
 and 
 
 V. 
 
 ai , i( 
 
 a 
 
 
 1. 
 
 Oi, 
 
 (( 
 
 o 
 
 
 i. 
 
 EV , “ 
 
 E 
 
 (( 
 
 V. 
 
 ην, 
 
 (( 
 
 η 
 
 a 
 
 V. 
 
 iC 
 
 «.l, 
 
 E 
 
 (( 
 
 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 27. The union of long hard vowels with i produces the 
 
 § 24. Dialects.—The Dialects, in many words and forms, admit dif¬ 
 ferent vowels from those usual in the Attic dialect. Thus: 
 
 1. The Ionic (Epic and New-Ionic) dialect prefers η for Attic 
 a : Att. θώραζ, Ion. θώρηξ, hreastp)late ; Att. αγορά , Ion. άγορή , market; 
 Att. ναυς , Ion. νηνς, ship ; but Ion. μεσαμβρίη for Att. μεσημβρία , mid¬ 
 day. 
 
 2. The Doric , on the contrary, prefers ά : Att. δήμος , Dor. δάμος , 
 people ; Att. μητηρ, mother , Dor. μάτηρ (comp. Latin mater) ; Dor. Άθάνα 
 for ’ Αθήνα, goddess Athena , even in Attic poets. 
 
 3. The Ionic dialect often changes ε to «, and o to ου : Att. ζενος, 
 Ion. ξεΐ νος, foreign ; At. ενεκα , Ion. είνεκα, on account of; Att. μόνος, Ion. 
 μοννος , alone ; Att. όνομα , Ion. οννομα , name. Rarely o to oi, or a to ai : 
 Att. ι’ιγνόησε, Ion. ι)γνοίησε, he knew not. 
 
 § 2G. Dialects.—The New-Ionic dialect has moreover the diphthong 
 iov, which, however, only comes in place of av in the other dialects. 
 θωυμα for θαύμα, Wonder ; εωντοΰ for εαυτόν , of himself : ωυ must be 
 pronounced as ou. 
 
§ 33 . 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 9 
 
 spurious diphthongs a, ??, ω, in which the underwritten 
 iota is not heard. (Compare § 8.) 
 
 § 28. The Greek language also combines v with i, but 
 only before vowels: μυία, a fly. 
 
 § 29. We farther distinguish the obscure o-sound (ο, ω), 
 the medium a-sound (a), and the clear e-sound (t, η), and 
 the more obscure υ from the clearer i. 
 
 B. The Consonants . 
 
 § 30. The consonants are divided : I. According to 
 the position in the mouth where they are produced, 
 i. e., according to their organ ( bpyavov , “ instrument”), 
 into : 
 
 1. Gutturals (throat-sounds), κ, γ, χ. 
 
 2. Dentals (teeth-sounds), r, S, θ, v, λ, p, σ. 
 
 3. Labials (lip-sounds), ττ, β, 0, μ, 
 
 § 31. II. According to their power, that is, whether they 
 can be pronounced with or without a vowel, into: 
 
 § 32. l. Mutes (mutte) : 
 
 (a.) hard (tenues), k , r, 7r. 
 
 (b.) soft (media?), y, δ, β. 
 
 (<?.) aspirated (aspirata?), χ, θ, φ. 
 
 01)8 .—The aspirated consonants contain each a hard consonant 
 with the rough breathing, χ therefore = κ (kh) ; θ — τ (th); <p— 
 tt' (ph). 
 
 § 33. 2. Vocals (semivocales): 
 
 (a.) Liquids (liquidae), λ, p. 
 
 (&.) Wasals (nasales), γ (γ before gutturals, § 4), v, μ. 
 (o.) Sibilano (sibilans), <y (c). 
 
 § 32. Dialects.—In the Ionic dialect the aspirates often lose the 
 breathing: δεκομαι for Attic δέχομαι, accept ; αυτις for Attic αύθις , 
 again. The New-Ionic sometimes transposes the breathing: κιΘών 
 for Attic χιτών , tunic / ίνθεΰτεν for Attic εντεύθεν. 
 
 A 2 
 
10 
 
 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 
 
 34 . 
 
 § 34. The double consonants belong to both kinds: 
 ξ, ψ, ζ : for ξ = κσ, φ = ττσ, ζ = δ, with a soft sibilant 
 
 (§ 5). 
 
 Obs. — κσ only occurs in compounds with ίκ : ίκσώζω, I rescue. 
 
 Chap. III. —Combinations and Changes of 
 
 Sounds. 
 
 A. Vowels in Combination. 
 
 35. In the inner part of a word not all vowels may 
 
 § 34. Dialects.—A peculiarity of the Greek language is the w T ant 
 of the breathing v. The v, however, was not altogether wanting; 
 for— 
 
 1. The digamma (§ 3, D.) occurred in the Homeric dialect in 
 the beginning of the following words: άγνυμι, break; ίίλις, numer¬ 
 ous ; άλίσκομαι , am caught; άναξ , ruler ; άνάσσω, rule ; άνδάνω, please ; 
 άραιός , tender ; άστυ, city; tap, spring [ ver ]; έθνος, swarm, people; 
 είκοσι, twenty [Doric Ρίκατι, Latin viginti\\ ε’ίκω, yield; εϊλω, press; 
 εκητι, willingly; ίκυρός, father-in-law ; έκών, willing; ελττομαι, hope; 
 the pronominal Stem i (to, sui), εοικα, appear; έπος, icord; εϊπον, 
 spoke; ipyov, work; tp -γω, close in; ’ίρρω, go on; Ιρνω, draw; ερεω, 
 shall say; εσθης, clothing; εϊμα, clress (Stem Ρες, Latin vestis) ; ετης , 
 relative; ηδύς, agreeable; "I Χίος, city Ilios; Ισος, equal; οΊκος, house; 
 οΊνος, wine ( vinum ). On the operation of the digamma, see § 63, D., 
 75, D. 
 
 2. The P in the middle occurred in δ'ίς, sheep, from οΡις (Latin ovis) : 
 νη-ός, of the ship, from νάΡος (Latin navis), Gen. of ναΰ-ς. 
 
 3. The Dorians and HColians retained the digamma at the begin¬ 
 ning of many words: JEol. Ρετος, year, Dor. Ρίδιος, own. 
 
 4. In Homer, at the beginning of many words, ε stands for P. ΐε , 
 him, self; εείκοσι, ticenty; είση, equcd; εεδνον, marriage-gift — εδνον. 
 
 § 35. Dialects.—The Dialects vary much in regard to the combi¬ 
 nations of vowels. The Epic and New-Ionic leave many syllables 
 uncontracted: iv — ευ, well; όΐομαι — ο’ίομαι, I think ; ττάίς — παϊς, 
 boy; νόος — νους, sense ; φιλέητε — ψιλήτε ( ametis ) ; διεκων ~ άκων, 
 unwilling. Some of the forms usually uncontracted are, on the 
 
§ 37 . 
 
 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 
 
 11 
 
 combine. The dissimilar vowels pair with one another 
 best: 
 
 1. The soft generally remain unchanged before the hard 
 vowels: σοφία , wisdom ; λύω, I loosen ; ίαύω, I slumber ; 
 νει, it rains / εύνοια, benevolence. 
 
 2. Hard vowels before soft ones become diphthongs: 
 εύ, εν, good ; πάΐς, πάΐς, boy / γένεί, ^ενει, to the race . 
 
 Obs. —Diphthongs sometimes lose their second part before vowels: 
 βον-ός becomes βο-ός ( bov-is ) ; καί-ω , κά-ω, burn. Compare §§ 160, 
 248, Obs. 
 
 § 36. Similar (§ 25) vowels can not well stand together, 
 and hence, when they meet, are often contracted according 
 to the following laws: 
 
 1. Two similar vowels melt into one long vowel: λαας 
 becomes λας, stone / ζηλόω, ζηλώ, I am zealous; Χίίος, 
 Χίος, a Chian; φιλεητε, φιλάτε, ametis, in which cases ε 
 and η, o and ω, are similar. 
 
 Still it must be observed that ε ε usually become a, and 
 oo become ου: ποίεε, ποίει, do / πλόος, πλους, passage by 
 sea. Vowels before a similar one beginning a diphthong 
 disappear: τ τλόον,πλον, of a passage / οικεει, οίκει, dwells / 
 φιλίϊ i, φιλή, amet. 
 
 § 37. 2. Dissimilar vowels form a compound in which 
 
 contrary, contracted in these dialects : Ίρός — ιερός, holy; βώσας = 
 βοησας , one who has called. 
 
 2. The abbreviation in the diphthongs ending in v is explained by 
 this letter first becoming P, and then being quite dropped (compare 
 § 34, D., 2) : βον-ός — βοΡ-ός [ bov-is ] — βο-ός. 
 
 § 37. Dialects.—1. The Dialec ts supply many exceptions. Thus, in 
 New-Ionic especially, εο and εου are contracted into ευ, not into ov : 
 ποι'εομεν, ποιεύμεν , we make ; ποιεουσι , ποιενσι, they make. 
 
 2. In the Ionic dialect, άο ( ηο ) often changes to εω : 'A τρείδαο, ’Ατρεί- 
 δεω, of Atrides ; ϊλαος, 'ΐλεως, merciful, a before ω is often changed 
 into the thinner sound ε : ΤΙοσειδεων = ΐΙοσειδάων, Att. Ποσεώώυ, the god 
 Poseidon. 
 
 3. In Doric, αο, αω, are contracted into ά : Άτρείδαο = ’ Ατρείδα, Ilo- 
 σειδάων — Ποσε<$αυ, Θεάων ( dearum ) —£εάν. 
 
12 
 
 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 
 
 38 . 
 
 a) the obscurer vowel overpowers the clearer (§ 29). 
 Thus from 
 
 ao 
 
 comes 
 
 ω 
 
 in 
 
 τιμάομεν, 
 
 τιμώμεν, ice honor. 
 
 Ί]0 
 
 u 
 
 ω 
 
 ιι 
 
 νη-όδυνος, 
 
 νώδυνος, painless. 
 
 oa 
 
 ll 
 
 ω 
 
 ιι 
 
 αίδόα, 
 
 αιδώ, pudorem. 
 
 οη 
 
 ll 
 
 ω 
 
 ιι 
 
 ζηλόητε, 
 
 ζηΧώτε, ye may he jealous. 
 
 eo 
 
 ll 
 
 ου 
 
 ιι 
 
 γενεος, 
 
 •γένους, of the race. 
 
 oe 
 
 ll 
 
 ου 
 
 ιι 
 
 ζη\οε, 
 
 ζηΧου, he jealous. 
 
 aoi 
 
 ll 
 
 Ψ 
 
 ιι 
 
 άοιδη, 
 
 ιρδή, song. 
 
 aov 
 
 ll 
 
 ω 
 
 ιι 
 
 πμάου , 
 
 τιμώ, he honored. 
 
 ηον 
 
 ll 
 
 ω 
 
 ιι 
 
 μι) ουν, 
 
 μών, surely not. 
 
 eov 
 
 ll 
 
 ου 
 
 ιι 
 
 χρυσίου, 
 
 χρυσοί), of the golden. 
 
 eoi 
 
 ll 
 
 οι 
 
 ιι 
 
 χρυσεοι, 
 
 χρυσοί, the golden. 
 
 oei 
 
 ll 
 
 οι 
 
 ιι 
 
 ζηλόεις, 
 
 ζηΧοίς, thou art jealous. 
 
 ll 
 
 ll 
 
 ου 
 
 ιι 
 
 οίνδεις, 
 
 οίνους, abounding in wine. 
 
 Ol>s. — ou become ου when the a represents the lengthening of e 
 (§ 42 ). 
 
 § 38. l·) When the medium a-sound and clearer e-sound 
 meet, the first in order gains the upper hand : 
 
 ae 
 
 become 
 
 a 
 
 in 
 
 δάκων, 
 
 άκων, unwilling . 
 
 αη 
 
 ιι 
 
 a 
 
 ll 
 
 τιμάητε, 
 
 τιμά,τε, honoretis. 
 
 αει 
 
 ll 
 
 V 
 
 ll 
 
 διείδω, 
 
 αδω, I sing. 
 
 ay 
 
 ll 
 
 V 
 
 ll 
 
 τψάι Ί ς, 
 
 τιμμς, honores. 
 
 εα 
 
 u 
 
 η 
 
 ll 
 
 tap, 
 
 VP, spring. 
 
 εαι 
 
 ll 
 
 V 
 
 ll 
 
 Χύεαι, 
 
 Xvy, thou art loo . 
 
 ηαι 
 
 ll 
 
 V 
 
 ll 
 
 Χύηαι, 
 
 Xvy, soharis. 
 
 Obs. —In the contractions of au and ecu, sometimes ai takes the 
 place of a, a that of y. So from άεικης, unfit, comes αίκης ; from 
 άείρω, I lift up, comes αίρω ; from λυεαι comes λύει (with Xvy). 
 Exceptions, §§ 130,183, 243 (τιμάν), 244. 
 
 § 39. Another mode of treating vowels which meet to¬ 
 gether is called Synizesis ( σννίζησις , i. e., sinking). It con¬ 
 sists in 'the first vowel being written but not pronounced 
 as a vowel: θεός —as one syllable. 
 
 § 39. Dialects. —Synizesis is frequent in Homer, especially after e: 
 Π ηΧηίάδεω, of Pelides ; χρυσεοις, aureis ; via, navem ; also πόΧιας, cities ; 
 oyoooc, the eighth. 
 
43 . 
 
 OTHER VOWEL CHANGES. 
 
 13 
 
 B. Other kinds of Vowel changes. 
 
 § 40. Another change of the vowels consists in their 
 being lengthened Two kinds of lengthening are distin¬ 
 guished, viz.: 
 
 1. Organic lengthening, i. e., that which is required by 
 inflexion or derivation. By organic lengthening— 
 
 a generally becomes η , τιμάω, I honor, Fut. τιμήσω, 
 o always “ ω, ζηλόω, I am jealous. “ ζηλώσω. 
 
 ε 
 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 V, 
 
 ποιίω, I malce, 
 
 l 
 
 either 
 
 a 
 
 h 
 
 τίω, I honor, 
 
 
 or 
 
 a 
 
 ει, 
 
 St. λιπ, 
 
 
 sometimes 
 
 a 
 
 01 , 
 
 u λιπ, 
 
 V* 
 
 V 
 
 either 
 
 a 
 
 V, 
 
 λνω, I loose, 
 
 
 or 
 
 a 
 
 εν, 
 
 St. φυγ , 
 
 ποιήσω. 
 u τίσω ; 
 
 Pres, λείπω, I leave: 
 Adj. λοιπός, remaining. 
 Fut. λύσω ; 
 
 Pres, φεύγω, Ifive. 
 
 § 41. Obs .—After ε, t, and p, a is changed to d instead of η : ίάω, 
 I leave, allow; fut. εάσω ; St. ία, heal; ιατρός, physician; St. ΐφα, 
 see; όραμα, a view. The Attic dialect is altogether averse to the 
 combinations εη, ιη, pi], and frequently puts εά, id, pd in their place. 
 
 § 42. 2. Compensatory lengthening , i. e., that which is 
 used as a compensation for lost consonants. By it a, even 
 when ε, i, or p does not precede, is often changed to a: 
 7 τας, every , from πα-ντ-ς — ε generally becomes ei : Αμί, 
 I am , from \σ-μι (§ 315) — o generally becomes ου : SiSovg 
 for SiSo-vr -ς [Lat. da-n-s] — ΐ always becomes 7, and υ 
 always v : $εικνϋ-ς for 3eiicvu-nr-c, showing. 
 
 Obs .—Exceptions, in which ε becomes η, and o becomes ω, are given 
 in § 147, and in which a becomes ?/ in § 270. 
 
 § 43. The three short hard vowels often interchange in 
 one and the same Stem, when, generally, ε is regarded 
 as the Stem-vowel: τρέπω, I turn ; ετ ραπ ον, I turned / 
 
 § 40. Dialects.—The extension of v to ov appears in είληλουθα, cun 
 come, from Stem ίλνθ (§ 327, 2). 
 
 § 41. Dialects.—The Old and New-Ionic dialect does not avoid the 
 combinations εη, ιη, and ρη : ίτ'εη — Attic <Υέ«, willow ; ίητρός — Attic 
 ιατρός, physician ; πειρησομαι — Attic πειράσομαι, I will try. 
 
 The Doric dialect, on the contrary, regularly lengthens a into « : 
 τιμασω =z τιμήσω, I Will ΙΐΟΆΟΊ' (§ 24, D., 2). 
 
14 
 
 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 
 
 44 . 
 
 τρόπος, turning ; Stem γενες, Nom. ytvog, race [compare 
 Lat. generis, Nom. germs] ; φλέγω, I hum * φλόζ, flame, 
 
 η also is at times changed to ω : αρίρ/ω,Ι help ; αρωγός, 
 
 helper. 
 
 C. Consonants in combination with one another. 
 
 § 44. Consonants, in regard to their combination, are 
 subject to still greater limitation and change than the 
 vowels. Those which are dissimilar (comp. §§ 32, 33) 1 
 agree best with one another, especially the mutes with the 
 liquids. 
 
 That discordant consonants may continue together, they 
 are either made more like one another (assimilated) or more 
 unlike (dissimdated). The essential laws for the necessary 
 changes of consonants are the following: 
 
 O O 
 
 § 45. l. Before mute dentals (§§ 30, 31), only conso¬ 
 nants of other organs which are of the same order (that is, 
 both hard, both soft, or both aspirated, § 32) can stand; 
 consequently, the only allowable combinations of sounds 
 are— κτ, πτ, γδ, βδ, χθ, φθ. 
 
 When a different mute stands before the dental, through 
 inflexion or darivation, it must be assimilated to the order 
 of the latter. Consequently— 
 
 κδ and χδ become γδ. 
 κθ “ γθ “ χθ. 
 γτ “ χτ α κτ. 
 
 πδ and φδ become βδ. 
 
 πθ 
 
 βτ 
 
 α 
 
 u 
 
 βθ 
 
 φτ 
 
 α 
 
 α 
 
 <ρθ. 
 
 πτ. 
 
 Therefore — 
 
 πΧεκ-θηναι becomes πΧεχθηναι, from πΧεκω , I weave. 
 
 Χεγ-τος 
 
 α 
 
 Χεκτύς, 
 
 u 
 
 λέγω, I say 
 
 [ lectus instead of leg-tus\ 
 Χεχθηναι , “ λέγω, I say. 
 
 δεκτός, α δέχομαι, I receive 
 
 \tractus instead of trah-tus , from traho]. 
 τυφθηναι , from τύπτω , I Strike. 
 
 ■ γραπτός , u γράφω , I write, 
 
 γράβδην, u “ “ 
 
 Obs. — The preposition εκ , out of (Lat. ex), remains unchanged in all 
 combinations: εκθεσις, casting out; εκδρομή, running out. 
 
 Χεγ-θηναι 
 
 δεχ-τος 
 
 τνπ-θηναι 
 
 γραφ-τος 
 
 γραφ-δην 
 
 u 
 
 α 
 
 « 
 
 » 
 
 u 
 
48 . 
 
 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 
 
 15 
 
 § 46. 2. Before mute dentals , dentals to be audible 
 
 are changed into σ ( Dissimilation ). Therefore— 
 
 rr, dr, and θτ become στ. 
 
 γΘ, £0, “ θθ “ σθ: hence 
 
 άνυτ-τος becomes άνυστός, accomplished , from άνΰτω, I accomplish. 
 <ρ.δ-τεον “ ρίστεον, canendum est , “ ά'Ζ)ω, I sing, 
 
 πειθ-θηναι “ πει σθήναι, to be persuaded, “ πείθω, I persuade. 
 
 § 47. 3. Before μ a guttural becomes γ, a dental σ, a 
 labial μ. Therefore— 
 
 διωκ-μος becomes διωγμός, persecution, from διώκω, I pursue. 
 
 βεβρεγμαι, I have been wetted , from βρέχω, I wet. 
 ΐσμεν, we Jcnow, from oZt)«, I know. {plish. 
 
 ηννσμαι, I have been perfected, from άνύτω, I accom- 
 πεπεισμενος, persuaded, from πείθω, I persuade, 
 κομμός, a striking, from κόπ-τω, I strike \summus, from 
 siip-mus]. 
 
 τετριμμαι, I have been rubbed, from τρίβω, I rub. 
 
 • γράμμα , letter, from γράφω, I write. 
 
 βε-βρεχ-μαι 
 
 ίδ-μεν 
 
 ηνντ-μαι 
 
 πε-πειθ-μενος 
 
 κοπ-μος 
 
 τε-τριβ-μαι 
 
 γραφ-μα 
 
 u 
 
 U 
 
 α 
 
 α 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 Obs . — Sometimes in derivation the gutturals and dentals remain 
 unchanged : άκμή, bloom; ρυθμός, movement, rhythm; άριθμός, num¬ 
 ber. 
 
 The preposition ίκ leaves its κ unchanged : ίκμάσσω, I wipe out. 
 
 § 48. 4. Before σ, as a hard consonant^ γ and χ become 
 κ, and β becomes π (. Assimilation ): κσ is then written ξ, 
 and πσ ψ. Therefore— 
 
 άγ-σω becomes άκ-σω, written άξ-ω, I shall lead, from άγω, I lead [ rexi 
 
 instead of reg-si, from reg-o\. 
 
 δεχ-σομαι “ δεκ-σομαι, written δεζομαι, I shall receive, from δέχομαι, 
 
 I receive \traxi instead of trait-si, from trah-o]. 
 τριβ-σω “ τριπ-σω, written τρίψω, I shall rub, from τρίβω, I rub 
 
 [scripsi instead of scrib-si, from scrib-o]. 
 γραφ-σω “ γραπ-σω , written γράψω, I shall write, from γράφ-ω, I 
 
 write. 
 
 Obs. —It is clear from § 34 that every κ and π with σ must become 
 
 § 47. Dialects.—The changes of dentals and gutturals before μ is 
 frequently omitted in Ionic: Ίκ-μενος, favorable, from St. ίκ (ίκάνω, I 
 come); άκαχμενος, pointed, from St. άκ (Lat. acuo ); άντμή, breath ; όδμή, 
 smell, from St. οδ {όζω) \od-or\, Att. όσ-μη ; Ίδ-μεν, we blow — Att. Ίσ-μεν; 
 κεκορυθμ'ενος, equipped, from St. κορυθ {κορύσσω) — Att. κεκορυσμενος. 
 
16 
 
 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 
 
 49 . 
 
 ζ and ψ : lienee πλεκ-σω becomes πλέξω, from πλέκω, I weave; 
 λειπ-σω becomes λείψω, from λείπω, I leave. 
 
 § 49. 5. The dentals, when standing separately before σ, 
 are dropped without compensation / in like manner v dis¬ 
 appears before ζ. Therefore— 
 
 άνυτ-σις becomes άννσις, accomplishment, from άνντω, I accomplish, 
 ijd-aopcu “ ησομαι, I shall rejoice, from ηοομαι, I rejoice [laesi for 
 
 laed-si, from laed-o ]. 
 
 κύρνσι, to the helmets, from κάρυα, Gen. κόρν-θος, helmet, 
 ύαίμοσι, to the clccmons, from δαίμων, dmrion. \yolce. 
 σύζυγος, yoked together, from συν, together, and ζυγόν , 
 
 Hence σ before another σ is lost : τειχεσ-σι becomes τείχε-σι, to icalls 
 (from τείχος, wall) ; έσ-σομαι, ε-σομαι. 
 
 κορυθ-σι 
 
 δαιμον-σι 
 
 συν-ζυγος 
 
 u 
 
 U 
 
 U 
 
 Obs. 1.— ν is not always dropped before σ or ζ in composition. In 
 the preposition εν, the v remains for the sake of clearness: εν¬ 
 στάζω, I trickle in ; ένζεύγνυμι, I harness. The v in παν, all, every , 
 and πάλιν, again , either remains unchanged or is assimilated to 
 the following σ'. πάνσοφος, all-wise ; παλίσσυτος, from παλιν- 
 συτος, starting back. The v in συν , with , is dropped before ζ or σ 
 with a consonant following: σύζυγος (see above) ; σύστημα , sys¬ 
 tem; it is assimilated before a simple σ: συσσίτιον, from συν-σιτιον, 
 common meal. 
 
 2. Sometimes v remains unchanged before σ in the 2d Pers. Sing, 
 of the Perf. Mid.: πε-φαν-σαι, thou hast appeared. 
 
 3. In exceptional cases, compensatory lengthening (§ 42) takes place 
 when a single v is omitted : for instance— 
 
 a ) In some Nominatives Sing. : μελά-ς, black, for μελαν-ς. 
 
 b) In the 3d Pers. Plur. of the chief tenses, where σ has taken 
 the place of r: λύ-ου-σι, they loosen, instead of λυ-ον-σι (orig¬ 
 inally λυ-ον-τι ) (§ CO). 
 
 c) Often in derivation : γερουσία, senate, instead of γερόντια , from 
 St. γεροντ, Nom. γέρων, old man. 
 
 § 50. 6. The combinations vr, νθ, vS, are likewise omit¬ 
 ted before σ, but cause a compensatory lengthening (§ 42): 
 
 παντ-σι becomes 7 τάσι, to all, from St. παντ-, Nom. πά-ς. 
 
 τιθεντ-ς “ τιθείς, putting, “ “ τιθεντ. 
 
 γεροντ-σι u γερουσι, to old men, “ α γεροντ, Nom. γέρων. 
 
 § 49. Dialects. — Homer often assimilates a mute to the following σ: 
 TTooTTt— Att, ποσί for ποδ-σι (pedibus). He often preserves one σ before 
 another : εσ-σομαι, I shall be. 
 
51 . 
 
 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 
 
 17 
 
 . ^ (to those ) ^ __ 
 
 δεικνυντ-σι becomes δεικνυσι, λ w j (0 s j ww Y 5 n'om St. δεικννντ , Nom. δεικνν-ς. 
 
 ^Iwillpour]^ 
 
 σπενδ-σω 
 
 πενθ-σομαι 
 
 σπεισω 
 
 ’ ( libations 
 πείσομαι, I shall suffer, 
 
 u σπενδ , Pres, σπένδω. 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 πει-Ό, Pres. 
 
 πάσχω. 
 
 Obs. 1.— vt disappears, without compensation, in the Dat. Plur. of 
 Stems of Adjectives in εντ , Nom. ει-ς : St. χαριεντ , Nom. χαρίεις , 
 Dat. Plur. χαρίε-σι for χαριεντ-σι. 
 
 2.—Of νθ before σ, v remains in ελμιν-ς, tape-worm, instead of k\- 
 μινθ-ς, Stem έλμινθ : Ύίρνν-ς , the city Tiryns , instead of Ύφυνθ-ς, 
 Stem Ύιρυνθ. 
 
 § 505. In later Attic σ is readily assimilated to a preceding p : Old 
 Att. χερσόνησος , New Att. χερρόνησος, peninsula / Old Att. βαρσώ , 
 New Att. θαρρώ, I am courageous. 
 
 § 51. 7. v remains unchanged before mute dentals; it 
 becomes the nasal y before gutturals (§ 4), μ before labials, 
 and is assimilated before liquid consonants: 
 
 σνν-τίθημι , I put together , is unchanged. 
 συν-καΧεω , I call together , becomes σνγκαλέω. 
 
 συν-χρονος , contemporaneous , “ 
 lv -πεφος, experienced , “ 
 
 tv -ψυχος, inspirited , “ 
 
 iv -μετρος, metriccd , “ 
 
 συν-ρεω, I flow together , “ 
 
 σνν-λεγω, I collect , α 
 
 σύγχρονος. 
 
 έμπειρος, from tv and πείρα, proof [so 
 in-peritus becomes im-peritus]. 
 ί'μ-φνχος, from tv and ψνχή, soul, 
 ’έμμετρος, from tv and μετρον, measure 
 [so in-modicus becomes im-mod- 
 icus]. 
 
 συρρέω, from συν and ρέω, I flow [so 
 con-ruo becomes cor-ruo], 
 συλλέγω, from συν and λέγω, / gather 
 [so con-ligo becomes col-ligo]. 
 
 05s. 1.—v in the preposition έν remains unchanged before p: tV- 
 ρνθμος, rhythmical. 
 
 2. — v is combined with p by means of £ in άν-έ>-ρός, Gen. of άνηρ, 
 man. So is μ with p by β in μεσημ-β-ρία , midday, instead of 
 μεσημ(ε)ρια (μέσος and ημέρα, Compare § 61, c). 
 
 § 51. Dialects.— In the Epic dialect β is often inserted between μ 
 and p, and between μ and λ : μέ-μ-β-λωκα, I have gone, from Stem μολ, 
 by metathesis .(§ 59). μ before λ or p becomes β at the beginning of 
 a word: βλώ-σκω,Ι go, Present of the Stem μολ ; βροτός, mortal, for 
 μροτος, from the Stem μρο or /top [mor-ior, mortuus sum]. 
 
18 
 
 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 
 
 § 52. 8. Hard mutes (tenues) unite with a following 
 rough breathing (spiritus asper) into aspirates (χ, Θ, φ) : 
 hence. 
 
 t~' (t -ί) ancl ημέρα, day , become εφήμερος. for a day. 
 
 ctK (cijca) w ημέρα, day , “ c£\i]ytpoc.for ten days, 
 
 ten 
 
 όντ {αντί) w ν—ατος, consul. " άνυύ—ατος, proconsul. 
 
 § 53. 9. At the end of a word, when the following word 
 begins with a spiritus asper, the hard mute is changed into 
 an aspirate: 
 
 οί'χ οίτος, not this , for ονκ οντος. 
 
 άς> εστίας. from the hearth , ά—’ (ά— ό) εστίας. 
 
 καθ’ ημέραν . by day , “ κατ’ {κατά) ήμβοαν. 
 
 Obs . — If another hard mute stands before the one to be aspirated, 
 the first must also be aspirated (§ 45): ί-τά and ημέρα form 
 ές,θή μεοος. for sezen days / νύκτα and ο\ην become ννχ& ολην, totam 
 noctem. 
 
 § 53b. 10. Two svllables immediatelv following one an- 
 other can not both begin with aspirates in the following 
 cases: 
 
 a) In reduplication the corresponding hard mute takes 
 the place of the aspirate: 
 
 κε-χώοηκα for χε-χωοηκα. I haze proceeded , from χωοέω. I j/roceed. 
 τί-θημι “ θι-θημι, I put. 
 
 -έ-ύνκα “ φε-φνκα. I ho.ze become. 
 
 b) The Aorists Passive of the verbal Stems θε ( τίθημι, 
 I put), θυ (θυω, I sacrifice), adopt the same modification: 
 ε-τε-Θην, I was put, for ε-θε-θην ; ε-τύ-θην, I icas sacrificed, 
 for ε-θυ-θην. (Compare § 298.) 
 
 c) In the Imperative of the First Aorist Passive (§ 297), 
 on the contrary, the second aspirate is changed to a tenuis : 
 σώ-θη-τι, be saved, for σω-Θη-θι. 
 
 d) Isolated instances are : αμπεχω, embrace, for αμφεχω ; 
 εκεχειρία, for έχεχειρια, armistice, irom εχειν, to hold, and 
 χείρ, hand. 
 
 § 52 and 53. Dialects.—The aspiration is omitted in New Ionic: 
 ε— ήμερος, for a day ; ά—ίημι, I send away / ονκ οϊτως — ονχ ούτος, not so ς 
 άπ ου, from the tirric when , Att. άφ' ον. 
 
55 . 
 
 OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 
 
 19 
 
 Obs .—Sometimes the spiritus asper is changed to the lenis, be¬ 
 cause the following syllable begins with an aspirate: ϋ-φρα, till, 
 for ύ-φρα, from the relative Stem ΰ (§ 213, 217), έχω for εχω, from 
 
 St. ε'χ (§ 327, 6). 
 
 § 54. Some Stems beginning with r change this letter 
 to Θ when an aspirate at the end can not be retained (§ 45). 
 This happens: 
 
 a) In the Substantive Stem τριχ, whose Nominative is 
 Θρίζ, hair, Dat. Plur. θριζΐ. The other cases are regu¬ 
 lar, formed from the Stem τριχ (Gen. τριχός, Nom. Plur. 
 τρίχις). 
 
 V) In ταχύς, quick, whose comparative is Οάσσων for 
 ταχιών (§ 57 ; compare § 198). 
 
 c) In the following Verbal Stems: 
 ταφ , Pres, θάπτω, I bury, Fut. θάψω, Aor. Pass, ίτάφην , Subs. 
 
 ταφός , grave. 
 
 τρεφ, ‘‘ τρέφω , I nourish , 
 
 Obs .—In the Passive First Aorist (§ 296), and in the Infinitive of 
 the Perf. Mid., the aspirate of the Stem remains unchanged, yet 
 the initial tenuis is aspirated, because the Stem-consonant is 
 not felt to be necessarily an original aspirate, as it might have 
 been modified by the influence of the Θ after it (§ 45) : Ιθρεφθην, 
 τεθράφθαι. 
 
 D. Other changes of Consonants and Vowels in the 
 
 middle of a Word. 
 
 § 55. Important changes of sounds are produced by the 
 modifications of the soft vowel i in connection with conso¬ 
 nants (compare §§ 186, 198, 199, 250-253). Frequently, 
 for instance, 
 
 1. i after v or p is put a syllable farther back, where it 
 forms a diphthong with the preceding vowel. Hence, 
 
20 
 
 OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 
 
 56 . 
 
 τείνω, from 
 
 τεν-ιω, I stretch, 
 
 St. τεν [ tendo ]. 
 
 μαίνομαι, α 
 
 μαν-ιομαι, I rage, 
 
 “ μαν. 
 
 άμείνων, u 
 
 άμεν-ιων, better, 
 
 u άμεν. 
 
 κείρω, α 
 
 κερ-ιω, I shear, 
 
 “ κερ. 
 
 δότειρα, 
 
 δοτερ-ια, the giver 
 
 , fem. α δοτερ (οοτηρ, giver). 
 
 χειρων, 
 
 χερ-ιων, worse, 
 
 “ Χψ- 
 
 § 56. 2. ι is assimilated to a 
 
 preceding λ : 
 
 μάλλον , from μάλ-ίον , more , from μά\α, much, 
 ίίλλομαι , “ άλ-ιομαι , / spring, St. άλ [salio]. 
 
 Άλλος, “ άλ-ως, another [alius]. 
 στίΧλω, u στελ-ιω, I send, St. στελ. 
 
 § 57. 3. Gutturals (r and 0 less frequently) coalesce 
 with a following l to σσ (New Att. rr): 
 
 ησσων, from ηκ-ιων, less, St. ?)jc, SUperl. ήκιστα, 
 
 θρασσα, u θρακ-ια , Thracian , fern. (masc. Οραζ), St. θρρκτ. 
 τάσσω, u ταγ-ιω, I arrange, St. ray. 
 
 ελάσσων, “ ελαχ-ιων, smaller, u ελαχ, SUperl. ελάχιστος. 
 
 Κρησσα, “ Kjor;r-ia, Cretan, fem. (masc. Kp/fe), St. Kppr. 
 
 κορόσσω, u κορυθ-ιω, I arm, St. κορνθ (κόρνς, helmet). 
 
 § 58. 4. δ and sometimes γ coalesce with a following t 
 to ζ. 
 
 εζομαι, from εδ-ιομαι, I sit, St. εδ (το εδος, the seat), 
 κράζω, “ κραγ-ιω, I cry , u κραγ (Perf. κε-κράγ-α). 
 
 Other changes of Sounds core: 
 
 § 59. 1 . Transposition (μετάθεσις), which most frequent¬ 
 ly occurs with λ, p, also with μ and v: 
 
 θράσος , together with θάρσος, boldness. 
 
 θρώσκω, from the St. θορ, I spring, Second Aorist εθορον. 
 
 βε-βλη-κα, “ βαλ, I have thrown , “ “ εβαλον. 
 
 τε-θνη-κα, “ θαν, I am dead, u “ εθανον. 
 
 τ-μή-σις, α τεμ, a cut, Pres, τέμνω, I cut. 
 
 Obs. —In the last four examples the vowel is moreover lengthened. 
 
 § 50. Dialects.—Transposition is more frequent in the Homeric dia¬ 
 lect (compare § 295, D.) : καρτεράς and κρατερός, strong / κάρτιστος — 
 Att. κράτιστος, the strongest , from κράτος, strength ; τραπ-είομεν (compare 
 § 295, D.) for ταρπ-είομεν, we desire to rejoice, St. τερττ (τερττομαι). So 
 also in εδράκον, I saw , St. δερκ ( δίρκομαι ); επραθον, I destroyed, St. περθ 
 ( π'ερθω ). Ilomer : άταρπάς ~ Att. άτράττός, path. 
 
62. 
 
 OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 
 
 21 
 
 § 60. 2. The weakening of single consonants. The most 
 important weakenings are: 
 
 a) The very frequent one, especially before l, of r to σ : 
 
 αναισθησία , leant of feeling , for άναισθητια , from άναίσθητος , without 
 feeling. 
 
 φάσί for (pavri , they say. 
 
 On the rejection of n and the compensation for it, which 
 frequently occur in this case, see § 49, Obs. 3, c/ compare 
 § 187. 
 
 b) The Aveakening of initia l σ before vowels to the spir- 
 itus asper: 
 
 νς , swine , together with συς. Compare Lat. su-s. 
 
 'ί-στη-μ i for σι-στη-μι , / pfece. Compare Lat. si-sfo (§§ 308, 327, 5, G). 
 
 § 61. 3. The entire rejection of sounds. The following 
 cases are important: 
 
 a) σ is rejected where it would have to stand between 
 two consonants in inflexion: 
 
 γεγράφ-θαι for γεγραφ-σθαι , to he written , St. γραφ , Pres, γράφω, 
 τετνφ-θε “ τε-τνφ-σθε , be ye struck , u ri/7r, “ τύπτω. 
 
 l·) σ between t^vo A’OAvels is very often rejected: 
 
 λεγε-αι, Xsyy (§ 38), for λεγεσαι, thou art said , St. λεγ, Pres. λέγω. 
 idvva-o , εύύνω, for εύύνασο, thou couldst , Pres, δύναμαι, 
 γενε-ος for γενεσος, e /’ the race , St. γενεσ (§ 166). 
 
 c) The rejection of a A r OAvel betAveen consonants in the 
 middle of a word is called syncope (συγκοττρ) : ε-7 ττ-6-μην 
 for ε-7 τετ-ο-μην, Iflew , St. ττ ε r (§ 326, 34). Compare § 51, 
 Obs. 2. 
 
 § 62. 4. The doubling of a consonant. This is rare, 
 
 § 60. Dialects.—The Dorians retain r: φαντί=φάσί(ν), they say. The 
 older Att. less frequently: τημερον = σήμερον , to-day. 
 
 § 61. Dialects.—Syncope is more frequent in Homer: τίπτε for τίποτε , 
 why ever ? why ? Ικεκλετο — ί-κε-κε\ετο : he called , St. κε\. 
 
 § 62. Dialects.—In Homer simple consonants are readily doubled; 
 the mutes more rarely: οππως — Attic 'όπως, how; ΰπποίος = Attic 
 ΰττοίΟΓ, quahs; ύττι — xVttic ur<, that; the \ T ocal consonants often: 
 
22 CHANGES AT THE END OF WORDS. § 63. 
 
 when it has not arisen through the assimilations men¬ 
 tioned above (§§ 47, 505, 51, 56). The liquid p is the 
 most frequently doubled: ϊρρΊφα for ψΊφα, I hurled / 
 άρρηκτος for α-ρηκτος, not breakable. The aspirates can 
 be doubled only by the corresponding tenuis: Βάκχος, 
 "ΣαπφίΛ), Ατθις. 
 
 E. Changes of Sound at the end of a Word. 
 
 § 63. When a word ending in a vowel is followed by 
 another beginning with a vowel, whether accompanied by 
 a spiritus lenis or asper, there is a hiatus. The Greeks 
 very often suffer the hiatus in prose ; but frequently the 
 hiatus is avoided, especially if the first word is a shorter 
 one and of itself of little importance. This is done in 
 three ways, that is, either by elision (rejection of the final 
 vowel), or by erasis (contraction of the two vowels), or by 
 synizesis (collapse of two syllables into one). 
 
 ίλλα/3ε = Attic ’έλαβε , he took; φιλομμειδης = Attic φιλομειδης, readily 
 smiling / ευννητος ~ Attic ευ-νητος, well-woven ; 'άσσον := Attic οσον, how 
 great,' νεκυσσι — Attic νεκυσι , to the corpses ; όπίσσω — Attic όττίσω, 
 hack. On the contrary, Homer sometimes has a single p where 
 the Attic has double: ώκυροος = ιοκνρροος , swift-flowing. Often also 
 both forms are usual together: Άχιλεύς and Άχιλλεύς , Όδνσεύς and 
 ’Οδνσσενς. 
 
 § 63. Dialects.—The Homeric dialect admits the hiatus in many 
 cases: the most important are: 
 
 1. The hiatus is only apparent in words with the digamma: κατά 
 οίκον for κατά ΡοΊκον , at home. 
 
 2. It is allowed after weak vowels in forms with which elision is 
 not usual: παιδί οπασσεν, he gave to the son. 
 
 3. It is softened by a pause or a caesura after the first short syllable 
 of the third foot: κάθησο , εμψ δ’ επιπείθεο μνθψ, sit down , and obey my 
 wo 7 'd; τών oi εξ εγένοντο ivi μεγάροισι, of which six were born to him in 
 the chambers. 
 
 4. A long vowel or diphthong before another in the thesis be¬ 
 
 comes short, and causes only an improper or weak hiatus: Άτρείδαί 
 τε καί άλλοι tv κν η μίδες ’Αχαιοί , Ye Atridcc 'and ye other well-greaved 
 Admans w w "". Compare § 75, D., 2. 
 
65 . 
 
 ELISION.—CRASIS. 
 
 23 
 
 § 64. l. Elision , or the rejection of the final vowel, 
 of which the apostrophe (§ 15) is the sign, occurs only 
 with short final vowels, but never with υ ; most frequent¬ 
 ly at the end of dissyllabic prepositions, conjunctions, and 
 adverbs: hr αντίο , with him , for επι αυτιρ ; ovS' iSvvaro, 
 he could not even , αλλ’ ή\θεν, hut he came / less fre¬ 
 quently at the end of nouns and verbs : oi πάντ αναγ¬ 
 γέλλοντας, i. e., oi ττάντα ugayytWovTsg, who reported the 
 whole. 
 
 Ohs. 1.—The prepositions περί, round, άχρι and μέχρι, till, and the 
 conjunction on, that, never suffer elision. 
 
 2. In compounds also the elision occurs, without, however, being 
 indicated by the apostrophe : ίπ-ερχομαι , from ίιη-έρχομαι, I come 
 Up/ but περιέρχομαι, I go round. 
 
 3. On the change of consonants occurring with elision (If ήμερα), 
 see § 52. 
 
 \ 
 
 § 65. 2. Crasis ( κρασις , mixing) is governed, on the 
 
 § 64. Dialects.—Elision is much more frequent with the poets than 
 in prose; thus, not only ε and i even in nominal and verbal forms 
 are elided, but also the diphthongs «ι and ci, in the verbal termina¬ 
 tions μαι, σαι, ται, σθαι, and in the forms μοι and τοι. In Homer, i in 
 on, that , is also sometimes elided. 
 
 A change of the final vowel, occurring only in poets, is the apocope 
 (αποκοπή). It is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word 
 beginning with a consonant. The apocope is frequent in Homer with 
 the prepositions άνά, κατά , παρά , and with the conjunction άρα, note, 
 seldom with άπό and υπό : it takes place in compounds as well as 
 at the meeting of two separate words. The v of άν(ά) then suffers 
 the changes described in § 51; the τ of κατ(ά), the π of άπ(6) and 
 νπ(6), are made like the following consonant: άνδύεται = αναδύεται, 
 emei'ges/ κάπ πεδίον — κατά πεδίον, on the plain/ κάλλιπε = κατελιπε, left 
 behind; πάρθετο — παρεβετο,ρία before/ άππεμψειζζζ άποπεμψει, will send 
 away/ κατθανείν — καταθανεΊν, die. 
 
 § 65. Dialects.—Crasis in Homer is very rare, but very frequent in 
 the Attic poets: e. g., ούξ = ύ ίζ, κώδύρεται =καί οδύρεται, and laments / 
 ώναζ — ώ άναξ, Ο hing / χώ-τόσοι — και οιτόσοι, and how many . — Herod. 
 ω\λοι=οι άλλοι, the rest. The loss of a short initial vowel is sometimes 
 indicated by the apostrophe (§ 15): μή γώ = μή εγώ, ne ego/ ήδη 
 ’ξίρχεται — ήδη εξέρχεται, he is already coming out. 
 
24 
 
 SYNIZESIS. 
 
 66. 
 
 whole, by the laws given for contraction (§ 36-39). It 
 occurs chiefly after forms of the article, of the relative 
 pronoun (especially o, quod, and a, quae), after the prep¬ 
 osition προ, for, before, Latin pro, and the conjunction 
 καί, and. The syllable produced by crasis is necessarily 
 long. The sign of crasis is the coronis (§ 16): τάγαθά, 
 bona, from τα αγαθά ; τάλλα, from τά άΧλα, the other things / 
 τουνομα, the name, from το άνομα ; ταυτό, the same, for ro 
 αυτό. 
 
 Obs. 1.—The rough breathing of the article or relative maintains 
 its place in spite of crasis: άνήρ, the man, irregular for ύ άνηρ, in 
 which case the coronis disappears; in θοΐμάτιον , from τό ίμάτιον , 
 the dress, the spiritus asper has changed r into Θ (§ 52) ; so also 
 θάτερον, irregular for το 'έτερον , the other. 
 
 2. The new syllable, formed by crasis, has i subscript only when i 
 is the last of the contracted vowels: και tv, and in, becomes καν, 
 but και είτα, and then, becomes κατα. 
 
 On the accent with crasis, § 80. 
 
 § 66. 3. Synizesis ( 'sinking, compare § 39) occurs at the 
 meeting of two words only after a long vowel, especially 
 after the conjunctions Ιπεί, as, η, or, rj, num, μη, not, and 
 after εγώ , I: εττει ου, as not / yrjfXXoi, ne alii / lyiopv, I 
 not. It is perceptible only in the poets, who reckon the 
 two syllables as one. 
 
 § 67. No Grech word ends-in any consonant except the 
 vocal ones, v, p, and ς· (ξ, ψ). The only exceptions are : 
 the negative ovk (before consonants ου) and the preposition 
 εκ, oitt tf/* (before vowels εξ), which attach themselves so 
 closely to the following word that their κ can hardly be 
 looked upon as final. 
 
 When any other consonant, except these three, appears 
 at the end of a word, it is usually rejected : 
 
 μέλι, honey (met), for μ ελίτ (Gen. μίλιτ-ος ) 
 σώμα, body, “ σωματ (Gen. σώματ-ος ) 
 
 ήσαν, they tcere , “ ήσαντ ^compare Lat. erant). 
 
 I compare § 147Z>. 
 
MOVABLE CONSONANTS. 
 
 25 
 
 § 68 . 
 
 But mute Dentals in this cclaj are often changed into 
 \ r ocal ς : 
 
 7 τρός for 7 rpor, from ττροτί , to (Horn.). 
 
 £ός “ οοθ, “ ^οθι, gwe. 
 τέρας α rtpar, Gen, τέραΓ-ος, wiracfc. 
 
 § 68. Certain words and forms have, after a short vowel 
 at the end, a movable v (v εφελκυσηκόν). This v is used 
 before words which begin with a vowel—by which the 
 hiatus is avoided — and before longer pauses. Poets em¬ 
 ploy it also before consonants, especially at the end of the 
 word, to make it more sonorous. 
 
 The words and forms which have a movable v are the 
 following: 
 
 1. The Dat. Plur. in σι(ν): πασιν ίΰωκα, I gave to ally 
 but 7 τάσι Soksi ούτως είναι, to all it seems to be SO. 
 
 2. The designations of place in σι(ν): Άθήνησιν ην,Ιιβ 
 was at Athens / but ΆΘηνησι roSs εγενετο, this happened 
 at Athens. 
 
 3. The single words εικοσι{ν), twenty ; ιτερνσι(ν), last 
 year; and τταντάττασι(ν), entirely y είκοσιν άντρες, twenty 
 men j but εΐκοσι ^γυναίκες, twenty women. 
 
 4. The third person Sing, in ε(ν) : ίσωσεν αυτονς, he 
 saved them · but ίσωσε τους Αθηναίους, he saved the 
 A thenians. 
 
 5. The third person Plur. as well as Sing. in at(v) : Χε- 
 yovaiv εύ, they spealc well, but Xiyovai τούτο, they say thisy 
 δείκνυσιν εκεισε, he points there, but δ είκνΰσι τον avSpa, he 
 points out the man. 
 
 § G 8 . Dialects.—To tlie words which have a movable v there arc 
 added in Homer the adverbs of place in θε(ν) : avsv6t(v),frorn (far; 
 7τάρ οιθε(ν), from before,formerly ; the particles κέ(ν), perhaps, and vv(v), 
 now. 
 
 The New-Ionic dialect, which admits the immediate succession of 
 vowels, omits the movable v. On the κ in ovk before a spiritus asper, 
 
 § 52, D. 
 
 B 
 
26 
 
 DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 
 
 69 . 
 
 § 09. Ohs. 1.—In like manner, ου, not, takes κ only before vowels, 
 which becomes χ before the spiritus asper (§ 52) : ον ψησι, he says 
 not ; obic. αυτός, not lie himself / ούχ όντως, not so. The <c appears 
 also in ουκετι ancl μηκετι, no more. 
 
 2. εκ, out of, is εξ before vowels (Lat. ex) : εκ της πόλεως, out of the 
 city ; εξ άκροπύλεως, out of the acropolis or castle ; εκλεγώ, I speah 
 out; εξελεγον, I spoke out. 
 
 3. Without any definite reason, the words ούτως , thus (adverb of 
 οντος , this), άχρις, μεχρις, till, very frequently lose their final ς ; but 
 ττολλάκις, many times, loses it only in the poets. 
 
 Ciiap. IV.—Division of Syllables and their 
 
 Quantity. 
 
 A. Division of Syllables. 
 
 § 70. The Syllables ( συλλαβή , collection) in Greek words 
 are divided according to the following rules. Every vowel 
 which stands before another, but does not form a diph¬ 
 thong with it, or collapse with it by synizesis (§ 39), is 
 reckoned a separate syllable : Ι-ατρός, physician , trisyl¬ 
 labic. 
 
 § 71. A consonant which stands between two vowels 
 belongs to the second syllable: t -χει, has ; ου-τος, this ; 
 ί-κα-νός , capable. 
 
 Two or more consonants usually belong to the fol¬ 
 lowing vowel: α-πλους, Simple / α-ρι-στε-ρός, on the left 
 handy ΐ-σ\ον, I had; ά-μνος, lamb ; Ι-χΟρός, inimical ; 
 likewise double consonants: ύ-ψο-μαι, I shall see; ϊ-ζω, 
 
 I place. 
 
 § 72. Exceptions. 1. Liquids and nasals join the pre¬ 
 ceding vowel: αρ-μα, carriage ; αΰελ-φυς, brother; koj- 
 χά?ω, I laugh ; t'v-Sov , within / άμ-φω, both , amibo. μν 
 only join the following vowel: κά-μνω, I suffer. 2. When 
 a consonant is doubled, the first belongs to the preceding, 
 the second to the following syllable : 'ίπ-ττος, horse ; βάλ¬ 
 λω, T throw j Π υρ-ρος. The same takes place when aspi- 
 
QUANTITY. 
 
 27 
 
 δ 7G 
 
 rates follow the corresponding tenues: Άτ-Οίς, Βακ-χος, 
 Σ,απ-φω. 
 
 § 73. Compounds are divided into the elements out of 
 which they are formed: σνν-εχω , I hold' together / ϊΐξ-άγω, 
 I drive out. 
 
 B. Quantity 
 
 § 74. With regard to the quantity (length or shortness) 
 of syllables, the same rules, in general, hold good for the 
 Greek as for the Latin. An important exception, how¬ 
 ever, consists in one vowel before the other not needing to 
 be short in Greek: Οωη, penance ; λαός, people / βέλτΐον, 
 better. Nor do the special Latin rules for final syllables 
 hold good in Greek. 
 
 § 75. A syllable is long by nature when it contains 
 a long vowel or diphthong: ϋμείς, you ; κρίνω, I decide / 
 ζι8ω, I sing. The recognition of quantity in Greek is ren¬ 
 dered much easier by the characters: 8όμος, room , house / 
 8ωμα, house; in other cases by the accent (§§ 83, 84); 
 the rest can be learned only by practice and from the 
 lexicon. 
 
 Ohs. —Every contracted syllable must, of course, be long: άκων , un¬ 
 willing — «6κωΐ', ϊρός = οός, holy. 
 
 § 76. A syllable is long by position when a vowel is fol- 
 
 § 74. Dialects.—Diphthongs and long vowels are very seldom short¬ 
 ened before vowels in the same word: Horn, οϊος (quails w v ), and /3b 
 βληαι , with short η. 
 
 § 75. Dialects.—1. The quantity of the common vowels is very un¬ 
 certain generally, but especially in Horn. ’ ϊωμεν , let us go ; Ίρες, "A ρες, 
 0 Ares, Ares. 
 
 2. A final syllable ending in a long vowel or diphthong in Homer 
 and the tragic choruses is shortened before a following vowel : οίκοι 
 ί’σαν, they were at home ήμενη tv, sitting in (" v v “). Compare 
 
 § 63, D. 4. But those words which began with digamma (§ 34, D.) 
 leave a preceding vowel long in Horn. : κάλλεΐ re στίλβω v καί εΐμασιν 
 (' v “ ), glittering with beauty ancl garments. 
 
28 
 
 QUANTITY. 
 
 77. 
 
 lowed by two or more consonants, or a double consonant, 
 whether— 
 
 a) both consonants or the double consonant stand in the 
 same word: χάρμα, joy β^)', 'έζις, mien ("°); Κάστωρ(~~); or 
 
 l·) the first concludes the first word, and the rest begin 
 the second: θεός $έ, hut God (j~j\ h τούτω, meanwhile 
 
 Γ'·); or 
 
 e) both or the double consonant stand at the beginning 
 of the second word: τά κτήματα, the goods (~~ ww ); ο ζών, 
 the living one (" "). 
 
 Obs .—When the vowel thus placed is already long by nature, this 
 must be indicated in the pronunciation: the a in πράσσω,Ι act, 
 sounds differently from that of τάσσω, I arrange , though both 
 words make a spondee in verse; that in μάλλον different from 
 that of κάλλος, beauty, though both form a trochee. 
 
 § 77. When a vowel short by nature stands before a 
 mute with λ, p, v, μ following, the syllable may be long or 
 short: τέκνου, child (“ w ) ; τυφλός, blind (~ w ) ; τι Up ας, what 
 art thou doing (- j ? 
 
 The syllable, however, is necessarily long in the follow¬ 
 ing cases: 
 
 § 78. a) when the mute stands at the end of the first, 
 the liquid or nasal at the beginning of the second word: 
 εκ νηών, Old of the ships ( ) ; and in compounds in which 
 
 the mute belongs to the first element: εκλέγω, I speech out 
 
 C“-); 
 
 b) when a soft mute (β, γ, δ) is followed by λ, μ, or v : 
 βίβλος, booh (j *) ; τάγμα, tash (~ w ) ; εχιδνα, snake (j ~ j· 
 
 § 77. Dialects.—In Homer, a mute with λ, p, v, μ following, almost 
 regularly makes position : τεκνον τί κλαίεις, child, why weepest thou 
 ( ) ϊ ύπνος πανδαμάτωρ, all-subduing sleep ( w v ~). Hay, even 
 
 λ, p, v, μ, at the beginning of words, have often the power of length¬ 
 ening the short final vowel of the preceding word: καλήν τε μεγάλη v 
 τε, a beautiful and great ( ww " w ). δ in the Stem δει (δείσαι), fear, 
 and in δην, long, has the same effect. 
 
83. 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 29 
 
 Chap. V.—Accents. 
 
 § 79. The general rules for the accentuation of words 
 
 are the following: 
 
 l. Every word must have one , and can never have move 
 
 than one principal accent, which is called simply the ac¬ 
 cent : πολυπρα^/μοσυνη, busy occupation ’ απαρασκεύαστος, 
 unprepared . On the designation of words according to 
 the accent, see §§ 17, 19, 21. 
 
 § 80. 2. There are two kinds of accents, the sharp ac¬ 
 cent or the acute (οξεία), and the lengthened or the cir¬ 
 cumflex ( περισπωμένη ). On the mode of using both, see 
 
 § 81. 3. The acute may be upon long or short syllables, 
 the circumflex only upon such syllables as are long by 
 nature: as, λέγω, I say; Xy)yw, I cease ; καλός, beautiful; 
 
 αληθης, true · άνθρωπος, man ; κείμενος, lying; κεϊται, he 
 lies; σώμα, body; εν, well. 
 
 § 82. 4. The acute accent can be only on one of the last 
 three syllables, and on the last but tw T o only when the last 
 is short : αποικος , colonist, but not αποικον (Gen.); ελεγοι», 
 I said, but not ελεγην, 1 was said. 
 
 § 83. 5. The circumflex can be only on one of the last 
 two syllables, and on the last but one only when the last 
 is short by nature: avKov,fig, but not σνκου (Gen.); σώμα , 
 body, but not σώματος (Gen.) ; πραζις, act, but not πραζεις 
 (Nom. Plur.). 
 
 Ohs. 1.—When the last syllabic is long by position, it does not 
 hinder the circumflex from being on the last syllable but one: 
 αύλάζ , furrow , Gen. ανλάκος , but it does when it is long by na¬ 
 ture as well as by position: Θώραξ, hr east-plate, Gen. θώράκος. Com¬ 
 pare § 145. 
 
 2. Exceptions to 4 and 5 will be adduced separately in the chap¬ 
 ters on inflexions. It is specially to be observed that most of 
 
30 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 84. 
 
 the exceptions occur with the final syllables in cci and οι : ά-τοικοι, 
 although ot is long; γνώμαι, opinions ; τύπτεται, he is struck. Com¬ 
 pare §§ 108,122 D. 3, 133,157, 229, 2G8. 
 
 i § 84. 6. A last syllable but one, when long by nature, 
 can have no other accent but the circumflex if the last is 
 short by nature: φεύγε, flee, not φεύγε ; ηρχον, I reigned, 
 not νρχον ; η\ϊζ, of the same age, not τ)λίξ (Gen. Ίΐλϊκος) ; 
 K ρατΊνος, not K ρατίνος. It may, however, be without an 
 accent : είπε, sjoeah y ανθρυ>7τος, man. 
 
 Ohs. 1.—Apparent exceptions, such as ώστε , so that , 1}δε, this , are ex¬ 
 plained in § 94. 
 
 2. So fixed is the rule, apart from these cases, that the quantity of 
 the final syllable, or of the last but one, may often be inferred 
 from the accent: Ίθι (<), ( jo ; πρώτα \prima, Nom. Plur.] («); γυ¬ 
 ναίκας (a), women , Acc. Plur.; γνώμας (a), opinions , Acc. Plur. 
 
 § 85. 7. Compound words have the accent on the last 
 part but one of the word, as far as is possible according to 
 § 82, etc.: άττιθι, go away; άφιλος, friendless ; φιλόγυνος, 
 friendly to women / από^ος, give hack; τταρένθες, put in 
 besides. (Compare § 359, Obs. 2.) 
 
 § 86. The accent of a word is variously altered by the 
 changes which a word undergoes, as well as by the con¬ 
 nexion of a word with others in a sentence. That is: 
 
 1. Every oxytone subdues its sharp tone when followed 
 by another word, so that the grave takes the place of the 
 acute. (Compare § 20.) 
 
 § 87. 2. In a contraction in the middle of a word, the 
 syllable produced by contraction acquires no accent if 
 none of the syllables to be contracted had it: γένεος, γέ¬ 
 νους, of the race y τίμαε,τίμα, honor. The accent of a con¬ 
 tracted last syllable but one is manifest of itself from the 
 general rules on accent; hence τιμώντες, honoring (Nom. 
 Plur.), from τιμάοντες, τιμώντων (Gen. Plur.), from τιμαον- 
 των (according to §§ 83 and 84). A contracted final syl¬ 
 lable has 
 
ACCENTS. 
 
 § 91. 
 
 O -I 
 
 ο I 
 
 a) the circumflex , when the first of the uncontracted 
 syllables was accented: τιμάει, τιμά, he honors j χρυσίου, 
 χρυσόν, of (jolden ; 
 
 V) the acute, when the last was accented: ίσταώς, ίστώς, 
 standing. 
 
 § 88. 3. With elision (§ 64), oxytone prepositions and 
 conjunctions entirely lose their accent; all other kinds of 
 words throw it upon the previous syllable as acutes: επ 
 αυτω, on llWl — hri αυτω ; ούδ’ ε^υνάμην, Tcould not even — 
 ούδε ε^υνάμην ; είμ ΌΕνσευς, lam Odysseus — ειμι Όονσενς’, 
 ετττ ησαν, there were seven — επτά, η σαν. 
 
 § 89. 4. With crasis (§ 65) the accent of the first word 
 is lost: Tcn /αθά, bona — τα ayaOa ; Θο'ιμάτιον, the dress — το 
 ίμάτιον. Only when paroxytones change the first sylla¬ 
 ble by crasis into one long by nature, this receives a cir¬ 
 cumflex : τα aXXa, alia , gives τάΧΧα ; το tpyov, the work , 
 Tovpyov. 
 
 On tlie changes of the accent in declension, see §§ 107-109; on the 
 accent of verbs, see §§ 229, and 331-333.. 
 
 § 90. The dissyllabic pr expositions, with the exception 
 of άμφί, αντί, ανά, $ιά, when placed after the noun or verb 
 to which they belong, throw their accent on to the first 
 syllable : τούτων περί, about those (περί τούτων ) ; in like 
 manner, when used adverbially, they include the substan¬ 
 tive \'erb, as πάρα = πάρεστι, it is there , near; ενι — ενεστι, 
 it is therein , is possible. This drawing back of the accent 
 is called anastrophe. Compare § 446. 
 
 § 91. Some words of one and of two syllables unite so 
 closely with the preceding word that they throw their ac¬ 
 cent on to it. Such words are called enclitics (iy κλιτικαϊ 
 
 § 90. Dialects.—Prepositions, whose final syllable is lost by elision, 
 have not the accent even when, they occupy the position indicated 
 in § 90. Homeric τ$σι παρ’ είνάετες χάλκευαν, among them I forged nine 
 years long. 
 
EXCLITICS. 
 
 32 
 
 § 92. 
 
 λέξεις, i. e., inclining words), and the throwing hack of the 
 accent is called inclination . 
 
 § 92. The following are enclitics : 
 
 1. The indefinite pronoun Ας, A, some one, something, 
 through all forms (§ 214). 
 
 2. The three personal pronouns, in the forms μου, μοί, 
 μέ, mei, mihi, me ; σου, σοί, σέ, tui, tibi, te ; ού, οί, έ, sui , 
 
 se/ σφω'ιν, to them two ; and σφίσι(ν), to them . 
 
 3. The Indicative Present of ciyuf, I am, and of φημί, 
 inguam, with the exception of the second Pers. Sing. A 
 and φ\ις. 
 
 4. The indefinite adverbs τ του or ποθί, somewhere ; πη, 
 somehoio ; ποί, somewhither ; ποβέν, from somewhere ; 
 ποτέ, sometime ; πως, somehow ; πω, yet . 
 
 5. The particles y£, guidem ; τέ, / rob truly; νυν 
 or νυ, now ; Horn, κέν or id,perhaps, I suppose ; pa {apa), 
 then; Horn. Θην, truly; πέρ, very; and Se (meaning to¬ 
 ward, and as a demonstrative appendage). Compare § 212. 
 
 § 93. These words throw their accent back on the pre¬ 
 ceding word, in the following manner: 
 
 a) A preceding oxytone leaves its sharp tone unsubdued 
 (§ 20), and this then serves also for the enclitic: ayaOov 
 τι, something good; αυτός φησιν, he himself says. 
 
 b) After a perispome the accent of the enclitic is entirely 
 lost: όρώ τινας,Τ see some; ευ εστιν,ίί is well; τιμώ σε, 
 I honor thee. 
 
 c) After a par oxytone, enclitics of one syllable entirely 
 lose their accent; but those of two syllables retain their 
 accent on the last syllable: φίλος μου, my friend ; λόγος 
 τις, a speech ; but λόγοί τινές, some speeches, λόγων τινών 
 (Gen. Plur.). 
 
 § 92. Dialects.—The Ionic additional form of εί = ε!ς, is enclitic, so 
 also σφίας (Acc. Plur.), them — Att. σφάς, and μίν, him , her, § 205, D. 
 
ENCLITICS. 
 
 33 
 
 § 97. 
 
 d ) Projparoxytones and properispomes retain their ac¬ 
 cent, but receive also from the following enclitic another 
 accent as acute on the last syllable, which remains unsub¬ 
 dued: άνθρωπός τις, a man / βέβαιοι εισιν, they are firm · 
 σώμα γε, the body at least / παΊ^ές τινες, some boys. 
 
 e) Atona (§ 97) receive tlie accent of following enclitics as acutes: 
 ου friaiv, he says not: ως re, and how. 
 
 § 94. Ohs. —Several words of one syllable form one word with en¬ 
 clitics following: thus, ώςτε, so that; είτε, sire; ου re, neqiie; μήτε , 
 neque; οΐόςτε, capable ; οςτις, whoever ; ήτοι, truly; καίτοι, and yet ; 
 to this also belongs the U mentioned in § 92, 5: ode, this one; 
 ohcade, homewards. These words form partly apparent exceptions 
 to §§ 79 and 84. 
 
 § 95. f) When several enclitics follow one another, eacli 
 throws its accent upon the preceding: a τις μοί φησί ποτέ, 
 
 if any one ever says to me. 
 
 4 
 
 § 96. The enclitics in certain cases retain their accent 
 
 V 
 
 (become orthotoned), viz. : 
 
 1. when an enclitic forms the first word in the sen¬ 
 tence, and therefore has nothing on which to throw its 
 accent: πνϊς Xtyovai, some say. This position, however, 
 is rare. 
 
 2. when an enclitic is made emphatic: σε Xtyoj, I mean 
 yo u—no one else · el ίστιν, if it is really so. When ίστι 
 denotes exist , be allowed , possible , it retains the accent, 
 and that, too, on the last syllable but one : ίστι θεός, there 
 is a God ; ουκ εστιν, it is not allowed , not possible. Com¬ 
 pare § 315, Obs. 2. 
 
 3. After elision : ταντ Ίστι ψευ$ή, this is false — ταντά 
 Ιστι iptvdri. 
 
 4. Enclitics of two syllables, in the case mentioned 
 § 93, c. 
 
 § 97. Atona, i. e., words without accent, also called pro¬ 
 clitics, or inclining forward, are several words of one syl- 
 
 B 2 
 
34 
 
 ΑΤΟΝΑ. 
 
 98. 
 
 lable, which have so little independence that, in regard to 
 accent, they combine with the following word. 
 
 They are the following : 
 
 1. of the article, the forms o, ?/, oi, at ; 
 
 2. the prepositions, εν (in, with the Dat.), ες* or εις (into, 
 with the Acc.), εκ or εξ, out of / 
 
 3. the conjunctions, εί, if, and ώς, hoio,that / the latter 
 also in its use as preposition to ‘ 
 
 4. the negative ov or ουκ (ούγ). 
 
 Obs. — ούχί, a more emphatic οϋ , is always accented. 
 
 § 98. Atona receive the accent only in two cases, viz.: 
 
 a) when they are at the end of a sentence, and therefore 
 have no following word on which they can rest: φτ}ς rj ο u ; 
 do you say so or not f so always ώς when placed after the 
 word with which a comparison is made : θεός ως, like a 
 god, Horn.; 
 
 V) when followed by an enclitic, which throws back its 
 accent: ον φησι, he says not. Compare § 93, c. 
 
 § 99. The following particles are distinguished accord¬ 
 ing to the accent: ?/, than, or, and r h truly, or interroga¬ 
 tive, Lat. num / apa, then, consequently, and apa as an in¬ 
 terrogative ; νυν, now, and enclitic vv(v), now, particle of 
 transition ; ώς, how, and ως, so / ονκουν, therefore, and 
 ουκουν, not therefore. 
 
§ 100. 
 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 35 
 
 II. INFLEXION. 
 
 A. INFLEXION OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS. 
 
 Chap. VI.—Declension of Substantives and 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 § 100. Inflexion is the change which nouns, pronouns, 
 and verbs undergo to indicate their relation in a sentence. 
 
 A distinction must be made in inflexion between Stem 
 and Termination. Stem is the fixed part, Termination 
 the changeable part which is appended to the Stem to in¬ 
 dicate the different relations. 
 
 The inflexion of nouns and pronouns is called Declen¬ 
 sion. As the nominal and pronominal Stems are modified 
 according; to Cases, the terminations added to them are 
 called Case-endings. The form which arises from a case- 
 ending being added to a Stem is called the Case-form. 
 Thus πράγματ-ος is a case-form of the Stem 7 -pay ματ, 
 formed by means of the case-ending -ος. 
 
 Great care must be taken not to confound the Stem and 
 the Nominative case. The Nominative is itself a case- 
 form, often quite different from the Stem. Thus the Nom¬ 
 inative of the Stem π pay ματ is π pay μα, thing, λόγος, 
 speech , is the Nominative of the Stem λογο, which appears, 
 for example, in the compound word λογογρα^ο-ς*, co writer 
 of speeches* 
 
 The Greeks distinguish in the Declension: 
 
 1. Three Numbers : the Singular for one, the Dual for 
 two, the Plural for several. 
 
 2. Five Cases : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusa¬ 
 tive, Vocative. The Dual has only two case-forms, one for 
 the Nom., Acc., and Voc., the other for the Gen. and Dat. 
 In the Plur., the Voc. is always like the Nom. 
 
 3. Three Genders : Masculine, Feminine, Neuter. 
 
 * The Stem will always be left unaccented. 
 
36 
 
 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 101. 
 
 § 101. The gender is known : 
 
 1. From certain general characteristics of sex, in which 
 the Greek language almost entirely coincides with the 
 Latin. Besides the rule founded in the nature of things, 
 that the designations of male persons are masculine, those 
 of females feminine, the following rules are to be observed : 
 
 § 102. a) The names of rivers and winds (gods of rivers 
 and winds), and months (ό μην, the month), are masculine : 
 6 Ευρώτας*? the Diver Eurotas y ό Ζέφυρος, the west wind y 
 6 f E κατομβαιων, the month Hecatomb ceon. 
 
 § 103. V) The names of trees, lands (η γί), the land), 
 islands (77 νήσος, the island), and most cities, are femi¬ 
 nine: ή δρυς, the oak y η Αρκαδία, .Arcadia y 7 ) Λέσβος , 
 the island of Lesbos y ?/ Κολοβών, the city of Colophon. 
 Most abstract substantives also, i. e., those which denote a 
 condition, relation, act, or property, are feminine: η έλπίς, 
 hope y rj νίκη, victory y η δικαιοσύνη, righteousness y η 
 ταχυτης, quickness. 
 
 § 104. c) Many names of fruits are neuter : το σύκον, the 
 fig y most diminutives also, both of masculine and feminine 
 words : to yepovnov, dimin. of o yipivv, the old man y to 
 yvvaiov, dimin. of η yvvi], the woman. Farther, every name 
 and word which is adduced merely as a word : το άνθρωπος, 
 the name “ man y” το δικαιοσύνη, the idea of “ righteous¬ 
 ness f and the names of the letters, το αλφα, το σίγμα. 
 
 § 105. 2. From the ending of the Stern the gender is 
 known according to §§ 113, 125, 137-140. 
 
 3. In Declension, the Neuter may be distinguished from 
 the Masculine and Feminine, for all Neuters have 
 
 ah) no Accusative or Vocative distinct from the Nom. 
 
 b) no ς as case-sign of the Nom. Sing. 
 
 c) the ending a in Nom. Acc. and Voc. PI. 
 
 § 106. The Greek language, like the English, employs 
 the definite Article. The forms of the Article are the 
 following: 
 
§ 109. 
 
 ACCENT IN DECLENSION. 
 
 37 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 t 
 
 0 
 
 t 
 
 V 
 
 τό 
 
 the. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 του 
 
 της 
 
 τού 
 
 of the. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 τω 
 
 T V 
 
 τψ 
 
 to the. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 τόν 
 
 την 
 
 τό 
 
 the. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. 
 
 τώ 
 
 τά ΟΓ τώ 
 
 τώ 
 
 the. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 το7ν 
 
 τα7ν ΟΤ το7ν 
 
 το7ν 
 
 of or to the. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 οι 
 
 αι 
 
 τά 
 
 the. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 των 
 
 τών 
 
 τών 
 
 of the. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 το7ς 
 
 τα7ς 
 
 το7ς 
 
 to the. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 τούς 
 
 τάς 
 
 τά 
 
 the. 
 
 The following general rules on accentuation apply to all 
 the declensions of substantives. 
 
 § 107. d) The accent remains unaltered on the syllable 
 on which it stood in the Nominative as long as the gen- 
 eral laws of accent allow : άνθρωπος, man , άνθρωπε (Voc.); 
 συκον, fig, σύκα (Nom. Plur.). Exceptions, §§ 121 and 142, 
 181,2. 
 
 b) But when the original accentuation becomes impos¬ 
 sible by the length of the final syllable or by increase at 
 the end, the accent is shifted only as near to the end of the 
 word, and is changed only as much, as is absolutely neces¬ 
 sary : άνθρωπος , man , άνθρωπον (Gen. Sing.), άνθρώποις 
 (Dat. Plur.); σώμα , body, σώματος (Gen. Sing.), σωμάτων 
 (Gen. Plur.); rtTyoc, wall, τείχους (Gen. Sing.). 
 
 § 108. c ) The terminations oi and at are not considered 
 long in regard to accent; hence άνθρωποι , γ νώμαι (-γνώμη, 
 opinion). 
 
 § 109. d) The Genitives and Datives of all numbers, 
 if the last syllable is long, can never have the acute upon 
 this syllable, but only the circumflex : ποταμού , Gen. Sing. 
 
38 
 
 THE A DECLENSION. 
 
 110. 
 
 of ποταμός, river / τίμμ,Τ) at. Sing, of τιμή, honor y ποδύν, 
 Gen. Plur. of 7 τους, foot j μηνόΐν, Gen. Dual of μην, month. 
 
 § 110. Originally there was only a single declension, for 
 which reason much has still remained common, which we 
 shall put together below, § 173. But we distinguish Two 
 Principal Declensions according to the ending of the 
 Stems: 
 
 1 . the First Principal Declension (vowel declension), 
 which comprehends the Stems ending in a and o ; and 
 
 2 . the Second Principal Declension (consonant declen¬ 
 sion ), which comprehends the Stems ending in consonants, 
 but also those in the soft vowels 1, v, in diphthongs, and a 
 small number of Stems in o. 
 
 First Principal Declension. 
 
 ( Vowel-declension.) 
 
 § 111. The first principal declension is subdivided into 
 two, viz.: 
 
 A. The A Declension. ■ 
 
 B. The O Declension. 
 
 What is common to both is put together below, § 134. 
 
 A. The A Declension 
 
 (commonly called the First Declension). 
 
 § 112. The A Declension comprehends those words 
 whose Stems end in a. In certain cases, however, this a 
 becomes η. Hence the A Declension of the Greeks cor¬ 
 responds both to the A, or first, and to the E, or fifth, De¬ 
 clension of the Latin language. 
 
 o o 
 
 § 113. The A Declension contains only Masculines and 
 Feminines. The two genders are most easily distinguished 
 in the Nom. Sing., in which the masculines take ς, the 
 feminines no case-ending. Hence the terminations of 
 
115. 
 
 THE A DECLENSION. 
 
 39 
 
 the Xom. Sing, are in the feminine a, η , in the masculine 
 
 «c, vc- 
 
 § 114. i. Feminines. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 χώρα, land, 
 χωρά [terra] 
 
 γλώσσα, tongue, 
 γλωσσά 
 
 τιμή, honor, 
 τι μ a 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 χώρα [terra] 
 
 γλώσσα 
 
 τιμή 
 
 Gen. 
 
 χωράς 
 
 γλώσσης 
 
 τιμής 
 
 Oat. 
 
 χώρςι [terrse] 
 
 γλώσσ y 
 
 τιμ\ ϊ [re-i] 
 
 Ace. 
 
 χώρά-ν [terra-m] 
 
 γλώσσά-ν 
 
 τιμή-ν [re-m] 
 
 Voc. 
 
 χώρά [terra] 
 
 γλώσσα 
 
 τιμή 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 χώρα 
 
 γλώσσα 
 
 τιμά 
 
 G. D. 
 
 χώραιν 
 
 γλώσσαιν 
 
 τιμαΊν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 χώραι [terrse] 
 
 γλώσσαι 
 
 τιμαί 
 
 Gen. 
 
 χωρών 
 
 γλ ωσσών 
 
 τιμών 
 
 Bat. 
 
 χώραις 
 
 γλώσσαις 
 
 τιμαίς 
 
 Acc. 
 
 χώρας [terras] 
 
 γλώσσας 
 
 τιμάς 
 
 Voc. 
 
 χώραι [terrse] 
 
 γλώσσαι 
 
 τιμαί 
 
 Examples fcr Declensicn. 
 
 θεά, goddess. δόξα, opinion. γή, earth, 
 
 σκιά , shadow. πύλη, gate. -γνώμη, opinion, 
 
 βία, force. 
 
 § 115. In certain cases in the Singular, hut never in the 
 Dual and Plural, a becomes η. Hence the following rules: 
 
 1 . In order to form the Xom. Sing, from the Stem, or 
 from a given case-form of the Dual or Plural: 
 
 §§ 11C-117. Dialects.—1. The Doric dialect never changes a into η: 
 τιμά, τιμάς ; γλώσσα, γλώσσας. 
 
 2. The Ionic dialect changes every long a in the Singular into r, : 
 σοφίη, π'ετρη, βασιλείς, μοίρ-η. Short a is generally unchanged, as βασί¬ 
 λειά, μοίραν : but in abstract substantives in -ειά, - οιά , a is likewise 
 changed into η: άληθείη, truth, Att. αλήθεια ; εύπλοίη, good passage ; and 
 also in κνίσα η, steam from fat, Σκύλλη. The « remains in θεά and some 
 proper names. 
 
 3. The Yoc. of νύμφη, young 'woman, is in Homer νύμφά. 
 
40 
 
 THE A DECLENSION. 
 
 § 116. 
 
 a) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after ε, i, or p (§ 41): 
 St. σοφία , Nom. Sing, σοφία , wisdom / Dat. Plur. 7 τίτραις, 
 Nom. Sing. 7 τετρά, rock. 
 
 b) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after σ, and after the 
 double consonants ζ, ζ, ψ, σ σ (or τ τ), λλ, as well as in the 
 feminine designations in -aiv a: St. a μ αζ a, Nom. Sing. 
 άμαζά, carriage / Gen. Plur. λεαίνων, Nom. Sing, λε'αη/α, 
 
 lioness. 
 
 c ) After other vowels and consonants a is generally 
 changed into η in the Nom. Sing. : St. βοα, Nom. Sing. 
 |3 οη, cry · Acc. Plur, yvώμάς, Nom. Sing, γνώ /irj (opinion). 
 
 More important exceptions are: to ά) κόρη, girl; κόρρη, temple; 
 δείρη, neck —to b) ερση, dew —to c) στοά , hall; χρόα , color; τόλμα, 
 boldness ; δίαιτα, mode of life. 
 
 § 116. 2. In order to form the other cases in the Singu¬ 
 lar according to a given Nom. Sing.: 
 
 a) If the Nom. Sing, ends in η, this letter remains 
 throughout the Sing.: δίκη, justice, δίκης, δίκμ, δίκην, δίκη. 
 
 b) If the Nom. Sing, ends in a, this letter remains always 
 in the A.CC. and ~Voc. : αμαζα, άμαξαν. 
 
 c) If the Nom. Sing, ends in a, this letter remains also in 
 the Gen. and Dat. when preceded by a rowel or p (§ 41): 
 Nom. Sing, σοφία, wisdom, Gen. σοφίας ; Nom. Sing, στοά, 
 colonnade, Dat. στοά : also in some proper names with long 
 a : Nom. Sing. Λήδα, Gen. Λήδας· ; and in μνά (contracted 
 from μνάα), Gen. μνας. 
 
 d) Otherwise a of Nom. Sing, becomes η in Gen. and 
 Dat.: Nom. Sing, μούσα, Gen. μουσης ; Nom. Sing, δίαιτα, 
 Dat. διαίτφ. 
 
 § 117. For the quantity of a in the Nom. and Acc. Sing., 
 the general rule is : a jpurum (after vowels) and a after p is 
 long, every other a is short: θεά, goddess / άμιΧλά, fight. 
 
 The exceptions are generally shown by the accent (§ 84, Obs. 2). 
 The most important are the fern, designations in -τρία and -tia : 
 ψάλτρια, female player; βασίλειά, queen (but βασίλειά, dominion) ; 
 and several words with diphthongs in the last syllable but one, 
 as σφαίρα, ball; έννοια , good will; μοίρα, fate. 
 
120. 
 
 TIIE A DECLENSION. 
 
 41 
 
 § 118. The Gen. Plur. has the ending ων, which com¬ 
 bines with the Stem a to form ίιων, contr. ών. This is the 
 reason that the Gen. Plur. of all words in this declension 
 has the circumflex : ^ωρα, \ωρών ; Χίαινα , Χίαινών (Excep¬ 
 tions, § 181. Compare § 123). 
 
 § 119. The Dat. Plur. originally ended in σι, before 
 which i is added to the a of the Stem. The αισ i thus 
 formed is usually shortened into a ι ς, but the original form 
 is found even in Attic writers in poetry and prose. (Com¬ 
 pare § 128, D.) 
 
 § 120. 2, Masculines. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 νεανίας , youth. 
 
 πολίτης, citizen. 
 
 Έρμης, god Hermes. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 νεανία 
 
 π ολίτ a 
 
 'Ε ρ μ η (from 'Ε ρμεα) 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 νεάνίά-ς 
 
 πολίτη-ς 
 
 Έρμη-ς 
 
 Gen. 
 
 νεάνίου 
 
 πολίτου 
 
 Έρμου 
 
 Dat. 
 
 νεάνίφ. 
 
 π ολίτ]] 
 
 Έ ρμ \1 
 
 Ace. 
 
 νεάνίά-ν 
 
 πολίτη-ν 
 
 Έρμή-ν 
 
 Voc. 
 
 νεανία 
 
 πολΐτα 
 
 'Ερμή 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 νεανία 
 
 πολίτά 
 
 Έρμα, statues of 
 
 
 
 
 Hermes. 
 
 G.D. 
 
 νεάνίαιν 
 
 πολίταιν 
 
 Έρμαΐν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 νεάνίαι 
 
 πολΐται 
 
 Έρμαϊ 
 
 Gen. 
 
 νεανιών 
 
 πολιτών 
 
 Έρμών 
 
 Dat. 
 
 νεάνίαις 
 
 πολίταις 
 
 Έρμαΐς 
 
 Ace. 
 
 νεανίας 
 
 πολίτάς 
 
 Έρμάς 
 
 Voc, 
 
 νεάνίαι 
 
 πολΐται 
 
 Έρμαϊ 
 
 § 118. Dialects.—4. The -αω v of the Gen. Plur. is preserved in the 
 Horn, dialect: κλισιάων ( κλισία , tent), άγοράων ( άγορά, speech) ; but -εων 
 also occurs, in which case ε is generally lost by synizesis (§ 39) : τ τά¬ 
 σεων, of nil, fern. 
 
 The Dorians contract -αων into av (§ 37, D. 3) : θεάν, dearum. 
 
 § 119. Dialects.—5. The Dat. Plur. in Ionic ends in -y σ i (j;), -\k (bat 
 also in the Attic -ate): κλιση)σι, πετριάς. 
 
42 
 
 THE A DECLENSION. 
 
 § 121. 
 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 
 ταμίας , treasurer. 
 
 στρατιώτης, warrior. 
 
 άδολεσχης, babbler. 
 
 N ικίας, Nicias. 
 
 τταιδοτρίβης, wrestling- 
 
 ’Αλκιβιάδης. 
 
 κριτής, judge. 
 
 master. 
 
 
 § 121. In the Masculines, as well as in the Feminines, 
 when a vowel or p precedes, the a of the Stem remains 
 and is long; after every other letter it becomes η in the 
 Nom. Dat. and Acc. Sing. 
 
 Those words which in the Nom. Sing, end in τη-ς, 
 names of peoples, and compound words, have a short in the 
 Yoc. Sing.: ττολίτα, Πφσα (Nom. Sing. Περση-ς, Persian ); 
 jem μέτρα (Nom. Sing, γεωμετρη-ς, land-measurer). The 
 Yoc. δέσποτα (Nom. Sing, δεσπότη-ς, lord) draws back the 
 accent, contrary to § 107, a , to the first syllable. All oth¬ 
 ers have η in the Yocative : Κρονίδη (Nom. Sing. Kpo- 
 νίδη-ς). 
 
 § 122. The Declension of the Masculines is distinguished 
 from that of the Feminines : 
 
 1. in the Nom. Sing, by ς being added to the Stem ; 
 
 2 . by the Gen. Sing, ending in o v. 
 
 Obs. —Tlie termination of the Gen. Sing, of the masculines is prop¬ 
 erly -o, which, with the a of the Stem, forms -ao (see the Homeric 
 dialect ); by weakening a to ε (§ 118, D.) and contraction (§ 37) 
 arises ον : πολίτάο (πολιτεο), πολίτου. 
 
 §§ 121 and 122. Dialects.—1. The Epic dialect in some words omits 
 the ς of the Nom. Sing., in which cases the « remains short: ιππύτά , 
 horseman ; νεφεληγερ&ά, cloud-gatherer. (Compare Lat. poeta , sariba.) 
 
 2. The Dorians also in the masculines put a for η , and contract ά o 
 into a. (§§ 24, D.; 37, D. 3.) 
 
 3. Homer has three forms in the Gen. Sing.: 
 
 a ) the original -άο : Άτρείδάο ; 
 
 V) -εω with the quantity transposed (where ε is lost by synizesis, 
 §§ 37, D., 39, D.) : Άτρείδεω. The accent remains unchanged, in spite 
 of the ω in the final syllable. The New-Ionic form is the same. 
 
 c) -ω by contraction : '¥φμείω (Nom. Sing. Έρμείά-ς = Attic Έρμης), 
 βορεω (Nom. Sing, βοριάς). Compare § 37, a. 
 
125. 
 
 THE O DECLENSION. 
 
 43 
 
 βορράς (contracted from βορί,ά-ς , north wind), contracts the original 
 a o in the Gen. Sing., after Doric fashion, into a : βορρά. The 
 same takes place with some Doric and Roman proper names, 
 and a few other words: Σύλλας, Sulla ; όρνίθοθηρας, fowler, Gen. 
 Sing. a. 
 
 § 123. In the Dual and Plural the Declension of the 
 Masculines is the same as that of the Feminines. 
 
 Exceptions to the accentuation prescribed in § 118 are χρήστη-ς, 
 usurer; ίτησίαι , trade-winds , Gen. Plur. χρηστών (χρηστών in the 0 
 declension, from χρηστός , good) and ίτησίων. 
 
 B. The 0 Declension 
 
 {commonly called the Second Declension). 
 
 § 124. The O Declension comprehends those words 
 whose Stems end in o, together with a few whose Stems 
 end in ω (§ 132). It answers to the o- or Second Declen¬ 
 sion in Latin. 
 
 § 125. The O Declension is the complement of the A 
 Declension in regard to gender. It contains Masculines 
 and Neuters, but only few (Feminines . 
 
 The termination of the Masculines and Feminines in the 
 Fom. Sing, is ο-ς, that of Neuters o-v [Lat. u-s, u-m~\. 
 
 The Masculines and Feminines are declined alike; the 
 Neuters are distinguished from them (compare § 105) only 
 by— 
 
 1. The Nom. and Voc. Sing, taking the Accusative end¬ 
 ing v : δώρο-ν (gift) [donu-?n~\. 
 
 2 . The Nom. Acc. and Voc. Plur. ending in a : δώρα 
 [ dona ]. 
 
44 
 
 THE O DECLENSION. 
 
 126. 
 
 126 . 
 
 Examples. 
 
 δ άνθρωπο-ς, man 
 
 η δδό-ς, way . 
 
 το δώρο-ν, gift. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 άνθρωπο 
 
 ο δ ο 
 
 δ ο) ρ ο 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 άνθρωπο-ς [dominu-s] 
 
 ΰδό-ς 
 
 δώρο-ν [donu m] 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ανθρώπου 
 
 οδού 
 
 δώρου 
 
 Bat. 
 
 άνθρώπιρ [domino] 
 
 δδψ 
 
 δώριρ [dono] 
 
 Ace. 
 
 άνθρωπο-ν [dominu-m] 
 
 ΰδό-ν 
 
 δώρο-ν [donu-m] 
 
 Voc. 
 
 άνθρωπε [domine] 
 
 οδέ 
 
 δώρο-ν [donum-] 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 JV. A. V. 
 
 άνθρώπω 
 
 όδώ 
 
 δώρω 
 
 G. D. 
 
 άνθρώποιν 
 
 δδοΊν 
 
 δώροιν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 άνθρωποι [domini] 
 
 οδοί 
 
 δώρα [dona] 
 
 Gen. 
 
 άΐ’θρώπων 
 
 οδών 
 
 δώρων 
 
 Bat. 
 
 άνθρώποις 
 
 οδούς 
 
 δώροις 
 
 Acc. 
 
 ανθρώπους [domino-s] 
 
 οδούς 
 
 δώρα [dona] 
 
 Voc. 
 
 άνθρωποι [domini] 
 
 οδοί 
 
 δώρα [dona] 
 
 θεός, God. 
 νόμος , law. 
 κίνδυνος, danger, 
 ταύρος, bull. 
 
 Examples for Bsclenuicn. 
 
 ποταμός , river, 
 πόνος , trouble, 
 βίος, life, 
 θάνατος , death. 
 
 GVKOV^fig. 
 μετρον, measure, 
 ιμάτιον, dress. 
 
 § 127. 05s. — The Feminines are partly known by the general rules 
 already given (§§ 101,103) : φηγός, esculent oak; ή άμπελος , vine; 
 ί) νήσος , island ; ή ήπειρος , continent ; Κόρινθος. 
 
 The following also are feminine: 
 
 1. The names of different kinds of earth and stones: ψάμμος, sand; 
 κόπρος, dung; -/ύψος, chalk; πλίνθος, brick; σποδός, ashes; ψήφος , 
 pebble ; βάσανος, touchstone. 
 
 2. Different words for way: οδός, κελενθος, ατραπός, path ; αμαξιτός, 
 carriage-road. In the same manner, η τάφρος, dike, but ύ στενωπός, 
 narrow way. 
 
 3. Words conveying the idea of a cavity: χηλός, chest of drawers; 
 ■γνάθος, jaw; κιβωτός, chest; σορός, coffin; ληνός, wine-vat; κάρδο - 
 πος, kneading-trough ; κάμινος, oven. 
 
 4. Several adjectives used as substantives: r) διάμετρος (supply 
 -γραμμή, line'), diameter; σύγκλητος (supply βουλή, council), meeting 
 of the council. 
 
130. 
 
 THE O DECLENSION. 
 
 45 
 
 5. Single words: βίβλος , hooJc; ράβδος, staff; διάλεκτος, dialect; 
 νόσος, disease ; δρόσος, dew ; δοκός, loeam. Many designations of 
 personal beings are common, that is, with the same form they 
 are masculine when they denote a male, feminine when they 
 denote a female: ο θεός, god ; ή θεός, goddess; ύ άνθρωπος and ή 
 άνθρωπος. 
 
 § 128. The ending of the Gen. Sing, is -o, which, with 
 the o of the Stem, is contracted into ου (compare § 122): 
 ανθρωπο-ο = ανθρώπου. 
 
 § 129. The Nominative form is sometimes used instead 
 of the Vocative form: the Vocative of θεός is always the 
 same as the Nom.: ώ θεός [Lat. dens']: αδελφός, brother , 
 has αδελφε in the Vocative with the accent thrown hack. 
 
 Contracted Declension. 
 
 § 130. Several words which have ε or o beforeMhe last 
 letter of the Stem may contract these vowels with the o. 
 The rules of §§ 36 and 37 are here applied: εα, however, 
 contrary to § 38, is contracted into d. 
 
 § 128. Dialects.—Tlie Epic dialect in the Gen. Sing, has the older 
 form t o for the ending; ι o with o of the St. produces οω : άνθρώποω, 
 πεδίοιο (πεδίο-ν)^β β ^ We also, however, find the Attic ov. 
 
 Other Epic peculiarities are : -oav ■= oiv in the Gen. and Dat. Dual: 
 ωμοίιν ( ώμος , shoulder) \— οισι(ν) —οις in the Dat. Plur.: άνθρώποισι(ν ), 
 which is also New-Ionic, and is found even in Attic writers (compare 
 § 119 ). 
 
 § 130. Dialect".—The Ionic dialect leaves the forms uncontracted. 
 
46 
 
 CONTRACTED O DECLENSION. 
 
 131. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 6 νοΰ-ς , sense. 
 
 v 0 0 
 
 το όστονν , bone, 
 ό σ r ε ο 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Oat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 νόο-ς νους 
 
 νόου νοϋ 
 
 vo<y V(j) 
 
 νόο-ν νοϋ-ν 
 
 νόε νου 
 
 όστεο-ν όστοϋ-ν 
 
 όστέου οστού 
 
 όστει^ όστο^ 
 
 όστεο-ν όστοϋ-ν 
 
 όστεο-ν όστοϋ-ν 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 νόω ι>ώ 
 
 νόοιν νοΊν 
 
 όστειο όστώ 
 
 όστεοιν όστοιν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 νόοι νοΧ 
 
 νύων νων 
 
 νόοις νοις 
 
 νόους νους 
 
 νόοι νοί 
 
 όστεα οστά 
 
 όστεων οστών 
 
 όστεοις όστοϊς 
 
 όστεα οστά 
 
 όστεα οστά 
 
 Examples for Beelenricn. 
 
 πλοίο, voyage. ρους, stream. άόελφιόοϋς, brother's son. 
 
 § 131. Some irregularities of accentuation occur in the 
 contraction, viz.: 
 
 1 . the Norn. Dual is made oxytone, contrary to § 87. 
 
 2 . compound words leave the accent on the last syllable 
 but one, also contrary to § 87 : ττφίττλί»), Dat. of 7 τερίπΧονς, 
 circumnavigation, for περιττλω, from -ύω. 
 
 3 . the word κάνεον, basket, is contracted into κάνουν , con¬ 
 trary to § 87. 
 
 On contracted adjectives, see § 183. 
 
 Attic Declension . 
 
 § 132. A small number of words, instead of the short 
 O-sound (o), have the long (ω). This ω at the end of the 
 
 § 131. Dialects.—A Gen. ending -0 appears in Homer in ΠεΓεύ-ο, 
 Gen. Sing, from tlie Nominative Πε7εώ-£. 
 
134. 
 
 ATTIC O DECLENSION. 
 
 47 
 
 Stem goes through all the cases, but at the same time takes 
 the case-endings as far as possible. Most of these words 
 have ε before ω, and for -ε ω there also occurs the additional 
 form -tt ο : νεώ-ς, temple, together with νάό-ς ; λεώ-ς, people, 
 together with λΰό-ς (compare § 37, D.). This Declension 
 is called the Attic. 
 
 On adjectives in ω-ς, see § 184; on some words which 
 fluctuate between this and the second principal declension, 
 see § 174. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 υ νεώ-ς, temple, 
 v ε ω 
 
 το άνώγεω-ν, upper room, 
 άνωγεω 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 νεώ-ς 
 
 άνώγεω-ν 
 
 Gen. 
 
 νεώ 
 
 άνωγεω 
 
 Oat. 
 
 νερ 
 
 άνώγεφ 
 
 Ace. 
 
 νεώ-ν 
 
 άνώγεω-ν 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 νεώ 
 
 άνώγεω 
 
 G. B. 
 
 νεφν 
 
 άνώγεφν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 νεφ 
 
 άνώγεω 
 
 Gen. 
 
 νεών 
 
 άνώγεων 
 
 Bat. 
 
 νερς 
 
 άνώγε(ι)ς 
 
 Ace. 
 
 νεώς 
 
 άνώγεω 
 
 Another example : κάλως, rope. 
 
 § 133. The accentuation in these words has a twofold 
 irregularity, viz. : 
 
 1. εω passes always for only one syllable in regard to ac¬ 
 cent : Μενελεως·, apparently contrary to § 82 ; 
 
 2 . even upon the Genitives and Datives, when they are 
 accented, the accent is put, not as a circumflex, but as an 
 acute, contrary to § 109. 
 
 § 134. The A and O Declensions, that is, the Vowel or 
 First Principal Declension, have the following points in 
 common: 
 
48 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 § 135. 
 
 1 . the masculines have in the Aom. Sinff. the ending -c. 
 
 2 . the masculines have in the Gen. Sing. (§§ 122, 128) 
 the ending -ου. 
 
 3. all three genders have l subscriptum with a long vowel 
 in the Dat. Sing. 
 
 4. all three genders have -v in the Ace. Sing. 
 
 5. all three genders have the Stem vowel lengthened in 
 the Nom. Acc. and Voc. Dual. 
 
 6 . all three genders affix -iv to the Stem vowel in the 
 Gen. and Dat. Dual. 
 
 7. all three genders have -ων in the Gen. Plur. 
 
 8. all three genders affix -σιν or ς* with preceding i to the 
 Stem vowel in the Dat. Plur. 
 
 9. the masculines and feminines affix -i to the Stem vowel 
 in the Nom. Plur. 
 
 10 . the masculines and feminines affix - ς (for νς) in the 
 Acc. Plur., lengthening the Stem vowel to compensate for 
 the v dropped (§ 42). 
 
 The difference, therefore, is only in the formation of the 
 Gen. Sing, of the feminines and in the accentuation of the 
 Gen. Plur. 
 
 Second Principal Declension. 
 
 Consonant-declension 
 {commonly called the Third Declension). 
 
 § 135. The Second Principal Declension comprehends 
 all the Stems which end in consonants , the soft vowels i 
 and v, or diphthongs , and a small number of Stems in o 
 (Nom. ω). The Stem is best recognized in the Gen. Sing., 
 where what remains after rejecting the termination ο c may 
 generally be considered as the Stem: Gen. Xeovr-oc, St. 
 λεοντ (Nom. λέωυ, lion) ; Gen. φύΧακ-ος , St. φυ\ακ (Nom. 
 <ρύλαζ, guard). 
 
139. 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 49 
 
 Hence, for the exact recognition of a word of this declension, not 
 only the Nominative, but also the Stem or the Genitive is neces¬ 
 sary : as, Nom. δαίς, St. datr, or Gen. ciairoc, meal [Lat. rex , St. reg , 
 or Gen. regis\. 
 
 To the second principal declension correspond in Latin the third 
 and fourth declensions. In it the case-endings usually appear 
 pure, i. e., not mixed up with the end of the Stem. 
 
 The Stems ending in the soft vowels follow the third declension, 
 because the soft vowels (§ 35,1) can be used together with the 
 vowels of the terminations : Gen. πίτυ-ος (Stem 7 nrv, Nom. πίτυ-ς , 
 pine-tree). In the Stems ending in diphthongs, the v is some¬ 
 times resolved into P : for example, the Stem βον (Nom. βοΰ-ς, 
 ox) was originally in some forms β oP (Latin for), as Gen. βοΡ-ός 
 {—box-is). See § 35, Obs. The O Stems have probably lost a 
 final consonant. 
 
 § 136. The Second Principal Declension comprehends 
 all three genders. 
 
 The Neuters may be recognized by the inflexion, accord¬ 
 ing to § 105, from their having the Nom. and Acc. alike, 
 and these cases in the Plur. always with the ending -a: 
 σώματ-α (St. σωματ , Nom. Sing, σώμα , body). 
 
 § 137. For determining the gender from the Stem, the 
 following are the most important rules: 
 
 a) Masculine are the Stems in ευ (Nom. εύ-ς·), τ η p 
 (Nom. τηρ ), rop (Nom. τωρ), ντ (with Nom. g or v pre¬ 
 ceded by a long vowel), as well as most Stems in v (of 
 various Nominatives) with a preceding long vowel: St. 
 y pa φ ευ, Nom. ypa(j)evg, writer j St. and Nom. σωτηρ, sa¬ 
 vior / St. ρητό p, Nom. ρητωρ, orator; St. Χεοντ, Nom. 
 Χεων, lion, leo / St. and Nom. άγων, contest. 
 
 § 138. V) Feminine are all Stems in δ (Nom. -ig, -ag), 
 most in l (Nom. -ι -g), those in o (Nom. -ω or -ω-ς), and the 
 names of qualities in τ η r (Nom. -τη-ς) : St. ε X π 1 8, Nom. ελ- 
 7 rig, hope ; St. 7 r ο λ i, Nom. 7 τόΧις, city ; St. π ειθ o, Nom. 
 πειθώ, persuasion j St. I σ or ητ, Nom. ισότης, eguality. 
 
 § 139. c ) Neuter are the Stems in ματ (Nom. μα), the 
 substantive Stems in g with Nom. ος or ag, those in 1 or v 
 which append no g in the Nominative, and those in p pre- 
 
 C 
 
50 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 § 140 . 
 
 ceded by a short vowel in the Nom.: St. σωματ, Nom. 
 σώμα , body / St. y ε v ε ς, Nom. γένος, genus / St. and Nom. 
 γήρας, ctge y St. and Nom. σινάπι, mustard ; St. and Nom, 
 αστν, city ; St. and Nom. r /τορ, heart. 
 
 § 140. The following words must be noticed separately: 
 r) γαστίψ (St. y a σ r ε p), belly y ό πούς (St. π o $ ),foot y ?j 
 χειρ (St. χειρ), hand j το ούς (St. ojr),ear y ό πηχυς (St. 
 π rj χ υ), forearm y η φρμν (St. φ p εν), diaphragm, mind y 
 ο πεΧεκυς (St. πεΧεκυ), axe, 6 βότρυς (St. βοτρυ ), 
 hunch of grapes y b στάχνς (St, στάχυ), ear of corn y b 
 σφι'ιζ, (St. σ φ t} k), wasp y b μυς (St. μ ϋ ς), mouse \_mus~\ ; 
 ο Ιχθύς (St. ι χ Θ v),fshf b άίψ (St. a ε p), air y to πυρ (St. 
 πυρ), fire, to ύδωρ (St. υ&ατ), water. 
 
 Of two genders (common) are several names of animals, as: ύ and 
 if άλεκτρνών (St. άλ ε κ τ p v o v), cock and hen/ b and ή νς or συς 
 (St. v or σ v), swine [ms~\; b and 1 ) αίξ (St. a i γ), goat; b and r) βοϋς 
 (St. β ον), ox; and many names of persons: ύ and ?) παϊς (St. 
 raid), ~boy and girl; b and ή δαίμων (St. d αιμον), god and god¬ 
 dess; b and g μάντις, prophet and prophetess. 
 
 § 141. The endings of the consonant declension are the 
 following:: 
 
 O 
 
 
 Masculines and Feminines. 
 
 Neuters. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 r, or compensation by lengthening 
 
 no ending. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 OQ 
 
 
 Oat. 
 
 ί 
 
 
 Acc. 
 
 a or v 
 
 no ending. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 no ending, or as in the Nom. 
 
 u 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 ε 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 οιν 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 
 a 
 
 Gen. 
 
 tov 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Cl(v) 
 
 
 Acc. 
 
 ας 
 
 a 
 
 Voc.—Nom. 
 
 
 V 
 
 a 
 
 § 141. Dialects.—The Horn, dialect has onv for otv in Gen. and 
 Dat. Dual (compare § 129, D.), rod-ouv, and in Dat. Plur .frequently 
 εσ σ t (v) for σ t ( v ) : ττόδ-εσσι{ν), seldom € σ i (v) : a’ly-eoi(v). 
 
143 . 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 51 
 
 § 142. The accent in the Second Principal Declension 
 deviates from the rules laid down in § 107 in the following 
 point: 
 
 Words of one syllable accentuate the Gen. and Oat. of 
 all numbers on the case-ending (circumflex if the vowel 
 be long, § 109) : ποδ-ος*, ποδ -t (but πυδ-α), ποδοΐρ, τ τοδων, 
 ποσί. 
 
 Exceptions. — 1. Participles, as: ών, being , όντος; βάς, going, βάντος 
 — accentuate the Genitive and Dative of all numbers on the last 
 syllable but one. 
 
 2. πας , omnis , has παντός, π αντί, but πάντων, πάσι(ν). 
 
 3. The words παΊς, boy; όμως, slave; θώς, jackal; τ ρώς, Trojan; τό 
 φως, light ; ?) φ<ρς, blister ; ή δας, torch ; τό ονς, ear; ό σης, moth, 
 are paroxytones in Gen. Plur. and Dual: παίδ-ων, δμώ-ων, θώ-ων, 
 Τρώ-ων, φώτ-ων, φφδ-ων, δρίδ-ων, ωτ-οιν, σε-ων (compare farther 
 § 177, 9). 
 
 4. The words which have become monosyllables by contraction: 
 i/p — tap, spring (per), όρος, η pi. 
 
 § 142 b. In regard to the quantity , it must be observed that several 
 monosyllables, in spite of the short Stem-vowel, are lengthened : 
 St. ποδ, Nom. Sing, που-ς, /oot ; St. παντ, Nom. Sing. Neut. παν, 
 every thing ; St. πυρ, Nom. Sing, πνρ, fire ; St. συ, Nom. Sing, συς, 
 boar. 
 
 § 143. The Stems of the Second Principal Declension 
 are divided into three Classes with different subdivisions: 
 
 I. Consonant Stems. 
 
 1. Guttural and Labial Stems. 
 
 2. Dental Stems. 
 
 3. Liquid Stems. 
 
 II. Vowel Stems. 
 
 1. Soft-vowel Stems. 
 
 2. Diphthong Stems. 
 
 3. o Stems. 
 
 III. Elided Stems. 
 
 1. ς Stems. 
 
 2. r Stems. 
 
 3. v Stems. 
 
52 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 144 . 
 
 I. Consonant Stems. 
 
 144. i. Guttural and Labial Stems , 
 i. e Stems in κ, χ, γ, π, φ, β. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 b φΰλαξ, guard. 
 
 >) φΧέφ, vein. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 φ v λ ά κ 
 
 φΧε β 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. V. 
 
 φνλαξ [dux] 
 
 φλέφ [pleb-s] 
 
 Gen. 
 
 φνΧάκ-ος [dllC-is] 
 
 φλεβ-ός [pl5b-is] 
 
 Dat. 
 
 φΰΧάκ-Χ [duc-i] 
 
 φΧεβ-ί [pleb-i] 
 
 Acc. 
 
 φύΧάκ-ά [duc-e-m] 
 
 φΧψ-ά [pl5b-e-m] 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 φύ\άκ-ε 
 
 φΧεβ-ε 
 
 G. D. 
 
 φνΧακ-οιν 
 
 φΧεβ-οΧν 
 
 Plural. 
 Nom. V. 
 
 φνΧάκ-ες [duc-es] 
 
 φΧεβ-ες 
 
 Gen. 
 
 φν\άκ-ων [duc-um] 
 
 φΧεβ-ών 
 
 Dat. 
 
 φν\α1ι{ν) 
 
 φΧεψί(ν) 
 
 Acc. 
 
 φΰλάκ-άς [duc-es] 
 
 φΧεβ-άς 
 
 Examples for Deelemicn. 
 
 'Ο μνρμηΐ, ant , St. μν ρ μη κ. η φόρμιγί, lyre, St. φ ο ρ μ ιγ γ. 
 
 7] μάστιξ , whip, St. μ αστϊγ. ο Αίθίοφ, ^Ethiopian, St. Αίθ ι ο π. 
 
 ή βηΐ, COUgJl, St. β η χ. 
 
 § 145. All these Stems are Masc. or Fem. The Kom. 
 Sing, is formed by affixing ς to the Stem: the ς with the 
 final consonant of the Stem forms ξ, ψ, as in the Dat. Plur. 
 (§ 48). The Yoc. is always the same as the Nom. 
 
 Obs .—The Stem άλω π εκ has the vowel irregularly lengthened in 
 the Nom. Sing.: άΧώπηΙ,/οχ; while, on the contrary, the long 
 vowel in the Stems κηρνκ , φοινΊκ , is shortened in the Nom.: 
 κήρνζ , herald ; φοΐνιξ , palm-tree , where the accent shows that the 
 v and t are short by nature (compare § 83, Obs. 1). τριχ has'Nom. 
 Sing, θ ρ ί'ί, hair , Dat. Plur. θ p ili(y) (compare § 54, a). 
 
§ 147 . 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 53 
 
 146. 2. Dental Stems , i. e., Stems in τ, θ, δ, ν. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 r) λαμπάς 
 λ a μ π ά δ 
 lamp. 
 
 τό σώμα 
 σ ω μ άτ 
 body. 
 
 ό γέρωι 
 γ ε ρ ο ν τ 
 . old man. 
 
 ό τ)γεμών 
 ΐ) γ ε μ ο ν 
 leader. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 λαμπά-ς 
 
 Χαμπάδ-ος 
 
 \αμπάδ-ϊ 
 
 Χαμπάδ-ά 
 
 Χαμπά-ς 
 
 σώμα 
 
 σώμάτ-ος 
 
 σώμάτ-ϊ 
 
 σώμα 
 
 σώμα 
 
 γέρων 
 
 γέροντ-ος 
 
 γεροντ-ϊ 
 
 γέροντ-α 
 
 γέρον 
 
 r' /γεμών 
 η γεμόν-ος 
 ϊ'ίγεμόν-ϊ 
 ήγβμόν-ά 
 y' /γεμών 
 
 Dual. 
 
 jsr. a. v. 
 
 G. B. 
 
 Χαμπάδ-ε 
 
 Χαμπάδ-οιν 
 
 σώμάτ-ε 
 
 σωμάτ-οιν 
 
 •χέροντ-ε 
 
 γερόντ-οιν 
 
 ήγεμόν-ε 
 
 7)γεμόν-οιν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 A! V. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Χαμπάδ-ες 
 Χαμπάδ-ων 
 Χαμπά-σι(ν ) 
 Χαμπάδ-άς 
 
 σώμάτ-ά 
 σωμάτ-ων 
 σώμά-σι (ν) 
 σώμάτ-ά 
 
 γέροντ-ες 
 
 γερόντ-ων 
 
 γέρου-σι(ν) 
 
 γέροντ-άς 
 
 ηγεμόν-ες 
 ι)γεμόν-ων 
 ήγεμό-σι(ν ) 
 ήγεμόν-άς 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 7/ πατρί-ς, native country, St. πάτριο. 
 
 τυ όνομα, name, St. όνοματ. 
 
 ή ννζ, night \nox for nods], St. w kt [nod]. 
 
 ij κακότη-ς , badness, St. κ a κ ο r η τ. 
 
 το μέλι, honey [mel], St. μ ελίτ. 
 
 ό οδούς, tooth [den-s for dents], St. 6 δ ο v τ [dent]. 
 
 ό δεΧφίς, dolphin , St. ό ε X φ ϊ ν. 
 
 ό ποιμην, shepherd , St. π ο ι μεν. * 
 
 ό "Ελλην, Hellen , St. Έ λ λ ?/ ν. 
 
 ό άγων, contest, St. ά γ ω ν. 
 
 Adjectives : 
 
 πένη-ς, poor, St. π ε ν η τ. 
 
 άκων, neut. άκον, unwilling, St. ά κ ο ν τ. 
 
 άπράγμων , neut. άπραγμον, inactive , St. ά π ρ α γ μ ο ν. 
 
 § 147. In the dental Stems, as in the Stems to be no¬ 
 ticed below, the Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fern, may be formed 
 in two ways, viz.: 
 
 l. With Sigma affixed to the Stem. Before this sigma 
 
54 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 147 . 
 
 the consonants τ, δ, Θ, when they stand alone, disappear 
 altogether (§ 49): \αμπα$-ς, Χαμττά-ς ; κορνθ-ς , κορν-ς, 
 helmet / but ν and ν τ have the short vowels of the Stem 
 lengthened by way of compensation (§ 42), so that a, 7, ΰ 
 become a, 7, ϋ ; but ε becomes ε i, and ο, ο υ : παντ-ς, 7τά-ς*, 
 every / ίν-ς, u -ς, one j όδοντ -c, όδού-ς, tooth. 
 
 Exceptions.—T he monosyllabic Stem 7roc> [ρ<?ό£] (§ 142 δ) has the 
 vowel lengthened exceptionally: πού-ς [Lat. pe-s, i. e., ped-s ]; 
 d a μ a p r lias Nom. Sing, η δάμαρ, spouse , for δαμαρς , because of its 
 harshness. 
 
 2. Without Sigma being affixed to the Stem; but in its 
 stead the Stem-vowel, in case it is short, is lengthened, so 
 that by this lengthening (§ 42, Ohs) ε becomes rj, and 
 o becomes to: St. ποιμεν, Nom. ποιμην, shepherd / St. 
 hy ε μ ον, Yom. ήγεμών. If the Stem-vowel is long of 
 itself, the Nom. Sing, is like the Stem: 6 άγων, contest. 
 
 The r of the Stems in ν τ in this formation is rejected, 
 according to § 67: γεροντ, Nom. γέρων (for γερωντ). 
 The simple r of the Participial Stems in or is changed 
 into ς·: St. λελυκοτ, Nom. Sing, λελυκώς (for λελνκωτ), 
 having loosened. 
 
 Obs. 1. The vowel ω shows that ς is not a mere affix in λελνκώς, one 
 who has loosened. Compare χάρΙ-ς,/ανοΊ^ St. χαριτ. 
 
 Obs. 2. The Stems in δ, Θ, as well as those in αντ , εντ, always 
 form the Kom. Sing^wiiA sigma; but Stems of substantives in 
 ovt and the Stems in v generally without ς. 
 
 § 147 l). The Neuter has the pure Stem in the Yom. 
 Acc. and Yoc. Sing. (§ 136), as far as the laws of sound in 
 regard to final consonants (§ 67) admit it: λνΘε'ν(τ), loosened 
 (see § 187), λελυκος· (for λελυκο?); γάλα, milk, from the 
 Stem γάλα /cr (Gen. γάλακχ-ος* = Lat. lact-is). On 7τάν 
 (Stem 7ravr), see § 142 h. 
 
 Obs .—On the Acc. Sing, in v , belonging to some Stems in it, ιθ, «5, 
 νθ, νδ, see § 15G. 
 
§ 149 . 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 55 
 
 § 148. The Vocative of masculines and feminines some.' 
 times lias the pure Stem, as far as is possible: ’Άρτεμι (St. 
 Ά p τ ε μ l δ), Αίαν (St. Atari), γέρον (St. γ ε p ο v r) ; some¬ 
 times it is like the Nom. (necessarily so when the accent 
 is on the last syllable): ηγεμών ; and in all participles even 
 when the accent is not on the last syllable: λε'γωρ (St. 
 λ ε γ ovt), speaking. 
 
 The Voc. τταί, hoy, from the St. π a t S, is specially to be 
 observed. 
 
 Obs .—The Stems Απόλλων, Ποσειδών, which are like the Nom., 
 shorten the vowel and draw back the accent in the Vocative: 
 'Απολ /W, Πόσαίον. The accent is also drawn back in many 
 compound words : Άγάμεμνον, ’ Αριστόγειτον (§ 85). 
 
 § 149. The formation of the Dat. Plur. results from the 
 laws of sound (§§ 49, 50). r, δ, Θ, and simple v , are 
 dropped before σί(ν) without leaving any trace; but vr 
 is dropped with the previous vowel lengthened by way of 
 compensation. 
 
 Exception. — The adjectives (not participles) in εντ admit no 
 lengthening of the vowel by w'ay of compensation: St. χ a p ι ε vr 
 (Nom. Sing, χαρίεις , graceful, Dat. Plur. χαρίεσι(ν). See Inflexion, 
 § 187). 
 
 § 148. Dialects.—The Vocative of the Stem άνακτ (Nom. Sing. 
 άναξ, ruler ) is in Homer άνά (shortened from άνακτ : compare the 
 neuter γάλα, § 147 δ) ; some Stems in vr lose the v in the Voc.: "Ατλα 
 for "Ατλαν (7-). 
 
 § 149. Dialects.—Homer forms the Dat. Plur. ποσσί(ν) instead of 
 7 Γοδ-σι(ν), Att. ποσίν (ί τους, foot)', the δ being assimilated instead of 
 being rejected. 
 
56 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 150 . 
 
 150. 3. Liquid Stems , i. e ., Stems in λ and p. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 ύ α\ς 
 
 ό ρήτωρ 
 
 ή μήτηρ 
 
 6 θήρ 
 
 Stems. 
 
 αλ 
 
 ρ η τ ο ρ 
 
 μητ ε ρ 
 
 θηρ 
 
 
 salt. 
 
 orator. 
 
 mother. 
 
 game. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 αλ-ς [sal] 
 
 ρήτωρ 
 
 μήτηρ [mater] 
 
 θήρ 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ά\-ός [sal-is] 
 
 ρήτορ-ος 
 
 μητρ-ός [matr-is] 
 
 θηρ-ύς 
 
 Oat. 
 
 άλ-ί [sal-ij 
 
 ρήτορ-ι 
 
 μητρ-ί [matr-i] 
 
 θηρ-ί 
 
 Ace. 
 
 αλ -is [sal-e-m] 
 
 ρήτορ- a 
 
 μητ'ερ-α [matr-e-m] 
 
 θήρ-α 
 
 Voc. 
 
 αλ-ς 
 
 ρήτορ 
 
 μήτερ 
 
 θήρ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 αλ-ε 
 
 ρήτορ-ε 
 
 μητέρ-ε 
 
 θήρ-ε 
 
 G. D. 
 
 ά\-ο7ν 
 
 1 όητόρ-οιν 
 
 ) 
 
 μητερ-οιν 
 
 θηρ-ο Ίι 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. V. 
 
 αλ-ες [sal-es] 
 
 ρήτορ-ες 
 
 μητερ-ες [matl’-es] 
 
 θήρ-ες 
 
 Gen. 
 
 άλ-ών [sal-um] 
 
 ρητόρ-ων 
 
 μητ'ερ-ων [matl’-um] 
 
 θηρ-ών 
 
 Dat. 
 
 άλ-σί{ν) 
 
 ρήτορ-σι{ν) 
 
 μητρά-σι{ν) 
 
 θηρ-σί(ν) 
 
 Acc. 
 
 αλ-ας 
 
 ρήτορ-ας 
 
 μητερ-ας 
 
 θήρ-ας 
 
 Examples for Beclendcn. 
 
 ro νέκταρ , nectar. b κρατήρ , mixing-jug , St. κ p ατη p. 
 
 b αιθήρ , (Ether, St. a ίθερ. b φώρ, thief {fur), St. φ ω ρ. 
 
 § 151. The only Stem in λ which forms the Nom. Sing, with sigma 
 is άλ ; all Masc. and Fern. Stems in p form the Nom. Sing, with¬ 
 out sigma (§ 147, 2); hence with long Stem-vowels the Nom. 
 Sing, is like the Stem; short Stem-vowels, however, are length¬ 
 ened, i. e., ε into η, o into ω. 
 
 The neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom. Sing.: ro ήτορ, heart. 
 Only the monosyllabic Stem πυρ lengthens the v: ro 7njp, fire 
 (§ 142, l·). 
 
 § 152. The Yoc. Sing, has the pure Stem: ρήτορ. The 
 Stem σ ωτη p (Nom. σωτηρ, sctvior ) shortens η into ε , and 
 draws back the accent (compare § 148): Voc. σώτερ. 
 
 § 153. The Stems irar ε ρ, μητ t ρ, Θ v y a r ε ρ, γαστερ, 
 
 § 150. Dialects.— ή ίίλς, poet., the sea. 
 
 § 153. Dialects.—The ε is often retained in the Gen. and Dat. by 
 poets: μητερος; while it is rejected in other cases: θύγατρα. Instead 
 of ασ i (v) in the Dat. Plur., there may be the εσσι(ν) mentioned, 
 § 141, D.: θνγατ'ερεσσι{ν). 
 
§ 154 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 57 
 
 A η μητ t p (Aoms. πατήρ, father y μητηρ , mother / Ουγάτηρ, 
 daughter / γαση'/ρ, belly / Αημητηρ), reject ε in the Gen. 
 and Dat. Sing. (§ 61, <?). The first four throw the accent 
 on the case-ending ; the last draws it back ( πατρός, Αημη - 
 τρος). The ε is accented where it appears : μητέρα, in spite 
 of μητηρ, except in the Voc., where the accent is drawn 
 back : πάτερ, in spite of πατήρ, but Acc. Sing. Αημητρα. 
 In the Dat. Plur. the syllable r ε p becomes by metathesis 
 (§ 59 ) r p a : μητρά-σι(ν). 
 
 Ohs. —Tlie Stem άστερ (Nom. Sing, άστηρ , star) belongs to these 
 words only in the formation of the Dat. Plur.: άστράσι(ν). For 
 άνηρ (St. a v ε p), see, under the irregular words, § 177,1. 
 
 II. Vowel Stems. 
 
 154. 1. Soft-vowel Stems , i. e., Stems in t and v. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 i] πόλις, city. 
 
 7Γ 0 λ l 
 
 ή σνς, soic. 
 σ ύ 
 
 το άστυ (άστυ), city. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 πόλι-ς 
 
 σϋ-ς 
 
 άστυ 
 
 Gen. 
 
 πόλε-ως 
 
 σϋ-ός 
 
 άστε-ος or άστε-ως 
 
 Dat. 
 
 {πόλε -i) πόλει 
 
 ν r 
 
 συ-ι 
 
 (άστε-Ί) άστει 
 
 Acc. 
 
 πόλι-ν 
 
 συ-ν 
 
 άστυ 
 
 Voc. 
 
 πάλι 
 
 συ-ς 
 
 άστυ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 πόλε-ε 
 
 σύ-ε 
 
 (άστε-ε) άστη 
 
 G. D. 
 
 πολε-οιν 
 
 συ-οίϊν 
 
 άστε-οιν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. V. 
 
 (πόλε-ες) πόλεις 
 
 σύ-ες 
 
 (άστε-α) άστη 
 
 Gen. 
 
 πύλε-ων 
 
 σϋ-ών 
 
 άστε-ων 
 
 Dat. 
 
 π όλε-σι(ν) 
 
 σν-σί(ν) 
 
 άστε-σι(ν) 
 
 Acc. 
 
 ( πόλε-ας ) πόλεις 
 
 συ-ας or συς 
 
 (ι άστε-α) άστη 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 ό βύτρυ-ς , hunch of grapes, 
 r) πίτυ-ς, pine-tree , 
 ό πήχν-ς, fore-arm, 
 ή όΰναμι-ς, poicer, 
 η στάσι-ς, party, faction, 
 Adjectives, § 185. 
 
 | according to § 157. 
 
 [ both according to § 157. 
 
 C 2 
 
58 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 155 . 
 
 § 155. The Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fem. is always formed 
 by Sigma. The Neuter Sing, as well as the Vocative 
 Sing. of all genders has the pure Stem. Yet sometimes 
 the Nom. form is used for the Vocative, and this is the case 
 in all monosyllables. In the Acc. Sing. Masc. and Fem. v 
 is affixed to the Stem. 
 
 On the lengthening of monosyllabic Stems, § 142 b. 
 But this lengthening takes place also in the Nom. and Acc. 
 Sing, of some polysyllabic words. 
 
 § 156. Barytones in it, id, ιθ, vd, νθ (Nom. ι ς, υ ς ), form 
 the Acc. Sing, generally by affixing v after rejecting the 
 Stem-consonant: St. ε p i d (Nom. ερι-ς, strife), Acc. ερι-ν ; 
 St. κ ο p υ Θ (Nom. κόρν-ς, helmet ), Acc. κόρν-ν ; St. 6 p v ι Θ 
 (Nom. opv Ί-ς, bird), Acc. opvi-v. The Oxytones, on the 
 contrary, always have α : ελττί-ς, hojpe, Acc. ελπίδα ; κλείς, 
 hey, stands alone; St. κ λ ε ι d, Acc. κλείν (seldom κλε7δ-α), 
 Acc. Plur. κλεΐς or κλείδας*. 
 
 Examples, ή tpi -ς , strife. ή ίΧπί-ς, hope. 
 
 Stems. ερ id. 
 Singular, ερι-ς. 
 
 ε X 7Γ ι δ. 
 
 εΧπί-ς. 
 
 ελπίδ-ος. 
 
 ελπίδ-ι. 
 
 ε\πίδ-α. 
 
 § 157. Most Stems in ι, as well as adjective and some 
 substantive Stems in v, change their final vowel to ε in 
 Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in all the cases of the Dual and 
 
 § 156. Dialects. —The Acc. Sing, in a of dental Stems is more fre¬ 
 quent in Homer: ·γ\αυκώπιδ-α (γΧαΐ'κώ^ις, bright-eyed), εριδ-α ; κΧεις is 
 κΧηις, Acc. κΧηϊδ-α. 
 
 § 157. Dialects. —The Ionic dialect leaves ι unchanged: Gen. πόΧι-ος, 
 Dat. πόλΐ (from πόΧι-ι), Nom. Plur. πόΧι-ες, Gen. ποΧί-ων, Dat. in Herod, 
 πόλι-σ i(i), Homer πολί-εσσ i(v), Acc. πόΧι-ας (Herod, also πόλις). Other 
 additional forms of the Homeric dialect are: Gen. Sing. πόΧη-ος, Dat. 
 Sing, πόλε-ϊ and πόΧη-ϊ, Nom. Plur. πόΧη-ες, Acc. Plur. πόΧη-ας. 
 
 The Stems in v have always ο ς in the Gen. Sing. The Dat. Sing, 
 only is contracted: πηχει. ευρύ-ς, broad, has the additional form ενρεα 
 in the Acc. Sing. 
 
158 . 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 59 
 
 Plur. Before the ending of the Gen. Sing, this ε remains 
 unchanged ; in the Stems, however, in /, and in some sub¬ 
 stantive Stems in v, ε is followed by ως (instead of ος), 
 called the Attic termination, which does not prevent the 
 accent from being on the antepenult: πολε-ως, πελέκε-ως· 
 (ττελεκυ-ς*, Ο,Χβ). 
 
 In the Dat. Sing, ε i is contracted into ε i, in the Nom. 
 Plur. εες and Acc. ε a ς into ε ι ς, and ε a of neuter substan¬ 
 tives into η. Adjectives maintain the uncontracted form 
 εα : άστη, but γλυκέα. 
 
 § 158. The contraction of ε ε to η in the Nom. Acc. and 
 Yoc. Dual is rare. The Gen. Plur. of Stems in i follows 
 the accent of the Gen. Sing.: πολε-ων like πολε-ως*. 
 
 Most substantive Stems in υ leave this vowel unchanged; 
 but others, like αστυ, follow the analogy of Stems in i, and 
 change v into ε. υ ε are sometimes contracted into ϋ in the 
 Nom. Acc. and Yoc. Dual; in the Acc. Plur. also we find 
 ιχθύς, with ιχθύ-ας (ιχθύ-ς, fish), and οφρυς , Acc. Plur. of 
 οφρύ-ς, eyebrow. 
 
 εγχελυ -c, «βΖ, retains υ in the Sing.: Gen. εγχε'λυ-ος* ; 
 but changes it in the Dual and Plur. into ε : Nom. Plur. 
 εγχελείς·. 
 
 The adjective ΐόρι-ς, acquainted with , St. Idpi, keeps 
 its i unchanged through all the cases. 
 
 § 158. Dialects. —The Dat. ίχθύϊ is in Homer contracted into ίχθνΤ. 
 In the Dat. Plur. σ is sometimes doubled: νεκυ-σσ i(v) with πκύ-ενσι(ν) 
 (νεκυ-ς, corpse). 
 
60 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 159 . 
 
 159. 2. Diphthong Stems, i. e., Stems in ε υ, a υ, o v. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 b βασιλεύς 
 βασ ιλευ 
 
 Icing. 
 
 ή ·γραύς 
 γ ρ αν 
 
 old icoman. , 
 
 ύ and ή βούς 
 β ον 
 
 οχ or cow. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 βασιλεν-ς 
 βασιλε-ως 
 ( βασιλε -i ) βασϊλεϊ 
 βασιλε-ά 
 βασιλεύ 
 
 γραύ-ς 
 
 γρά-ός 
 
 γρά-ΐ 
 
 ypav-v 
 
 γραύ 
 
 βοϋ-ς [bo-s] 
 βο-ός [bov-is] 
 βο -i [bov-i] 
 βον-ν [bov-e-m] 
 βον 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 βασιλε-ε 
 
 βασΐλε-οιν 
 
 γρά-ε 
 ypa-o iv 
 
 βό-ε 
 
 βο-οΊν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. V. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 (βασιλε-ες) βασιλης 
 
 ΟΓ βασιλείς 
 βασιλε-ων 
 βασΐλεύ-σιΐγ) 
 βασιλε-ας 
 
 γρά-ες 
 
 γρα-ών 
 γραν-σί(ν ) 
 ypav -ς 
 
 βό-ες [boy-es] 
 
 βο-ών [bo-um] 
 
 βου-σί(ν) 
 
 βοϋ-ς 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 6 γονεύ-ς, 'parent. ο ιερεν-ς, priest. Όδνσσεύ-ς, ’ Αχιλλεύ-ς. 
 
 § 160. All diphthong Stems affix ς in the Nom. Sing, 
 and σι(ν) in the Dat. Plur.; those in av and ου affix v in 
 the Acc. Sing, to the full Stem. In the Voc. Sing, the 
 Stem appears pure. 
 
 Before vowel case-endings, i. e in all other forms, the υ 
 of the Stem was changed into f (§ 34, D.): βοΡ-ός \bov-is’], 
 and then was entirely lost: βο-ός [βο-ών = ho-um~\ (§ 35, 
 
 D. 2). 
 
 Obs. —An isolated diphthong Stem is o /, Nom. οΐ-ς, sheep [m-s]: 
 οίός, oil, olv ; Plur. οϊες , οϊών , οίσί(ν ), οΐς. Compare § 34, D. 
 
 § 159. Dialects.—Homer has γρηνς for γραϋ-ς , Dat. ypgi, Voc. yppv or 
 yprjv ; from βοϋ-ς, Acc. Plur. βό-ας , Dat. βό-εσσι(ν). The forms βώς, 
 Norm, βών, Acc. Sing., are Doric. 
 
 § 160. Dialects.—Ionic οΐς (ovis) for οΤς , Gen. ύΐος , Dat. Plur. όί-εσσι or 
 όεσσι , Acc. ΰίς. 
 
162 . 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 61 
 
 Some compounds of πον-ς, foot, form the Acc. Sing, 
 like Stems in ου: τρ'ιπους, three-footed, Acc. τρέπουν. For 
 ναΐ>-ς, see among the irregular words, § 177,11 . 
 
 § 161. The Stems in a υ, moreover, have in the 
 
 a) Gen. Sing., ως for ος·. Compare § 157. 
 
 l·) Dat. Sing., ti always contracted for a. 
 
 c) Acc. Sing, and Plur., a is long and not contracted. 
 
 d) Nom. and Yoc. Plur., εες* contracted by older Attic 
 writers into η ς, by the later into £ ι ς. 
 
 e) Words which have a vowel before ευ may be con¬ 
 tracted also in the Gen. and Acc. Sing., and in the Acc. 
 Plur.: St. Π ε i p a l a υ, Nom. Π εφαιεν-ς, port of Athens, 
 Gen. Πειραιώς, Acc. ΐίειραιά ; ^οεύ-ς, measure, Acc. Plur. 
 χοας. 
 
 Ohs .—The Gen. in -ε ω ς lias arisen by transmutation of quantity 
 (§ 37, D. 2) out of the Horn. ο ς. Hence the length of the final 
 syllable. In the same manner, the Acc. Sing, εα has arisen out 
 of ηά : still εά is also found, like εάς in the Acc. Plural; εας is 
 contracted by later writers into εις. 
 
 162. 3. O Stems, i. e., Stems in o and ω. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 η πειθώ^ persuasion, 
 π ε ιθ ο 
 
 υ ηρως, hero, 
 ι) ρ ω 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 πειθώ 
 
 (πειθό-ος ) πειθονς 
 (πειθό-ϊ) πειθοϊ 
 ( πειθυ-α ) πειθώ 
 πειθοϊ 
 
 ?}ρω-ς 
 
 ηρω-ος 
 
 ηρω-ι 
 
 ηρω-α ηρω 
 i /ρω-ς 
 
 Plur. ηρω-ες 
 ηρώ-ων 
 ηρω-σι(ν ) 
 ηρω-ας Or 
 ΐ}ρως 
 
 Dual and Plural of πείθω are 
 formed as in the o declension. 
 
 Dual ηρω-ε 
 ϊ'ΐρώ-οιν 
 
 § 1G1. Dialects. —The Epic dialect lengthens the ε of Stems in ευ 
 into η before vowels : βασιλή-ος, βασιλή-ι, βασιλή-α, βασιλή-ες, βασιλίδων, 
 
62 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 163 . 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 ή ηχώ (St. ήχο), echo. 
 
 Καλυψώ, Αητώ, δμώ-ς (St. ip), slave, 
 μητρω-ς (St. μη r p ω), avunculus. 
 
 § 163. The Stems in o, all feminine, form the Nom. Sing, 
 without sigma, except the Stem a l δ o, Nom. Sing, αιδώ-ς, 
 shame , Acc. αιδώ. The Acc., which is like the Nom., is 
 oxytone (contrary to § 87) : πειθώ, not πειθώ. 
 
 The Vocative ends in ο i ; all other cases are contracted. 
 The Acc. of Stems in ω usually remains uncontracted. 
 The Stem I ω, Nom. η εω-ς, dawn , has Gen. Sing, εω, Dat. 
 a»> (according to § 132), Acc. εω (from εωα). 
 
 Obs. — Several Stems in o v follow tlie above declension in some of 
 tlieir forms : άηύών, nightingale , Gen. άηύονς, with άηδόνος ; είκών, 
 image, Gen. εΐκοϋς (compare § 171). 
 
 άριστη-εσσι(ν) ( άριστεν-ς , prince ) ; still there are Genitives also in ε ο ς 
 and εν ς (Οδνσενς), Datives in ε V, ε i, and Accusatives in ε a, η : Τνδή. 
 The New-Ionic dialect leaves ε frequently uncontracted: βασιλε-ες. 
 
 § 163. Dialects. —Homer contracts ήρωϊ into ηρφ, Μ ίνωα into Μίνω. 
 The old and poetic form for εω-ς is ηώ-ς (St. η 6), declined like αίδώ-ς. 
 Some proper names in ω in the Nom. Sing, have in the New-Ionic 
 dialect an Acc. in ovv : λητονν, Ίοΰν. 
 
165 . 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 63 
 
 III. Elided Stems, i. e Stems which reject the final 
 
 consonant in certain forms. 
 
 § 164. l. Σ Stems , i. e., Stems which elide sigma. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 το γένος, race, 
 γ ε v ε ς 
 
 Μ. εύγενής, Ν. εύγεν&ς, of good family, 
 ευ γ εν ε ς 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Oat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 γένος [genus] 
 
 ( γενε-ος) γένους 
 (γενε -i) γενει 
 γένος 
 γένος 
 
 Μ. εύγενής Ν. εύγενές 
 
 (εύγενέ-ος) εύγενοϋς 
 (εύγενέ-ί) εύγενεϊ 
 (εύγενέ-ά) εύγενή IT. εύγενές 
 εύγενές Ν. εύγενές 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 (γένε-ε) γένη 
 (γενέ-οιν ) γενοΐν 
 
 (εύγενέ-ε) εύγενή 
 (εύγενέ-οιν) εύγενοΊν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. V. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 (γένε-ά) γένη 
 ( γενέ-ων) γενών 
 γένε-σι(ν) 
 
 ( γένε-ά) γένη 
 
 (εύγενέ-ες) εύγενεΊς IT. (εύγενέα) εύγενή 
 
 (εύγενέ-ων) εύγενών 
 
 εύγενέ-σι(ν) 
 
 (εύγενέ-άς) εύγενεΊς IT. (εύγενέα) εύγενή 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 το είδος, form. κάλλος, "beauty. μέλος, song. άχθος, burden. 
 Adjectives: 
 
 σαφής, Neut. σαφές, clear. ακριβής, Neut. ακριβές, exact. 
 
 ευήθης, Neut. εύηθες, simple. 
 
 § 165. The sigma Stems retain their final consonant only 
 when it stands at the end, i. e., in the Nom. Acc. and Yoc. 
 Sing. Neuter, and in the Nom. and Yoc. Sing. Masc. and 
 Fern. 
 
 The Neuter substantives change the Stem-vowel ε into 
 
 o in the Nom. Acc. and Yoc. Sing.: St. γενες, γένος. 
 
 * 
 
 § 165. Dialects. —The Epic dialect frequently, the New-Ionic always, 
 leaves the vowels of the sigma Stems uncontracted: γένεος, γένε'ΐ. 
 Horn, sometimes has the Gen. Sing, ενς (from ε ο ς, § 37, D. 1) : θάρ~ 
 σευς ( θάρσος , courage'). 
 
 In the Dative Plur. Homer has three endings : ε-εσ σ ι(ν), εσ-σι ( v ), 
 and the usual ε-σ i(y) : βελέ-εσσι(ν), βέλεσ~σι(ν), βέλε-σι(ν), (βέλος, dart). 
 
64 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 166 . 
 
 Neuter adjectives leave ε unchanged: εύγενές. Masculines 
 and Feminines form the Nom. Sing, by lengthening ες 
 into ης (§ 147, 2), as ς can not be affixed: εύγενής from 
 ε υ y ε ν ε ς*, like ποιμην from π οι μεν. 
 
 Masculines and Feminines have the pure Stem in the 
 Yoc. Sing., and in compound words which are not oxytone 
 in Nom. Sing, the accent is on the last syllable but two 
 (compare §§ 148, 85) : Nom. Σωκράτης, Yoc. Σώκρατες ; 
 Nom. Δημοσθένης*, Yoc. Αημόσθενες. 
 
 Obs. —The Neuter άληθές (Masc. αληθής , true) draws hack the accent 
 in interrogations: αληθές ; really ? 
 
 § 166. In all other forms ς is rejected (§§ 61 and 49): 
 γενε -t for γενεσ-ε \_gener-i~]. Wherever two vowels meet 
 they are contracted: εε in the Nom. Acc. and Yoc. Dual 
 become η ; εα generally η ; but when another vowel stands 
 before ε they sometimes become a, according to § 41 : St. 
 ενδεες, Nom. ενδεής, defective , Acc. ε νδεα ; St. ν γ t ε ς, Nom. 
 ύγίϊ'/ς, healthy , Acc. vyia, but also νγεη ; St. χρεες, Nom. 
 το χρέος, debt , Neut. Plur. χρεα. The adjectives in -φυης 
 (St. φυες) have φυή and φυά : ευφυής, well-disjposed , ευφυή 
 and εύφυά. 
 
 Obs .—Barytone adjectives have the accent in the Gen. Plur. on the 
 last syllable but one, contrary to § 87: αυτάρκων (Nom. αυτάρκης , 
 self-sufficient). So also τριήρης , trireme , used as a substantive, 
 Gen. Plur. τριήρων. 
 
 § 167. Proper names in - κλεης , compounded with κλέος , glory (St. 
 κλεες), have a double contraction in the Dat. Sing., and a single 
 one in all the other cases : Nom. ( Περικλεής ) ΤΙερικλης , Gen. (Περι- 
 κλεεος) Περικλεούς , Dat. (Περικλεεϊ, Περικλεει) Περικλεΐ, Acc. (ΓΙερικλεεα) 
 Περικλέά, Voc. (Περικλεες) Περίκλεις. 
 
 § 166. Dialects. — A vowel before ε is often contracted with it in 
 Homer : σπεος or σπεΊος, cave , Gen. σπείονς , Dat. σπή-ι (from σπέεϊ ), Dat. 
 Plur. σττήεσσι(ν) and σπ'εσσι(ν) ; ευκλεής , glorious , Acc. ευκλεΊας (from 
 ευκλεεας ) , but άκληεΊς (from άκλεής, ingloi'ious). Herodotus ενδεέες (ενδεής, 
 defective), άνθρωποφυεας (άνθρωποφυής, human). 
 
 § 167. Dialects. — The Epic dialect forms Ηρακλής, Ήρακλή-ος, 
 'Η ρακλή-ι, 'Η ρακλή-α ; the New-Ionic, 'Ηρακλέης, Ήρακλέ-ος, 'Ηρακλε -i, 
 'Η ρακλε-α. 
 
§ 169 . 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 65 
 
 168. 2. T Stems , £ Stems which elide r. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 το κεράς , hom. 
 κεράτ 
 
 τδ κρέας , meat, 
 κ ρεατ 
 
 Singular. 
 
 nr. A. v. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 κεράς 
 
 κέράτ-ος ( κέραος ) κέρως 
 
 κέράτ-ι ( κέρα'ί ) κέρρ 
 
 κρέας 
 
 (κρέαος) κρέως 
 
 (κρέα'ΐ) κρέςι 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 κίράτ-ε ( κέραε ) κερά 
 
 κεράτ-οεν ( κεράοιν ) κεριρν 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 Gen. 
 
 Dcit. 
 
 κέρατ-α (κέραα ) κερά 
 
 κεράτ-ων (κεράων) κερών 
 
 κέρά-σι(ν) 
 
 (κρέαα ) κρεά 
 
 (κρεάων) κρεών 
 
 κρέά-σι(ν ) 
 
 § 169. r becomes ς in Nom. Acc. and Yoc. Sing., accord¬ 
 ing to § 67. In the other cases some words always reject 
 it: e. cj ., κρέας , σέλας, splendor ; γΓ/ρας, ctge } κνίσας, gloom. 
 Others, like κεράς, retain both forms together, with and 
 without r. The vowels which meet are regularly contract¬ 
 ed. The quantity of a is very fluctuating. The Dat. Sing, 
 is written also αι : σε'λαε. 
 
 In prose, only a few Neuters (Nom. ας) have a mova¬ 
 ble r. 
 
 § 1G9. Dialect?.—Homer has δέττα-εσσι(ν) or δέπασ-σι(ν), Dat. Plur. 
 of δέπας, goblet. In Ionic a often becomes ε : Homer ούδας , ground , 
 Gen. ονδε-ος, κώας , fleece , Nom. Plur. κώε-α ; κεράς, New-Ionic Gen. 
 κέρεος. 
 
 A movable r appears also in the Stems ί δρω r, γελώ r, χρωτ (Nom. 
 Ιδρώς , sweat; γέλως , laughter ; χρως , Dat. ίορ<ρ, Acc. ίδρώ, together 
 
 with Gen. ίδρωτος ; γέλω ; and regularly in Homer χρο-ός, χρο-ΐ (poet. 
 Xp(f), χρό-α. Compare αιδώς , ήώς, § 1G3. 
 
66 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 170 . 
 
 § 170. 3. N Stems , i. e Stems which elide v. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 M. F. μείζων , greater. N. μεϊζον 
 
 με ιζ ον 
 
 Singular. 
 N. V. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Oat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 9 
 
 μείζων N. μεϊζον 
 
 μείζον-ος 
 
 μείζον-ι 
 
 μείζον-α [ μειζοα ] μείζω Ν. μεϊζον 
 
 Dual. 
 
 jv. a. v. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 μείζον-ε 
 
 μειζόν-οιν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. V. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 μείζον-ες [μειζοες] μείζους Ν. μείζονα [ μειζοα ] μείζω 
 
 μειζόν-ων 
 
 μεί ζο-σι{ν) 
 
 μείζον-ας [μειζοας~\ μείζους Η. μείζονα [μεεζοα] μείζω 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 βελτίων, letter. αίσχίων, more hateful. άλγίων , more painful. 
 
 § 171. The full and the contracted forms are equally in 
 use. But the open ones {μπζοα) never occur. Compara¬ 
 tives of more than two syllables throw back the accent in 
 the Nom. Acc. and Yoc. Sing. Neuter upon the last syllable 
 but two : βελτιον 5 αΐσχιον. 
 
 Besides the comparatives (Nom. ω v, ov), there are only 
 the two proper names, 'Απόλλων (Stem, and Nom.) and Πο- 
 σείδών (Stem and Nom.), Acc. Άττολλω (also Άττολλων-α), 
 Ποσεεδω (also Ποσείδύν-α). On the Vocative, see § 148, 
 Ohs. We may compare several Stems which fluctuate be¬ 
 tween o v and o (§ 163). 
 
 § 171. Dialects. —Homer forms tlie Acc. κνκεώ or κνκειώ from κνκεών } 
 
 mixture . 
 
172. 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 G7 
 
 § 172. Synopsis of terminations in the Second Principal 
 Declension. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Stem. 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 in -a 
 
 -ατ 
 
 τδ σώμα , hody. 
 
 σώματος 
 
 -αις 
 
 -αιδ 
 
 -αιτ 
 
 δ τταΊς , 1 ) 01 /. 
 η δαίς, meal. 
 
 τταιδός 
 
 δαιτός 
 
 -dv M. 
 -αν N. 
 
 -αν 
 
 -αντ 
 
 Πάν, Ραπ. 
 
 Adj. το τταν , the whole. 
 
 Πανός 
 
 7 ταντός 
 
 ~a? 
 
 -αρ 
 
 -αρτ 
 
 -α(ρ)τ 
 
 τό tap, spring. 
 
 7) δάμαρ , wife, 
 τδ φρέαρ, fountain. 
 
 εαρος 
 
 δάμαρτος 
 
 φρ'εατος 
 
 -ας F. 
 -ας N. 
 
 -αδ 
 
 -α{τ) 
 
 η λαμπάς, lamp, 
 τδ κρέας , meat. 
 
 λαμττάδος 
 
 κρεως 
 
 -ας M. 
 
 -αντ 
 
 -αν 
 
 δ γίγάς, giant. 
 
 Adj. μιλάς , hlacJc. 
 
 ■γίγαντος 
 
 μελανός 
 
 -αυς F. 
 
 -α(υ) 
 
 η γραΰς , old woman. 
 
 γράός 
 
 -ειρ 
 
 -ειρ 
 
 7) χειρ , hand. 
 
 χειρός 
 
 -εις Μ. 
 
 F. 
 
 -εντ 
 
 -εν 
 
 -ειδ 
 
 Part, λυθείς, loosed. 
 
 Adj. είς, one. 
 
 7) κλείς, hey. 
 
 λνθέντος 
 
 ενός 
 
 κλειδυς 
 
 -εν K 
 
 -εντ 
 
 -εν 
 
 Part, λνθέν, loosed. 
 
 Adj. άρρεν , male. 
 
 λυθεντος 
 
 άρρενος 
 
 -ες Κ 
 
 -«(e) 
 
 Adj. σαφές , clear. 
 
 σαφούς 
 
 -ευς Μ. 
 
 -ε(υ) 
 
 δ φονενς , murderer. 
 
 φονέως 
 
 -ην Μ. 
 
 1 1 
 •3 2 
 
 δ λιμην, harbor, 
 δ "Ελλην , Greek. 
 
 λιμένος 
 
 "Ελληνος 
 
 -ηρ 
 
 -ερ 
 
 -ηρ 
 
 δ αίθηρ , ather. 
 δ θηρ, game. 
 
 αί$ερος 
 
 θηρός 
 
68 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 172. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 Stem. 
 
 .." — . ..... —.mm— 
 
 Gen. 
 
 -ης 
 
 -ητ 
 
 7 / βαρύτης , weight. 
 
 βαρντητος 
 
 - £ (e) 
 
 o, >) τριηρης , trireme. 
 
 τριηρους 
 
 -ι N. 
 
 -L 
 
 Adj. ’idpi, acquainted with. 
 
 ΐδριος 
 
 -IT 
 
 το μίλι, honey. 
 
 μελιτος 
 
 -IV 
 
 -IV 
 
 d δελφίν, dolphin. 
 
 δελφίνος 
 
 
 -l 
 
 η πόλις , city. 
 
 πόλεως 
 
 
 -id 
 
 η ελπίς, hope. 
 
 ελπίδος 
 
 -IQ 
 
 -ir 
 
 V χάρις, favor. 
 
 χάριτος 
 
 
 -ΊΘ 
 
 o, 7) όρνις, bird. 
 
 υρνιθος 
 
 
 -IV 
 
 7) Σάλαμίς, Salamis. 
 
 Σαλαμίνας 
 
 -ov N. 
 
 -ov 
 
 Adj. εύδαιμον, fortunate. 
 
 εύδαίμονος 
 
 -OVT 
 
 Part, λυον, loosing. 
 
 λύοντος 
 
 -o£ N. 
 
 
 το γένος, race. 
 
 γένους 
 
 -or 
 
 Part, πεφνκός, having become. 
 
 πεφνκότος 
 
 
 -OVT 
 
 0 οδούς , tooth. 
 
 όδυντος 
 
 -OVQ 
 
 -od 
 
 d 7 τους, foot. 
 
 πόδος 
 
 
 -o(v) 
 
 d, 7) βονς, OX, COW. 
 
 βοός 
 
 -v N. 
 
 -V 
 
 το άστν, city. 
 
 άστεος 
 
 -vv M. 
 
 -vv 
 
 d μόσνν, wooden tower. 
 
 μόσννος 
 
 K 
 
 -VVT 
 
 Part. dtiKvdv, showing. 
 
 δεικνύντος 
 
 
 -vvr 
 
 Part. deiKvvQ, shmcing. 
 
 δεικνύντος 
 
 -VQ M. 
 
 -v 
 
 d ιχθύς, fish. 
 
 ιχθύος 
 
 
 
 0 πηχνς, ell. 
 
 πηχεως 
 
 F. 
 
 -i >d 
 
 7) χλαμύς, cloak. 
 
 χλαμύδος 
 
 -ω F. 
 
 -o 
 
 7) πειθώ, persuasion. 
 
 πείρους 
 
 
 -ov 
 
 7) αηδών, nightingale. 
 
 άηδόνος 
 
 -ων 
 
 -ων 
 
 d άγων, contest. 
 
 άγώνος 
 
 M. 
 
 -ovr 
 
 d λέων, lion. 
 
 λέοντος 
 
 -ωρ 
 
 -op 
 
 ■ 
 
 d ρητωρ, orator. 
 
 ρήτορας 
 
§ 173. 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 69 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Stem. 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 -ω 
 
 ύ τ/ρως, hero. 
 
 ηρωος 
 
 -ως M. 
 
 -o 
 
 -or 
 
 7) αιδώς , shame. 
 
 Part, πεφνίϊώς, having become. 
 
 αίδονς 
 
 7 τεφυκότος 
 
 
 -ior 
 
 ό έρως, love. 
 
 ’έρωτος 
 
 
 -7Γ 
 
 ΰ γύψ, vidture. 
 
 ■γνπύς 
 
 "Ψ 
 
 -β 
 
 δ χάΧνψ, steel. 
 
 χάΧνβος 
 
 
 -Φ 
 
 η κατη\ψ, upper story. 
 
 κατηΧιφος 
 
 
 -K 
 
 υ <ρν\αξ, guard. 
 
 φΰΧακος 
 
 
 -y 
 
 r) ψλόζ, flame. 
 
 φΧογός 
 
 s 
 
 -x 
 
 δ ΰννξ) nail. 
 
 δνΰχος 
 
 
 -ΚΓ 
 
 7) ννζ, night. 
 
 ννκτός 
 
 § 173. The Second Principal Declension agrees with the 
 First in the following particulars : 
 
 1. Masculines have ς for the Nom. Sing, (or compensa¬ 
 tion for it); feminines are less consistent in this. · 
 
 2. The Dat. Sing, affixes i (subscribed in the First Prin¬ 
 cipal Declension). 
 
 3 . Vowel, and in part diphthongal, Stems take v in the 
 Acc. Sing. 
 
 Ohs .—The original ending of the Acc. Sing, was also in the Second 
 Principal Declension every where v. This consonant was, how¬ 
 ever, connected with consonant-Stems by the connecting vowel 
 a: όδοντ-α-ν= Lat. dent-e-m. Subsequently v was dropped, and a 
 left, generally as the only sign: δδόντ-α. 
 
 4 . The Gen. and Dat. Dual have i v (aiv, on/). 
 
 5 . The Gen. Plur. ω v . 
 
 6 . The Dat. Plur. σι(ν) originally every where. 
 
 7 . The Acc. Plur. ς every where. 
 
 Ohs. — The original ending of all Acc. Plur. was νς, but v was 
 dropped after vowels of the First Principal Declension, and was 
 compensated for by the lengthened a ς, ον ς. After consonants 
 there was the same process as in the Acc. Sing.: όδόν~-α(ν)-ς, 
 Lat. dent-e-s for dent-em-s. 
 
 8. Neuters all have a in Nom. Acc. and Voc. Plur. 
 
70 
 
 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. 
 
 §174. 
 
 The principal differences in the endings are: 
 
 1. In the Gen. Sing., where the Second Principal De¬ 
 clension always has ο ς (ως). 
 
 2. In the Nom. Plur., where Masc. and Fem. of the Sec¬ 
 ond Principal Declension always have ε ς. 
 
 Irregularities in Declension. 
 
 § 174. The mixing of two Stems which may have one 
 Norn, is called Ileteroclizing {ετεροκλισία, different inflex¬ 
 ion) : Nom. σκότος , darkness , Gen. σκότου (O-Declension), 
 and σκότους (Second Principal Declension) ; λαγώς, hare , 
 according to the Attic declension, but Acc. λαγύ. 
 
 An important irregularity of this kind occurs with proper 
 names in η ς : 'Σωκράτης (St. Σωκρατες ), but Acc. Σωκρά- 
 την (as if from Stem Σωκρατα of the A-Declension) with 
 Σωκράτη. But those in -κλης (§ 167) follow the Second 
 Principal Declension exclusively. 
 
 § 175. The formation of some cases from a Stem which 
 can not be that of the Nom. is called Metaplasm > {μετά - 
 πλασμός, change of formation)'. Nom. Sing, to SivSpov,^ 
 tree , Dat. Plur. δε'νδρεσί(ν), as if from Stem δενδρες ; Nom. 
 Sing, ro 3άκρνον, tear , Dat. Plur. δακρυσί(ν), from St. SaKpv 
 (poet. Νίκη. 8άκρν) ; το πυρ, fire, Plur. τα πυρά, Dat. τοίς 
 7τυροί ς (O-Declension) ; Nom. Sing, όνειρο-ς , dream , Gen. 
 όνείρατος, Nom. Plur. όνείρατα. 
 
 § 176. A peculiar irregularity appears in several Neuter 
 
 § 174. Dialects.—Several Masc. Stems in a, Nom. ης in Herodotus, 
 have ε a for η v in the Acc. Sing.: δεσπότη-ς , master , δεσπότεα. υ όχο-ς, 
 carriage, in Homer has Plur. τα όχεα, υχεσφι(ν ), from the St. όχες. 
 Οίδίπους has poet, forms from a St. Ο ί δ ι π ο δ α, Gen. Sing. Οίδιπόδαο, 
 trag. Οίδιπόδά. Homeric Σαρπηδών , Stems Σαριτηδον and Σαρπη- 
 δοντ. Μίνως, Acc. Sing. Μ ίνωα (§ 163) and Μινών. 
 
 § 175. Dialects. — Horn, metaplasms are: Dat. Plur. άνδραπόδεσσι(ν ), 
 Nom. Sing, άνδράποδον, slave; Nom. Acc. Plur. προσώπατα, Nom. Sing. 
 πρόσωπον , countenance / δ'εσματα , bonds, Sing, ΰ δεσμός ερίηρο-ς, trusty , 
 Nom. Plur. Ιρίηρες ; ά\κη , strength , Dat. Sing. ά\κ-ί ; νσμίνη , battle , ΰσμΊνι ; 
 ίχώρ, divine blood, Acc. Sing. ΐχώ. 
 
177. 
 
 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. 
 
 71 
 
 Stems in αρτ, as φρεαρτ. They reject r in the Nom. Acc. 
 and Yoc. Sing, and p in the other cases : το φρέαρ, well, 
 Gen. φρέατος (also φρητός ) ; το ήπαρ, liver , Gen. ηπατος ; 
 το αΧειφαρ and αΧειφα, salve , Gen. αΧείφατος. 
 
 To these correspond the Steins σκα(ρ)τ and ύδα(ρ)τ : 
 Nom. σκωρ, dirt, Gen. σκατυς ; ύδωρ, Gen. υδατος·. 
 
 § 177. Special irregularities in alphabetical order: 
 
 1. a v ή p, man (compare § 153), rejects ε of the Stem 
 avep, and inserts δ in its place (§ 51, Ohs. 2): αν-δ-ρ-υς·, 
 ανδρί, avSpa ; Yoc. ανερ; Dual, ανδρε, ανδροίν; Plur. a vSpcg, 
 ανορων, ανόρασι(ν), avcpag. 
 
 2. Ά ρ η ς (^Λβ Aj’&s) : St. Άρε ς, Gen. ’Άρεως and 
 Άρεος, Acc. ’Άρην, together with ’Άρη ; Yoc. regul. Άρες. 
 
 3. α ρ ν, without Nom. : Gen. του and της αρν-ός, of the 
 lamb , αρνί, αρνα , Dat. Plur. αρνασε(ν). 
 
 4. το γόνυ, Icnee (genu), Nom. Acc. Yoc. All the rest 
 from St. γονατ, Gen. γδνατος. 
 
 5. η yvv //, woman. All the rest from St. γ v v a ι κ-, 
 Gen. yvvatKog, Dat. γυναικί, Acc. γυναίκα, Yoc. γύναι ; Dual 
 γυναίκε, γυναίκοιν ; Plur. γυναίκ-ες·, -ών, -ξί(ν), -ας·. 
 
 6. το δόρυ, wood, sjpear : St. δ ο ρ α τ (comp. 4.). Gen. 
 Αόρατος, poet, δ ο ρ ο ς*, Dat. δορί and δορεί. 
 
 7. Ζευς (the god Zeus), Gen. Δίος, Dat. Αιί, Acc. Δία, 
 Yoc. Ζευ. 
 
 8. o and η κυων, dog , with Yoc. κυον, from St. κυον. 
 All the rest from κ υ v: Gen. κυνος*, Dat. κΰνί, Acc. κύνα ; 
 Plur. κύνες, κυνων, κυσί(ν), κυνας. 
 
 9. ο Χα-ς, stone , from Horn. Χαα-ς, Gen. Χα-ος, Dat. λα-ί. 
 
 § 177. Dialects. — The following forms are peculiar to dialects: 
 
 1. άνη ρ, poet. ’ άν'ερ-ος , ' άνερ-ι , 'dvkp-a ; Dat. Plur. άνδρεσσι(ν). 
 
 2. "Αρης, Homer "Αρηος, ” ΑρηΊ , "Αρηα. 
 
 4. γόυυ, Ion. and poet, -γοννάτ-ος , γοννατ -d, γοννάσ ι(ν); Ερ. Gen. Sing, 
 γουνός, Plur. γούνα , -γουνών , -γονν-εσσι(ν). 
 
 0. δόρυ, δοι'ιρατος, Ερ. δονρός , δονρί, δονρε , δονρα , δονρων , δονρεσσι{ν). 
 
 7. Ζευς, poet. St. Ζην : Ζην-ός, Ζην-ί,Ζ ήν-α (also Ζ/]υ, from Ζ//). 
 
72 
 
 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. 
 
 177. 
 
 Acc. Xaa-v, Xav ; Plur. λα-ες*, λά-ων, Χά-εσσι(ν) or λά-εσί(ν), 
 Χα-ας. 
 
 10. ό μά ρτύ-ς, witness , with Dat. Plur. μάρτυσι(ν), from 
 St. μα ρτ υ. The rest from the St. μ a p r υ p : μάρτυρος, 
 μάρτυρι , etc. 
 
 11. η V α ύ-ς, ship , νε-ώς·, νη-'ι, ναύ-ν ; Plur. νη-ες, νε-ών, 
 ναν-σι(ν), ναύς. Compare ^ 159. 
 
 Ohs . — The Nom. Acc. Sing, and Dat. Acc. Plur. rest on the St. vav. 
 Before vowels vav becomes (according to § 35, D. 2) νηΡ , vi] ; νε-ώς 
 is for νη-ός (§ 37, D. 2). 
 
 12. ό and η όρνϊ-ς, bird, St. όρνιθ and 6pvt : όρνιθ-ος , 
 ορνίθι, όρνιθα, and ορνιν ; Plur. όρνιθες and όρνεις, ορνέων. 
 
 13 . το ο υ ς, ear. All the rest from St. ώ r : ώτυς, ώτί ; 
 Plur. ώτα, ωτων, ώ-σί(ν). (On the accent, § 142, 3.) 
 
 14 . η Π ν ν ζ {the Pnyx), St. π υ κ ν, Πυκν-ος, ΪΙυκν-ί, 
 ΤΙύκν-α. 
 
 15 . ό π ρεσβυ-ς, the aged , has in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., 
 and throughout the Plur., its forms from πρεσβυτα (Nom. 
 Sing, πρεσβύτης) : πρέσβεις, πρέσβεων, πρεσβεσι(ν), signifies 
 embassadors , to which the Sing, is πρεσβευτής. 
 
 16 . τά v. Only Voc. ώ τάν or ω ταν, friend or friends, 
 a defective Stem. 
 
 17. ό υιός, son, St. υ ι ο, υ ι, υ ι ευ, Gen. υίεος, Dat. Vltl, 
 Acc. υιεα (rare), Plur. υιείς, υιεων, υίεσι(ν), υιείς. But also 
 regularly υιού, etc. 
 
 18 . η χεΐρ, hand, St. χειρ, Dual χεροΊν, Dat. PI. χερσί(ν). 
 
 Dialects.—11. να D -ς, from St. νην, Ion. νην-ς , Horn. Acc. Sing, νή-α , 
 Dat. Plur. νηεσσι(ν), νηνσί(ν ), Acc. νήας. 
 
 from St. νεν, Ion. νε-ός , νε-ί, νε-α , νε-ες , νε-ών, νε-εσσι, νε-ας. 
 from St. vav , Dor. νά-ός, να-ί (navi), νά-εσσι(ν). 
 
 13. ονς , Ιοη. ονας , ονατ-ος ; Plur. ονατ-α , Dor. ως , ωτ-ός. 
 
 17. νιό-ς, Ερ. Gen. νι-ος , νΐ -t, νϊ-α, vl -ες, νι-άσι(ν), νΐ-ας. 
 
 18. χείρ, poet, and New-Ion. χερ-ύς, χερ-ί, Ερ. Dat. Plur. χείρ-εσι or 
 χείρ-εσσι(ν). 
 
 To these add the words which are anomalous only in dialects: 
 
 19. Homer Άίδη-ς (Α.ϋ."Αιδης), St. ’A t <5, Gen. "A 'ίδ-ος,”Αΐδ-ι, also ’At* 
 δωνεύ-ς, with regular inflexion, according to § 159. 
 
178. 
 
 CASE-LIKE TERMINATIONS. 
 
 73 
 
 Case-like Terminations. 
 
 § 178. Besides the case-endings, there occur certain suf¬ 
 fixes or appendages, which in meaning very nearly resem¬ 
 ble case-endings. To these belong : 
 
 1. -9i, answering to the question where: ά\\ο-θι, else¬ 
 
 where / 
 
 2. -9iv, answering to the question whence: οΊκο-9εν , 
 
 from home ; 
 
 3. -Sc, answering to the question whither : onca-Sc, home¬ 
 
 wards. 
 
 Dialects—20. ό φως, love, Stems ε ρ ω τ and ε p o, poet. Acc. φο-ν. 
 
 21. θ'εμις, justice, St. θεμι and θεμιστ, Pllir. θεμιστ-ες, θεμιστ-ας. 
 
 22. το κάρα, head, Horn. St. κ α ρ η τ, κ α ρ ΐ] α τ, κ ρ ά ατ, κ ρ άτ, κ α ρ. 
 
 Horn. Norn. Sing. κάρη. 
 
 Gen. “ κάρητ-ος, καρηατ-ος, κράατ-ος, κρατ-ός. 
 
 Oat. α κάρητ-ι, καρηατ-ι, κράατ-ι, κράτ -i (trag. κάρα). 
 
 Acc. α κάρη, τον κράτ-α, το κάρ. 
 
 Norn. Plur. κάρα, καρήατ-α, κράατ-α, secondary form κάρηνα. 
 
 Gen. α κρατών, καρηνων. 
 
 Oat. α κρασιών). 
 
 Acc. u —Noril. (also τους κράτ-ας ). 
 
 23. η μάστιζ, whip, Horn. Dat. μάστΊ, Acc. μάστι-ν. 
 
 24. ο μείς, month, Ion. = Att. μην. 
 
 25. όσσε, eyes. Nom. Acc. Dual, Neut. in Homer. The trag. have 
 Gen. Plur. δσσων, Dat. υσσχης or υσσοισι(ν). 
 
 § 178. Dialects.—The three local suffixes are very frequent in Horn.: 
 ο’ίκοθι, at home ; Ίλωθι ττρό, in front of Ilios ; ούρανόθεν, from heaven ; 
 άγορηθεν, from the assembly, θεν also supplies the place of the Gen.- 
 ending: κατά κρηθεν, down from the head, entirely ; ίζ άλόθεν, out of the 
 sea. -δε is generally affixed to the Acc.: οΐκόνδε, homewards ; κΧισίηνδε, 
 into the tent ; πόΧινδε, into the city ; ψόβονδε, into flight, φύγαδε, into* 
 fight, and ΐραζε, to the earth, arc peculiar. 
 
 A suffix peculiar to the Horn, language is ψ i(v) ; it is added to the 
 Stem of nouns, and supplies the place of the Gen. or Dat. termination 
 in both Sing, and Plur., as : 
 
 1. A- dccl. : βίη-ψι, with force; κΧισίη-<ρι, in the tent ; άπδ νενρη-φιν, 
 from the bow-siring. 
 
 2. O-decl.: θεό-φιν, from the gods ; ΊΧιό-φιν, from Ilios. 
 
 3. Cons.-decl. : ■ κοτνΧηδον-ό-φιν, with the suckers (on the feelers of the 
 polypus); απ' δχεσ-φι(ν), from the carriage; παρά vav-<fn(v), alongside 
 the ships ; άπδ κράτεσ-ρν,β'οιιι the head. (§ 177, D. 22.) 
 
 T) 
 
74 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § no. 
 
 These suffixes are joined to the Stem of the noun: 
 Άθήνηθεν, from Athens (with Ion. i \); κυκλόθεν, from the 
 circle (κυκλό-ς). Sometimes o comes in place of the A- 
 sound: ριζόθεν ( radicitus ), from ρίζα {radix) ; it also serves 
 as a connecting vowel with consonant-stems : πάντ-ο-θεν , 
 from cdl sides. The o is sometimes accented, contrary to 
 § 107, ct : κυκλ-ό-θεν, Μαραθων-ό-θεν, from Marathon. 
 The enclitic suffix δ ε (§ 92, 5) is often also combined with 
 the Acc. form : Μέγαρά-δε, to Alegar a ; ΈλευσΤ ν-ά-δε, to 
 Eleusis. ο’/κ-α-δε, home , from Stem οίκο, is irregular. 
 
 For δ ε we find σε, ζ ε, with the same meaning : άλλο σε, 
 elsewhither · Άθηναζε, to Athens ; θ η βάζε, to Thebes ; 
 Ούραζε (forces). 
 
 § 179. Moreover, a few words have an old Locative in 
 i for the Sing., and σι(ν) (without a preceding t) for the 
 Plur., answering the question where: οίκοι, at home / Πυ- 
 θοΐ, at Pytho ; Ισθμοί, on the Isthmus; Άθηι >r\ai{v),in 
 Athens / Π \araiaai{v),in Plat eject ,* θνρασι(ν), at the door 
 {folds) ; ωράσι{ν), at the right time . 
 
 Chap. VII.—Other Inflexions of the Adjective. 
 
 % 
 
 A. Inflexion according to Genders. 
 
 Adjectives of the Vowel Declension. 
 
 § 180. The most numerous class of adjectives is that 
 which in the Masc. and Kent, follows the O-Declension, 
 and in the Fern, the A-Declension; which, consequently, 
 has in the Nom. Sing, ος, η (or a), ov [Lat. us, a, uni\. 
 
 § 180. Dialect3.—The Ionians have frequently here also η for Aft. 
 a : αισχρή. 
 
182 . 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 bj r* 
 
 <D 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 άγαθός 
 
 αγαθή 
 
 αγαθόν 
 
 φίλως 
 
 φιλία 
 
 φίλων 
 
 Gen. 
 
 άγαθου 
 
 αγαθής 
 
 άγαθου 
 
 φελίον 
 
 φιλίας 
 
 φιλιού 
 
 Bat. 
 
 άγαθιμ 
 
 άγαθ /j 
 
 άγαθφ 
 
 φιλίιμ 
 
 φιλία 
 
 φιλίιμ 
 
 Ace. 
 
 αγαθόν 
 
 αγαθήν 
 
 άγαθόν 
 
 φίλων 
 
 φιλίαν 
 
 φίλων 
 
 Voc. 
 
 αγαθέ. 
 
 άγαθη 
 
 άγαθύν 
 
 φίλιε 
 
 φιλία 
 
 φίλων 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 > Γ\ ' 
 
 αγαοω 
 
 αγαθά 
 
 άγαθώ 
 
 φιλίω 
 
 φιλία 
 
 φιλίω 
 
 G. B. 
 
 άγαθοΊν 
 
 άγαθαίν 
 
 άγαθοΊν 
 
 φιλίοιν 
 
 φιλίαιν 
 
 φιλίοιν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 αγαθοί 
 
 άγαθαί 
 
 αγαθά 
 
 φίλιοι 
 
 φίλιαι 
 
 φιλιά 
 
 Gen. 
 
 άγαθών 
 
 άγαθών 
 
 άγαθών 
 
 φιλιών 
 
 φιλιών 
 
 φιλιών 
 
 Bat. 
 
 άγαθοΊς 
 
 άγαθαΊς 
 
 άγαθοΊς 
 
 φιλίοις 
 
 φιλίαις 
 
 φιλίοις 
 
 Ace. 
 
 άγαθονς 
 
 αγαθός 
 
 άγαθά 
 
 φιλίους 
 
 φιλίας 
 
 φιλιά 
 
 In the Nom. Sing. Fem. a stands after a vowel or p , else¬ 
 where η : δίκαιος, δικαία, δίκαιον, just / αισχρός, αισχρά, 
 αισχρόν, llClteful j σοφός, σοφή, σοφόν, Wise·. 
 
 Exception : η stands after ο, except when p precedes o : 
 άπλύος, άττλόη , άπλόον , simple, 
 άθρόος , άθρόά, άθρόον, assembled. 
 
 § 181. Though the declension of these adjectives con¬ 
 forms to §§ 114, 126, the following points must be ob¬ 
 served : 
 
 1. a in the Nom. Sing, is always long. 
 
 2. In the accent of the Nom. and Gen. Plur. the Fem. 
 follows the Masc.: βέβαιος, firm , Nom. Plur. Masc. βέ¬ 
 βαιοι, Fem. βέβαιαι (§ 108 would require βιβαίαι, from 
 Nom. Sing, βέβαια) ; Gen. of all genders, βεβαίων (not even 
 in the Fem. βεβαιών, as would be required by § 118). 
 
 § 182. Many adjectives of this class have only two end- 
 
 § 181. Dialects.— όΊα, Fem. of οΐος, heavenly, lias in Horn, ά : Sla θεάων, 
 the heavenly one among the goddesses. 
 
 § 182. Dialects.—The poets form a peculiar Fem. from many com¬ 
 pound adjectives: άβρότη (Masc. άμβροτος , immortal ), άν7ΐθίη (Masc. 
 άντίθεος , godlike). 
 
76 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § 183. 
 
 ings, the Masc. being used for the Fem.: Masc. and Fem. 
 ήσυχος, Neut. ησνχον, guiet. Compound adjectives espe¬ 
 cially are all of only tioo endings : άτεκνος, childless ; 
 καρποφόρος, fruitful. 
 
 § 183. Adjectives ending in ε ο ς* and ο ο ς in the Nom. 
 Masc. are generally contracted (§ 130): χρνσεος, golden , 
 and απλόος, simple , are thus contracted: 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 χρυσοΰς 
 
 χρυσή 
 
 χρυσούν 
 
 άπλούς 
 
 άπλή 
 
 άπλούν 
 
 Gen. 
 
 χρυσού 
 
 χρυσής 
 
 χρυσού 
 
 απλού 
 
 απλής 
 
 άπλού 
 
 Dat. 
 
 χρνσιρ 
 
 χρυσή 
 
 χρυσού 
 
 άπλφ 
 
 απλή 
 
 άπλψ 
 
 Acc. 
 
 χρυσοΰν 
 
 χρυσήν 
 
 χρυσούν 
 
 άπλούν 
 
 απλήν 
 
 άπλούν 
 
 Voc. 
 
 χρυσούς 
 
 χρυσή 
 
 χρυσούν 
 
 απλούς 
 
 άπλή 
 
 άπλούν 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 χρυσώ 
 
 χρυσά 
 
 χρυσώ 
 
 άπλώ 
 
 άπλά 
 
 άπλώ 
 
 G. D. 
 
 χρυσούν 
 
 χρυσοί ν 
 
 χρυσούι> 
 
 άπλούν 
 
 άπλαύν 
 
 άπλούν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 χρυσοί 
 
 χρυσού 
 
 χρυσά 
 
 απλού 
 
 άπλαύ 
 
 άπλά 
 
 Gen. 
 
 χρυσών 
 
 χρυσών 
 
 χρυσών 
 
 απλών 
 
 άπλών 
 
 άπλών 
 
 Dat. 
 
 χρυσούς 
 
 χρυσούς 
 
 χρυσούς 
 
 απλούς 
 
 άπλαύ ς 
 
 άπλού ς 
 
 Acc. 
 
 χρυσούς 
 
 χρυσός 
 
 χρυσά 
 
 απλούς 
 
 άπλάς 
 
 άπλά 
 
 The Fem. ε a is contracted to η, except when preceded 
 by a vowel or p\ it is then contracted to a : apyvpia, 
 apyvpa ( argentea ). The Nom. Plur. oa, oai, produce it: 
 at : απ\α, άπλαΤ. 
 
 The contracted final syllable also receives the circumflex, 
 contrary to § 87 : χρνσεος, χρυσοΰς. But compound adjec¬ 
 tives retain the accent on the last syllable but one : ευνους, 
 well-disposed, Gen. ευηου, Dat. ευνω, Nom. Plur. ευνοι. 
 
 § 184. A few adjectives in ω ς in the Norn, follow the 
 
 § 183. Dialects.—The adjectives in εος, οος, often remain uncon¬ 
 tracted : Horn, χρυσίφ (where ε disappears by synizesis), καλλίρροος , 
 beaut ifiilly-flowin g. 
 
 § 184. Dialects. — Horn. ' ίλάος , ττλεΤος, πλείη, πλεΤον; New-Ion. εος=ζ 
 Att. ε ω c ; for Att. σώς ( salvus ), Hom. συοο, η , ον, comparative σαώτερος. 
 
185. 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 77 
 
 Attic O-Declension (§ 132): '/λεως, Neut. '/λέων, gracious / 
 αζιόχρεως, Neut. -ων, considerable j Jj -λεως·, ττλε'α, πλεων, 
 σώς (from σάος, salmis) has in the Nom. Sing. Fein, 
 and Neut. Plur. σ a ; but also the forms σώος*, σώα, Plur. 
 σώο;, σώα;. 
 
 Adjectives of the Consonant Declension. 
 
 § 185. Other adjectives in the Masc. and Neut. follow 
 tlie Consonant Declension, and form from the Stem a pe¬ 
 culiar Fern, with the ending ia, which, however, undergoes 
 various changes in combination with the Stem. Such ad¬ 
 jective-stems of three denominations are: 
 
 l. Stems in v (Masc. and Neut., § 154). The Fern, is 
 formed from the Stem as it appears in the Gen. (ή St); ε 
 and i a are contracted, and the accent remains on the last 
 syllable of the Stem: hence— 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 No m. 
 
 ν-ς 
 
 εια 
 
 V 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 ηδύ-ς, sweet. 
 
 ήδεΊα 
 
 « t 
 
 7)CV 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ηδεος 
 
 ι/δείας 
 
 ηδεος 
 
 Oat. 
 
 ή δει 
 
 ή δε ία 
 
 ί) δέΐ 
 
 Acc. 
 
 ηδ νν 
 
 ήδεΊαν 
 
 ηδύ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 Nam. Acc. 
 
 ϊ)δεε 
 
 ι)δείά 
 
 ήδέε 
 
 Gen. Bat. 
 
 ηδεοιν 
 
 ηδείαιν 
 
 ηδέοιν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ηοεις 
 
 7)δείαι 
 
 ή δία 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ι)δεων 
 
 7/δειών 
 
 7}δ'εων 
 
 Bat. 
 
 ι)δέσι(ν) 
 
 ήδείαις 
 
 ηδεσι(ν) 
 
 Acc. 
 
 ιΐοεις 
 
 7)δείας 
 
 7)δέα 
 
 § 185. Dialects.—Horn, sometimes lias εη for Att. εια : βαθίη (βαθεΊα, 
 deep ); tlie Ion. ε a for eia : Horn, ώκεα Τρις, swift Iris. Besides θήλυς, 
 feminine, we find also ήδΰς, πονλΰς ( πολύς , much), as Fern. Sometimes 
 ε a is used for v v in tlie Acc. Sing. Masc.: ευρεα πόντον, the wide sea. 
 
78 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 186. 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 γλυκύς, sweet. βραχύς , short. ευρύς , broad, 
 
 βραδύς , slow. ταχύς, swift. 
 
 Ohs. — θήλυς, female, differing also in accent, occurs as a Feminine. 
 
 § 186. 2. Stems in v. The t in i a is transferred to the 
 preceding syllable (§ 55): St. μεΧαν, Nom. Masc. μίΧας, 
 Fein. μεΧαινα (from μεΧαν-ια), Neut. μεΧαν, hlctclc. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 μ'ελάς 
 
 μ'ελαινα 
 
 μελαν 
 
 Gen. 
 
 μελανός 
 
 μελαίνης 
 
 μελανός 
 
 Bat. 
 
 μελάνι 
 
 μελαίνφ 
 
 μελάνι 
 
 Acc. 
 
 μελαν a 
 
 μελαιναν 
 
 μελαν 
 
 Voc. 
 
 μελαν 
 
 μ'ελαινα 
 
 μελαν 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 K A. V. 
 
 μελανε 
 
 μελαίνα 
 
 μελανε 
 
 G. B. 
 
 μελάνοιν 
 
 μελαίναιν 
 
 μελάνοιν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 μελάνες 
 
 μελαιναι 
 
 μελανα 
 
 Gen. 
 
 μελανών 
 
 μελαινών 
 
 μελανών 
 
 Bat. 
 
 μελασι 
 
 μελαίναις 
 
 μελασι 
 
 Acc. 
 
 μελανας 
 
 μελαίνας 
 
 μελανα 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 St. ταλαν, τάλάς, τάλαινα, τάλάν , unfortunate. 
 
 St. τερεν, τ'ερην, τ'ερεινα, τερεν, tender. 
 
 § 187. 3. Stems in ντ. To these belong especially the 
 numerous participial forms. In the Fern, the ντ combines 
 with the ending l a to form σ a, the previous vowel being 
 lengthened by compensation (§ 50): Xtyovr-ia becoming 
 Χεγουσα. 
 
 The adjectives in err have εσσα in the Fern.: χαρίεις , 
 χαρίεσσα, χαρίεν, pleasing, St. χα p ιεν r. For the Fat. 
 Plur ., see § 149. 
 
 § 187. Dialects. —Adjectives in εντ (Nom. Masc. εις) arc sometimes 
 contracted : Horn, τιμ^ς—τιμηεις, honorablej λωτεύυτα—λωτοευτα, abound¬ 
 ing in lotuses ; poet, τττερουσσα—τττερόεσσα, winged. 
 
187. 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 79 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 loosing. 
 
 Χύσάς 
 
 Χΰσαντος 
 
 Χύσαντι 
 
 Χΰσαντα 
 
 Χΰσας 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Χΰσάσα 
 
 Χνσάσης 
 
 Χυσάσρ 
 
 Χνσαταν 
 
 Χΰσασα 
 
 Kent. 
 
 Χϋσάν 
 
 Χύσαντος 
 
 Χΰσαντι 
 
 Χϋσαν 
 
 Χϋσαν 
 
 Masc. 
 
 loosing. 
 
 Χΰων 
 
 Χύοντος 
 
 Χΰοντι 
 
 Χΰοντα 
 
 Χΰων 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Χΰουσα 
 
 Χυοΰσΐ]ς 
 
 Χυονσ /j 
 
 Χΰουσαν 
 
 Χΰουσα 
 
 Heut. 
 
 Χϋον 
 
 Χΰοντος 
 
 Χΰοντι 
 
 Χΰον 
 
 Χνον 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 Χΰσαντε 
 
 Χυσάσα 
 
 Χΰσαντε 
 
 Χΰοντε 
 
 Χυοΰσα 
 
 Χΰοντε 
 
 G. B. 
 
 Χνσάντοιν 
 
 Χυσάσαιν 
 
 Χυσάντοιν 
 
 Χυόντοιν 
 
 Χυοΰσαιν 
 
 Χυόντοιν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Χΰοντα 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Χΰσαντες 
 
 Χΰσασαι 
 
 Χΰσαντα 
 
 Χΰοντες 
 
 Χΰουσαι 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Χυσάντων 
 
 Χυσασών 
 
 Χυσάντων 
 
 Χυόντων 
 
 Χυουσών ' 
 
 Χυόντων 
 
 Oat. 
 
 Χΰσάσι 
 
 Χυσάσαις 
 
 Χΰσάσι 
 
 Χΰουσι 
 
 Χυοΰσαις 
 
 Χΰουσι 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Χΰσαντας 
 
 Χυσάσας 
 
 Χΰσαντα 
 
 Χΰοντας 
 
 Χυοΰσας 
 
 Χΰοντα 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 loosed. 
 
 Χυθείς 
 
 Χυθεί σα 
 
 Χυθεν 
 
 giving. 
 
 διδοΰς 
 
 διδουσα 
 
 διδόν 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Χυθίντος 
 
 Χυθείσης 
 
 Χυβεντος 
 
 διδόντος 
 
 διδοΰσης 
 
 διδύντος 
 
 Oat. 
 
 Χυθεντι 
 
 Χυθείσ y 
 
 Χυθεντι 
 
 δι δόντι 
 
 διδβΰσφ 
 
 διδόντι 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Χυθ'εντα 
 
 Χυθείσαν 
 
 Χυθεν 
 
 διδόντα 
 
 διδουσαν 
 
 διδόν 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Χυθείς 
 
 Χυβείσα 
 
 Χυθεν 
 
 διδοΰς 
 
 διδουσα 
 
 διδόν 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 Χυθ'εντε 
 
 Χυθείσα 
 
 Χυθ'εντε 
 
 διδόντε 
 
 διδοΰσα 
 
 διδόντε 
 
 G. B. 
 
 Χυθ'ειηοιν 
 
 Χυθείσαιν 
 
 Χυθ'εντοιν 
 
 διδόντοιν 
 
 διδοΰσαιν 
 
 διδόντοιΐ' 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 διδόντα 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Χνθεντες 
 
 Χυθείσαι 
 
 Χυθ'εντα 
 
 διδύντες 
 
 διδοϋσαι 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Χυθεντων 
 
 Χυθεισών 
 
 Χυθεντων 
 
 διδύντων 
 
 διδουσών 
 
 διδόντων 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Χυθείσι 
 
 Χυθείσαις 
 
 Χυθείσι 
 
 δι δοϋσι 
 
 διδοΰσαις 
 
 διδοϋσι 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Χυθεντας 
 
 Χυθείσας 
 
 Χυθ'εντα 
 
 δίδοντας 
 
 διδοΰσας 
 
 διδόντα 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 'pleasing. 
 
 χαρίεις 
 
 χαρίεσσα 
 
 χαράσσης 
 
 χαράσσι) 
 
 χαρίεν 
 
 showing. 
 
 δεικνΰς 
 
 δεικννσα 
 
 % 
 
 δεικνΰν 
 
 Gen. 
 
 χαρίεντος 
 
 χαρίεντος 
 
 δεικνΰντος 
 
 δεικνΰσης 
 
 δεικνΰντος 
 
 Bat. 
 
 χαρίεντι 
 
 χαρίε ντι 
 
 δεικνΰντι 
 
 δεικνΰσιρ 
 
 δεικνΰντι 
 
 Acc. 
 
 χαρίεντα 
 
 χαρίεσσαν 
 
 χαρίεν 
 
 δεικνΰντα 
 
 δεικνυσαν 
 
 δεικνΰν 
 
 Voc. 
 
 χαρίεν 
 
 χαρίεσσα 
 
 χαρίεν 
 
 δεικνΰς 
 
 δεικννσα 
 
 δεικνΰν 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 δεικνΰντε 
 
 N. A. V 
 
 χαρίεντε 
 
 χαράσσα 
 
 χαράσσαιν 
 
 χαρίεντε 
 
 δεικνΰντε 
 
 δεικνΰσα 
 
 G. B. 
 
 χαράντοιν 
 
 χαρά ντο ιν 
 
 δεικνΰντοιν 
 
 δεικνΰσαιν 
 
 δεικνΰντοιν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 δεικνΰντα 
 
 Nom. 
 
 χαρίεντες 
 
 χαρίεσσαι 
 
 χαρίεντα 
 
 δει κνΰντες 
 
 δεικνΰσαι 
 
 Gen. 
 
 χαράντων 
 
 χαριεσσών 
 
 χαράσσαις 
 
 χαράσσας 
 
 χαράντων 
 
 δεικνΰντων 
 
 δεικνυσών 
 
 δεικνΰντων 
 
 Bat. 
 
 χαρίεσι 
 
 χαρίεσι 
 
 δεικνυσι 
 
 δει κνΰσαις 
 
 δεικνυσι 
 
 Acc. 
 
 χαρίεντας 
 
 χαρίεντα 
 
 δεικνΰντας 
 
 δεικνΰσας 
 
 δεικνΰντα 
 
80 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 188. 
 
 Obs. —The form of the Fem. is explained from r before i becomin 
 σ, according to § 60, i being dropped after σ, and v before σ bein 
 thrown out and compensated for by a lengthening of the vowel: 
 τταντια , πανσια , ττανσα , πασα ; Χυοντια , Χυονσια, Χνονσα , Χύουσα. 
 
 § 188. 4. Stems in or. The participles of the Perfect 
 Active in or (Nom. Sing. Masc. ως, Neut. ος ) have υια 
 in the Fem. : λεληκώς·, λελυχυΐα, ΧεΧυκός, 07ie who has 
 freed. See §§ 148, 147. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Ncut. 
 
 Horn. 
 
 ΧεΧΰκώς 
 
 ΧεΧνκυΊα 
 
 ΧεΧυκός 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ΧεΧυκότος 
 
 ΧεΧυκνίας 
 
 ΧεΧυκότος 
 
 Oat. 
 
 ΧεΧυκότι 
 
 ΧεΧνκνίφ 
 
 ΧεΧυκότι 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ΧεΧυκότα 
 
 ΧεΧυκυΊαν 
 
 ΧεΧυκός 
 
 Voc. 
 
 ΧεΧυκώς 
 
 ΧεΧυκνΊα 
 
 ΧεΧυκός 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 JV. A. V. 
 
 ΧεΧυκυτε 
 
 ΧεΧυκυία 
 
 ΧεΧυκότε 
 
 G. B. 
 
 ΧεΧνκότοιν 
 
 ΧεΧυκυίαιν 
 
 ΧεΧνκότοιν 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ΧεΧυκότες 
 
 ΧεΧυκυΊαι 
 
 ΧεΧυκότα 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ΧεΧυκότων 
 
 ΧεΧυκνιών 
 
 ΧεΧυκότων 
 
 Bat. 
 
 ΧεΧνκόσι 
 
 ΧεΧυκνίαις 
 
 ΧεΧνκύσι 
 
 Acc. 
 
 ΧεΧυκότας 
 
 ΧεΧνκνίας 
 
 ΧεΧυκότα 
 
 Obs. —The strange difference of the Fem. from the Stem of the 
 Masc. and Neut. is explained by the F which was originally before 
 the o. From For-ia came first Ροσ-ια (§ 60), then by a peculiar 
 contraction (Fo becoming v) υσ-ια , finally (σ being dropped, § 61, 
 b) v-'i a and υ i a. 
 
 § 189. The most important adjectives of two endings with 
 Stems according to the Second Principal Declension are : 
 
 1. Stems in ς (Inflexion given under §§ 164, 165), as: 
 
 σαφής σαφές , clear. Gen. σαφούς. 
 
 άΧηθης διΧηθες , true. “ άΧηθονς. 
 
 Other Examples for Declension. 
 
 πΧηρης, full. ψευδής, false. άσφαΧης, safe. δυσμενής , hostile 
 
 2. Stems in v (Inflexion given under §§ 146, 147), as: 
 
 ττεττων πειτον, ripe. Gen. πεπον-ος. 
 
 ευδαίμων ενδαιμον , happy. “ ευδαίμον-ος 
 
 σώφρων σώφρον , reasonable. “ σώφρον-ος. 
 
 § 189. Dialects. — Herod, ερσην for άρσην. 
 
 to b 0 
 
191. 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF xlDJECTIVES. 
 
 81 
 
 Other Examples for Declension. 
 
 μνημών , mindful of. επδλησμων, forgetful of. 
 
 πολνπράγμων , much occupied. 
 
 3. Isolated forms, as: 
 
 ιδρις ’ίδρι, acquainted with. Gen. ΐδρι-ος. 
 
 (Inflexion according to § 157, D.) 
 άρρην (άρσην), άρρεν, male. Gen. άρρεν-ος. 
 
 Compounds of substantives, such as άπάτωρ , Neut. άπατορ , St. 7 rare p 
 (Nom. πατήρ) , fatherless / δυσμητωρ , μητηρ , unmotherly / φιλόπολις, 
 Gen. -ίδ-ος, loving the city; εν ελπίς (Gen. εύελπιδ-ος), hopeful. 
 
 § 190. 4. Besides these, there is a large number of ad¬ 
 jectives which have only one ending, because either their 
 meaning or form excludes a Neuter: αρτταζ, rapacious , St. 
 a ρπ ay, (pvyag, fugitive, St. ψ v y a ό , ay v ώ ς, unacquaint¬ 
 ed, St. ay v ω r ; ατταις, childless, St. a 7Γ a ί δ ; μακρυ\ειρ, 
 long-handed ; πενης, poor, St. ττενητ', γυρνάς·, light - 
 armed, St. y υ μν η r. Some adjectives of one ending fol¬ 
 low the A-Declension, and are almost substantives, as: 
 εθελοντής, Gen. εθελοντοΰ, voluntary / they occur only in 
 the Masc. 
 
 § 191. The following adjectives are irregular: μ^ας, 
 great / πόλης, much / and ττρζιος, gentle, the forms of each 
 being derived from different Stems, viz., in ply ας, from 
 
 § 190. Dialects.—Horn, has also many adjectives in the Fern, only: 
 καλλι-γύναικα , Acc. Sing. c. y., Σπάρτην , abounding in beautiful icomen ; 
 βωτίάνεφα , y. Φθή/, men nourishing. 
 
 § 191. Dialects.—In Horn, both Stems, πολύ and πολλο, in Masc. 
 and Neut., are almost completely declined; the Fern, is regularly 
 πολλή. 
 
 Sing. N. πολύς 
 
 πουλύς or 
 
 πολλυς 
 
 Ν. πολύ πονλύ πολλόν 
 
 G. πολλου or 
 
 πολίος 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 πολλφ 
 
 
 A. πολνν 
 
 πονλνν 
 
 πολλόν 
 
 Ν. πολύ πονλύ ττολλον 
 
 Plur. N. πολεες 
 
 (πόλεις) 
 
 πολλοί 
 
 πολλά 
 
 G. πολλών ΟΓ 
 
 πόλεων 
 
 
 
 D. πολεεσσι(ν) 
 
 π ολεσσι(ν) 
 
 πολεσι(ν) 
 
 01’ πολλοΐς 
 
 A. πολέας 
 
 
 πολλούς 
 
 Ν πολλά 
 
 Herod, has scarcely 
 
 any forms except from the Stem πολλο : πυλ - 
 
 λόν, πολλοί. 
 
 D 2 
 
82 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 192. 
 
 the Stems μ ε y a and μ ε γ a λ ο ; in πολύς , from πολύ and 
 π ο λλ ο 5 in πράος, from πράο and πραν. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 μέγας 
 
 μεγάλη 
 
 μέγα 
 
 πολύς 
 
 πολλή 
 
 πολύ 
 
 Gen. 
 
 μεγάλου 
 
 μεγάλης 
 
 μεγάλου 
 
 πολλοΰ 
 
 πολλής 
 
 πολλοϋ 
 
 Dat. 
 
 μεγάλψ 
 
 μεγάλη 
 
 μεγάλψ 
 
 πολλψ 
 
 πολλή 
 
 πολλψ 
 
 Acc. 
 
 μέγαν 
 
 μεγάλην 
 
 μέγα 
 
 πολύν 
 
 π ολλήν 
 
 πολύ 
 
 Voc. 
 
 μέγα 
 
 μεγάλη 
 
 μέγα 
 
 πολύ 
 
 πολλή 
 
 πολύ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 μεγάλω 
 
 μεγάλα 
 
 μεγάλω 
 
 
 
 
 a. jd. 
 
 μεγάλοιν 
 
 μεγάλαιν μεγάλοιν 
 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 μεγάλοι 
 
 μεγάλαι 
 
 μεγάλα 
 
 πολλοί 
 
 πολλαί 
 
 πολλά 
 
 Gen. 
 
 μεγάλων 
 
 ‘ μεγάλων 
 
 μεγάλων 
 
 πολλών 
 
 πολλών 
 
 πολλών 
 
 Oat. 
 
 μεγάλοις 
 
 μεγάλαις 
 
 μεγάλοις 
 
 πολλοΊς 
 
 πολλαΊς 
 
 πολλοΊς 
 
 Acc. 
 
 μεγάλους 
 
 μεγάλας 
 
 μεγάλα 
 
 πολλούς 
 
 πολλάς 
 
 πολλά 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 πράος 
 
 πραέία 
 
 πραύ 
 
 πράοι , or 
 
 πραεΊαι 
 
 πραία 
 
 
 
 
 
 πραεΊς 
 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 πράου 
 
 πραείας 
 
 7 rpqiov 
 
 πραέων 
 
 πραειών 
 
 πραέων 
 
 Dat. 
 
 
 7 τραεία 
 
 7γ ρ4ψ 
 
 πρροις , 01 * 
 
 πραείαις 
 
 πρςίοις , or 
 
 
 
 
 
 π ραέσι(ν) 
 
 
 πραέσι(ν) 
 
 Acc. 
 
 πράον 
 
 πραεΊαν 
 
 ττραον 
 
 πράους 
 
 πραείας 
 
 πραέα 
 
 Β. Comparison. 
 
 § 192. The first and most frequent ending of the Com¬ 
 parative is repo (Nom. τερος, τέρα, τερον ); of the Super¬ 
 lative τατο (Nom. τατος*, τατη, τατον), with the usual in¬ 
 flexion of adjectives (§ 180). These endings are affixed to 
 the pure Stem of the Masc., as: 
 
 >sitive. 
 
 )r, light. * 
 ί>ς, meet. 
 
 ", block, 
 ις, graceful. 
 
 Comparative. 
 κουφότερος , o, ov 
 ■γλυκύτερος 
 μελάντερος 
 χαριέστερος 
 
 Stem. 
 
 κ ο υ φ ο 
 γλυ κυ 
 μελαν 
 χαρ ιεντ χαριεστερος 
 
 (from χαριεντ-τερος , accordin 
 σαφές σαφέστερος 
 
 μακαρ μακάρτερος 
 
 π ε νι] τ 
 
 clear. 
 
 , happy. 
 
 poor. π ε ν η τ 7 τενέστερος 
 
 (for πενητ-τερος , -«7-ος, according 
 
 ο* to & 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 κουφότατος , η cv 
 γλυκύτατος 
 μελάντατος 
 χαριέστατος 
 
 to §§ 4G and 49). 
 
 σαφέστατος 
 μακάρτατος 
 πενέστατος 
 η being shortened). 
 
Ο -* η 
 
 a j-9/. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 83 
 
 § 193. The following points are to be observed : 
 
 1 The Stems in o leave o unchanged only when the 
 preceding syllable is long (§ 74, etc.), but lengthen it to 
 ω when that is short: ττονηρό-τερος, worse y πικρό-τατον , 
 most hitter · σοφώ-τερος, wiser; αζιω-τάτη, most worthy. 
 Every syllable with a vowel followed by two consonants 
 or a double consonant is here considered long (§§ 76, 
 u). 
 
 § 194. 2. The o is always rejected after ai in the adjective γεραιός, 
 senex , sometimes in παλαιός, antiqnus , and σχολαΊος , at leisure : γε- 
 ραίτερος, παλαίτατος. 
 
 § 195. 3. The ο or ω is changed to at in μέσος, medius; ’ίσος, like ; 
 εΰδιος, clear / πρωίος, early / uipioc, late : μεσαίτατος, πρωίαίτερον. 
 ήσυχος, 'peaceful, has ήσυχαίτερος, and ήσυχώτερος ; φίλος, dear, be¬ 
 sides φιλώτερος, -τατος, also φίλτερος, -τατος, and φιλαίτερος, -τατος ; 
 πλησιαίτερος, τ τλησιαίτατος, belong to πλησίον, near, and παραπλη- 
 σιαίτερος, more like, to the same ; προυργιαίτερος to προυργου, from 
 προ ’έργου, advantageously. 
 
 § 196. 4. The endings εστερο-ς, εστατο-ς , are inorganically ap¬ 
 plied : 
 
 (i) to Stems in ον : σωφρονέστερος (St. σ ω φ p ο v, Nom. σώφρων, reason - 
 able), ευδαιμονέστερος (St. ευδαιμον, Nom. ευδαίμων, fortunate), 
 πωτερος, -τατος, from πίων^αί, and πεπαίτερος, -τατος, from πιπών, 
 ripe, are exceptional. 
 
 V) to the Stems of άκρατος, unmixed ; ερρωμένος, strong ; άσμένος, will¬ 
 ing : άκρατέστερος, έρρωμενέστερος. More seldom to others. 
 
 c ) to some Stems in ο o contracted : εύνούστερος for ευνοέστερος, from 
 ευ νους, well-disposed. 
 
 § 197. 5. i σ τ ε p ο ς, ι σ τ a τ ο ς, occur with λδιλος , talkative φ πτωχός, 
 beggarly: όφοφάγος, epicure ; μονοφάγος, eating alone ; and some 
 adjectives of one ending, as κλέπτη-ς, thievish: λαλίστερος, πτω- 
 χίστατος, κλεπτίστερος. 
 
 Others of one gender in η-ς follow the rule of those in ο : υβριστό- 
 τερος, from υβριστής , haughty. 
 
 § 193. Dialects.—The quantity of the O -sound in poets is rather 
 doubtful: Horn, όίζνρώτατος, the most wretched. 
 
 Horn, has ίθυντατα, from ίθύς, straight / φαάντατος, from φαεινός, glit¬ 
 tering ; άχαρίστερος (for άχαριτ-τερος , according to § 46), from άχαρις, 
 graceless. 
 
84 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 193. 
 
 The compounds of χάρις, grace, favor, form their Comparative and 
 Superlative as if they ended in χαριτο-ς : επιχαριτώτερος , more 
 obliging. 
 
 § 198. The second and rarer termination of the Com¬ 
 parative is i o v (Nom., Masc., and Fern, ι ω v, Neut. iov); 
 of the Superlative, ιστό (Nom. ιστός, ιστρ, ιστόν). The 
 Stem-vowel is rejected before i. The accent is placed as 
 far as possible from the end in the Comp, and Superl. In- 
 
 Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 ύ/δίων, - ον ηδιστος, - η, -ον 
 
 θάσσων, -ον τάχιστος, - η, -ον 
 
 (from ταχιών , according to §§ 54, 57). 
 
 μείζων, -ον μέγιστος 
 
 (from μεγιων , according to § 58). 
 
 diphthong of μείζων , is explained from the i passing into the pre¬ 
 ceding syllable, as in άμείνων (compare § 55). ' 
 
 Farther with suppression of p : 
 
 εχθρό, -ς, hostile. ίχθίων, -ον Superl. εχθιστος. 
 
 flexion of the Comp., § 
 
 Positive. 
 
 Stem. 
 
 ηδύς, agreeable. 
 
 η δ v 
 
 ταχύς, swift. 
 
 ταχν 
 
 μεγας, large. 
 
 μεγ a 
 
 Obs. — The len 
 
 gtll of a in 
 
 αισχρό , -ς, shameful. αισχίων, -ον “ α’ίσχιστος. 
 
 οικτρό, -ς, pitiable. “ οίκτιστος. 
 
 ίχθρ-ός and οίκτρ-ός also have the forms in τερο-ς and τατο-ς. 
 
 199. This comparison occurs also in connection with 
 
 § 198. Dialects.—The endings ιων,ιστος, are more frequent in the 
 poets : Horn, φιλιών ( φίλος , clear ) ; γλνκίων (γλυκύς, sweet ) ; ωκιστος (ώκύς, 
 swift ) ; βάθιστος (βαθύς , deep) ; βράσσων — βραχίων (βραχύς, short), Slip, 
 poet, βράχιστος , Hom. Superl. βάρδιστος (βραδύς, slow , § 59, D.) ; πάσσων 
 —παχιών (παχύς, thick)', μάσσων — μάκίων (μάκρος, long), Slip, μηκιστος 
 (Dor. μάκιστος) ; κνδίων (κνδρός, famous) ; μεζων, New-Ion. for μείζων. 
 
 § 199. Dialects. —1. Hom. Comp, άρείων, Positive κρατύ-ς, Superl. 
 κάρτιστος ; Comp, λω'ίτερος ; New-Ion. κρεσσων — κρείσσων ; poet, βελ- 
 τερος, βέλτατος, φέρτερος, φερτατος, or φεριστος, more excellent , most excel¬ 
 lent. 
 
 2. Hom. κακώτερος ; χερης, χερείων, χερειότερος, χειρότερος ; New.-Ion. 
 εσσων — ησσων. (Compare κρεσσων, μεζων, § 198, Obs.) 
 
 4. Hom. νπ-ολίζων. 
 
§ 199. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 85 
 
 other peculiarities in the following adjectives, where the 
 changes of sound of §§ 55-58 are often applied: 
 
 1. For tlie idea of good: 
 
 Positive 
 αγαθός 
 [St. ά μ ε v\ 
 [St. άρε ς] 
 [St. β ε λ τ ο] 
 [St. κ ρ ατν] 
 
 [St. λ ω υ] 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 άμείνων, άμεινον 
 [ι άρείων, Horn.] 
 βελτίων, βεΧτιον 
 κρείσσων (κρείττων) 
 Ν. κρεΊσσον ( κρείττον ) 
 Χωΐων 01* Χιμων 
 Ν. Χώίον or Xtpov 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 αριστος, η, ον 
 β'εΧτιστος, η, ον 
 κράτιστος, η, ον 
 
 Χιρστος, η, ο ν 
 
 Obs. —άμείνων and αρεστός rattier express excellence , capacity ; κρείσ¬ 
 σων, κράτιστος, strength , preponderance (Lat. superior ) ; ησσων is op¬ 
 posed to κρείσσων. 
 
 2. For the idea of ; 
 
 Positive. Comparative. 
 
 κακός κακιών -ZV. κάκιον 
 
 [St. χερ] χείρων (deterior), -ZV. χείρον 
 [St. τ) κυ] ησσων ( inferior ), Λ 7 ", ήσσον 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 κάκιστος 
 
 χείριστος 
 
 -ZV. ΡΙ. ήκιστα, least of all. 
 
 3. μικρός, small, besides μικρότερος 
 
 
 μικρότατος 
 
 
 μείων, smaller, 
 
 -ZV μείον 
 
 
 4. όΧίγος, little, 
 
 
 
 όΧίγιστος 
 
 [St. t λ a x u], 
 
 ΙΧάσσων 
 
 -ZV. εΧασσον 
 
 εΧάχιστος 
 
 5. ποΧύς, much, 
 
 πΧείων (πΧεων) 
 
 
 πΧείστος 
 
 
 _ZV7 7 τΧεον (also πΧείν) 
 
 
 
 G. καΧός, beautiful, 
 
 as if from* 
 
 
 
 κάΧΧος, beauty 
 
 καΧΧίων 
 
 Ν. κάΧΧιον 
 
 κάΧΧιστος 
 
 7. ράόιος, easy, 
 
 
 
 
 [St. pa], 
 
 ρμων 
 
 .ZV ρμον 
 
 ρέστος 
 
 8. άΧγεινός, painful, as if from 
 
 
 
 άΧγος, pain, 
 
 άΧγίων 
 
 -ZV. άΧγιον 
 
 άΧγιστος 
 
 Dialects.— 5. Homer contracts πΧ'εον to πΧενν, πΧεονες to 7 τΧεννες’, 
 Plur. also πΧίες, πΧέας , 7 τλέα. 
 
 7. Ion. ρηίδιος ; Horn, ρηίτερος, ρίματος, ρηίτατος. Horn, forms single 
 degrees from substantives: κΰντερος , more doggish (κύων, dog) ; ρίγιον, 
 icorse ; ρίγος, cold, shudder. 
 
 Defectives : ίνερτεροι, also tragic νερτεροι (inferi, for which Positive 
 ενεροι) ’, Horn. 7 τάματος and Χοίσθος, Χοίσθιος, last / νστάτιος — νστατος, 
 δεΰτατος , in a like sense, πρώτιστος — 7 τρώΓος, the first. 
 
86 
 
 ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES. 
 
 200 . 
 
 § 200. Finally observe farther the Defectives : 
 
 ύστερος , later, 
 
 (νέος, new ), 
 
 (υπέρ, over ), 
 
 (προ, before), ιερότερος, prior, 
 
 (πέραν, on the other side), περαίτερος. 
 
 νστατος, ultimus. 
 έσχατος , extremus. 
 νεατος , novissimus. 
 ν πάτος, summus. 
 πρώτος, primus. 
 
 C. Adverbs of Adjectives. 
 
 § 201. Adverbs are derived from the Adjective Stem by 
 affixing to it the syllable ως·. The o of the Stem is en¬ 
 tirely dropped: φίλος, adv. φίλως. The Stems of the Sec¬ 
 ond Principal Declension have the same form as in the 
 Genitive: ταχύς, swift , ταχέως* ; σαφής, clear , σαφίως, 
 contr. σαφώς 5 σώφρων , reasonable, σωφρόνως. Contrac¬ 
 tion occurs only where the Genitive also has it. The ac¬ 
 cent of the adverb is always the same as that of the Geni¬ 
 tive Plural of the corresponding adjective: ψυχρός, cold, 
 ψυχρώς ; δίκαιος, just, δικαίως", πας (St. παντ), πάντως, 
 every way. 
 
 The Neuter Accusative, both of the Singular and the 
 Plural, is moreover very often used as an adverb. 
 
 § 202. An older adverbial form is that in a, as: τάχα, 
 from ταχύς, quick (meaning, in Aft. prose, perhaps) ; άμα, 
 at the same time · μάλα, very. The Comp, of μάλα is 
 μάλλον (potius) — μάλιον (§ 56);“Superb μάλιστα ( potissi - 
 mum), ευ, ivell, as an adverb to αγαθός, good, stands alone. 
 
 § 203. Adverbs in ως are also formed from Comparatives 
 and Superlatives: βεβαιοτερως, more firmly · καλλιόνως, 
 more beautifully. But, as a rule, the comparative has the 
 
 § 202. Dialects.—Tlie adverbs in a are more numerous in Homer: 
 ώκα (quicldy, ώκνς) ; λίγα, aloud , Χιγΰς ‘ κάρτα, strongly, very, to κρατνς, 
 compare § 59, D. ; σάψα ( clearly , σαφής). 
 
 Homer lias for ευ or ευ the adjective ίνς or ήνς, good. 
 
 §§ 203, 204. Dialects.—Homeric εκαστερω, εκαστάτω (from έκάς,/αν ) ; 
 άσσον (— άγχιον ), άσσοτέρω (άγχι, near), άχχιστα ; Ncw-Ion. άγχοτάτω, 
 άγχότατα. In addition to this, there is the Horn, επασσΰτεροε , crowded , 
 with v instead of o. 
 
§ 205 . 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 87 
 
 Neut. Acc. Sing., the superlative the Went. Ace. Plur as 
 an adverb : βεβαιότερον, κάΧλων ; βεβαιότατα, κάΧλιστα. 
 
 § 204. Adverbs in ω, like άνω, above; κάτω , below ; ’έσω, inside ; έξω, 
 outside , have no ς in Compar. and Superl. : άνωτέρω, κατωτέρω, 
 likewise άπωτέρω , farther (from αττό) ; έγγυτέρω (or εγγύτερον), 
 έγγντάτω (or εγγύτατα ), from εγγύς, near, and some others. 
 
 Chap. VIII.—Inflexion of Pronouns. 
 
 205. The Personal Pronouns are : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 εγώ, I [ego] 
 εμού, μου 
 έμοί, μοί 
 εμέ, μέ [me] 
 
 συ, thou [tu] 
 σου 
 
 σοί 
 
 σε [te] 
 
 ον, of him. 
 ol 
 
 έ [se] 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. 
 
 G. B. 
 
 (νώι) νώ, We. 
 
 ( νώιν ) νψν 
 
 ( σφώι ) σφώ, ye. 
 
 ( σφώιν ) σφφν 
 
 (σφωέ), they. 
 
 (σφωΐν) 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 ημείς, WC. 
 ημών 
 ημϊν 
 ημάς 
 
 * 
 
 νμείς, you. 
 
 υμών 
 
 < 
 
 νμίν 
 
 t 
 
 νμάς 
 
 σφεϊς, they. Ν. σφέα 
 
 σφών 
 
 σφί-σι (ν ) 
 
 σφάς Ν. σφέα 
 
 § 205. Dialects.—The following are special additional forms of the 
 Ion. Dialect. (Those in brackets are merely New-Ion.) 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. έγών 
 
 
 τύνη [tu] 
 
 
 Gen ft 0 .' 
 
 ( εμειο, 
 
 έμεν, μεΐι 
 
 Γσέο, σευ (έο, εί 
 
 
 έμέ-βεν (§ 178, D.) 
 
 (σειο, σέ-θεν (ηο, ε-βεν 
 
 
 Bat. 
 
 
 τοί, τείν to?) compare § 34, 
 
 
 Acc. 
 
 
 εέ Γ D. 4. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Nom. (ημέες) 
 
 άμμες 
 
 (υμέες) νμμες 
 
 
 Gen. ήμέων, 
 
 ήμείων 
 
 νμέων, νμείων σφέων, σφείων 
 
 
 Bat. 
 
 άμμι(ν ) 
 
 νμμι(ν) σφί(ν) 
 
 
 Acc. ημέας , 
 
 άμμε 
 
 νμέας, αφάς, σφέας, 
 
 σφεύας, σφέ 
 
 An isolated Ionic form for the Accusative Sing, of the third person is 
 μ ί v , trag. v ί v, both enclitic; in a like sense σφέ occurs in the poets. 
 viv seldom stands for the Plural. 
 
88 
 
 PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 206. 
 
 § 206. The Stems of the Sing, are : ε μ ε, for the first 
 person; σε, for the second; ε, for the third. The Nom¬ 
 inative, however, is formed differently from them : εγώ, συ, 
 and that of the third person is entirely wanting. 
 
 Obs. — The σ of the Stem σε has arisen from τ (§ 60, a) \te\, which 
 remains in many dialect-forms. The Stem ε goes hack to is, 
 and this to a still older form, σΡε [Lat. se for sve\. (§ 60, b.) In 
 the form σφε, the f is hardened into φ. 
 
 The Stems of the Dual are: v ω [no-s], σφω, σφω. The 
 Dual of the third person does not occur in prose. 
 
 The Stems of the Plural are : 77 μ ε, v μ ε, σ φ ε (ε is gen¬ 
 erally contracted with the ending, hence the circumflex : 
 see Dialects). 
 
 § 207. When there is no emphasis on the Personal Pro¬ 
 nouns, it becomes enclitic in the forms mentioned in § 92, 
 2 ; in that case the first person has the forms beginning 
 with μ. But when emphatic, as well as generally after 
 prepositions, it retains its accent, and the first person has 
 the fuller forms: 8οκεΐ μοι, it seems to me / ΙμοΧ ου σοΧ 
 τούτο άρέσχει, this pleases me , not you. 
 
 The Gen., Dat., and Acc. Plnr. of the first and second persons, when 
 not emphatic, sometimes have the accent on the first syllable : 
 ημών, νμιν, and in this case the final syllable of the Dat. and 
 Acc. is usually shortened : ημιν, ημάς (Horn.). When emphatic, 
 with the final syllable shortened, they are written ημιν, νμίν. 
 
 § 208. The Possessive Pronouns are formed from the 
 Stems of the Personal Pronouns : 
 
 St. ε μ s, ψός, my. St. η μ ε, ημετερος, OUT. 
 
 u σε, σός, thy. u ν μ ε, νμέτερος, your. 
 
 “ ε, *ός, his, her. u σ φ ε, σφέτερος, their. 
 
 Obs. — The ending τερος is that of the comparative (§ 192). 
 
 § 208. Dialects.—Horn, additional forms of the Possessives: τεός 
 [tuus], Ιός [suus\, άμός (properly Dor.), νμός, σφός. From the Dual 
 Stems νω, σφω : νωΐτερος, nos-ter ; σφω'ίτερος, belonging to you two / αμός 
 (also ά μΰς) often means my, ος sometimes means own, without any ref¬ 
 erence to a particular person. 
 
211 . 
 
 REFLEXIVE AND OTHER PRONOUNS. 
 
 89 
 
 § 209. αυτό-ς, αυτή, αυτό, self, is declined like a com¬ 
 mon adjective, except that the Neuter in the Nom. Acc. 
 Voc. Sing, has no v (compare the article τό). 
 
 υ αυτός (αυτός), η αυτί) (αυτή), τυ αυτό (ταυτυ οι ταυτον), 
 
 the same , Lat. idem. 
 
 § 210. The Stems of the Personal Pronouns, combined 
 with αυτ d ς·, produce the Reflexive Pronouns. 
 
 Singular. Gen. Μ. N. F. 
 
 Dat. Μ. Ν. F. 
 
 Acc. Μ. F. 
 
 Ν. 
 
 1st person, 
 
 εμαυτού -ης 
 
 εμαυτφ -y 
 
 εμαυτόν -ην , 
 
 myself. 
 
 2d person, 
 
 σεαυτού -ης 
 
 σεαυτιμ -y 
 
 σεαυτόν -ην , 
 
 thyself. 
 
 or 
 
 σαυτού -ης 
 
 σαυτψ -y 
 
 σ αυτόν -ην 
 
 
 3d person, 
 
 εαυτού -ης 
 
 έαυτιμ -iy 
 
 εαυτόν -ην 
 
 -ύ, himself her- 
 
 or 
 
 αυτού -ης 
 
 αυτ (μ -y 
 
 αυτόν -ήν 
 
 -υ, self itself. 
 
 In tlie plural, both Stems are declined together : 
 
 Plural. Gen. M. F. N. 
 1st person, ημών αυτών 
 2d Iverson, υμών αυτών 
 8d person, σφών αυτών 
 
 Dat. Μ. N. F. Acc. M. F. 
 ημΊν αύτοΊς -αΊς ημάς αυτόύς -άς, OUTSelveS. 
 ύμΊν αύτοΊς -αΊς υμάς αυτούς -άς , yourselves, 
 σφίσιν αύτοΊς -αΊς σφάς αυτούς -άς , themselves. 
 Neut. σφεα αυτά 
 
 Yet the 3d person plural has also the compound form : 
 
 εαυτών 
 or αυτών 
 
 ίαυτοΊς -αΊς εαυτούς -άς -ά 
 
 αύτοΊς -αΊς αυτούς -άς -ά 
 
 § 211. αλλο -r, άλλη, Ιίλλο, another {alius), is declined 
 like αυτός. 
 
 The Stem άλλο combined with itself produces the Re¬ 
 ciprocal Pronoun α\Χ-η\ο (for ά λ λ - α λ λ ο), occurring 
 only in the Dual and Plural. 
 
 § 209. Dialect3. — New-Ionic ωύτύς, ωύτη, τωύτό Homeric ωύτύς —ο 
 αυτός. 
 
 § 210. Dialects. — The Epic dialect declines both Stems together 
 even in the sing. : εμε αύτόν = εμαυτόν , οί αύτφ — ίαυτψ , etc. 
 
 New-Ionic εμεωυτού , σεωυτοϋ , εωυτού , stand for the forms with αυ. 
 
90 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 212 . 
 
 Dual. 
 
 0. D. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 άΧΧηΧοιν άΧΧηΧαιν άΧΧηΧοιν 
 
 άΧΧηΧω άΧΧηΧα άΧΧηΧω 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 άΧΧηΧων άΧΧηΧων άΧΧηΧων 
 
 άΧΧηΧοις άΧΧηΧαις άΧΧηΧοις 
 
 άΧΧηΧονς άΧΧηΧας άΧΧ7]Χα 
 
 § 212. The two most important Demonstrative Pro¬ 
 nouns are: 
 
 οδε, ΐ/νε } rote, that. οότος, α'ύτη, τούτο , this. 
 
 δδε consists of the article o and the demonstrative enclitic 
 δε, and is therefore declined entirely like the article with 
 δε affixed, ουνος corresponds to the article with regard to 
 the rough breathing and the r at the beginning; it also has 
 the diphthong a υ in the last syllable but one where the 
 article has a or η (A-sound), and ο υ where the article has 
 
 Ο 
 
 •Ν 
 
 3 
 
 •Ν 
 
 ' ο υ (0 
 
 -sound 
 
 )■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sir 
 
 tgular. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 ( 
 
 t 
 
 0 
 
 < 
 
 V 
 
 τό 
 
 οι 
 
 ai 
 
 τά 
 
 Nom. < 
 
 οίε 
 
 ηδε 
 
 τοόε 
 
 ο'ίδε 
 
 α’ίδε 
 
 / ^ 
 ταοε 
 
 ί 
 
 οντος 
 
 αυτή 
 
 τοντο 
 
 ούτοι 
 
 αύται 
 
 τούτα 
 
 ( 
 
 του 
 
 της 
 
 του 
 
 
 των 
 
 
 Gen. -j 
 
 τούδε 
 
 τηςδε 
 
 τοϋδε 
 
 
 τώνδε 
 
 
 ( 
 
 τούτον 
 
 ταύτης 
 
 τούτου 
 
 
 τούτων 
 
 
 ( 
 
 Τ Φ 
 
 τ ν 
 
 ΤΟ) 
 
 τοΐς 
 
 ταΐς 
 
 το ΐς 
 
 Dctt. ) 
 
 τφδε 
 
 τφδε 
 
 τφδε 
 
 τοΐςδε 
 
 τοΐςδε 
 
 τοΐςδε 
 
 ( 
 
 Τθύτ(ι) 
 
 ταντφ 
 
 τούτφ 
 
 τοντοις 
 
 ταύταις 
 
 τούτοις 
 
 
 τόν 
 
 την 
 
 / 
 
 το 
 
 τούς 
 
 τάς 
 
 τά 
 
 Acc. 
 
 τόνδε 
 
 την δε 
 
 τόδε 
 
 τούςδε 
 
 τάςδε 
 
 ταόε 
 
 ( 
 
 τούτον 
 
 ταυτήν 
 
 τοντο 
 
 τούτους 
 
 τούτος 
 
 ταϋτα 
 
 § 212. Dialects.—In Homer, tlie article itself is a demonstrative pro¬ 
 noun, witli these special forms: Nom. o ; Gen. roTo ; Gen. Dat. Dual 
 τοΊιν ; Nom. Plur. rot, rat; Gen. Plur. Fern, τάων ; Dat. Plur. τοΐσι(ν ), 
 τφσι(ν), or τής. 
 
 From οδε we have Dat. Plur. τοΐσδισι or τοΐσδεσσι(ν ), and κείνος , poet, 
 for εκείνος. 
 
214. RELATIVE AND INTERROG. TRONOUNS. 
 
 91 
 
 Dual. 
 
 ! τώ τά τώ C τοΐν ταίν τοΐν 
 
 τώδε τάδε τώδε G. D. τοϊνδε ταΧνδε τοϊνδε 
 
 τούτω ταντά τοντω (. τοντοιν ταΰταιν τοδτοιν 
 
 The adverb of όδε is ώδε ; that of ουτος, όντως or ο'ότω, in this way. 
 Like ουτος are declined: 
 
 τοσοντος τοσαότη τοσουτο or τοσουτον, so great (tantus) ·, 
 
 τοιουτος τοιαντη τοιουτο or τοιουτον, such (tails) ; 
 
 Τ7]\ίΚθΪ!Γος τηΧικαύτη τηλίκοντο or τηλικοντον, SO old ; 
 
 iii which, however, the r of the forms beginning with r is 
 dropped; raDra, but τοσ-αντα ; by affixing the enclitic δε, we have 
 the forms τοσόςδε, so large; τοωςδε, of such quality ; τηΧιι:ός-δε, of 
 such an age , with a regular adjective declension before the syl¬ 
 lable δε. 
 
 ίκεΊνο-ς , εκείνη, εκείνο , that, is declined like αυτός. 
 
 A long accented i is often affixed to the Demonstrative Pronouns 
 to strengthen the meaning without affecting the declension, but 
 the ε of δε is lost: οντοςί, ΰδί, εκεινωνί, αυτηί, τοιςδί. Compare the 
 Lat. ce in his-ce, has-ce. 
 
 § 213. The Relative Pronoun has the rough breathing 
 
 ο ο o 
 
 in all cases, as: 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neat. 
 
 Novn. ός, who. ?/ 0 
 
 Gen. ου ής ού 
 
 Dat. ig y ψ 
 
 Ace. ov ijv o 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 »/ tr r r 
 
 oi at a 
 
 <I>v 
 
 οϊς αίς οϊς 
 
 tt ./ ft 
 
 ονς ας a 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 A 7 ! A. ω u ω 
 
 G. D. ο ίν alv olv 
 
 Obs .—In the phrases καί or όψη, and he said , and η δ’ ός, but he said, 
 oc is used as a Demonstrative (compare the Dialects). 
 
 § 214. The Interrogative Pronoun has the same Stem 
 as the Indefinite Pronoun, from which it is distinguished 
 
 § 213. Dialects.—Horn, ο = ός, δον = ου, εης = ης, and signifies he. 
 Ion. olo = oh, and the forms of the Article which begin with r, are used 
 instead of those of the Relative : του = ου, cujus; τφ = ψ, cui; τοϊς = 
 οϊς, quibus. 
 
 § 214. Dialects.—Horn., partly also New-Ion. forms are: Gen. τεο, 
 τεϋ ; Dat. τεφ, τψ ; Gen. Plur. τίων ; Dat. Plur. τεοισι(ν ) ; Ncut. Plur. 
 άσσα. The 
 
92 
 
 INTERROG. AND INDEF. PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 215. 
 
 only by the accent. The Interrogative Pronoun has the 
 accent always on the Stem syllable; the Indefinite is en¬ 
 clitic : hence τις, who f τ\ς. enclitic, some one. 
 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 τίς τί 
 
 τις 
 
 \ 
 
 τι 
 
 Gen. 
 
 τίνος 
 
 τίνος 
 
 
 Oat. 
 
 τίνι 
 
 τινί 
 
 
 Acc. 
 
 τίνα τί 
 
 τινά 
 
 \ 
 
 τι 
 
 
 Dual, 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Nom. Acc. 
 
 τίνε 
 
 τινί. 
 
 
 Gen. Dat. 
 
 τίνοιν 
 
 τινοίν 
 
 
 
 Plural, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 τίνες τίνα 
 
 τινες 
 
 τινά (αττα) 
 
 Gen. 
 
 τίνων 
 
 τινών 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 τίσ ι(ν) 
 
 τισί(ν) 
 
 
 Acc. 
 
 τίνας τίνα 
 
 τινάς 
 
 τινά (αττα) 
 
 Obs. —1. του, τφ, which as indefinites are enclitic, are often used for 
 τίνος , τίνι, and for τίνος, τινί. 
 
 Ohs. —2. The Relative and Indefinite combine to form οστ.ις, ϊ,τις, 
 ο τι , who. Both Stems are declined together: ουτινος, ηςτινος , 
 ψτινι , οίντινοιν (§ 93, b). A space is left between o and τι in ο τι , 
 icliich , to distinguish it from the conjunction on, that. 
 
 The shorter forms of τις are also used with ος ; but the Stem ό is 
 not declined : Gen. otov ; Dat. οτφ ; more rarely Gen. Plur. οτων, 
 Dat. οτοισι(ΐ'). αττα is an additional form for ίίτινα , not to be 
 confounded with αττα for τινά. 
 
 Ψ 
 
 § 215. Another Indefinite Pronoun is $tiva, of three gen¬ 
 ders, quidam , sometimes undeclined, sometimes declined as 
 follows: 
 
 Sing, ό, 7/, το Selva, Selvog, celvi, Selva. 
 
 Plur. oi, at, Selvec, Seivivv, Seΐvaς. 
 
 The following are special forms of the compound Relative in Horn, 
 and also in New-Ion.: 
 
 Sing. οτις, N. otti ; orev , orno, οττιν 5 οτιφ ; οτινα, N. οττι 
 Plur. K ά'σσα ; οτεων υτ&οισι ; υτινας , Ν. ΐίσσα 
 
 (for άτια , according to § 57). 
 
 The Stem of the Relative thus often remains unchanged. 
 
217. 
 
 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 93 
 
 § 216. The following are called Correlative Pronouns: 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 Demonstrative. 
 
 Relative. 
 
 τις, who ? 
 
 τις, some one. 
 
 υδε, ούτος, this. 
 
 ος, όςτις, who. 
 
 πότερος, uter ? 
 which of two ? 
 
 πότερος, one of 
 two {alteruter ). 
 
 ετερος, the one of 
 two {alter). 
 
 όπότερος, which 
 of two. 
 
 7 τόσος, how great t 
 liow much? 
 {quantus, quot). 
 
 ποσός, of some 
 size or number. 
 
 τόσος, τόσοςδε, το- 
 σοντος, so great, 
 so much ( tantus, 
 tot). 
 
 όσος, 07 τόσος, 
 
 lioic great, how 
 much {quan¬ 
 tus, quot). 
 
 ποιος, of wliat 
 quality ? {qualis ). 
 
 ποιός, of some 
 quality. 
 
 τοϊος, τοιόςδε, τοι- 
 οΰτος, of such a 
 quality {talis). 
 
 οϊος, όποιος, of 
 what quality 
 {qualis). 
 
 πηλίκος , how old ? 
 
 πηλίκος, of some 
 age. 
 
 τηλίκος, τηλίκοςδε, 
 τηλικοΐιτος, of 
 such age. 
 
 ήλίκος, ύτ τηλίκος, 
 of what age. 
 
 01)8. —On the ending τερος, see §§ 192, 208, Obs. 
 
 In Attic prose of the Demonstratives generally only 
 those in -Se and -ουτο-ς are used. 
 
 § 217. Correlative Adverbs are formed from the same 
 Pronominal Stems. 
 
 § 216. Dialects. — όσσος (add. form όσσάτιος), τόσσος , are Epic for 
 ϋσος, τόσος. For every Interrogative π the New-Ion. dialect lias κ : 
 κόσος, κοίος, /core, κοϋ. 
 
 § 217. Dialects.— πόθι is Epic ττου ; ποθί — πον', dem ,τόθι, there, 
 rel. όθι, where. In poetry, τόθεν is dem. to πόθεν , New-Ion. ίνθαντα for 
 ενταύθα, ενθεϋτεν for εντεύθεν. 
 
 ως in the Poets, like όντως , means so , to be distinguished from ώς 
 (without accent), how; it is written also ώς, with the meaning yet: 
 καί ώς , and yet. With the meaning so, τώς also occurs, ήχε is an ad¬ 
 ditional form of ?j. The π is doubled : όππως, όπποτε (§ 62, D.). 
 
94 
 
 CORRELATIVE ADVERBS. 
 
 218. 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 Demonstrative. 
 
 Relative. 
 
 που, where f 
 (ubi ?) 
 
 πόθεν, whence? 
 {unde ?) 
 
 7 roT, whither ? 
 
 {quo f) 
 πότε, when ? 
 
 ( a ^ ■ 
 πηνίκα ■< what 
 
 ( time? 
 
 πώς, how f 
 
 c whither ? 
 πη < in what 
 l way f 
 
 πού ) 
 
 , η- f some- 
 
 {aii- · > 7 
 
 τ \ where, 
 
 cubi) ) 
 
 ποθέν ) from 
 
 {ali- > some- 
 
 cunde) ) ichere. 
 
 7rot 1 
 
 ( some- 
 
 l ~ ( whither, 
 
 quo) ’ 
 
 ποτέ, sometime. 
 
 πώς, somehow. 
 
 , ( some whither, 
 " V \ in some way. 
 
 ένθα ,r 
 
 f there 
 
 ίνταϋθα J 
 ένθεν ) from 
 
 ένθένδε > there 
 
 εντεύθεν ) {hide). 
 
 tV i a p I thither 
 
 'ενταύθα ) 
 τότε, then. 
 
 τηνίκα ^ ) at that 
 
 \ time, 
 τηνικαύτα j 
 
 ως 1 
 
 ώδε > thus. 
 
 ούτως ) 
 
 ) thither, 
 Tvh i m this 
 
 ταντη 1 
 
 ; way. 
 
 ού ) ichere 
 
 οπού C {ubi). 
 
 οθεν ) whence 
 
 όπύθεν i {unde). 
 
 ol ) whither 
 
 οποί i {quo). 
 
 ore, οπότε, when. 
 
 ηνίκα \ at what 
 
 ΰπηνίκα \ time. 
 
 ώς, ’όπως, CIS. 
 
 r whither, 
 Vi ory < in what 
 ( way. 
 
 Obs.— ένθα and ένθεν, in tlieir original demonstrative sense, occur 
 only in a few combinations in Attic prose ( ένθα δη, just then; 
 ένθα καί ’ένθα, here and there) ; but tliey are regularly used in a 
 relative sense : where, whence. 
 
 To the Correlative Adverbs there belong also 'έως, quamdiu (Rela¬ 
 tive, as long) ; τέως, tamcliu (Demonstrative, so long), as well as 
 the poetic txppa (for όφρα, § 53, c, Obs.) used in the same meaning 
 as έως, and τόψρα as τέως. 
 
 To the simple εκείνος {that, § 212) correspond among the Adverbs 
 of place εκεί, there ; έκεϊθεν,β'οιη there; εκεΊσε, thither. The De¬ 
 monstrative ως occurs in Attic prose only in καί ως, even thus , and 
 ούδ’ ως, not even thus. It is also written ώς in these combinations. 
 
 § 218. The conjunctions δη, δήποτε , and ovv (meaning ever, Latin 
 cunque), and the enclitic περ, may be joined to any relative pro¬ 
 noun or adverb to give prominence: 'όσης δ>) ποτέ, whosoever; 
 όπως ovv {utcunque), ΐόσπερ, just as. 
 
 Sometimes η is affixed to the interrog. τί in the sense of why f and 
 to the corresponding indirect interrogative 0 n : τί η, δτίη, tchy f 
 
 § 219. There are also negative pronouns and adverbs to be noticed: 
 ούτις, μητις, no one J ουδέτερος, μηδέτερος, neither , neuter / ούδαμού. 
 μηδαμού, nowhere / ούδαμώς, μηδαμώς, in no way. 
 
THE NUMERALS, 
 
 95 
 
 Chai\ IX.—The Numerals. 
 
 § 220. The Cardinal , Ordinal and Adverbial Numer¬ 
 als, with their value and smns, are: 
 
 1 
 
 / 
 
 a 
 
 είς, μία , εν, one. 
 
 ό πρώτος, theJirst. 
 
 άπαξ , WiCO. 
 
 2 
 
 P 
 
 δύο 
 
 δεύτερος 
 
 δίς 
 
 3 
 
 Ύ 
 
 τρεές, τρία 
 
 τρίτος 
 
 τρις 
 
 
 
 ί τέσσάρες , τέσ- ) 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 S' 
 
 < σάρα , ΟΓ τέττά- > 
 
 τέταρτος 
 
 τετράκις 
 
 
 
 ( ρες, τέττάρα ) 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 έ 
 
 7 τέντε 
 
 πέμπτος 
 
 πεντάκις 
 
 6 
 
 / 
 
 <r 
 
 U 
 
 'έκτος 
 
 έξάκις 
 
 7 
 
 r 
 
 επτά 
 
 έβδομος 
 
 επτάκις 
 
 8 
 
 / 
 
 V 
 
 οκτώ 
 
 όγδοος 
 
 όκτάκις 
 
 9 
 
 θ' 
 
 εννέα 
 
 ένατος ( έννατος ) 
 
 ενάκις (εννάκις) 
 
 10 
 
 / 
 
 L 
 
 δέκα 
 
 ίέ/οαΓος 
 
 δεκάκις 
 
 11 
 
 1(1 
 
 'ένδεκα 
 
 ενδέκατος 
 
 εν δεκάκις 
 
 12 
 
 Φ 
 
 όωόεκα 
 
 δωδέκατος 
 
 δωδεκάκις 
 
 13 
 
 c 
 
 τριςκαίδεκα 
 
 τριςκαιδέκατος 
 
 
 14 
 
 to 
 
 j τεσσαρεςκαίδεκα ) 
 
 \ τεσσαρακαίδεκα 3 
 
 τεσσαρακαιδέκατος 
 
 
 15 
 
 r 
 
 16 
 
 7 τεντεκαίδεκα 
 
 πεντεκαιδέκατος 
 
 
 1G 
 
 / 
 
 l<T 
 
 έκκαίδεκα 
 
 ίκκαιδέκατος 
 
 
 17 
 
 X 
 
 επτακαίδεκα 
 
 επτακαιδέκατος 
 
 
 18 
 
 U) 
 
 όκτωκαίδεκα 
 
 ύκτωκαιδέκατος 
 
 
 19 
 
 iff 
 
 έννεακαίδεκα 
 
 έννεακαιδέκατος 
 
 
 20 
 
 / 
 
 1C 
 
 ε’ίκοσι(ν ) 
 
 εικοστός 
 
 είκοσάκις 
 
 30 
 
 λ' 
 
 τριάκοντα 
 
 τριάκοστός 
 
 τριάκοντάκις 
 
 40 
 
 / 
 
 μ 
 
 τεσσαράκοντα 
 
 τεσσαρακοστός 
 
 τεσσαράκοΐ’τάκις 
 
 50 
 
 V 
 
 πεντήκοντά 
 
 πεντηκοστός 
 
 πεντηκοντάκις 
 
 GO 
 
 r 
 
 εξήκοντα 
 
 εξηκοστός 
 
 έξηκοντάκις 
 
 70 
 
 / 
 
 0 
 
 έβδομήκοντα 
 
 εβδομηκοστός 
 
 έβδομηκοντάκις 
 
 80 
 
 IT 
 
 όγδοήκοντα 
 
 ογδοηκοστός 
 
 όγδοηκοντάκις 
 
 90 
 
 % 
 
 ενενήκοντα 
 
 ενενηκοστός 
 
 ενενηκοντάκις 
 
 100 
 
 9 
 
 εκατόν 
 
 εκατοστός 
 
 εκατοντάκις 
 
 200 
 
 f 
 
 σ 
 
 διακόσιοι , at, a 
 
 διακοσιοστός 
 
 διακοσιάκις 
 
 300 
 
 T 
 
 τριακόσιοι , at, a 
 
 τριακοσιοστός 
 
 
 400 
 
 V 
 
 τετρακόσιοι , at, a 
 
 τετρακοσιοστός 
 
 
 500 
 
 <p' 
 
 πεντακόσιοι, αι , a 
 
 πεντακοσιοστός 
 
 
 GOO 
 
 / 
 
 X 
 
 εξακόσιοι , at, a 
 
 εξακοσιοστός 
 
 
 700 
 
 Ψ 
 
 επτακόσιοι , at, a 
 
 επτακοσιοστός 
 
 
 800 
 
 / 
 
 ω 
 
 οκτακόσιοι , at, a 
 
 οκτακοσιοστός 
 
 
 900 
 
 N 
 
 \ ίνάκόσιοι, αι , a 
 
 ενακοσιοστός ΟΓ 
 
 
 
 
 1 εννακοσιοι , at, a 
 
 εννακοσιοστυς 
 
 
 1000 
 
 μ 
 
 χίλιοι , at, a 
 
 χιλιοστός 
 
 χιλιάκις 
 
 2000 
 
 β 
 
 διςχίΚιοι, αι , a 
 
 διςχιλιοστός 
 
 
 3000 
 
 <y 
 
 τριςχίλιοι , at, a 
 
 τριςχιλιοστός 
 
 
 10000 
 
 λ 
 
 μύριοι , at, a 
 
 μυριοστός 
 
 μυριάκις 
 
96 
 
 THE NUMERALS. 
 
 § 221 . 
 
 Ohs .—The letters of the alphabet are used in numbers also in urn 
 interrupted succession. In the most frequent designation, given 
 above, stigma (-τ') is inserted after έ for the number 6 : ά to Θ' 
 are therefore units ; ί is 10, κ 20; after π (=80), C[ (koppa = 90) 
 is inserted; and after ώ (=800) ^ (sampi = 900). The alphabet 
 begins again at 1000, but here each letter has the accent under 
 it; hence βτμδ'— 2344, αωξ/ 3'= 1862. 
 
 § 221. The Cardinal Numbers 1 to 4 are declined: 
 
 1. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 εις μία εν 
 
 ενός μιας ενός 
 
 ενί μια ενί 
 
 εν α μίαν εν 
 
 2. Ν. Α. δύο 
 
 G. D. δυοίιν 
 
 3. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 τρε7ς Ν. τρία 
 
 τριών 
 
 τρισί(ν ) 
 
 τρεΊς Ν. τρία 
 
 4. τεσσαρες Ν. τεσσαρα 
 
 τεσσάρων 
 τεσσαρσι(ν) 
 
 τεσσαρας Ν. τεσσαρα 
 
 ουρείς, ον^εμία, ovSsv, and μη$είς, no one ? are declined 
 like εΊς. δύο is also used without inflexion, dvnv is an¬ 
 other form for $υο7ν. tt occurs for σσ in all forms and 
 derivations of τέσσαρες. αμφω ( ctmbo , both), Gen. Dat. αμ- 
 φο7ν, is sometimes represented by the Plur. άμφότεροι, ai, a, 
 of which the Singular αμφότερον, both, is also in use. 
 
 §§ 220-223. Dialects.—1, Homer has the fcm. ία, ίής, ly: also Ncut. 
 Hat. ’ίψ. 
 
 2, δύω for all cases : δοιώ, δοιοί , δοκιί , δοιά ; Hat. δοιοΊς ; Acc. δοιούς , 
 άς, ά. 
 
 3, τρίτατος— τρίτος. 
 
 4, Horn. iEol. ττίσνρες, New-Ion. τεσσερες, Ilom. τετρατος (§ 50, Η.). 
 
 7, t βδόματος. 8, όγδόατος. 9, εί νατος. 
 
 12, Horn, δνώδεκα , and δύο καί δέκα , δνοδέκατος. 
 
 20, Horn, εείκοσι, εεικοστός. 30, Ilom. τριηκοντα. 80, όγδώκοντα. 90, 
 ίννηκοντα. 200, etc., also δη]κόσιοι’, Ilerod. ττεντηκόσιοι , είνακύσιοι. 
 
 9000, Horn, ενεάχιλοι. 10,000, δεκάχΐλοι. 
 
 δίχα, Horn, διχθά ; likewise τριχθά , τετραχθά , threefold, fourfold ; also 
 rpircXy, τετραπλή. 
 
224. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 97 
 
 § 222. The numerals 5 to 199 are indeclinable. 
 
 ΛΥθ also find τρεις, τρία καί δέκα, τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα καί δέκα, for 13 
 and 14. The units and tens are united by καί , in any order: 
 είκοσι καί πέντε and πέντε καί είκοσι ; or without καί when the 
 tens are first : είκοσι πέντε, 25; so also εκατόν δέκα. For twenty- 
 first we have είς καί εικοστός , or πρώτος καί εικοστός, and εικοστός 
 πρώτος, etc. 
 
 The Cardinal numerals from 200 are, like the Ordinal, 
 regular adjectives of three terminations: διακόσιοι, ai, a. 
 The Ordinal numerals have the endings of the superlative, 
 except δεύτερος, which has that of the comparative (compare 
 § 192). 
 
 § 223. By combination with συν, the numeral Stems form Distribu¬ 
 tives : σννδυο, two and two ; σνντρεις, three and three ; Multipli- 
 catives, by the syllable πλους (from πλόος, Lat. plex): άπλους, 
 simple ; διπλούς, τριπλούς, πενταπλούς, etc. Observe also δισσός, 
 twofold ; τρισσός, threefold ; διπλάσιος , twice as much ’ τριπλάσιος, 
 etc., πολλαπλάσιος, many times as much. Adverbs : μοναχ y, sim¬ 
 ply (μόνος , alone ) ; διχ$ or δίχα, douhly. Substantives : μονάς (St. 
 μοναδ), unity ; δνάς, τριάς, τετράς, πεμπάς, ίζάς, έβδομάς, όγδοάς, 
 έννεάς, δεκάς, ει’κάς, έκατοντάς, χιλιάς, μνριάς ; hence τρεις μυριάδες 
 = 30,000. 
 
 § 224. The most important general Adjectives of quan¬ 
 tity are: έκαστος, each ; εκάτερος, either ; πας, πάσα, παν 
 (St. παν τ), all ; παστός, οπόστος [quotus] ; and the ad¬ 
 verbs : πολλάκις, many times , often ; εκαστάκις, every 
 time; οσάκις, as often as; τοσαυτάκις, so often: 
 στάκις, very often ; οΧιράκις, seldom. 
 
 E 
 
98 
 
 TIIE VERB. 
 
 8 225, 
 
 B. INFLEXION OF YEKBS. 
 
 General HemarTcs. 
 
 § 225. The Greeks distinguish in the Verb— 
 
 1. Three Numbers: Singular, Dual, and Plural. 
 
 2. Three Voices : 
 
 Active: tXvaa, I loosed ; 
 
 Middle: ΙΧνσάμην, I loosed for myself / 
 
 Passive : ΙΧύθην, I was loosed. 
 
 Verbs which occur only in the Middle or Passive are called 
 
 Deponents : δέχομαι, I receive. 
 
 Obs. —Only the Aorist and the Future have special lorms for the 
 Passive; and only the Aorist special forms for the Middle: in 
 all other tenses the Middle forms have also a Passive meaning. 
 
 3. Two classes of Tenses : 
 
 A. Principal, viz.: 
 
 1. Present: λύω, I loose ; 
 
 2. Perfect: ΧΙΧνκα, I have loosed ; 
 
 3. Future: Χύσω , I shall loose. 
 
 B. Historical, viz.: 
 
 1. Imperfect: εΧνον , I was loosing / 
 
 2. Pluperfect: ΙΧεΧυκειν, I had loosed / 
 
 3. Aorist: ΪΧνσα, I loosed. 
 
 4. Four Moods, viz. : 
 
 Finite 
 
 Verb. 
 
 ' 1. Indicative : λύω, I loose ; 
 
 2. Subjunctive: λύω, I may loose / 
 
 3. Optative: Χνοιμι, I would loose / 
 
 _ 4. Imperative: λύε, loose. 
 
 5. Three Verbal Nouns, viz.: 
 
 1. Infinitive : Xvtiv, loose / 
 
 2. Participle : λύωη, loosing; 
 
 3. Verbal Adjective : Χυτίος , to be loosed, sol 
 
 vendus. 
 
99 
 
 § 227. THE PERSONAL ENDINGS.—TENSE-STEMS. 
 
 § 226. The Personal Endings had originally the follow¬ 
 ing; forms: 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Principal Tenses. Hist. Tenses. 
 
 Principal Tenses. Hist. Tenses. 
 
 Sing. 1. -μι -v 
 
 -μαι -μην 
 
 2. -σι -ς 
 
 -σαι -σο 
 
 3. -τι — 
 
 -ται -το 
 
 Dual 1. -μεν 
 
 -μεθον 
 
 2. -τον 
 
 -σθον 
 
 3. -τον -την 
 
 -σθον -σθην 
 
 Plur. 1. -μεν 
 
 -μέθα 
 
 2. -τε 
 
 -σβε 
 
 3. -ντι -ν 
 
 -νται -ντο 
 
 The Active personal endings of the principal tenses are 
 most easily observed in the verb : 
 
 εί-μί, I am. εσ-μεν εσ-μεν. 
 
 εσ-σι (contr. εΐ) εσ-τόν εσ-τέ. 
 
 εσ-τί(ν) εσ-τόν εί-σί(ν ) (σι = ντε, § 60). 
 
 The endings of the three persons in the Sing, are really the per¬ 
 sonal pronouns affixed, /, thou , he , and to be compared with the 
 Stems of the Personal Pronouns : μι (St. με), σι (σε), τι (the Stem 
 of the article, ro). The 1 Dual in the Active is always iden¬ 
 tical with the 1 Plur. The ending of the 1 Sing, of the Historical 
 Tenses was originally μ (Lat. era-m ), which at the end of the 
 w r ord was changed into v , according to § 67, Obs. The ending of 
 the 3 Sing. w r as originally r, which, however, could not continue 
 at the end according to § 67 (compare § 233, 2); and that of the 
 3 Plur. ντ (Lat. era-nt) ; but the τ was dropped (§ 67). 
 
 § 227. The tenses, moods, and verbal nouns are classified 
 according to the Stems ( Tense-Stems ) from which they are 
 formed. The Tense-Stems are the following : 
 
 1. The Present Stem , from which the Present and Im¬ 
 perfect are formed. 
 
 § 226. Dialects.—Instead of νται , ντο , the Ion. (especially New-Ion.) 
 often has αται , aro, in 3 Plur. Mid. The vowel a is here properly a 
 connecting vowel, as in the Acc. Sing, of the Second Principal Declens. 
 (§ 173, 3, Obs.); and v is dropped in both alike; hence α-ται, α-το, for 
 α-ι ται, α-ντο (compare §§ 287, 302, 3). 
 
100 
 
 TENSE-STEMS. 
 
 228. 
 
 2. The Strong Aorist Stem , from which the Second or 
 Strong Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed. 
 
 3 . The Future Stem , from which the Future Act. and 
 Mid. are formed. 
 
 4 . The Weak Aorist Stem , from which the First or Weak 
 Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed. 
 
 5 . The Perfect Stem , from which the Perfect, Pluper¬ 
 fect, and Future-Perfect are formed. 
 
 These five Stems belong to the Active and Middle. There 
 are added to them, for the special forms of the Passive : 
 
 6. The Strong Passive Stem , from which the Second or 
 Strong Aorist Passive and Second Future Passive are 
 
 O 
 
 formed. 
 
 7 . The Weak Passive Stem , from which the First or Weak 
 Aorist Passive and First Future Passive are formed. 
 
 The form from which all the Tense-Stems of a verb may 
 be derived is called the Verbal Stem. 
 
 § 228. The Subjunctive is indicated between the Stem 
 and the ending. Long vowels are peculiar to it: Χυ-ω-μεν , 
 solv-d-mus ; Χν-η-τε, solv-d-tis. 
 
 The vowel t is characteristic of the Optative, which gen¬ 
 erally becomes a diphthong with other vowels : Χυ-οι-μεν, 
 we would loose. The Subjunctive has the endings of the 
 principal tenses / the Optative (except 1 Sing. Act.) those 
 of the historical tenses. 
 
 The Imperative has the following peculiar endings: 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 Sing. 2. -θι 
 3. -τω 
 Dual 2. -τον 
 3. -των 
 Plur. 2. -τε 
 
 3. -ντων 01’ -τωσαν 
 
 -σο 
 
 -σθω 
 
 -σθον 
 
 -σθων 
 
 -σθε 
 
 -σθων ΟΓ -σθωσαν 
 
 § 229. The general law for the accentuation of the verb 
 is that the accent is placed as far back as possible from 
 
 § 228. Dialects.—The Horn, dialect often shortens the long vowel 
 of the Subjunctive in the Dual and Plural. 
 
101 
 
 § 230. CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 the end , final a i not being considered long except in the 
 optative : λύω, λύετε, Χυομαι. 
 
 Obs. —An exception is formed by tlie Participles , which in declen¬ 
 sion (chap, vii.), if possible (§§ 79-87), always keep the accent 
 on the same syllable as in the Nom. Sing. Masc.: Part. Pres. Act. 
 βασιλεύων, regnans, Neut. βασιλεϋον (not βασίλενον , according to 
 § 84), Part. Fut. Act. βασΐλενσων, regnaturus, Neut. βασΐλεύσον. 
 (The special exceptions, see §§ 331-333.) 
 
 § 230. We distinguish Two Principal Conjugations: 
 
 1. The First —the far more frequent—connects the per¬ 
 sonal endings with the first two Tense-Stems by a connect¬ 
 ing vowel: λύ-ο-μεη. The verbs belonging to it are called 
 verbs in ω because the first Person Sing. Pres. Act. ends 
 in ω : λύω. 
 
 2. The Seco7id —the less frequent, but older—affixes the 
 personal endings to the first two Tense-Stems without a 
 connecting vowel: εσ-μίν. They are called verbs in μ i 
 because the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. preserves the original end¬ 
 ing μ l : ει-μί. 
 
 The forms of the other five Tense-Stems are common to 
 both Conjugations. 
 
 The Paradigms of the \ r erbs are given first: the forma¬ 
 tion of each Tense-Stem is then explained in order. 
 
 List of the Pakadigms. 
 
 E ίμί, I am .Table I. 
 
 Synopsis of λύω , I loose (exhibiting the meanings of the 
 
 Tenses). “ II. 
 
 Verbs in ω. 
 
 A. Voicel Stems. 
 
 1. Uncontracted, λύω . “ III. 
 
 2. Contracted, τιμάω, ποάω, δουλύω.. _ u IV. 
 
 B. Consonant Stems. 
 
 1. Guttural Stems, πλέκω, φεύγω , τάσσω.. “ V. 
 
 2. Dental Stems, ψεύδομαι, πείθω, κομίζω _... α VI. 
 
 3. Labial Stems, πέμπω, λείπω, καλύπτ ω . “ VII. 
 
 4. Liquid Stems, δερω, αγγέλλω, σπείρω . . “ VIII. 
 
 Verbs in ΜΙ. 
 
 First Class, τίθημι, δίδωμι, 'ίστημι . u IX. 
 
 Second Class, δείκννμι . α Χ« 
 
102 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS 
 
 Table I. 
 
 PABADXGMS OF VEKBS. 
 
 E !μί, I am. Stem ες. 
 
 Moods. 
 
 Numbers. 
 
 Persons. | 
 
 1 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 
 είμί 
 
 ήν or ή 
 
 εσομαι 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 έί 
 
 ησθα 
 
 εση ΟΓ εσει 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ίστί(ν) 
 
 ην 
 
 εσται 
 
 
 0. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 εσόμεθον 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Ιστόν 
 
 ήστον 01 ’ η τον 
 
 εσεσθον 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ιστόν 
 
 η στην 01 ’ ητην 
 
 εσεσθον 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 εσμ'εν 
 
 η μεν 
 
 εσύμεθα 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 * t 
 
 εστε 
 
 ηστε or ητε 
 
 εσεσθε 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 > r 
 
 εισι 
 
 ησαν 
 
 εσονται 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 
 Ύ 
 
 ω 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 vs 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 ητον 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ητον 
 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 ώμεν 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ητε 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ώσι 
 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 
 ε’ίην 
 
 
 εσοίμην 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ε’ίης 
 
 
 εσοιο 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ft 
 
 ενη 
 
 
 εσοιτο 
 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 εσοίμεθον 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ε’ίητον ΟΓ είτον 
 
 
 εσοισθον 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 είητην 01 * ειτην 
 
 
 εσοίσθη 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 είημεν or εΊμεν 
 
 
 εσοίμεθα 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ε’ίητε or είτε 
 
 
 εσοισθε 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ε’ίησαν ΟΥ εΐεν 
 
 
 εσοιντο 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 s. 
 
 2 
 
 ΐσθι 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 έστω 
 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 εστον 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 εστων 
 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 2 
 
 εστε 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 εστωσαν 01 ’ εστων 
 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 είναι 
 
 
 εσεσθαι 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 
 Η 
 
 ων 
 
 
 εσόμενος 
 
 
 
 
 ουσα 
 
 
 εσομενη 
 
 
 
 
 ον (Stem οντ ) 
 
 
 εσόμενον 
 
 Note.— Tlie formation of the tenses of this verb is explained in 
 § 315, but they are inserted in this place because some of them are re¬ 
 quired in conjugating the Middle and Passive Voices of ordinary verbs. 
 
Synopsis of the Verb λυ-ω, to loose {exhibiting the meanings of the Tenses ). 
 
 Table II. paradigms op verbs. 103 
 
104 PARADIGMS OF VERBS·—VERBS IN Ω. Table III. 
 
 A. VOWEL STEMS. 
 
 Active 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Numbers. 
 
 Persous. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 \ 
 
 Subjunctive, j 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 λύω 
 
 ελυον 
 
 λύω 
 
 
 2 
 
 λύεις 
 
 ελυες 
 
 λύφς 
 
 
 3 
 
 λύει 
 
 ελυε(ν) 
 
 λύ$ 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 λύετον 
 
 έλύετον 
 
 λύητον 
 
 
 3 
 
 λύετον 
 
 ελυέτην 
 
 λύητον 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 λύομεν 
 
 ελύομεν 
 
 λύωμεν 
 
 
 2 
 
 λύετε 
 
 ελύετε 
 
 λύητε 
 
 
 3 
 
 λύονσι ( ν ) 
 
 ελυον 
 
 λύο jai(v) 
 
 Future. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 λύσω 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 λύσεις 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 λύσει 
 
 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 λύσετον 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 λύσετον 
 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 λύσομεν 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 λύσετε 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 λύσονσι(ν) 
 
 
 
 1 Aorist 
 
 S. 1 
 
 έλυσα 
 
 
 λύσω 
 
 (Weak). 
 
 2 
 
 ελυσας 
 
 
 λύσyς 
 
 
 3 
 
 ελνσε(ν) 
 
 
 λύση 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 ελύσατον 
 
 
 λύσητον 
 
 
 3 
 
 ελνσάτην 
 
 
 λύσητον 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 έλύσαμεν 
 
 
 λύσωμεν 
 
 
 2 
 
 έλύσατε 
 
 
 λύσητε 
 
 
 3 
 
 έλυσαν 
 
 
 λύσωσι(ν) 
 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 1 Perfect 
 
 S. 1 
 
 λελυκα 
 
 ελελύκειν 
 
 λελύκω 
 
 (Weak). 
 
 2 
 
 λελυκας 
 
 ελελύκεις 
 
 λελύκι^ς 
 
 
 3 
 
 λελυκε(ν ) 
 
 ελελύκει 
 
 λελύκφ 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 λελύκατον 
 
 ελελύκειτον 
 
 λελύκητον 
 
 
 3 
 
 λελύκατον 
 
 ελελνκείτην 
 
 λελύκητον 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 λελύκαμεν 
 
 ελελύκειμεν 
 
 λελύκωμεν 
 
 
 2 
 
 λελύκατε 
 
 ελελύκειτε 
 
 λελύκητε 
 
 
 3 
 
 λελύκάσ ι(ν) 
 
 ελελύκεσαν 
 
 λελύκωσι(ν ) 
 
 
 
 
 ΟΓ ελελύκεισαν 
 
 
 2 Aorist 
 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 
 (Strong). 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 Perfect and 
 
 
 W anting. 
 
 
 
 Pluperf. (Strong). 
 
 
 
 
 
 Examples for 
 
 θύω , I sacrifice ; θεραπεύω, I serve; βουλεύω , I advise ; χορεύω , I dance; 
 
 επαύσθην ; 
 
Table III. paradigms of verbs.—verbs in Ω. 105 
 
 1. UNCONTRACTED. 
 
 Voice. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Χύοιμι 
 
 
 Χνεεν 
 
 Χνων 
 
 Χύοις 
 
 Χνε 
 
 
 Χύονσα 
 
 Χύοι 
 
 Χνετω 
 
 
 Χνον 
 
 Χύοιτον 
 
 Χύετον 
 
 
 
 Χνοίτην 
 
 Χνετων 
 
 
 Gen. Χύοντος 
 
 Χύοιμεν 
 
 
 
 Χνούσης 
 
 Χύοιτε 
 
 Χύετε 
 
 
 Χύοντος 
 
 Χύοιεν 
 
 Χυόντων ΟΓ Χν'ετωσαν 
 
 
 St. Χυ οντ 
 
 Χύσοιμι 
 
 
 Χύσειν 
 
 Χύσων 
 
 Χύσοις 
 
 
 
 
 Χύσοι 
 
 
 
 Χύσουσα 
 
 Χύσοιτον 
 
 
 
 Χύσον 
 
 Χνσ ο'ιτην 
 
 
 
 Gen. Χύσοντος 
 
 Χύσοιμεν 
 
 
 
 Χνσούσης 
 
 Χύσοιτε 
 
 
 
 Χύσοντος 
 
 Χύσοιεν 
 
 
 
 St. Χνσ οντ 
 
 Χύσαιμι 
 
 
 Χύσαι. 
 
 Χύσας 
 
 Χύσαις ΟΓ Χύσειας 
 
 Χνσον 
 
 
 Χύσασα 
 
 
 
 
 Χνσαν 
 
 Χύσαι ΟΓ Χύσειε(ν) 
 
 Χνσάτω 
 
 
 Gen. Χύσαντος 
 
 Χΰσαιτον 
 
 Χύσατον 
 
 
 Χνσάσης 
 
 Χνσαίτην 
 
 Χυσάτων 
 
 
 Χύσαντος 
 
 Χύσαιμεν 
 
 
 
 St. Χνσαντ 
 
 Χύσαιτε 
 
 Χύσατε , [σαν 
 
 
 
 Χύσαιεν ΟΓ Χύσειαν 
 
 Χνσάντων ΟΓ Χνσάτω- 
 
 
 
 ΧεΧύκοιμι 
 
 
 ΧεΧνκεναι 
 
 / 
 
 ΧεΧνκώς 
 
 ΧεΧύκοις 
 
 ΧεΧνκε 
 
 
 ΧεΧνκνύα 
 
 
 
 
 ΧεΧνκός 
 
 ΧεΧύκοι 
 
 ΧεΧνκετω 
 
 
 Gen. ΧεΧνκότος 
 
 ΧεΧύκοιτον 
 
 
 
 ΧεΧνκνίας 
 
 ΧεΧνκοίτην 
 
 ΧεΧύκετον 
 
 
 ΧεΧνκότος 
 
 ΧεΧύκοιμεν 
 
 ΧεΧνκετων 
 
 
 St. ΧεΧνκοτ 
 
 ΧεΧύκοιτε 
 
 ΧεΧύκετε 
 
 
 
 ΧεΧύκοίεν 
 
 ΧεΧνκόντων ΟΓ 
 
 
 
 
 ΧεΧνκέτωσαν 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 δακρνω,Ι weep ; παύω, I make to cease (Mid.,/ cease). [1 Aor. Pass. 
 Verbal, παυστεος.] 
 
106 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Ω. Table III.— 
 
 A. VOWEL STEMS. 
 
 Middle and 
 
 Tenses common to 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Nos. 
 
 Per¬ 
 
 sons. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 λύομαι 
 
 λύωμαι 
 
 
 2 
 
 λύ /j or λύει 
 
 λύ y 
 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 λύεται 
 
 λύΐ]ται 
 
 
 D. 1 
 
 λυόμεθον 
 
 λυώμεθον 
 
 
 2 
 
 λνεσθον 
 
 λύησθον 
 
 
 3 
 
 λύεσθον 
 
 λύησθον 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 λνόμεβα 
 
 λνώμεθα 
 
 
 2 
 
 λύεσθε 
 
 λύησθε 
 
 
 3 
 
 λύονται 
 
 λύωνται 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 ελνόμην 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ελύου 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ελύετο 
 
 
 
 D. 1 
 
 ελνόμεθον 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ελύεσθον 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ελνεσθην 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 ελνόμεθα 
 
 
 * 
 
 2 
 
 ελύεσθε 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ελύοντο 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 λύσομαι [ομαι 
 
 
 
 
 etc., as in tlie Pres, λύ- 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 λελνμαι 
 
 λελνμενος ώ 
 
 
 2 
 
 λέλνσαι 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 λέλνται 
 
 
 
 D. 1 
 
 λελύμεθον 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 λελυσθον 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 λελνσθον 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 λελύμεθα 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 λελνσθε 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 λελννται 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 ελελύμην 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ελελνσο 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ελελντο 
 
 
 
 D. 1 
 
 ελελύμεθον 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ελελνσθον 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ελελύσθην 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 ελελύμεθα 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ελελνσθε 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ελέλνντο 
 
 
 Future Per- 
 
 S. 1 
 
 λελύσομαι [ομαι 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 
 etc., as in the Pres, λύ- 
 
 
Continued . paradigms or verbs.—verbs in Ω. 107 
 
 I. UNCONTRACTED. 
 
 Passive Voices. (§ 225,Obs. 2.) 
 both Voices. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Χνοίμην 
 
 Χύοω 
 
 Xvoiro 
 
 Χυοίμεθον 
 
 Χνοισθον 
 
 Χνοίσθην 
 
 Χυοίμεθα 
 
 Χΰοισθε 
 
 Χύοιντο 
 
 Χύον 
 
 Χνεσβω 
 
 Χΰεσθον 
 
 Χυέσθων 
 
 Χνεσθε 
 
 Χυέσθων 01' 
 Χνέσθωσαν 
 
 Χύεσθαι 
 
 Χνόμενοζ 
 
 Χνομενη 
 
 Χυόμενον 
 
 
 
 
 
 Χυσοίμην \οίμην 
 
 etc., as in the Pres. Xv- 
 
 
 Χΰσεσθαί 
 
 Χνσόμενος 
 
 Χνσομ'ενη 
 
 Χυσόμενον 
 
 ΧεΧνμένος ε’ίην 
 
 ΧέΧνσο 
 
 ΧεΧΰσθω 
 
 ΧεΧυσθον 
 
 ΧεΧύσθων 
 
 ΧέΧνσθε 
 ΧεΧνσθων 01’ 
 ΧεΧΰσθωσαν 
 
 ΧεΧύσβαι 
 
 ΧεΧνμένος 
 
 ΧεΧνμένη 
 
 ΧεΧνμένον 
 
 
 
 
 
 ΧεΧνσοίμην [ οίμην 
 
 etc., as in the Pres. Xv- 
 
 
 Χελύσεσθαι 
 
 ΧεΧνσόμενος 
 
 ΧεΧνσομένη 
 
 )^Χυσόμενον 
 
108 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Ω. Table III.— 
 
 A. VOWEL STEMS. 
 
 Middle and 
 
 Tenses 'peculiar to 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Numbers. 
 
 Persons. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 1 Aorist 
 
 S. 1 
 
 εΧνσάμην 
 
 Χνσωμαι 
 
 
 (Weak). 
 
 2 
 
 εΧνσω 
 
 Xva7j 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ΙΧνσατο 
 
 Χΰσ7]ται 
 
 
 
 D. 1 
 
 εΧνσάμεθον 
 
 Χνσώμεθον 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 εΧνσασθον 
 
 Χνσησθον 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 εΧυσάσθην 
 
 Χύσ7]σθοΐ7 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 εΧνσάμεθα 
 
 Χνσώμεθα 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 εΧνσασθε 
 
 Χνσησθε 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 εΧΰσαντο 
 
 Χνσωνται 
 
 
 2 Aorist 
 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 
 (Strong). 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tenses peculiar to 
 
 1 Aorist 
 
 S. 1 
 
 εΧΰθην 
 
 Χυθώ 
 
 
 (Weak). 
 
 2 
 
 ε\νθ7]ς 
 
 Χυθ^/ς 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 εΧνθη 
 
 Χνθ$ 
 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 ίλύθ7]Τ0ν 
 
 Χνθητον 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 εΧνθήτην 
 
 Χνθητον 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 εΧνθημεν 
 
 Χνθώμεν 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 εΧΰθ/]τε 
 
 Χνθητε 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 εΧύθησαν 
 
 Χυθώσί(ν) 
 
 
 1 Future 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Χυθησομαι 
 
 
 
 (Weak). 
 
 2 
 
 λνθησ? ι ) or Χνθησει 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Χνθήσεται 
 
 
 
 
 D. 1 
 
 Χνθΐ]σόμεθον 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Χυθησεσθον 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Χνθη σεσθον 
 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 Χνθησόμεθα 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Χνθησεσθε 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Χνθησονται 
 
 
 
 2 Aorist 
 
 
 W anting. 
 
 
 
 (Strong). 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 Future 
 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 
 (Strong). 
 
 
 
 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : λυτός , r), 6v. 2. Χυτεος , a, ov. 
 
 
Continued, paradigms of verbs.—verbs in Ω. 109 
 
 I. UNCONTRACTED. 
 Passive Voice. 
 the Middle Voice. 
 
 > 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 λυσαίμην 
 
 Χΰσαιο 
 
 λΰσαιτο 
 
 Χυσαίμεθον 
 
 Χνσαισθον 
 
 Χνσαίσθην 
 
 Χνσαίμεθα 
 
 Χΰσαισθε 
 
 Χνσαιντο 
 
 Χνσαι 
 
 Χνσάσθω 
 
 Χνσασθον 
 
 Χνσάσθων 
 
 Χύσασβε 
 Χνσάσθων ΟΓ 
 Χνσάσθωσαν 
 
 Χνσασθαι 
 
 Χυσάμενος 
 
 Χνσαμενη 
 
 Χνσάμενον 
 
 
 
 
 
 the Passive Voice. 
 
 
 Χνθείην 
 
 Χυθείης 
 
 Χνθείη 
 
 Χνθείητον 01* ΧυθεΤτον 
 Χνθειητην ΟΓ Χνθείτην 
 Χυθείημεν 01* Χυθεϊμεν 
 Χνθείητε ΟΓ Χυθείτε 
 Χυθείησαν ΟΓ ΧυθεΊεν 
 
 Χΰθητι 
 
 Χνθήτω 
 
 Χΰθητον 
 
 Χυθητών 
 
 Χνθητε 
 
 Χνθητωσαν ΟΓ 
 Χνθεντων 
 
 Χυθηναι 
 
 Χυθείς 
 
 ΧυθεΊσα 
 
 Χνθεν 
 
 Gen. Χνθέντύς 
 Χνθείσης 
 
 Χυθ'εντος 
 
 St. Χυθεντ 
 
 Χνθησοίμην 
 
 Χυθήσοιο 
 
 Χυθήσοιτο 
 
 Χυθησοίμεθον 
 
 Χυθήσοισθον 
 
 Χυθησοίσθην 
 
 Χνθησοίμεθα 
 
 Χυθησοισθε 
 
 Χνθησοιντο 
 
 
 Χνθήσεσθαι 
 
 Χνθησόμενος 
 
 Χνθησομ'ενη 
 
 Χνθησύμενον 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
110 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Ω. Table IV, 
 
 A. VOWEL STEMS. 
 
 Present and 
 
 τιμάω , I honor 
 
 [compare Lat. am(a)d\. 
 
 Stems: τιμά 
 
 ποιεω , I make 
 [comp. Lat. moneo]. 
 
 π ο ιε 
 
 δονΧύω , I subjugate. 
 
 δ ovXo 
 
 Active. 
 
 a> 
 
 • rH 
 
 C3 
 
 o 
 
 σι 
 
 <u 
 
 Sh 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 τιμάω τιμώ 
 τιμάεις τιμάς 
 τιμρ 
 
 τιμάει 
 
 τιμαετον τ ι ματ ον 
 τιμάετον τι ματ ον 
 τιμάομεν τιμώ μεν 
 τιμάετε τιμάτε 
 τιμά-ον- τιμώ- 
 σι (ν) σ ι (ν) 
 
 ποιεω ποιώ 
 ποιεεις ποιείς 
 ποάει ποιεί 
 
 π οιεετον 
 ποιέετον 
 ποιεομεν 
 ποιέετε 
 ποι'εου- 
 σι(ν) 
 
 π ο ιε ιτ ον 
 ποιεΐτον 
 π οιου μεν 
 π οιεϊτε 
 ποιον- 
 σι(ν) 
 
 δουΧόω δονΧώ 
 δονΧόεις δονΧο ~ις 
 δονΧόει δονΧοϊ 
 
 δουΧόετον δονΧοντον 
 δουΧόετον δ ονΧοντον 
 δουΧόομεν δ ονΧον μεν 
 δονΧόετε δ ονΧοντε 
 δουΧόον- δονΧον- 
 σι (ν) σ ι (ν) 
 
 <ΰ 
 
 > 
 
 * 
 
 -Μ 
 
 ο 
 
 ΰ 
 
 τη 
 
 ο 
 
 > 
 
 • γΗ 
 
 c3 
 
 & 
 
 ο 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 1 
 
 2 
 ‘ 3 
 
 Ρ. 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 τιμάω τιμώ 
 
 τιμά]]ς τιμμς 
 
 τιμά] y τιμςί 
 
 τιμαητον 
 
 τιμάητον 
 
 τιμάωμεν 
 
 τιμάητε 
 
 τιμάω- 
 
 σι(ν) 
 
 τι ματ ον 
 τ ιμδιτ ον 
 τιμώ μεν 
 τιμάτε 
 τ ι μ ώ- 
 σ ι (ν) 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 1 
 
 2 
 
 τιμαοιμ ι 
 (-αοίην 
 τιμάοις 
 (-αοίης 
 τιμάοι 
 (-αοίη 
 
 τιμφμι 
 
 -φ η?)* 
 
 τιμφς 
 
 -ψ ηβ 
 
 τιμφ 
 
 -ψ*ι) 
 
 Ρ. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 τιμαοιτον 
 (-αοίητον 
 τιμαοίτην 
 (-αοιήτην 
 τιμάοιμεν 
 (-αοίη μεν 
 τιμάοιτε 
 (-αοίητε 
 τιμάοιεν 
 
 τιμφτ ον 
 -οίητον) 
 τιμφ την 
 -φήτην) 
 τιμφ μεν 
 -φημεν) 
 τιμφτε 
 -ψητέ) 
 τ ιμφεν 
 
 ποιεω 
 
 ποιείς 
 
 ποιεη 
 
 ποιεητον 
 
 ποιεητον 
 
 ποιεωμεν 
 
 ποιεητε 
 
 ποιέω- 
 
 σι(ν) 
 
 ποιώ 
 π ο iy ς 
 π ο iy 
 
 π ο ι η τ ο ν 
 π ο ι η τ ο ν 
 π ο ιώ μεν 
 π ο ιήτε 
 π οιώ- 
 σ ι (V) 
 
 δονΧόω δ ονXώ 
 
 δovXόyς δονΧοΐς 
 δουΧό y δονΧοι 
 
 δουΧόητον 
 
 δονΧόητον 
 
 δονΧόωμεν 
 
 δουΧόητε 
 
 δονΧόω- 
 
 σι(ν) 
 
 δουΧώτον 
 δ ουΧώτον 
 δ ουΧώ μεν 
 δ ονΧώτε 
 δ ο ν X ώ- 
 σ ι (ν) 
 
 ποιεοιμι 
 
 (εοίην 
 
 ποιεοις 
 
 {-εοιης 
 
 ποιεοι 
 
 (-εοίη 
 
 ποιοιμι 
 -οίην) 
 ποιόις 
 -ο ι η ς) 
 ποιοϊ 
 -ο ί η) 
 
 δονΧόοιμι 
 (-οοίην 
 δονΧόοις 
 {-οοίης 
 δονΧόοι 
 
 (-00(77 
 
 δουΧοΊμι 
 -ο ί η ν) 
 δουΧοΊς 
 -ο ί η ς) 
 δουΧοϊ 
 -ο ί 77 ) 
 
 ποιεοιτον 
 
 (-εοίητον 
 
 ποιεοίτην 
 
 {-εορτήν 
 
 ποι'εοιμεν 
 
 (-εοίημεν 
 
 ποιεοιτε 
 
 (-εοίητε 
 
 ποιεοιεν 
 
 (-εοίησαν 
 
 π οιοιτ ον 
 
 -οίητον) 
 
 π ο ιοίτην 
 
 -οιήτην) 
 
 π οιοϊ μεν 
 
 -οίημεν) 
 
 ποιο~ιτε 
 
 -οίητε) 
 
 ποιοΊεν 
 
 -οίησαν) 
 
 δουΧόοιτον δονΧοΊτον 
 (-οοίητον -οίητον) 
 δονΧοοίτ?]ν δονΧοίτην 
 (-οοιήτην -οιήτην) 
 δονΧόοιμεν δονΧοϊμεν 
 (-οοίημεν -οίημεν) 
 δονΧόοιτε δ ουΧοιτ ε 
 (~οοίΐ]τε -οίητε) 
 δουΧόοιεν δ ονΧοϊεν 
 
 * Ohs . — The more usual forms are those printed in spaced type. 
 
Table IY. paradigms of verbs.—verbs in Ω. Ill 
 
 II. CONTRACTED. 
 
 Imperfect Tenses. 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 Middle 
 
 and Passive. 
 
 
 τιμάομαι 
 
 τι μ ώ μαι 
 
 ποιεομαι 
 
 ποιούμαι 
 
 ύουλόομαι 
 
 δουΧούμαι 
 
 τιμά y, ει 
 
 τιμά 
 
 ποιέη, ει 
 
 π ο ι?ρ εϊ 
 
 dovXoy, ει 
 
 δ ονΧοϊ 
 
 τιμάεται 
 
 τιμάται 
 
 ποι'εεται 
 
 π ο ιεΐτ αι 
 
 ύουΧόεται 
 
 δονΧονται 
 
 τιμαύμεθον 
 
 τιμώ με- 
 
 π οιεόμεθον 
 
 ποιούμε- 
 
 δουΧοόμε- 
 
 δουΧούμε- 
 
 
 θον 
 
 . · 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 τιμάεσθον 
 
 τιμάσθ ον 
 
 ποιεεσθον 
 
 π ο ιεϊσθ ον 
 
 δουΧόεσθον 
 
 δουΧούσθον 
 
 τιμάεσθον 
 
 τιμάσθον 
 
 7Γ οι'εεσθον 
 
 ποιεϊσθον 
 
 δουΧόεσθον 
 
 δ ονΧον σθ ον 
 
 τιμαόμεθα 
 
 τ ιμώ μεθ a 
 
 ττοιεόμεθα 
 
 π ο ιού μεθ α 
 
 δονΧοόμεθα 
 
 δ ονΧού μεθ α 
 
 τιμάεσθε 
 
 τιμάσθε 
 
 7 τοι'εεσθε 
 
 πο ιεϊσθε 
 
 δουΧόεσθε 
 
 δονΧούσθε 
 
 τιμάονται 
 
 τιμώντ α ι 
 
 7 τοιεονται 
 
 ποιούνται 
 
 δουΧόονται 
 
 δ ουΧούντ αι 
 
 τιμάω μαι 
 
 τ ι μ ώ μ α ι 
 
 7 τοιεωμαι 
 
 π οιώ μαι 
 
 δουΧόωμαι 
 
 δουΧώμαι 
 
 τιμάγ 
 
 τιμφ 
 
 7roisy 
 
 π ο iy 
 
 δουΧόη 
 
 δ ονΧοϊ 
 
 τιμάηται 
 
 τιμάται 
 
 ποιεηται 
 
 π οιηται 
 
 δουΧόηται 
 
 δουΧώται 
 
 τιμαώμε- 
 
 τιμώ με- 
 
 7 τοιεώμεθον 
 
 ποιώ με- 
 
 δουΧοώμε- 
 
 δ ουΧώ με- 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 τιμάησθον 
 
 τιμάσθον 
 
 7 τοιεησθον 
 
 ποιησθον 
 
 δονΧόησθον 
 
 δουΧώσθον 
 
 τιμάησθον 
 
 τιμάσθον 
 
 7Γ οιεησθον 
 
 ποιησθον 
 
 δονΧόησθον 
 
 δουΧώσθον 
 
 τιμαώμεθα 
 
 τιμώ μέθα 
 
 τ τοιεώμεθα 
 
 ποιώ μεθ α 
 
 δουΧοώμεθα 
 
 δονΧώμέθα 
 
 τιμάησθε 
 
 τιμάσθε 
 
 ΤΓοάησβε 
 
 π οιήσθε 
 
 δονΧόησθε 
 
 δονΧώσθε 
 
 τιμάωνται 
 
 τ ι μώντ αι 
 
 ττοι'εωνται 
 
 ποιώνται 
 
 δονΧόωνται 
 
 δ ονΧώνται 
 
 τιμαοίμην 
 
 τιμψμην 
 
 ποιεοίμην 
 
 π ο ιο ί μη ν 
 
 δουΧοοίμην 
 
 δ ο ν X ο ί μ η ν 
 
 τιμάοιο 
 
 τ ιμιμο 
 
 7 τοιέοιο 
 
 πο ιοΐο 
 
 δονΧόοιο 
 
 δ ονΧοϊ ο 
 
 τιμάοιτο 
 
 τ ιμιμτ ο 
 
 7Γ οιέοιτο 
 
 πο ιοί το 
 
 δονΧόοιτο 
 
 δονΧοϊτο 
 
 τιμαοίμε- 
 
 τιμφ με- 
 
 π οιεοίμεθον 
 
 πο ιο ί με- 
 
 δονΧοοίμε- 
 
 δ ονΧο ί με- 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 τιμάοισθον 
 
 τ ι μιμσθ ον 
 
 7τ οιεοισθον 
 
 ποιοϊσθ ον 
 
 δονΧόοι- 
 
 δ ονΧοϊσθ ον 
 
 
 
 
 
 σθον 
 
 
 τιμαοίσθον 
 
 τιμάσθον 
 
 ττοιεοίσθην 
 
 ποιοισθην 
 
 δονΧοοί- 
 
 δ ονΧοίσθην 
 
 
 
 
 
 σθην 
 
 
 τιμαοίμεθα 
 
 τ ιμομ μεθ α 
 
 ποιεοίμεθα 
 
 π ο ιο ί μεθ α 
 
 δονΧοοίμε- 
 
 δ ονΧοίμέθα 
 
 
 
 
 
 θα 
 
 
 τιμάοισθε 
 
 τιμιμ σθε 
 
 7 τοι'εοισθε 
 
 ποιοισθ ε 
 
 δονΧόοισθε 
 
 δονΧοϊσθ ε 
 
 τιμάοιντο 
 
 τιμιμντο 
 
 ττοιεοιντο 
 
 π οιοϊντ ο 
 
 δονΧυοιντο 
 
 δ ονΧοϊντο 
 
 1 
 
 
 
112 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Ω. Tclllle XV·— 
 
 A. VOWEL STEMS. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tenses , 
 
 
 τιμάω. I honor 
 
 ττοιέω 
 
 I make 
 
 ύουλύω. I subjugate. 
 
 [compare Lat. am(«)o]. 
 
 [comp. Lat. moneo] . 
 
 
 
 
 Stems: τι 
 
 μα 
 
 7 rote 
 
 δ 
 
 ούλο 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 S. 2 
 
 τίμαε 
 
 τιμαέτω 
 
 τιμά 
 
 ποίεε 
 
 7Γ οίει 
 
 δούλοε 
 
 δ ούλον 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 τ ι μάτ ω 
 
 ποιεέτω 
 
 ττ ο ιείτ ω 
 
 δονλοέτω 
 
 δ ο νλο ύ τ ω 
 
 o’ 
 
 D. 2 
 
 τιμάετον 
 
 τι μ άτ ο ν 
 
 7 τοιεετον 
 
 ποιεϊτον 
 
 δονλόετον 
 
 δούλούτον 
 
 • rH 
 
 03 
 
 o 
 
 8 
 
 τιμαέτων 
 
 τι μάτ ων 
 
 ποιεέτων 
 
 7 τ ο ιε ίτ ων 
 
 δουλοέτων 
 
 δονλούτων 
 
 P. 2 
 
 τιμάετε 
 
 τιμάτε 
 
 ποιέετε 
 
 7τ ο ιεϊτε 
 
 δουλόετε 
 
 δ ονλούτε 
 
 Ά 
 
 e 
 
 
 τιμαόν- 
 
 τιμών- 
 
 τ Γοιεόν- 
 
 ποιούν- 
 
 δονλοόν- 
 
 δ ο υλ ο ύ ν- 
 
 HH 
 
 3 
 
 των 
 
 των 
 
 τιον 
 
 των 
 
 των 
 
 των 
 
 
 
 τιμαετω- 
 
 τ ι μ άτ ω- 
 
 ποιεέτω- 
 
 ττ ο ιείτ ω- 
 
 δονλοέτω- 
 
 δ ο ν λ ο ύ τ ω- 
 
 
 
 σαν 
 
 σαν 
 
 σαν 
 
 σαν 
 
 σαν 
 
 σαν 
 
 Infin. 
 
 
 τιμάειν 
 
 τιμάν 
 
 ποιέειν 
 
 τ το ιεΊν 
 
 δονλόειν 
 
 δ ονλούν 
 
 o’ 
 
 
 τιμάων 
 
 τιμών 
 
 7Γ οιεων 
 
 π ο ιών 
 
 δονλόων 
 
 δ ουλών 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 τιμάονσα 
 
 τ ι μώσ a 
 
 7 τοιέουσα 
 
 ποιούσα 
 
 δουλόουσα δ ο νλο ύ σ a 
 
 i*H 
 
 c3 
 
 
 τιμάον 
 
 τιμών 
 
 τ τοι'εον 
 
 ποιούν 
 
 δουλόον 
 
 δ ονλούν 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 έτίμαον 
 
 έτίμαες 
 
 έτ ί μ ω ν 
 
 έποίεον 
 
 επ ο ίουν 
 
 έδούλοον 
 
 έδ ούλουν 
 
 
 2 
 
 ετί μάς 
 
 έποίεες 
 
 επ οίεις 
 
 έδούλοες 
 
 έδούλους 
 
 
 3 
 
 ετίμαε(ν) 
 
 έτίμά 
 
 έποίεε(ν) 
 
 ε π οίει 
 
 έδούλοε(ν) 
 
 έδ ούλου 
 
 -M 
 
 o 
 
 -O 
 
 't; 
 
 D. 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 έτιμάε- 
 
 έτ ιμά- 
 
 έποιέετον 
 
 1 
 
 ο 
 
 Ν 
 
 •''JO 
 
 έδουλοέ- 
 
 έ δ ούλο ύ- 
 
 o 
 
 
 τον 
 
 τον 
 
 
 τον 
 
 τον 
 
 τον 
 
 P-i 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 έτιμαέ- 
 
 ετ ιμά- 
 
 έποιεέ- 
 
 επ ο ιεί- 
 
 εδουλοέ- 
 
 ε C ου λ ου- 
 
 (—1 
 
 
 την 
 
 την 
 
 την 
 
 την 
 
 την 
 
 την 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 έτιμάο- 
 
 έτ ι μ ώ- 
 
 έποιέομεν 
 
 εποιού- 
 
 έδουλόο- 
 
 έδ ονλού- 
 
 
 
 μεν 
 
 μεν 
 
 
 μεν 
 
 μεν 
 
 μεν 
 
 
 2 
 
 ετιμάετε 
 
 ετιμάτε 
 
 έποιέετε 
 
 επ ο ιεϊτε 
 
 έδονλόετε 
 
 έδονλούτε 
 
 
 3 
 
 ετίμαον 
 
 ε τ ί μ ω ν 
 
 εττοίεον 
 
 επ ο ίουν 
 
 έδούλοον 
 
 έ δούλου ν 
 
 The other Tenses are conjugated like the same Tenses in λύω. 
 
 τολμάω , I dare. 
 σιγάω, I am silent, 
 βοάω , I cedi out. 
 
 Examples for 
 
 εάω, I let (§ 236). 
 άσκέω, / practise, 
 κοσμέω, I adorn. 
 
Continued, paradigms of verbs.—verbs in Ω. 113 
 
 II. CONTRACTED. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 
 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 τιμάον 
 
 τιμώ 
 
 7 τοιεου 
 
 ποιον 
 
 δουλόου 
 
 δ ουΧον 
 
 τιμαεσθω 
 
 τ ι μάσθ ω 
 
 ττοιε'εσθω 
 
 ποιεί σθω 
 
 δονΧοεσθω 
 
 δ ονΧού σθ ω 
 
 τιμάεσίον 
 
 τιμάσθον 
 
 ττοι'εεσθον 
 
 ποιεΐσθον 
 
 δονλόεσθον 
 
 δονΧονσθον 
 
 τιμαέσθων 
 
 τιμάσθων 
 
 7Γ οιε'εσθων 
 
 ποιεί σθων 
 
 δουΧοεσθων 
 
 δονΧού σθ ων 
 
 τιμάεσθε 
 
 τ ι μάσθε 
 
 ποιεεσθε 
 
 π ο ιεϊσθ ε 
 
 δονΧόεσθε 
 
 δονΧονσθε 
 
 τιμαέσθων 
 
 τιμάσθων 
 
 7Γ οιε'εσθων 
 
 7 r ο ιείσθ ων 
 
 δουΧοεσθων 
 
 δ ονΧούσθων 
 
 τιμαεσθω- 
 
 τ ι μ άσ θ ω- 
 
 τ Γοιεεσθω- 
 
 ποιείσθω- 
 
 δονΧοεσθω- 
 
 δονΧούσθω- 
 
 σαν 
 
 σαν 
 
 σαν 
 
 σαν 
 
 σαν 
 
 σαν 
 
 τιμάεσθαι 
 
 τιμάσθαι 
 
 ποιίεσθαι 
 
 7Γ ο ιεϊσθ αι 
 
 δονΧόεσθαι 
 
 δ ονΧονσθαι 
 
 τιμαόμε- 
 
 τ ιμώ με- 
 
 7Γ οιεόμε- 
 
 ποιούμε- 
 
 δονΧοόμε- 
 
 δ ο ν X ο ύ μ ε- 
 
 νος 
 
 νος 
 
 νος 
 
 νος 
 
 νος 
 
 νος 
 
 τιμαομενη 
 
 τιμώμενη 
 
 7Γ οιεομ'ενη 
 
 ποιούμενη 
 
 δονΧοομενη 
 
 δ ονΧον μενη 
 
 τιμαόμε- 
 
 τι μώ με- 
 
 ποιεύμε- 
 
 ποιούμε- 
 
 δονΧοόμε- 
 
 δ ονΧού με- 
 
 νον 
 
 νον 
 
 νον 
 
 νον 
 
 νον 
 
 ν ο ι> 
 
 ετιμαόμην 
 
 ετ ι μώ μη ν 
 
 εττοιεόμην 
 
 επ ο ιού μην 
 
 εδονΧοόμην 
 
 εδ ονΧού μην 
 
 ετιμάον 
 
 ετ ι μ ώ 
 
 εποιέον 
 
 εποιού 
 
 εδονΧόον 
 
 ε δ ονΧον 
 
 ετιμάετο 
 
 ετ ιματο 
 
 εποιεετο 
 
 ε π ο ι εΐτ ο 
 
 εδονΧόετο 
 
 εδ ονΧοντ ο 
 
 ετιμαόμε- 
 
 ετ ι μώ με- 
 
 επ οιεόμε- 
 
 επ ο ιού με- 
 
 εδονΧοόμε- 
 
 εδ ονΧού με- 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 θον 
 
 ετιμάε- 
 
 ετ ιμά- 
 
 εττοιεεσθον 
 
 επ ο ιεΐ- 
 
 εδονΧύε- 
 
 ε δ ονΧον- 
 
 σθον 
 
 σθον 
 
 
 σθον 
 
 σθον 
 
 σθον 
 
 ετιμα'ε- 
 
 ετιμά- 
 
 εποιεεσθην 
 
 εποιεί- 
 
 εδονΧοε- 
 
 εδ ονΧού- 
 
 σθην 
 
 σθην 
 
 
 σθην 
 
 σθην 
 
 σθην 
 
 ετιμαόμε- 
 
 ετ ι μώ με- 
 
 εποιεύμε- 
 
 επ ο ιού με- 
 
 εδονΧοόμε- 
 
 ε δ ο νΧούμε- 
 
 θα 
 
 θα 
 
 θα 
 
 θ a 
 
 θα 
 
 θα 
 
 ετιμάεσθε 
 
 ετιμασθε 
 
 εποιεεσθε 
 
 ε π ο ιεΐσθ ε 
 
 εδονΧύεσθε 
 
 εδονΧον σθ ε 
 
 ετιμάοιπο 
 
 ετ ι μώντο 
 
 εποι'εοντο 
 
 εποιον ντο 
 
 εδονΧόοντο 
 
 εδ ονΧονντο 
 
 A Synopsis of these Tenses is given in the following Table; 
 Conjugation. 
 
 άριθμεω , I COUnt. ζημιόω, I punish. 
 
 δηΧύω , / make clear. χρνσόω, I gild, 
 
 στεφανόω, I crown. 
 
114 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Ω. Table IV.— 
 
 A. VOWEL STEMS. 
 
 ( Uncontracted 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Active Voice. 
 
 Future. 
 
 τιμήσω 
 
 ποιήσω 
 
 δονΧώσω 
 
 
 τιμήσοιμι 
 π οιήσοιμι 
 δονΧώσοίμι 
 
 1 Aorist 
 (Weak). 
 
 ετίμησα 
 
 εποίησα 
 
 εδονΧωσα 
 
 τιμήσω 
 π (Η η σ ω 
 δονΧώσω 
 
 τιμήσαιμι 
 π οιησαιμι 
 δονΧώσαιμι 
 
 1 Perfect 
 (Weak). 
 
 τετίμηκα 
 
 πεποίηκα 
 
 δεδονΧωκα 
 
 τετιμηκω 
 πειτοιηκω 
 δεδονΧώκω 
 
 τετιμηκοιμι 
 
 πεποιηκοιμι 
 
 δεδονΧώκοιμι 
 
 1 Pluperfect 
 (Weak). 
 
 ετετιμήκειν 
 επεπ οιηκειν 
 εδεδονΧώκειν 
 
 
 
 Middle and Passive Voices. 
 
 Future. 
 
 τιμησομαι 
 
 ττοιήσομαι 
 
 δονΧώσομαι 
 
 
 τιμησοίμην 
 
 ποιησοίμην 
 
 δονΧωσοίμην 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 τετίμημαι 
 
 πεποίημαι 
 
 δεδούΧωμαι 
 
 τετιμημενος ω 
 πειτοιημένος ω 
 δεδονΧωμένος ω 
 
 τετιμημενος εϊην 
 πεποιημενος είην 
 δεδονΧωμενος είην 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 ετετιμημην 
 επεποιήμην 
 εδεδονΧώμηΊ> 
 
 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 τετιμησομαι 
 πεπ οιησομαι 
 δεδονΧώσομαι 
 
 
 τετιμησοίμην 
 
 πεποιησοίμην 
 
 δεδονΧωσοίμην 
 
 1 Aorist Pas¬ 
 sive (Weak). 
 
 ετιμηθην 
 
 εποιηθην 
 
 εδονΧώθην 
 
 τιμηθώ 
 
 ποιηθώ 
 
 δονΧωθώ 
 
 τιμηθεί ην 
 ποιηθείην 
 δονΧωθείην 
 
 2 Future Pas¬ 
 sive Weak). 
 
 τιμηθησομαι 
 
 ποιηθησομαι 
 
 δονΧωθήσομαι 
 
 
 τιμηθησοίμην 
 
 ποιηθησοίμην 
 
 δονΧωθησοίμην 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : 1. ημητός 2. τιμητίος 
 
 ποιητός ποιητεος 
 
 δονΧωτός δουΧωτέος 
 
Continued, paradigms of verbs.—verbs in £2. 115 
 
 1. UNCONTRACTED. 
 Tenses.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Active Voice. 
 
 
 τεμησεεν 
 τ τοιήσειν 
 δουΧώσειν 
 
 τιμήσων 
 
 ποίησών 
 
 δουΧώσων 
 
 τίμησον 
 
 ποίησον 
 
 δονΧωσον 
 
 τιμησαι 
 
 7 τοεησαι 
 δουΧώσαε 
 
 τιμησας 
 
 ποιησας 
 
 δουΧώσας 
 
 τετίμηκε 
 
 πεποίηκε 
 
 δεδούΧωκε 
 
 τετιμηκεναε 
 
 πεποεηκ'εναε 
 
 δεδουΧωκεναε 
 
 τετιμηκώς 
 πειτοεηκώς 
 δεδονΧωκώς 
 
 
 
 
 Middle and Passive Voices. 
 
 
 τεμησεσθαι 
 
 ποιήσεσθαε 
 
 δονΧώσεσθαι 
 
 τεμησόμενος 
 
 7 τοεησόμενος 
 δουΧωσόμενος 
 
 τετίμησο 
 πεπ οίησο 
 δεδονΧωσο 
 
 τετεμησθαε 
 
 πεποιησθαι 
 
 δεδονΧώσθαι 
 
 τετεμημ'ενος 
 
 πεποιημενος 
 
 δεδουΧωμένος 
 
 
 
 
 
 τετιμήσεσθαι 
 
 πεποεησεσθαι 
 
 δεδονΧιίισεσθαι 
 
 τετεμησύμενος 
 πειτοεησόμενος 
 δεδουΧωσόμενος 
 
 τιμήθητε 
 π οιήθητι 
 δονΧώθητε 
 
 τιμηθήναι 
 
 7Γ οιηθήναε 
 δουΧωθήναε 
 
 τιμηθείς 
 
 ποιηθείς 
 
 δουΧωθείς 
 
 
 τιμηθήσεσθαε 
 
 ποεηθησεσθαε 
 
 δονΧωθησεσθαε 
 
 τιμηθησόμενος 
 
 ποεηθησόμενος 
 
 δονΧωθησόμενος 
 
 
116 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Ω. Table V. 
 
 B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
 
 πλέκω, I plait (Class 1); φεύγω, I flee (Class 2); 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 πλέκω 
 
 φεύγω 
 
 τάσσω 
 
 Imperfect. 
 έπλεκον 
 έφενγον 
 έτ άσσον 
 
 πλέκω 
 
 φεύγω 
 
 τάσσω 
 
 Future. 
 
 πλέξω 
 
 φεύξομαι 
 
 τάξω 
 
 
 
 1 Aorist (Weak). 
 
 2 Aorist (Strong). 
 
 1 Aorist (Weak). 
 
 έπλεξα 
 
 εφνγον 
 
 έταξα 
 
 
 πλέξω 
 
 φύγω 
 
 τάξω 
 
 1 Perfect (Weak). 
 
 2 Perfect (Strong). 
 
 1 Perfect (Weak). 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 πέπλεχα 
 
 πέφενγα 
 
 τέταχα 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 έπεπλέχειν 
 
 επεφεύγειν 
 
 ετετάχειν 
 
 πεπλέχω 
 
 πεφεύγω 
 
 τετάχω 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 πλέκομαι 
 
 τάσσομαι 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 έπλεκόμην 
 
 έτασσύμην 
 
 πλέκωμαι 
 
 τάσσωμαι 
 
 Future. 
 
 πλέξομαι 
 
 τάξομαι 
 
 
 
 1 Aorist Middle (Weak). 
 
 επλεξάμην 
 
 εταξάμην 
 
 
 πλέξωμαι 
 
 τάξωμαι 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 πέπλεγμαι 
 
 τέταγμαι 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 έπεπλέγμην 
 
 έτετάγμην 
 
 πεπλεγμένος ώ 
 τεταγμένος ώ 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 πεπλέξομαι 
 
 τετάξομαι 
 
 
 
 2 Aorist Pass. (Strong). 
 1 Aorist Pass. (Weak). 
 
 επλάκην 
 
 ετάχθην 
 
 
 πλακώ 
 
 ταχθώ 
 
 2 Future Pass. (Strong). 
 1 Future Pass. (Weak). 
 
 πλακησομαι 
 ταχθησομαι 
 
 
 
 Verbal Adjectives: 1. πλεκτός , φευκτός , τακτός. 
 
 Examples for 
 
 άγω , I drive (Aor. ργαγον, Perf. Act. ηχα ) ; άρχω , I rule , both of Class 
 (Pres, -σσω, rarely -ξω), see § 250. Nouns are formed from the Pure 
 ή άρχ-ή, the government. 
 
Table Y. paradigms of verbs.—verbs in Ω. 117 
 
 I. GUTTURAL STEMS. 
 
 τάσσω, I arrange (Class 4). Verbal Stems: ττΧεκ, φνγ, ταγ. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Active. 
 
 7 τΧέκοιμε 
 φεύγοιμι 
 τ άσσοιμι 
 
 7 τΧεκε 
 φεύγε 
 τάσσε 
 
 7 τΧεκειν 
 φεύγειν 
 τάσσειν 
 
 7 τΧ'εκοίν 
 φεύγω ν 
 τάσσων 
 
 πΧ'εζοιμι 
 
 φενζοίμην 
 
 τάζοιμι 
 
 
 7 τΧεζειν 
 
 φεύζεσβαι 
 
 τάζειν 
 
 ΊτΧεζων 
 
 φενζόμενος 
 
 τάζων 
 
 πΧεζαιμι 
 
 φύγοιμι 
 
 τάζαιμι 
 
 7 τΧέζον 
 
 φύγε 
 
 τάζον 
 
 ττΧεζαι 
 
 φυγεΊν 
 
 τάζαι 
 
 7 τΧεζας 
 
 φυγών 
 
 τάζας 
 
 πεπΧέχοιμι 
 
 7 τεφεύγοιμι 
 τετάχοιμι 
 
 7τεπΧεχε 
 
 7 τεφενγε 
 τεταχε 
 
 ττεττΧεχεναι 
 
 ττεφευγ'εναι 
 
 τεταχέναι 
 
 πεπΧεχώς 
 
 7 τεφευγώς 
 τεταχώς 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 ττΧεκοίμην 
 
 τασσοίμην 
 
 7 τΧέκου 
 τάσσον 
 
 ττΧ'εκεσθαι 
 
 τάσσεσθαι 
 
 7 τΧεκόμενος 
 τασσόμενος 
 
 ττΧεκοίμην 
 
 ταζοίμην 
 
 
 7 τΧ'εζεσθαι 
 τάζεσθαι 
 
 πΧεζόμε νος 
 τάζόμενος , 
 
 πΧεζαίμην 
 
 ταζαίμην 
 
 ττΧεζαι 
 
 τάζαι 
 
 ττΧέζασβαι 
 
 τάζασθαι 
 
 7 τΧεζάμενος 
 τάζόμενος 
 
 πεττΧεγ μένος είην 
 τεταγμένος είην 
 
 πεττΧεζο 
 τ'εταζο 
 
 πεττΧ'εχθαι 
 
 τετάχθαι 
 
 πεπΧεγμένος 
 
 τεταγμενος 
 
 πεττΧεζοίμην 
 τεταζοίμην 
 
 
 ττεττΧ'εζεσθαι 
 τετάζεσθαι 
 
 ττεπΧεζόμενος 
 
 τεταζόμενος 
 
 ττΧακείην 
 
 ταχθείην 
 
 πΧάκηθι 
 
 τάχθητι 
 
 7 τΧακηναι 
 ταχθηναι 
 
 πΧακείς 
 
 ταχθείς 
 
 ττΧακησοίμην 
 
 ταχθησοίμην 
 
 
 7 τΧακησεσθαι 
 ταχθησεσθαι 
 
 πΧακησόμενος 
 
 ταχθησόμενος 
 
 2. 7 τΧεκτέος, φενκτεος , τακτεος. 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 1; ορύσσω, I dig , Stem ορυχ, Class 4, a; for other guttural Stems 
 Verbal Stems, as to πΧέγ-μα, tlie wreath (§ 47); η τάζι-ς, arrangement; 
 
118 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Ω. Table VI. 
 
 B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
 
 •ψεύδομαι, I lie (Class 1) ; πείθω, I persuade (Class 2) ; 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 πείθω 
 
 κομίζω 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 έπειθον 
 
 εκόμιζον 
 
 πείθω 
 
 κομίζω 
 
 Future. 
 
 πείσω 
 
 κομιώ 
 
 
 1 Aorist (Weak). 
 
 έπεισα 
 
 εκύμισα 
 
 πείσω 
 
 κομίσω 
 
 2 Perfect (Strong). 
 1 Perfect (Weak). 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 π'εποιθα 
 
 κεκόμικα 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 επεποίθειν 
 
 εκεκομίκειν 
 
 πεποίθω 
 
 κεκομίκω 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ψεύδομαι 
 
 πείθομαι 
 
 κομίζομαι 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 εψενδόμην 
 
 επειθόμην 
 
 εκομιζόμην 
 
 ψεύδωμαι 
 
 πείθωμαι 
 
 κομίζωμαι 
 
 Future. 
 
 ψεύσομαι 
 
 πείσομαι 
 
 κομιονμαι 
 
 
 1 Aorist Middle) 
 (Weak). 
 
 έψενσάμην 
 
 ίπεισάμην 
 
 έκομισάμην 
 
 ψεύσωμαι 
 
 πείσωμαι 
 
 κομίσωμαι 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 έψευσμαι 
 
 πεπεισμαι 
 
 κεκόμισμαι 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 έψεύσμην 
 επεπείσμην 
 εκεκομ ίσμην 
 
 εψενσμενος ώ 
 πεπεισμένος ώ 
 κεκομισμένος ώ 
 
 1 Aorist Passive 
 (Weak). 
 
 εψεύσθην 
 
 επείσθην 
 
 εκομίσθην 
 
 ψευσθώ 
 
 πεισθώ 
 
 κομισθώ 
 
 1 Future Passive 
 (Weak). 
 
 ψευσθησομαι 
 
 πεισθησομαι 
 
 κομισθησομαι 
 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : 1. ψενστός, πειστός , κομιστός. 
 
 Examples for 
 
 σπενδω, libo, Flit, σπείσω, Pcrf. έσπεικα , Perf. Mid. έσπεισμαι , Aor. Pass. 
 For verbs of a Dental Stem, with the Present ending in -σσω, see § 250, 
 the lie ; η πίσ -Tt-r, the faith ; η σπονδ-η, the libation,’ ύ κΧύδ-ων, Gen. 
 
Table VI. paradigms of verbs.—verbs in Ω. 119 
 
 II. DENTAL STEMS. 
 
 κομίζω I carry (Class 1, h). Verbal Stems : ψενδ, πιθ, κομιδ. 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 7 τείθοιμι 
 
 πείθε 
 
 πείθειν 
 
 πείθων 
 
 
 κομίζοιμι 
 
 κόμιζε 
 
 κομίζειν 
 
 κομίζων 
 
 
 πείσοιμι 
 
 
 πείσειν 
 
 πείσων 
 
 
 κομιοΊμι 
 
 
 κομιείν 
 
 κομιών 
 
 
 πείσαιμι 
 
 πείσον 
 
 π είσαι 
 
 πείσας 
 
 
 κομίσαιμι 
 
 κόμισον 
 
 κομίσαι 
 
 κομίσας 
 
 
 πεποίθοιμι 
 
 πέποιθε 
 
 πεποιθέναι 
 
 πεποιθώς 
 
 
 κεκομίκοιμι 
 
 κεκόμικε 
 
 κεκομικέναι 
 
 κεκομικώς 
 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 ψενδοίμην 
 
 ψευδόν 
 
 ψενδεσθαι 
 
 ψενδόμενος 
 
 
 πειθοίμην 
 
 πείθον 
 
 πείβεσθαι 
 
 πειθόμενος 
 
 
 κομιζοίμην 
 
 κομίζον 
 
 κομίζεσθαι 
 
 κομιζόμενος 
 
 
 ψενσοίμ ην 
 
 
 ψενσεσθαι 
 
 ψευσόμενος 
 
 
 7 τεισοίμην 
 
 
 πείσεσθαι 
 
 πεισόμενος 
 
 
 κομιοίμην 
 
 
 κομιείσθαι 
 
 κομιονμενος 
 
 
 ψενσαίμην 
 
 ψενσαι 
 
 ψενσασθαι 
 
 ψενσάμενος 
 
 
 πεισαίμην 
 
 πείσαι · 
 
 πείσασθαι 
 
 πεισάμενος 
 
 
 κομισαίμην 
 
 κόμισαι 
 
 κομίσασθαι 
 
 κομισάμενος 
 
 
 Ιψευσμένος είην 
 
 εψενσο 
 
 εψενσθαι 
 
 έψενσμένος 
 
 
 πεπεισμένος είην 
 
 πέπεισο 
 
 πεπείσθαι 
 
 πεπεισμένος 
 
 
 κεκομισμένος είην 
 
 κεκόμισο 
 
 κεκομίσθαι 
 
 κεκομισμένος 
 
 
 ψενσθείην 
 
 ψεύσθητι 
 
 ψενσθηναι 
 
 ψενσθείς 
 
 
 πεισθείην 
 
 πείσθητι 
 
 πεισθηναι 
 
 πεισθείς 
 
 
 κομισθείην 
 
 κομίσθητι 
 
 κομισθηναι 
 
 κομισθείς 
 
 
 ψενσθησοίμην 
 
 
 ψενσθήσεσθαι 
 
 ψενσθησύμενος 
 
 
 πεισθησοίμην 
 
 
 7 τεισθησεσθαι 
 
 πεισθησόμενος 
 
 
 κομισθησοίμην 
 
 
 κομισθησεσθαι 
 
 κομισθησόμενος 
 
 
 2. ψενστέος , πειστέος , κομιστέος. 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 έσπείσθην ; κλύζω , I wash against / αρπάζω, I snatch ’ ελπίζω, I hope. 
 Ohs. Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stem, as: τδ ψενδ-ος, 
 κ\νδων-ος , the leave / η άρπαγ-η, plunder. 
 
120 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 Table VII. 
 
 B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
 
 πέμπω, I send (Class 1) ; λείπω, I leave (Class 2); 
 
 Tenses. Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 πέμπω 
 
 λείπω 
 
 καλύπτω 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 επεμπον 
 
 ελειπον 
 
 εκάλυπτον 
 
 πέμπω 
 
 λείπω 
 
 καλύπτω 
 
 Future. 
 
 πέμφω 
 
 λείφω 
 
 καλύφω 
 
 
 Aorist 1 (Weak). 
 
 2 (Strong). 
 1 (Weak). 
 
 επεμφα 
 
 έλιπον 
 
 έκάλνφα 
 
 πέμφω 
 
 λίπω 
 
 καλνφω 
 
 2 Perfect (Strong). 
 2 Perfect (Strong). 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 πέπομφα 
 
 λέλοιπα 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 επεπ όμφειν 
 ελελοίπειν 
 
 πεπόμφω 
 
 λελοίπω 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 πέμπομαι 
 
 λείπομαι 
 
 καλύπτομαι 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 επεμπόμην 
 
 ελειπόμην 
 
 έκαλνπτόμην 
 
 πέμπωμαι 
 
 λείπωμαι 
 
 καλύπτωμαι 
 
 Future. 
 
 πέμφομαι 
 
 λείφομαι 
 
 καλύφομαι 
 
 
 Aorist (iCWeak). 
 
 έπ εμφάμην 
 
 ελιπόμην 
 
 έκαλνφάμην 
 
 πέμφωμαι 
 
 λίπωμαι 
 
 καλύφωμαι 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 πέπεμμαι 
 
 λέλειμμαι 
 
 κεκάλνμμαι 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 επεπέμμην 
 
 ελελείμμην 
 
 εκεκαλύμμην 
 
 πεπεμμένος ώ 
 λελειμμένος ώ 
 κεκαλυμμένος ώ 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 λελείφομαι 
 
 κεκαλύφομαι 
 
 
 1 Aorist Passive 
 (Weak). 
 
 επέμφθην 
 
 ελείφθην 
 
 εκαλύφθην 
 
 πεμφθώ 
 
 λειφθώ 
 
 καλυφθώ 
 
 1 Future Passive 
 (Weak). 
 
 πεμφθησομαι 
 
 λειφθησομαι 
 
 καλυφθί/σομαι 
 
 
 Verbal Adjectives: 1. πέμπτος, λειπτός, καλνπτός. 
 
 Examples for 
 
 τρέπω, I turn (Class 1) ; αλείφω, I anoint (Class 2) ; τρίβω, I rub 
 (§ 249). Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stems, as ύ πομπ-ό-ς, 
 ing, manner; το άλειφ-αρ, the ointment; 6 τάφ-ο-ς, the tomb. 
 
 
Table VII. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 121 
 
 III. LABIAL STEMS. 
 
 καλύπτω, I cover (Class 3). Verbal Stems: πεμπ, λιπ·, καΧνβ. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Active. 
 
 πέμποιμι 
 
 Χείποιμι 
 
 καΧνπτοιμι 
 
 πέμπε 
 
 Χεΐπε 
 
 κάλυπτε 
 
 πέμπειν 
 
 Χείπειν 
 
 καΧνπτειν 
 
 πέμπων 
 
 Χείπων 
 
 καΧνπτων 
 
 πίμψοιμι 
 
 Χείψοιμι 
 
 καΧΰφοιμι 
 
 > 
 
 πέμ-φειν 
 
 Χείψειν 
 
 καΧνψειν 
 
 πέμψων 
 
 Χείψων 
 
 καΧνψων 
 
 πέμ-φαιμι 
 
 Χίποιμι 
 
 καΧΰψαιμι 
 
 πέμψον 
 
 Χίπε 
 
 κάΧυψον 
 
 πέμψαι 
 
 ΧιπεΤν 
 
 καΧύψαι 
 
 πέμψας 
 
 λιπών 
 
 καλύψας 
 
 πεπ όμφοιμι 
 ΧεΧοίποιμι 
 
 πέπομφε 
 
 ΧέΧοι πε 
 
 πεπομφέναι 
 
 ΧεΧοιπέναι 
 
 πεπυμφώς 
 
 ΧεΧοιπώς 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 πεμποίμην 
 
 Χειποίμην 
 
 καΧυπτοίμην 
 
 πέμπου 
 
 Χείπου 
 
 καΧνπτου 
 
 7 τέμπεσθαι 
 
 Χείπεσθαι 
 
 καΧνπτεσθαι 
 
 πεμπύμενος 
 
 Χειπόμενος 
 
 καλυπτόμενος 
 
 πεμψοίμην 
 
 Χειποίμην 
 
 καΧνψοίμην 
 
 
 πέμψεσθαι 
 
 Χείπεσθαι 
 
 καλύψεσθαι 
 
 πεμπόμενος 
 
 Χειπόμενος 
 
 καΧνψύμενος 
 
 πεμψαίμην 
 Χιποίμην 
 καΧυψαί μην 
 
 πέμ-φαι 
 
 Χιποϋ 
 
 κάλυψαι 
 
 πέμψασθαι 
 
 Χιπέσθαι 
 
 καΧΰ-φασθαι 
 
 πεμψάμενος 
 
 Χιπόμενος 
 
 καΧνψάμενος 
 
 πεπεμμένος ε’ίην 
 ΧεΧειμμένος ε'ίην 
 κεκαΧυμμένος ε’ίην 
 
 πέπεμψο 
 
 ΧέΧειφο 
 
 κεκάΧνφο 
 
 πεπέμφθαι 
 
 ΧεΧεϊφθαι 
 
 κεκαΧΰφθαι 
 
 , 
 
 πεπεμμενος 
 
 ΧεΧειμμέΐ'ος 
 
 κεκαΧνμμένος 
 
 ΧεΧειψοίμην 
 
 κεκαΧνψοιμην 
 
 
 ΧεΧείψεσθαι 
 
 κεκαΧΰ-φεσθαι 
 
 λελειψό μένος 
 κεκαΧνφόμενος 
 
 πεμφθείην 
 
 Χει<ρθείην 
 
 καΧνφθείην 
 
 πέμφθητι 
 
 Χείφθητι 
 
 καΧνφθητι 
 
 πεμφθήναι 
 
 Χειφθηναι 
 
 καλνφθηναι 
 
 πεμφθείς 
 
 Χειφθεις 
 
 καΧνφθείς 
 
 πεμφθησοίμην 
 
 Χειφθησοίμην 
 
 καΧνφθησοίμην 
 
 
 πεμφθησεσθαι 
 
 Χειφθησεσθαι 
 
 καΧνφθίισεσθαι 
 
 πεμφθησόμενος 
 
 Χειφθησόμενος 
 
 καΧυφθησόμενος 
 
 2. πεμπτ'εος , Χειπτέος , καΧνπτέος. 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 (Class 2), as to its Perf., see § 279 ; θάπτω, I bury (Class 3), Stem ταφ 
 the escort ; Χοιπ-ύ-ς, remaining ; ή καΧΰβ -r, ?, the hut ; ύ τρόπ-ο -c, the tarn- 
 
 F 
 
122 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 Table VIII. 
 
 B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
 
 ξέρω siskin (Class 1) ; αγγέλλω, I announce (Class 4, c ); σπείρω, I sow (Class 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 δέρω 
 
 αγγέλλω 
 
 σπείρω 
 
 μιαίνω 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 έδερον 
 
 ήγγελλον 
 
 έσπειρον 
 
 εμίαινον 
 
 δ'ερω 
 
 αγγέλλω 
 
 σπείρω 
 
 μιαίνω 
 
 Future. 
 
 δερώ 
 
 άγγελώ 
 
 σπερώ 
 
 μιανω 
 
 
 1 Aorist (Weak). 
 
 ’έδειρα 
 
 ήγγειλα 
 
 έσπειρα 
 
 εμίάνα 
 
 δείρω 
 
 αγγείλω 
 
 σπείρω 
 
 μιάνω 
 
 1 Perfect (Weak). 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 ήγγελκα 
 
 έσπαρκα 
 
 μεμίαγκα 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 ήγγελκειν 
 
 εσπάρκειν 
 
 εμεμιάγκειν 
 
 ήγγελκω 
 
 εσπάρκω 
 
 μεμιάγκω 
 
 Mid. and Passive. 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 δερομαι 
 άγγεΧλομαι 
 σ7Γείρομαι 
 μιαίνομαι 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 εδερόμην 
 
 ήγγεΧΧόμην 
 
 εσπειρόμην 
 
 εμιαινόμην 
 
 δερωμαι 
 
 άγγέΧλωμαι 
 
 σπείρωμαι 
 
 μιαίνωμαι 
 
 Future. 
 
 δερονμαι 
 
 άγγελονμαι 
 
 σπερονμαι 
 
 μιανονμαι 
 
 
 1 Aorist Middle 
 (W r eak). 
 
 εδει ράμην 
 ήγγειλάμ ην 
 εσπ ειράμηι* 
 εμιανάμην 
 
 δείρωμαι 
 
 άγγείλωμαι 
 
 σπείρωμαι 
 
 μιάνωμαι 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 δ'εδαρμαι 
 
 ήγγελμαι 
 
 έσπαρμαι 
 
 μεμίασμαι 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 έδεδάρμην 
 
 ήγγέΧμην 
 
 εσπάρμην 
 
 εμεμιάσμην 
 
 δεδαρμένος ώ 
 ήγγελμενος ώ 
 εσπαρμενος ώ 
 μεμιασμ'ενος ώ 
 
 (2 Strong. 
 Aorist \l Weak. 
 Passive j 2 Strong. 
 U Weak. 
 
 εδάρην 
 
 ήγγελθην 
 
 εσπαρην 
 
 εμιάνθην 
 
 δαρώ 
 
 αγγελθώ 
 
 σπαρώ 
 
 μιανθώ 
 
 Strong. 
 Future ) 1 Weak. 
 Passive) 2 Strong. 
 Vl Weak. 
 
 δαρήσομαι 
 
 άγγελθήσομαι 
 
 σπαρήσομαι 
 
 μιανθήσομαι 
 
 
 Verbal Adjectives: 1. δαρτός , άγγελτός , σπαρτός , μιαντός. 
 
Table VIII. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 123 
 
 IV. LIQUID STEMS (λ, μ, v, p). 
 
 4,άΓ); μιαίνω, I soil (Class 4, d). Verbal Stems: Sep, άγγελ, σπερ, μιαν. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 δέροιμι 
 άγ-γελΧοιμ ι 
 σττείροιμι 
 μιαίνοιμι 
 
 δ'ερε 
 
 άγγελλε 
 
 σπείρε 
 
 μίαινε 
 
 δέρειν 
 
 άγγελλαν 
 
 σπείρειν 
 
 μιαίνειν 
 
 δερών 
 
 άγγέλλων 
 
 σπειρών 
 
 μιαίνων 
 
 δεροΐμι 
 
 άγγελοΤ /u 
 
 σπεροίμι 
 
 μιανόίμι 
 
 
 δερεΙν 
 
 άγγελειν 
 
 σπερείν 
 
 μιανείν 
 
 δερών 
 
 αγγελών 
 
 σπερών 
 
 μιανών 
 
 δείραιμι 
 
 άγγείΧαιμι 
 
 σπείραιμι 
 
 μιάναιμι 
 
 δείρον 
 ayyeiXov 
 σπεΐρον 
 μίανον 
 
 δέΐραι 
 
 άγγεϊλαε 
 
 σπείραι 
 
 μιάναι 
 
 δείρας 
 άγγείΧας 
 σπείρας 
 μιανας 
 
 ήγγεΧκοιμι 
 
 εσπάρκοιμι 
 
 μεμιάγκοιμι 
 
 τ/γγεΧκε 
 
 έσπαρκε 
 
 μεμίαγκε 
 
 ηγγεΧκεναι 
 
 εσπαρκεναι 
 
 μεμιαγκεναι 
 
 ηγγεΧκώς 
 
 εσπαρκώς 
 
 μεμιαγκώς 
 
 δεροίμην 
 
 άγγεΧΧοίμην 
 
 σπειροίμην 
 
 μιαινοίμην 
 
 δέρου 
 
 άγγεΧΧου 
 
 απείρου 
 
 μιαίνου 
 
 δερεσθαι 
 
 άγγέλλεσθαι 
 
 σπείρεσθαι 
 
 μιαίνεσθαι 
 
 δερόμενος 
 
 άγγεΧΧόμενος 
 
 σπειρόμενος 
 
 μιαινόμενος 
 
 δεροίμην 
 
 άγγεΧοίμην 
 
 σπεροίμην 
 
 μιανοίμην 
 
 
 δερείσθαι 
 
 άγγελείσθαι 
 
 σπερείσθαι 
 
 μιανείσθαι 
 
 δερονμενος 
 
 άγγεΧονμενος 
 
 σπερονμενος 
 
 μιανονμενος 
 
 δειραίμην 
 άγγειΧαίμην 
 σπείραι μην 
 μιαναίμην 
 
 δείραι 
 
 ayyeiXai 
 
 σπείραι 
 
 μίαναι 
 
 δείρασθαι 
 
 άγγείΧασθαι 
 
 σπείρασθαι 
 
 μιάνασθαι 
 
 δειράμενος 
 
 άyyειXόμεvoς 
 
 σπειρόμενος 
 
 μιανάμενος 
 
 δεδαρμενος είην 
 ήγγεΧμενος είην 
 έσπαρμένος είην 
 μεμιασμένος είην 
 
 δέδαρσο 
 
 τ/γγελσο 
 
 εσπαρσο 
 
 μεμίασο 
 
 δεδάρθαι 
 
 ήγγέΧθαι 
 
 εσπάρθαι 
 
 μεμιάνθαι 
 
 δεδαρμενος 
 
 ήγγεΧμένος 
 
 έσπαρμένος 
 
 μεμιασμένος 
 
 δαρείην 
 
 άγγεΧθείην 
 
 σπαρείην 
 
 μιανθείην 
 
 δάρηθι 
 
 (ίγγεΧθητι 
 
 σπάρηθι 
 
 μιάνθητι 
 
 δαρήναι 
 
 άγγεΧθηναι 
 
 σπαρηναι 
 
 μιανθηναι 
 
 δαρείς 
 
 αγγελθείς 
 
 σπορείς 
 
 μιανθείς 
 
 δαρησοίμην 
 
 άγγεΧθησοίμην 
 
 σπαρησοίμην 
 
 μιανθησοίμην 
 
 
 δαρησεσθαι 
 
 άγγελθε/σεσθαι 
 
 σπαρησεσθαι 
 
 μιανθησεσθαι 
 
 δαρησόμενος 
 
 άγγεΧθησόμενος 
 
 σπαρησόμενος 
 
 μιανθησόμ^νος 
 
 2. δαρτέος, άγγεΧτέος, σπαρτέος , μιαντέος. 
 
124 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IX μι 
 
 Table IX, 
 
 VERBS IN μι. 
 
 
 τι-θη-μι, I put. 
 
 δί-δω-μι , I give. 
 
 'ί-στη-μ ι, I place. 
 
 Pure Stems θ ε 
 
 δ ο 
 
 στα 
 
 Present Stems τι-θε 
 
 δ ι- δ ο 
 
 ι-στ a 
 
 Present. Active. 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 τί-θη-μι 
 
 δί-δω-μι 
 
 ί-στ η-μι 
 
 
 2 
 
 τί-θη-ς 
 
 δί-δω-ς 
 
 'ί-στη-ς 
 
 o5 
 
 3 
 
 τί-θη-σι(ν) 
 
 δί-δω-σι(ν) 
 
 'ί-στη-σ ι(ν) 
 
 > 
 
 • rH 
 
 -M 
 
 D. 1 
 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 τί-θε-τον 
 
 δί-δο-τον 
 
 'ί-στά-τον 
 
 • rH 
 
 πΰ 
 
 3 
 
 τί-θε-τον 
 
 δί-δο-τον 
 
 'ί-στά-τον 
 
 C5 
 
 t—1 
 
 P. 1 
 
 τί-θε-μεν 
 
 δί-δο-μεν 
 
 Ί-στά-μεν 
 
 
 2 
 
 τί-θε-τε 
 
 δί-δο-τε 
 
 'ί-στά-τε 
 
 
 3 
 
 τι-θε-ά-σι(ν) 
 
 δι-δό-ά-σι(ν) 
 
 ί-στά-σι(ν ) 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Τ1~θώ 
 
 δι-δώ 
 
 ι-στώ 
 
 
 2 
 
 Ti-Qy -ς 
 
 δι-δφ-ς 
 
 ι-στφ-ς 
 
 d 
 
 > 
 
 3 
 
 τι -Oy 
 
 δι-δφ 
 
 ί-στ /j 
 
 • rH 
 
 H—> 
 
 o 
 
 D. 1 
 
 
 
 
 β 
 
 Μ 
 
 2 
 
 τι-θη-τον 
 
 δι-δώ-τον 
 
 ι-στή-τον 
 
 15 s 
 
 3 
 
 τι-θη-τον 
 
 δι-δώ-τον 
 
 ι-στή-τον 
 
 ζγϊ 
 
 P. 1 
 
 τι-θώ-μεν 
 
 δι-δώ-μεν 
 
 ϊ-στώ-μεν 
 
 
 2 
 
 τι-θή-τε 
 
 δι-δώ-τε 
 
 ί-στή-τε 
 
 
 3 
 
 τι-9ώ-σι(ν ) 
 
 δι-δώ-σι(ν) 
 
 ι-στώ-σι(ν ) 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 τι-θείη-ν 
 
 δι-δοίη-ν 
 
 ι-σταίη-ν 
 
 
 2 
 
 τι-θείη-ς 
 
 δι-δοίη-ς 
 
 ι-σταίη-ς 
 
 
 3 
 
 τι-θείη 
 
 δί-δοίη 
 
 ι-σταίη 
 
 
 D. 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 τι-θείη-τον or 
 
 δι-δοίΐ]-τον 01* 
 
 ι-σταίη-τον ΟΓ 
 
 α5 
 
 
 τιθεΐτον 
 
 διδοίτον 
 
 ισταίτον 
 
 • rH 
 
 -4~> 
 
 3 
 
 τι-θειη-την ΟΓ 
 
 δι-δοιη-την ΟΓ 
 
 ί-σταιή-την ΟΓ 
 
 c3 
 
 o. 
 
 
 τιθείτην 
 
 διδοίτην 
 
 ισταίτην 
 
 o 
 
 P. 1 
 
 τι-θείη-μεν or 
 
 δι-δοίη-μεν or 
 
 ί-σταίη-μεν ΟΓ 
 
 
 
 τιθείμεν 
 
 διδοΊμεν 
 
 ιστοί μεν 
 
 
 2 
 
 τί-Θείη-τε ΟΓ 
 
 δι-δοίη-τε 01’ 
 
 ι-σταίη-τε 01* 
 
 
 
 τιθεΐτε 
 
 διδοίτε 
 
 ίσΓαίτε 
 
 
 3 
 
 τι-θείη-σαν or 
 
 δι-δοίη-σαν ΟΓ 
 
 ι-σταίη-σαν ΟΓ 
 
 
 
 τιθέΐεν 
 
 διδοΊεν 
 
 ίσταΐεν 
 
 
 S. 2 
 
 τί-θε ι 
 
 δί-δου 
 
 ί-στη 
 
 q5 
 
 3 
 
 τι-θε-τω 
 
 δι-δό-τω 
 
 ι-στά-τω 
 
 • rH 
 
 -Μ 
 
 D. 2 
 
 τί-θε-τον 
 
 δί-δο-τον 
 
 ί-στά-τον 
 
 c3 
 
 3 
 
 τι-θ'ε-των 
 
 δι-δό-των 
 
 ι-στά-των 
 
 λ 
 
 P. 2 
 
 τί-θε-τε 
 
 δί-δο-τε 
 
 ί-στα-τε 
 
 s 
 
 1—l 
 
 3 
 
 τι-θε-ντων ΟΓ 
 
 δι-δύ-ντων ΟΓ 
 
 ι-στά-ντων ΟΓ 
 
 
 
 τι-θε-τωσαν 
 
 δι-δό-τωσαν 
 
 ι-στά-τωσαν 
 
 Intin. 
 
 
 τι-θε-ναι 
 
 δι-δό-ναι 
 
 ι-στά-ναι 
 
 Part. 
 
 
 τι-θεί-ς, τι-θεί-σα , 
 
 δί-δοΐ!-ς,δί-δον-σα , 
 
 ί-στά-ς, i -στά,-σα , 
 
 
 % 
 
 τιθ'εν G. τιθεντ-ος 
 
 διδόν G. δι-δόντ-ος 
 
 ιστόν G. ι-στάντ-ος 
 
 1 ' 1 
 
 
 
Table IX. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN μι. 
 
 125 
 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 ------- I 
 
 This First Class consists of Verbs which affix their terminations 
 
 directly to the Stem. 
 
 Present. Middle and Passive. 
 
 τί-θε-μαι 
 
 τί-θε-σαι 
 
 τί-θε-ται 
 
 τι-θε-μεθον 
 
 τί-θε-σθον 
 
 τί-θε-σθον 
 
 τι-θ'ε-μεθα 
 
 τί-βε-σθε 
 
 τί-θε-νται 
 
 δί-δο-μαι 
 
 δί-δο-σαι 
 
 δί-δο-ται 
 
 δι-δό-μεθον 
 
 δί-δο-σθον 
 
 δί-δο-σθον 
 
 δι-δό-μεθα 
 
 δί-δο-σθε 
 
 δί-δο-νται 
 
 'ί-στά-μαι 
 
 'ί-στά-σαι 
 
 'ί-στά-ται 
 
 ί-στά-μεθον 
 
 'ί-στα-σθον 
 
 'ί-στα-σθον 
 
 ι-στά-μεθα 
 
 Ί -στα-σθε 
 
 Ί-στα-νται 
 
 τι-θώ-μαι 
 
 tl-Oij 
 
 Γί-θή-ται 
 
 τι-θώ-μεθον 
 
 τι-θη-σθον 
 
 τι-θη-σθον 
 
 τί-θώ-μεθα 
 
 τι-θή-σθε 
 
 τι-θώ-νται 
 
 δι-δώ-μαι 
 
 δι-διμ 
 
 δι-δώ-ται 
 
 δι-δώ-μεθον 
 
 δι-δώ-σθον 
 
 δι-δώ-σθον 
 
 δι-δώ-μεθα 
 
 δι-δω-σθε 
 
 δι-δώ-νται 
 
 ϊ-στώ-μαι 
 
 ί-στ ij 
 
 ί-στή-ται 
 
 ι-στώ-μεθον 
 
 ι-στη-σθον 
 
 ι-στη-σθον 
 
 ϊ-στώ-μεθα 
 
 ί-στή-σθε 
 
 ι-στώ-νται 
 
 τι-θεί-μην 
 
 τι-θεϊ-ο 
 
 π-θεΐ-ΓΟ 
 
 τι-θεί-μεθον 
 
 τι-θεΧ-σθον 
 
 δι-δοί-μην 
 
 δι-δοϊ-ο 
 
 δι-δοΐ-το 
 
 δι-δοί-μεθον 
 
 δι-δοΧ-σθον 
 
 ι-σταί-μην 
 
 ί-σταϊ-ο 
 
 ί-σταΐ-το 
 
 ί-σταί-μεθον 
 
 ι-σταΧ-σθον 
 
 π-θεί-σθην 
 
 δι-δοί-σθην 
 
 ί-σταί-σθην 
 
 TL -θεί-μεθα 
 
 δι-δοί-μεθα 
 
 ι-σταί-μεβα 
 
 τι-θε Χ-σθε 
 
 δι-δοϊ-σθε 
 
 ι-σταΧ-σθε 
 
 τι-θεΧ-ντο 
 
 δι-δοϊ-ντο 
 
 ι-σταΧ-ντο 
 
 τί-θε-σο 
 
 τι-θε-σθω 
 
 τί-θε-σθον 
 
 τι-θε-σθων 
 
 τί-θε-σθε 
 
 τι-θε-σθων ΟΓ 
 
 τι-θ'ε-σθωσαν 
 
 δί-δο-σο 
 
 δι-δό-σθω 
 
 δί-δο-σθον 
 
 δι-δό-σθων 
 
 δί-δο-σθε 
 
 δι-δό-σθων or 
 
 δι-δό-σθωσαν 
 
 Ί-στα-σο 
 
 ι-στά-σθω 
 
 Ί-στα-σθον 
 ι-στά-σθων 
 
 Ί-στα-σθε 
 ι-στά-σθων 01' 
 ι-στά-σθωσαν 
 
 τί-θε-σθαι 
 
 δί-δο-σθαι 
 
 Ί-στα-σθαι 
 
 τι-θί-μενο-ς, η , ο-ν 
 
 δι-δό-μενο-ς, η, ο-ν 
 
 ι-στά-μενο-ς , ο-ν 
 
 
 
 
126 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN μι. Table IX.— 
 
 VERBS IN μι. 
 
 
 rt 
 
 -βη- 
 
 ■μι, I put. 
 
 S 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 " —ί 
 
 give. 
 
 i -στη-μι, I place. 
 
 Pure 
 
 Stems θ ε 
 
 δ ο 
 
 
 στα 
 
 ■ 
 
 Present Stems τι-θε 
 
 δ ι-δ ο 
 
 
 i -στη 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 ε-τί-θη-ν 
 
 ί-δί-δω-ν 
 
 
 ί-στη-ν 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ε-τί-θη-ς 
 
 ε-δί-δω-ς 
 
 
 ί-στη-ς 
 
 
 -4-> 
 
 
 3 
 
 ε-τί-θη 
 
 ε-δί-δω 
 
 
 'i -στη 
 
 
 o 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 2 
 
 ε-τί-θε-τον 
 
 ε-δί-δο-τον 
 
 
 Ί-στά-τον 
 
 
 Q . 
 
 r-H 
 
 
 3 
 
 ε-τι-θε-την 
 
 ε-δι-δό-την 
 
 
 ι-στά-την 
 
 
 c 
 
 HH 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 ε-τί-θε-μεν 
 
 ε-δί-δο-μεν 
 
 
 'ί-στά-μεν 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ε-τί-θε-τε 
 
 ε-δί-δο-τε 
 
 
 t / V/ 
 
 ί-στα-τε 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ε-τί-θε-σαν 
 
 ε-δί-δο-σαν 
 
 
 'ι-στά-σαν 
 
 
 
 
 
 Second or Strong Aorist. 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 [ε-θη-ν] 
 
 
 
 ε-στη-ν 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 [ε-θη-ς] 
 
 [Ι-ίω-ς] 
 
 
 ε-στη-ς 
 
 
 oJ 
 
 
 3 
 
 [ε-θη] 
 
 [ε-<5ω] 
 
 
 ε-στη 
 
 
 • rH 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 O 
 
 
 2 
 
 ε-θε-τον 
 
 ε-δο-τον 
 
 
 ε-στη-τον 
 
 
 • rH 
 
 
 3 
 
 ε-θε-την 
 
 ε-δό-την 
 
 
 ε-στη-την 
 
 
 d 
 
 1—1 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 ε-θε-μεν 
 
 ε-δο-μεν 
 
 
 ε-στη-μεν 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ε-θε-τε 
 
 ε-δο-τε 
 
 
 ε-στη-τε 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ε-θε-σαν 
 
 ε-δο-σαν 
 
 
 ε-στη-σαν 
 
 
 Subj. 
 
 
 
 θώ 
 
 δώ 
 
 
 στώ 
 
 
 
 
 
 Oy -ς 
 
 δψ-ς 
 
 
 στι]-ς 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 etc., as in 
 
 the 
 
 Opt. 
 
 
 
 6είη-ν 
 
 δοίη-ν 
 
 
 σταίη-ν 
 
 Ί 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 etc., as in 
 
 the 
 
 
 s. 
 
 2 
 
 θε-ς 
 
 δό-ς 
 
 
 στη-θι 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 3 
 
 θε-τω 
 
 δό-τω 
 
 
 στη-τω 
 
 
 p- 
 
 • rH 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 θε-τον 
 
 δό-τον 
 
 
 στη-τον 
 
 
 c3 
 
 rH 
 
 
 3 
 
 θε-των 
 
 δό-των 
 
 
 στη-των 
 
 ’ 
 
 Λ 
 
 P. 
 
 2 
 
 θε-τε 
 
 δό-τε 
 
 
 στή-τε 
 
 
 g 
 
 1—1 
 
 
 3 
 
 θε-ντων ΟΓ 
 
 δό-ντων or 
 
 
 στά-ντων ΟΓ 
 
 
 
 
 
 θε-τωσαν 
 
 δό-τωσαν 
 
 
 στη-τωσαν 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 
 θεϊ-ναι 
 
 δοϋ-ναι 
 
 στή-ναι 
 
 Part. 
 
 
 
 θεί-ς, θεΊ-σα , θε-ν 
 
 δοό-ς , δον-σα , 
 
 στά-ς, στά-σα, 
 
 
 
 
 
 G. θέντ-ος 
 
 δό-ν G. δόντ-ος 
 
 στάν G: στάντ- 
 
 ος 
 
 The following Tenses are formed 
 
 Active. 
 
 Future. 
 
 θ>ισω 
 
 δώσω 
 
 στήσω 
 
 First or Weak 
 Aorist. 
 
 εθηκ :a 
 
 εδωκα 
 
 έστησα 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 τεθεικα 
 
 δεδωκα 
 
 εστηκα . 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 ετεθείκειν 
 
 εδεδώκ ειν 
 
 εστήκειν ΟΓ 
 ειστηκε ιν 
 
 Verbals. 
 
 
 
 
Continued, paradigms or verbs.—verbs in μι. 127 
 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 
 This First Class consists of Verbs which affix their terminations 
 
 
 directly to the Stem. 
 
 + - 
 
 1 
 
 
 ε-τε-θε-μην 
 
 ε-δε-δό-μην 
 
 ε-στά-μην 
 
 
 ε-τί-θε-σο 
 
 ε-δε-δο-σο 
 
 Ί-στα-σο 
 
 
 ε-τε-θε-το 
 
 έ-δε-δο-το 
 
 "ε-στα-το 
 
 
 ε-τε-θε-μεθον 
 
 έ-δε-δό-μεθον 
 
 ε-στά-μεθον 
 
 
 ε-τε-θε-σθον 
 
 ε-δε-δο-σθον 
 
 "ε-στα-σθον 
 
 
 ε-τε-θ'ε-σθην 
 
 έ-δε-δό-σθην 
 
 ε-στά-σθην 
 
 
 ε-τε-θ'ε-μεθα 
 
 ε-δε-δό-μεθα 
 
 ε-στά-μεθα 
 
 
 ε-τί-θε-σθε 
 
 ε-δε-δο-σθε 
 
 'ί-στα-σθε 
 
 
 ε-τε-θε-ντο 
 
 έ-δε-δο-ντο 
 
 Ί-στα-ντο 
 
 
 Second or Strong Aorist. Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 ε-θε-μ?]ν 
 
 ε-δό-μην 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 ε-θου 
 
 ε-δον 
 
 
 
 ε-θε-το 
 
 ε-δο-το 
 
 
 
 ε-θε-μεθον 
 
 ε-δό-μεθον 
 
 
 
 ε-θε-σθον 
 
 ε-δο-σθον 
 
 
 
 ε-θ'ε-σθην 
 
 ε-δό-σθην 
 
 
 
 ε-θ'ε-μεθα 
 
 έ-δό-μεθα 
 
 
 
 ε-θε-σθε 
 
 ε-δο-σθε 
 
 
 
 ε-θε-ντο 
 
 ε-δο-ντο 
 
 
 
 θώ-μαι 
 
 δώ-μαε 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 θ ν 
 
 δφ 
 
 
 Pres. Subjunctive. 
 
 
 
 j θεί-μην 
 
 δοί-μην 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 Pres. Optative. 
 
 
 
 
 θοϋ 
 
 δοϋ 
 
 W anting. 
 
 
 θέ-σθω 
 
 δό-σθω 
 
 
 
 θε-σθον 
 
 δό-σθον 
 
 
 
 θ'ε-σθων 
 
 δό-σθων 
 
 
 
 θε-σθε 
 
 δό-σθε 
 
 
 
 θέ-σθων ΟΓ θ'ε-σθωσεεν 
 
 δό-σθων 01’ δό-σθωσαν 
 
 
 
 θε-σθαε 
 
 δό-σθαε 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 θε-μενο-ς, ΐ], ο-ν 
 
 δό-μενο-ς , ?/, ο-ν 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 on the analogy of Verbs 
 
 in Ω. 
 
 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 θήσομαι 
 
 δώσομαε 
 
 στησομαε 
 
 
 Passive, τεθησομαε 
 
 δοθησομαε 
 
 σταθήσομαε 
 
 
 Middle. Wanting 
 
 Wanting 
 
 έστησαμην 
 
 
 Passive, ετέθην 
 
 εδύθην 
 
 εστίιθε]ν 
 
 
 τέθεεμαε 
 
 δέδομαε 
 
 εσταμαε 
 
 
 έτεθείμην 
 
 εδεδόμην 
 
 εστάμην 
 
 
 θετός 
 
 δοτός 
 
 στατός 
 
 
 θετέος 
 
 δοτέος 
 
 στατεος 
 
128 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.-VERBS IN μι. Table X. 
 
 VERBS IN μι. SECOND CLASS. 
 
 This Second Class consists of Verbs which form the Present-Stem by- 
 
 adding w to the Pure Stem. 
 
 δείκννμι, 
 
 I show. Pure Stem ο ε ι k. Present Stem δ ε ι κ-ν v. 
 
 
 Present Active. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 δείκ-νΰ-μι 
 
 δείκ-νυ-μαι 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 δείκ-νν-ς 
 
 δείκ-νΰ-σαι 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 δείκ-νν-σι (v) 
 
 δείκ-νυ-ται 
 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 
 δεικ-νν-μεθον 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 δείκ-νν-τον 
 
 δείκ-νν-σθον 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 δείκ-νν-τον 
 
 δείκ-νν-σθον 
 
 
 PI 
 
 1 
 
 δείκ-νν-μεν 
 
 δεικ-νύ-μεθα 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 δείκ-νν-τε 
 
 δείκ-νυ-σθε 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 δεικ-νν-άσι(ν) 
 
 δείκ-νυ-νται 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 δεικνύω, yg, etc. 
 
 δεικννωμαι, y, yrai, etc. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 
 δεικννοιμι, οις , οι, etc. 
 
 δεικννοίμην, οιο, οιτο, etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 s. 
 
 2 
 
 δείκ-νν 
 
 δείκ-νν-σο 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 δεικ-νυ-τω 
 
 δεικ-νν-σθω 
 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 δείκ-νν-τον 
 
 δείκ-νν-σθον 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 δεικ-νυ-των 
 
 δεικ-νν-σθων 
 
 
 PI. 
 
 2 
 
 δείκ-νΰ-τε 
 
 δείκ-νν-σθε 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 δεικ-νν-ντων ΟΓ 
 
 δεικ-νν-σθων or 
 
 
 
 
 δεικ-νν-τωσαν 
 
 δεικ-νν-σθωσαν 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 δεικ-νύ-ναι 
 
 δείκ-νν-σθαι 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 
 δεικ-νόζ, δεικ-νϋσα, δεικ-νύν 
 
 δεικ-νν-μενος , η, gv 
 
 
 
 
 Stem δεικ-νν-ντ 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 
 ε-δείκ-νν-ν 
 
 ε-δεικ-7'ϋ-μην 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 2 
 
 ε-δείκ-νν-ς 
 
 ε-δείκ-νν-σο 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ε-δείκ-νν 
 
 ε-δείκ-νν-το 
 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 
 
 ε-δεικ-νν-μεθυν 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ε-δείκ-νν-τον 
 
 ε-δείκ-νν-σθον 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ε-δεικ-νυ-τΊ] ν 
 
 ε-δεικ-νν-σθην 
 
 
 PI. 
 
 1 
 
 ε-δείκ-ν ϋ-μεν 
 
 ε-δεικ-νν-μεθα 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ε-δείκ-νυ-τε 
 
 ε-δε ίκ-νν-σθε 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ε-δείκ-νν-σαν 
 
 ε-δείκ-νν-ΐ'το 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 δείξω 
 
 δείζομαι 
 
 PasSH'E. δειχθησομαι 
 
 First or 
 
 Weak Aorist. 
 
 
 εδειξα 
 
 MIDDLE, εδειξάμην 
 Passive, εδείχθην 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 
 δεδειχα 
 
 δεδειγμαι 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 εδεδείχειν 
 
 εδεδείγμην 
 
§ 232. 
 
 ο 
 
 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 
 
 129 
 
 Chap. X. —First Principal Conjugation, 
 
 or Verbs in ω. 
 
 I. The Present-Stem. 
 
 A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem. 
 
 § 231. The Present-Stem is the form which remains 
 after rejecting ω in the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. 
 
 On the distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal- 
 Stem, see § 245, etc. 
 
 The following Table exhibits the waf in which the Per- 
 
 O J 
 
 sonal Endings are affixed to the Present-Stem by means 
 
 O v 
 
 of the connecting vowels. 
 
 o 
 
 § 232. 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle and 
 Passive. 
 
 Present 
 
 1 Sing. 
 
 Χν-ω 
 
 [solv-o] 
 
 Χν-ο-μαι 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 2 “ 
 
 Χν-ει-ς 
 
 [solv-i-s] 
 
 Xv-y or Χν-ει 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 Χν-ει 
 
 [solv-i-t] 
 
 Χν-ε-ται 
 
 
 1 Dual 
 
 
 
 Χυ-ό-μεθον 
 
 
 0 “ 
 bJ 
 
 Χν-ε-τον 
 
 
 Χν-ε-σθον 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 Χύ-ε-τον 
 
 
 Χν-ε-σθον 
 
 
 1 Plur. 
 
 Χν-ο-μεν 
 
 [solv-i-mus] 
 
 Χν-ό-μεθα 
 
 
 2 “ 
 
 Χύ-ε-τε 
 
 [solv-i-tis] 
 
 Χν-ε-σ6ε 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 Χν-ον-σι(ν) [solv- 11 -nt] 
 
 \V-0-VTCU 
 
 Present 
 
 1 Sing. 
 
 Χν-ω 
 
 [solv-a-m] 
 
 Χν-ω-μαι 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 O U 
 
 Λ 
 
 Xv-y -ς 
 
 [solv-a-s] 
 
 Xv-y 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 Xv-y 
 
 [solv-a-t] 
 
 Χν-η-ται 
 
 
 1 Dual 
 
 
 
 Χν-ώ-μεθον 
 
 
 2 “ 
 
 Χν-η-τον 
 
 
 Χν-η-σθον 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 Χν-η-τον 
 
 
 Χν-η-σθον 
 
 
 1 Plur. 
 
 Χν-ω-μεν 
 
 [solv-a-mus] 
 
 Χν-ώ-μεθα 
 
 
 2 “ 
 
 Χν-η-τε 
 
 [solv-a-tis] 
 
 Χύ-η-σθε 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 Χν-ω-σι(ν) 
 
 [solv-a-nt] 
 
 Χν-ω-νται 
 
 
 
 
 
 F 2 
 
130 
 
 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 
 
 232. 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle and 
 Passive. 
 
 Present 
 
 1 Sing. 
 
 a. 
 
 1 
 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 Χν-οί-μην 
 
 Optative. 
 
 2 “ 
 
 \ύ-(Η-ς 
 
 Xv-OL-O 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 Χύ-οε 
 
 Xv-OL-TO 
 
 
 1 Dual 
 
 
 Χυ-οί-μεθον 
 
 
 2 “ 
 
 Χύ-οε-τον 
 
 Χν-οε-σθον 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 Χυ-οί-την 
 
 Χν-οε-σθην 
 
 
 1 Plur. 
 
 Χΰ-οε-μεν 
 
 Χν-οί-μεθα 
 
 
 2 “ 
 
 Χύ-οι-τε 
 
 Χΰ-οε-σθε 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 Χύ-οε-εν 
 
 Χΰ-οε-ντο 
 
 Present 
 
 2 Sing. 
 
 Χΐι-ε [solv-e] 
 
 Χύ-ον 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 3 “ 
 
 Χν-ε-τω [solv-i-to] 
 
 Χν-έ-σθω 
 
 
 2 Dual 
 
 Χν-ε-τον 
 
 Χν-ε-σβον 
 
 
 3 u 
 
 Χν-’ε-των 
 
 Χν-ε-σθων 
 
 
 2 Plur. 
 
 Χν-ε-τε [solv-i-te] 
 
 Χν-ε-σθε 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 Χυ-6-ντων [solv-u-nto] or 
 
 Χυ-ε-σθων or 
 
 
 
 Χν-ε-τωσαν 
 
 Χν-ε-σθωσαν 
 
 Present 
 
 
 Χΰ-εεν 
 
 Χν-ε-σβαε 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 
 
 Present 
 
 
 Stem Χν-ο-ντ [solv-e-nt] 
 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 Χν-ων 
 
 Χν-ό-μενο-ς 
 
 
 
 Χν-ονσα 
 
 Χυ-ο-μενη 
 
 
 
 Χν-ον 
 
 Χν-ό-μενο-ν 
 
 
 
 Gen. Χύ-ο-ντ-ος 
 
 
 
 
 [solv-e-nt-is] 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 1 Sing. 
 
 ε-Χν-ο-ν 
 
 ε-Χν-ό-μην 
 
 
 2 “ 
 
 ε-Χν-ε-ς 
 
 ε-Χΰ-ου 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 ε-Χυ-ε(ν ) 
 
 ε-Χυ-ε-το 
 
 
 1 Dual 
 
 
 ε-Χυ-ό-μεθον 
 
 
 2 « 
 
 ε-Χν-ε-τον 
 
 ε-Χν-ε-σθον 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 ε-Χν-'ε-την 
 
 ε-Χν-έ-σθην 
 
 
 1 Plur. 
 
 ε-Χν-ο-μεν 
 
 ε-Χν-ό-με θα 
 
 
 2 « 
 
 ε-Χΰ-ε-τε 
 
 ε-Χν-ε-σθε 
 
 
 3 “ 
 
 ε-Χν-ο-ν 
 
 ε-Χΰ-ο-ντο 
 
233 . 
 
 PERSONAL ENDINGS. 
 
 131 
 
 § 233. Obs. — 1. The E-sound (ε, η, ε ι) is used as a connecting vowel 
 except before nasals, where the O-sound (ο, ω, o v) is used. 
 
 2. In 1 Sing. Inch Act. ω is the connecting vowel lengthened, the 
 ending μι being dropped. In the 2 Sing, ει ς is for ε σ i. In the 
 3 Sing, ε i for ε r ι : Χύ-ει-ς for Χυ-ε-σι, Χύ-ει for \ν-ε-τι [compare 
 solv-i-t]. The ου of the 3 Plur. has arisen out of o by compensa¬ 
 tive lengthening (§ 42): Χύ-ου-σι , from λυ-ο-νσι , for the original 
 and Doric Χύ-ο-νη [compare solv-u-nt]. In the 3 Sing. Imperf. 
 ε (v) stands for original ε -r —compare solveba-t —as r at the end 
 could not maintain its ground (§ 67). 
 
 3. In the 2 Sing. Indie. Pres. Mid. y or ε i arose from ε (σ) a i (§§ 61, 
 38) : Xby, from λνε(σ)αι ; the ending ει is the Old Attic one ex¬ 
 clusively used in ο’ίει, thou thinkest; βούΧει , thou wishest; y is the 
 one later in general use. Compare the Fut. ύψει (§ 259). 
 
 4. The Subjunctive has always ω, η , y, for ο (ον), ε, ει; the y of the 
 2 Sing. Mid. is contracted from ?/ (σ) a i (compare § 228). 
 
 5. In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Act. the termination after the connecting 
 vow^el is quite lost, o v in the 2 Sing. Imperat. and Imperf. Mid. 
 has arisen from ε(σ)ο, εο : Χύου — Χυε(σ)ο, εΧύου = εΧνε(σ)ο (§§ 61, 
 37) ; ο ι ο in the 2 Sing. Opt. Mid. arose from ο ι (σ) o. 
 
 § 233. Dialects.—1. The Epic dialect sometimes has the original 
 ending μ ι of the 1 Sing, in the subjunctive : ίθελω-μι, velim ; the 2 Sing. 
 Subj. and Opt. often has the fuller ending σθα (for ς) : ίθελη-σθα =z 
 WiXijg, κΧαίοι-σθα = κΧαίοις (κΧαίιο,Ι weep)’, the 3 Sing. Subj. lias the 
 old ending σι(ν), from r ι : εθίΧη-σι(ν) = WeXy. 
 
 2. The long vowels of the subjunctive are often shortened in Homer: 
 ιθύνετε for ΐθύνητε (ιθύνω, I put straight) (compare § 228, D.). 
 
 3. The Epic dialect often has μ ε v a ι or μ e v in the Inf. Act. con¬ 
 nected with the Stem by an accented ε : άμνν-ε-μεναι or όμνν-ε-μεν = 
 αμύνειν , to defend. 
 
 4. The 2 Sing. Mid. often remains uncontracted in the Ion. dialect: 
 ΧιΧαίεαι, thou wishest ; Subj. εχηαι ( habearis ), also shortened, μίσγεαι 
 (miscearis) ; Imperat. επεο, follow ; Imperf. εδεύεο, thou least in leant of. 
 ε o is also contracted to ε v (§ 37, D.) : επεν. 
 
 5. The 1 Dual and 1 Plur. Mid. in poetry often has σ Θ for θ : βου- 
 Χόμεσθον, -μεσθα, we Wish. 
 
 6. aro (§ 226, D.) occurs in the Ion. dialect regularly for ντο in 
 3 Plur. Opt. : μαχοίατο (— μάχοιντο) , they may fight. In New-Ion. arm, 
 aro, are also sometimes found in other forms where ε is the connect¬ 
 ing vowel instead of ο : κηδ-ε-αται = κηδ-ο-νται, they care : ίβονΧ-έ-ατο 
 =. εβούΧοντο. 
 
132 
 
 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 
 
 234 . 
 
 B. The Augment. 
 
 § 234. The Augment (. Augmentum, increase) is the 
 sign of the past in the Indicative of all the historical 
 tenses (§ 225, 3. B.). It has two forms; that is, it appears 
 either— 
 
 a) As a Syllabic Augment, in the syllable ε prefixed, or 
 
 b) As a Temporal Augment, in the lengthening of the 
 initial vowel. 
 
 All verbs beginning with a consonant have the Sylla¬ 
 bic Augment: ε-λυ-ο-ν, ε-τυπτ-ό-μην, I was struck, μ is 
 doubled after ε : ερρίπτον, from ρίπτω, I hurl. 
 
 Obs .—The Syllabic Augment appears in the stronger form of η 
 instead of ε in η-μελλ-ο-ν, Iwas about to, from μέλλω ; η-βονλ-ό-μην, 
 I wished, from βούλομαι ; ή-δννά-μην, I could, from δύναμαι. 
 
 § 235. The Temporal Augment is used in all verbs which 
 begin with a vowel, whether aspirated or not. The Tem¬ 
 poral Augment changes 
 
 a to η : άγω, I lead, 
 ε “ η : ελαύνω, I drive, 
 ο “ ω : ονειδίζω, I reproach, 
 ϊ u ϊ : 'ικετεύω, I beseech. 
 
 Imperfect ηγ-ο-ν 
 
 ήλανν-ο-ν 
 α ώνείδιζ-ο-ν 
 
 U «- t 
 
 ικετεν-ο-ν 
 
 7. Homer, quite peculiarly, has in the 3 Dual Imperf. τον, σθ ον, 
 for τη v, σθη ν : ετεύχετον, the two made; and Attic writers have την 
 for the 2 Dual of an historic sense: είχετην, ye two had; εύρετην , ye 
 two found. 
 
 § 234. Dialects.—In Homer, and also in other poets, the Augment 
 may be entirely omitted: τενχε, he made; εχεν, he had. λ, μ, ν, σ are 
 also sometimes doubled after the Syllabic Augment: ελλίσσετο (from 
 λίσσομαι, I beseech) ; δ only in the Stem δ ι : εδδεισα {I feared, § 317, 5). 
 On the contrary, p is sometimes left single : εράπτομεν (ράπτω, I sew, 
 spin). 
 
 § 235. Dialects.—By the Temporal Augment a becomes a in Doric : 
 άγον. The Temporal Augment is very often wanting in Herodotus, 
 especially in the case of diphthongs. 
 
238 . 
 
 THE AUGMENT. 
 
 133 
 
 v to v : * υβρίζω, I insult, 
 cu u ij : αισθάνομαι, I perceive, 
 av 11 ην : ανζάνω , I increase, 
 οι u ψ : οϊκτείρω, I pity. 
 
 Imperfect 'όβριζ-ο-ν 
 “ ησθαν-ό-μην 
 ηυζαν-ο-ν 
 
 (pKTEip-O-V 
 
 Before vowels, a becomes d, not η : ’«/ω, I hear, αϊον. 
 The long vowels η, ω, 7, ϋ, and usually the diphthongs 
 ε i, ευ, ov, remain without Augment. 
 
 εικάζω , I conjecture , είκαζ-ο-ν (also γκαζόν) ; 
 
 ευρίσκω , I find, ενρισκ-ο-ν (seldom Aorist ηυρον ) ; 
 
 also α υ and o t immediately before a vowel: αυαίνω, I dry , 
 auaivov ; ο Ιακίζω, I steer , οΐάκιζον ; and other diphthongs 
 in isolated instances. 
 
 — The rough breathing precedes the augmented 
 form when the verb in its unaugmented form had it. 
 
 § 236. e becomes ε i (instead of η) in some verbs, viz., in 
 Ιάω,Τ leave j εθίζω, I accustom / ίΧίσσω, I roll / έλκω Or 
 εΧκνω,Ι draw f έπομαι, I follow j εργάζομαι, I work / έρπω 
 or ερπνζω,Ι creep ; εστιάω, I entertain hospitably / ίχω,Ι 
 have. Compare below the Aorists : εΐμην (§ 313), είλον (ai- 
 ρίω, I take , § 327, l), είσο, I placed (§ 269, D.,.and § 275). 
 
 Obs .—These verbs originally began with a consonant, and therefore 
 had the Syllabic Augment: Ρεργαζ-ο-μαι (§ 34, D.), ε-Ρεργαζ-ο-μην ; 
 σεχ-ω (§ 327, 6), ε-σεχ-ο-ν. Then the consonant was dropped : 
 ε-εργαζ-ο-μην, ε-εχ-ο-ν ; finally εε was regularly contracted to ει 
 (§ 30) : ειρ^αζ-ό-μην, είχ-ο-ν. 
 
 § 237. εορτάζω , I celebrate , lias the Augment in the second vowel: 
 ΐώρταζον for ήόρταζον (compare § 37, D. 2). Verbs which origin¬ 
 ally began with a digamma (§ 34, D.), consequently with a con¬ 
 sonant, have the Syllabic Augment in spite of their initial vowel: 
 άνδάνω,Ι please, έ-άνδανον; ονρ'εω, I make water; ώθεω , I push; 
 ώνεομαι, I buy (§ 275). Both Augments, Syllabic and Temporal, 
 are combined in ΰράω, I see, έώραον (έώρων) ; άν-οίγ-ω, I open, 
 άν-ίψγ-ο-ν. 
 
 § 238. Verbs compounded with a preposition have the 
 
 § 237. Dialects. — Homer forms εφνοχόει from οίνοχο'εω , I pour out 
 wine; ίηνδανον (Herod, ίάνδανον ) and ήνδανον from άνδάνω, I please. 
 Compare § 34, D., 1 and 4. 
 
134 
 
 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 
 
 239 . 
 
 Augment immediately after the preposition : είς-φερ-ω , / 
 carry in , εις-ε-φερ-ο-ν ; ττρος-άγ-ω, I lead to , προς-η·γ-ο-ν ; 
 εκ, out of becomes εξ before the Augment: εζ-ήγ-ο-ν, I 
 led out. The true forms of εν, in, and συν, with, altered 
 by assimilation (§ 51) in the Present, appear again before 
 ε : συλ-λεγ-ω, I collect, συν-ε-\ε·γ-ο-ν ; εμ-βάλλ-ω, I invade, 
 εν-ε-βαλλ-ο-ν. 
 
 The final vowel of a preposition is elided: απ-ε-φερ-ο-ν, 
 I carried away, from απο-φερ-ω ; only περί and προ never 
 lose their final vowel; but προ is often contracted with ε : 
 πρού-βαινον, from προ-ε-βαιν-ο-ν, I marched on. 
 
 § 239. Exceptions.—S ome verbs, which are not merely compound¬ 
 ed with prepositions, but derived from already compound nouns 
 (Decomposita), have the Augment at the beginning: εναντωομαι 
 (from ενάντιος , against), ήναντιούμην (from οομην ), I was against / 
 poet, i'jvapov , from εναίρω, I slay / παρρησιάζομαι (from παρρησία , 
 freedom of speech), επαρρησιάζόμην, I spoke freely ; but the majority 
 nevertheless have it in the middle: ίκκλησιάζω, I assemble , from 
 εκκλησία, assembly , εζεκλησίαζον ; νποπτεύω, I suspect , from 'ύποπτος , 
 suspicious , υπώπτευον ; κατηγορεω, I accuse , κατηγορούν (from εον). 
 παρανομεω, I act contrary to laic (from παρά-νομος, contrary to law), 
 has irregularly παρηνόμονν (εον). 
 
 § 240. Many prepositions have in some compounds so far lost their 
 distinctive meanings that the verbs are treated as simple: καθεύδω, 
 I sleep , εκάθενδον, yet καθηνδον also; καθίζω, I sit , εκάθιζον. Com¬ 
 pare the verbs 'ίημι (άφίημι, § 313), εννυμι (άμφάνννμι, § 319, 5), 
 ημαι (κάθημαι, § 315, 2). Some verbs also have a double Aug¬ 
 ment: άνέχομαι, I endure, ήνειχόμηνάνορθόω, I raise up, ηνώρθονν 
 (oov) ; ενοχλέω, I encumber, ηνώχλονν (εον) ; παροινεω, I act as a 
 drunkard , επαρφνουν. So also διαιτάω, I live (from δίαιτα, mode of 
 life), εδι^των (aoi>) ’, δαικονέω , I serve , εδιηκόνονν (εον). 
 
 § 241. δυς, bad, ill, in composition is preceded by the Augment 
 when the second word begins with a consonant or long vowel: 
 δνςτνχέω, I am unfortunate , εδυςτΰχονν (εον) ; δνςωπέω, I make a 
 sour face, εδυςώπουν (εον) ; but short vowels receive the Temporal 
 Augment after δΰς : δνςάρεστέω, I displease, δνςηρεστουν (εον). 
 
 Compounds with ε v generally have no Augment: εντνχονν (εον), 
 I was fortunate ; but short vowels occasionally receive the Tem¬ 
 poral Augment after ευ : ενηργετονν (εον), together with ευεργετούν, 
 from ενεργετεω, / do good. 
 
243 . 
 
 CONTRACTED VERBS. 
 
 135 
 
 § 242. All other compounds have the Augment at the beginning: 
 ήθνμονν, from άθυμέω, I am without courage. 
 
 C. Contracted Verbs 
 
 § 243. Verbs whose Present-Stem ends in α, ε, or o, reg¬ 
 ularly contract these vowels in all forms of the Present- 
 
 ·/ 
 
 Stem with the connecting vowel, and hence are called Con¬ 
 tracted Verbs. The laws of contraction <nven in 36-38 
 
 O V V 
 
 § 243 . Dialects.—The Ion. dialect very often does not contract; but 
 the three kinds of contracted verbs are treated differently. 
 
 A. Homer inflects the α -Stems in three ways : 
 
 1. The syllables regularly contracted by the Attic writers remain 
 open and unchanged: άοιδιά-ει, he sings; ναιετά-ονσι, they dwell; and 
 the Fern. Part, ναιετάωσα for ναιετάουσα, with a remarkable change of 
 οι» to ω. 
 
 2. Contraction takes place : άρετα — άρετά-ει, he thrives , from άρετάω ; 
 7 Γρος-ηύοα — προς-ηνΰα-ε, from προς-ανδάω, I address. Sometimes a ε 
 becomes η (not ά): προς-αυδητην (3 Dual Imperfl), δρηαι — also with 
 regular accent—(from δρά-εαι ) = Att. δρζι (2 Sing. Pres. Ind. Mid.). 
 
 3 . Extension instead of contraction takes place when a vowel of the 
 same kind is inserted before the long one which results from con¬ 
 traction : δράω , I see , contracted ύρώ, extended δρόω. 
 
 a) This inserted vowel is usually short. Hence δράω is thus in¬ 
 flected : 
 
 Act. Pr. Ind. 
 
 δρά-ω 
 
 Att. 
 
 t ~ 
 
 υρω 
 
 Horn. 
 
 δρόω 
 
 
 υρά-εις 
 
 u 
 
 δρας 
 
 ίί 
 
 δ ρ άας 
 
 
 υρά-ει 
 
 u 
 
 δρζι 
 
 ίί 
 
 δ ράα 
 
 
 δρά-ουσι 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρώσι 
 
 ίί 
 
 δ ρύωσ l 
 
 Subj. 
 
 δρά-ω 
 
 u 
 
 δρω 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρόω 
 
 
 δρά -yQ 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρζις 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρ άςι £) etc. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 δρά-οιμε 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρψμι 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρύφ μι 
 
 Inf. 
 
 δρά-ειν 
 
 ίί 
 
 δράν 
 
 ίί 
 
 δ ρά αν 
 
 Part. 
 
 δρά-ων 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρών 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρύων 
 
 
 δρά-ουσα 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρώσα 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρόωσα 
 
 Gen. 
 
 δρά-οντος 
 
 ιι 
 
 δρώντος 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρύωντος 
 
 Mid. 2. Sing. Ind. 
 
 δρά -y 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρ$ 
 
 ίί 
 
 δ ρ ά ^ 
 
 3. Plur. 
 
 δρά-ονται 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρώνται 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρόωνται 
 
 Opt. 3. Plur. 
 
 δρά-οιντο 
 
 ίί 
 
 δρφντο 
 
 ίί 
 
 δ ρ ύ ψ ν τ ο 
 
 Inf. 
 
 δρά-εσθαι 
 
 ίί 
 
 δράσθαι 
 
 ίί 
 
 δ ράασθαι 
 
 3. Plur. Impf. 
 
 έωοά-οντο 
 
 t 
 
 ίί 
 
 εωρωντο 
 
 ίί 
 
 δ ρ ό ω ν r ο 
 
136 
 
 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 
 
 243 . 
 
 are observed. Paradigms of the three verbs τιμάω, ποιίω, 
 ΰουλόω, are given on p. 110-113. 
 
 Ohs. — As tlic ε t in the Infinitive ε t v is not original, a ε ι v, οειν do 
 not become a v, ο i v, but αν, o v v (§ 37, Obsi). 
 
 Dialects. 
 
 h) sometimes long , e. g., 
 
 ηβά-ονσα Att. ηβωσα Horn, ή β ώ ω σ a 
 
 from ήβάω, I am youthful; so also from δράω, I do ; 
 
 δρά-ονσι Att. δρώσι Horn, δ p ώ ω σ ι 
 
 and from μνάομαι , I remember ; 
 
 μνά-εσθαι Att. μνάσθαι Horn, μνάασθαι. 
 
 After long vowels , the one following is sometimes shortened: 
 
 μνα-όμενος Att. μνώμενος Horn, μ v ω 6 μ ε v ο ς 
 l /βά-οντες “ μβώντες “ ί) β ώ ο ν τ ε ς 
 
 The metre chiefly determines which of the vowels should be long 
 or short. Such forms, for instance, as άρετάει ( v v v ‘), ήβόωντες ( ")> 
 
 are inadmissible. 
 
 In Herod., the Stems in a often y>ass over into the conjugation of 
 the Stems in ε : υρεω (but ΰρμς, ύρ^), ΰρ'εομεν , ΰρ&ουσι , ύρεοντες. Instead 
 of εο we also find εω : ΰρέωντες. Homer also has μντεον — Att. μντων 
 (from άντά-ω, I meet ); χρεωμένος m Att. χρώμενος , making use of. 
 
 B. Stems in ε fluctuate between the open and contracted forms, 
 εο is often monosyllabic by synizesis (§ 39): ίθρηνεον, I complained; 
 often also in Ionic contracted to ευ: Horn, νενμαι — Att. νεομαι , I 
 return home, εον rarely becomes ε v : νεικενσι — νεικονσι , they quarrel, 
 ε ε becomes ?/ irregularly in Horn.: ομαρτητην ( υμαρτεω , I meet icith), 
 άπειλητην (άπε/λέω, I threaten ), δορπητην ( δορπίω , I Slip ), Illf. <ρορημεναι=ι 
 Att. φόρε Tv, to carry. An utterly anomalous Infinitive is φορηναι. 
 
 The second ε in the 2 Sing. Mid. is sometimes dropped: μνθεαι for 
 μνθεεεα (Att. μυθιρ μνθεΤ, thou sayest) \ πωΧέο — Att. εττωλοΰ, thou hadst 
 intercourse; sometimes ε ε are contracted to ε ι : μυθέίαι. The first 
 way is usual in Herod. Homer also jDrolongs ε to ε ι without con¬ 
 traction : νεικείω ~Att. νεικώ \ ίτεΧειετο “Att. ίτεΧεΊτο (τελώ, I complete). 
 
 C. Stems in o are mostly contracted: γοννουμαι , I supplicate. Some 
 have an extension like those in a : άρόωσι(ν ) — Att. άρονσι(ν), they 
 plow / δηίόψεν — Att. δηϊοϊεν, they would destroy / νπνώοντας — Att. vtt- 
 νοΰντας , the sleepers. 
 
 In Herod, o sometimes changes to ε, and with o is contracted to 
 εν : ίδικαίευν = Att. ίδικαίονν , deemed right. 
 
245 . 
 
 PRESENT AND \ r ERBAL-STEMS. 
 
 137 
 
 § 244. Ohs .—1. Monosyllabic Stems in ε admit only tlie contraction 
 ε t. All syllables which, contracted, would produce another 
 sound, remain uncontracted. 
 
 Stem 7 r λ ε (Pres, πλέω, I sail , Inf. πλεΐν) 
 
 πλέεις 
 
 πλεΊς, 
 
 but 
 
 πλέω 
 
 πλέει 
 
 7τλεΤ, 
 
 α 
 
 πλέον σι 
 
 επλεες 
 
 επλεις, 
 
 U 
 
 έπλεον 
 
 δέω, I hind, forms an exception, having τό δουν ( ceov ), δονμαι , etc., 
 to distinguish them from forms of <5έω, I am in want of; δει, it is 
 necessary; το δέον, duty. 
 
 2. Some Stems in a have a preference for ?/, which they admit in 
 the place of ά : ζά-ω, I live , Cy£, 'Cy, ζητε, ζην ; πεινά-ω, I am hun¬ 
 gry, 7 τεινην ; διψά-ω, I thirst, διψην ; so also κνά-ω, I scratch ; σμά-ω , 
 I stroke; ψά-ω, I scrape ; and χρά-ομαι, I make use of 
 
 3. ριγό-ω, I freeze , has ω and ψ for ο v and ο i : Inf. piytiv, Opt. pt- 
 γφην. 
 
 4. \ούω, I wash , lav-o, has a peculiar contraction; that is, the con¬ 
 necting vowel after o v disappears: ε-λου for t -λον-ε ; λοΰ-μαι for 
 λού-ο-μαι , etc. In like manner, ο’ί-ο-μαι is often contracted to 
 οΐ-μαε, I think , and the Imperf. φ-ό-μην to ψ-μην. 
 
 D. Distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verhal- 
 
 Stem. 
 
 § 245. We call that part of a verb the Verbal Stem 
 from the combination of which with the terminations of 
 persons, tenses, moods, infinitives, and participles, consist¬ 
 ently with the laws of euphony, all the forms of the verb 
 may be explained: λ υ. Pres, λύω, Perf. \ί\νκα, Fut. λύσω ; 
 tl μα, Pres, τιμάω, Perf. τετίμηκα, Fut. τιμήσω . 
 
 Obs. — From the Verbal-Stem also nouns are formed by means of 
 the nominal suffixes : \ΰ-σι-ς, loosing; λυ-τίφ, looser; λύ-τρο-ν, re¬ 
 demption fee; τί-μη-σι-ς, valuation ; τιμη-τη-ς, censor. 
 
 When the Verbal-Stem can not be traced farther back, 
 it is called a Poot: λ v, and a verb formed from it, a Root- 
 Yerb: λύω. But when the Verbal-Stem is itself a Nom- 
 
 § 244. Dialects.—2. For χρηται Herod, has χραται. 
 
 4. Horn. 3 Sing. Imperf. λόε (for ΧοΡε, § 35, Ohs.) = λοΰε, ελουε. 
 
138 
 
 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 
 
 246 . 
 
 inal-Stem formed by means of a nominal suffix, it is said 
 to be derived : τ ι μα is at once the Nominal-Stem of τιμή, 
 honor , formed by the nominal suffix μ a from the root r i, 
 and the verb formed from it is a derivative one: τιμάω. 
 
 Obs.—Roots are almost all of one syllable; derived Stems are of 
 two or more syllables. 
 
 § 246. The Yerbal-Stem is not always like the Present- 
 Stern , but the Present-Stem is frequently an extension 
 of the Verbal-Stem: Pres. Χείπ-ω, I leave , Present-Stem 
 Χειττ, Verbal-Stem λ 7 tt (Aorist ΪΧιπον). 
 
 Such additions are called enlargements of the Present y 
 the Verbal-Stem divested of them is the pure Verbal- 
 Stem. 
 
 Obs. —Where the Verbal-Stem differs from the Present-Stem, nouns 
 are usually formed from the former, not from the latter : Verbal- 
 Stem φ v γ, Present-Stem ψευγ, substantive <ρνγ-η ( fug-a ), adj. 
 (pv γ-ά(δ)-ζ, fugitive. 
 
 § 247. The relation of the Present-Stem to the Verbal- 
 Stem produces four classes of verbs with some subdi¬ 
 visions. 
 
 l. First Class (unenlarged). 
 
 The Present-Stem is like the Verbal-Stem. 
 
 This comprises, first of all, the pure verbs , i. e \’erbs 
 whose stem ends in a vowel (with the exception of a small 
 number in ε ω, § 248, and many others besides : τιμά-ω, 
 δουλο-ω, παίδεύ-ω, I educate y Χύ-ω,Τ loose y τί-ω,Ι honor y 
 apy -ω, I ride y ay -ω, I lead y λεγ-ω, I say. 
 
 I 
 
 § 248. 2. Second Class (lengthened class). 
 
 The Stem vowel is lengthened in the Present-Stem. 
 
 This comprises several verbs whose Stem ends in a 
 mute , and which in the Present have a diphthong or a long 
 vowel, as: 
 
 § 248. Dialect 3 .—To these belongs the Horn. σεύω, I hurry , from the 
 Stem συ. 
 
249 . 
 
 FRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 
 
 139 
 
 φενγ-ω, I flee, Pure Stem 
 
 λείπ-ω, I leave, “ “ 
 
 7 τεέθ-ω, I persuade, “ “ 
 
 τηκ-ω, I melt, “ “ 
 
 τρίβ-ω, I rub, “ “ 
 
 Φ v y (φνγ-η, flight, Lutfuga). 
 
 λ l 7Γ 
 
 7Γ l θ (πίθ-ανό-ς, persuasive), 
 τ a ic 
 
 τρΦ 
 
 But, besides these, there are also six verbs in ε ω, viz.: 
 
 πλέω, I sail, Pure Stem πλυ 
 
 πνέω, I blow, 
 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 πνυ 
 
 νέω,Ι sail, 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 V V 
 
 ρέω, I flow, 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 p V 
 
 θέω, I run, 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 Θ V 
 
 χέω, I pour, 
 
 a 
 
 ll 
 
 X” 
 
 Obs .— The v of these Stems was lengthened to ε v, but resolved to 
 ε/ before vowels (compare § 35, D. 2); finally the f was dropped :· 
 πλν-πλενω-πλεΡω-πλέω. The diphthong appears in the substan¬ 
 tives unresolved : πνεΰ-μα , breath; ρεΰ-μα, stream. Compare 
 § 260, 2. 
 
 § 249. 3. Third Class (T-class). 
 
 The Present-Stem affixes r to the Verbal-Stem. 
 
 This comprises only verbs whose Pure Stems end in 
 Labials, as: 
 
 τνπτ-ω, I strike, Pure Stem τν π (τΰπος, stroke), 
 
 βλάπτ-ω, I injure, “ “ β\ a β (βλάβη, in jury), 
 
 βάπτ-ω, I dip, “ α β a <p (βάφη, a dip). 
 
 and, besides— 
 
 τίκτ-ω, I bring forth, 
 
 τ ε ic ( τεκος , child). 
 
 The final consonant of the Pure Stem is called here, as 
 in the verbs of the following class, the character. On the 
 changes of sound, see § 45. 
 
 Other Examples. 
 
 κύπτω, I cut, 
 κλεπτω, I steal, 
 κρύπτω, I hide, 
 θάπτω, I bury, 
 
 Stem ko π 
 “ κλεπ 
 
 κρνφ or κρνβ 
 ταφ (§ 54, c). 
 
 § 249. Dialects. — The Stem βλαβ in Horn, has a Pres, βλάβεται, like 
 class 1. 
 
140 
 
 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 
 
 250 . 
 
 § 250. 4. Fourth Class (I-class). 
 
 The Present-Stem adds i to the Verbal-Stem [Latin 
 fug-i-o, Pure Stem fug]. The i is here subject to the 
 various changes and transpositions discussed in §§ 55- 
 58, viz. : 
 
 ct) The Gutturals k, y, χ form, with i, the group σσ 
 (New-Att. τ t) (§ 57): 
 
 φυλάσσω, I guard, instead 
 
 of φυλακιω, Pure Stem 
 
 φνλακ ( φυλακή , a 
 
 guard). 
 
 
 
 τάσσω, I arrange, “ 
 
 ταγ ιω, “ α 
 
 τ ay (ταγός, Cir- 
 
 ranger). 
 
 
 
 ταράσσω, I confuse, 
 
 ταραχιω , u u 
 
 ταραχ ( ταραχή, 
 
 confusion). 
 
 Other Examples. 
 
 
 ελίσσω (tz), I roll. 
 
 πράσσω(γ), I do. 
 
 όρνσσω(χ),Ι dig. 
 
 κηρύσσω (κ), I proclaim. σφάττω(γ), I slay. 
 
 Obs. —The character of the Presents άρμόττω , I fit; πάσσω, I scatter; 
 πλάσσω, I shape ; βράσσω, I seethe ; ερίσσω, I raw ; τττίσσω, I stamp; 
 βλίττω,Ι abstract honey, is a dental; πεσσω, I boil, has Stem πεπ 
 irregularly. 
 
 § 251. b) δ, and more rarely y, with l, form ζ (§ 58): 
 ϊζομαι, I sit , instead of ίδίομαι, Pure Stem I δ (εδ-ος, seat , 
 Latin sedes) ; κράζω, I cry, instead of Kpayiw, Pure Stem 
 κ p ay. 
 
 Other Examples. 
 
 φράζω(ν), I say. υζω(ό), I smell. σχίζω (S), I Split. 
 
 Obs. — Present-Stems in ζ which express a sound have the Verbal- 
 Stem in γ: στενάζω, I sigh; οιμώζω, I wail; οιμωγ-ή, a wailing; 
 moreover, στάζω, I trickle ; στίζω, I prick, Lat. in-stig-o ; μαστίζω, 
 
 § 250. Dialects.—The Stems of the Presents ίμάσσω, I whip; λίσ- 
 σομαι, I beseech ; κορύσσω, I arm; Herod, άφάσσω, I touch, end in Den¬ 
 tals (λ i τ, κορνθ ); Horn, ενίσσω, I blame, has irregularly the Stem 
 iv nr. 
 
 § 251. Dialects.—In all dialects, Presents in -ζω much more fre¬ 
 quently have a Guttural for their character, in Horn, especially in 
 άλαπάζω, I conquer ; ϋαΐζω, I divide ; μερμηρίζω, I ponder; ττολεμίζω, I 
 war ; στυφελίζω, I strike, etc. 
 
§ 253 . 
 
 PRESENT AND VERBAL STEMS. 
 
 141 
 
 I whip , and some others, κλάζω, I call, Stem κ λ a y y, κ\αγγ-η, a 
 call; 7 τλάζω,Ι mislead; σαλπίζω, I Mow a trumpet, have a Pure 
 Stem in yy ; ν/ζω, / has irregularly the Stem ^ ι β. 
 
 Other Examples. 
 
 θάλλω, I bloom, σφάλλω, I cause to stagger, στελλω, I send. 
 
 πάλλω, I wield, αγγέλλω, I announce. ψάλλω, I play on the lyre. 
 
 § 253. d) v and p throw the i into the preceding syllable 
 of the Stem (§ 55): 
 
 τείνω, I stretch, for τενιω, Pure Stem τεν (τύν-ο-ς, a stretching, Latin 
 tendo). 
 
 φθείρω, I corrupt, “ φθεριω, “ “ φθ ερ ( φθορ-ά , corruption), 
 φαίνω, I show, u φανιω, u u φαν (α-φάν-ί]ς, invisible). 
 
 Obs. —If the Stem syllable has i or v for its vowel, this is length¬ 
 ened by the retreating ι : κρίνω, I sever, judge, from κρίν-ιω ; σύρω, 
 I drag, from σϋρ-ιω. 
 
 Λ single Stem in λ also follows this formation, viz.: όφελ, Pres. 
 οφείλω, I owe, for όφελιω, to distinguish it from ύφίλλω, I increase, 
 with the same Stem. 
 
 The ι unites immediately with the final vowels of the Stems καυ 
 and κλαυ, which then sacrifice their v (f ) : κα-ίω, I burn ; κλα-ίω, 
 I weep. Additional forms in Attic are κάω, κλάω (§ 35, Obs.). 
 
 N.B.—The other less usual classes of verbs are given below. 
 
 § 253. Dialects.—Homer joins ι immediately with Vowel Stems: 
 ba -ίω, I burn, Stem b a : μα-ίομαι, I seek, Stem μ a ; να-ίω, I dwell, Stem 
 v a ; and he uses όφίλλω in the sense of the Att. οφείλω ; but, on the 
 other hand, he has είλω, I press, from the Stem i λ for which one 
 might expect ελλω (Class 4, c). 
 
142 II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. § 254. 
 
 II. The Strong or Second Aorist-Stem. 
 
 § 254. The Strong or Second Aorist Active and Middle 
 is formed from the Strong Aorist-Stem, which is like the 
 Pure Verbal-Stem, except the few cases named in § 257. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Stem 
 
 Χείπ-ω, I leave. 
 
 X l 7Γ 
 
 τνπτ-ω, I strike. 
 
 TV 7Γ 
 
 βάΧΧ-ω, I throw. 
 βάΧ 
 
 Active. 
 
 Aorist 
 
 Ind. 
 
 ϊ-Χϊπ-ο-ν, I left. 
 ε-Χιπ-ε-ς 
 
 etc., like the Imper 
 
 t -τνιΓ-ο-ν, I struck, 
 ε-τυ π-ε-ς 
 
 fects ΊΧειπον , ιτυπτον 
 
 t -βάΧ-ο-ν, I threw. 
 ε-βαΧ-ε-ς 
 ,εβαΧΧον 
 
 Subj. 
 
 (Χίπ-ω 
 
 1λ<7Γ-^-ς 
 
 etc., like the Pres, £ 
 
 τνττ-ω 
 
 τνπ -y-Q 
 
 Subjunctive Χείπω, τι 
 
 βάΧ-ω 
 βάΧ -y-Q 
 >π no, βάΧΧω 
 
 Opt. 
 
 (Xu τ-οι-μι 
 \Χίπ-οι-ς 
 
 etc., like the Pres. ( 
 
 τνπ-οι-μι 
 
 τνπ-οι-ς 
 
 Iptative Χείποιμι, τν7 
 
 βάΧ-οι-μι 
 βάΧ-οι-ς 
 r τοιμι, βάΧΧοιμι 
 
 Imper. 
 
 ίλΐ7Γ-ε 
 
 1λΐ7Γ-έ-τω 
 
 etc., like the Pres. 1 
 
 τΰπ-ε 
 
 τυπ-'ε-τω 
 
 mper. λεΤττε, τύπτε, /3< 
 
 βάΧ-ε 
 
 βαΧ-ε-τω 
 
 :ίΧΧε 
 
 Iniin. 
 
 Χιπ-ε7ν τνπ-εΐν 
 
 βαΧ-εΊν 
 
 Part. 
 
 Χιπ-ών , Χιπ-οΰσα , 
 Χιπ-όν^ Gen. Χιπ- 
 όντος 
 
 τυπ-ών , τνπ-οϋσα, 
 τυπ-ύν, Gen. τνπ- 
 όντος 
 
 βαΧ-ών , βαΧ-οΰσα , 
 βαΧ-όν, Gen. βαΧ- 
 όντος 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Inclic. 
 
 (ε-Χι π-ό-μην 
 ( ε-Χίπ-ου 
 
 etc., like the Imper 
 
 ε-τυ π-ό-μην 
 
 ε-τνπ-ον 
 
 f. εΧειπόμην, ετνπτόμη 
 
 εβαΧ-ό-μην 
 ε-βάΧ-ου 
 ν , εβαΧΧόμην 
 
 Subj. 
 
 • 
 
 ( Χίπ-ω-μαι 
 
 {Χίπ -y 
 
 etc., like the Pres. £ 
 
 τΰπ-ω-μαι 
 
 τνπ -y 
 
 Subj. Χείπωμαι, τύπτω 
 
 βάΧ-ω-μαι 
 
 βάΧ -y 
 
 μαι , βάΧΧωμαι 
 
 Opt. 
 
 (Xu τ-οί-μην 
 \Χίπ-οι-ο 
 
 etc., like the Pres. ( 
 
 τυπ-οί-μην 
 
 τΰπ-οι-ο 
 
 Dpt. Χειποίμην, τνπτο'ι 
 
 βαΧ-οί-μην 
 βάΧ-οι-ο 
 μην , βαΧΧοίμην 
 
 Imper. 
 
 (\ΐ7Γ-θϋ 
 
 \Χιπ-ε-σθω 
 etc., like the Pres.' 
 
 τυπ-οΰ 
 
 τν π-ε-σθω 
 
 mper. Χείπου , τνπτου 
 
 βαΧ-οΰ 
 βαΧ-ε-σθω 
 , βάΧΧου 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Χιπ-ε-σβαι τνπ-ε-σθαι βαΧ-έ-σθαι 
 
 Part. 
 
 Χιπ-ό-μενο-ς , ?/, ο-ν 
 
 τνπ-ό-μενο-ς , η, ο-ν βαΧ-ό-μενο-ς , η , ο-ν 
 
257. II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. 143 
 
 § 255. l. The Inflexion of the Strong Aorist-Stem dif¬ 
 fers from that of the Present-Stem (Imperfect and Present 
 tenses) only in the accent of the following forms: the In¬ 
 fill. Act. is perispome (λιπάν), the Infill. Mid. paroxytone 
 (λπτίσθαι), the Part. Act. accents the O-sound (λιπών, λι- 
 ποΰσα), the 2 Sing. Impel*. Mid. is perispome (λίττοϋ). 
 
 2. The Aorist Middle has not, like the Present Middle, 
 the meaning also of the Passive : thus ίβαλόμην means only 
 I threw for myself but not A was thrown. 
 
 On the Augment of the Indicative, §§ 234-242. 
 
 § 256. The Strong Aorist can be formed only from sucl^ 
 verbs as have a Present-Stem different from the Pure! 
 Verbal-Stem, therefore not from the verbs of the First 
 (unenlarged) Class (§ 247). Also it is not Usually formed 
 from many verbs of other classes, and scarcely occurs at all 
 from any but Foot-Verbs (§ 245). 
 
 Ohs .—On the Aorists of the verbs δύ-ω and φύ-ω (class 1), see §§ 316, 
 16,17. 
 
 § 257. In a few verbs the Strong Aorist Stem is distinguished from 
 the Pure Verbal Stem ; viz., instead of ε of the latter, the Strong 
 Aor. sometimes has a, by which τρέπ-ω , I turn , though belonging 
 to the first class, has a Strong Aor.: ε-τράπ-ο-ν (Impf. ε-τρεπ-ο-ν ), 
 ε-τραπ-6-μην. An isolated formation is Pres, τρώγ-ω , I gnaic, Aor. 
 ε-τραγ- 0 -ν. άγ-ω , I drive , likewise belonging to the first class, by 
 doubling the Verbal-Stem forms the Aorist-Stem άγ -ay, whence 
 Ind.: i'ly-ay-o-v , Sllbj. άγ-άγ-ω,Ιηί. άγ-αγ-εϊν. 
 
 § 255. Dialects.—1. All the peculiarities enumerated § 233, D., ex¬ 
 tend likewise to the Strong Aorist: 2 Sing. Subj. βάλησθα , 3 Sing. 
 βάλησι, etc. The Inf. Aor. Act. ends in Horn, also in mv instead of 
 ε7ν (βαΧεειν ). 
 
 2. The Middle Aorist forms of the Stems κτα (§ 316, 4), β λ η (§ 316, 
 19), ο ν τ a (§ 316, 20), exceptionally have a Passive meaning. 
 
N 3 
 
 144 
 
 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 
 
 258 . 
 
 III. The Future-Stem. 
 
 § 258. From the Future-Stem are formed the Fut. Act¬ 
 ive and Middle. 
 
 First Future 
 {The σ Future). 
 
 Second Future 
 {Contracted Future). 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Χνω, Stem λ v 
 
 Fut. Stem λ v σ 
 
 Pres, φαίνω, I show, Stem φ a v 
 Fut. Stem φάνε 
 
 Active. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Xdj -ω, I shall loose, 
 λύσ-εις , etc. 
 like the Pres. Χΰω 
 
 φάν'εω, ώ, I shall show, 
 φάνε-εις, εΤς, etc. 
 like the Present ποιώ 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Part. 
 
 Χνσ-οι-μι 
 
 Χνσ-ειν 
 
 Masc. Χνσ-ων 
 
 Fem. Χΰσ-ουσα 
 
 Neut. Χϋσ-ον 
 
 Gen. Χΰσ-οντος 
 
 φανε-οίην , οίην 
 φανε-ειν, ε~ιν 
 φανε-ων , ών 
 φανε-ονσα , οϋσα 
 φανε-ον , ουν 
 φανε-οντος , ovvtoq 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Χΰσ-ο-μαι , I shall loose for 
 myself. 
 
 like the Present Χνομαι 
 
 φανε-ο-μαι, ονμαι , A 
 pear. 
 
 like the Present ποιούμαι 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Part. 
 
 Χνσ-οί-μην 
 
 Χνσ-ε-σθαι 
 
 Χνσ-ό-μενος , η , ον 
 
 φανε-οί-μην, οίμην 
 φανέ-ε-σθαι , εΊσθαι 
 φανε-ο-μενος , ονμενος, η , ον 
 
 § 257. Dialects.—Horn., in the case of several Stems with p, forms 
 the Strong Aorist by metathesis (§ 59), and by changing ε into a : 
 δέρχ-ο-μαι , I see , ε-ϋρακ-ον ; περθ-ω, I destroy , t-7 τράθ-ο-ν ; in others by 
 the syncope of ε (§ Cl, c) : ε-πτ-ό-μην ( πετ-ομαι , I fly), t-yp -ε-το (Stem 
 εγερ, Pres, class 4, d, εγείρω, I awake)·, Part, άγρ-6-μενοι, assembled; 
 Inf. άγερ-'εσθαι (Pres, class 4, d , άγείρω). 
 
 Reduplication occurs in Ilomer in a great many Aorists: ε-πέ-φράο- 
 o-v (Stem φ pab, Pres, class 4, b, φράζω , I indicate) ; πε-πΧΘ-ο-ν (Stem 
 ϊ Θ , Pres, class 2, πείθω, I persuade) ; πε-πάΧ-ών (Pres, class 4, c, πάλλω, 
 brandish ); Aor. Mid. 3 Sing.: τε-τάρπ-ε-το {τερπ-ο-μαι, I rejoice ); 
 
§ 260 . 
 
 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 
 
 145 
 
 § 259. l. The Inflexion of the Future-Stem is the same 
 as that of the Present-Stem, i. e ., that of the σ Future is 
 the ordinary Inflexion, that of the contracted future is the 
 Inflexion of the contracted Present of ε Stems (§§ 231, 
 232, and 243). 
 
 § 260. The σ Future forms the Future-Stem by adding 
 σ to the Verbal-Stem: λ v, λϋσ. All Stems ending in a 
 vowel or a mute have the σ Future. The σ, according to 
 § 48, with gutturals makes ξ, with labials ψ, and admits 
 of no dentals before it (§ 49): ay -ω,Ι drive , Fut. αξ-ω ; 
 Ύράφ-ω, I write , Fut. Ύράψ-ω ; aS -ω, I sing , Fut. «σ-ω ; 
 σπενδ-ω, llbo, Fut. σττείσ-ω for σπεηδ-σω (§ 50). About 
 θρέψω, Stem τ p εφ, θύψω, Stem τυ φ, and others, see § 54. 
 
 2. Verbs of the second or extended class (§ 248) retain 
 the extended Stem also in the Future: λείπ-ω, λείψ-ω ; the 
 six verbs in εω mentioned in § 248 show their strengthened 
 form in the Fut., though it is not seen in the Present: πλέω, 
 πλεύσομαί ; in like manner, κλαίω brings out its Pure Stem 
 κ λ a v ill κλανσω, and καίω in καυσω (§ 253). About χέω, 
 see § 265. 
 
 3. Of verbs of the third or T class, and of those of the 
 fourth or I class (§ 249, etc.), the Pure Stem must be 
 found in order to form the Future: τύπτω (class 4), Pure 
 Stem r v 7Γ, Fut. τνψω ; φυλάσσω, Pure Stem φ υλ a κ, Fut. 
 
 Stem φ i δ (class 2), φείδομαι, Inf. Aor. πε-φιδ-ε-σθαι , also Fut. πε-φιδ-ή- 
 σομαι. Isolated Aorists are : ί-κε-κ(ε)\-ε-το, he called , from κεΧομαι ; π'ε- 
 φν-ο-ν , I hilled (Stem φ ει>) ; τε-τμ-ο-ν (/ hit, Stem r ε μ) ’ τε-ταγ-ών 
 (seizing, Stem ray , Lat. tango), ήν-ίπ-άι r-o-v (I scolded, Pres, ίνίπτω), 
 along with ίν-ενϊπ-ο-ν , and ήρυκ-άκ-ο-ν (I kept hach, Pres, ίρΰκω), have 
 the reduplication in the middle of the word. The reduplication in 
 this case every where belongs to the Tense-Stem, and, as in the Per¬ 
 fect-Stem (§ 273), is preserved in all the moods, in the Infin., and the 
 Participle. The Indie, may add the Augment or omit it before the 
 reduplication. (§ 234, D.) 
 
 § 259. Dialects.—About the contraction, see § 243, D. 
 
 G 
 
146 
 
 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 
 
 261 . 
 
 φυΧάζω ; φράζω, Pure Stem φ p a δ, Fut. φράσω. Accord¬ 
 ingly, verbs ending in the Present in -σσω or -ττω gener¬ 
 ally make the Fut. in -ξω, and those having the Present 
 in ζω generally have their Future in -σω. 
 
 According to this rule, let the Future be formed of 
 εΧίσσω, I Toll y κηρύσσω, I proclaim y ττράσσω, I do y 
 σχίζω, I split y δικάζω, I judge y οπΧίζω, I arm y and 
 let the Presents be found to the Futures όρνζω, σφάζω, 
 βιάσομαι, Χο-γίσομαι. 
 
 Verbs with a dental character ending in the Present 
 in -σσω or -ττω, naturally (§ 250, Ohs.) make the Future 
 in -σω : πλάσω (Pres, πλάσσω, I shape), αρμόσω (Pres. 
 άρμόττω, 1 fit) ; and, on the other hand, those with the 
 character γ, which have the Present in -ζω (§ 251, Ohs.), 
 make their Future in -ζω : στενάξω (Pres, στενάζω, I sigh); 
 στίζω (Pres, στίζω, I pviclX). 
 
 § 261. Vowel-Stems have their vowels long before σ ; 
 a becomes a if preceded by ε, i, or p (§ 41), in all other 
 cases it becomes η. Every other short vowel is changed 
 into the corresponding long one : εά-ω, I leave , εάσ-ω ; 
 ιά-ομαι, I heal, ιάσ-ομαι ; δρά-ω, I do, δράσ-ω ; but τιμά-ω, 
 τιμησ-ω ; βοά-ω, I CVl) out, βοησ-ομαι ; εγγυά-ω, I hand 
 over , εγγν//σ-ω ; ποίε-ω, ποιησ-ω, δουΧυω , δουΧώσ-ω. 
 
 The Stem χρ α (χράιω, I give an oracle y χράομαι, I use) 
 exceptionally has η in the Future : χρησω, χρησομαι ; 
 whereas άκροάομαι, I listen , has άκροάσομαι. 
 
 Respecting the Future with a short vowel, see § 301. 
 
 § 262. The contracted Future forms the Future-Stem 
 
 § 261. Dialects.—The Ion. dialect has η even after ε, ι,ρ : πεφήσομαι , 
 I shall endeavor. The Ep. dialect sometimes doubles the σ when the 
 vowel is short: αίΰ'εσσομαι ( αίδεομαι , I feel shame). The Horn. Futures 
 άλαπάζω, πολεμίξω, στυφελίζω, and others, with their Presents in -ζω, 
 are explained in § 251, D. 
 
 § 262. Dialects. — Stem θερ has in Horn, the Fut. θερσομαι , Pres. 
 θέρο pea, I grow warm ; Stem κερ (Pres, class 4, d, κείρω, I shave), Fut. 
 κέρσω ; Stem φ v p, Pres, φϋρω, I mix, Fut. φνρσω. 
 
264 . 
 
 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 
 
 147 
 
 by adding ε to the Verbal-Stem: φ ά v, φ a v ε. This form 
 of the Future occurs in Stems ending in λ, μ, v, p ; and 
 the Stem vowel is short: νέμω, I distribute , Fut. νέμω ; 
 άμϋνω, I defend, αμυνω. Verbs of the seventh class here 
 show their Pure Stem (§§ 252, 253) : βάλλω, 1 throw, 
 βάλω ; φαίνω, φανώ ; κτείνω, I hill , κτενώ ; φθείρω, φθερώ ; 
 αγγέλλω, άγγελω. 
 
 According to this rule, let the Future be formed of 
 σφάλλω, I cause to fall; στελλω, I send ; μαίνομαι, Trave; 
 αίρω, I lift; and the Present (class 4) of σιτερώ, ττοικιλώ, 
 σημανώ, τ)δυνω. 
 
 Exceptions. — The Stems κ ε λ (Τίλλω, class 4, c, I hiocJc against ) and 
 κυρ ( κνρεω , / meet) have the σ form of the Future : κέλσω, κνρσω. 
 
 Obs .—The contracted Future is properly a peculiar fomi of the σ 
 Future, for φανε-ω has arisen from φαν-ε-σ-ω (§ 61 A), in which ε 
 is the connecting vowel. 
 
 § 263. Several Stems in ε (Pres, εω), αδ (Pres, αζω), and 
 id (Pres, ιζω), throw out the σ in the Future. Those in ε 
 and ad then contract the \ T owels ε and a with the connect¬ 
 ing vowel : τελε'-ω, I complete , τελεσ-ω, τελεω, τελώ ; 1 Plur. 
 τελεομεν, τ ελοΰ μεν (as in the Present) ; βιβάζω, I bring , 
 βιβάσ-ω, βιβάω, βιβώ ; 1 Plur. βιβάομεν, βιβώμεν. Το 
 these also belongs έλάω, ελώ, 2 Sing, ελας, 3 Sing, έλα, from 
 the irregular Present ελαύνω, I drive / compare § 321, 2. 
 
 Stems in id after dropping the σ insert ε, which is con¬ 
 tracted with the connecting vowel: κομίζω, I carry , Fut. 
 Act. κομίσ-ω, κομι-ε-ω, κ ο μ ι ώ, 1 Plur. κομιεομεν, κομιουμεν ; 
 Fut. Mid. κ ομιονμαι. 
 
 This form of the Future is called the Attic. 
 
 § 264. Some verbs take an ε after the σ of the Future, 
 which is contracted with the connecting vowel : πνέω, I 
 breathe , Stem π v v, ττνευσουμαι ; πλέω, I sail , Stem π λ v, 
 
 § 2G3. Dialects.—The Futures in αω in the Horn, dialect are treated 
 exactly like the Presents (§ 243, D. A.), hence ελόω, ελά^^, ελάρ. 
 
148 
 
 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 
 
 § 265 . 
 
 πΧευσοΰμαι along with 7 τΧενσομαι ; 0εύγω, Iflee, Stem φ υ γ, 
 φευζουμαι and φενζομαι. This kind of Future, which oc¬ 
 curs only in the Middle voice with an Active meaning, is 
 called the Doric. 
 
 § 265. Few verbs form their Future without any tense 
 sign: χΐω, 1 pour, Fut. Act. χίω, Mid. χεομαι, and so also 
 among the irregular verbs έπομαι, I shall eat (§ 327, 4), 
 and 7 τίομαι, I shall drink (§ 321, 4). 
 
 § 266. The Future Middle generally has a Middle sense, 
 but in many verbs it has a Passive, and in not a few an 
 Active meaning; the last is the case especially in verbs 
 denoting a bodily activity: «δω, I sing ; ακούω, I hear; 
 απαντάω, I meet ; άποΧανω, I enjoy ; βαβίζω, I walk 
 (βαϋιουμαι) ; βοάω, I call out / γ ελάω , I laugh ; οΙμώζω, 
 I bewail ; σίγάω and σιωπάω, I am silent; σπουδάζω, I 
 am zealous. Irregular verbs (§ 320, etc.) very frequently 
 have a Middle Future with Active meaning. 
 
 § 265. Dialects —Tlie Horn, βείομαι or βεομαι , I shall live , akin to 
 βώω, I live, is likewise formed without a tense sign. 
 
§ 267. 
 
 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. 149 
 
 IY. The W eaiv or First Aorist-Stem. 
 
 § 267. From the Stem of the Weak or First Aorist are 
 formed the Weak (or First) Aorist Active and Middle. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Χν-ω 
 
 
 φαίν-ω 
 
 - ' 
 
 Stem 
 
 X V 
 
 
 Pure Stem φάν 
 
 
 1. σ 
 
 Form. 
 
 2. Supplementary Form. 
 
 
 Stem of Weak Aorist λ v c a 
 
 φ η ν ά 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 έ'-λνσα, I loosed. 
 
 ε-Χνσά-μην, I 
 
 ε-φηνα , I 
 
 ε-φηνά-μην 
 
 
 
 loosed for myself 
 
 showed. 
 
 
 
 ε-Χνσα-ς 
 
 t -λύσω 
 
 ε-φηνα-ς 
 
 ε-φηνω 
 
 
 r·* 
 
 UJ 
 
 b 
 
 S> 
 
 1 
 
 ε-Χνσα-το 
 
 ε-φηνε(ν) 
 
 ε-φηνα-το 
 
 
 . 
 
 ε-Χνσά-με-θον 
 
 
 ε-φηνά-με-θον 
 
 
 ε-Χνσα-τον 
 
 ε-Χνσα-σθον 
 
 ε-φηνα-τον 
 
 ε-φήνα-σθον 
 
 
 ε-Χνσά-την 
 
 i-X υσά-σθην 
 
 ε-φηνά-την 
 
 ε-φηνά-σθην 
 
 
 ε-Χνσα-μεν 
 
 ε-Χνσά-μεθα 
 
 ε-φηνα-μεν 
 
 ε-φηνά-με-θα 
 
 
 ε-Χνσα-τε 
 
 ε-Χνσα-σθε 
 
 ε-φήνα-τε 
 
 εφηνα-σθε 
 
 
 ε-Χνσα-ν 
 
 ε-Χνσα-ντο 
 
 ε-φηνα-ν 
 
 ε-φηνα-ντο 
 
 Subjunct. 
 
 λύσω 
 
 Χνσω-μαι 
 
 φήνω 
 
 φηνω-μαι 
 
 
 Χύσης 
 
 Χύση 
 
 φηνης 
 
 φν,νη 
 
 
 etc., like the Pres. Act. and Mid. 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Χνσαι-μ i 
 
 Χνσαί-μην 
 
 φηναι-μι 
 
 φηναί-μη ν 
 
 
 Χνσαι-ς or 
 
 Χνσαι-ο 
 
 φηναι-ς ΟΓ 
 
 φηναι-ο 
 
 
 Χνσειας 
 
 
 φηνειας 
 
 
 
 Χνσαι or 
 
 Χνσαι-το 
 
 φηναι ΟΓ 
 
 φηναι-το 
 
 
 Χνσειε(ν) 
 
 Χυσαί-μεθον 
 
 φήνειε(ν) 
 
 φηναί-μεθον 
 
 
 Χνσαι-τον 
 
 Χνσαι-σθον 
 
 φί/ναι-τον 
 
 φήναι-σθον 
 
 
 Χνσαί-την 
 
 Χυσαί-σθην 
 
 φηναί-την 
 
 φηναί-σθην 
 
 
 Χνσαι-μεν 
 
 Χνσαί-μεθα 
 
 φηναι-μεν 
 
 φηναί-μεθα 
 
 
 Χνσαι-τε 
 
 Χνσαι-σθε 
 
 φηναι-τε 
 
 φηναι-σθε 
 
 
 Χνσαι-εν or 
 
 Χνσαι-ντο 
 
 φήναι-εν or 
 
 φηναι-ντο 
 
 
 Χνσει-αν 
 
 
 φηνει-αν 
 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 Χνσο-ι> 
 
 Χνσαι 
 
 φηνο-ν 
 
 φηναι 
 
 
 Χνσά-τω 
 
 Χυσά-σθω 
 
 φηνά-τω 
 
 φηνά-σθω 
 
 
 Χνσα-τον 
 
 Χνσα-σθον 
 
 φ!μ>α-τον 
 
 φήνα-σθον 
 
 
 Χνσά-των 
 
 Χνσά-σθων 
 
 φηνά-των 
 
 φηνά-σθων 
 
 
 Χνσα-τε 
 
 Χνσα-σθε 
 
 φηνα-τε 
 
 φηνα-σθε 
 
 
 Χνσά-ντων ΟΓ 
 
 Χνσά-σθων ΟΓ 
 
 φηνά-ντων ΟΓ 
 
 φηνά-σθων ΟΓ 
 
 
 Χνσά.-τωσαν 
 
 Χνσά-σθωσαν 
 
 φηνά-τωσαν 
 
 φηνά-σθωσαν 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Χνσαι 
 
 Χνσα-σθαι 
 
 φηναι 
 
 φηνα-σθαι 
 
 Particip. 
 
 Χύσά-ς , άσα, αν 
 
 Χνσά-μενο-ς , η , 
 
 φηνά-ς , άσα, αν 
 
 φηνά-μενο-ς , 
 
 
 Gen. Χνσαντ-ος 
 
 ο-ν 
 
 φηναντ-ος 
 
 η, ο-ν 
 
150 IV. THE WEAK OK FIRST AORIST-STEM. 
 
 268. 
 
 § 268. The characteristic vowel in the inflexion of the 
 Weak Aorist is d, which in the 3 Sing. Inch Act. becomes 
 ε, but every where else remains unchanged before the per¬ 
 sonal and modal signs. In the Subj. a is lengthened to 
 ω and η, whereby the endings become the same as those 
 of the Present. In the Optat. Act., the forms with ει in 
 the 2 and 3 Sing, and 3 Plur. are more common than those 
 with m : Χύσειας, Χύσειε(ν), Χυσειαν. In the 2 Sing. Im- 
 perat. Act. v is added, by which the a is rendered so ob¬ 
 scure as to become ο : λΰσο-ν ; and in 2 Imp. Mid. i is 
 added, which, with the a, makes at. In the 2 Sing. Inch 
 Mid. σ is thrown out, as in the Pres, and Fut., so that 
 ε-λύσα(σ)ο becomes έλησω, according to § 37. 
 
 Obs. 1.—Three forms of the Weak Aorist are the same, the 3 Sing. 
 Opt. Act., the Infin. Active, and the 2 Imperat. Mid.; but in ac¬ 
 cent they differ; for, as the ai of the Optat. is regarded as long 
 (§ 229), the first of these three forms is always paroxytone: 
 Χύσαι, γράψαι (γράφω, I write), παιδεύσαι (παιδεύω, I educate ) ; the 
 Infin. always has the accent on the penultima: Χνσαι, παιδενσαι, 
 γράψαι ; the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mich, where possible, has the accent 
 on the antepenultima : παιδενσαι, λϋσαι, γράψαι. 
 
 Obs. 2.—The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Weak Aor. Act. is the same in 
 form as the Neut. Partic. Fut. λϋσον, but in Verbal-Stems of more 
 than one syllable it differs from it by the accent: παίδενσον, but 
 the Neut. Part. Fut. is παιδεύσον (§ 229). 
 
 S 269. The σ form of the Aorist differs from the Stem 
 
 § 268. Dialects. — In the Ion. dialect, the 2 Sing. Indie. Mid. fre¬ 
 quently leaves the vowels uncontractecl : ίΧύσαο. 
 
 Some Aorists in Horn, take the vowels o and ε instead of a : ίζον, 
 I came, \ζες ; ίβησετο (βαίνω, I walk) ; δύσετο (he set or icent down , δύω) ; 
 so also the Imperatives δρσεο, arise ; άξετε, bring ; οΊσε, bring; λίζεο, lie 
 down ; πελάσσετον — πεΧάσατον, from πελάζω, I approach. 
 
 § 269. Dialects. — άφύσσω, I draw water , has in Horn, the Fut. άφύζω , 
 but the Aor. άφυσσα. Irregular Horn, forms without σ are : ιχενα for 
 εχενσα, from Pres, χέω, I pour ; ικηα, 1 Plur. Subj. κηομεν or κείομεν, 
 Imperat. κηον or κε7ον, Infin. icijai or κεΊαι, from Pres, καίω, I burn ; Stem 
 καν (Att. εκανσα ) ; εσσενα, Pres, σεύω, I drive away; the Infinitives 
 άΧεύασθαι or άΧέασθαι, to avoid ; δατέασθαι, from δατέομαι, I distribute. 
 
§ 270. IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. 
 
 151 
 
 of the Future only by the addition of the α : λΰσ, \ϋσα; 
 ypciip, ypafa ; φυ\αζ, φυ\αζα. Respecting the change of 
 vowels and consonants before σ, compare §§ 260, 261. 
 The irregular χέω (§ 265) has the Aorist ϊχεα for ίχευσα. 
 Compare the irregularity in fn τα, I spoke / ηνεγκα, I hove, 
 § 327, 12 and 13 . 
 
 § 270. The Stems in λ, μ , v, p , forming their Future 
 without σ, reject this consonant also in the Weak Aorist, 
 which gives rise to the supplementary form, for the vowel 
 of the Stem is lengthened by compensation for the loss of 
 the σ. 
 
 a after i and p becomes a: Pres. 7 τεραίνω (class 4, d), I penetrate, Stem 
 
 7 τέραν. Flit, ττεράνώ , Aor. ε-π'εράνα (§ 41) | 
 7 ]: Pres, φαίνω (class 4, d), Stem φαν , Fut. 
 φανώ , Aor. t -φηνα. 
 
 el : Pres, αγγέλλω (class 4, c), I announce , Stem 
 άγγελ, Flit, άγγελώ, Aor. ϊ/γγειλα. 
 
 “ Pres, νψω (class 1), / distribute , Fut. νεμώ, 
 Aor. t -νειμα. 
 
 Z : Pres, κρίνω (class 4, εΖ), I judge. Stem κριν , 
 Fut. κρίνω, Aor. t -κρινα. 
 ΰ : Pres, άμύνω (class 4, εΖ), I defend, Stem 
 άμυν, Flit, άμύνω, Aor. μμυνα. 
 
 Ohs .—The Stems άρ {αίρω, I lift) and άλ (ίίλλομαι, I leap) have in 
 the Indie. ?/ because of the Augment: ήρα, ήλάμην, but in the 
 other forms a : άρας, άλάμενος. a instead of η occurs in some 
 
 otherwise 
 
 becomes 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 V 
 
 u 
 
 εΐσα, I placed, is a defective poet. Aorist; the Horn. Infin. is εσσαι, 
 Part, είσας and εσσας {άνεσας), 3 Sing. Mid. είσσατο. On the doubling 
 of the σ, see § 261, D. : λόεσσα (λοΤ-ε-σσα) ~ έλουσα {λούω, I wash), with 
 ε inserted. (Compare § 35, Obsi) 
 
 § 270. Dialects.—1. Homer makes the Aorist of several Stems in 
 λ, μ, v, p with σ : ελσα, from εί'λω, I press ; the defective άπόερσα, I 
 tore away. 
 
 2. In the iEol. dialect, σ is assimilated to preceding λ, μ, v, p ; an 
 example of it in Horn, is ωφελλα for ώφελ-σα — Att. ώφειλα, Pres, όφέλλω, 
 I increase. 
 
 3. The Augment of the Horn. Aor. ί}ειρα, Pres, ε’ίρω, I join, is cpiite 
 irregular. Compare § 275, D. 2. 
 
152 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORXST-STEM. § 271. 
 
 few verbs: κερδαίνω, I gain; όργαίνω, I cause anger ; σημαίνω, I 
 indicate — ίσημΰνα along with εσήμηνα. On the other hand, η 
 instead of ά, in spite of the p, occurs in τετραίνω, I lore, irs- 
 τρηνα. 
 
 § 271. The Weak Aorist is the usual form in all verbs 
 which, according to § 256 , can not form the Strong Aorist, 
 that is, in all derivative verbs and in verbs of the first 
 class; but radical verbs of other classes, especially those 
 with Stems in λ, μ, v, p , also have the Weak Aorist. 
 
 The Weak Aorist Middle, like the Strong one, has only 
 a Middle sense, and is never Passive (§ 477, etc.). 
 
 Y. The Perfect-Stem. 
 
 § 272. Prom the Perfect-Stem are formed the Perfect 
 and Pluperfect Active and Middle, and the third Future 
 (Futurum exactum ), which occurs only in the Middle. 
 
 § 273. The essential characteristic of the Perfect-Stem 
 is the reduplication (compare πέ-ττηγ-α with Lat .pe-pig-i), 
 which generally takes the first place; but in verbs com¬ 
 pounded with prepositions is put, like the Augment, after 
 the preposition (§ 238) : λέ-λο-κα, but εκ-λέ-λυ-κα. 
 
 The reduplication belongs to the Perfect-Stem, and is 
 therefore, unlike the Augment, preserved in all the moods, 
 infinitives, and participles (compare 258, D.). 
 
 In verbs beginning with a consonant, it consists in the 
 initial consonant with ε being placed before the Stem: 
 Stem λ v , Perfect-Stem λ ε λ υ, 1 Sing. Perf. Xnd. Act. 
 λέ-λυ-κα. 
 
 § 273. Dialects.—The reduplication can not, like the Augment, be 
 omitted in the Epic dialect; δεγ-μαι forms an exception (3 Plur. 
 δ'εχ-αται ), though we also find δε-δεγ-μαι, I expect or receive , Part. 
 δε-δεγ-μενος, from Pres, δεχ-ο-μαι (compare § 31G, 34). Some verbs 
 beginning with a vowel do not lengthen it in the Perfect in the New- 
 Ionic dialect. 
 
g 273. 
 
 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 
 
 153 
 
 I. Active. 
 
 
 Present Χύ-ω 
 
 φαίν-ω 
 
 
 Stem Xv 
 
 Pure Stem φ « ν 
 
 
 Perfect Stem ΧεΧν 
 
 π ε φ η ν 
 
 
 Perfect: 1. Weak form 
 
 2. Strong form 
 
 Inclic. 
 
 Χέ-Χϋ-κ-α, I have loosed. 
 
 7 rk -φην-α, I have appeared. 
 
 
 Χε-Χυ-κ-α-ς 
 
 7 τε-φην-α-ς 
 
 
 Χε-Χν-κ-ε-(ν ) 
 
 7 τε-φην-ε(ν) 
 
 
 Χε-Χύ-κ-α -rov 
 
 7 τε-φην-α-τον 
 
 
 Χε-Χν-κ-α-τον 
 
 πε-φην-α-τον 
 
 
 Χε-Χύ-κ-α-μεν 
 
 ττε-φην-α-μεν 
 
 
 Χε-Χΰ-κ-α-τε 
 
 πε-φήν-α-τε 
 
 
 Χε-Χύ-κ-ά-σι(ν ) 
 
 7 τε-φην-ά-σι (ν') 
 
 Subi. 
 
 Χε-Χν-κ-ιο 
 
 ττε-φην-ω 
 
 
 Χε-Χν-κ^-ς 
 
 7 τε-φην -y-g 
 
 
 etc., like tlie Subj. Present, § 232. 
 
 Optat. 
 
 Χε-Χύ-κ-οι- με or ΧεΧνκοΐ7]ν 
 
 πε-φήν-οε-με 01 * πεφηνοίην 
 
 
 etc., like tlie Optat. Present, § 232. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 Χε-Χυ-κ-ε 
 
 7Γ ε-φην-ε 
 
 
 etc., like tlie Imperat. 
 
 ^resent, § 232. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Χε-Χυ-κ-εναε 
 
 πε-φην-εναι 
 
 Partic. 
 
 Μ. Χε-Χυ-κ-ώς 
 
 7Γ ε-φην-ώς 
 
 
 F. Χε-Χυ-κ-υΊα 
 
 τ τε-φην-νία 
 
 
 N. Χε-Χυ-κ-ός 
 
 ττε-φην-ός 
 
 
 Gen. Χε-Χυ-κ-ότ-ος 
 
 7 τε-φην-ότ-ος 
 
 
 (Inflexion, § 147, 2.) 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 ε-Χε-Χύ-κ-ει-ν, I had loosed. 
 
 t -τ τε-φην-ει-ν, I had appeared. 
 
 
 ε-Χε-Χν-κ-εε-ς 
 
 ε-ττε-φην-εε-ς 
 
 
 ε-Χε-Χύ-κ-εε 
 
 ε-ττε-φην-εε 
 
 
 ε-Χε-Χύ-κ-εε-τον 
 
 ε-πε-φην-ει-7 ον 
 
 
 ε-Χε-Χυ-κ-εί-την 
 
 ε-ττε-φην-εί-την 
 
 
 ε-Χε-Χύ-κ-εε-μεν 
 
 ί-7 τε-φην-εε-μεν 
 
 
 ε-Χε-Χΰ-κ-εε-τε 
 
 ε-ιτε-φην-εε-τε 
 
 1_ 
 
 ε-Χε-Χύ-κ-ε-σαν or εΧεΧνκεεσαν 
 
 ί-ττε-φην-ε-σαν or ε~τεφηνεισαν 
 
 G 2 
 
154 
 
 V. THE PEKFECT-STEM. 
 
 274. 
 
 II. Middle and Passive. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Inclic. 
 
 Χε-Χϋ-μαί ) I have loosed 
 for myself,\ or have 
 been loosed. 
 
 Χ'ε-Χν-σαι 
 
 Χε-Χυ-ται 
 
 Χε-Χύ-μεθον 
 
 Χε-Χν-σθον 
 
 Χέ-Χυ-σθον 
 
 Χε-Χν-μεβα 
 
 Χέ-Χν~σ6ε 
 
 Xe-Xv-vTcu 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Χε-Χυ-μεΐ'ος , ώ, y£, y, etc., § 315. 
 
 Optat. 
 
 Χε-Χυ-μένος , εΐην , εΐης, ε’ίη, etc., § 315. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Χε-Χυ-σο 
 
 Χε-Χΰ-σθω 
 
 Χέ-Χν-σθον 
 Χε-Χν-σθωι> 
 
 Χε-Χν-σβε 
 
 Χε-Χν-σθων 01 ’ 
 
 Χε-Χν-σθωσαν 
 
 Infill. 
 
 Χε-Χύ-σ9αι 
 
 Partic. 
 
 Χε-Χν-μενο-ς, η , ο-ν 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 ε-Χε-Χύ-μην , I had 
 loosed for myself 
 or had been loosed. 
 ε-Χέ-Χυ-σο 
 ε-Χε-Χν-το 
 
 ε-Χε-Χΰ-μεθον 
 
 ε-Χέ-Χυ-σθον 
 
 ε-Χε-Χύ-σθην 
 
 ε-Χε-Χό-μεθα 
 
 ε-Χέ-Χυ-σβε 
 
 ε-Χε-Χν-ντο 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Indie, λε-λό-σ-ο-ραι , I shall have been loosed. 
 
 Χε-Χΰ-σ -y, etc., like the usual Fut. Mid. (§ 258). 
 
 Opt. Χε-Χν-σ-οί-μην Inf. Χε-Χν-σ-ε-σθαε Part. Χε-Χυ-σ-ό-μενο-ς 
 
 § 274. The following points, however, are to be ob¬ 
 served : 
 
 1. An aspirate, according to § 53, a, is represented by the 
 
 § 274. Dialects.—Tlie full reduplication, in spite of the initial p , 
 occurs in tlie Ilom. ρε-ρνττω-μ'ενο-ς , soiled ; on the other hand, the Per¬ 
 fects εμ-μορ-α (Pres, μείροραι , class 4, cZ, I obtain ) and εσ-σν-μαι (Pres, 
 σεύω, class 2, 1 hasten ), instead of μ'εμορα , σίσνμαι , are treated like Stems 
 with p. 
 
§ 275. 
 
 Y. THE PERFECT-STEM. 
 
 155 
 
 corresponding tenuis: Stem χώρε, χωρώ, I retreat, icc- 
 χώρη-κα ; Stem θ υ, θύω, I sacrifice, τε-θν-κα ; Stem φ a v, 
 πε-φην-α. 
 
 2. When a verb begins with two consonants, only the 
 first appears in the reduplication, and even this only when 
 it is a mute followed by λ, μ, v, or p : Stem y p a φ, γράφω, 
 I write, yt -γράφ-α ; Stem ττ X a y, πΧησσω, I strike , πε- 
 ττΧηγ-α ’ Stem ττ v v, πνέω, I breathe , πε-πνευ-ζα. 
 
 3. In every other case a Stem beginning with two con¬ 
 sonants takes only ε for its reduplication: Stem κτ εν, 
 κτείνω, I kill, ε-κτον-α ; Stem ζ η r ε, ζητώ, I seek, ε-ζήτη-κα, 
 
 4. Stems beginning with p likewise have only ε, after 
 which the p is doubled : Stem p ι φ, ρίπτω, I throw, ερ-ριφ-α 
 (compare §§ 62, 234). 
 
 Exceptions.—V erbs beginning with γν, yX, and sometimes those 
 beginning with /3λ, have a simple ε for their reduplication. Stem 
 Ινώ, ί-γνω-κα, I have come to know / Stem βΧαστε (βλαστώ, I 
 germinate ), ί-βλάστη-κα. The Stems κτα (κτώμαι, I acquire) and 
 pa, on the other hand, have κ'ε-κτη-μαι and με-μνη-μαι, I remem¬ 
 ber, me-min-i. Compare πε-τττω-κα, I have fallen, and π'ε-πτα-μαι, 
 I am spread out, §§ 319, 3, 327,15. 
 
 Instead of the reduplication ει appears in εΐ-\η<ρ-α, I have taken (§ 
 322, 25); εί-\ηχ-α, I have obtained (§ 322, 27); εί'-λοχα (from λέγω, I 
 gather) ; di -εί-λεγ-μαι (from διαλέγομαι, I converse ); ε’ί-ρη-κα, I have 
 said (§ 327,13); and in the aspirated εί-μαρ-ται , it is fated, Stem 
 μερ. 
 
 § 275. Initial vowels are lengthened as in the case of the 
 
 § 275. Dialects.—1. The Attic reduplication is more frequent in Ho¬ 
 mer, as: άρ-ηρο-ται, from άρόω, I plough / ά\-ά\η-μαι, from άλά-ο-μαι,Ι 
 icander ; άρ-ηρ-α, I am joined, Stem ά p ; υδ-ωδ-α, I smell, ΰζω, compare 
 ocl-or; δπ-ωπ-α , I have seen, from the Stem δ ττ ; and with a v inserted : 
 ψν-ημυ-κα, from the Pres, ήμύ-ω, I droop the head. Herod, has άρ-αίρη- 
 κα, from αΐρέω, I take. 
 
 2. Instead of εΐ-ωθα, Horn, also has t -ωθα, which is the only form 
 used by Herod. From the Stem 1 λ π (originally P ε λ π) t -οΧπ-α I 
 hope ; from Stem έργ (Ρεργ), t-opy-a, I have done. From the Stem 
 h p (Lat. sero), Pres, είρω, 3 Sing. Pluperf. Mid. ΐερτο, Part. Perf. Mid. 
 
156 
 
 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 
 
 276. 
 
 Temporal Augment (§ 235) : Stem 6 ρθ o, 6 ρθω, I raise 
 ϊψ, ωοϋω-κα. The verbs mentioned in § 236 have zi here 
 also : είΧι-γμαι, Pres, ίλίσσω, I roll. 
 
 1. Some Stems beginning with a. ε, or o exceptionally take what is 
 called, the Attic reduplication instead of the mere lengthening of 
 the vowel. This reduplication consists in the initial vowel with 
 its following consonant being repeated, and the vowel of the sec¬ 
 ond syllable being lengthened : Stem a X ι φ (άΧείψω, class 2, 1 
 anoint), άΧ-ηΧι<ρ-α ; Stem άκο, ακούω, I hear , άκ-ήκο-α (for άκηκοΡα, 
 § 35, Obs .), but Mid. ηκονσμαι ; Stem 6 ρνχ (ορύσσω, class 4, I dig) 
 cp -ώρυχ-α ; Stem ay a p (άγείρω, class 4, d, T collect), άγ-ηγερ-κα ; 
 Stem ΐλα (Pres. ίΧαύνω, I drive , § 821, 2), εΧ-ηΧά-κα, Mid. ίΧ-ηΧα- 
 μαι ; Stem εΧεγχ, Pres, ελεγχω, I refute (class 1), Perf. Mid. ίΧ-ηΧεγ- 
 μαι (compare § 28G, Obs.) ; iyp-byop -α, I am aicake, from the Stem 
 tyap, Pres, εγείρω, I awolcen (class 4, d), is irregular. 
 
 2. The Stems άλω ( άΧίσκομαι , § 324, 17,7 am made prisoner), ay 
 {αγννμι, § 319, 13, 1 break), είκ (not used in the Pres., § 317, 7), 
 and ώνε (ωνεομαι, I buy) are likewise irregular; but originally 
 they had an initial consonant (§ 34, D.) : έ-άλω-κα, t-ay-a, i -οικ-α, 
 i -ώνη-μαι ; the Stem d vo i y ( ανοίγω, I open) lias άν-εομγ-α. To 
 these may be added ει-ωθ-α, I am accustomed, from the Stem t Θ , 
 originally Ρεθ (compare §§ 230, 237). 
 
 l. TKe Perfect Active. 
 
 § 276. The terminations of the principal tenses are ap¬ 
 pended to the Perfect-Stem in the Indicative by means of 
 the connecting vowel a. The first person has no personal 
 ending at all; in the third, a is changed into e. The Sub¬ 
 junctive, Optative, and the Imperative (which rarely oc¬ 
 curs) have the vowels of the Present; the Infinitive ends 
 in -ivai (always paroxytone), and the Participle in -ώς, 
 -via, -υς, Gen. -droc (Stem o r, § 188). 
 
 ίερμενος (compare § 270, D., 3). The following two are defective 
 Perfects in Horn.: άν-ηνοθ-ε(ν),ϋ gushes forth ; ίν-η νο9-ε(ν), it is upon. 
 Both also occur as Pluperfects. 
 
 § 276. Dialects.—In the Horn, dialect, the Part. Perf. Act. sometimes 
 has ω instead of ο : τεθνηώτος — Att. τεθνηκότος (from θνήσκω, I die) ; 
 κεκΧηγωτες for κεκΧηγύτες, calling, from Pl’CS. κΧάζω. 
 
278. 
 
 THE PERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 157 
 
 01)8 .—Tlie Subjunctive and Optative are not unfrequently formed 
 periphrastically by tlie Participle with the corresponding forms 
 of ειμί, I am. 
 
 § 277. The Perfect Active is formed in two different 
 ways : 
 
 l. Tiie Strong Perfect (Second Perfect) 
 
 is formed, like the Strong Aorist, directly from the Stem : 
 Stem π pay, Pres. (Class 4, ct) ττράσσω, I do , Perf. ? τί- 
 7 Tpay-a. The Strong Perfect, like the Strong Aorist, oc¬ 
 curs almost exclusively in the case of radical verbs (§ 245), 
 and is generally the older and rarer form. 
 
 § 278. The following; changes of vowels are to be ob- 
 
 u O O 
 
 served in its formation: 
 
 a after p becomes « : Stem κ p a y, Pres, κράζω , I ' 
 
 scream , Perf. κέ-κράγ-α. 
 
 ά otherwise becomes η : Stem πλάγ, Pres, πλήσσω, 
 
 I strike , Perf. ττε-πληγ-α. 
 
 Stem φαν , Pres, φαίνω , I 
 shoio , Perf. πε-φην-α. 
 
 ε becomes o : Stem στρεφ , Pres, στρέφω , 
 
 I turn , Perf. ’ί-στροφ-α. 
 
 i “ ci : Stem λίττ, Pres. λεί7τω, I 
 
 leave , Perf. λε-λοιπ-α. 
 
 v “ ευ : Stem φ υ y, Pres, φεύ^ω, I 
 
 flee , Perf. 7 τέ-φευγ-α. 
 
 Compare 
 § 40 to § 43. 
 
 The change of a into ω is quite isolated: Stem p a y, 
 Perf. tp-pwya, / oayi torn, Pres, pi'iyvv -μι (§ 319, 24), and 
 
 § 277-280. Dialects.—The Horn, dialect is partial to the Strong Per¬ 
 fect ; the aspiration does not occur in it: Stem κοπ ( κόπτω ), κεκοπώς. 
 The Part, πε-φυζ-ότ-ευ, from Stem φνγ (φεύγω), is quite an isolated 
 Horn. form. Horn, forms the Weak Perfect only from Vowel-Stems, 
 and even here he has sometimes strong secondary forms: Stem φν , 
 3 Plur. Perf. Act. πεφύασι — Att. πεφύκάσι , from φύω , I l)eget / Stem κοτε 
 (, κοτέω , I am angry), Part. Perf. κεκοτηώς, § 317, D. In the Fern. Part. 
 Perf. shortenings of vowels often occur: Stem ά p , Masc. Part. Perf. 
 άρ-ηρ-ως, joined, Fem. άρ-άρ-υια', Stem θ α λ (θάλλω, T Noom), Masc. 
 Part. Perf. τε-θηλ-ώς, Fem. τε-θάλ-νΐα. The Perf. τέ-τρηχ-α , Tam restless, 
 Pres, ταράσσω, I disturb, Stem τ [ a ] p a χ, is irregular. 
 
158 
 
 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 
 
 279. 
 
 so also that of ε into ω : Stem ε Θ, Perf. εί-ωθ-α, I am ac¬ 
 customed (§ 275). With the Attic reduplication, and in 
 some other cases also, there is no lengthening of the vowel: 
 Stem opi/y, ορ-ώρΰ'χ-α, Pres, ορύσσω, I dig / γε-γράφ-α, 
 from γράφω, I write. 
 
 § 279. Some Stems ending in the consonants k, y, π, β, 
 change these into the corresponding aspirates, generally 
 without any lengthening of the vowels: 
 
 Stem κ η p v κ, Pres, κηρύσσω, I 'proclaim, Perf. κε-κηρνχ-α. 
 
 ay, “ άγω, I lead, “ ηχα ( άγηοχ-α ). 
 
 κ ο π, u κόπτω, I hew, u κε-κοφ-α. 
 
 βλάβ, u βλάπτω, I hurt, u βε-βλάφ-α. 
 
 In spite of the aspiration, the vowels are changed in 
 κε-κ\οφ-α, Stem κλεττ, Pres, κΧεπτω, I steed j πε-πομφ-α, 
 Stem 7Γ ε μ ττ, Pres, πέμπω, I send / τε-τροφ-α, Stem τ p επ, 
 τρέπω, I turn , which is in form the same as the Perf. of 
 the Stem τρεφ (Pres, τρέφω, I nourish)·, ε/-λοχ-α (com¬ 
 pare § 274), Stem λ ε γ, Pres, λέγω, I gather. 
 
 Ohs. 1.—Few verbs have both forms with and without the aspirate: 
 the Stem π p ay (Pres, πράσσω, I do) has both πε-ι rpay-a (intran¬ 
 sitive, I have fared) and πε-πράχ-α (transitive, I have done ) ; Stem 
 άνοιγ, Pres, ανοίγω, I open, Perf. άν-ειργ-α (intrans., I stand open ) 
 and άν-εορχ-α (transit., I have opened). 
 
 2. The aspirated form of the Perfect, contrary to § 277, occurs also 
 in a number of derivative verbs: Stem ά λ λ a y, άλλάσσω, I 
 change, from άλλος, Perf. ήλλαχ-α. 
 
 § 280. 2 . The Weak Perfect (First Perfect) 
 
 is formed from the Stem by the insertion of κ : Stem λ v, 
 λε'-λυ-κ-α. The Weak Perfect is the more recent form, 
 and with all Vowel-Stems it is the onlv one in use, while 
 it is the more common with Stems ending in r, S, Θ, and 
 those in λ, μ, v, p. 
 
 Ohs .—The only complete Strong Perfect of a Vowel-Stem in Attic 
 prose is άκηκοα (§ 275, 1); but compare § 317. 
 
 § 281. In regard to the vowel, the Weak Perfect follows 
 the σ Future (§§ 260, 261): Stem Spa, $ρασω, Si-Spu -κα ; 
 
283. 
 
 THE PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 159 
 
 Stem τιμά, τιμήσω, τετίμηκα ; Stem ττ X υ, πΧεύσω, πε¬ 
 ιτ\ενκα ; Stem τγ ι θ (πείθω, I persuade), πείσω, πέπεικα. 
 χέω, I pour, Perf. κεχΰκα, is an exception (§ 265). For 
 other exceptions, see § 301. 
 
 Stems in r, S, Θ throw out these consonants before a, 
 without an)' other change : Stem κ ο μ i S, κομίζω, 1 carry , 
 κεκόμικα. 
 
 § 282. The monosyllabic Stems in λ, v, p, having ε in the Stem 
 syllable, change this ε in the "Weak Perf. into «: Stem σ-ελ, 
 σ-ελλω, I send, Perf. i -στάλ-κα ; Stem φθ ε ρ, φθείρω , I destroy, Perf. 
 t -φθαρ-κα. Several in v throw out the r: Stem κριν, κρίνω, 1 
 judge, Perf. κί-κρί-κα ; Stem κλϊν, κλίνω, I incline , Perf. κε-κλΐ-κα ; 
 Stem 7 τλϋν, ττλύνω, I Wash , Perf. πε-ττλΰ-κα ; Stem ?£)/, τείνω , I 
 stretch , Perf. τε-τα-κα. Wherever v is not thrown out before c, it 
 becomes, according to § 51, a nasal y : Stem φ αν, φαίνω, I show, 
 Perf. 7 τε-φαγ-κα. 
 
 Other Stems of this kind, and some in //, admit of metathesis (§ 59): 
 Stem β αλ, βάλΧω, I throw, Perf. βε-β\η-κ-α ; Stem ca μ, κάμνω, I 
 grow tired, Perf κ'ε-κμη-κ-α (§ 321, 9). 
 
 2. The Pluperfect Active. 
 
 § 283. The Pluperfect takes the Augment before the 
 Perfect-Stem ; its terminations are those of the historical 
 tenses. Between the Stem and the termination the diph¬ 
 thong a steps in, which in the 3 Plur. is reduced to ε. 
 
 Ohs .—The 3 Plur. in εισαν is rare and more modem. 
 
 The Temporal Augment of verbs beginning with a vowel 
 is not recognizable, because their Perfect-Stem has already 
 
 § 282. Dialects.—The Horn, με-μβλω-κα for με-μ\ω-κα, from the Stem 
 μ ο λ (Aor. ίμολον, I went), is explained by metathesis. Compare §§51, 
 D., 324,12. 
 
 § 283. Dialects.—The Ionic dialect has the antiquated endings of 
 the Pluperf.: 1 Sing, εα, 2 Sing, εας , 3 Sing. εε(ν), contracted si, siv, 
 or η; the 2 Plur. New-Ion. εα-τ-ε. Horn, trs -θηπ-εο, I was astonished; 
 3 Sing, cscsi —νηκ-ειν, from csi —νεω, I dine. 
 
 i -μ 'εμηκ-ον (Perf. μ 'εμηκα,Ι bleat) and ηνωγον, along with ι)νώγεα (Perf. 
 avcoya, I compel), are formed quite irregularly, according to the mam 
 ner of Imperfects. 
 
160 
 
 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 
 
 284. 
 
 a long vowel: Verbal-Stem ay, ayw, I drive, Perfect- 
 Stem 7 ) χ, The Syllabic Augment is often omit¬ 
 
 ted. The 1 and 3 Sing, in the older Attic dialect have η 
 instead of el and eiv, as έ-ΧεΧνκ-η. 
 
 The formation of the Pluperfect is exactly the same as 
 that of the Perfect, and, like it, it is either strong or weak, 
 and has the vowel long or short, or unchanged. 
 
 § 284. 3 . The Perfect Middle and Passive 
 
 can be formed only in one way, that is, by appending the 
 personal endings of the principal tenses of the Middle, with¬ 
 out any connecting vowel, to the Perfect-Stem, i. e., to the 
 reduplicated Verbal-Stem : Stem λυ, Perf. Mid. Χέ-Χυ-μαι. 
 
 The Infinitive and the Participle always have the accent 
 on the penultima : ΧΕΧνσθαι, ΧεΧυμένος ; Stem* 7 r a 1 S ε v, 
 πεπαι^εύσθαι, from 7 ται^ενω, I educate. 
 
 § 285. The \ r owels are treated in the same way as in the 
 XVeak Perfect: Stem τιμά, τετιμηκα, τετίμημαι ; Stem ττ ΐ θ, 
 πέπεικα, πέπεισμαι ; Stem φ θ ε ρ, έφθαρκα, εφθαρμαι ; Stem 
 β a X, βέβΧη κα, βέβΧημαι. The verbs τρέφω, I nourish , 
 τρέπω, I turn , and στρέφω, I turn , also take a instead of ε : 
 τέ-Θραμ-μαι, τέ-τραμ-μαι, ε-στραμ-μαι. 
 
 § 286. The final Consonants of Consonantal-Stems change 
 according to the general laws of sound (§§ 45-49): 
 
 § 284. Dialects.—In the Horn, dialect, the σ of the 2 Sing. Perf. and 
 Pluperf. Mid. is sometimes thrown out between two vowels: μεμνηαι 
 = μψνησαι ( meministi ), contracted μ'εμν$', so also in the New-Ionic 
 the Imperat. μεμνεο for μέμνησο. 
 
 § 285. Dialects.—The Horn, πε-πρω-ται , Stem 7 τ op (Strong Aorist. 
 t-n-opov , I gave), is explained by metathesis. The following have a 
 short vowel: τ'ετυγμαι , from τεύχω, I prepare, 8 Plur. τετεύχαται ; ττε- 
 ψυγμ&νος, from φεύγω, I flee; εσσνμαι, from σεύω, I hasten ; v instead of 
 ευ : πε-πνν-μαι, from πνέω, § 248. 
 
 § 286. Dialects.—The Θ of the Stem κ ο pv θ ( κορύσσω, I arm) remains 
 unchanged in Homer: κε-κορυθ-μενος. αισχύνω , I put to shame , has 
 ί Ιαχνμμαι. 
 
287. 
 
 161 
 
 THE PERFECT MIDDLE. 
 
 1 . Before ail terminations beginning with μ 
 
 every guttural becomes y : Stem πλεκ, πλέκω, I twist , πέ-πλεγ-μαι; 
 
 “ dental “ σ : Stem π ι Θ, πείθω , / persuade, πε-πείσ-μεθα ; 
 
 ‘ £ labial u μ : Stem y p αφ, γράφω, I write, γε-γραμ-μένος. 
 
 Obs .—When a guttural or labial is preceded by a nasal, the latter 
 is thrown out before μ : Stem κ a μ π, κάμπτω, I bend, κεκαμμαι ; 
 Stem ελεγχ, ελέγχω, I refute, έλέλεγμαι (§ 275, 1). Some Stems 
 in v, by way of exception, do not change the v before μ into σ, 
 but into μ : ώξυμμαι, from οξύνω, I sharpen; those which throw 
 out the v in the Perf. Active do the same here (§ 282): κέκριμαι 
 (compare πέ-φασ-μαι, from the Stem φ ά v) : σπίνοω, I offer a liba¬ 
 tion, Fut. σπείσω, lias εσπεισμαι. 
 
 . Before σ 
 
 every guttural becomes κ, and this with σ becomes ξ : πέ-πλεξαι ; 
 
 “ labial “ π, u u “ ψ : γέ-γραψαι ; 
 
 “ dental is thrown out: πέ-πεισαι. 
 
 o. Before τ 
 
 every guttural becomes κ : πέ-πλεκται ; Stem λεγ, λέ-λεκ-ται ; 
 α labial “ π : γέ-γραπται ; 
 
 u dental (exc. ν') u σ : πέ-πεισ-ται (Stem φαν, πε-φαν-ται). 
 
 4. The σ of σθ after consonants (§ 61) is dropped, and 
 then 
 
 every guttural becomes χ : πέ-πλεχ-Θον for πε-πλεκ-σθον ; 
 
 “ labial “ φ : γέ-γραφ-θε for γε-γραφ-σθε ; 
 
 u dental (exc. v) u σ : πε-πέϊσ-θαι for πε-πειθ-σθαι. 
 
 v, λ, and ρ remain unchanged before the Θ which has 
 arisen from σθ : Stem φαν, πεφάνθαι ; Stem d γ γ ε λ, 
 i)yy{X0ai. 
 
 § 287. The ending νται of the 3 Plur. is irreconcilable 
 with Consonantal-Stems. Sometimes the Ionic αται takes 
 
 § 287. Dialect3.—In the Ion. dialect, the forms αται and ατο for the 
 8 Plur. are common : Horn, has βε-βλη-αται (βάλλω, I throw), πεποτηατο 
 ( ποτάομαι, I flutter), οεύαίαται ( οαίω, I divide), ερχαται, έέρχατο (ε’ιργω, I 
 shut in, § 819, 15) ; in New-Ionic, παρεσκενάδατο ( παρασκευάζω, I pre¬ 
 pare), κεκοσμέαται ( κοσμέω, I adorn). Three Homeric forms insert δ : 
 ερρά-δ-αται (ραίνω, I besprillkle), άκηχέ-δ-ατο (άχννμαι, I am grieved), 
 έλί]λά-δ-ατο (Stem ελα, ελαύνω, I drive)’, έρηρέδαται, from έρείδω, I Sltgr 
 port, is irregular. 
 
162 
 
 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 
 
 288. 
 
 its place (§ 226, D.), before which y, κ, β, and π are aspi¬ 
 rated : ye-yptKji-ciTcu, τε-τάγ-αταί (Stem ray, τάσσω, I ar¬ 
 range), τε-τρίφ-αται (Stem τριβ, τρίβω, I rub). But the 
 common practice is to use the periphrasis by means of the 
 Participle with ύ-σί(ν) : γεγ ραμμένοι άσίν. Compare Lat. 
 scripti sunt and § 276, Obs. 
 
 The following paradigms supply examples of the above- 
 mentioned changes. 
 
 o 
 
 Perfect Middle and Passive. 
 
 Guttural Stems. 
 
 Dental Stems. 
 
 Labial Stems. 
 
 πέ-πλεγ-μαι 
 
 7Γ6-7 τεισ-μαι 
 
 ■γέ-γραμ-μαι 
 
 πέ-πλεξαι 
 
 πέ-πεί σαι 
 
 γέ-γραψαι 
 
 πέ-πλεκ-ται 
 
 πέ-πεισ-ται 
 
 γέ-γραπ-ταί 
 
 πε-πλέγ-μεθα 
 
 πε-πείσ-μεθα 
 
 -γε-γράμ-μεθα 
 
 πέ-πλεχ-θε 
 
 πέ-πεισ-θε 
 
 γέ-γραφ-θε 
 
 πε-πλεγ-μένοι ε’σί 
 
 πε-πεισ-μένοι είσί 
 
 γε-γραμ-μένοί είσί 
 
 § 288. After Vowel-Stems, σ is frequently inserted before tlie ter¬ 
 minations beginning with μ and r, but more especially when the 
 Stems have the vowel short: Stem r ε λ ε, τελώ, I complete, Pcrf. 
 τε-τ'ε\ε-σ-μαι ; Stem σπά, σπάω, / draw , 3 Sing. ε-σπα-σ-ται ', blit 
 it also occurs in not a few Stems with long vowels and diph¬ 
 thongs : άκούω, I hecir,yi:ovTpaL ’ κελεύω, I order ; κυλίω, I roll; λεύω, 
 I stone to death; ζύω, I polish ; παίω,Ι strike; πλέω (πέπλενσται), 
 I sail; πρίω,Ι saw; σείω, I shake; χρίω, I anoint; ψαύω, I touch. 
 Others fluctuate : κλείω or κλ%ω, I close; κρούω, I push. 
 
 § 289. The Subjunctive and Optative are generally formed by peri¬ 
 phrasis with the Participle and the corresponding forms of είμί. 
 (Compare Lat. solutus sim, essem.) These moods are but rarely 
 evolved out of Vowel-Stems themselves: κτάομαι, I acquire , κέ~ 
 κτη-μαι , Sllbj. κε-κτώ-μαι, κε -Kry, κέ-κτη-ται, Opt. κε-κτφ-μην (from 
 κε-κταοί-μην), κε-κτφ-το ; besides these, wo also have κεκτφμην , yo, 
 yro. 
 
 § 289. Dialects.—The Horn. Subj. from Stem μ να ( μέμνημαι , memini), 
 1 Plur. μεμνώμεθα (Ncw-Ion. μεμνεώμεθα ), Opt. με μνήμην ; 3 Sing, λελύτο, 
 3 Plur. λελνντο, instead of λελυ-ι-το, λελυ-ι-ντο, § 28. 
 
§ 291. 
 
 THE FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 163 
 
 § 290. 4. The Pluperfect Middle and Passive 
 
 differs in every verb from the corresponding Perfect only 
 by the addition of the Augment and the personal endings, 
 which are those of the historical tenses. Respecting the 
 3 Plur. in ντο and aro, and their places being supplied by 
 periphrasis, see § 287, which is here applicable also. 
 
 § 291. 5. The Future Perfect or Futurum Fxactum 
 
 adds σ to the Perfect-Stem with the Inflexion of the Fu¬ 
 ture-Middle ; the σ produces the same changes in the pre¬ 
 ceding consonants as in the ordinary Future Middle: πε- 
 πράζεταί (Stem π p a y, ττράσσω, I do\ it will have been 
 done j ysypci\p etch (Stem y p a ypcnpir, I write ) ? it will 
 have teen written. 
 
 There are two isolated Future Perfects with Active 
 endings : ίστηζω (§ 311), A shall stand , and τεθνηξ,ω (§ 324, 
 4), I shall he dead , from the Perf. 'Ιστηκα, τίθνηκα. 
 
 Otherwise its place in the Active is supplied by the Part, 
 of the Perf. with the Fut. of upt, I am (ϊσομαι) : λελνκως 
 ϊσομαι, I shall have loosed (solvero). 
 
 
 
164 
 
 VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 
 
 292. 
 
 VI. The Strong Passive Stem. 
 
 § 292. From the Strong Passive Stem are formed the 
 Strong or Second Aorist , and the Strong or Second Future 
 Passive. 
 
 Present: φαίνω , Pure Stem φάν, Strong Passive Stem φάνε. 
 
 1. Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 ε-φάνη-ν , I ap¬ 
 peared, 
 ε-φάνη-ς 
 ε-φάνη 
 ε-φάνη-τον 
 ε-φανη-την 
 ε-φάνη-μεν 
 ε-φάνη-τε 
 ε-φάνη-σαν 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 φανώ 
 
 φανή-ς 
 
 φανι~) 
 
 φανη-τον 
 
 φανη-τον 
 
 φανώ-μεν 
 
 φανη-τε 
 
 φανώ-σι(ν) 
 
 Optative. 
 
 φανείη-ν 
 
 φανείη-ς 
 
 φανείη 
 
 φανείη-τον 01’ φανεΧτον 
 φανειη-την ΟΓ φανείτην 
 φανείη-μεν Or φανεΧμεν 
 φανείη-τε 01' φανεΧτε 
 φανείη-σαν or φανεΧεν 
 
 
 φάνη-θί 
 
 Inf. 
 
 φανη-ναι 
 
 Part. 
 
 φανείς , φανεΧσα , φανεν 
 
 O) 
 
 φανη-τω 
 
 
 
 
 Gen. φανε-ντ-ος 
 
 • rH 
 
 φάνη-τον 
 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 <X> 
 
 φανη-των 
 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 s 
 
 φάνη-τε 
 
 
 
 
 
 1—1 
 
 φανη-τωσαν 01’ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 φανε-ντων 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. Strong or Second Future Passive. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Part. 
 
 φανη-σομαι 
 φανη-σοίμην 
 φανή-σεσθαι 
 φανη-σύμενος , η , ον . 
 
 > etc., the same as the Future Middle. 
 
 § 293. The personal endings of the Aorist Passive are 
 of an Active nature, those of the Future Passive of the 
 nature of the Middle. They are appended, as in the Sec- 
 
 § 293. Dialects.—The Horn, dialect has the shorter ending εν in the 
 3 Plur. Ind. Aor. Pass.: ε-φάνε-ν or φάνε-ν ; τράφε-ν = ετράφησαν , from 
 τρέφω. The Ion. dialect leaves the ε in the Subj. uncontracted : μ'ίγέ-ω 
 (μίσγω, I mix). Homer often lengthens the ε in the Subj., sometimes 
 to fj : δάμεί-ω — δαμώ, Stem δ ά μ, Pres, δάμνημι, I tame / and some- 
 
295. 
 
 VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 
 
 165 
 
 oriel Principal Conjugation (§ 302), to the Stem without a 
 connecting vowel, and the ε of the Stem is lengthened in 
 the Indicative and Imperative to η. In the Subjunctive, 
 the ε is contracted with the vowels of the Subjunctive: 
 φανέ-ω, φανώ ; in the Optative, the ε, combined with the 
 modal sign « 7 , becomes ειη : φανε-ίη-ν. The Infinitive al¬ 
 ways has the circumflex on the penultima, and the Par¬ 
 ticiple in the Nom. Sing. Masc. the acute on the last. 
 
 § 294. The Strong Passive Stem, just like the Strong 
 Aorist Active and Middle (§ 256), is formed very rarely 
 from derivative Stems; but it occurs in verbs of all class¬ 
 es, even the first (§ 247), ε being added to the pure Verbal- 
 Stem : Pres, ράπτ-ω (class 3 ,1 sew), Pure Stem p a φ, 
 Strong Passive Stem ραφε, Aor. Pass. ερραφη-ν ; σφάττω 
 (class 4 ,1 slaughter), Pure Stem σ φ ay, Strong Passive 
 Stem σ φ a y ε, Aor. Pass, εσφάγη-ν, Fut. Pass, σφάγη-σομαι ; 
 Pres. Ύράφ-ω (class 1 ), Strong Pass. Stem γράφε, Aor. 
 Pass, εγράφη-ν. The Strong Passive Aor. occurs only in 
 such verbs as have no Strong Active Aorist. The only 
 exception is τρέπω, I turn , Aor. Act. ε-τραπ-ο-ν , Pass. 
 ε-τράπη-ν. 
 
 Ohs. —By way of exception, ήλλάγην is formed from tlie derivative 
 Stem ά λ λ a γ, Pres, άλλάσσω, I change. 
 
 § 295. As in the Strong Aorist Active (§ 257), the ε is 
 sometimes changed into a : κ\επ-τ-ω, I steal, ε-κ\άπη-ν ; 
 στελλω, I send, ε-στά\η-ν ; τρεφ-ω, I nourish, ε-τράφη-ν ; 
 πλεκ-ω, I twist, ε-πλεκη-ν and ε-πΧάκη-ν ; πΧησσω, I strike, 
 
 times to η : <pavii-y — (pavg. In the Dual and Plur., tlie modal vowel 
 is shortened where this lengthening of the ε occurs: δαμεί-ετε (for 
 δαμεητε , Att. ύαμήτε). In the Infinitive we find the Horn, μεναι or μεν : 
 μιγημεναι , δαμημεν. 
 
 § 295. Dialects. — Homer here also employs metathesis (§ 59), as in 
 the Strong Aor. Act. and Mid. (§ 357, D.): Pres, τέρπ-ω , I delight , Aor. 
 Pass, ε-τάρπη-ν, Subj. τράττε-ω, 1 Plur. τράττείομεν ( gaudeamus ), Inf. 
 τραπή-μεναι. 
 
166 
 
 VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM. 
 
 296. 
 
 has ί-πΧη'γη-ν, π\ηy{^-σoμaί,hut in composition εζ-ε-7τ\ά-γη-ν, 
 £κ-π\α~γή-σομαι ; the Pure Stem of verbs of the second 
 class here reappears: σι'ιπ-ω (Stem σαπ, I corrupt), 
 έ-σάπη-ν ; τήκ-ω (Stem τακ,Ι T/ielt), έ-τάκη-ν ; ρέω (Stem 
 p v, I flow), έ-ρρυη-ν, ρυη-σομαι. 
 
 VII. The Weak Passive Stem. 
 
 § 296. From the Weak Passive Stem are formed the 
 Weak or First Aorist and the Weak or First Future 
 Passive. 
 
 Pres. Χύω, Stem λ?;, Weak Passive Stem λνθε. 
 
 1. Weak or First Aorist Passive. 
 
 Ind. ί-Χύθη-ν, I 
 was loosed. 
 ε-Χύ9η-ς 
 
 etc., lik 
 
 Subj. λυθώ 
 
 Χνθ?)-ς 
 
 e the Strong or .Sec 
 
 Opt. Χνθείη-ν 
 
 Χνθείη-ς 
 
 ond Aorist Passive. 
 
 Imp. Χύ9η-τι 
 Χνθη-τω 
 
 etc., lik 
 
 Inf. Xv9i)-vcu 
 
 e the Strong or Sec 
 
 Part. Χνθεί-ς, Χνθεϊσα, Χνθεν 
 Gen. Χνθεντ-ος 
 ond Aorist Passive. 
 
 2. Weah or First Future Passive. 
 
 Ind. ΧνΘι)-σομαι. 
 
 Opt. Χνθη-σοίμην 
 
 Inf. Χνθη-σεσθαι. 
 
 Part. Χνθη-σόμενο-ς, η, o-v 
 
 § 297. The inflexion of the Weak Passive Stem is en¬ 
 tirely like that of the Strong. Respecting the r of Χυθη-τι, 
 instead of λνθη-Θι, see § 53, c. 
 
 § 296. Dialects.—Tlie Weak Fut. Pass, is wanting in the Homeric 
 dialect. 
 
 § 297. Dialects.—Respecting the inflexion, see § 293, D. 
 
 § 298. Dialects.—The Horn, dialect after some Vowel-Stems inserts 
 v before θ : αμπνν-ν-θη (Stem τενν, πνέω, I breathe ), ιδρΰ-ν-θη (Ιδρύω, 
 I set firm), and changes the ε of the Stem (pa εν ( φαείνω , φαίνω, I maJce 
 appear) into α, φαάνθην. 
 
299. 
 
 VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM. 
 
 167 
 
 § 298. The Weak Passive Stem is formed from the 
 Verbal-Stem by appending the syllable θε. Before this 
 syllable the vowels of Vowel-Stems are lengthened as in 
 the Future, the Weak Aorist Active, and the Perfect: 
 τι μ a , ετιμηθην ; πείρα, επειράθην, I tried. As to the ex¬ 
 ceptions, see § 301. As in the Perfect Middle, σ is inserted 
 before Θ, especially after short vowels, but often also after 
 long ones : ε-τεΧε-σ-θην, from τεΧεω, I complete / ε-κελεύ-σ- 
 θην, from κελεύω,/ order / and this is the case in the verbs 
 mentioned in § 288, and especially in γελάω, I laugh , εγε- 
 Χάσθην ; 3ράω, I do , ε^ράσθην ; παύω, I cause to cease , 
 επαύσθην , but also επαύθην. The Aor. Passive of σώζω, 
 I save , on the other hand, is formed from the shorter Stem 
 σω without the σ : εσώθην. 
 
 As in the Weak Perfect Active and the Perfect Middle, 
 the ε before λ, v, p is sometimes changed into a : Stem τ εν 
 (τείνω, I stretch), ε-τάθη-ν (compare § 282). 
 
 The changes of the consonants before 0 are explained 
 by the laws of sound (§ 45): Stem π p ay, πρασσω, I do, 
 ε-πράχ-θη-ν ; Stem \p ε v S, ψευ^ω, I deceive , ε-ψευσ-Θη-ν ; 
 Stem π ε μ π, πέμπω, 1 send , ε-πεμφ-θη-ν. Respecting 
 εθρεφθην (Pres, τρέφω), εθάφθην (Pres, θάπτω), see § 54, 
 Ohs ., and respecting ετεθην, ετύθην (Stems Θ ε, θν), see 
 § 53, 1). 
 
 § 299. The Weak Aorist Passive and the Weak Future 
 Passive are, on the whole, more common than the Strong, 
 and in the case of derivative verbs, as of nearly all Vowel- 
 Stems, they are the only customary forms of the Aorist 
 and Future Passive. 
 
 There are some primitive verbs of which both Passive 
 Stems are in use: Stem βΧαβ, Pres. βΧάπτω, I hurt, Aor. 
 Pass. εβΧάβην and εβΧάφθην. 
 
168 
 
 VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 300. 
 
 Verbal Adjectives. 
 
 § 300. The Verbal Adjectives are a kind of Passive Par¬ 
 ticiples. 
 
 Pres. λύω, Stem λ v, 1. λυ τός , ι'ι , ον, loosed , capable of 
 
 being loosed. 
 
 2. λυ-τιο-ς, α, ον, to be loosened , 
 solvendu-s, a , wm. 
 
 The First Verbal Adjective is formed by means of the 
 syllable ro (Nom. το-ς, τη, ro-v) from the Verbal-Stem, and 
 has the meaning either of a Participle Perfect Passive, 
 \v-T0-g=solu-tu-s, or of possibility, capable of being loos¬ 
 ened. 
 
 The Second Verbal Adjective is formed by means of 
 the syllable τέο (Nona. τίο-ς, τε'α, τε'ο-ν), which is never con¬ 
 tracted, from the Verbal-Stem, and has the meaning of 
 necessity, like the Latin gerundive : λυ-τίο-ς, one who is 
 to be loosened / λυτίον Ιστί, loosening must take place, 
 solvendum est. 
 
 The vowels preceding the τ are in general treated ex¬ 
 actly in the same manner as in the Weak Passive Aorist; 
 σ is inserted in the same cases as in the Aor. Pass. : τελε- 
 σ-τος, κελευ-σ-τε'ον. The consonants before r are treated in 
 accordance with the laws of sound: τ τρακ-τό-ς (Stem π pay. 
 Pres, πράσσω) ; γραττ-το-ς^γρα^ω); ιζομισ-τίο-ν( Stem κομι$, 
 κομίζω, I carry). 
 
 Verbs which leave their Stern Vowel short in the forma¬ 
 tion of their Tenses. 
 
 § 301. The Vowel remains short throughout in: 
 
 Z-J ZD 
 
 § 300. Dialects.— οοα-τύ-ς is derived by metathesis (§ 59) from the 
 Stem δερ (δερω, I flay). 
 
 % 301. Dialects.—The Horn, dialect εράω,ΙΙονβ , Aor. Mid. ήρασάμην ; 
 άρκοίο , I ward op ηρκεσα ; κορ’εω, I satisfy , εκόρεσα ; κοτεω, I grudge, 
 κοτίσσατο ; ερύω , I draw , είρυσα. On tlie usual doubling of the σ after 
 short vowels ( εράσσατο , ερνσσατο ), see § 201, D. 
 
301. 
 
 VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. 
 
 169 
 
 γελάω, 
 
 I laugh , 
 
 Flit. γεΧάσομαι, 
 
 Aor. Act. ε γέλασα, 
 
 Aor. Pass. εγεΧάσΟην, 
 Flit. Pass. γεΧασθησομαι, 
 
 θλάω, 
 
 / squeeze , 
 
 Fut. ΘΧάσω, 
 
 Aor. Act. εθΧάσα, 
 
 Verb. Adj. ΘΧαστός. 
 
 κλάω, 
 
 I break, 
 
 Flit. κΧάσω, 
 
 Aor. Pass. εκΧάσθην, 
 Perf. Mid. κέκΧασμαι. 
 
 σπάω, 
 
 I draw, 
 
 Flit, σπάσω , 
 
 Aor. Pass. 
 Perf. Mid. 
 
 Aor. Act. έσπασα, 
 εσπάσθην, Perf. Act. εσπάκα, 
 εσπασμαι, Verb. Adj. σπαστός 
 
 χαλάω, 
 
 I slacken, 
 
 Flit, χαλάσω, 
 
 Aor. Pass. έχαΧάσθην. 
 
 αίδέομαι , 
 
 I dread, 
 
 Flit, αίδέσομαι , 
 
 Aor. Pass. ? ι }δέσθ7]ν (328) 
 Perf. ηδεσμαι. 
 
 άκεομαι , 
 
 I heal, 
 
 Flit, άκέσομαι, 
 
 Aor. ήκεσάμην. 
 
 άλεω, 
 
 I grind, 
 
 Fut. άΧέσω (ώ), 
 
 Perf. Act. άΧηΧεκα, 
 
 Perf. Mid. άΧηΧεσμαι. 
 
 άρκέω, 
 
 I satisfy, 
 
 Flit, άρκέσω, 
 
 Aor. Act. ηρκεσα. 
 
 έμέω, 
 
 I vomit, 
 
 
 Aor. Act. η μέσα. 
 
 ζέω, 
 
 I seethe, 
 
 Flit, ζέσω, 
 
 Aor. Act. εζεσα , 
 
 Verb. Adj. ζεστός. 
 
 ζέω, 
 
 I scrape, 
 
 Fut. ζέσω, 
 
 Verb. Adj. ζεστός. 
 
 τελέω, 
 
 I finish, 
 
 Flit. τεΧέσω (ώ), 
 
 Aor. Act. ετέΧεσα, 
 
 Aor. Pass. ετεΧέσθη v, 
 Verb. Aclj. τεΧεστός, 
 Perf. Act. τετέλεκα, 
 Perf. Mid τετέΧεσμαι. 
 
 άρόω, 
 
 I plow, 
 
 Fut. άρόσω, 
 
 Aor. Act. ν,ροσα, 
 Aor. Pass, ήρόθην. 
 
 άρυω, 
 
 I draw, 
 
 Flit, άρύσω, 
 
 Aor. Act. Ί/ρυσα. 
 
 addit. form όρύτω 
 
 
 
 εΧκύω, 
 
 I draw, 
 
 Flit. Pass. έΧκνσθήσομαι , 
 
 Aor. Act. είΧκνσα. 
 Perf. Act. είΧκΰκα, 
 Perf. Mid. ε'ίΧκνσμαι. 
 
 πτνω, 
 
 I spit , 
 
 
 Aor. Act. έπτυσα. 
 Verb. Adj. πτνστός. 
 
 2. The vowel is long in the Weak Aor. Act., and short 
 in the Perf., the Aor. Pass., and the Verbal Adjective in 
 
 δέω, I hind, Flit. Λ)σω, Aor. Act. εδησα, 
 
 Perf. Act. δέδεκα, 
 
 Aor. Pass, εδέθην, 
 
 Verb. Adj. δετός, 
 
 Perf. Mid. δεδεμαι , 
 
 3 Flit, δεδήσομαι. 
 
 H 
 
VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. 
 
 § 302. 
 
 170 
 
 Θύω, I sacrifice, Fut. Θύσω, Aor. Act. εθνσα, 
 
 Perf. Act. τ'εθύκα, Aor. Pass, ετυθην, 
 Perf. Mid. τ'εθύμαι. 
 
 λύω, I loose , Fut. λόσω, Aor. Act. ελνσα, 
 
 Perf. Act. λελύκα, Aor. Pass. ΙλνΘην , 
 Verb. Adj. λυτός, Perf. Micl. λελϋμαι. 
 
 3 . The Vowel is short in the Future and Weak Aorist 
 Active and Middle, but long in the Perfect, Aorist Pas¬ 
 sive, and Verbal Adjective of καλέω,Ι call, καλέσω, κέκληκα, 
 εκληθην, κλητός ; αινεω , IJprctise, has αινεσω , μνεκα, τ}νεθην , 
 ί άνετος , but Perf. Mid. μνημαι. 
 
 4. ποθέω, I long for y πονεω , I toil y and δύω, I sink, 
 fluctuate between the short and long vowels: ποθεσομαι 
 and ποθήσω ; πονέσω , επονησάμην ; δύσω, Aor. Pass, ετυθην. 
 
 Chap. XI. — Second Principal Conjugation, 
 
 or Verbs in μι. 
 
 Preliminary Observations. 
 
 § 302. The Second Principal Conjugation differs from 
 the First only in the inflexion of the Present and Strong 
 Aorist-Stems, and in the case of a few verbs also in the 
 Perfect and Pluperfect Active. 
 
 The special terminations of this conjugation are: 
 
 1 . The 1 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient μι : ψη-μί, Ϊ say 
 (§ 226). 
 
 2. The 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient σι(ν ) (for n) : 
 
 <ρησί(ν) (§ 226). 
 
 3. The 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. inserts the vowel a before the termi- 
 
 § 302. Dialects.—The Horn, dialect often has the ending σθα in the 
 2 Sing. Ind. Act.: τίθη-σθα, thou jouttest; ε-φη-σθα’ and μεναι or μεν 
 instead of ναι in the Inf : ψά-μεναι, ψά-μεν ; and a short v instead of 
 the σαν of the 3 Plur. of the Preterite: ε-ψά-ν. 
 
 The Horn, dialect sometimes lengthens the Stem-vowel in the Subj. 
 and shortens the Modal-vowel as in the Aor. Pass. (§ 298): ' ίομεν — 
 'ίωμεν ( eamus ). 
 
8 304. 
 
 SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION. 
 
 171 
 
 nation σι (for vn) (§ 226, compare Dialects), and this a is lengthened 
 by compensation (ί-άσι( v), they go , from the Stem f), and unites with 
 the a of the Stem : φΰσί(ν). 
 
 4. In the Optative, ιη (ιε, ι), the Modal-sign attaches itself directly 
 to the Stem: φα-ίη-ν ; compare § 293. 
 
 5. The 2 Sing. Imperat. has the ending θι : φά-θι. '( c ^ 9f|9 
 
 6. The Infinit. has>the ending ναι : φά-ναι. ( om P are - 
 
 7. The 3 Plur. of the Preterite has σαν : t -φά-σαν (3 Plur. Imperf.). 
 
 All terminations of these two tenses are appended to 
 the Stem without a connecting xov:el: φα-μεν (compare 
 τιμά-ο-μεν), φά-τω (compare πμα-ε-τω ) ; in the Participle, 
 also, ντ attaches itself directly to the Stem: φ a-v r, of 
 which the Xom. is formed by the addition of σ : φας ; 
 Stem So, δούς (compare § 147, l). In the Subjunctive 
 alone the final vowels of the Stems are contracted with 
 the long connecting vowels, as in the ordinary contracted 
 verbs (§ 243) : φά-ω, φω ; τι-θε-ω, τι-θώ ; co -ω-μαι, Σωμαι. 
 
 § 303. In the vowel-Stems of this conjugation a change 
 of cjuantity takes place in such a manner that vowels in 
 themselves short are lengthened in the Singular Indicative 
 Active, a and ε becoming η , ο ω, and υ v : φη-μί, 1 say, 
 Plur. φα-μεν, ε-φη-ν , Dual ε-φα-τον ; [ ε-θη-ν , I JjlacecP , 
 Plur. ε-θε-μεν ; δ είκνΰ-μι , I show, Plur. οείκνυ-μεν. 
 
 Obs . — Those forms which always have the vowel long are specially 
 noticed below. 
 
 § 304. All verbs in μι are divided into 2 classes: 
 
 1. Those which in the Present join their terminations 
 directly to the Stem: φη-μί ; 
 
 2 . Those which form the Present-Stem by adding w to 
 the Pure Stem: $είκ-νϋ-μι, I shore , Pure Stem δ ε ι κ, Pres¬ 
 ent-Stem δ ε ι κ v υ. 
 
172 
 
 IRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 305. 
 
 I. First Class of Verbs in μι. 
 
 §§ 305 and 306. The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs 
 are inserted on p. 124, fol. sqq. 
 
 § 307. Some few forms of the Verbs in μι are formed 
 
 §§ 805, 306. Dialects.—The following are Ionic secondary forms, 
 those inclosed in brackets being the New-Ionic. 
 
 Active. 
 
 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. τί-θη-σθα δι-δοΐ-σθα, also δι-δοϊ-ς 
 
 8 “ “ “ τι-θεΐ 
 
 ?-> 
 
 Ο 
 
 I 
 
 [ί-σΓςΖ] 
 
 3 Plur. “ u τι-θέϊσι(ν) 
 
 ΰί -δουσιζν) 
 
 [ε-στέ-ασ ι(ν)] 
 
 also (7 τρο)θίονσι(ν) 
 
 2 Sing. Pres. Imperat. 
 
 δί-δω-θι 
 
 (καθ)-ί-στα 
 
 Inf. Pres. τι-θη-μεναι 
 
 ΰε-δό-μεν 
 
 
 Imperf. 1 Sing. [, ί-τί-θε-α ] 
 
 δε-δου-ναε 
 
 
 3 “ [l -τί-θε-ε] 
 
 
 [Ί-στα] 
 
 Middle. 
 
 
 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. [ τι-θε-αται 
 
 δε-δό-αταε 
 
 \-στε-αται\ 
 
 3 “ Imperf. “ 
 
 
 [ε-στε-ατο] 
 
 Pres. Part. τε-Θη-μενος 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 2 Aor. Ind. 3 Plur. 
 
 
 ft SJ 
 
 εσταν 
 
 “ Subj. 1 Sing, θείω [θεω] 
 
 “ “ 2 “ θεί ν ς or θηγς 
 
 
 εστάσαν 
 
 στήφς 
 
 “ “3 “ Θεί ν 
 
 δώσι(ν) ΟΓ 
 
 
 “ “ 2 D. 
 
 δώησε(ν) 
 
 στήετον (§ 302, D.) 
 
 “ “ 1 Plur. θίωμεν or 
 
 δώομεν 
 
 στεωμεν ΟΓ 
 
 θείομεν 
 
 
 στείομεν 
 
 u α g α 
 
 δώωσεζν') 
 
 [στέωσε] 
 
 u Inf. Θέμεναι , θέμεν 
 
 δόμεναε , δΰμεν 
 
 στημεναι 
 
 Middle. 
 
 “ Ind. εθεο, εθευ (§ 37, D., 1) 
 
 [Herod, προςΟί/καντο] 
 u Sllbj. [ θεώμαι ] θείομαι 
 
 “ Imper. θέο } θεΐ> . 
 
§ 308. 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 173 
 
 after the First Principal Conjugation, as, e. g ., the 2 Sing. 
 Imnerf. ετίθεις, the 3 Sing, ετίθει, as if from the Stem τ ιθ ε. 
 In the Imperf., the forms εδ/δουν, εδ/δους, εδ/δου are the 
 only ones in use from the Stem S iS o ; they are formed 
 in the same manner as those of contracted verbs (§ 243). 
 Other similar forms will be noticed in treating of the sep¬ 
 arate verbs. 
 
 In the 3 Plur. Pres. Inu. contraction is sometimes em-‘ 
 ployed : τιθείσι, SiSovai. 
 
 In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Pres. Act. the real ending 6l is 
 dropped, and the Stem-vowel is lengthened to compensate 
 for it: δ/δου for δ/δ οθι. 
 
 In the same person of the Aorist after a short vowel i 
 only is dropped, and the remaining 6, according to § 67, is 
 changed to ς : δο-0ί, δος, but στη-Οι, which only in com 
 pounds sometimes appears as στα, e. g., κατάστα. 
 
 In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Present and Imperfect the 
 σ between the two vowels is preserved: τίθε-σαι, τίθε-σο, 
 ετίθε-σο ; only the 2 Sing, of the Subj. is treated entirely 
 like the contracted verbs of the First Principal Conjuga¬ 
 tion. In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Strong Aorist, on the 
 other hand, the σ is thrown out, which gives rise to a con¬ 
 traction : ε-θε-σο, ε-θε-ο , ε-θου ; Imper. 6ε-σο , 6ε-ο, θου. 
 
 Obs. — The forms of the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. compounded with 
 monosyllabic prepositions, after contraction, throw the accent as 
 a circumflex upon the last syllable: προ-θον ; but Homer has 
 σνν-θεο and περί-θου. 
 
 § 308. The three verbs conjugated above (p. 124) distin¬ 
 guish the Present-Stem from the Pure Stem by redupli¬ 
 cation, that is, the initial consonant with i is prefixed be¬ 
 fore the Stem: δο, δίδο; θ ε, τ ι θ ε (§ 53 h ) ; {-στα for 
 σι-στα, according to § 60, I? (compare Latin si-sto). In 
 like manner, the Stem χρα in the Pres, becomes κι-χρα 
 (κί-χρη-μι, I lend)', 7 τλα and tt p a, with the insertion of 
 a nasal, become 7r ι-μ -ir λ ο, ττ ι-μ-ττ ρ α (ττίμττΧημι, I fill ; 
 ττίμττρημι, I l)uni) ; but συμ-Ίτί-ττΧη-μι, εμ-ττί-ττΧψμι ; the 
 
174 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IX μι. § 309. 
 
 Stem ε becomes ί-η-μι, I send; and, with the reduplication 
 within the Stem itself, ova becomes ο-νί-νη-μι , I benefit. 
 
 § 809. The Deponents δύναμαι, I can ; επίσταμαι, I understand ; κρέ¬ 
 μαμαι, I Jiang; together with the Aorists ίπριάμην,Ι bought; ώνη- 
 μην, 1 benefited, withdraw the accent, even in the Subjunctive 
 and Optative, as far as possible from the end : δύνωμαι, ίπίσταιντο 
 (compare ίστώμαι , ίσταϊντο). 
 
 Other peculiarities of verbs of this class are : 
 
 § 310. The three Stems θε {τίθημι), So (δίδω /zt), and t 
 (Ίημι) form an irregular Weak Aorist in κα : εθηκα, εδωκα, 
 ήκα, but in the Middle we find only ηκάμην. In the Sing, 
 of the Indicative the Active forms are customary instead 
 of those of the Strong Aorist, but in the Dual and Plural 
 of the Indicative they are rare. The other moods and the 
 Participles have the strong forms exclusively. 
 
 The really customary forms of the Aorist, therefore, are 
 these: 
 
 Inch Subj. θώ 
 
 εθηκα Opt. θείην 
 
 έθηκας Imp. θες 
 
 έθηκε(ν ) Inf. θεΊναι 
 
 έθετον Part. 6cig 
 
 εθετην 
 
 έθεμεν (seldom εθι)καμεν) 
 έθετε ( “ εθηκατέ) 
 
 εθεσαν ( u έθηκαν ). 
 
 § 311. 2. The rough breathing instead of the σ of the 
 Stem στα is also used in the Perf. (§ 60, b): ε-στη-κα for 
 σε-στη-κα. On the shorter forms, εσταμεν , etc., see § 317, 4. 
 εστηζω, I shall stand is a Third Future Active. The Per¬ 
 fects of θ ε and ε are τεθεικα , είκα ; the same vowel also re¬ 
 mains in the Perf. Mid. τεθειμαι , είμαι. The Stems δ o and 
 στα leave their vowel short in the Perf. Mid. and Aor. 
 
 Mid. εθέμην 
 Sllbj. θώμαι 
 etc. 
 
 § 310. Eialects.—From tlie Stem ίο Horn, lias sometimes Flit, δι- 
 δώ-σω instead of δώσω. 
 
312. 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 m 
 
 Pass., and Θ ε in the Aor. Pass.: cd-Do-pai, ε3υθην, έστάθην, 
 ετέθην, τεθησομαι. On the meaning of the different forms 
 of Ίστημι, see § 329, 1. 
 
 § 312. To the First Class of the Verbs in μι there also 
 belong: 
 
 A) Verbs whose Stem ends in « (compare Ίστημι): 
 
 1. η-μι (compare Lat. d-io), I say, only in the Imperf. ην, 
 3 Sing, η (compare § 213, Obsi). 
 
 2. b -νί-νη-μι (Stem on a, § 308), I benefit, Mid. ονίνάμαι 
 (§ 309), I have advantage , Strong Aor. Mid. ώνέιμην, ώνησο, 
 ώνητο J Opt. οναίμην, Imperat. ονησο, Inf. υνασθαι, Put, 
 ονέ)σω, ονέ\σομαι ] Aor. Pass. ώνηθην. 
 
 3. πί-μ-πΧη-μι (Stem π λ a, § 308). Additional form, 
 πληθω, I fill [Lat .pie -θ’], Fut. ττΧησω, Perf. Mid. πέπΧη- 
 σμαι, Aor. Pass. έιτΧησθην. 
 
 4. πί-μ-πρη-μι (Stem ττ p a). Additional form, ττρηθω 
 (quite like 3). 
 
 5. φη-μί (Stem φ a), I sag, 2 Sing. Imperf. εφησθα (enclitic 
 in Pres. Ind. except 2 Sing., compare § 92, 3). Imperat. 
 φαθί or φάθι ; compare φάσκω, 324, 8. 
 
 6. χρη (Stem χρ α, χρε),οηβ must , Subj. χρ rj, Opt. 
 X p ε ί η, Inf. χρη v a i, Part, χρεών (only bl eut. from χρ a o v 
 according to § 37, D.). Imperf. έχρην or χρην, Fut. χρη- 
 σει \ α 7Γ d χρ η, it suffices, also 3 Plur. αττοχρώσι (v), etc., 
 as above άττοχράω. 
 
 7. κί-χρη-μι (Stem χρ a, § 308), I lend , Inf. κ ι χρ αν a i, 
 Fut. χρησ ω, Aor. εχρησ a. Farther the deponents : 
 
 8. dya -μαι (Stem α γ a), / admire , Fut. αγάσομαί, Aor. 
 Pass, η^άσθην, Verb. Adj. αγαστός·. 
 
 9. J υνά-μαι (Stem S v v α), I can , 2 Sing. Ind. δυνρ is rare 
 (§ 309), Imperf. έόυνάμην, 2 Sing, έ^υνω, Fut. δ υνησομαι, 
 
 § 312. Dialects. — 3. Horn, lias tlie Aor. πλήτο, it icas piled, 3 Plur. 
 πλήντο , Opt. 7τ\?)μην ΟΓ πλείμην, Impel’. [εμ]ττΧησο. 
 
 6. Herod, άπεχρα. 
 
 8. Horn, άγάομαι , άγαίομαι. 
 
176 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 312. 
 
 Aor. Συνήθην, seldom ε^υνάσθην. The Augment is fre¬ 
 quently η (§ 2o4: 3 0l)S .), Perf. ^Αννημαι, Verb. Adj. δυνατός, 
 capable, possible. 
 
 10. ε7 τίστα-μαι (Stem ε π ι στ a), I understand , 2 Sing. 
 t —ίστασαι, Imperf. %ιπιστάμην 3 -ηπίστω, Put. επιστησομαι, 
 Aor. Ί-,ττιστίιθγιν, Verb. Adj. h τιστητος. 
 
 11. ερα-μαι (Stem l p a), poetic, I love (commonly ίράω), 
 Aor. Pass. ι)ράσθην. 
 
 12. κρεμα-μαι (Stem κ p ε μ a), I hang (§ 309). Put. icpe- 
 μησομαι, Aor. εκρεμάσθη v. Additional forms, § 319, 2. 
 
 Ohs .—Tlie following may serve as examples of the formation of 
 words: το θί-μα, the position; δ δο-τηρ, the giver; y στά-σι-ς, the 
 rise; y δνη-σι-ς,ίΐιβ benefit, from the Pure Verbal-Stem, differing 
 from the Present-Stem; y φη-μη, /d-ma, talk; y δνναμι-ς, power; 
 y ίτπστή-μη, knowledge, from the Verbal-Stem, which is the same 
 as that of the Present. 
 
 Dialects.—13. Horn, άμεναι, satiate, Stem a, Subj. ϊωμεν. 
 
 14. Stem β a, Part, βιβάς, stepping. 
 
 14. 5. Stem lea, 3 Sing. Imperf. Haro, seemed, Aor. δοά-σσατο. 
 
 15. Stem i λ a, ΊΚάσκομαι, ίλάομαι, I cun gracious, Horn. Imperat. 'ίληθι. 
 
 16. Stem κερά (compare κεράνννμι, I mix), Horn. 3 Plur. Subj. Mid. 
 κέρωνται. To these belong· also, in regard to the inflexion of the 
 Present-Stem, those Horn, verbs which either are used only in the 
 Present-Stem, or form the Present-Stem from the Verbal Stem by 
 affixing the syllable -va : 
 
 a) δάμ-νη-μι (also δαμ-νά-ω ), I tame, Mid. δάμ-νά-μαι, Flit, δαμόω, 
 δαμάας, Weak Aor. Inf. δαμάσαι, δαμάσασθαι, Perf. δεδμημαι, Aor. Pass. 
 ίδμηθην, δαμάσθην, and Strong Aor. Pass, Ιδάιμην (Subj. δαμείω). 
 
 V) κίρνημι (also κεράνννμι , § 319, 1), A mix, Part, κιρνάς, 3 Sing. 
 Imperf. εκίρνά. Compare § 319,1. 
 
 c) κ p y μ v ά μ a i, poetic additional form of κρεμα-μαι (1*2). Compare 
 also § 319, 2. 
 
 d) μάρνάμαι, I contend , 2 Sing. Imperf. ψάρνάο. 
 
 e) π ε p v η μ ι, I Sell , Part, περνάς, περνάμενος. 
 
 f) πίλναμαι,Ι approach , Stem π ε λ, Aor. 3 Sing, t -πλη-το. 
 
 ej) 7τ ί τ ν η μ ι, I spread , Part, πιτνάς, Imperf. πίτναντο. Compare 
 319, 3. 
 
 h) σκίδνημι,Ι scatter, σκίδνάται. Compare § 319, 4. 
 
§ 313. 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 177 
 
 § 313. B) Verbs whose Stem ends in ε (compare τίθημι) : 
 
 l. 'ί-η-μι (Stem ε, Present-Stem ί-ε, i. e., ι-ε, according to 
 § 308), I send. 
 
 Act. Pres. 3 Plur. Ind. Ιάσι(ν), Opt. ίείην (secondary forms 
 ίοιμι, 3 Plur. 'ίοιεν). 
 
 Imperf. 'ίη-ν (secondary forms [7ουν], hig, hi), Plur. 
 
 αμεν, 3 Plur. ' iE -σαν, αφίΕΐ and ηφίει (· αφίημι , 
 I send away). Compare § 240. 
 
 Aor. fj-K-a, ηκας, ηχε(ν), ειτον, ε'ίτην, ΕΪμεν, είτε, ύ- 
 σαν. 
 
 Subj. ώ, Opt. ε'ίην, Imperat. ες, Inf. είναι, Part, εις 
 (Stem ε ν τ). On this Aor., compare § 310. 
 
 Put. ησω, Perf. εΐ-κ-α. 
 
 Mid. Pres, 'ί-ε-μαι, I hasten, strive, Subj. ίώμαι, uj, etc. 
 
 Opt. hi μην (additional form ίοίμην), Imperat. ίεσο 
 or to v, Imperf. Τ-εμην. 
 
 Aor. είμην, εισο, είτο, Subj. ωμαι, Opt. είμην (addi¬ 
 tional form οίμην). 
 
 Ohs .—The ε i of the Ind. εί-μην is caused by tlie Augment (§ 23G), 
 that of the Opt. by the Mood-sign (§ 302, 4). 
 
 Put. η-σομαι, Perf. εί-μαι, Plup. εί-μην. 
 
 § 313. Dialects. — 1. Horn. 2 and 3 Sing. Pres, '/εις, Vet; 3 Plur. \είσι(ν ) ; 
 1 Sing. Imperf. am, 'ίεις, ϊει ; 3 Plur. ’lev, 3 Sing. Subj. Ίησι(ν ) ; Inf. 
 ιίμεναι ; Aor. Act. εηκα ; 3 Plur. εσαν ; Subj. ε'/ω ; Aor. Mid. 3 Plur. two. 
 
 2. Fut. ησω and (άν)έσω [Herod, μεμετιμενος , as a Part. Perf. of με- 
 τίημι — μεθίημι, § 52, D., as if from μετίω, with irregular reduplica¬ 
 tion]. 
 
 Moreover: 
 
 3. Stem ά(Ρ)ε, Pres, άημι , Iblxnc, 2 Dual άητον , 3 Sing. Imperf. άη and 
 άει , Illf. άηναι and άημεναι , Part. Aor. Nom. Plur. άεντες, Mid. άημενος. 
 
 4. Stem διε, (tv) δίεσην, they frightened; δίεν-αι , they flee; Opt. δί- 
 
 OLTO. 
 
 5. Stem διζε , δίζημαι, additional form, δίζω,Ι sccJc; 2 Sing, δίζηαι , 
 Inf. δίζησθαι, Fut. διζησομαι. 
 
 6. Pres, κίχημι (compare § 322, 18),/ obtain; Subj. κιχείω, Opt. κι- 
 χείην , Inf. κιχηναι , Part, κιχείς , Mid. κιχημενος. 
 
 Imperf. 2 Sing, εκίχεις, 3 Dual κιχητην. 
 
 Η 2 
 
178 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 314., 
 
 Aor. Pass, ε'ΐθην, Subj. εθώ. Put. εθησομαι. 
 
 Verb. Adj. έτος, ετεος. 
 
 2. ΰί-ΰη-μι (Stem δ ε), I hind, a rare additional form of 
 δε'-ω (§ 244> l). 
 
 § 314. C) Verbs whose Stem ends in i : 
 
 1. εΐ-μι (Stem i, Lat. i-re), I go. 
 
 Pres. Ind. el- μι l- μεν Subj. ϊ-ω l-yg, etc. 
 
 el l -τον i -τε Opt. ί-οίην ΐ-οις, etc. 
 
 ε~ί-σι(ν) ’ί-τον \l-dai(jt) Imperat. ι -Gi ’ί-τω, etc. 
 
 3 Plur. ί-όντων or l -τωσαν 
 
 Inf. i-h-vcii Part, l -ών , ί-οϋσα , ί-όν (Gen. ί-όντ-ος , compare Lat. 
 
 e-unt-is ) 
 
 Imperf. yeiv or ya yegiev or ι]μεν 
 
 yeig u yeioQa, yeirov , yrov , yeire “ yre 
 yei “ yeiv , ijeiryv , yryv, yeaav 
 
 Verbal Adj. ίτος, ίτεος· (additional form Ιτητεον, it is 
 necessary to go. 
 
 Ohs .—The Present, especially in the Indicative, has a Future mean¬ 
 ing ; the Imperfect has the endings of a Pluperfect; ?j is pro¬ 
 duced by the Augment preceding ε t. 
 
 2. κεϊ-μαι (Stem ke i), I lie , has the Inflexion of a Per¬ 
 fect. 2 Sing. κεί-σαι, 3 Plur. κεϊνται, Subj. 3 Sing, κεηται, 
 Opt. keoito, Imperat. κεΐσο, Inf. κείσθαι, Part, κείμενος ; the 
 compound τταράκειμαι , Inf. τταρακεΐσθαι. (Compare ημαι, 
 § 315, 2b 
 
 § 314. Dialects.—1. Stem 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. εΖσθα, Subj. ’ίησθα, ϊησιν, 
 1 Plur. ’ίομεν, ’ ίομεν , and ’ιωμεν, Opt. tot, ι’ε/^ or ε’ίη. Inf. Ίμεναι , ’ίμεν. 
 
 Imperf. ηία and i'jiov, 3 Sing. ψε(ν) or ί'ε(ν), 1 Plur. yopev, 3 Plur. 
 ψον, ήϊσαν, with 1 την, 'ίμεν , ’ίσαν. 
 
 Fut. είσομαι , Aor. είσάμην and εεισάμην. 
 
 2. Stem /οει, 3 Plur. κείαται , κεαται , κ&ονται , Imperf. κείατο , κέατο 
 [κέεται = κε?Γαι], Part. Fut. κεών, cuhiturus , Inf. κειέμεν. 
 
 ό ν ο is an Horn. Stem in o, Pres, ύνομαι , / vituperate, ΰνοσαι , 3 Sing. 
 Opt. uvoiro (§ 309), Fut. ύνόσσομαι , Aor. ώνοσάμην , and, from the Stem 
 ό ν, ώνάμην. 
 
 p v or έ p v is an Horn. Stem in a, 3 Plur. είρύαται , rescue, protect, 
 
 Inf. ρνσθαι , ερυσθαι, εΐρϋμενος , Imperf. 2 Sing, ερνσο , 3 Plur. ρνατο , ερνατο, 
 είρυντο ; moreover, Ini. Act. είρνμεναι, draw; Aor. Mid. ρύσατο, 
 rescued ; ερνσσατο, he drew. 
 
§ 315. 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι . 
 
 179 
 
 Gbs .—When compounded with prepositions, κείμαι is almost iden¬ 
 tical in meaning with the Perf. Pass, of the corresponding com¬ 
 pounds of τίθημι : ΰποτίθημι , I lay <28 Cl foundation j ΰττύκειται, it is 
 laid as a foundation. 
 
 § 315. D) Verbs whose Stem ends in a consonant (σ) : 
 
 1. είμί (Stem έ ς, Lat. es-se), I am. 
 
 Pres. Illd. εΐ-μί (for εσμι) έσ-μέν 
 
 εί (for εσ-σι ) ίσ-τόν εσ-τέ ( es-tis ) 
 
 εσ-τί(ν ) (Lat. €S-f) εσ-τόν εί-σί(ν ) 
 
 Subj. ώ ώμεν Opt. ε’ίην ε’ίημεν or εΐμεν 
 
 \)ζ V~ov ήτε ειης 
 
 y ήτον ώσι(ν ) εΊη 
 
 Imperat. Ίσθι εστον εστε 
 
 έστω έστων εστωσαν 
 (Lat. esto ) εστων, υντων 
 Imperf. ην or ή 
 
 μσθα ι/στον 01' ητον 
 
 ην if την ΟΙ’ ητην 
 
 Imperf. Mid. η μην (rare) 
 
 Flit, εσομαι , 3 Sing, εσται 
 Verb. Adj. εστεον. 
 
 ε’ίητον or είτον ε’ίητε or είτε 
 είητην or ε'ίτην ε’ίησαν 01 ' ε~ίεν 
 Inf. είναι 
 
 Part, ων ουσα υν (Stem ο ν τ) 
 τ/μεν 
 
 ητε or ηστε 
 7/σαν 
 
 Ohs. —1. The loss of the σ of the Stem is compensated for by the 
 vowel being lengthened in the 1 Sing. (§ 42) : είμί for εσμι , in the 
 2 Sing, εΐ for έσι, which has arisen from the εσσί preserved in 
 Homer (compare §§ 49, 61, l·). In the 3 Sing, the original end¬ 
 ing 7 -i is retained: ίσπ(ν), the 3 Plur. has είσί(ν), from εσ-ντι. 
 The Subj. ώ stands for εω (Horn.), from εσω ; the Opt. ε’ίην for 
 
 § 315. Dialects. — Ionic additional forms : 2 Sing, ίσ-σί or είς, 1 Plur. 
 ε ; μέν, 3 Plur. εάσι{ν ) ; εσσί is also enclitic, but not εασι(ν). 
 
 Subj. 1 Sing, εω, ε’ίω , 2 Sing. Zyg, 3 Sing. εησι(ν ), ησι(ν ), ty, 3 Plur. 
 εωσι(ν). 
 
 Opt. also εοις, εοι , 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. Ισσό, 3 Act. έστω, 8 Plur. 
 
 εστων. 
 
 Inf. εμμεναι (for εσ-μεναι ), εμμεν, εμεναι, εμεν. 
 
 Part, εών, εοΰσα , εόν (Stem ε οντ). 
 
 Imperf. 1 Sing. ?/«, εα, εον’, 2 Sing, εησβα [εας], 3 Sing, ηεν, εην, ΐ/ην 
 [2 Plur. ί'ατε], 3 Plur. εσαν, 3 Plur. Mid. εϊατο (ήντο ). 
 
 Fut. εσσομαι, 3 Sing, εσεται, εσσεται, εσσεΊται (§ 264). 
 
 2. From ημαι, 3 Plur. εαται, ε'ίαται, Imperf. εατο, είατο. 
 
 3. Inf. εδμεναι, to eat , Pres, εσθω, εσθίω, εδω [Lat. es-tis = editis]. Com¬ 
 
 pare § 327, 4. 
 
 4. 2 Plur. Imperf. φέρτε = φερετε, bring [Lat./<??’£<?]. 
 
180 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 316. 
 
 Ισ-ιην , as the Inf. είναι for εσ-ναι ; ών for ίων (Horn.), from ϊσ-ω» 
 In the Imperf. the Dual has most fully preserved the σ. 
 
 Obs. 2.— είμί is enclitic in the Pres. Ind. except the 2 Sing. εΊ (com¬ 
 pare § 92, 3); εστι is paroxytone when it denotes existence, or 
 means the same, as εζεστι , u it is possible f as well as at the begin¬ 
 ning of a sentence and after the particles ου, μη , εί, ώς, καί: εστι 
 θεός , there is a God; ονκ εστι, it is not possible. When merely ex¬ 
 ternal causes prevent it from being enclitic (§ 93, c), Ισή(ν) is 
 oxytone : φίλος εστίν εμοϋ , he is my friend. 
 
 Obs. 3.—In the compounds of ειμί the accent remains on the Stem- 
 syllable; e. g., in the Imperf. παρήν , in the Subj. and Opt. άπώ, 
 άπεΊεν, in the Inf. and Part, cn τεϊναι, παρών, in the 3 Sing. Put. 
 παρεσται. 
 
 2. ημαι (Stem r? c), I sit, has, like κείμαι, the Inflexion of 
 a Perfect. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 ημιι 
 
 ημεθον 
 
 μ μέθα 
 
 
 ησαι 
 
 ησθον 
 
 ησθε 
 
 
 ησται 
 
 ησθον 
 
 ηνται 
 
 Impf. 
 
 η μην 
 
 ησο , etc. 
 
 
 Xmperat. ησο. 
 
 ησθω, etc. 
 Inf. ησθαι . 
 
 Part. μμενος. 
 
 In Attic prose we find almost exclusively the compound 
 κάθημαι, of which 3 Sing. κάθηται, Subj. καθώμαι, Opt. κα- 
 θοίμην, 3 Plur. καθοίντο, Imperat. κάθησο or κάβου (from 
 καθεσο ), Inf. καθησθαι, Part, καθισμένος, Imperf. εκαθημην 
 (§ 240) or καθημην, 3 Sing. εκάθητο or καθηστο, 3 Plur. 
 εκάθηντο or καθηντο. 
 
 § 316. The following Strong Aorists, formed without a 
 connecting rowel from verbs whose Present-Stem mostly 
 follows the First Principal Conjugation, likewise belong to 
 the First Class of Verbs in μι: 
 
 Stems in a. 
 
 l. ε-βη-ν (Stem β a), Pres, βαίνω, I go, Imperat. βηθι ; 
 in compounds also βά (κατάβά), Inf. βηναι, Part. βάς. 
 
 § 316. Dialects. — 1. 3 Plur. εβάν, Subj. βείω, βη -g or βεί^, βείομεν [Her, 
 β'εωμεν], Inf. βημεναι. 
 
316. 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 181 
 
 2. γηρα-ναι (Stem γ η p a), Inf. to the Pres. Ύηρά-σχω, I 
 grow old , § 324, 1. 
 
 3. ε -Sjoa-v (Stem δ p a ), Pres, οι-ϋρά-σιζω, § 324, 2, I run, 
 Inf. δρ a-vai, Part. δράς*. 
 
 4. t -κτα-ν (Stem κ r a), Pres, κτείνω, I hill , Part, κτά-ς , 
 Part. Mid. κτά-μενος ( hilled ). 
 
 5. ε-πτη-ν (Stem 7rro, tt r f), Pres, πένομαι, I fl>J, Part. 
 7ττάς, Mid. πτάμενος, Inf. πτε σθαι. 
 
 6. ε-τΧη-ν (Stem r λ a), I endured, Snbj. τλώ. Opt. τΧαίην, 
 Imperat. τΧηθι, Inf. τΧηναι, Put. τΧμσομαι, Peri. τετΧηχα 
 (§ 317, D., 10). 
 
 7. ε-ψθη-ν (Stem φ 6 a), Pres, φθάνω, I anticipate , Inf. 
 ( p()7)vai. 
 
 8. ε-πριά-μην (Stem ττ p i a), I bought, Imperat. πρίω. 
 
 Stems in ε. 
 
 9. ε-σβη-ν (Stem σβ ε), Pres, σβεννϋμι, I quench , § 319, 
 7, Inf. σβ rival. 
 
 10. ε-σκΧη-ν (Stem σ icX c), Pres. σκεΧΧω, I dry, Inf. 
 σκΧηναι. 
 
 11. Imperat. σγε-ς, from σγε-θι (Stem σ v ε), Pres, ενω, 
 § 327,6, 1 Sing. Ind. ΐ-σχ-ο-ν. 
 
 Stems in ω. 
 
 12. ε-άΧω-ν (Stem αΧω),Τ WCCS caught, Pres. αΧίσκομαι 
 (§ 324, 17), Opt. αΧοίην, Inf. αΧωναι, Part. άΧους. 
 
 13. ε-βίω-ν (Stem β ι ω), Pres, βιυω, I live, Opt. βιωην, 
 Inf. βιώναι, Part, βίους. 
 
 Dialects.—2. Part, γηράς . 
 
 3. [Her. εδρην.] 
 
 4. 3 Sing, έκτα, 3 Plur. εκταν , Subj. κτεωμεν , Inf. κτάμεναι, Mid. εκτατό 
 [he was killed , § 225, D., 2), Pass. Aor., 3 Plur. εκτάθεν. 
 
 5. Mid. t7 Γτάτο, Subj. τττηται , Dor. 1 Sing. Act. εττταν. 
 
 G. 3 Plur. ετΧάν. 
 
 7. Subj. 3 Sing. <p9))y or φθησι(ν), ( παρα)<ρθαίησι(ν\ 1 Plur. φθίωμεν. 
 12. ήλων, Subj. άλώω, Opt. 3 Sing, άλοά;, Inf. άλώμεναι. 
 
182 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 316. 
 
 14. ε-γνω~ν (Stem y v ω), Pres, γί-γνώ-σκω, I CGTKie to 
 know (§ 324, 14), Opt. yvou]v , Imperat. γνωθί, Inf. yviovai, 
 Part, yvovg. 
 
 • Steins in i . 
 
 15. Imperat. πί-θί (Stem π t), Pres, πίνω, ldrink, 1 Sing. 
 Aor. Ind. επιον (§321,4). 
 
 Stems in v. 
 
 16. t -δΰ-ν (Stem δ υ), Pres, δύω, / dive, Imperat. $νθι, 
 Inf. $υναι, Part. δάς*. As to its meaning, see § 329, 4. 
 
 17. ε-φϋ-ν (Stem φν), I became, Pres, φύω, I produce, 
 Inf. φνναι. 
 
 Dialects.—14. Subj. γνώω , Inf. γνώμεναι. 
 
 15. Imperat. 7πε. 
 
 16. 3 Plur. εδυ-ν, Subj. δύω, δύ /jg, 3 Sing. Opt. δό.) (from δν-ίη), Inf. 
 δϋμεν. 
 
 17. 3 Plur. tyvv. 
 
 Besides tliese, the following are peculiar to the Ep. Dialect: 
 
 18. Part, διπούράς , Pres, άπαυράω, I take away. 
 
 19. Stem /3\?7,Pres. βάλλω, I throw, 3 Dual ζυμβλητην (met together), 
 Fut. ζνμβλησομαι, Mid. εβλητο ( WCLS hit, § 255, D. 2), Subj. βλη-ε-ται, 2 
 Sing. Opt. βλεΊο, Inf. βλησθαι, Part, βλημενος (hit). 
 
 20. Stem ο ύ r a, Pres, ούτάω, I wound, 3 Sing, ούτά, Inf. ούτάμεναι, 
 Part. Mid. ούτάμενος (wounded), Verb. Adj. οοτάτος. 
 
 21. Stem τττα, Pres, πτησσω, I stoop, 2 Dual ε-πτη-την, Part. Perl. 
 πεπ τηώς. 
 
 22. Stem π λ a, Pres, πελάζω, I approach, Aor. Mid. πλητο. 
 
 23. Stem β p ω, Pres, βι-βρώ-σκω, I eat (§ 324,13), Aor. εβρων. 
 
 24. Stem πλω, Pres, πλώω, I sail, 2 Sing. Aor. επλως, Part. πλώ-ς. 
 
 25. Stem κτι, Pres, κτίζω, I found, Part. Aor. Mid. εϋ-κτί-μενος (well- 
 founded). 
 
 26. Stem φ θ i, Pres, φθίνω, I icaste away, Subj. Aor. Mid. φθίεταε, Opt. 
 φθϊμην, φθΊτο , Inf. φθίσθαε, Part, φθίμενος. 
 
 27. Stem κλν, Pres, κλύω, I hear, Imperat. Aor. κλύθε or κεκλϋθε, κλΰτε 
 or κεκλυτε. 
 
 28. Stem λ v, Pres, λύω, T loose, Aor. Mid. λνμην, λυτό or Xiro. 
 
 29. Stem πνν, Pres, πνέω, I breathe, Aor. Mid. άμπνντο (lie recovered 
 breath). 
 
 30. Stem συ, Pres, σενω, I scare, Aor. Mid. σύτο, Part, σύμενος. 
 
 31. Stem χυ, Pres, χέω, I pour (§ 248), Aor. Mid. ίχντο, χυτό, Part. 
 χνμενος. 
 
317. 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 183 
 
 § 317. Several Perfects also have some forms without a 
 connecting vowel : 
 
 A) Vowel Stems. 
 
 A number of Yowel-Stems form the Sing. Perf. Inch 
 Act. regularly, but in the Dual and Plural of the Perfect 
 and Pluperf. Ind., in the other moods, and in the Infinitive 
 and Participle, may connect the endings immediately with 
 the Perfect-Stem. 
 
 1. Stem βα, Pres, βαίνω , I go (§ 321, l). 
 
 Perf. Ind. βεβηκ-α βεβα-μεν 
 
 βέβηκ-ας β ε βα-τ ον βεβα-τε 
 
 βέβηκ-ε βεβα-τον βεβα-σι(ν) 
 
 3 Plur. Subj. βεβώσι(ν), Part, βεβώς, βεβώσα, Gen. 
 βεβωτος. 
 
 2. Stem γα (for γεν), Pres, γίγνομαι, I become, Perf. 
 γε-γον-α, Plur. also γ ε-γ α-μεν (§ 327, 14), Part, γεγώς, 
 Gen. γεγώτος. 
 
 Dialects. —32. Stem άλ (άλλομαι, I spring), Aor. Mid. άλσο, άλτο, Subj. 
 ίίλεται , Part, άλμενος. 
 
 33. Stem γεν, only in γέντο , he took. 
 
 34. Stem δεχ (Pres, δέχομαι, I accept), Aor. εδεγμην , 3 Sing, δεκτό, Im- 
 perat. δέζο, Inf. δεχθαι (compare § 273, D.). 
 
 35. Stem λεγ (λέγω, I collect), Aor. Mid. λεκτο, he counted. 
 
 3G. Stem λεχ (no Pres.), Aor. Mid. λέκτο (he laid himself ), Imperat. 
 λέξο, Inf. λεχθαι, Part. (κατα)λεγμένος, Aor. Act. ελεξα, Mid. ελεζατο, Fut. 
 λεξομαι. 
 
 37. Stem μιγ, Pres. μίσγω,Ι mix, Aor. Mid. εμϊκτο, μΊκτο. 
 
 38. Stem δρ, δρννμι,Ι excite, Aor. Mid. ώρ-ο, Imperat. δρσο or δρσεο 
 ( δρσεν ), Inf. ορθαι, Part, δρμενος. 
 
 39. Stem τταγ (ί τηγννμι,Ι fix), Aor. Mid. εττηκτο , it was fixed. 
 
 40. Stem ττ«λ (πάλλω, I wield), Aor. Mid. πάλτο. 
 
 41. Stem περθ (περθω, I destroy), Inf. Aor. Mid. πέρθαι (to he de¬ 
 stroyed). 
 
 To these are to be added the Participles which have become Ad¬ 
 jectives, άσμενος , glad (Stem ac, άνδάνω,Ι please)’, ’ίκμενος, favorable 
 (Stem ί κ, ικνεομαι, I come). 
 
 § 317. Dialects.—1. Horn. 3 Plur. βεβαασι(ν), Part, βεβαώς, Dual βε- 
 βαωτε. 
 
 2. Horn. 3 Plur. γεγαασι(ν), Part, γεγαώς, γεγανΊα, Geil. γεγαώτος, 3 
 Dual Plup. (εκ)γεγατην. 
 
184 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 317. 
 
 3. Stem θνα, Pres. Θνη-σκω, I die , Perf. τί-θνη-κα, Plur. 
 r έ- Θ v a- μεν, etc., Inf . r εθ v av ai, Part, τεθνεώς, τεθνεώσα, 
 τεθνεός, Pluperf. 3 Plur. ετεθνασαν (§ 324, 4). 
 
 4. Stem στα, Pres, 'ί-στη-μι, Perf. ε-στη-κα, I stand, Plur. 
 ε-στα-μεν, Subj. εστωμεν, εστώσι(ν), Opt. εσταίην, Imperat. 
 εσταθι, εστάτω, εστατον, εστατε, Inf. εστάναι, Part, εστώς, 
 εστώσα,εστός, Gen. εστύτος·, 3 Plur. Pluperf. ε στ α σαν 
 
 (§ 306, etc.). 
 
 5. Stem Si, Perf. St-Si-a or St-Soi -κα, 1 fear, Plur. StSi- 
 μεν, %ε$ΐασι(ν), Subj. StSiw, Opt. SεSιείηv, Imperat. StSiOi, 
 Inf. SeSievai, Part. δεδίώς, Pluperf. tSeSieiv, 3 Dual εSεSίτηv, 
 3 Plur. iStSiaav, also Aor. εδεισα, Put. Sείσoμaι. 
 
 Ohs .—The regular and irregular forms are mostly both in use. 
 
 B) Consonant Stems. 
 
 In these the peculiar changes of the vowels (§ 303) and 
 consonants (§§ 45-49) must be observed. 
 
 6. Stem to (Aor. είδον,Ι saw, § 327, 8). 
 
 Perf. Ind. οΐδ-α,Ι know, 
 
 ίσ-μεν, Subj. 
 
 είδω 
 
 οί-σθα 
 
 ϊσ-τον 
 
 if 
 
 ισ-τε 
 
 ειδής 
 
 οΊδ-ε(ν) 
 
 'ίσ-τον 
 
 ίσ-άσε (ν) 
 
 είδή 
 
 Opt. είδείην, Imp. 
 
 "ισ-θι 
 
 ίσ-τον ισ-τε 
 
 
 ΐσ-τω 
 
 ί σ - των ίσ-τωσα 
 
 PI up. y δ ειν or ήδη (/ knew') 
 
 ήδεισθα “ ήδησθα ήδειτον or ήστον 
 ήδει(ν) U y δείτην “ ήστην 
 
 Flit, ε’ίσομαί, Verb. Adj. ίστεον. 
 
 είδώμεν 
 
 είδητον είδήτε 
 είδητον είδώσι(ν) 
 Inf. είδέναι 
 Part, είδώς, είδνία, 
 είδος, Gen. είδότ-ος 
 y δει μεν or ήσμεν 
 y ο είτε ν στε 
 
 ι^όεσαν yaav 
 
 Dialects. — 3. Imperat. τεθνάθι, Inf. τεθνάμεν(αι), Gen. Part, τεθνεωτος, 
 τεθνηώτος, τεθνειώτος , τεθί'ηότος, τεθνεωτος, Fem. τεθνηυία. 
 
 4. 2 Plur. Ind. also εστητε, Part, εσταώς, Gen. εσταότος [Her. εστεώς, 
 εστεώσα\. 
 
 5. δείδια, δείδιμεν, Imperat. δείδιθι, 1 Sing. Perf. also δείδοικα, Aor. εδ- 
 δεισα (compare § 77, D.). 
 
 G. 1 Plur. ίδ-μεν [Herod, and sometimes also in Att. writers οίδαμεν , 
 3 Plur. οιίασι], Subj. είδέω or ίδέω, Plur. ε’ίδομεν, ε’ίδετε, Inf. ίδμεν(αι), 
 Fem. Part. ίδυΊα, Plup. [yoea] ήείδης, ήδεε(ν) or ήείδη [2 Plur. ιήδέατε], 3 
 Plur. Ίσ av, Fut. είδήσω. 
 
318. 
 
 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 185 
 
 Obs .—Besides οΊσθα , we rarely have oleae, more frequently ηδεις, 
 ήδης, together with ηδεισθα, and ι^δεμεν, βδετε, instead of ήδειμενι 
 ι^δειτε. 
 
 7. Stem Ik, only in the Perf. εοικα, I resemble, appear, 
 1 Plur. poet, εο iy μεν, 3 Plur. quite irregularly είζάσι(ν) 
 (compare ϊσασι), Inf. είκεναι (poet, with εοικεναι), Part, εικώς 
 (with εοικως), εικυΐα, εικός, Plur. εφκειν. 
 
 8. Stem Kpcty, Pres, κράζω, I cry , Perf. κεκρά -ya, Im- 
 perat. κε-κραχ-Θι. 
 
 II. Second Class of Verbs in μι . . 
 
 § 318. 1. The Second Class of the Verbs in μι belongs 
 to this conjugation only in regard to the inflexion of the 
 
 Dialect?.—7. Imperf. εΊκε, Perf. [Her. olica, οΐκώς ], Dual είκτον, 3 Dual 
 Plup. εΐκτην, 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. ηϊκτο or είκτο. 
 
 Besides: 
 
 9. Stem μα, 2 Dual Perf. μεμάτον , strive , μεμαμεν, μέμάτε, μεμάάσί, Ιηΐ- 
 perat. μεμάτω, Part, μεμαώς, via , ός, Gen. ώτος, 3 Plur. Plup. μεμάσαν. 
 
 10. Stem τ\α, Perf. τ'ετΧηκα, I am patient , 1 Plur. τετΧάμεν, Opt. τε- 
 τΧαίην, Imperat. τετΧάθι, Inf. τετΧαμεν^αι ), Part, τετΧηώς, ηνΊα, Gen. τε- 
 τΧηότος. 
 
 11. Stem άνωγ, Perf. άνω·γα,Ι command , 1 Plur. άνω-γμεν, Imperat. 
 άνωχθι, 3 Sing, άνώχθω, 2 Plur. άνωχθε, Plup. ήνώγεα. 
 
 12. Stem έγερ, Perf. εγρ-ηγορ-α, I am awalce , 2 Plur. Imperat. έγρ?/- 
 γορθε, 3 Plur. Ind. εγρηγόρθάσι(ν). 
 
 13. Stem έλυθ, Perf. είΧηΧουθα,Ι have come , 1 Plur. είΧηΧονθμεν. 
 
 14. Stem πενθ, Perf. πεπονθα (Pres, πάσχω, I suffer, § 327, 9), 2 Plur. 
 πεποσθε (for πεπο^Ο-τε), Fem. Part. πεπάθυΊα. 
 
 15. Stem πιθ, Perf. πεποιθα (Pres, πείθω, I persuade), 1 Plur. Plup. 
 επ’επιθμεν , Imperat. πεπεισθι. 
 
 Farther the Participles: 
 
 16. Stem βρω (βιβρώσκω, I eat, § 324, 13), Part. Perf. βεβρώς, Gen. 
 βεβρώτος. 
 
 17. Stem πτε, πτω ( πίπτω, I fall, § 327, 15), Perf. π'επτωκα, Part. 
 Gen. πεπτεώτος, Nom. πεπτώς. 
 
 § 318. Dialects.—Ion. 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. -νσι (v), together with 
 -νάσι(ν). Horn. 2 Sing. Imperat. -v and -ύθι ( δαίνν, υμννθι), Inf. 
 Horn, -νμεναι, v μεν (ζενγννμεν). Horn, forms from δαίννμαι, I feast, 
 the Opt. δαινϋτο, for δαινν-ι-το. Similar cases see below, § 319, 32. In 
 
186 
 
 SECOND CLASS OE VEEBS IN μι. 
 
 319. 
 
 Present-Stem. The Present-Stem of this Second Class is 
 formed by adding the syllable v v to the Pure Stem. 
 
 2. The quantity of the v is determined by the rules in 
 § 303, lienee δ ζίκνυμι , but εδε/κνυμεν. 
 
 3. Vowel-Stems double v in the Present-Stem: Stem 
 κερά, κερά-ννϋμι, I mix. 
 
 4. Here also numerous additional forms are in use ac¬ 
 cording to the First Principal Conjugation (δεικνύω), espe¬ 
 cially in the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind.: δεικνύουσι(ν) ; and these 
 forms are exclusively used in the Pres. Subj. and Opt. 
 
 5. Mo&t of the Verbs of this class have the Weak Aor- 
 ist / only σβεννυμι, I quench (Stem σ β ε), forms the 2 Aor- 
 ist εσβην, Inf. σβηναι. Compare §§ 316, 9; 319, 7. 
 
 The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs are inserted on 
 
 p. 128. 
 
 § 319. The following verbs belong to the Second Class 
 of Verbs in μ i : 
 
 Stems in a. 
 
 1. κεράννν μι (Stem κερά, κρ a), I mix. 
 
 ΑθΓ. εκεράσα Pei’f. Act. κεκράκα A p j εκράθην 
 
 Mid. κεκράμαι ( εκερασθΐ]ν 
 
 2. κρεμάννν μι (Stem κρεμ a ), I hang , trans. Mid. κρέμαμαι, I hang , 
 
 intrans. (§ 312,12) 
 
 Flit, κρεμώ (§ 263) εκρεμάσθην 
 
 ΑθΓ. εκρεμάσα 
 
 3. πετάννν μι (Stem πέτα), I spread. 
 
 πετώ (§ 263) επετάσθην 
 
 επετάσα π'επ(ε)τάμαι \pate-6\ 
 
 4. σκεοάννυμι (Stem σκεδα),Ι scatter ; additional form σκίδνημι 
 
 (§ 312, D. 16, h) 
 
 σκεδώ (§ 263) εσκεδάσθην 
 
 εσιάδάσα εσκεδασμαι. 
 
 tlie Ncw-Ion. Dialect the i of the Stem δεικ is lost in δέζω, εδεξα, δε - 
 δεγμαι, εδεχθην ; Hom. Pf. (δείδεγμαι, Isalute) 3 Pllir. δειδ'εχαται. 
 
 § 319. Dialects. —1. Compare § 312, D. 16, and § 312, D. 16, l·. Other 
 forms : κεράω, κεραίω, Aor. εκρησα. 
 
 2. Flit, κρεμάω, κρεμάφρ (§ 243, D.). 
 
119. 
 
 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 
 
 187 
 
 Ικορίσοην 
 
 εσβεσθην 
 
 Stems in e. 
 
 Obs. —Several of tliese Steins originally ended in ς. 
 
 5. ενννμι (Stem originally Ρες, compare Lat. ves-tis),I clothe (only 
 
 άμφι-ένννμι is in use). 
 
 άμφι-ώ (§ 2G3) 
 
 Fut. Mid. άμφι-'εσομαι τ/μφίεσμαι 
 Aor. ημφί-εσα (§ 240) 
 
 Inf. Aor. Mid. εττι'εσασθαι 
 
 G. κ op ενννμι (Stem κ ο p ε), I satisfy. 
 εκόρεσα 
 
 κεκόρεσμαι 
 
 7. σ β εν vv μι (Stem σ β ε), I quench. 
 
 fi™ I transitive !σβίσ Ι’ αι 
 
 έσβεσα ) 
 
 έσβην έσβηκα \ 
 
 (§ 316, 9) > intransitive (§ 329, 5) 
 
 Fut. σβησομαι ) 
 
 8 . στορενννμι (Stem στορε) (compare 11 and 2 ο), I spread 
 
 (compare Lat. ster-n-o ) 
 στορώ (§ 263). εστύρεσμαι 
 
 εστόρεσα. 
 
 Stems in ω. 
 
 (Stem ζ ω), I gird, 
 έζωσμαι 
 εζωσάμην 
 
 (Stem ρω), I strengthen. 
 
 ερρωμαι (T am strong ) 
 
 (Stem στ ρω). Compare No. 8. 
 εστρωμαι 
 
 9. ζώνννμι 
 ζώσω 
 
 έζωσα (Mid.) 
 
 10. ρώννυμι 
 
 ρώσω 
 
 11. στρώνννμι 
 
 στρώσω 
 
 έστρωσα 
 
 12. χρώνννμι 
 
 έχρωσα 
 
 ερρώσθην 
 
 εστρώθην 
 
 εχρώσθην. 
 
 13. άγνυμι 
 
 άζω 
 
 έαζα (§ 237) 
 
 (Stem χρω), I color, 
 κ'εχρωσμαι 
 
 Consoncont-Stems. 
 
 (Stem ay, originally Pay, § 34, D.), 1 break, 
 έάγα (I am broken) εάγην 
 
 (§ 275 , 2 ) 
 
 Dialects. — 5. Imperf. ε’ίνυον for ίσ-ννον [Inf. Pres, ε’ίνυσθαι], Fut. άμ- 
 φιεσω, εσσω, Aor. εσσα, Mid. εεσσατο, Perf. Mid. είμαι, έσσαι, Part, ειμένος , 
 2 Sing. PI up. εσσο, 3 Sing, εστο, εεστο, 3 Plur. ε'ΐατο. 
 
 G. Aor. Mid. κορεσσατο, Part. Perf. Act. κεκορηώς, satiated, Mid. κεκό- 
 ρημαι. 
 
 13. ηζα with έαζα [Her. Perf. έη ya]. 
 
188 
 
 SECOND CLASS OF YEIIBS IN μι. 
 
 § 319. 
 
 ζεΰξω 
 έζευξα 
 
 17. κτίννυμι 
 
 18. μ ί γ νν μ ι 
 
 1 y 
 
 μιξω 
 
 έμιξα 
 
 19. ο’ίγννμι 
 ο’ίξω 
 
 14. d ε ί κ ν ν μ ι, see § 818. 
 
 15. ε 'ip γνυμι (Stem ε ί ρ y), I shut in (addit. form ε'ίργω) 
 
 είρξω ε'ίρχθην 
 
 εϊρξα Part, ερξας, ειργμαι 
 
 16. ζενγννμι (Stem ζν y), I hind. 
 
 εζΰγην 
 
 . ίζευγμαι [εξενχθην] 
 
 (Stem κτε ν), I kill, with, κτείνω (§ 253) 
 
 (Stem μιγ), I mix, with μισγω (§ 327, 7) 
 
 μεμιχα ( εμίχθην 
 
 μίμιγμαι ( εμιγην 
 
 (Stem ο ί γ), I open (with οΐγω) 
 
 εψχα and έιργα (§ 279) εωχθην 
 
 έιρξα (§ 237) εϊργμαι 
 
 20. υλλυμι (Stem όλ and όλε), for όλννμι, I destroy. 
 
 όλώ (§ 262) όλώλεκα (§ 275,1) 
 
 ώλεσα 
 
 Fat. Mid. όλοΰμαι όλωλα 
 
 ώλόμην 
 
 21. ομννμι (Stem 6 μ, ό μ ο), I swear. 
 
 όμονμαι (Act.) όμώμοκα (§ 275, 1) 
 
 ώ '" οσα 3 Sing. Perf. Mid. \ 77°™ 
 
 ( όμώμοσται 
 
 22. όμόργνν μι (Stem 6 μο py), I wipe out. 
 ώμορξα (Mid.) 
 
 ό. π ή γνυμι (Stem π ay), I fix [compare Lat. pango ] 
 
 έπηξα πεπηγα (I am fixed) j επηχθην 
 
 ( επάγην 
 
 24. ρηγνυ μι (Stem ρ ay), I tear, 
 
 έρρηξα (Mid.) έρρωγα (/ am tom) ερράγην 
 
 (§ 278) ραγήσομαι 
 
 25. στόρννμι (Stem στ-ορ), with στορίνννμι([$) £Ιϊκ\ στρώνννμι {11) 
 
 26. φ ρ άγ ν υ μ ι (Stem φραγ), also φάργνυμι, and, according to 
 
 Class 4, a, φράσσω, I shut in, loch in. 
 
 intrans., I perish. 
 
 ώμόσθην 
 
 2 °' 
 
 Verb. Adj. (ι άν)ώμοτος 
 
 ώμύρχθην 
 
 Dialects.—15. Imperf. ikpyvv, with εέργω [εργω], 3 Plnr. Perf. Mid. 
 έρχαται, Plnp. έρχατο (§ 287), Part. Perf. εεργμενος, Aor. Pass, ερχθείς, 
 with Imperf. έργαθον. 
 
 18. Aor. Mid., § 316, 37. 
 
 19. ωΐξα, <ρξα [άνοιξα), Imperf. ώίγνυντο. 
 
 20. όλέσσω [όλέω], Part. Aor. ονΧόμενος {destructive), with όλέ/:ω. 
 
 21. ώμοσσα or υμοσσα. 
 
 To these also belong: 
 
 27. α’ίννμαι, άποαίννμαι, I tale away, used onty in the Pres. 
 
320. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 189 
 
 Obs .—Nouns are formed from tlie Pure Verbal-Stems, as: ή δεΐξι-ς, 
 the announcement; ύ κρά-τήρ, the mixing bowl; το έί- μα, the clothing 
 —for Pea -μα ; ή ζώ-νη, the girdle; ή ρώ-μη, the strength ; rb στρώ-μα, 
 the carpet; το ζνγ-ό-ν, the yoke; b o\e-9po-g,the ruin; b συν-ωμύ- 
 τη -g, the conspirator; b ττάγ-ο-ς, the frost, hoar-frost. 
 
 Chap. XII.—Irregular Verbs of the First 
 Principal Conjugation. 
 
 § 320. The irregularities of the Greek Verb chiefly con¬ 
 sist in the Present-Stem differing from the Verbal-Stem in 
 a Avay different from that which has been pointed out above, 
 § 245, etc. To the four classes there enumerated the fol¬ 
 lowing four classes are to be added. 
 
 Obs. —In these as well as in the following lists, the principal forms 
 only are given, from which the rest are easily formed. (Mid.), 
 added to a tense, denotes that, in addition to the Active, the 
 
 Dialects.—28. άννμι (and άννω), I complete, only Imperf. Mid. τ,νυτο. 
 
 29. άρνυμαι, I acquire, Aor. ήρόμην, Inf. άρεσθαι, 1 Aor. 2 Sing. i'ipao, 
 3 Sing, i'/paro. 
 
 30. άχννμαι, I grieve , Aor. άκάχοντο (§ 257, D.), Perf. άκάχημαι (§ 275, 
 1), 3 Plur. όκηχίδαται (§ 287, D.), 3 Plur. Plup. άκαχείατο, Part, άκαχή- 
 μενος and άκηχεμενος. Moreover, the Active άκαχίζω (/ grieve ), Aor. 
 μκαχον and άκάχησα (compare § 326). 
 
 31. γάννμαι, I rejoice , Fut. χαννσσεται. 
 
 32. ΰαίννμι, I entertain, Opt. Pres. Mid. 3 Sing, δαινυτο (§ 318, D.), 3 
 Plur. caivvar , Fut. δαίσω (Mid.), Aor. tdaiaa (Mid.). 
 
 33. καίννμαι (Stem ic a c), I surpass, Perf. κίκασμαι (I am distin¬ 
 guished). 
 
 34. κίννμαι, I move, additional form of κινεω, Preterite t-tu-o-v, I tcent, 
 Subj. κί-ω, Opt. κί-οι-μι, Part, κι-ών. 
 
 35. τίννμι, τίνύμαι, additional form of τίνω, § 321, D. 5. 
 
 36. όρεχννμι, additional form of ύρεγω, I stretch out, 3 Plur. Perf. Mid. 
 ορωρεχαται (§ 287). 
 
 37. ορννμι (Stem 6 p), I excite, Fut. υρσω, Aor. ώρορον (§ 257, D.), 
 Perf. υρωρα (§ 275,1), I have arisen [Lat. or-ior], Aor. Mid. 3 Sing, ώρτο , 
 arose (§ 316, 38), Perf. Mid. 3 Sing. Ind. όρώρ-ε-ται, Subj. ύρώρηται, with 
 Imperf. Mid. όρεοντο. 
 
 38. τάννμαι, with ταΐ’ύω, τείνω, I extend, stretch. 
 
190 
 
 FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. 
 
 321. 
 
 corresponding Middle form is also in use; e. g., in addition to 
 επσα (No. 5) Ιτισάμην also is used. 
 
 * Fifth , or Nasal Class. 
 
 § 321. The Verbal-Stem is strengthened by the addition 
 of v, or of a syllable containing v , to form the Present- 
 Stem. 
 
 a) v alone, often united with lengthening of the vowel, 
 is added to the following Stems: 
 
 1. Stem β a, Pres, βαίνω, I go. 
 
 Aor. Act. Fut. Perf. Pass. 
 
 ε-βη-ν (§ 816, 1) βησομαι βεβηκα (§ 317, 1) 
 
 εβη-σα βήσω (§ 329, 2) Verb. Adj. βατός 
 
 2. Stem ε λ «, Pres, ελαύνω, I drive. 
 
 ηλά-σα έλώ (§ 263) ελη\α:;α (§ 275, 1) ήλάθην 
 
 εληλαμαι Verb. Adj. ελατεος 
 
 3. Stem <ρ C a, Pres, φθάνω, I anticipate, 
 
 ε-φθη-ν (§ 316,7) φθησομαι εφθάι:α 
 
 ε-φθά-σα 
 
 4. Stem 7Γ«, Pres, πίνω, I drinh (additional Stem ττ o). Compare 
 § 327,10. 
 
 ε-7 τί-ο-ν (§ 316, 15) 7 τίομαι (§ 265) 
 
 5. Stem r t, Pres. τίνω,Ι pay penalty, 
 
 ε-τϊ-σα (Mid.) τίσω τίτΊκα 
 
 τ'ετισμαι 
 
 6. Stem φ Θ ι, Pres, φθίνω, I perish, waste away, 
 
 ε-φθι-σα φθίσομαι εφθεμαι 
 
 7. Stem δ υ, Pres, δ ύ ν ω (with δύω, Class 1), I immerge. 
 
 ε-δν-ν (§ 316, 16) δύσω δ'εδνκα 
 
 εδνσα, I dipped. 
 
 8. Stem δάκ, Pres, δ ά κν ω, I trite. 
 
 ε-δάκ-ο-ν δηζομαε δέδηχα 
 
 § 321. Dialects. —1. Aor. Mich εβήσετο, § 268, D. 
 
 2. Pres, ελάω, Fut. ίλόω, ελάμς, § 243, D., Aor. ελασσα, Mid. ήλάσάμην. 
 3 Plup. Mid. ελ7]\άδατο (§ 287, D.) [ηλάσθην]. 
 
 3. Ep. φθάνω, Part. Aor. Mid. φθάμενος. 
 
 5. Ep. rivw, with τί-ω and τίνυμι , § 319, D. 35. 
 
 6. Ep. φθίνω, φθίω, Aor. εφθίμην, εφθϊτο, § 316, D. 26; with Pres, φθι- 
 νύθω. 
 
 7. Aor. Mid. ίδύσετο, § 268, D. [Pres, ενδννεω, I put on. Compare 
 § 323]. 
 
 Ιτίσθην 
 
 ίφθίθην 
 
 εδυθην 
 
 εδηχθην 
 
322. 
 
 FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. 
 
 191 
 
 9. Stem κ ά μ, Pres, κ ά μ v ω, I weary. 
 t -καμ-ο-ν καμονμαι κεκμηκα (§ 282) 
 
 10. Stem τ ε μ, Pres, τ ε μ ν ω, I cut. 
 t -τεμ-ο-ν ( ιταμόν ) τεμώ τετμηκα (§ 282) ετμηθην 
 
 § 322. 1) The 
 Stems : 
 
 11. Stem a ί σ Ο, 
 
 ΐ ι }σθ-ό-μην 
 
 12. Stem ά μ a ρ r, 
 ημαρτ-ο-ν 
 
 13. Stem αυζ, 
 ηνζ-η-σα 
 
 14. Stem β λ α σ γ, 
 t -βλαστ-ο-ν 
 
 15. Stem δαρθ, 
 
 ε-δαρθ-ο-ν 
 
 16. Stem έχθ, 
 (άπ)ηχθ-ό-μην 
 
 17. Stem ί?, 
 
 18. Stem κιχ, 
 i -κιχ-ο-ν 
 
 19. Stem ο ί δ, 
 
 20. Stem όλισθ, 
 ώλισθο -ν 
 
 21. Stem δσφρ, 
 
 ώσφρ-δ-μην 
 
 22. Stem δ φ λ, 
 ώφ\-ο-ν 
 
 syllable a ν is added to the following 
 
 Pres. αίσθ-άν-ο-μαι, I perceive. 
 
 αίσθ-η-σομαι ^σθ-η-μαι 
 Pres. άμαρτ-άν-ω,Ι err , sin. 
 
 αμαρτ-η-σομαι ήμάρτ-η-κα ήμαρτη-6ΐ]ν 
 
 Pres, ανζ-άν-ω and ανξω, I increase \aug-eo\ 
 αύζησω ηϋζηκα ηύζηθην 
 
 αύζησομαι (Passive) 
 
 Pres, β λαστάνω,Ι hud. 
 
 β\αστ-ή-σω ίβλάστ?]ΐ:α (§ 274 exc.) 
 Pres, δ α ρ θ άν ω, I sleep. 
 
 δαρθ-ίμσομαι δεδάρθηκα 
 Pres. («7τ)ε χ θ ά ν ο μ α ι, I am hated. 
 
 ( άπ)εχθ-η-σομαι (απ)ηχθημαι 
 Pres, ιζάνω and ϊζω, I seat myself. 
 
 Pres. κϊχάνω,Ι meet (compare § 313, D. 6) 
 
 κΊχ-ή-σομαι 
 
 Pres, ο ί δ άνω and ο ί δ ε ω, I swell. 
 
 οίδη-σω φδηκα 
 
 Pres, ό λ ι σ θ ά ν ω, I slip, 
 δλισθ-η-σω 
 
 Pl’CS. οσφραίνομαι , Ρ smell. 
 δσφρ-ι)-σομαι 
 
 Pres . όφλ-ισκ-άν-ω (compare § 324) and 
 οφείλω , I owe. 
 ύφ\-η-σω ωφληκα 
 
 Dialects. —9. Part. Perf. κεκμηώς, Gen. κεκμηωτος. 
 
 10. With τμηγω , ΑθΓ. Pass. 3 Plur. ετμαγεν , with Pres, τεμει. 
 
 Peculiar to the Horn, dialect are: Aor. φά-ε(ν), illuxit , Fut. ~ε-φη- 
 σομαι , from Stem φ «, Pres, φαίνω (φαείνω), I shine , show, Aor. Pass. 
 φαάνΟην. 
 
 § 322. Dialects.—12. Aor. ΐ/μβροτον for ypparov (§ 257, D. Com¬ 
 pare § 51, D.). 
 
 13. ά(Ρ)εζω. 
 
 15. Aor. εδράθον (§ 257, D.). 
 
 18. Ep. κίχάνω. 
 
 21. [Herod. δσφράμψ>, 1 Aor.( 
 
192 
 
 322. 
 
 FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. 
 
 23. Stem ά δ, Pres, άν δ άν ω, I please. 
 
 24. Stem θϊ γ, Pres. θιγγάνω,Ι touch. 
 
 ε-θΐγ- 0 -ν θίζομαι 
 
 25. Stem λα/3, Pres, λ a μ β ά ν ω, I take. 
 
 t -Χάβ-ο-ν Χηιφομαι ε’ίΧηφα (§ 274) εΧηφθη V 
 
 ’ είΧημμαι (seldom ΧεΧΐ]μμαι) 
 
 26. Stem λ ά θ , Pres. Χαν θ άν ω, I am hidden , with Χήθω (Class 3), 
 
 Mid., I forget. 
 
 ε-Χάθ-ο-ν Χησω ΧεΧηθα 
 
 Mid. εΧαθόμην Χήσομαι ΧεΧΐ]σμαι 
 
 27. Stem λ ά χ, Pres. Χαγχάνω,Ι attain. 
 
 ε-Χάχ-ο-ν Χηξομαι είΧηχα (§ 274) 
 
 είΧηγμαί 
 
 28. Stem μ ά θ, Pres, μ αν θ άν ω, I learn, 
 
 ε-μάθ-ο-ν μαθ-η-σομαι μεμάθηκα 
 
 29. Stem ττ ν θ, Pres, π ν ν θ ά ν ο μ α ι, I learn , with πεύθομαι , Class 2. 
 
 ε-πνθ-ό-μην πεΰσομαι π'επνσμαι 
 
 30. Stem τ ϋ χ, Pres, τν γ χάν ω, I meet , with τεύχω, I prepare , C1. 2. 
 
 t -τνχ-ο-ν τεΰξομαι τε-τύχ-η-κα 
 
 seldom τέτενχα 
 
 31. Stem <ρ ν γ, Pres, φυγγάνω, I flee, with φεύγω (Class 2). 
 
 Ohs. 1.— The verbs in 23-31, whose Stem forms a short syllable, 
 insert another nasal in addition to the affix av. In βαίνω (1) 
 and οσφραίνομαι (21) i lias crept in (§ 253), as well as in κερδαίνω, 
 I gain , which forms only the Perf. κεκέρδηκα , from the Stem κερ δα ; 
 all the other forms are regular, according to Class 4. A large 
 part of the verbs (No. 11-16,18-22, 28, and 30) form either some 
 or all the tenses, except those of the Present-Stem, from a Stem 
 in ε (compare below, § 326). 
 
 Obs. 2.—The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
 nouns : το βή-μα, the step ; ή φθί-σι-ς , the consumption ; δ κάμ-ατο-ς, 
 
 Dialects.—23. Imperf., § 237, D., Aor. [la^or] εναδον (§ 237), [άί^σω] 
 
 εαδα. 
 
 25. [Her. Fut. Χάμψομαι , Perf. ΧεΧάβηκα , Aor. Pass. εΧάμφθην. 
 
 ΧεΧαμμαι,Ύοτ}). Adj. Χαμπτόςβ 
 Horn. Inf. Aor. Mid. ΧεΧαβέσθαι (§ 257, D.). 
 
 26. Pres., with εκληθάνω, cause to forget , Aor. εΧησα and ΧεΧάθον 
 (§ 257, D.), ΧεΧαθόμΐ]ν (/ forgot), Perf. Mid. ΧεΧασμαι. 
 
 27. Aor. ΧίΧαχον, I shared with [Fut. Χάζομαι], Perf. ΧεΧογχα. 
 
 29. Aor. Opt. πεπύθοιτο (§ 257, D.). 
 
 30. Also τεύχω , Aor. τετυκεϊν , Mid. τετύκοντο , Perf. τετνγμαι , 3 Plur. 
 τετεύχαται, Aor. ετύχθην , with tile Pres, τιτνσκομαι (§ 324, D. 37), I aim 
 at, Aor. ίτνχησα, I met (§ 326). 
 
§ 324. SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 
 
 193 
 
 the exhaustion ; το \ημ-μα, the assumption ; η λήθ-η, the forgetting; 
 V τύχ-η, the chance, accident; and from Stems which are length¬ 
 ened by € : ί) αίσθ-η-σι-ς, the sensation ; τό άμάρτ-η-μα, the error; 
 ο μαθ-η-τη-ς, the scholar. 
 
 § 323. c ) The syllable ve is added to the following 
 Stems: 
 
 32. Stem β v, 
 
 ε-βν-σα 
 
 33. Stem ί κ, 
 
 ικ-ό-μην 
 
 34. Stem κϋ, 
 
 Pres, βυν ώ, I stop up. 
 
 βόσω Mid. βεβνσμαι 
 
 Pres, ικνοΰμαι, I come, with ικάνω , according to 
 § 322 
 
 'ίζομαι Ιγμαι 
 
 Pres. κυνεω,Ι kiss. 
 
 i -κν-σα 
 
 35. Stem 7 τ ετ, Pres, π i r v έ ω, /fall (compare πίπτω , § 327,15) 
 t -πεσ-ο-ν (for ε-πετ-ο-ν), together with ε-πιτν-ο-ν 
 
 36. Stem ύπεχ, Pres, ΰπισχνοϋμαι, I promise (compare ΐχω, 
 
 § 327, 6 ) 
 
 νπεσχόμην νποσχησομαι νπεσχημαι 
 
 SO likewise άμπισχνούμαι , I wear (also άμπεχομαί), Aor. ΐ/μπισχον , Inf. 
 
 άμπισχείν. 
 
 § 324. Sixth Class , or Inchoative Verbs. 
 
 The Verbal-Stem is enlarged by affixing σκ to form the 
 Present-Stem. This σ κ is added to Vowel-Stems (exc. 21) 
 at once, but to Consonant-Stems after the insertion of the 
 connecting vowel 1 . Several of the verbs belonging to this 
 class (Nos. 2, 6, 7, 13, 14, 16, 20) farther strengthen the 
 Present-Stem by means of a reduplication with the vowel 
 i : yt -γι >ώ-σκ-ω [Lat. (ff)-no-SC-0~\. 
 
 § 323. Dialects.—32. [Herod. βΰνω.~\ 
 
 33. <κω, Aor. ίζον (§ 268, D.), Part, ικμενος, favorable (§ 316, D.). 
 
 34. κνσσα. 
 
 Moreover (to a—c), the Verbs : 
 
 37. Stem άλ it. Pres, άλιταίνω, I sin , Aor. η\ιτον , Mid. άλίτοντο, Part. 
 Perf. ά\ιτί]μενός, sinful. 
 
 38. Stem άλφ, Pres, άλψάνω, I acquire, Aor. Ι/λφον. 
 
 39. άγινεω , only in Pres., I lead, with άγω. 
 
 40. ερνγγάνω , I roar, Aor. ηρνγον , Pres, also ερεΰγομαι. 
 
 41. Stem χάδ, Pres, χανδάνω, I embrace, Aor. εχάδον, Fut. χείσομαι . 
 Perf. κεχανδα. 
 
 I 
 
194 
 
 SIXTH CLASS, OH INCHOATIVE VERBS. § 324. 
 
 As many of these verbs denote a beginning or coming 
 into being, all of them are usually called Inchoatives. 
 
 Stems in a. 
 
 1. Stem γήρα, Pres. γηρά-σκ-ω,Ι grow old (seldom γηρά-ω). Com¬ 
 
 pare sene-sc-o 
 
 ε-γηρΰ-σα γηρά-σομαι γε-γηρα-κα 
 
 Inf. γηρά-ναι (§ 316, 2) 
 
 2. Stem δ pa, Pres, δ ι-δ p ά-σ κ-ω, I run (used only in com¬ 
 
 pounds) 
 
 t -δρά-ν δρά-σομαι δε-δρά-κα (§ 316, 3) 
 
 3. Stem r/ β a, Pres, ή β ά-σ κ-ω, I i become marriageable (compare 
 
 pube-sc-o ) 
 
 ηβη-σα 
 
 4. Stem Ova (from Θ a v ), Pres. Θνη-σκ-ω,Ι die (usually αποθνήσκω } 
 
 ε-θάν-ον θάν-ονμαι τε-θνη-κα (§ 317, 3) 
 
 Fut. 3, τεθνηζω, § 291 θνη-τό-ζ 
 
 ( mortal ) 
 
 5. Stem ί λ a, Pres. ϊλά-σκ-ομαι, I conciliate. 
 
 Mid. ιλά-σά-μην ι\ά-σ-ο-μαι ΐΚά-σθη-ν 
 
 6. Stem / iv a, Pres. μι-μνή-σκ-ω,Ι remember, 
 
 ε-μνη-σα μνί]-σω ε-μνη-σθη-ν 
 
 με-μνη-μαι μνη-σθήσομαε 
 
 \memini] 
 
 7. Stem π pa, Pres, π t- π ρ ά-σ κ-ω, I sell. 
 
 (for tile Aor. and Fut. άπεδδμην πέ-πρά-κα ε-πρά-θην 
 
 άπο δώσομαι) πε-πρα-μαι πρα-θησομαι 
 
 πε-πρά-σομαι 
 
 8. Stem <ρ «, Pres. <ρ ά-σ κ-ω, I say. Compare φη-μί, § 312,5. 
 
 9. Stem χ a and χάν, Pres. % ά - σ κ - ω, I open tbie mouth. 
 
 t -χάν-ον χάν-ονμαι κί-χην-α. 
 
 Stem in ε. 
 10. Stem άρε, Pres, άρε-σκ-ω, I please. 
 
 ηρε-σα 
 
 αρε-σω 
 
 ήρ'ε-σθην. 
 
 Stems in ω. 
 
 11. Stem β ι ω, Pres, (ά ν α) β ι ώ - σ κ - ο μ α ι, I revive. 
 ( άν)ε-βίω-ν (§ 316, 13) 
 
 (άν)εβ ιωσάμην, I revived. Compare § 329. 
 
324. SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 
 
 195 
 
 12. Stem β X ω (from μοΧ, § 51, D.), Pres, β X ώ-σ κ-ω, I go. 
 
 ε-μοΧ-ον μοΧ-ονμαε 
 
 13. Stem βρω, Pres, β ι-βρ ώ-σ κ-ω, I consume. 
 
 βέ-βρω-κα (Part, βεβρώς, § 317, 
 D. 16) 
 
 βε-βρω-μαι 
 
 14. Stem γ ν ω, Pres, γ ι-γ ν ώ-σ κ-ω, I recognize [Lat. {g)no-sc-o\ 
 
 ε-γνω-ν (§ 316, 14) γνώ-σομαι ε-γνω-κα ε-γνώ-σθην 
 
 ε-γνω-σ-μαι 
 
 15. Stem θρω (from θορ), Pres, θ ρ ώ-σ κ-ω, I leap, 
 ε-θορ-ον 
 
 16. Stem τ ρω, Pres, τι-τρώ-σκ-ω, I wound. 
 
 ΐ-τρω-σα τρώ-σω τε-τρω-μαε ε-τρώ-θην 
 
 17. Stem ά λ ancl άλω, Pres, άΧ-ί-σ κ-ο μαι, I am taken. 
 
 ^ ε-άΧω-ν άΧώ-σομαι ε-άΧω-κα ΟΓ ηΧω-κα 
 
 ) ί]Χων (§ 316,12) (compare § 237) 
 
 18. Stem ά μ β X and ά μ β X ω, Pres, ά μ βΧ-ί-σ κ-ω, I miscarry. 
 
 ήμβΧω-σα τ/μβΧω-κα 
 
 19. Stem άναΧ and άν αΧω, Pres, άν άΧ-ί-σ κ-ω, I expend. 
 
 άνάΧω-σα or άνηΧωσα άνάΧώ-σω 
 also ηνάΧω-σα 
 
 j άνά 
 I άνί) 
 
 άνάΧω-κα 
 )Χω-κα 
 
 ) άνάΧώ-θην 
 { άνηΧώ-θην. 
 
 Stem in ι. 
 
 20. Stem π ι, Pres, πι-πί-σκ-ω, I give to drink. Compare πί-ν-ω, 
 
 § 321, 4. 
 
 πϊ-σω 
 
 t -πΐ-σα 
 
 Stems in ν. 
 
 21. Stem κυ, Pres, κν-ί-σκ-ω, I fructify. 
 
 22. Stem μεθν, Pres, μεθΰ-σκ-ω, I make drunk, Mid., I become drunk, 
 
 ε-μ'εθυ-σα ε-μεθύ-σθην. 
 
 Co nsonant-S terns. 
 
 23. Stem ά μ πΧ ά κ, Pl’CS. άμπΧάκ-ί-σκ-ω,Ι fail. 
 
 ήμπΧάκ-ον άμιτΧάκ-η-σω 
 
 24. Stem (Ϊ7τ)α ύ ρ, Pres. ( επ)α ύρ-ί-σκ-ομαι, Τ enjoy, 
 επηνρ-όμην 
 
 Inf. ίπανρ-εσθαι 
 
 § 324. Dialects. —12. Perf. μέ-μ-β-Χω-κα (compare § 51, D., and 
 § 282, D.). 
 
 13. Aor. ε-βρω-ν (§ 316, D. 23), with the Pres, βεβρώθω. 
 
 15. 3 Plur. Fut. θορεονται [with θόρ-νυ-μαι , according to § 319]. 
 
 16. With τρώ-ω. 
 
 24. Aor. επηνρον, Inf. επανρε’ιν. 
 
196 
 
 SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 
 
 324. 
 
 25. Stem ε ΰ p, 
 εϋρ-οι> (Mid.) 
 
 26. Stem στ ε p, 
 
 ε-στερ-η-σα 
 
 Pres, ευ ρ-ί-σκ-ω, I find. 
 
 ενρ-η-σω εϋρ-η-κ-α ευρ-ε-θην 
 
 ενρ-η-μαι ευρ-ε-θη-σομαι 
 
 Pres, στερ -ί-σ κ-ω, I deprive (with στερώ , Mid. 
 στ'ερομαι, I am deprived ) 
 στερ-η-σω ε-στ'ερ-η-κα ε-στερ-η-θην 
 
 ε-στερ-η-μαι 
 
 27. Stem ά λ υ κ, Pres, ά\ύ-σκ-ω, I shun. 
 
 η\υξα άΧύξω 
 
 28. Stem δ ι δ ά χ, Pres, διδάσκ-ω,Ι teach. 
 
 ε-δίδαζα διδάξω δε-δίδαχ-α ε-δι-δάχθην 
 
 δε-δίδαγμαι 
 
 29. Stem λ ά κ, Pres, λά-σκ-ω, I utter , speak. 
 ΐ-\άκ-ον Χακ-η-σομαι \ Χε-Χηκ-α 
 
 ί-Χάκ-η-σα ( Χε-Χάκ-α. 
 
 Obs. 1.— The last three Stems suppress a Guttural before σκ. Sev¬ 
 eral of the Stems quoted form a part of the tenses by affixing ε 
 to the Stem (compare § 322, Obs ., and § 326), especially Nos. 23, 
 25, 26, 29. 
 
 Obs. 2.—The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
 nouns: ό θάν-α-το-ς, death; ro μνη-μεϊο-ν, the memorial; δ αυτό- 
 μοΧ-ο-ς, the deserter; η γνώ-μη, the opinion ; η ΙίΧω-σι-ς, the capture; 
 δ διδάσκ-αλο-ς (from the Present-Stem), the teacher; η διδαχ-η 
 (from the Verbal-Stem), the instruction; and from Stems which 
 are enlarged by ε : το ενρ-η-μα, the discovery; η στερ-η-σι-ς , the 
 deprivation. 
 
 Dialects.—26. Aor. στερεσαι , Part. Pass. Aor. στερείς. 
 
 28. [διδασκήσαι] a secondary Stem is δα, Aor. δέδαον , I taught (§ 326, 
 D. 40). 
 
 29. Ion. form ληκεω (§ 325), Fern. Part. Perf. λελάκυΊα. 
 
 And the Special Verbs : 
 
 30. Stem ά X δ a, Pres, άλδησκω , I become great , Aor. ήΧδανον , I made 
 great. 
 
 31. Stem κΧ ε, Pres, κικΧησκω , with κάλεω, I call. 
 
 32. Stem φ a v, Pres, [^αύ-σκ-ω] πι-φαύ-σκ-ω, I call. 
 
 33. Stem ά π a φ (from άφ), Pres, άιτ-αφ-ί-σκ-ω, I deceive , Aor. ΐ/παφον, 
 Subj. άττάφω. 
 
 34. Stem ά p, Pres, άρ-αρ-ί-σκ-ω, Ifit , Aor. ypapov, / fitted, Perf. άρηρα , 
 Z Fern. Part. άράρυΧα , Part. Mid. άρμενος , suitable , Weak Aor. i /ρσα, 
 I fitted, Aor. Pass, άρθην. 
 
 35. Stem ί κ, Pres, ε-ί-σκ-ω , / make equal (compare § 317, B. 7). 
 
 36. Imperf. ’ίσκε(ν),1ιβ spoke. 
 
 37. Stem r (compare § 322, 30), Pres. τιτΰσκομαι,Ι aim at. 
 
§ 325. 
 
 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. 
 
 197 
 
 § 325. Seventh, or E-class. 
 
 A short Stem alternates with one enlarged by ε. 
 
 A) The enlarged Stem in ε is the Present-Stem; the 
 shorter serves to form the other tenses. 
 
 1. Stem y a μ, Pres, γαμε-ω, I marry (Act. uxorem duco, Mid. niibo) 
 
 t -γημ-α γάμ-ώ (Mid.) γε-γάμ-τμκα 
 
 yE -γάμ-η-μαι 
 
 2. Stem ypO, Pres, y η θ έ - ω, I rejoice. 
 
 ys-yri9~a i I am rejoiced. 
 
 3. Stem ίοκ, Pres, δ ο κ έ - ω, I seem. 
 
 t -ύοζα δόζω Mid. δέδογ-μαι 
 
 4. Stem κυρ, Pres, κν p ε-ω and κύρω, I meet, 
 
 ε-κνρ-σα κνρσω 
 
 5. Stem μαρτν p, Pres. μαρτϋρε-ω,Ι am witness. 
 
 Mid. μαρτϋρομαι , I call to witness. 
 
 G. Stem ξ vp, Pres, ζν p έω,Ι shave. Mid. Σύρομαι 
 
 t -ξνρ-άμη v ίξΰρ-η-μαι 
 
 7. Stem 7Γ a r, Pres, ττατε-ο μ a ι, I eat. 
 
 i -πάσάμην πεπασμαι 
 
 8. Stem p i0, Pres, p ι π τ-'ε-ω and ρίπτ-ω (according to § 249),/ 
 
 throw. 
 
 tppixya ριψω eppupa ) ερριφην 
 
 ερριμμαι l ίρρίφθην 
 
 9. Stem ώ Θ , Pres, ώθ e -ω, I push. 
 
 t -ωσα (§ 237) ώσω (ώθησω Mid.) ε-ωσ-μαι i -ώσθην 
 
 § 325. Dialects.—1 Fut. γαμ-έω, 3 Sing. Fut. Mid. γαμεσσεταε, she zcill 
 marry. 
 
 3. [ δοκησω , ε$όκ7/σα.] 
 
 8. 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. ερεριπτο. 
 
 Besides: 
 
 Cl) Stem γ εγ ω v, Pl’CS. γεγωνε-ω, I call , Perf. γεγωυα, Flit, γεγωνησω. 
 
 b ) Stem £ « r, Pres, δατ'ε-ομαι , / distribute , Fut. δάσομαι , Aor. <5άσσαΓ0, 
 Perf. δεδασται. 
 
 c) Stem δ o v 7Γ, Pres, δουπε-ω , / make a sound , Aor. ί(γ)δονπη-σα, Perf. 
 di-dot>7r-a. 
 
 /) Stem ε ι X, t X, Pres, ει-λε-ω, /Imperf. ίείΧεον (§ 237), Aor. 3 
 Plur. iXaav, Perf. Mid. ίεΧμαι, Aor. Pass, εάλρυ (§ 295), 3 Plur. ά'λευ, Inf. 
 άΧημεναι. 
 
 e) Stem κεΧαδ, Pres, κεΧαδε-ω, I resound , Part. κεΧάδ-ων. 
 
 f) Stem κεν t, Pres, κεντέ-ω, / sting, Aor. Inf. κεν-σα ι. 
 
198 
 
 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. 
 
 01)8 .—In some verbs the Stem with ε extends even farther than the 
 Present-Stem. Examples of the formation of nouns : δ γάμ-ο-ς , 
 the wedding; y ούζα, the appearance ; το μαρτυρ-ιο-ν, the testimony; 
 y ώ-σι-ς or ώθη-σις, pushing. 
 
 § 326. B) The shorter Stem is the Present-Stem; the 
 
 enlarged one in ε serves to form the other tenses. 
 
 .... 
 
 10. Stem a i δ (ε), Pres, αιδ-ο μαι and αίδε-ομαι , I am ashamed. 
 
 11. Stem d X ε ξ (ε), Pres. άΧεζ-ω,Ι icard off. 
 
 ι)Χεζ-άμην άλεζ-η-σομαι 
 
 12. Stem άχθ(ε), Pres, άχθ-ο μ a iff am vexed. 
 
 άχθέ-σομαι ηχθε-σθην 
 
 άχθε-σθη σομαι 
 
 13. Stem βοσκ (ε), Pres. βόσκ-ω,Ι pasture. 
 
 βοσκη-σω ; from the Stem β ο the Verb. Adj. βο-τός 
 
 14. Stem β ο ν X (ε), Pres, β οΰΧ-ο μαι, I will. 
 
 (Augment, § 234) βονΧή-σομαι βε-βονΧμ-μαι ε-βονΧη-θην 
 
 15. Stem δε(ε), Pres. δε-ω,Ι need (δει, it is necessary ), Mid. δέομαι, 
 
 I require. 
 
 ε-δεη-σα δεη-σω δε-δεη-κα 
 
 16. Stem ερ(ε), Pres, not usual (§ 327,13) 
 
 yp -όμην , I asked. ερη-σομαι , Inf. ερεσθαι 
 
 17. Stem ερρ(ε), Pres, ερρ-ω, I go away, 
 
 ηρρη-σα ερρη-σω ΐ/ρρη-κα 
 
 ε-δεη-θην (§ 328, 2) 
 
 Dialects. — g) Stem κ τ υ π, Pres, κτυπε-ω , I ring , Aor. εκτνπ-ον. 
 
 h ) Pres, πιέζω and πιεζέ-ω , I press, Aor. επίεσα. 
 
 i) Stem ρ ι γ, Pres, ριγέ-ω, I shudder, Perf. ερρϊγα. 
 
 k) Stem στνγ, Pres, στυγέ-ω, I hate, shun, Aor. εστνγον and στνγησαι, 
 εστυζα, I made dreadful. 
 
 T) Stem <ρ ι \, Pres. <ρι\έω, I love, Aor. ε-φΙ\-ά-μην. 
 
 m ) Pres, χραισμεω, I help, Aor. εχραισμον. 
 
 Three Verbs in αω with a movable a are here to be noticed : 
 
 n) Stem y o, Pres, γοά-ω, I icail, Imperf. ε -yo-ov. 
 
 0) Stem μ ά κ, Pres, μηκά-ο-μαι, I low, Perf. με-μηκ-α, Aor. ε-μάκ-ον. 
 y) Stem μ ϋ κ , Pres, μνκά-ο-μαι, I roar, Perf. μεμνκ-α, Aor. εμύκ-ον. 
 
 § 326. Dialects.—10. ι^δεσατο, Imperat. α’ίδεσσαι, Fut. αίδέ-σομαι , Aor. 
 Pass. 3 Plur. α’ίδεσθει\ 
 
 11. άλαλκον (§ 257). 
 
 14. Pres. βόΧεται, Imperf. εβόΧοντο, Perf. βεβονΧα. 
 
 15. Aor. εδενησα, once δησα, I icas in want of, also Pres, δένομαι. 
 
 16. Pres, εΐρομαι, Fut. είρήσομαι. 
 
* St 
 
 326. 
 
 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. 
 
 199 
 
 18. Stem εΰ<$(ε), Pres, ε'ύ ο ω, I sleep (generally καθεύδω) 
 
 Augment, § 240 ( καθ)εύδη-σω 
 
 19. Stem έψ(ε), Pres, «ψ-ω, I cook. 
 
 ηψη-σα έψή-σομαι ηψη-μαι ηψη-θην 
 
 Verb. Aclj. έφθός 
 
 20. Stem 0ελ(ε) or εΘελ(ε), Pres. Θέλ-ω or εθεΧ-ω,Ι will. 
 
 7}θεΧη-σα ( ε)θεΧη-σω ήθέΧη-κα 
 
 21. Stem ίζ(ε), Pure Stem εδ, Pres, 'ϊζομαι, I seat myself; also 
 
 ιζάνω, Class 5. Compare ϊζομαι. 
 εκαθισάμην (§ 240) καθιζήσομαι and καθεδονμαι (§ 263) 
 
 22. Stem κ\αυ and κΧαιε, Pres. κΧαίω (κΧάω), I weep. Com¬ 
 
 pare § 253. 
 
 εκΧαυ-σα κΧαιησω "with κΧανσομαι 
 
 23. Stem μ a χ(ε), Pres, μάχομαι, I fight. 
 
 i -μαχε-σάμην μαχοϋμαι (§ 263) με-μάχη-μαι 
 
 24. Stem μ ε λ (ε), Pres. μεΧει μ οι, it is a care to me ; Mid. μεΧο- 
 
 μαι, I care for, take care of. 
 
 ί-μεΧ7]-σε μεΧη-σει με-μίΧη-κε ε-μεΧή-Θην 
 
 (επι)μεΧησομαι 
 
 25. Stem μ ε λ λ(ε), Pres. μεΧΧ-ω, I am on the point, hesitate. 
 
 ι)-μεΧΧη-σα μεΧΧη-σω 
 
 (§ 234, Ohs.) 
 
 26. Stem μεν(ε), Pres, μεν-ω, I remain [ mane-o , man-si\, Verbal 
 Adj. μεν-ε-τός 
 
 μεινα μεν-ώ με-μενη-κα 
 
 27. Stem μυζ(ε), Pres. μύζω,ΙβαοΙ. 
 
 i -μύζη-σα μυζη-σω 
 
 28. Stem ν ε μ (ε), Pres. νεμ-ω,Ι assign. 
 
 ε-νειμα νεμ-ώ νε-ν'εμη-κα (Mid.) ε-νεμη-θην 
 
 29. Stem δζ(ε), Pure Stem 6 δ, Pres, υζ-ω, I smell. 
 
 ωζη-σα δζή-σω υδ-ωδ-α(§ 275, D.) [Lat. od-0\\ 
 
 30. Stem ο I (ε), Pres, ο’ί-ο μαι, I think (compare § 244) 
 
 οίη-σομαι ψη-θην 
 
 31. Stem ο ί χ(ε), Pres. ο’ίχ-ομαι,Ι am off. 
 
 οίχή-σομαι οΐχ-ωκ-α 
 
 Dialects. —19. [Imperf. ί'ψεε.] 
 
 23. μαχε-ομαι, Part, μαχειόμενος ΟΓ μαχεονμενος, Fut. μαχησομαι and 
 μαχεσομαι. 
 
 24. Perf. μεμηΧε, Plup. μεμηΧει, Pcrf. Mid. με-μ-β-Χε-ται (Plup. -το), 
 § 51, D. 
 
 26. Perf. μ'εμονα, I am disposed , strive. 
 
 30. Pres, oi -ομαι, όΐ-ω, Aor. Mid. ύισατο, Aor. Pass, ώίσθην. 
 
 31. Peri, οι χηκα (οΐχημαι) , with the Pres, οΐχ-νέ-ω, according to § 323. 
 
200 
 
 SEVENTH, Oil E-CLASS. 
 
 326. 
 
 (ο'ίχ-ωκ-α, with irreg. Reduplication [§ 275] for οΐχ-ωχ-α. Com¬ 
 pare § 35, a) 
 
 32. Stem όφειΧ (ε), Pure Stem 6 <J> ε X, Pres, οφείλω,/ owe (§ 253, 
 
 Ohs.) 
 
 ,ωφεΧ-ον [ utinam ] όφειΧη-σω ώφείΧη-κα 
 
 ώφείΧη-σα 
 
 33. Stem π ε ρ δ (ε), Pres. π έ ρ δ ω 
 
 ε-παρδ-ον παρδίμσομαι πε-πορδ-α 
 
 34. Stem 7τ(ε)Γ(ε), Pres. πετ-ομαι,Ι fly. 
 
 ε-π(')τ-ό-μην π(ε)τη-σομαι 
 
 (§ 61, c) 
 
 35. Stem ρυ(ε), Pres, ρέω, I flow (§ 248). 
 
 ερρεν-σα (rare, § 260, 2) ρνη-σομαι ερρύη-κα ερρΰην 
 
 (with ρενσομαι ) 
 
 36. Stem σ τ ι β(ε), Pres, σ τ ε ί β - ω, I tread. 
 
 ε-στίβη-μαι 
 
 37. Stem τύπτε , Pure Stem r ν π (§ 249), Pres, τύπτω, I strike. 
 
 t -τυπ-ον τυπτη-σω Mid. τί-τυμ-μαι ε-τνπ-ην 
 
 38. Stem χ α ι ρ ε, Pure Stem χα ρ, Pres, χαί ρ ω, I rejoice (§ 253) 
 
 χαιρη-σω κε-χάρη-κα ε-χάρ-ην 
 
 κε-χάρη-μαι 
 
 Obs . — The ε sometimes appears in all the tenses except the Present, 
 sometimes only in some of them; sometimes it is added to the 
 pure, sometimes to the strengthened Stem: μεν-ε, στιβ-ε, ίζε, 
 όζε, τνπτε. The formation of nouns shows the same varieties: 
 αίδή-μων, shamefaced j y βονΧη-σι-ς, voluntas ; εθεΧη-μων, voluntary ; 
 
 Dialects.—38. Part. Perf. κεχαρηώς, Fut. κεχαρησω , Aor. εχηρατο , and 
 3 Plur. κεχάροντο , § 257, D. 
 
 Besides: 
 
 39. Stem άλ 0(ε), Pres, άΧΘ-ομαι, I become well , Fut. άΧθη-σομαι. 
 
 40. Stem δα, Aor. δέδαον (§ 257, D.), I taught, Aor. Mid. Inf. δεδάα - 
 σθαι (i to get to know'), Aor. Pass, εδάην (/ learned), besides Fut. δαησομαι, 
 Perf. δεδάηκα, Part. Perf. δεδαώς. 
 
 41. Stem κηδ(ε), Pres, κηδ-ω, I grieve, Fut. κηδη-σω, Pert, κεκηδ-α (/ 
 am concerned), Fut. κεκάδησομαι. 
 
 42. Stem μ εδ(ε), Pres, μεδ-ω, I rule, Mid., I reflect, Fut. μεδη-σομαι. 
 
 43. Stem π ι Θ, Pres, πείθω, I 'persuade, Fut. also πιθησω, Part. Aor. 
 πιθησας. 
 
 44. Stem τορ(ε), Aor. ε-τορ-ον and ε-τόρη-σα, I bored through, Fut. 
 τετορη-σω. 
 
 45. Stem <ρ ι δ, Pres, φείδομαι, I spare, Aor. Mid. πεφιδίσθαι (§ 257, D.), 
 Fut. πεφιδη-σομαι. 
 
327 . 
 
 EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. 
 
 201 
 
 ύ μαχη-τη-ς, the warrior; ?} μέΧΧη-σε-ς, the delay; μόν-εμο-ς. remain¬ 
 ing; ύ νύμ-ο-ς, the law ; y όδ-μή, the smell ; ») χαρ-ά } the jay. 
 
 § 327. Eighth, or Mixed Class. 
 
 Several essentially different Stems unite to form one 
 verb: 
 
 1. Present αερε-ω,Τ take; Mid., I choose; Stems αίρε and t X. 
 
 ε'ιΧ-ον (§ 236) αιρη-σω ypy -κα ypi -Θρν 
 
 Inf. εΧεϊν 
 
 εεΧόμι^ν αιρη-σομαε ypy -μαε 
 
 2. Pres, ερχ-ο μαε,Ι go, come ; Stems l p χ and ε X (?;) 0 
 
 ϊ/λ[υ]θ-ον εΧεν-σομαε εΧ-ηΧνθ-α (§ 275) 
 
 Imperat. εΧΘε (§ 333,12) 
 
 Inf. ίΧθεΐν. The place of the Put. is generally supplied by είμε. 
 
 3. Pres, ε p δ-ω and p εζ-ω, I do; Stems ε p δ, l p y, p ε y 
 
 ε-ρεζα ερξω ερεχθην 
 
 Obs .—Tlie original Yerbal-Stem is Pepy, hence to Pepy-o-v (§ 34, 
 D.), Att. εργ-ο-ν , work; from (P)ipy, by the addition of the en¬ 
 largement of the Present i (Class 4), arose (Ρ)ίργ-ε-ω, and from 
 this ερδ-ω. But by metathesis P ερ y became P ρε y, and, with 
 loss of the P , p ε y, whence the regular Present, according to Class 
 4, is ρέζ-ω , i. e ., ρεγ-ε-ω (§ 251). 
 
 4. Pres. ΙσΟί-ω,Ι eat; Stem εσθ ι, εδ(ε) \ed-o\ and ψ ay 
 
 ε-φάγ-ον Flit, εδ-ομαε εδ-ηδοκα (§ 275) ι)δε-σθη v 
 
 (§ 265) εδ-ηδεσμαε 
 
 5. Pres. εχ-ομαε,Ι follow (Imperf. εεχόμην, § 236) ; Stems ε x and 
 
 σ(ε)χ 
 
 ε-σχ-όμην εδρομαι Subj. σχώ-μαε Inf. σχεσθαι 
 
 Obs . — The original Stem is σε π, from which t x has arisen by weak¬ 
 ening σ to the rough breathing (§ 60, b). In the Aor. Ind. the 
 rough breathing is not organic, ε being properly only the Aug¬ 
 ment. Besides this there is a syncope (§ 61, c ). 
 
 § 327. Dialects.—1. [ άραίρηκα , άραίρημαι , § 275.] 
 
 2. Aor. ρΧνθον , Perf. εΐΧηΧονθα (§ 317, D. 13), Part. ίΧηΧονθώς. 
 
 3. [Pres, ί'ρο-ω] Perf. iopya (§ 275, D. 2), Plup. εώργειν , Aor. ερξα and 
 ερεζα. 
 
 4. Pres, εσθω and εδω , Inf. εδ-μεναε , Perf. εδ-ηδ-α , Mid. ιδηδοται. 
 
 5. Pres. Act. εχω, I am occupied , Aor. ί-σχ-ον , Inf. σχεΊν, Part, σχών, 
 Flit. Ιψω, Sllbj. Aor. Mid. ϊσχωμαε , εσχοίμην , έσχέσθαε, ίσχόμενος. 
 
 I 2 
 
202 
 
 EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. 
 
 327 . 
 
 6 . Pres. εχ-ω,Ι have , hold (Imperf. είχον, § 236) ; Stems ίχ and σχ(ε) 
 
 ε-σχ-ον, 1 seized. 1. εξω (Mid.) 
 
 Sllbj. σχώ, Opt. σχοίην 
 
 Inf. σχεΓν, Part, σχών 2. σχη-σω ε-σχη-κα ε-σχε -Gyv 
 
 Imperat. σχε-ς (§ 316, 11 ) ε-σχη-μαι εκτός σχετός 
 
 Mid. ε-σχ-όμην , σχώμαι , etc. 
 
 Ind. σχ-εσθαι 
 
 Ohs . — The original Stem is σ ε %, from which ε'χ has arisen by weak¬ 
 ening σ to the rough breathing (§ 60, V). From σεχ by syncope 
 came ε-σχ-ο-ν, by metathesis σχε, from which σχε-ς , ε-σχη-κα. 
 From εχ came the Future εξω and the Verbal Adj. έκ-τό-ς, while 
 in the Present-Stem the rough breathing w T as changed into the 
 soft breathing, because of the aspirate in the following syllable 
 (§ 53, l·, Ohs.) : εχ-ω for εχ -ω. Compare also νττισχν'εομαι and άμ- 
 7 τισχν'εομαι, § 323, 36. All the Stem forms also appear in the 
 formation of nouns: το σχη-μα, the form ; y εζι-ς, the bearing; εχ- 
 νρό-ς,βπη, tenable. 
 
 7. Pres, μίσγ-ω, I mix , misc-eo ; Stems μ ισγ and μ ι γ, additional 
 form μίγνυμε (§ 319, 18). 
 
 8 . Pres, ο p ά - ω, T see / Stems ΰ p a, ί δ, 6 π 
 
 . είδ-ον (Mid.) υψομαι έ-ώρά-κα ωφθην 
 
 όπ-ωπ-α (§ 275) 
 
 Imperat. Ιδέ Mid. lood (333, 12 ) - 
 
 Inf. εδ-εϊν εωρά-μαε ορατός 
 
 ώμ-μαι ότττός 
 
 Ohs . — On the irregular Augment of the Stem ό pa (Imj>erf. εώρων), 
 § 237. The Stem ί δ was originally P ι δ (§ 34, D.). Compare 
 vid-e-o ; the Aor. Ind. therefore, ε-Ρεδ-ον , with Syllabic Augment, 
 contracted to εεδ-ο-ν , but Subj. ΐδ-ω, Opt. Ίδ-οι-μι. The Perf. of 
 this Stem is οίδα, I knoic (§ 317, 6 ). All three Stems appear also 
 in the formation of nouns : το όρα-μα , the spectacle; το εΤδ-ος, the 
 form , appearance ; y όψι-ς, the sight; τό όμ-μα, the eye , look. 
 
 9. Pres, ττ it σ χ - ω, I suff er / Stem 7 r α σ χ, 7 r a θ (ε), πεν θ 
 
 ε-τ τάθ-ον πεε-σομαε π'ε-π ονθ-α τταθη-τός 
 
 (for πενθ-σομαι , § 50) 
 
 Dialects. —6. Perf. ίίχ-ωκ-α (§ 326, 31), Perf. Mid. ώγμαι , 3 Plur. Plup. 
 
 ώχατο. 
 
 8. Aor. ίίον, Weak Aor. Mid. εείσατο and εισατο, Part, έει σάμενος to 
 the Pres, είδομαι , / appear , resemble (compare § 34, D. 4). As a shorter 
 additional form of the Stem op a, we find in Homer the Stem op (Pop), 
 thence 3 Plur. Pres, επί όρ-ο-νται, they overlook. 
 
 9. 2 Plur. π'εποσθε (§ 317, D. 14), Part, πεπαβυϊα. 
 
5 327 . 
 
 EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. 
 
 203 
 
 Obs. —From the shorter Stems we have the nouns: το πάθ-ος , the 
 suffering ; το π'ενθ-ος, the mourning. 
 
 10. 7 τ<ν-ω, I drink; Stems πιν, πι, π o [Latin /x?-tus]. Compare 
 
 § 321, 4. 
 
 t-TTi-ov Fut. 7 τί-ομαι (§ 2G5) πε-πω-κα ε-πό-θην 
 
 Imperat. πϊ-θι (§ 316, 15) ιτε-ττο-μαι πο-τός 
 
 Ohs. — From the Stem π o we have the nouns: b ττό-τη-ς, po-tor; ή 
 πό-σι-ς, po-tio ; το πο-τηριο-ν , po-culu-m. 
 
 11. Pres, τρ'εχ-ω,Ι run ; Stems τρεχ and δρεμ 
 
 i -δράμ-ον δράμοϋμ-αι δε-δράμη-κα θρεκτεον 
 
 θρέφομαι (§ 54, c) 
 
 Ohs. — Nouns from both Stems: b τροχ-6-ς, the wheel; b δρομ-εν-ς , 
 the runner. 
 
 12. Pres, φέρ-ω, I carry [fero]; Stems φ ε p, l v ε (γ) κ, ο ί 
 
 ί]νεγκ-ον ol -σω εν-ηνοχ-α (§ 275) οί-σ-θησομαι 
 
 οί-σ-τόζ 
 
 ηνεγκ-α (§ 269) ην'εχ-θην 
 
 ήνεγκ-ά-μΐ]ν ο’ΐσομαι iv -ήνεγ-μαι ενεχ-θησομαε 
 
 Ohs. — From the Stem φερ we have the nouns: ro φερ-ε-τρο-ν, the 
 Her; b φόρ-ο-ς , the contribution , tax; b φόρ-το-ς , the burden. 
 
 13. Aorist ε 7 ττον,/ spoke ; Stems ε i 7r, 1 p, and p ε 
 εΤττ-ον 
 
 είπ-α (§ 269) ερ-ώ εϊ-ρη-κα (§ 274, Obs.) ερρί/θην 
 
 Imperat. επτ-έ Inf. είπ-ε7ν εΐ-ρη-μαι ρη-θησομαι 
 
 (§ 333, 12) 
 
 εί-ρη-σ-ομαι ρη-τό-ς 
 
 Obs. — The Stem ε ί π has arisen by contraction from i -ε 7r, and l -επ 
 from Ρε-Ρεπ, the reduplicated Aorist-Stem of the Verbal-Stem Peir 
 (έπος, word, § 34, D. 1). This is the reason why the diphthong 
 εί belongs not to the Indicative alone (§ 257, D.). The Stem ί p 
 (Fut. ερώ), to which the Mid. ερεσθαι, to ask (§ 326, 16) belongs, 
 has likewise lost P , it being originally Psp (compare Lat. m’-bu-m). 
 From Pep, by metathesis (§59), arose Ρρε, after the loss of the P, ρε, 
 
 Dialects.—11. εθρεζα [ δραμεομαι ], δεδρομα. 
 
 12. 2 Plur. Imperat. Pres, φ'ερ-τε [Lat .ferte], Aor. ήνεικα, 3 Sing. 
 Opt. ενείκαι ( ενείκοι ) [Pei’f. ενηνειγμαε], Imperat. Aor. ο7σε, Inf. οίσέμεναν 
 (§ 268, D.). 
 
 13. Pres, εφω (Class 4, d), Aor. εσπ-ον (Stem σε π, compare 5),/ 
 spoke, Imperat. εσπ-ετε, Pres, ίν-επ-ω, Imperat. εννεπε (§ 62, D.), Aor. 
 ενιστνον, Subj. ίνίσττω , Opt. 2 Sing, ενίσποις, Imperat. ενισπε and ενκσπες, 
 Fut. ενίψω aild ενιστη)σω. 
 
204 
 
 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 
 
 328 . 
 
 lienee ε'ί-ρη-κα for Ρε-Ρρη-κα , ερρή-θη-ν for ε-Ρρη-θη-ν, ρη-τό-ς for 
 Ρρη-το-ς. As Present forms, φημί, λέγω, and, especially in com¬ 
 pounds, άγορεύω may be used, e. g ., άπαγορεύω , / forbid ; Aor. 
 άπείπον, Fut. άπερώ , Perf. άπείρηκα. Nouns from the Stems έ ττ 
 and p ε : ?} οψ, the voice / ro ρή-μα , the word ‘ ΰ ρη-τωρ , the orator. 
 
 In addition to these, there are three verbs which redu¬ 
 plicate the Stem in the Present: 
 
 14. Present γί -yv-o μ ai (also yiv -ομαι ), I become. 
 
 Stem y i - y (ε) v and y ε v (e) (Lat. gi-g(e)n-o, , Perf. gen- ui) 
 ε-γεν-ό-μην γενη-σομαι yk-yov-a 
 
 γε-γενη-μαι 
 
 * 
 
 Obs. —From the Stem γεν we have rb ykv -ος, the race, genus ; oi 
 yov -εΊς , the parents , from y ενε, >) γίνε-σι-ς, the origin. 
 
 15. Pres, πί-πτ-ω (from 7ri-7 τετ-ω),Ι fall / Stem πϊπτ, πετ , πτω 
 t -πεσ-ον , from ε-ττετ-ον (§ 60, «), πεσ-οΰμαι (§ 264), π'ε-πτω-κα (com¬ 
 pare § 323, 35). 
 
 05$.— From the Stem 7Γ r ω : ry 7ΓΓω-σι-£, ro πτώ-μα , the fall. 
 
 16. Pres, τ ι-τ p a-u,Ibore ; Stems tit pa and rpa 
 
 ε-τρη-σα τρη-σω 
 
 (§ 270, 055.). 
 
 Irregularities of Meaning. 
 
 § 328. The most important irregularities of meaning cov 
 sist in the fluctuation between the Active, Middle, ana 
 Passive, as well as, on the other hand, between the transi¬ 
 tive and intransitive meaning. 
 
 A) Active , Middle , and Passive Meaning. 
 
 1. Very many Active verbs have a Middle Future with 
 Active meaning (§ 266). This is the case with most verbs 
 of Classes 5 to 8. 
 
 2. The Deponent verbs are to be regarded as Middle , 
 
 Dialects.—14. Perf. 1 Plur. yk-ya -μεν , § 317, D. 2. Compare § 329, 8. 
 15. Perf. Part, πε-πτε-ώς , § 317, D. 17. 
 
 Besides: 
 
 17. ί-αύω, Stem a v, άΡ , I sleep (1 as Reduplication, compare § 308), 
 Aor. άεσα. 
 
329 . 
 
 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 
 
 205 
 
 and also make most of their tenses in the Middle form. 
 Those are called Passive Deponents whose Aorist has a 
 Passive form : e. g., βούλομαι, I wish , φούλι'ιθην, I wished. 
 The most important Passive Deponents are the following, 
 of which those marked * have a Passive Future, which is 
 used alonsf with the Middle : 
 
 άγαμαι, I admire (§ 312, 8). 
 *αΐδέομαι, T dread (§ 301, 1). 
 άλάομαι, I ramble. 
 άμιΧλάομαι, I rival. 
 
 *άρνέομαι, I deny. 
 
 *άχθομαι, I am indignant (§ 326, 
 12 ). 
 
 βούλομαι, I wish (§ 326, 14). 
 δέομαι, I need (§ 326, 15). 
 δέρκομαι, I look. 
 
 * διαλέγομαι, I converse, 
 δύναμαι , I can (§ 312, 9). 
 εναντιόομαι, I am opposed, 
 επίσταμαι, I know (§ 312, 10). 
 
 εύλαβέομαι, I am on my guard. 
 Κήδομαι, I rejoice. 
 
 * εν 
 προ 
 *έπι 
 
 μετά 
 
 άπο 
 
 *δια 
 
 εν 
 
 προ 
 
 θνμέομαι 
 
 μέλομαι 
 
 > νοεομαι 
 
 I take to heart. 
 I am inclined. 
 I am anxious. 
 
 I repent. 
 
 I despair. 
 
 I reflect. 
 
 I ponder. 
 
 I anticipate. 
 
 οΐομαι, I am of opinion (§ 326, 30). 
 σέβομαι, I reverence, 
 φιλοτιμέομαι, I am ambitious. 
 
 Obs .—Several of these verbs have the Middle Aorist as well as the 
 Passive. 
 
 3 . The Passive Aorists of several Active verbs have a 
 Middle meaning: ευφραίνω, I rejoice , εύφράνθην, I re¬ 
 joiced / στρέφω, I cause to turn , εστραφην, I turned — 
 myself ; φαίνω, I show, εφάνην, I appeared, etc. 
 
 4 . The Passive forms of several Deponents have also a 
 Passive meaning: Ιάομαι, I heal, Ιάθην, I was healed · 
 δέχομαι, I receive, εΰέχθην, I was received; in some even 
 the Middle forms have both Active and Passive meanino;: 
 μιμεομαι, I imitate, μεμίμημαι, I have imitated or have been 
 imitated. 
 
 § 329. B) Transitive and Intransitive Meaning. 
 
 When the meaning of a verb fluctuates between Trans- 
 
 § 329. Dialects.—The Strong Aor. ετραψον (τρέψω, I nourish) in Horn, 
 has an intransitive meaning, I grew up. In Herod., άνέγνων (civayi- 
 γνώσκω) means I read, άνέγνωσα, I persuaded ; Horn, y ρίπον, I fell, Aor. 
 to ίρείπω (Class 2), I throw down; ένασσα, I caused to dwell , Aor. to 
 ναίω, I dwell. 
 
206 
 
 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 
 
 § 329 . 
 
 sitive and Intransitive, the Strong Aorist has the intran¬ 
 sitive, and the Weak Aorist and Future Active the tran¬ 
 sitive meaning; when there are two Perfects, the Strong 
 likewise has the intransitive and the WeaJc the transitive 
 meaning; if there is only one Perfect, it is intransitive. 
 The most important cases of this kind are : 
 
 1. Stem στα. Pres, 'ίστημι, I place, Weak Aor. έστησα , 
 I placed, Put. στήσω , A shall place, Pres. Mid. ίσταμαι, A 
 place myself, Strong Aor. εστην, I placed myself- — stood, 
 Perf. εστηκα , A have placed myself, or stand (§ 503), Plup. 
 ζστηκειν , I stood, Fut. εστύ/ξω (§ 291), A shall stand. 
 
 Ohs .—This same important distinction appears in the numerous 
 compounds : άφίστημι, I cause to revolt , to separate , άττέστην, I re¬ 
 volted — separated , άφέστηκα, I have revolted; Ιφίστημι, I put over , 
 ίπέστην, I put myself over , έφέστηκα, I am put over ; καθίστημι, I put 
 down , κατέστην, I put myself forward, καθέστηκα, I stand there or 
 forward. The Aor. Mid. has a specially Middle meaning, e. g., 
 κατεστησατο, he determined for himself (compare § 479). 
 
 2. Stem β a, Pres, βαίνω, I go, is commonly intransitive 
 with the Fut. βησομαι; but in the poets, A cause to go, 
 also in the Weak Aor. εβησα, Fut. βησω ; but intransitive 
 in the Strong Aor. εβην, A went, βεβηκα, I have advanced, 
 stand firm (βεβα-ιο-ς, firm). 
 
 3. Stem φ v, Pres, φύω, I beget, Weak Aor. εφϋσα, φύσω ; 
 but the Strong Aor. εφΰν, I was begotten, πεφΰκα, I am by 
 nature, to which the Pres, is φύομαι. 
 
 4. Stem δ v, Pres, δύω, A sink, hide, often transitive; 
 καταδύω, I cause to sink, also ίδύσα, δύσω ; but εδύν, A 
 Bunk myself , I dived ; iviSvv, I put on / εξεδύν, A put 
 
 off- 
 
 5. Stem σβε(ς). Pres, σβεννΰμι, I quench, Weak Aor. 
 ε-σβε-σα, A quenched, Strong Aor. εσβην, A was quenched, 
 εσβηκα, lam quenched. The Pres, to it is σβενννμαι. 
 
 6. Stem σ κ ε λ, Pres, σκε'λλω, A dry, but Aor. εσκλην, A 
 grew dry, with the Pres, σκελλομαι. 
 
331. 
 
 ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. 
 
 207 
 
 7. Stem 7Γ i, Aor. επιον, I drank , επισα { πιπίσκω ), A 
 caused to drink. 
 
 8. Stem γεν. Pres, yείvoμaι (compare § 327, 14), I am 
 horn, Aor. εγείνάμην, I begat. 
 
 9. Stem ό λ, Pres, οΧΧϋμι, I ruin, strong Perf. οΧωΧα, 
 1 am ruined, perii, Weak Perf. όλώλεκα, I have ruined, 
 perdidi. 
 
 § 330. In a number of verbs the Strong Perfect alone 
 has only an intransitive meaning, as : 
 
 1. ayvvpt, I break, Perf. εαγα, I am broken (§ 275, 2). 
 
 2. εγείρω, I awake, (i lypbyopa, lam awake (§ 275,1). 
 
 3. πείθω, I persuade, “ πεποιθα, I trust {πείθομαι, I fol¬ 
 
 low, obey). 
 
 4. π byvvpi, Ifasten, (e πεπηρα, I stick fast. 
 
 5. μϊ/γννμί, I tear, “ tppwya, I am torn (§ 278). 
 
 6. σηπω, Έ cause to rot, “ σεσηπα, I am rotten. 
 
 7. τήκω, I melt, (e τετηκα, I am melted. 
 
 8. φαίνω, I show (rarely shine), Perf. πέφηνα, I have ap¬ 
 
 peared {φαίνομαι, I appear). 
 
 On the distinction between άνεωγα and «νέο>χα, and be¬ 
 tween πεπpaya and πεπρα^α, see § 279. 
 
 § 331. General View of the Accentuation 
 
 of Verbal Forms. 
 
 The general rule given in § 229, that in the verb the 
 accent is removed as far back as possible from the end, is 
 subject to the following exceptions : 
 
 For all ‘contracted syllables the accentuation is seen 
 from § 87. Hence Sokgj, εΧώμεν (§ 263), πεσοΰμαι {πίπτω, 
 § 327, 15), τιθώμαι (§ 302), Χυθώ, Χυθτ}ς (§ 296). Compare, 
 however, § 307, Obs. 
 
 § 330. Dialects.—9. Horn, οα<ω, I set fire to, Perf. δεδηα, I have caught 
 fire. 
 
 10. Horn, ίλπω, I give hope, Perf. ΐολπα , I hope. 
 
 11. Horn, φθείρω, I destroy , Perf. (οήεψθορα, I am destroyed. 
 
208 
 
 ACCENTUATION OF VEEBAL FOKMS. 
 
 332. 
 
 § 332. Compound Verbal forms follow the general rule 
 laid down in § 85, with the following limitations: 
 
 1. The accent never goes back beyond the syllable on 
 which the first word had it before the composition: άπο¬ 
 δος, give hack (απο), not άποδος ; επίσχες, hold in (επί), 
 not επίσχες. 
 
 2. In double compounds the accent never goes back be¬ 
 yond the first: συνεκδος, give out ivith / παρενθες, put in 
 
 besides. 
 
 3. The accent never passes beyond the Augment or Re¬ 
 duplication : άπηΧθε, he went away ; άφΐκται, he has ar¬ 
 rived. This is the case even when the Augment or Re¬ 
 duplication is not expressed : υπεΐκον, I gave way ; άνευρε, 
 he found again / σύνοιδα, I know along with from οΊδα, 
 I know , forms an exception. 
 
 § 333. The other exceptions are : 
 
 1. All Infinitives in ναι have the accent on the penult- 
 ima : τιθεναι, θεΊναι, ΧεΧυκεναι , Χυθηναι. 
 
 2. the Infinitive of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs in 
 ω is perispome : λαβεΐν. 
 
 3. the same form in the Middle is paroxytone : Χάβε - 
 σθαι. 
 
 4. the Infinitive of the Weak Aorist Active has the 
 accent on the penultima: παιδεΰσαι, ετταινεσαι (§ 268, Obs. 
 
 i)· 
 
 5. so likewise the Infinitive of the Perfect Middle : πε- 
 
 τταιδεΰσθαι, κεκομίσθαι. , 
 
 6. the Participle of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs 
 in ω is oxytone : Χαβών. 
 
 7. the Participle of the Present and of the Strong Aor¬ 
 ist Active of verbs in μ l is oxytone : τιθείς, άποδους . 
 
 8. so likewise the Participle of the Perfect Active : λε- 
 λυκώς (via, ος, Gen. 6 τος ) ; and, 
 
 9. that of both Aorists Passive : Χυθείς, γ ραφείς. 
 
§ 337. FORMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. 209 
 
 10. the Participle of the Perfect Middle is paroxytone: 
 
 Αελυμίνος. 
 
 11. the contracted 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aor- 
 ist Middle is perispome : λαβου. Only the compounds of 
 monosyllabic forms with dissyllabic prepositions form an 
 exception : πφίθου ( περιτίθημή . Compare § 307, Ohs. 
 
 12. The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aorist Active 
 in the following verbs is oxytone : είπε, speak / ελθέ, 
 come · zvptyjind f 1$ε, see j Χάβε, take. Put άπειπε, etc., 
 according to § 85. 
 
 On the accentuation of the three equal forms of the 
 Weak Aorist, see § 268, Ohs. 1. 
 
 Peculiar Forms of Verbs in τπε Ionic Dialect. 
 
 § 334. Dialects.—The Iterative form, denoting the repetition of an 
 act, is frequent in Homer and Herodotus, though foreign to Attic 
 prose. Its characteristic sign is the letters σ κ affixed to the histor¬ 
 ical person-endings, in the Active as well as in the Middle, by means 
 of the connecting vowels o and ε ; hence 1 Sing. Act. σκον, Mid. 
 σ κόμην. The Augment is generally wanting, in Herod, always. 
 The inflexion is quite the same as that of the Imperfect. 
 
 § 335. Dialects.—The Iterative σκ may be affixed to the Present as 
 well as to both the Strong and Weak Aorist-Stems; hence we distin¬ 
 guish Iterative Imperfects , as : εχ-ε-σκο-ν, I used to have , and Iterative 
 Aorists, as : ϊδ-ε-σκ-ο-ν, I used to see ; ε\άσα-σκ-ε-ν, he used to drive ; the 
 former denote the repetition of continuance, the latter the repetition 
 of the occurrence of an action (§ 492). 
 
 § 336. Dialects.—In verbs of the First Principal Conjugation, ε is 
 the constant connecting vowel for the Iterative Imperfects and the 
 Iteratives of the Strong Aorist: μεν-ε-σκον ( μένω, I remain ), βοσκ-έ- 
 σκοντο (β όσκω, I pasture), φνγ-ε-σκε ( φεύγω , I flee ) ; a occurs rarely in its 
 stead : ρίτττ-α-σκον ( ρίπτω , I hurl ), κρνπτ-α-σκον ( κρύπτω , I hide). Con¬ 
 tracted verbs in the Iteratives either leave the two vowels uncon¬ 
 tracted : καλ'εεσκον ( καλεω , I call), or reject one of them : ώθεσκον (ώθεω, 
 1 2 >ush), εΊασκον ( εάω , I leave ); the Stems in a sometimes change αε 
 to aa : ναεετάασκον ( ναιετάω , I inhabit). Compare ναιετάφ, § 243, D. 
 
 § 337. Dialects.—In verbs of the Second Principal Conjugation σκ 
 is affixed immediately to the Stem : ε-φα-σκον (Stem φ a, φημί, I say), 
 
210 FORMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. § 338. 
 
 στά-σκον (εστην, I pilaced myself), ίσκον instead of Ισ-σκον (Stem ες, 
 είμί, I am), κε-σκετο (Stem κει, κείμαι, I lie), τί-θε-σκον (τίθημι, I put), 
 μηγνυ-σκον (ρήγνυμι, I tear). For the Stem b \, as in other formations 
 (ώλεσα, όλέσω), ε is the connecting vowel : όλ-ε-σκετο. 
 
 σκ is farther appended directly to the Weak Aorist-Stem : Ιρητνσα- 
 σκε ( ερητΰω, I pacify), μνησά-σκετο ( μνάομαι, I remeniber). 
 
 § 338. Dialects. — Many Stems of the Present and Strong Aorist in 
 poetry (seldom in Attic prose) have Θ added without any particular 
 modification of meaning. The Preterite is the most frequent of the 
 Stems thus strengthened. The Θ is connected with the Stems some¬ 
 times by a, sometimes by ε. The most important forms of this kind 
 are: 
 
 διώκω, additional form 
 
 είκω, 
 
 a 
 
 ιι 
 
 άμννω, 
 
 ιι 
 
 ιι 
 
 είργω, 
 
 ιι 
 
 ιι 
 
 κίω, 
 
 11 
 
 ιι 
 
 άείρομαι, 
 
 U 
 
 ιι 
 
 άγει ρω, 
 
 U 
 
 ιι 
 
 φθίνω, 
 
 U 
 
 ιι 
 
 ίχω, 
 
 U 
 
 ιι 
 
 διωκάθω, I pursue. 
 
 είκάθω, I yield. 
 
 ήμνναθον, I warded off. 
 
 ipyaQov ( εεργαθον ), I separated, shut off. 
 
 εκίαθον, I went. 
 
 ηερ'εθονται , they hover. 
 
 ήγερεθοντο, they icere assembled. 
 
 φθινύθω. 
 
 σχεθ'εειν, Aor. Inf., to hold. 
 
340 . 
 
 SIMPLE DERIVATION. 
 
 211 
 
 III. DERIVATION. 
 
 Chap. XIII. 
 
 § 339. A word is either simple, i. e., sprung from a single 
 Stem: Xoy -ος, speech (Stem λεγ), χράφ-ω,Ι write (Stem 
 y p a φ), or compound, i. e., formed from two or more Stems: 
 Χοχο-χράφο-ς, speech-writer. 
 
 A) Simple Derivation. 
 
 Simple words are either primitive (Verbalia), i. e., are 
 formed directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 245): αρχ-η, begin¬ 
 ning, from the Verbal-Stem αρχ (άρχω, I begin), or de¬ 
 rived ( Denominat or ah, i. e., formed from a Nominal-Stem 
 (§ 100): αρχα-Ίο-ς, incipient, ancient , from the Nominal- 
 Stem d ρχα, Nom. αρχή, beginning. 
 
 § 340. Nouns are usually formed—whether from a Ver¬ 
 bal or from a Nominal-Stem—by means of a termination. 
 This termination, added to the Stem, is called a derivative- 
 ending or suffix. Thus λόγο-ς· is formed by means of the 
 suffix o from the Verbal-Stem λεγ, αρχα-Ιο-ς by means 
 of the suffix i o from the Nominal-Stem ά ρχα. The suf¬ 
 fixes serve more clearly to define the idea of the noun, or 
 to mark the different relations in which the general idea 
 of the Stem is to be conceived : Verbal-Stem ποιε (ποιώ, 
 1 produce, compose), ποιη-τη-ς, composer/ ποίη-σι-ς, com- 
 posi -tion ’ ποίη-μα(τ), composition, poem · Verbal-Sten? 
 y p a φ (χράφω, I write), χραφ-εν-ς, write?*/ χραφ-ί-ς, writ¬ 
 ing instrument ; ypap -μα, writ ing / χραμ-μη, a line / 
 Nom.-Stem δίκα (δίκη, right), §ίκα-ιο-ς, right, just ; $i- 
 καιο-συνη, righteous??^ j Nom.-Stem βασιΧευ (βασιΧεν-ς, 
 Icing), βασίΧε-ι a, gueen / βασιΧε-ία, kin gdom j βασιΧικυ-ς, 
 king hj. 
 
 Ohs. 1.—Only few primitive nouns are formed without a suffix: 
 ^υλαξ, guard , Nominal and Verbal-Stem ψυλακ ( φυλάσσω ' Class 4, 
 a, 7 guard ); ΰψ, mice, Stem 6 7r, Verb.-Stem i π (είπέϊν). 
 
212 SUFFIXES FOE FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 341. 
 
 Obs. 2.—The Consonant-Stems undergo the necessary changes be¬ 
 fore suffixes beginning with a consonant (§ 44, etc.): γραφ, 
 
 ‘ γράμ-μα, λεγ, λέζις, word ’ due a δ (δικάζω), δικασ-της, judge. Vow- 
 el-Stems readily lengthen the yowel and sometimes insert σ be¬ 
 fore several suffixes, as in the Perf. Mid. (§ 288), and in the Weak 
 Passive-Stem (§ 298): ποίη-μα (compare πε-ποίη-μαι ), σει-σ-μύ-ς , 
 shaking (compare σέ-σει-σ-μαι). 
 
 Obs. 8.—In many primitive words the Stem undergoes a change 
 in its vowel, which generally is like that of the Strong Perfect 
 (§ 278): Stem λάθ, ληθ-η, forgetfulness, compare λέ-ληθ-α; Stem 
 πεμπ, πομπ-η , escort, compare πέ-ιτομφ-α’ Stem \ιπ, λοιπό-ς, re¬ 
 maining, compare λέ-λοπτ-α. The most frequent vowel-change is 
 that of ε to o : Stem πεμπ (πέμπω, I escort), πομπ-η, escort; Stem 
 φλεγ (φλέγω, I burn), φλόζ, flame; Stem τρεπ (τρέπω, I turn)·, 
 τρόπ-ος, turning, manner. 
 
 Obs. 4.—A general rule for the accent of nouns is that the Neuters 
 are almost all barytone (§ 19): το γέν-ος, the race; δώ-ρο-ν, gift; 
 λείφανο-ν, remains ; πνεύ-μα, breath. 
 
 § 341. I. The most important Suffixes for forming 
 
 Substantives. 
 
 A) Substantives denoting an agent are called nominee 
 agentis. The person acting or occupied in and belonging 
 to something is indicated by the following suffixes: 
 
 1. εν, Nom. ευ-ς (always oxytone), Masc. (§ 137). 
 
 Examples of Primitive words are : 
 
 γραφ-εό-ς, writ-ER, Verb.-Stem γραφ, Pres, γράφω (Class 1). 
 
 γον-εύ-ς, begett- Eit, “ γεν, u γίγνομαι (Class 8). 
 
 κονρ-εύ-ς, barb- ER, “ κερ, u κείρω (Class 4, d). 
 
 An example of the not very numerous Denominatives 
 is : 
 
 πορθμ-εύ-ς, /emy-MAN, Nom.-Stem πορθμο, Nom. πορθμός, passage. 
 
 Obs .—Several Masculines in ευ-ς have Feminines in εια (proparox- 
 ytones): βασιλεύς, king; βασίλεια, queen. 
 
 2. τηρ, 
 
 Nom. 
 
 τηρ Ί 
 
 τειρα , Nom. 
 
 τειρα ' 
 
 τορ, 
 
 u 
 
 τωρ v Masc. 
 
 τρία, 
 
 τρία 
 
 TCC, 
 
 u 
 
 τη-ς ) 
 
 τ ρ ι δ, 
 
 τρί-ς | 
 
 
 
 
 τι δ, 
 
 τι-ς „ 
 
343. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 213 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 pi] -Top, 
 κρι-τα, 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 Examples of Primitive nouns are : 
 
 Stem and Nomin. σω-τηρ, deliver-ER, Masc. ) Verb.-Stem σω (σώζω) 
 
 σώ-τειρα , u Fem. f (§ 298). 
 ρή-τωρ , ora -τοη, Yerb.-Stem ρε, Fut. ερώ (§ 327,13). 
 κρι-τη-ς, judge, “ κρι, Pres, κρίνω (§ 253, 
 
 Obs.). 
 
 αί , ΛΤ . ^ ίη -τή-(,ροα ί « ποιε, Pres, ποιεω (Cl. 1). 
 
 Stem and Κοιηιη. ποιη-τρια, poetess ) 
 
 “ αύλη -τ a, “ ανλητη-ς, flute-play-ER, Masc. ) Verbal-Stem αύλε, 
 
 “ αύλη-τρ ιδ, α αύλητρί-ς, u Feill. ) Pres, αύλέω (Cl. 1). 
 
 “ π ο ιη-τ a, u 
 
 Examples of Derived words are : 
 
 Stem πο\ϊ - τ a, Nom. πολίτη-ς, citizen, Nom.-Stem πολι, Nom. πό\ι-ς. 
 “ οίκε-τα, “ οίκέτη-ς, domestic, Masc. ) Stem οίκο, Nom. 
 
 “ οίκε-τιδ “ οίκέτι-ς, “ Fem. ) οΊκο-ς. 
 
 § 342. Β) Substantives expressing an action are called 
 nomina actionis / the following suffixes are the most com¬ 
 mon for them: 
 
 1 . τι, Nom. TL -ς 
 
 σι, “ σι-ς, from τι-ς, according to § 60, a [com¬ 
 pare Lat. tio] 
 
 σι a, u σια 
 
 Feminine, 
 
 Barytones. 
 
 All nouns of this kind are Primitives, as : 
 
 7 τίσ-τι-ς, faith, Yerb.-Stem 
 μίμη-σι-ς, imitation, u 
 
 σκεψι-ς, contemplation, “ 
 
 7 τράζι-ς, action, “ 
 
 γενε-σι-ς, origin, “ 
 
 δοκιμα-σί-α, examination, “ 
 
 7Γ i Θ, Pres. Mid. πείθομαι (Class 2). 
 μίμε, Pres. (Dep.) μιμέομαι (Class 1). 
 σκεπ, “ “ σκέπτομαι (Class 3). 
 
 π pay, Pres. Act. πράσσω (Class 4, a). 
 γεν(ε), Pres. Mid. yiyvogai (§ 327, 14). 
 δ ο κ i μ a δ, Pl'CS. δοκιμάζω (Class 4, b). 
 
 2. μ o, Nom. μό-ς (always oxytone), Masc. 
 σπα-σ-μό-ς, cramp, Verb.-Stem σπα, Pres, σπάω (Class 1),/ draw. 
 δε-σ-μό-ς,Ικη^, u δε, u δέω, u I hind, 
 
 όδνρ-μό-ς, wailing, “ όδνρ, “ οδύρομαι (Class 4, d, Ohs.). 
 
 Obs. —From verbs in ενω substantives in ειά are derived, which de¬ 
 note the action, and are all paroxytone : παιδεύω, I educate, παι¬ 
 δεία, education; βασιλεύω, I am lung, βασιλεία, Icing's ride. Com¬ 
 pare § 341,1, Obs. 
 
 § 343. C) The result of an action is indicated by: 
 
214 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 344. 
 
 1. ματ, Nom. μα, Neuter (accent, § 340, Obs. 4). 
 
 7Γ ράγ-μα[τ], the thing done, Verb.-Stem π pay, Pres, πράσσω (Class 4, a) 
 (almost the same as τό πεπραγμένου, Lat .factum). 
 ρή-μα[τ], word, Yerb.-Stem ρε, Fut. ίρώ (§ 327,13) (compare το είρημε- 
 vov, Lat. dictum). 
 
 τμη-μα[τ ], cut, Yerb.-Stem τεμ, Pres, τέμνω (§ 321, 10) (compare to 
 τετμημενον, the piece cut off). 
 
 2. ες, Nom. ος, Neuter (accent, § 340, Obs. 4). [27). 
 
 Stem λαχ-ες, Nom. Χάχος, lot, Yerb.-Stem λαχ, Pres, λαγχάνω (§ 322, 
 
 “ εθ-ες, “ έθος, custom, u ε Θ, Perf. εϊωθα (§ 275). 
 
 “ τεκ-ες, u τεκος, child, α τεκ, Pres, τίκτω (Class 3). 
 
 Obs. — The same suffix in derived words denotes a quality: 
 
 βάρος, weight , Adjective-Stem βαρύ, Nom. βαρύ-ς. 
 βάθος, depth, u βαθν, “ βαθύ-ς. 
 
 μήκος, length, “ μακρο, u μακρό-ς. 
 
 § 344. B) The instrument or means for an action is 
 expressed by : 
 
 τρο, Nom. τρο-ν [Lat. tru-m\ (accent, § 340, Obs. 4). 
 άρο-τ po-v, plow, Yerb.-Stem apo, Pres, άρόω (Cl. 1) [ ara-tru-m\ 
 λν-τρο-ν, redemption money, Li \υ, “ λύω (Class 1). 
 
 δίδακ-τ po-v, ci teacher's fee, “ διδαχ, u διδάσκω (§ 324, 28). 
 
 Obs. —The meaning of the kindred feminine suffix τρα is less fixed: 
 ξύ-σ-τρα (ζΰω ΐ scmpe), scraper, instrument for rubbing; δρχη-σ-τρα 
 (δρχεομαι, I dance), dancing place / πα\αί-σ-τρα (τ ταλαίω, I wrestle), 
 wrestling school. 
 
 § 345. E) Place is indicated by : 
 
 1. τηριο, Nom. τηριο-ν, Neuter proparoxytone. 
 
 άκροα-τη p io-v, audi-toriu-m, Yerb.-Stem άκροα, Pres, άκροάομαι (Cl. 1). 
 δικασ-τη pio-v, judgment hull, u δικαδ, u δικάζω (Cl. 4, b). 
 
 2. ειο, Nom. εω-ν, Neuter properispome. 
 
 λογ-εΐο-ν, speaking place, from the Nom.-Stem λογο, Nom. λόγο-ς. 
 κουρ-εϊο-ν, barber's shop, u u κονρε v, u κουρεύ-ς. 
 
 Μουσ-εΤ o-v, seat of the Muses, u “ Μούσα, “ Μούσα. 
 
 3. ω v, Nom. ων, Masc. oxytone, 
 
 denotes a place where any thing is in abundance: αμπέλων, xineyard; 
 άνδρών, men's room; οίνων, wine vault. 
 
348. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 215 
 
 § 346. F) Substantives of quality are derived from Ad¬ 
 jective-Stems by means of the following suffixes : 
 
 1. τητ, Nom. τη-ς , Fem. [Lat. tat, tut, Nom. tas, tu.s\. 
 
 Stem παχύ-τητ , Nom. παχύτης, thickness, Adj.-Stem παχύ , Nom. 
 
 τταχύ-ς. 
 
 νεο-τητ , u νεότης, youth, “ νε o, Nom. νεο-ς. 
 
 ίσο-τητ, α ίσότης, equality, u ίσο, u ί'σο-ς. 
 
 2. συν a, Nom. σννη, Fem. paroxytone. 
 
 δικαιο-σ ύ νη, justice, Adj.-Stem due α ι ο, Nom. diicaio -ς. 
 σωφρο-σύνη, soberness, “ σωφρον, u σώφρων. 
 
 3. («, Nom. <α, Fem. paroxytone. 
 
 σοφ-ία, wisdom, Adj.-Stem σοφο, Nom. σοφό-ς. 
 ευΰαιμον-ί a, bliss, u εύ da ιμ o v, u εvdaίμωv. 
 
 The suffix i a, with the vowel ε of the Adjective-Stems 
 in -ες, Nom. -ης, becomes tia ; and when the final o of an 
 Adjective-Stem is preceded by another o, it becomes oict, 
 oia (proparoxytone). 
 
 ά\ί]θε-ια, truth, Adj.-Stem άλτ;θε[ί], Nom. αληθής (§ 1C5). 
 εννο-ι a, benevolence, “ εύνοο, “ ευνου-ς. 
 
 4. ες, Nom. ος, Neuter, § 343, 2. 
 
 § 347. G) Diminutives are formed from Nominal-Stems 
 by the suffixes: 
 
 1. to, Nom. io-v, Neuter. 
 
 7 raid -ίο-ν, little hoy, Nom.-Stem π cud, Nom. παΧ-ς. 
 κηπ-ίο-ν, little garden, “ κήπο, “ κήπο-ς. 
 
 Ohs. —Other forms of to are t dio (Nom. idio-v), apio (Nom. apio-v), 
 vdpio- (Nom. vdpio-v), νλλιο (Nom. νλλιο-ν) : oUidio-v, a little 
 house (oZ/co-c); 7 raidd p t o-v, a little hoy ( πάϊ-ς ); μελό dp i o-v, a little 
 song [μέλος) ; είdvλλ t o-v, a little picture (ε^doς). 
 
 2. Masc. ισκο, Fem. ίσκα, Nom. ισκο-ς, ισκη, paroxytone. 
 νεαν-ίσκο-ς, adolescen tulus, Nom.-Stem νεανία, Nom. νεανία-ς. 
 
 7 raid -ίσ κη, girl, “ π aid, “ παί-ς. 
 
 στεφαν-ίσκο-ς, a little garland, “ στέφανο, u στέφανο-ς. 
 
 § 348. H) Patronymics or substantives which denote 
 descent from a father (or ancestor)—more rarely the de¬ 
 scent from a mother—are most frequently formed by the 
 suffix δ a (Nom. οη-ς) for the Masculine, and only 3 (Nom. 
 
216 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 349. 
 
 - ς ) for the Feminine. The Masculines are paroxytone, 
 the Feminines oxytone. This suffix is added to Stems in 
 a without any connecting vowel: 
 
 Masc. B ορεά-δη-ς, Feill. Βορεα-ς, Nom.-Stem Bo pea, Nom. Βορέα-ς. 
 
 “ A Ινειά-δη-ς, “ Αινεία, “ Αίνείά-ς. 
 
 The same is affixed to Consonant- Stems by means of 
 the vowel i : 
 
 Masc. Κεκροπ-ί-δη-ς, Fem. Κεκροττ-ί-ς, Nom.-Stem Κεκροπ, Nom. Κέ- 
 κροψ. 
 
 Stems in tv and o of the Second Principal Declension 
 also adopt the connecting vowel i, before which the v of tv 
 is dropped : 
 
 ΠηΧε-ί-δη-ς, from the ISTom.-Stem Πηλεν, Nom. τίηΧεν-ς. Homeric ad¬ 
 ditional form ΠηΧηϊάδη-ς (compare § 161, D.). 
 
 Λητο-ί-ό η-ς, from the Nom.-Stem Αητό, Nom. Λ ητώ, son of Leto. 
 
 The Stems of the Ο -Declension substitute i for o : 
 
 Masc. ΎανταΧ-ΐ-δ η-ς, Fem. Ύανταλ-ί-ς, Nom.-Stem T avraXo, Nom. Τάν- 
 ταΧο-ς. 
 
 u K ρον-ί-δη-ς, u K po ro,Nom. Κρόνο-ς. 
 
 Only those in io (Nom. ιο-ς ) change these letters to ia: 
 
 Masc. θεστιά-δη-ς, Fem. θεστιά-ς, Nom.-Stem θεσπο, Nom. θέστιο-ς. 
 
 “ Μενοιτιά-δ η-ς, “ Μενοιτεο, Nom. Μενοί- 
 
 τιο-ς. 
 
 Obs .— A more rare suffix for Patronymics is ior or ίων, Nom. ιων : 
 K ρονιών, son of Κρόνο-ς. The Poets take many liberties with re¬ 
 gard to the metre. 
 
 § 349. I) Gentile names, or substantives describing per¬ 
 sons as natives of certain towns or countries, have the suf¬ 
 fixes : 
 
 1. ευ, Nom. ενς (compare § B41), oxytone. 
 
 Μεγαρ-ευ-ρ, Nom.-Stem Μέγαρο, Nom. τα Μέγαρα. 
 
 Έρετρι-εύ-ς, “ ’Ερετριο, “ ’ Ερέτρια . 
 
 2. τα, Nom. τη-ς, paroxytone. 
 
 Τεγεά -rp-c (Τεγέα), Αίγινη-τη-ς (Αιγ/νρ), ’Η7τε<ρώ-7·?/-ς (’Ή7τείρο-ς), Σικέ’ 
 Χιώ-τη-ς ( ΣικεΧία ). 
 
§ 351. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. 
 
 217 
 
 Obs .—Tlie feminine gentile names end in δ (Nom. -ς) : Μεγ αριδ, 
 Nom. Μέγαρά; ; Τεγεαπ<5, Nom. Ύεγεάτις ; Σικελιωπί, Nom. Σι- 
 κεΧιωτις. 
 
 § 350. II. The most important Suffixes for forming 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 1. i o, Nom. ιο-ς (proparoxytone), 
 expresses the most general relation to the idea of the sub¬ 
 stantive from which the adjective is formed: ουράν-ι ο-ς, 
 heaven -ly ( ουρανός ); έσπερ-ι ο-ς, belonging to evening (εσ¬ 
 πέρα). The l sometimes combines with the final vowels of 
 Vowel-Stems to diphthongs, which then frequently receive 
 the circumflex : ayopa-i ο-ς, for ensis ( ayopd); aiS ο-ί ο-ς, 
 modest, from the Stem a\Zo (Nom. αΐ^ως) ; but δ ίκα-ιο-ς, 
 just, from the Stem δικά (Nom. ςίκη, justice) ; so also, 
 after rejecting the ς, we have from the Stem 0 ε p ε ς (το 
 θέρος, summer), θερε-ι ο-ς, summer-like. By the suffix i o, 
 adjectives are also formed from Adjective- Stems: έλευθερ- 
 ιο-ς, Yibev-alis ( ελενθερο-ς , liber), and gentile adjectives 
 (§ 349) from names of places, which, however, are also used 
 substantively: Μίλ//σ-ί ο-ς (for Μιλητ-ι ο-ς , from Μ/'λητο-ς, 
 according to § 60), Άθηνα-ΐ c -ς ( Άθηναι ). 
 
 § 351. 2. fco, Nom. κό-ς (always oxytone), 
 is mostly affixed to the Stem by the connecting vowel i, 
 and, in words derived from Verbal-Stems, denotes fitness : 
 αρχ-ι-κό-ς, suited for governing ; γραφικός, suited for writ¬ 
 ing or painting (picturesque). Many Verbal-Stems insert 
 the syllable τι before the suffix ko (§ 342) : αισθη-τι-κό-ς, 
 capable of perceiving; ττρα-κτι-κό-ς, suited for acting. 
 From Nominal-Stums the suffix ko, Nom. κο-ς*, forms ad¬ 
 jectives denoting what is peculiar, belonging or referable 
 to the thing expressed by the noun : βασιλικός, kingly · 
 φυσικός, natural y πολεμικός, warlike. 
 
 Ohs. —By means of this suffix are formed the names of many arts 
 and sciences, the Feminine being used substantively, originally 
 with the addition of τέχνη, art , science ; ή μουσ-ι-κή , music; ς 
 
 κ 
 
218 
 
 SUFFIXES FOIl FORMING ADJECTIVES. 
 
 352. 
 
 γραμματ-ι-κη , from τα -γράμματα , littered , grammar , the art of writ¬ 
 ing ; η τακτ-ι-κή , tactics. The corresponding Masculine denotes 
 one who is experienced in such art or science: ύ μουσικό-ς , wm- 
 sician ; ΰ -γραμμαηκό-ς, grammarian ; ό τακτικό-ς, tactician. 
 
 § 352. 3. iro, Xom. ίηο-ς, proparoxytone, and 
 
 4. fo, Xom. εο-ς [Lat. proparoxytone (ους peri- 
 
 spome, § 183), denote the material of which any thing 
 consists : λί'0-ί v ο-ς, of stone (\ίθο-ς) ; ξύλ-ί η ο-ς*, wood-en 
 (ζύ\ο-ν) ; χρνσ-ε ο-ς, χρυσούς, (jold-en \ctUT-eu-s\ (χρνσό-ς). 
 
 Obs. — ιν ο, Nom. <νό-ς, oxytone, forms adjectives of time : χθεσ-ινό-ς, 
 yesterday 1 s, from χθες, yesterday; iap -ινό-ς, vernus ; with enlarged 
 suffix : ννκτ-ερ-ι v ό-ς, noct-ur-nu-s. 
 
 5. ε vr, Xom. Masc. ει-ς, Fern. εσσα, Xcut. εν, 
 
 denotes abundance : χαρί-ε ι-ς, graceful ( χαρι-ς ); νλη-ε ι-ς, 
 wood-?/ (υ\η) ; μμαΟό-ε ι-ς, sand-?/ (αμαΟο-ς). Compare Lat. 
 osu-s : grati osus, silvers, arentmis. 
 
 6. μ o v, Xom. Masc. μων, Xeut. μον, 
 
 denotes the lent or inclination to something: μνη-μ ω v, 
 mindful / τ\ή-μ ω v, patient; επιλήσ-μ ω v, forgetful. 
 
 Obs. —Adjective suffixes of less defined meanings are : 
 vo, Nom. vo-q, oxytone, mostly passive : όει-ν ό-ς, terrible; σεμ-ν ό-ς (σεβ- 
 ο-μαι), venerable. 
 
 λ ο, “ λο-ς, mostly oxytone and active: Ιει-\ ό-ς, fearful; άττατη- 
 λ ό-ς, deceitful. 
 
 μ ο, “ μο-ς, proparoxytone, partly active : μάχ-ι-μο-ς, icarlilce; and 
 partly passive : άοίδ-ι-μ ο-ς, capable of being sung ; akin 
 to it is 
 
 σιμό, u σιμο-ς, proparoxytone : χρησιμο-ς, useful ; φΰζιμο-ς, capable of 
 being fled from, avoidable. 
 
 ες, u ης, Neut. ες : ψ ευ b -ης, false, almost exclusively in compound 
 words (§ 355). 
 
 # 
 
 § 353. III. Derived Verbs 
 
 are formed in various ways from JVominal- Stems. The 
 most important endings of derived verbs, differing little 
 from one another in meaning, are the following, arranged 
 according to their forms of the Present: 
 
353, b. 
 
 DERIVED VERBS. 
 
 —ADVERBS. 
 
 1. ο-ω : 
 
 μίσθό-ω, I hire 
 
 (μισθό-ς, hire). 
 
 
 χρυσό-ω , 1 gild 
 
 (χρνσό-ς, gold). 
 
 
 ζημώ-ω, 1 punish 
 
 (ζημία, punishment). 
 
 2. α-ω : 
 
 τιμά-ω, 1 honor 
 
 (τιμή, honor). 
 
 
 αίτιά-ομαι, I hlame 
 
 (αιτία, hlame). 
 
 
 γοά-ω, I wail 
 
 (γόο-ς, wailing). 
 
 3. ε-ω : 
 
 άριθμ'ε-ω, I number 
 
 (άριθμό-ς, number). 
 
 
 ευτυχε-ω, I am fortunate 
 
 (ευτυχής, fortunate). 
 
 
 ιστορέ-ω, I search 
 
 (' ίστωρ , searcher). 
 
 4, ευ-ω : 
 
 βασιΧεύ-ω, I am king 
 
 (βασιΧεύ-ς, king). 
 
 
 βουΧεύ-ω, I advise 
 
 (βουλή, advice). 
 
 5 . ιζ-ω : 
 
 εΧπίζ-ω, I hope 
 
 (ίλττί-ς, hope). 
 
 
 έΧΧηνίζ-ω, I speak Greek 
 
 ("EXXjjO· 
 
 
 φιΧππτίζ-ίϋ, I am inclined 
 to Philip 
 
 | (φίλΐ7Γ7ΓΟ-ς). 
 
 219 
 
 C. 
 
 αζ-ω 
 
 αιν-ω 
 
 8 . 
 
 vv-oj 
 
 δικάζ-ω, I judge 
 εργάζ-ομαι, 1 work 
 βιάζ-ομαι, I use violence 
 σημαίν -oj, I sign 
 Χευκαίν-ω, I whiten 
 χαλεπαίν-ω, I am indignant 
 ήδΰν-ω, 1 sweeten 
 Χαμπρΰν-ω, I heighten 
 
 (δίκη, justice). 
 
 ( tpyo-v, worh). 
 
 (βία, violence). 
 
 (σήμα, Sign). 
 
 (λευκό-ς, white). 
 
 (χαλεπό-ς, severe, indignant), 
 (ήδύ-ς, sweet). 
 
 (Χαμπρό-ς, height). 
 
 Ohs. 1 . —From a few Nominal-Stems verbs are derived with differ¬ 
 ent endings and with different meanings; thus from δούλο, 
 Nom. δοϋλο-ς, slave: δουλό-ω, I enslave, δουλεύ-ω, I am a slave ; from 
 7 τολεμο, Nom. 7τόΧεμο-ς, war, πολεμε-ω and ττολεμίζ-ω, I make war, 
 Ίτολεμό-ω, I make hostile. 
 
 Ohs. 2. —A desiderative meaning belongs to verbs in σείω, as well as 
 to several in αω and ιαω : γελασείω, I am inclined to laugh; δρα- 
 σείω, I desire to do ; φονάω, I leant to murder; κλανσιάω, I want to 
 weep. The verbs of the last two terminations frequently indicate 
 a bodily weakness or illness: ώχριάω, I am pale; δφθαλμιάω, I 
 suffer in the eyes. 
 
 XV. Adverbs. 
 
 § 353, b. On the Adverbs formed from Adjectives , com¬ 
 pare §§ 201-204. 
 
 Y rom Verbal and Substantive- Stems adverbs are formed 
 by the suffixes : 
 
220 
 
 FOPvM OF COMPOSITION. 
 
 354 . 
 
 δον, oxytonc : άνα-φαν-δ ov, openly ; άγελη-δύν, gregatim. 
 δην (a δην), paroxytone : κρνβ-δ η v, clam ; συλληβ-δ η v , collectively , 
 Irriefly (Stem λα/3) ; σπορ-άδην, scatteredly (Stem σπερ), σπείρω, 
 I sow. 
 
 τί , oxytonc : δνομασ-τ ί, &τ/ name ( ονομάζω ); εΧληνισ-τ ί, grcece ( ελληνίζω ). 
 
 Β) Composition. 
 
 § 354. I. Form of Composition. 
 
 A noun, standing in a compound, appears in the 
 form of its Stem : αστ-υ-γεετων, neighbor to the city j χορο- 
 SiSaaicaXo-g, teacher of the chorus · σάκες- παλος, shaker 
 of the shield (ro σάκος). 
 
 Consonant -Stems are usually united to the second part 
 by the connecting-rowel ο : ανϋριαντ-ο-ποιό-ς (ό ανϋριά-ς), 
 maker of stat ues, statuary / τ rarp -ο-κτόνο-ς, murderer of 
 a father. This o, farther, is frequently inserted after weak 
 vowels: φυσι-o-\όyo-ς, acquainted with nature / Ιχθυ-ο- 
 ψάγο-ς, fish-eating / and regularly stands in place of a in 
 the Stem: μμερο-$ρ6μο-ς, a runner by day } χω po-y ράφο-ς , 
 describer of a country. The o is dropped before vowels: 
 χορ-ηγο-ς·, leader of the chorus ; πατρ-ά$ελφο-ς, a father's 
 brother / it remains, however, where the word originally 
 began with digamma (§ 34, D.): Horn, dnpioepyo-g, Att. 
 δήμιου py υς, artisan. 
 
 Ohs .—Exceptions to these rules are frequent·. Thus Stems in σ 
 often appear in an abbreviated form in compounds : ζεφο-κτόνος, 
 hilling icith the sword (Stem ξεφες) ; τειχο-μαχία , a contest at the 
 wall (Stem τ είχες)', the final vowel of A-Stems is sometimes 
 preserved as a or η : άρετά-λόγος, a speaker about virtue; χοη-φόρος, 
 bearer of funeral offerings. A case-form seldom occurs instead of 
 the Stem-form : νεώς-οικος , shed for ships ; όρεσσε-βάτης, wandering 
 on the hills. 
 
 § 355. The ending of a word is often somewhat altered 
 in composition, especially when the compound word is an 
 adjective: τιμΙ\, φι\ό-τιμο-ς , ctmbitious y irpaypa , ττολυ- 
 7 τράγμων, much occupied. The ending r, c Masculine and 
 
§ 358 . 
 
 FORM OF COMPOSITION. 
 
 221 
 
 Feminine, ες Neuter, deserves special notice; this ending 
 occurs : 
 
 a) in many adjectives formed directly from Verbal- 
 Stems : ά-βλαβ-ης, uninjured (βλαβ, Pres, βλάπτω) ; αυ¬ 
 τά ρκ-ης, self-sufficient (αυτό-ς and άρκεω). 
 
 b) in adjectives, whose second part comes from a sub¬ 
 stantive in e ς (Nom. ος) : δ εκα-ετης , ten years old (έτος) ; 
 κακο-ηθης, of a had nature (ήθος). 
 
 Obs ,—Observe also tlie compound adverbs in e i or /, oxytone: 
 αύτο-χειρά, with one's own hand ; ά-μισθ-ι, without pay; παν-δημ-εί, 
 with the whole people. 
 
 § 356. A verb—without changing its nature—can only 
 be compounded with a preposition. The looseness of the 
 connection in such compounds is the reason for the posi¬ 
 tion of the Augment mentioned in § 238 : αποβάλλω, I 
 throw away · άπεβαλον, I threw away. For the same 
 reason, prepositions are frequently separated from their 
 verbs in the poets and in Herodotus, and in some cases 
 even in Attic prose (compare § 446). This separation is 
 called tmesis. 
 
 When any other word is to be compounded with a Ver¬ 
 bal-Stem, a noun is first formed of the two, e. g ., from 
 λίθο-ς and Stem βαλ, λιθο-βολο-ς, throwing stones , and 
 thence λιθοβολε-ω, I throw stones ; so likewise from ναϋ-ς 
 hnd μάχομαι comes first ναυ-μάχο-ς, fighting at sea, and 
 thence ναυμαχεω ; from ευ and Stem ε p γ, ευερχετης, bene- 
 factor, ευερ^ετεω, I do good. 
 
 § 357. A substantive of an abstract meaning can only 
 be compounded with a preposition without changing its 
 termination: προ and βουλή make προβουλη, previous 
 consultation. In every other compound the abstract sub¬ 
 stantive must take a derivative ending: λίθος and βολή 
 make λιθοβολία, throwing stones / ναΰς and μάχη, ναυ- . 
 μαχία, sea-fight / ευ and πράζις, ευπραζία, well-being. 
 
 § 358. Compounds having the first part formed directly 
 
222 
 
 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 
 
 359 . 
 
 from a Verbal-Stem are rarely met with except in the 
 poets. They are formed in two ways, viz.: 
 
 1. the Verbal or the Present-Stem is joined directly to 
 Stems beginning with a vowel, and to those beginning 
 with a consonant by means of the connecting-vowels ε, i, 
 or ο : δ ακ-ε-θυμο-ς (Pres, οάκν-ω, Class 5), heart-gnawing / 
 πείθ-αρχο-ς , obedient to order {πείθομαι and αρχή) ; αρχ-ι- 
 τέκτων, master-builder; μισ-ό-γυνο-ς, hater of women (μι- 
 σεω). 
 
 2. A form strengthened by σ, and resembling the Weak 
 Aorist-Stem, is joined in the same way to the second part 
 of the word : λνσ-ί-πονο-ς, freeing from trouble; πληζ- 
 ί7Γ7το-ς· (πλησσω, Class 4, a), whipping horses / στρεφί-^ικο-ς 
 (στρέφω. Class 1), perverter of right. 
 
 § 359. II. Meaning of Compounds. 
 
 In regard to their meaning, compound Adjectives and 
 Substantives are divided into three principal classes : 
 
 1. Determinative compounds. In them the second word 
 is the principal, which, without in any way altering its 
 meaning, is merely defined by the first. These compounds 
 may be paraphrased by changing the first part either into 
 an Adjective or an Adverb : ακρό-πολι-ς , high town, castle , 
 t. e ., ακρα πόλις (Horn, πόλις άκρη) ; μεσ-ημβρία, midday , 
 i. e., μέση ήμερα ; φευ^ο-κ:ηρυζ, i. e., φευ^ης κηρυζ, false her¬ 
 ald / υμό-Βουλο-ς, fellow-slave, i. e., όμοΰ ^ονλεύων ; μεγα¬ 
 λοπρεπής, grand , properly, appearing as great / όφί-γονος, 
 late born, i. e., όφε γενόμενος. This class is the least nu¬ 
 merous. 
 
 2. Attributive compounds. In them the second word is 
 indeed also defined by the first, yet so that the latter alters 
 its meaning, and, together with the first, forms a new idea, 
 which is attributed as a quality to another word. These 
 compounds can generally be paraphrased by employing 
 the Participle of εχω, or a verb akin to it in meaning, and 
 adding to this the second word as an object, the first be- 
 
§ 359 . 
 
 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS·. 
 
 223 
 
 coining an attribute to the object: μακρό-χειρ, longi-manus, 
 long-handed, i. e., μακρας ψείρας εχω v (not tlie long hand 
 itself); apy νρυ-τοζο-ς, provided with a silver bow, i. c., 
 αργυρουν τόζον φερων ; ομό-τροπο-ς, of the same hind, i. e., 
 όμοιον τρόπον εχω:> ; γλαυκ-ω7π-ς·, bright-eyed, i. e., γλαυ- 
 κούς οφθαλμούς εχουσα ; πικρό-γαμο-ς, having a bitter 
 » wedding · κουφό-νου-ς, frivolous, trifling * σώ-φρων, of 
 sound sense, sober ; όεκα-ετης, ten years old, i. e., having or 
 lasting ten years · αυτό-χειρ, making use of one’s own 
 hands. 
 
 Obs .—To these belong the numerous adjectives in -ωδής and οειδης : 
 γυναικώδης zzz γυναικο-είδης (είδος), womanZi&e, wOman ish. 
 
 3. Objective compounds, or those of dependency. In 
 them, either the first word is grammatically governed by 
 the second or the second by the first, so that in the para¬ 
 phrase one of the two must be put in an oblique case : 
 ηνί-οχο-ς — τα ηνία εχων, guiding the reins, driver y λογο- 
 γραφο-ς , Speech-writer, i. e., λόγους γραφών ; άζιό-λογο-ς, 
 worth speaking , i. e., λόγον αζιος ; φιλό-μουσο-ς, loving the 
 Muses, i. e., φιλών τας Μούσας· ; ΰεισι-ϋαίμων, fearing the 
 gods, i. e., SeSiiog τους δαίμονας ; χειροποίητος, made by 
 hand, i. e., χερσί ποιητός ; θεοβλάβης, injured by God, i. e., 
 υπό θεού βεβλαμμενος ; ο Ικογενης, born in the house, i. e ., 
 εν οίκω γενόμένος. 
 
 Obs. 1.— Prepositions may be joined with substantives in any of the 
 three principal classes—(1) Determinative: άμψι-θίατρον , a round 
 theatre , i. e., a theatre extending itself round in a circle; άπ- 
 ελεόθερος , one who has been freed by another, not by himself, i. e., 
 a freedman (ΰ διττό τίνος ί ελεύθερος ών) ; (2) Attributive : iv -θεος, 
 i. e., tv εαντφ θεόν εχων, carrying a god in himself ’ god-inspired; 
 άμφικίων, viz., νεώς , i. e., κίονας άμφ’ εαυτόν εχων , a temple encom¬ 
 passed around with pillars ; (3) Objective : εγχώριος , i. e., tv ry χώρα 
 ών, at home; Ιφίππιος, i. e., If 'i-mp ών, being on a horse, belonging 
 to a horse. 
 
 Obs. 2 .—Against the general rule (§ 85), according to which com¬ 
 pound words draw back the accent as far as possible from the 
 end, those compounds in -ο-ς in the Nominative, whose second 
 part comes directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 35G), usually accent 
 
224 
 
 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 
 
 360. 
 
 this Stem if it has an active meaning. They are paroxytone 
 when the last syllable but one is short, oxytone when it is long : 
 λογο-γράφο-ς, speech-writer ; μητρ-ο-κτόνος , motlier-murderer ; 7 raid- 
 αγωγό-ς, hoy-leader ; μελο-πυως, composer of songs. When the mean¬ 
 ing is passive , the second word remains unaccented: αϋτό-γραφο-ς, 
 written hy one's self; μητρ-ό-κτονο-ς, murdered hy the mother; cva- 
 άγωγος, hard to guide. 
 
 § 360. The prefix a v [compare ανευ, without , Lat. in-, 
 Engl. un -~\, before consonants a [compare Lat. i- in i-gna- 
 ru-s] , called alpha privative on account of its meaning, is 
 found in a very large number of compounds, which belong 
 to the determinative class if the second part has arisen from 
 a verb or an adjective, but chiefly to the attributive if from 
 a substantive : ii-y ραφος , unwritten , i. e o v yey ραμμένος ; 
 αν-ε\ενθερος, unfree , i. e ονκ ελεύθερος ; αν-αιΡις, shame¬ 
 less , i. e αίδώ ονκ έχ(νν ; απαι-ς , childless , i. e τταίδας ονκ 
 ί'χων. Determinatives with « v (a) from substantives are 
 rare and poetic: μμτηρ αμμτωρ , unmotherly mother , 
 
 e. y μητηρ ου μητηρ οΰσα. 
 
 Ohs. — Words originally beginning with digamma (§ 34, D.) have «, 
 not civ : ά-εκων , contracted άκων, unwilling ; ά-εικ-ης , contracted 
 αικ-ης, reproachful (Stem είκ, toned)", ά-εργό -c, contracted άργό -c, 
 inactive (tpyo-v, work). 
 
 The prefix δ υ ς corresponds to the English mis, and, as 
 the opposite to εν, denotes something unfortunate, awk¬ 
 ward, difficult: ^νςάρεστος (§ 324, 10), displeased / δυς - 
 βονλος, ill advised , i. <?., κακας βονλας έχων (attributive) ; 
 δυςόλωτος, fa capture (§ 324, 17). Here, too, de¬ 
 
 terminative compounds from substantives are rare: Horn. 
 Δύςπαρις, unfortunate Paris. 
 
PART SECOND. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Preliminary Remarks. 
 
 § 3G1. l. Syntax (σύνταξις, arrangement) teaches the 
 use of the forms discussed in the first part of the grammar, 
 and the way in which words are arranged into sentences, 
 and sentences are combined together. 
 
 2. A sentence is either simple or compound. Every 
 sentence is simple in which the necessary parts of a sen¬ 
 tence occur only once. 
 
 3. The necessary parts of a sentence are : 
 
 a) the Subject, i. e., the person or thing about which 
 something is stated; 
 
 b) the Predicate, i. e., that which is stated. 
 
 Obs. 1.—Every form of the finite verb (§ 225, 4) contains a com¬ 
 plete sentence in itself, in which the personal ending contains 
 the Subject and the Verbal-Stem the Predicate: Φημί, I say; 
 ΐφαμεν, ice said. 
 
 Obs. 2.—In many cases the Subject remains undefined: φασί, they 
 say, people say; or it is not defined, because readily understood 
 by the Greeks: νει, he rains, i. e ., Zeus, for he alone can cause 
 rain ; ίσάλπιγξε, he blew the trumpet , i. e., the trumpeter, for it is 
 - his business. The Subject of the impersonal verbs £e7, χρή , it is 
 necessary , is also undefined. 
 
 4. The Predicate is either Verbal or Nominal; it is 
 Verbal when expressed in the form of a, finite verb : Κΰρος 
 Ιβασίλίυσε, Cyrus ruled; it is Nominal when expressed 
 in the form of a noun (substantive or adjective): Κηρός 
 βασιλεύς r)v, Cyrus was king. 
 
 5. The Predicate must agree with the Subject, viz., the 
 Verbal Predicate in number, the Nominal in number and 
 case, and, when it is an adjective, in gender also : οι ττολί- 
 
 K 2 
 
PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 
 
 226 
 
 § 361 . 
 
 μιοι ενίκησαν, the enemies conquered/ η μάχη μεγάλη ήν, 
 the battle teas great. 
 
 Exceptions, §§ 3G2-3G6. · 
 
 6. In many cases this agreement alone is sufficient to ex¬ 
 press the relation of a Nominal Predicate to the Subject: 
 6 μίγας όλβος ον μόνιμος, great prosperity is not lasting; 
 Αέριοι κακοί, the Lerians (inhabitants of the island of Le- 
 ros) are had. But mostly the Nominal Predicate is more 
 clearly connected with its Subject by the verb to he (sub¬ 
 stantive verb): ο μεγας όλβος ού μόνιμός εστιν, Αέριοι κακοί 
 είσιν. This verb, thus used, is called the Copula. 
 
 7. The intransitive and passive verbs, which denote to 
 become , be made , appear , be named , designated , chosen , and 
 the like, in order to produce a complete sentence, often re¬ 
 quire a Nominal Predicate along with the Verbal one. In 
 this case also the Nominal Predicate must agree with the 
 Subject: Κύρος εγενετο βασιλεύς, Cyrus became Mug 9 Cy¬ 
 rus rex factus est. Compare § 392. 
 
 8. The Greek language expresses many definitions of 
 time, order, and kind, less frequently of place, by adjec¬ 
 tives , which are expressed in English by adverbs or prepo¬ 
 sitions with substantives. These adjectives, which must 
 agree with the Subject, are to be considered as supple¬ 
 mentary Predicates : τριταίοι άττηλΟον, they went away on 
 the third day / Αακε^αιμόνιοι ύστεροι άφίκοντο, the Lace- 
 deemonians arrived later,posteriores advenerunt; όρκιός 
 σοι λέγω, I tell you on oath. 
 
 On tlie similar use of the participle as a supplementary Predicate, 
 see § 589, etc. 
 
 9. A simple sentence is enlarged by an Object being add¬ 
 ed to the verb. The Object is that to which the action of 
 the verb extends : ο I ' Αθηναίοι άττεκτειναν τον Σωκράτην, 
 
 the Athenians hilled Socrates. 
 
 On the different kinds of Objects and the manner in which they 
 are indicated, see §§ 395-402. 
 
§ 361 . 
 
 Ρ RELI MI X A R Y R E MARKS. 
 
 227 
 
 10. The Active verbs, which correspond in meaning to 
 the Intransitive and Passive ones mentioned in 7 , i. e the 
 verbs which denote to make , name , designate , choose , and 
 the like, frequently also require a Nominal Predicate. 
 But, as this belongs to the Object, it must agree with it: 
 ot ΙΙερσαι τον Kvpov εΐΧοντο βασιΧεα, the Ρ ersians chose 
 Cyrus king [ Per see Cyrum regem elegerunt\ Compare 
 § 404. This kind of Predicate is called a Dependent Pred¬ 
 icate. As the Dependent Predicate here appears in the 
 Accusative, so it may in other cases appear in the Genitive 
 or Dative. Compare § 438 ; Ohs. § 589, etc. 
 
 11. Another enlargement of the sentence is the Attri- 
 hute , i. e., any nominal definition added to a substantive as 
 essentially belonging to it and forming with it one idea: 
 καλός* 'ίππος, a fine horse ,* ο παρών καιρός, the present time 
 (the present). 
 
 Ohs .—The Greek language in many cases adds an Attribute to the 
 designation of a person, expressive of a generic idea : Horn, ήρωες 
 Ααναοί , ye heroes Denial (ye warring Danai); άνδρες δικασταί , ye 
 judges , judices. 
 
 12. Different from the Attribute is the Apposition. 
 Apposition is such a subordinate definition added to a sub¬ 
 stantive as does not exactly form one idea with it, but is 
 superadded rather for describing or illustrating it, and 
 hence might generally be expressed in the form of a de¬ 
 scriptive clause : Υίαρυσατις, ?) του K Ορου μητηρ, τούτον 
 μα ΧΧον εφίΧει ί) τον Άρταζέρζην, Ρ ary satis , the mother ofi 
 Cyrus —who was Cyrus’s mother —loved him more than 
 Artaxerxes; εντεύθεν Κύρος εζεΧαύνει Sia Φρυγίας εις Κο¬ 
 λοσσούς*, πόΧιν οικουμένην, εύ^ιιίμονα και μεγαΧην, from 
 there Cyrus marches through Phrygia to Colossi , a popu¬ 
 lous, prosperous, and large city (which was a . . . city). 
 
 The Attribute and Apposition must agree with the sub¬ 
 stantive to which they belong, in the same way as the 
 Predicate ( 5 , 7 ) 
 
228 
 
 NUMBER AND GENDER. 
 
 362 . 
 
 Chap. XIV. —Number and Gender. 
 
 § 362. The singular sometimes has a collective sense, de- 
 noting a plurality : εσ θ ή g, clothing , clothes ; πλίνθος , 
 bricks ; η ίππο ς, cavalry; η « σ π ί ς, the heavy-armed. 
 
 Sometimes a Predicate or Apposition in the Plural re¬ 
 fers to collective substantives in the Singular: ’ Αθηναίων 
 το πλήθος ο ϊ o vr a l "Ιππαρχον τύραννον οντα αποθανιίν , 
 the mass of the Athenians believe Hipparchus died as 
 ruler / το στράτευμα επορίζετο σίτον κ όπτοντες τους 
 βοΰς καί 6 νους, the army obtained food by killing the oxen 
 and asses. 
 
 A Plural is formed in Greek from many words, especial¬ 
 ly abstracts, which have no plural in English, especially 
 when the repetition of an idea is to be expressed : ai επ i- 
 φάνειαι καί λαμπρότητες εκ των αγώνων γίγνεσθαι 
 φιλοϋσιν, celebrity and glory usually arise from the con¬ 
 tests y εμοί αί σαί μεγάλαι ευτυχίαι ουκ άρέσκονσιν, your 
 (repeated) great success does not please me ; Horn, πάντες 
 θάνατοι στυγεροί , all kinds of death are hateful. 
 
 Obs. 1.—Poets frequently use the Plural in a generic sense where 
 we employ the Singular with the indefinite article : ούκ αν γυναι¬ 
 κών ησσονες καλοίμεθ’ αν, I should not like to be called inferior to a 
 woman ; φίλοι, a friend. 
 
 Obs. 2 .—The speaker often uses the first person Plural of himself 
 [compare Lat. nos]. In this case the Masculine is used even 
 when a woman is the speaker. Thus Plectra says : πεσονμεθ’, 
 εί χρή, 7τ ατρί τιμωρούμενοι, I will fall, if it must be, as my father's 
 avenger. 
 
 Obs. 3.—In Homer there are many Plurals of abstract ideas, which 
 ■we express in the Singular; the Plural, however, properly de¬ 
 notes the various manifestations of such ideas: ιπποούν^ς 
 εκ'εκαστο, by horsemanship he was distinguished / άφ pa δ iy σι νόοιο , 
 in the foolishness (the foolish thoughts) of his mind. 
 
 § 363. The Neuter Plural comes very near in its mean¬ 
 ing to the Singular. This explains the peculiar Greek 
 custom, that the Neuter Plural has the verb in the Sin- 
 
§ 366 . 
 
 229 
 
 NUMBER AND GENDER. 
 
 gular : πως τ αΰ τ α πανσεται', how is this to end f τα 
 πράγματα ταϋτα δεινά ε σ τ ι ν, these things are terrible. 
 
 Obs. 1.—Some Plural Neuters, which denote a plurality of persons, 
 sometimes have the verb in the Plural, as : τα τ-έλ?/, in the sense 
 of the authorities; τά ΐθνη, the peoples. 
 
 Obs. 2.—The Homeric and the Common Greek Dialects (Introduc¬ 
 tion, 4) generally allow the Plural Verb with the Neuter Plural: 
 Horn, σπάρτα λελυντα i, the ropes are loosed. 
 
 § 364. With an indefinite Neuter Subject (in English, 
 it) the Adjective Predicate is frequently in the Plural: 
 αδύνατα εστιν άποφυγεϊν, 'it is impossible to escape y this 
 is the case especially with the Verbal Adjective in τεο-ς* : 
 ε 7 r ι χε ι ρ η τ ε a rjv, it was to he attempted. 
 
 § 365. When two persons or things are spoken of, the 
 Plural is always admissible as well as the Dual, and both 
 numbers may be used in referring to the same thing: 
 εγεΧασάτην άμφω, βΧεφαντες εις* άΧΧμΧου ς, they 
 both laughed after looking at one another y δοτέ παρά¬ 
 δειγμα, ώ Αάχης τε καί Νικία, give an example, Laches and 
 Nicias y ώ Αάχης τε και Νικία, είπατον, Ο Laches and 
 Nicias say. 
 
 § 366. The Neuter of an adjective in the Singular as 
 well as in the Plural easily becomes a substantive : εν 
 μ t σ οι, in medio , in the midst y εν τω π a p ο v r i, at the 
 present moment , for the present y εκ π ο XX ον, for a 
 long time y δεινά, terrible things. 
 
 Hence a Neuter Adjective often stands as Predicate to 
 one or more Masculine or Feminine substantives to ex¬ 
 press a class or genus in general : Horn, ούκ αγαθόν 
 ποΧνκοιρανίη, the government of many is not a good thing y 
 όρθον άΧηθει αεί, truth is always the right thing y δεινόν 
 οι πολλοί, κακούργους όταν εχωσι προστατας·, a bad thing 
 is the many when they have base leaders y ταραχαί και 
 στάσεις ο X ε θ p i a ταίς ττυλεσιν, disturbance and discord 
 are ruinous to states. 
 
230 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 367 . 
 
 § 367. The demonstrative pronoun, instead of being in 
 the Neuter as in German, frequently agrees in gender and 
 number with the Predicate to which it refers, iust as in 
 Latin: οντοί είσιν ανδρες, those are men, οντος ορος 
 εστ\ δικαιοσύνης αΧηθη τε Xeyeiv και a civ Χάβρ τις «7ΓΟ διδο'- 
 ναι, this is the idea of justice, to speech the truth, and to 
 (jive hade what we have received \hcec notio justitice est\ 
 The relative pronoun also often agrees in Gender and 
 Number, not with the preceding substantive to which it 
 refers, but with the substantive following, which is added 
 as a Predicate : φίΧου , 6 μεγίστον ciyaO ον εστιν , ού φρον- 
 τίζονσιν, they do not care for a friend, which is the cjrecct- 
 est good. 
 
 Chap. XV.—The Article. 
 
 § 368. The Article ο, η, το is originally a demonstrative 
 pronoun, and still employed as such in Homer, both in a 
 substantive and adjective sense, and frequently also in the 
 language of the other poets : Horn, r rj v εγώ ον λύσω, 
 HER I will not give up / poet, τον, ώ Ζεν πατερ, φθίσον, 
 him, father Zeus, destroy Horn. φΟίσει σε ro σον μένος, 
 this thy courage will he thy ruin. 
 
 § 369. The Article in this demonstrative sense is also 
 employed in the following cases in Attic prose : 
 
 1. In connection with μεν and cl : ο μίν, the one / 6 δε, 
 the other. 
 
 Ohs .—Used adverbially, το ( τά ) μεν — to (rd) δε, mean partly — 
 partly. 
 
 2. Sometimes also with καί and 3ε : και τον κεΧεύσαι , 
 and that he ordered / τον καί rov, the one and the other . 
 
 3. In προ τοΰ, before that, formerly. 
 
 § 370. The real Article generally corresponds to the 
 English definite article. It serves to set forth an object. 
 
§ 374 . 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 231 
 
 either as a single one (the individualizing article) or as a 
 class (the generic article). 
 
 Obs. — j, ?}, ro in Homer almost always lias a demonstrative power. 
 Yet in many cases—compare especially § 379—the use of these 
 forms approaches very near to that of the Attic Article. The 
 Article, however, in Homer is scarcely ever necessary , and is fre¬ 
 quently omitted also in the Tragic writers. 
 
 § 371. l. The Individualizing Article sets forth a sin¬ 
 gle object above others of the same kind, and that: 
 
 d) as known or having been pointed out before : Herod. 
 Χαλκίδας τας hr Αρτεμισίω είκοσι νηας παρείχοντο, the 
 Chalcideans f urnished the (before mentioned) twenty ships 
 at Artemision · Εερζης ay dp ας την άν αριθμητόν στρατιάν 
 ηλθεν επ\ την Ελλάδα, after having collected the (well- 
 known) innumerable army, Xerxes marched ccgaimt 
 Greece. 
 
 Obs. —In this sense proper names also, which in general do not 
 need it, may take the Article : ύ Σοκράτης, Socrates , whom you 
 know, or who was mentioned before. 
 
 § 372. b) A thing as distinguished from others by the 
 addition of distinguishing circumstances: 6 τών Αθηναίων 
 $ημος, the Athenian people (no other) ; η πόλις ην πολιαρ- 
 κουμεν, the city which we are besieging (just this). 
 
 § 373. The distinguishing circumstance expressed by 
 the Article is often indicated in English by the possessive 
 pronoun : έκαστος των ^ημιoυpyώv τ η ν τέχνην καλώς X 
 ειργάζετο, each of the artisans practised his art well. 
 
 § 374. In connexion with numerals, the Article some¬ 
 times denotes that the number to which it is added stands 
 in a defined relation to another number: τα δυο μέρη, two 
 thirds', τών τριηρων τριακοσίων ονσών τών πασών τας 
 ΰιακοσίας η πόλις παρεσχετο, of the triremes , of which there 
 were three hundred in all, the city furnished two hun¬ 
 dred. The Article has a similar effect with quantitative 
 adjectives of a more general kind : πολλοί, many — οι ττολ' 
 
232 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 375 . 
 
 Xol, most y πΧεονες, more —oi πΧεονες, the greater part y 
 άλλοι, alii —oi aXXot, cceteri y οΧίγοι,α few —oi ολίγο», the 
 
 oligarchs. 
 
 § 375. 2. The Generi c Article indicates a whole class of 
 homogeneous objects: oi πολίται, all the citizens y ό ρητωρ, 
 the orator (by profession) ; 3a τον στρατιώτην τον αρχοντα 
 μαΧΧον η τούς ί τοΧεμίους φοβείσθαι , the soldier must fear 
 his superior rather than the enemy. 
 
 Obs. —Hence the Article may also he used with proper names in 
 the plural when a whole class is to be described: οί Αημοσθένεω, 
 orators like Demosthenes (a Demosthenes, compare § 362, Obs. 1). 
 
 § 376. The Article is not used when a substantive only 
 expresses an idea in general: ανθρώπου ψυχή τού Θείου 
 μετεχει, man’s soul partakes of the divine y so θεός de¬ 
 notes the deity y b θεός, a particular god y so likewise, in 
 many other current expressions, the more ancient method 
 of not using the Article has been preserved: νυκτός, by 
 night y ημέρας, by day j επί θαΧάσσρ, at sea y προς αστυ, 
 to toion y κατ' αγρόν, in the country y κατά γης, under the 
 earth y iv eft a, on the right y εξαιρώ Χόγου, 1 exempt. 
 
 § 377. The Article is omitted with a number of sub¬ 
 stantives, which by custom have almost acquired the force 
 of proper names : βασιΧεύς, the king (of the Persians); 
 πρύτανεις, the presidents (as officials); εν άκροπόΧει, in the 
 Acropolis (Athens). 
 
 § 378. The Predicate (§ 361, 3, io) generally has ng_ 
 Article : Κύρος* εγενετο βασιΧεύς των Π ερσών, Cyrus 
 became Icing op the Persians y πόνος εύκΧείας π a τ η ρ, 
 labor is father of fame y oi Αθηναίοι Γ ΙερικΧεα ε'ίΧοντο 
 στρατηγόν, the Athenians chose Pericles genered (com¬ 
 pare §§ 387, 392, 403, and 438, Obs. 
 
 § 379. By means of the Article, any adjective, partici¬ 
 ple, or adverb, as well as the infinitive, may be made a 
 substantive : Horn, b γέρων, the old man y oi πΧούσιοι, 
 the rich y b Χεγων, the speaker ; b πίΧας, the neighbor y oi 
 
385 . 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 233 
 
 παρόντες, those present j τά κάτω, the-under (part) ; oi πά¬ 
 λαι, the ancients / το μισείν, hating or hatred. 
 
 Obs. —Witli the Neuter Article, any word, or even a whole sentence, 
 may be represented as one object: το άνηρ, the word άνήρ or the 
 idea “ man το Τνώθι σεαυτόν , the saying or rule “ Know thy¬ 
 self.” 
 
 § 380. The Generic Article (§ 375) generalizes the idea 
 of & participle, which then is to be translated by a relative 
 phrase: ποιείτω τούτο ο βουλόμενος, do that, who willy μη 
 ζητείτε τον ταΰτα λεζοντα, seelu not (one) who will say this 
 (compare § 500). 
 
 § 881. By the Article, many adverbs, placed between it and a sub¬ 
 stantive, become attributive adjectives: oi τότε άνθρωποι, the people of 
 that time; η παραυτίκα ηδονη, the momentary pleasure; a l ενθάδε 
 ■γυναίκες, the women of this place; η ay αν ελευθερία, the excessive free¬ 
 dom. 
 
 § 382. In the same way, a genitive, or a preposition with a substan¬ 
 tive, placed between the Article and another substantive, becomes 
 an attributive clause: τά των ’Αθηναίων πράγματα, the affairs of the 
 Athenians; oi εν τη πύλει άνθρωποι, the people in the city; η καθ’ ημέραν 
 τροφή, the daily nourishment; ai άνεν λυπών ηδοναί, the painless pleas¬ 
 ures. 
 
 § 383. The Article often stands alone, sometimes with 
 the Genitive of a substantive (compare §§ 409, 410), some¬ 
 times with a preposition followed by a substantive; in 
 such a construction the Article has the force of a substan¬ 
 tive (§ 379): τά των 'Αθηναίων, the affairs (possessions, 
 interests) of the Athenians ; οϊ εν ry πόλει, the (people) in 
 the city / τά μετά ταΰτα, what follows, the later (events). 
 
 § 384. When a substantive with an attributive (§ 361, 
 ll) adjective has the Article, the adjective stands betioeen 
 the substantive and the article : 6 αγαθός άνηρ, the good 
 man. 
 
 § 385. If the substantive alone is to be prominent, and 
 the adjective to be added as apposition (§ 361, 12 ), the 
 substantive stands first, and the adjective with the article 
 follows, thus: 
 
234 
 
 TIIE ARTICLE. 
 
 386 . 
 
 a) The substantive without Article, when the case is 
 such that the substantive, if put alone, would have no arti¬ 
 cle : tl όιαφερει άνθρωπος άκρατης θηρίου τον άκρατε- 
 σ τ a · ο υ ; in what does cm ungovernable mcm differ from 
 the most ungovernable beast f for if θηρίου stood alone it 
 would be without Article, θηρίου, from a beast. 
 
 b) The substantive has the Article when by itself, even 
 without an adjective, it must have the Article : οί Χίοι το 
 τείχος περιείΧον το καινόν, the Chians pulled down (their) 
 wall — the new one (which they themselves had built); for, 
 even without the adjective, it would have to be τό τείχος 
 περιείΧον (§ 373). 
 
 § 386. The same rule holds good with regard to the po¬ 
 sition of the attributive additions mentioned in §§ 381 and 
 382 : 6 Αθηναίων $ημος, the Athenian people ,* 6 Sifuoc, 
 ο τών 'Αθηναίων, the people, that is, the Athenian / ό μετά 
 ταΰτα χρόνος, the after time j ο χρόνος ο μετά ταΰτα,υΐβ 
 time which followed this. 
 
 § 387. An adjective which, without the Article, either 
 precedes or follows a substantive having the Article, is pre¬ 
 dicative, i. e., the character is assigned to the substantive 
 only by this word (§ 361, 4, 8, and 10) : αγαθός 6 άνηρ or ύ 
 άνηρ αγαθός (viz., εστίν ), the man is good / άπαντες εχομεν 
 τό σώμα θνητόν, we all have a body (which is) mortal. 
 The translation may often be effected by a relative clause : 
 οι ’ Αθηναίοι ηγούντο αυτονόμων τό πρώτον συμμάχων, the 
 Athenians had the lead of allies (who) at first (were) inde¬ 
 pendent / φαίνομαι μεγάΧας τάς υποσχέσεις ποιούμενος, I 
 seem to make promises which are great. Compare § 378. 
 
 Obs .—With proper names, the use of the Article is very uncertain 
 when the class is added to which they belong: ό Ευφράτης ποτα¬ 
 μός 01* ΰ ποταμός ό Ευφράτης , the river Euphrates / ή Α’ίτνη τό όρος, 
 Mount Etna ; Σικελία η ϊ'ησος, the island Op Sicily / η πόλις οι Ταρ¬ 
 σοί, the city of Tarsi. 
 
 § 388. The possessive pronoun is preceded by the Arti¬ 
 cle when a single definite object is referred to : ό εμός 
 
§ 391 . 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 235 
 
 εταίρος, my (particular) friend} έμός εταίρος, a friend of 
 mine. 
 
 § 389. αυτός , as a predicate, put before or after a sub¬ 
 stantive with the Article, means self: αυτός ό πατήρ or o 
 πατήρ αυτός , tlie father himself ipse pater / but as an at¬ 
 tribute it is put between the Article and the substantive, 
 and means same : ύ αυτός ανήρ, the same man , idem vir. 
 
 With the demonstrative pronouns ούτος, όύε, εκείνος, a 
 substantive, not being a predicate, has regularly the Article: 
 ούτος d ανηρ or o ain)p ούτος, this man / εκείνο to Saipov, 
 that gift . But when the substantive is a predicate the 
 Article is wanting : εν Πέρσαις νόμος έστιν ούτος , among 
 the Persians this is law. Compare § 367. 
 
 § 390. πας without the Article before a substantive with¬ 
 out the Article means in the Singular every: πασα πόΧις, 
 every city. The Article before πας gives it the meaning 
 of whole : η πασα πόΧις, the whole city / τούς παντας όπΧί- 
 τας, the whole of the heavy-armed. Most generally πας 
 as well as όΧος without the Article precedes or follows a 
 substantive provided with the Article: πασαν ύμίν την 
 αΧηθειαν έρώ, I will tell you the whole truth / τον αριθμόν 
 παντα ύίχα <$ιεΧάβομ tv, we divided the whole number into 
 two parts / της ύιμέρας όΧης ϋιηΧθον ου πΧέον πέντε καί 
 είκοσι σταδίων, during the whole day they proceeded no 
 more than twenty-five stadia. 
 
 Ohs. —7 τάς, with the Article added to a numeral, may often be 
 translated by “ altogether” or “ in all ΑαρεΊος εβασίλευσε τά 
 πάντα εξ καί τριάκοντα έτη, Darius ruled altogether thirty-six years. 
 
 § 391. Expressions for measures are to be understood differently, 
 according to the position of the Article : έσχατον το ορος, the extreme 
 end of the mountain; το έσχατον ύρος , the farthest mountain (in contrast 
 to other mountains); η άγορά μέση, the middle (of the) market-place; 
 η μέση άγορά , the middle market , that placed in the middle of several 
 others. In Latin, forum medium means both. 
 
236 
 
 THE NOMINATIVE. 
 
 392 . 
 
 Ciiap. XVI.—Use of the Cases. 
 
 A) The Nominative. 
 
 § 392. The Nominative is the case of the subject and of 
 the predicate belonging to the subject (§ 361, 3, 4). 
 
 Hence, as in Latin with fio^ dicor, videor, creor, etc., so 
 in Greek with verbs of the same meaning, the predicative 
 noun referring to the subject is in the Nominative : καθί¬ 
 σταται β a σ i\ev ς, he is appointed Icing ’ ’ Αλέξανδρος θεός 
 ωνομάζετο, Alexander deics appelldbatur. Compare § 361, 
 7 ; §§ 378,403. 
 
 Obs. — ακούω, I hear, in the sense of I am called [Lat. audio], also be¬ 
 longs to these verbs: cl tv ’A θηναις <ρΐλπτπίζοντες κόλακες καί 
 θεοϊς εχθροί ήκονον , the Philippizers in Athens were called flat¬ 
 terers and objects of the gods ’ hatred. 
 
 § 393. The Nominative is frequently used instead of the Vocative 
 in addressing a person, especially in connection with οντος : ό ’Απολ¬ 
 λόδωρος οντος , ον περιμενεϊς ; You ! Apollodorus , won't you stop ? and 
 also in exclamations : νηπιος , the fool! 
 
 B) The Vocative. 
 
 § 394. The person or thing addressed is in the Vocative. 
 In Attic prose ω is generally put before it, except some¬ 
 times in animated discourse : μι) θορυβείτε , ω ανδρες Αθί/- 
 ναΧοι, don't make a disturbance , Athenians; ακούεις Αι¬ 
 σχίνη ; do you hear , AEscliines ? 
 
 Obs. — The Vocative, like interjections, does not belong to the 
 structure of a sentence, whence a word in the Vocative is in¬ 
 closed by commas. 
 
 * 
 
 C) The Accusative. 
 
 § 395. The Accusative, Genitive, and Dative mark an 
 object as dependent, whence they are called cases of de¬ 
 pendence (casus obliqui , oblique cases). 
 
 The Accusative is the case of the Object , and therefore 
 denotes generally the person or thing to which an action 
 is directed. 
 
§ 398 . 
 
 THE EXTERNAL OBJECT. 
 
 237 
 
 The Object is either external to the action by which it 
 is affected : τύπτω τον δούλον, I strike the slave, or inter¬ 
 nal, i. e., already contained in the action itself: τύπτω τ τεν- 
 τηκοντα πλη~γάς, I strike fifty blows. 
 
 Obs. —The Accusative, therefore, in the great majority of cases, is 
 dependent on a verb. Only in a very few cases does it happen 
 that a substantive after the manner of a verb is followed by an 
 Accusative: οι σύμμαχοι τεθνάσι τφ δέει τους τοιοντους αποστόλους , 
 the allies are dead (beside themselves) from fear of such embassa¬ 
 dors. 
 
 § 396. 1. The External Object 
 
 is expressed by the Accusative with transitive verbs as in 
 other languages. Several verbs, however, are treated in 
 Greek as transitive which in other lanoriaofes are intransi- 
 
 O o 
 
 tive. Such verbs are : 
 
 a) Those which signify to benefit or injure, whether it 
 be by act or speech: tv or ctyaOov ποιεω, ευεργετώ, I ben¬ 
 efit ( τούς εύεpyετησavτaς, my benefactors ); όνίνημι, ώφελεω, 
 1 am useful / κακώς or κακόν ποιεω, κακόω, I do ill ; 
 άδικεω,Ι do wrong; υβρίζω, I insult; βλάπτω, I hurt, 
 etc.; also κολακεύω, I flatter, and τιμωρεομαι, I avenge my¬ 
 self (τον εχθρόν, on my enemy ); 6 Σωκράτης ούδενα των 
 πολιτών ηδίκησεν, Socrates acted unjustly to none of his 
 fellow-citizens. 
 
 § B97. Not unfrequently the verb of a principal clause takes as its 
 object what should properly be the subject of a subordinate clause: 
 καί μοι τον υιόν είπε , εΐ μεμάθηκε την τέχνην , more animated than καί μοι 
 είπε, εί ό υιός μεμάθηκε τήν τέχνην , and tell me about my son , whether he 
 has learned his trade. Compare § 519, 5, Obs. 2. 
 
 § 398. b) The Accusative of the external Object is used 
 with the verbs : φεύyω (compare fugio ), αποδιδράσκω, I 
 run away from ; φθάνω, I get before ; θηράω, θηρεύω, I 
 hunt after; μιμεομαι (compare imitor'), ζήλοω, I rival; 
 αμείβομαι, I repay, I respond to ; λανθάνω (compare lateo ), 
 εκλείπω (compare deficio ); εκλείπει με η ελπίς, spes me 
 deficit. 
 
238 
 
 THE INTERNAL OBJECT. 
 
 399 . 
 
 § 399. c ) This Accusative is farther used with verbs of 
 emotion : αι^εομαι, a ισχννομαι, I cim ashamed (τον 7 τατερα, 
 before my father ); φυλάττομαι, ενλαβεομαι, I am on my 
 guard against; θαρρεω, I have confidence (την Ισχύν,Ίη 
 my strength ) ; εκπλήττομαι, καταπλι)ττομαι, I am amazed 
 at; similarly with όμνυμι, I swear by ( τούς θεούς, the 
 gods'). 
 
 Ohs .—As with ’όμννμι , so in exclamations, the Accusative is used 
 even without a governing verb : vai μά τον Αία, Yes, ly Zeus! 
 (§ 648,1G). 
 
 § 3995. The Space and Time over which an action ex¬ 
 tends are often expressed by the Accusative: κοινήν ύ&ο'ν 
 ηλθομεν, we came by a common road; Horn, κλίμακα 
 υφηλην κατεβησετο , she came down the high ladder; 
 πλεΐν θάλασσαν, to navigate the sea ; ενταύθα Κύρος εμεινε 
 7] μέρας πεντε, there Cyrus remained five days. Compare 
 § 405. 
 
 On the Accusative of the aim , see § 406. 
 
 § 400. 2 . The Internal Object 
 
 is expressed by the Accusative not only with transitive, 
 but also with intransitive and passive verbs. 
 
 The internal Object is : 
 
 a) a word of cognate origin with the verb : Horn, άλλοι 
 δ’ άμφί άλλ^σι μ ά χ 7] ν εμάχοντο πύλτρσιν, alii Circa alias 
 portas pugnam pugnabant; τείχος τειχίζονται, they 
 wall (build) a wall; πομπήν πεμπειν, to send an escort , 
 make a solemn procession; κακίστην δουλείαν ε^ούλενσεν, 
 he served the worst service (endured the worst slavery); 
 Horn, το) πείσεαι ος κεν άρίστην βουλι)ν βουλενσιμ you will 
 obey him who advises (gives) the best advice; την εναντίαν 
 νόσον νοσούμεν, we suffer (sicken) from the opposite sick¬ 
 ness ; μεγάλων τινά κρίσιν κρίνεται, he is judged (tried) in 
 a great trial; 
 
 b) or a word akin to the verb in meaning; πληyηv τύπ¬ 
 τεται βαρυτάτην, he 'is struck a very severe blow; πάσας 
 
402 . 
 
 DOUBLE OBJECT. 
 
 239 
 
 νόσους κάμνει, he suffers from all diseases y poet, όδύρματα 
 you. σθαι,ίο moan lamentations y πόλεμον εστράτευσαν τον 
 ιερόν καλούμενου, they marched out to the so-called holy 
 war · y ραφήν διωκειν, to pursue with a rvrit (compare 
 y ραφήν ypa^aOai ); 
 
 c) or a substantive defining the verb : ’ Ολύμπια νικάν, 
 to conquer in the Olympic games y yάμoυς εστίαν, to give 
 a marriage-feast y Horn, νόστο v όδυρόμενοι, weeping for 
 th& return y μενεα ττνείοντες 'Αχαιοί, the courage-breathing 
 Admans; αγγελών ελθεΐ v,to go a message y πυρ όφθαλ- 
 μοΊσι δεδορκως, looking fire with the eyes (flashing. fiery 
 looks); 
 
 cl) or the result of the action expressed by the verb: 
 έλκος ούτάσαι, to strike a wound (produce by blows) ; op- 
 κια τάμνειν^οβάι^ ferirefi. e., feed us hostiam feriendo of¬ 
 ficer e y poet. ?/οε (?) αναρχία ) τροπάς καταρρμχνυσι, it (an¬ 
 archy) breaks flight, i. e., produces flight by breaking through 
 the ranks. 
 
 § 401. Often, especially in the poets, a neuter adjective 
 or pronoun in the Accusative is added to a verb as a 
 special qualification, almost like an adverb (§ 400, c): 
 oXiyov απείναι, to be a little way off y ply a ψεύδεται, 
 he tells a great he (compare ply a ψεύδος ψεύδεται)', τού¬ 
 το χαίρω, at this I rejoice y τι χρησομαι τού raj ; what 
 use shall I make of this f πάντα πείσομαι, I will obey in 
 all things. 
 
 § 402. 3. Double Object. 
 
 Many verbs have a double object, consequently a double 
 Accusative y the following, which most frequently occur 
 with this construction, may serve as examples: διδάσκω 
 (εδίδαζαν τον παίδα την μουσικήν, docuerunt puerum mu- 
 sicccm ); κρύπτω, I hide y t ρωτάω, I ask y αΐτεω, I demand y 
 πράττομαι, I acquire (apybpiov τούς παρόντας, money from 
 those who are present ); κακόν λέγω τούς εχθρούς, I speak 
 
240 
 
 DOUBLE OBJECT. 
 
 403 . 
 
 ill cf my enemies / άφαιρεομαι, άποστερεω, I deprive off 
 άναμιμνήσκω, I remind of y ενδυοι, άμψιεννυμι, I put on 
 (τινά χιτώνα , a coat on some one); περιβάλλομαι, I encircle 
 (τείχη την πόλιν, the city with ivalls). Horn. : η δε με'γαν 
 ίστον νφαινεν δίτ τλακα, she wove ci double garment at the 
 loom (§ 399, V). 
 
 Obs. 1.—In tlie passive construction the thing remains in the Accu¬ 
 sative : διδάσκομαι την μουσικήν ; όιφηρημαι τον 'ίππον, I (till 
 robbed of the horse. 4 
 
 Obs. 2 .—Many other verbs besides these have a double Accusative, 
 by an external object being added to the internal one: Horn. 
 δν Ζευς <ρίλει παντοίην ψιλότητα , whom Zeus loved with multiform 
 love , i. e ., to whom Zeus manifested love in various ways (§ 400, 
 Ο) ; Αισχίνης Κτησιφωντα γραφήν παρανόμων εδίωκεν, JEschilies pros¬ 
 ecuted Ktesiphon with a charge of violating the laic (§ 400, b ); poet. 
 πολλά σε όδνρματα κατεϊδον την Ηράκλειον εξοδον γοωμενην , many 
 wailings I saw you give vent to about the departure of Heracles 
 (§ 400, c ); Horn, έλκος ο με βροτδς οντασεν άνήρ, the wound which 
 a mortal man struck me (§ 400, cl). 
 
 § 404. 4. The Accusative as a Predicate. 
 
 A dependent Predicate relating to an Object is in the 
 Accusative. Hence the verbs mentioned in §§ 361, 10 , 
 and 392, which signify naming, deeming, mahing, appoint¬ 
 ing, choosing, representing, and the like, have a double 
 Accusative in the Active—one of the external Object, and 
 one of the Predicate : οι κόλακες Άλεζανόρον θεόν ώνό- 
 μαζον, the flatterers used to call Alexander a god / αίριί- 
 σθαί τ iv a στ par η y 6 v , ehgere aliguem ducem ; ού τους 
 πλεΐστα έχοντας ευόαιμονεστά τους νομίζω, I do not 
 deem those possessing most the happiest; παρέχω ε μαντό v 
 ευπειθή, I show myself obedient ; ελαβε τούτο S ώ p ον, 
 he received this (as) a gift. 
 
 Obs .—The want of the Article often of itself distinguishes the pre- 
 dicative accusative from the objective (§ 378). In the passive 
 construction both Accusatives must become Nominatives, accord¬ 
 ing to § 392. 
 
 § 404. 5 . In a freer way the Accusative is joined to 
 
405 . 
 
 DOUBLE OBJECT. 
 
 241 
 
 verbs and adjectives, to point out to what the idea of 
 these words refers, in reference to what they are to be 
 understood : κάμνω την κ ε φ α λ η ν, I suffer in the head 
 (compare § 400, V) ; άδικος π a σ a ν αδικίαν, unjust in 
 every (kind of) injustice (in every way, compare § 400, 
 a); "Ελληνες εισι τό γένος, they are Greeks in race; 
 εύ εχομεν τα σώματα, we are well in body; Horn. 6 μ- 
 ματ a καί κ ε φ a λ η ν ’ ίκελος Δη τερπικεραύνω, in eyes and 
 head like thunder-loving Zeus ; παρθένος καλή το ει S ο ς, 
 a maiden beautiful in form , or of beautiful form {facie 
 pulchra ); ουρείς άνθρωπος αυτός πάντα σοφός, no man 
 is himself wise in every thing; ό Μ αρσύας ποταμός είκοσι 
 και πεντε πόοας είχε το εύρος, the River ALarsyas was 
 twenty-five feet in breadth. This Accusative is called the 
 Accusative of reference. 
 
 Obs .—Hence a great number of independent, almost adverbial, Ac¬ 
 cusatives : ro όνομα , in name, by name ; τό πλήθος, in number; τόν 
 τρόπον , in character; τούτον τόν τρόπον, in this way; την φύσιν, by 
 nature; πρόψάσιν, on the pretext, ostensibly; δίκην, like; χάριν, /or 
 the sake of {gratia ); ro παν, altogether, on the whole ; πολύ, by far; 
 τι, quid, what? why? τί κλαίεις’, why weejpest thou? αυτά ταύτα 
 ijKio,for this very reason I have come. 
 
 § 405. In regard to the ideas of space and time, the 
 Accusative expresses extension (compare § 399, b): Horn. 
 πάν η μαρ φερόμην, a whole day I was borne along, to- 
 tum diem ferebar; βασιλεύς καί "Ελληνες άπεΐχον αλ- 
 ληλων τριάκοντα στάδία, the king and the Hellenes 
 were thirty stadia distant from each other; Horn, λείπετο 
 Πουρός ερωην, /ie remained a spear's throio behind; τόν 
 μεν εύ παθόντα $εΐ μεμνησθαι τόν πάντα χρόνον, τόν 
 $ε τ τοιησαντα ευθύς επιλελησθαι, he who has received kind¬ 
 nesses ought to remember them throughout all time , but he 
 who has done them immediately to forget them. 
 
 Obs. 1.—An Accusative used with ordinal numerals, in regard to 
 time, is to be translated by since before or ago: εβοόμην ή μέραν 
 i) θνγάτηο αυτφ ίτετελεντηκει, his daughter had died seven days be¬ 
 fore. 
 
 L 
 
242 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 § 400 . 
 
 Obs. 2.—Freer Accusatives, referable chiefly to time, are: τούτον 
 τον χρόνον, at this time ; τό λοιπόν, for the future, henceforth ; τέλος, 
 at last; πρότφον, formerly; άρχην, up to the beginning , lienee en¬ 
 tirely; την ταχίστην , supply οδόν, the quickest (way); μακράν, far, 
 distant. 
 
 § 40β. In the poets, the Accusative joined to verbs of 
 motion also denotes the place toward which an action is 
 directed : Horn, του £c κλέος o v p a v o v ' ϊκει , his fame . 
 reaches up to heaven / πως ήλθες Άργος; quomodo Ar¬ 
 gos venistif On the absolute Accusative of participles, 
 see § 586. 
 
 D) The Genitive. 
 
 § 407. The Genitive generally denotes a thing belong¬ 
 ing to another. 
 
 Obs. —Hence tlie Genitive is most commonly dependent on a noun , 
 and, even wliere it is governed by a verb, its use resembles that 
 with a noun. 
 
 § 408. 1. The Genitive with Substantives. 
 
 One Substantive may be joined to another in various 
 ways ; the most common are : 
 
 1. Σωκράτης ο Έιωφρονίσκ ον νιος, Socrates SOU of 
 Sophroniscus: Origin. 
 
 2 . i] οΙκία τού π a~ p d ς, the father's house: Possession. 
 
 3. νόμισμα a p γ v p ί o v, a silver coin ; ffaterial. 
 
 Horn. Πίττας οίνο υ, a cup of wine : Contents. 
 
 4. οί πλεΐστοε των Γ Ε λ λ ή v ω v, most of the Hellenes ; 
 
 Partitive Genitive. 
 
 5. ο φόβος των πολεμίων , metus hostiwn , i. e either 
 
 a) the fear of the enemy , i. e., the fear which the 
 enemy feels (Subjective Genitive), or, 
 
 b) the fear about the enemy , i. e., the fear of which 
 the enemy is the object (Objective Genitive). 
 
 6 . δούλος π Arc μνών, a slave worth five mince : Value . 
 
 7. άγραφη κλοπής, an accusation of theft : Cause. 
 
 8 . πολίτου αρετή, a citizen's virtue : Quality. 
 
412 . 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 243 
 
 9 . Horn. Ύροίης πτολίεθρον, the city i)/ 7 (called) Troy: 
 Designation. 
 
 Which of the two substantives in any particular case 
 has to be expressed by the Genitive is generally quite as 
 clear from their meaning as in English. 
 
 But the following special peculiarities in the use of the 
 different kinds of Genitives deserve to be noticed : 
 
 § 409. a) The Genitive denotes descent from a hither, 
 even without the addition of a Substantive : Σωκράτης o 
 Σωφρονίσκον, Socrates, the son of Sophroniscus / Μιλπά- 
 δης Κίμωνο ς, Miltiades, son of Kimon ; poet., Αιος'Άρ - 
 τεμις, Artemis, daughter of Zeus. 
 
 § 410. b) The Neuter of the Article with a Genitive has 
 very different meanings (compare § 383): rd τών Έλλη- 
 νω v , the affairs, interests, possessions of the Hellenes (com¬ 
 pare rd 'Ελληνικά) ; rd της ολιγαρχίας, the nature of the 
 oligarchy / on the other hand, rd rod Αημοσθενους, the 
 word of Demosthenes ; rd τών φίλων κοινά, the property 
 of friends is common. 
 
 § 411. c) The idea of abode is to be supplied in the ex¬ 
 pressions : εις διδάσκαλο v φοιτάν, to go to the masters 
 (house), i. e., to go to school; εν or εις "Αιδου (Homer, είν 
 Άιδα ο δόμοις, in Iladed dwelling, dominion), in or into 
 the lower world. 
 
 § 412. d) The Partitive Genitive ( 4 ), denoting a whole 
 to be divided, is most common with numerals and superla¬ 
 tives: ττολλοι τίον 'Αθηναίων, nndti Atheniensium ; rro- 
 τερος τών αδελφών’, which of the two brothers ? πάντων 
 ίίριστός, omnium optimus· but also with various adjec¬ 
 tives: oi στ rovcaloi τών πολιτώ)ν, the assiduous among 
 the citizens. So, more freely in the Homeric poems : δια 
 θεάων, the divine one among goddesses; οημου άνηρ, a 
 man of the people / and similarly, άνηρ τών ρητόρων, a 
 mao from the number of the orators. 
 
244 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 413 . 
 
 The Partitive Genitive with names of places denotes the 
 whole territory: θηβαι της Βοιωτίας, Thebes in Boeotia ; 
 with Neuter pronouns it sometimes denotes a whole which 
 is attained by degrees : εις τούτο άνοιας ηλθον, eo usque 
 
 insanice progressi sunt. 
 
 Obs .—Adjectives which have a Partitive Genitive sometimes follow 
 the gender of the Genitive dependent upon them : υ ήμισνς τού 
 χρόνον , the half of the time (instead of το ήμισυ τού χρόνον) ; ή 
 πλείστη τρς χώρας , most of the laud. 
 
 § 413. e) The Objective Genitive ( 5 , e) may be translated 
 by various prepositions: εύνοια των φίλων, benevolence 
 towardfriends ; απορία σίτου, want of food; Horn., ίρος 
 Ιϋητνο ς i)ct ποτητο ς, eagerness for food and drink; ησυχία 
 εχθρών, peace from enemies; αγώνες λογω v, contests in 
 speeches ; αφορμή ερ^ων, stimulus to deeds; άιτόστασις των 
 ' Αθηναίων , defection from the Athenians ; Χύσις θανάτου, 
 deliverance from death ; βία πολιτώ v, with violence against 
 the citizens, in spite of the citizens. 
 
 2 . Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs. 
 
 § 414. The Genitive is joined to many relative adjec¬ 
 tives and their adverbs, i.e., to such adjectives and adverbs 
 as are conceivable only in reference to something, and 
 points out the person or thing they refer to. The most 
 important adjectives of this kind are : 
 
 1 . κοινός, common; ί^ιος, οικείος, own,peculiar, and oth¬ 
 ers which imply property or belonging to, as: ναός ιερός 
 τού Απόλλωνός, a temple sacred to Apollo (possession, 
 compare § 408, 2). 
 
 2 . Adjectives denoting plenty and want (contents, § 408, 
 3), as: μεστός, εμπλεως, πληρης^αΙΙ ; πλούσιος, rich ; εν- 
 ΰεης, πενης, necessitous ; farther, the adverb άλις, enough : 
 πάντα ευφρόσυνης πλεα ην, cdl was full of joy. 
 
 3. Those signifying acquainted or unacquainted with : 
 έμπειρος, pcritUS ; άπειρος, Wiperitus ; επιστήμων, skilled 
 
416 . 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 245 
 
 ( τέχνης , in an art) ; μνημών, a μνημών, mindful and un¬ 
 mindful. 
 
 4. άξιος, worthy / ανάξιος, unworthy ,* πλείστου άξιον, 
 worth most , the worthiest thing (§ 408, 6). 
 
 5 . Adjectives implying participation (§ 408, 4 ), whether 
 it be positive or negative: μέτοχος τού π 6 v ο υ , particeps 
 labor is / άμοιρος, without a share · αίτιος, author , guilty , 
 reus. 
 
 Obs. —To these belong many adjectives compounded with (d, 
 § 360) privative, which, especially in poets, are joined with the 
 genitive : poet, αιών κακών άγευστος, a life which has not tasted of 
 misfortunes ; φίλων άκλαυτος, unwept by friends. 
 
 6 . Adjectives in -ικός (§ 351) denoting capability or fit¬ 
 ness for (compare 3) something: διδασκαλικός γραμματικής, 
 capable of teaching grammar / παρασκευαστικός των εις τον 
 πόλεμον, skilled in obtaining the necessaries for war. 
 
 § 415. Many Adverbs of Place are joined with a Geni¬ 
 tive, which is mostly of a Partitive nature (compare § 412): 
 πού γης ; where on earth f so with εντός, within / είσω, 
 insidej εκτός, without / εξω, outside / άγχι, εργύς, πλη¬ 
 σίον, near; πρόσω or πόρρω, forward ^ πέρα, beyond y 
 ευθύ, straight towards j πρόσθεν, έμπροσθεν, in front / όπι¬ 
 σθεν, behind; αμφοτέρωθεν, on both sides; άνω, upward 
 (ποταμών, up-stream ); and corresponding with these also 
 some adverbs of time and manner: πηνίκα της ημέρας ; 
 at what time of the day f πώς εχεις της γνώμης ; what do 
 you think f λάθρα τών γονέων, secretly from the parents. 
 
 § 416. The Comparative may have the object with which 
 any thing is compared in the Genitive (as in the Abla¬ 
 tive in Latin): μείζων τού αδελφού, mayor frat-re , i. e η 
 ο άόελφός, than the brother / ού προςηκει τον άρχοντα 
 τών άρχομενων πονηρότερου είναι, i. e., η τούς άρχομενονς, 
 it is not becoming that the governor should be worse than 
 the governed. 
 
 Obs. 1.—This Genitive is used most frequently where it represents 
 
246 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 § 417 . 
 
 ?/ with the Nominative or Accusative; yet it may also more 
 freely represent i) with the Dative : poet, πΧείων χρόνος, ον δεϊ μ 
 άρεσ icslv τοϊς κάτω των ενθάδε (η τοΊς ενθάδε ), longer is the time that 
 I must please those below than that I must please those here. 
 
 Obs. 2.—Like the Comparative, the Superlative is sometimes joined 
 with the Genitive of the things with which any thing is com¬ 
 pared: poet, φάος κάΧΧιστον των ττροτ'ερων, a light most beautiful 
 in comparison with the former ones, where w r e might have expected 
 ψάος κάΧΧίον τών προτέρων, lux prioribus pulchrior, or φάος κάΧΧε- 
 στον πάντων, omnium pulcherrima. 
 
 Obs. 3.—All adjectives expressive of a comparison follow the rule 
 of Comparatives : δπτΧάσιος, doubly (as great as) ; δεύτερος ( ούδενός ), 
 second (i to none ); ύστερος, later than ; ετερος, another than. 
 
 3. The Genitive with Verbs. 
 
 Very many verbs are joined with the Genitive on the 
 general principles mentioned in § 408. 
 
 § 417. 1. The Genitive represents a Predicate (§ 361, 7 
 and 10) with verbs which denote being , becoming , making , 
 deeming , in order to predicate something of a substantive, 
 as originating from, possessing, consisting of, or in any 
 other way qualifying it, § 408 : Σωκράτης Σωφρονίσκου rjv, 
 Socrates was Sophroniscus's son (§ 408, l); η οικία τού 
 ττατρος εγ ενετό, the house became the fathers property 
 (§ 408, 2); το τείχος λίθον πεποίηται, the %ccdl has been 
 made of stone (§ 408, 3) ; οί θεσσαλοί τών Ελλήνων ησαν, 
 the Thessalians belonged to the Hellenes (§ 408, 4); πολί¬ 
 του ayaOov νομίζεται θαρρεΐν , to be courageous is deemed a 
 good citizen's quality (§ 408, 8). 
 
 Obs .—The Genitive often occurs with verbs of perception and ob¬ 
 servation in such a way that it is properly dependent on a noun 
 or pronoun : τούτο υμών μάΧιστα θανμάζομεν, this ice most admire in 
 you (properly: this of you we most admire). 
 
 § 418. 2. The Genitive of Material (§ 408, 3 ) is also 
 used with verbs of plenty and want (compare § 414, 2 ): 
 πίμπλημι, πΧηρόω, I fill / πληθω, γεμω, I am full y ϋεόμαι 
 (δεΐ μοι ), I need y τά ώτα ενεπλησαν δαιμόνιας σοφίας, they 
 filled the ears with wondrous wisdom / 6 παρών καιρός 
 
419 . 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 247 
 
 ττοΧΧης φροντίοος καί βουλής $εΐται, the present time IS 171 
 need of much ref ection and advice. 
 
 § 419. 3 . The Partitive Genitive (§ 408, 4 ) is used with 
 many verbs which only partially affect the object of the 
 action : 
 
 a) With all-verbs which contain the idea of sharing: 
 μετεχω (μετεστί μοβ, I have a share in j μεταλαμβάνω, I 
 take a share in · μεταόίοωμι, I give a share (της λείας, of 
 the booty ); κοινωνεω, I share (compare § 414, 5); Horn. 
 σίτον δ’ aiS οίη ταμίη παρεθηκε χαριζομενη τ ταρεόντων, the 
 modest stewardess brought bread supplying from the store. 
 
 01)3. — ΰζω, I smelly also belongs to these: μνρων υζει, lie smells of 
 myrrh. 
 
 b) With verbs which denote touching, laying hold of.\ 
 seizing: in ττομαι, ψαύω , I touch j έπομαι, I hold by, border 
 (τίνος) Oil somethingj άντεχομαι, επιλαμβάνομαι, I lay 
 hold ofj λαμβάνω τινά της χειρος,Ι seize one by the 
 hand j άρχομαι, I begin (της παιδείας, with the educa¬ 
 tion) ; poet, θανόντων ούΕεν άλγος άπτεται, no pain 
 touches the dead. 
 
 c) With verbs which denote striving, aiming at : στο¬ 
 χάζομαι του σκοπού, I aim at the goal / ορέγομαι, I strive, 
 ϋιψάω, I thirst, τυγχάνω, I hit, attain θετυχε των άθλων , 
 lie won the prizes)', εφικνούμαι, I reach, attain; ηκω, I 
 have attained (Herod, ΰυνάμιος, power). 
 
 d) With verbs which denote enjoying: Ισθίω,Ι eat j 
 πίνω, I drink / γεύω,Ι give a taste j εστιάω,Ι entertain · 
 απολαύω, I enjoy (μεγίστων αγαθών, the greatest blessings)', 
 ενός άνεμος εν φρονησαντος πολλοί άν άπο λαύσειαν, 
 many would enjoy a man who has thought sensibly. 
 
 e) With verbs denoting the opposites of the ideas enu¬ 
 merated under a — d, that is, the exclusion from a share in 
 something : άπεχομαι, I refrain (σίτου, abstineo cibo); χω¬ 
 ρίζω,! separate · είργω,Ι Iceep off j στερίσκω,Ι deprive / 
 παύομαι, I cease j είκω, παραχωρεω, I yield j λύω , 1 loose ; 
 
248 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 § 420 . 
 
 ελενθερόω, I free ; φείύομαι, I spare; αμαρτάνω , «ποτηγ- 
 χάνω,Ι miss; φενύομαι, σφάλλομαι, I dm deceived ( της 
 ελπίΰος, in my hope). 
 
 Obs .—Many of these verbs are also joined with an Accusative 
 when an object is to be expressed as icholly encompassed by the 
 action : π\ε~ιστον μέρος τίνος μετεχειν, to have the greatest part i.l 
 any thing; πίνω οίνον, I drink wine; οίνον, some wine; λαγχάνω 
 τι, I attain something ; πνός, a share in something. 
 
 § 420. 4. The Genitive is joined with many verbs de¬ 
 noting a sensuous or morcd perception or emotion (com¬ 
 pare § 414, 3), as: ακούω, άκροάομαι, I hear ; αΙσΟάνομαι, 
 I perceive ; μιμνμσκομαι, I remember (rob φίλον, momini 
 amici)', επιλανθάνομαι, I forget / μελει μοί τ ι vo ς, επιμελε- 
 ομαι, I am concerned about something , 1 care ; εντρεπομαι , 
 Horn, αλέγω, άλεχίζω, I concern myself; άμελεω, I neg¬ 
 lect ; όλιχωρεω, I care little about; εράω, I love (§ 419, c); 
 επιθυμεω, I desire ; πυνβάνομαί τί τίνος, I learn something 
 about one. 
 
 Obs .—The Accusative also is admissible with several of these 
 verbs : with ακούω, if the object is directly audible : φθόγγον, a 
 sound, but τού διδασκάλου, the teacher. 
 
 § 421. 5 . With verbs of estimating , buying, selling , etc., 
 the Genitive denotes the value or price (compare § 408, 6, 
 and § 417) : ό δούλος πεντε μνων τιμάται, the slave is valued 
 at five mince; πολλοί) ώνεΊσΟαι, magni emere; ταλάντου 
 άττοεϊόσθαι, to sell for a talent. 
 
 § 422. 6. With verbs of judicial proceedings the Geni* 
 tive denotes the cause (§ 408, 7 , § 414, 5 ): κλοπής χράφε- 
 σΟαι αισχρόν, furti accusari turpe est ; φόνου 8ιωκειν, to 
 prosecute for murder ; φεύγει παρανόμων, he is charged 
 with violating the law ; άπεφνγε κακνη^ορίας, he was ac¬ 
 quitted of libel; εάλωσαν προδοσίας, proditionis condem- 
 netti sunt. 
 
 Obs .—With verbs of emotion the Genitive likewise expresses the 
 cause, as: θαυμάζω σε της σωφροσύνης, I admire thee for thy mod¬ 
 eration; Horn, χωόμενος γνναικός, angry about the woman. 
 
THE GENITIVE. 
 
 249 
 
 § 423. 7 . The Genitive is also joined with verbs which 
 imply the meaning of a Comparative (§ 416), as: κρατεω 
 (i ζρείττων είμί), άρχω (Κροίσος Λνοων ήρχεν, (Jvoesus Tilled 
 over the Lydians ); βασιλεύω, I rule j ιτερίειμι, περιχίχνο- 
 μαι, I am superior / ηττάομαι (ήττων είμί), I am inferior ; 
 λε'πτομαι, νστερεω, I am behind / διαφέρω τ ιν 6 ς*, differo ab 
 aliquo; βαρβάρων "Ελληνας άρχειν εικος, it is reasonable 
 that Hellenes should rule over barbarians. 
 
 § 424. 8. The Genitive is joined with verbs compounded 
 wdth prepositions, which either always, or in the sense 
 which they have in the compound verb, require the Gen¬ 
 itive (compare Chapter XVII.): εκβάλλω τινά τιμής, I 
 eject some one from ojfjice / προστατεύει της π όλεως, he pre¬ 
 sides over the state / Ισχνν του δικαίου προτίθησιν, he pre¬ 
 fers might before right / καταφρονείν τίνος , to despise any 
 one ; κaτηyopεiv τι τίνος , to accuse one oj a thing y πάτριον 
 ήν tij ’ Αθηναίων πολει προεστάναι των Ελλήνων, it was a 
 hereditary custom for the city of the Athenians to be at 
 the head of the Hellenes. 
 
 4 . Freer use of the Genitive. 
 
 § 425. The Genitive, without immediate connection with 
 a noun or verb, expresses: 
 
 l. Place (local Genitive), almost exclusively in the lan¬ 
 guage of poetry, and that either the place from which 
 something is removed : < στασθε βάθρων, get up from the 
 steps · υπάχειν της b δον, to go out of the way (compare 
 § 419, e); —or the space within which something takes 
 place (compare §§ 412,415): της Ιωνίας τούτο αισχρόν 
 νενόμισται, within Ionia that is considered disgraceful · 
 Horn, νέφος ο ι) φαίνετο πάσης yaίης, no cloud appeared 
 within the compass of the whole earth / έρχονται πεόίοιο, 
 they go through or within the plain (compare the German 
 ich gehe des Weges). 
 
 On another local Genitive, see § 412. 
 
 L 2 
 
250 
 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 § 426. 
 
 § 426. 2. Time (temporal Genitive), in which case it is 
 a Partitive Genitive expressing the whole of a space of 
 time (§ 412) within which something takes place: τρις 
 του ενιαυτού, thrice in the year / ημέρας, by day j ννκτός, 
 by night / τον αυτόν χειμώνος, in the same winter ,* του 
 λοιπού, for the future · χρόνου συχνού, for some time / 
 έκαστου έτους , each year. 
 
 § 427. 3 . Cause (causal Genitive, compare § 408, 7 , 
 § 422), in exclamations : οιμοι τϊ]ς τύχης, cdas! for my 
 fortune (compare the German 0 cles Leides) ; and in In¬ 
 finitives with the Genitive of the Article (in order to). 
 § 574, 3, Obs. 
 
 § 428. 4 . Occasion, time, circumstances, etc., as an abso¬ 
 lute Genitive, in connection with participles , just like the 
 absolute Ablative in Latin: Κυρου βασιλεύοντος, Gyro reg- 
 nante , § 584 (compare the German : stehenclen Fusses). 
 
 Obs .—The absolute Genitive very rarely occurs, like the absolute 
 Ablative of the Latins, without a participle; when the verb to be 
 occurs in the clause the participle ών is to be used: te puero , σον 
 παιδός υντος. 
 
 E) The Dative. 
 
 § 429. The Dative denotes, in general, the person or 
 thing more remotely connected with an action. 
 
 Obs .—The Dative, therefore, depends just as often on verbs as on 
 adjectives (adverbs), but very rarely on a substantive. 
 
 § 430. l Dative of the person concerned. 
 
 As in Latin and English, so in Greek, the person more 
 remotely affected by something is in the Dative, and: 
 
 a) with transitive verbs it is the so-called indirect ob¬ 
 ject : Horn. £7 ττα oi 'όωσω εύναιόμενα πτολίεθρα, and I 
 
 will give him seven flourishing cities. 
 
 V) with intransitive verbs it expresses the person or a 
 tiling conceived as a person to which the action refers: 
 
435 . 
 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 251 
 
 πρέπει μοί τι , a thing becomes me } Su μοί τίνος , I need 
 something j εμο\ οντω Sokei έχειν, it seems to me to be so y 
 βοηθώ τοΊς συμμάχοις, SUCCUTTO SOciis j πείθου τοΊς νόμοις, 
 obey the laves ’ ενχεσθε τοΊς θεοΊς, pray to the gods / μέμ- 
 φομαι τοΊς μαθηταΊς, I reproach the scholars. 
 
 Obs .—Substantives derived from such verbs are sometimes followed 
 by the Dative: r) iv τφ ττολέμφ τοΊς συμμάχοις βοήθεια , the help to 
 the allies in the war. 
 
 c) with Adjectives : ύ αγαθός τω αγαθω μόνος φίλος, the 
 good alone is dear to the good. 
 
 431. 2. Dative of interest. 
 
 The Dative denotes the person for whom—for whose 
 interest—something is or takes place ; hence 
 
 cl) the person benefited or injured ( dat. commodi , incom- 
 modi): πας ανηρ αύτω πονεΊ, every mcm toils for himself / 
 φθόνος μέγιστον κακόν τοΊς εχουσιν αυτόν , envy IS the great¬ 
 est evil to them that have it. 
 
 432. b) the possessor with είμί, yiyvopai, and similar 
 verbs : πολλοί μοι φίλοι είσίν, I have many friends. 
 
 Obs .—The possessive Dative is sometimes, like the Genitive, joined 
 with a Substantive: Herod., ο'ί σφι βόες, their oxen. 
 
 § 433. c) the sympathizing person (ethical Dative ): poet. 
 ώ τέκνον, η βέβηκεν ήμιν ό ζένος ; Ο child , has the stranger 
 left US f τι yap πατήρ μοι πρέσβυς εν δ όμοισι 6pa ; for what 
 is my aged father doing in the housef 
 
 § 434. cl) the acting person with passive verbs (common¬ 
 ly υπό with the Genitive), which is then to be viewed as 
 one interested in the action : Horn, πολέες ΰάμεν f 'E κτορι 
 cUo, many were overcome by godlike Hector ; τι πέπρακται 
 τοΊς αλλοις ; what has been done by the rest f This Da¬ 
 tive is regularly joined with the Verbal Adj. in -τέος : εμο\ 
 πολεμητέον εστίν, mihi pugnandum est. 
 
 § 435. e) the person remotely connected with an action : 
 - τεθνηχ νμΊν πάλαι, he died to you long ago; Horn, πάσίν 
 
252 
 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 43 6 . 
 
 κεν Τρώεσσι κυΕος άροιο, thou mightest get thee fame with 
 all Trojans ; Horn, τοϊσιν ανεστη, among them arose ; ίπτο- 
 Χαμβάνειν Εεΐ τω τοιουτω ότι ευηθης εστίν , in regard to such 
 a one we must suppose him simple. 
 
 Ohs. —In tills manner participles are most frequently used, partly 
 with, partly without, an accompanying noun : Horn. ημΤν εΐνατός 
 εστι περιτροττεων ενιαυτός ενθάδε μιμνόντεσσιν , it is the ninth year 
 for US lingering here / r) διαβάντι τον ποταμόν πρός εσπέραν οδός, 
 the road westward ichen you have crossed the river; γίγνεταί τι Ιμοί 
 βονλομένψ, something happens to me as I wish; συνελόντι or ώς 
 σννελύντι είπεΐν, to spealc briefly. 
 
 § 436. 3. Dative of community. 
 
 With verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, which denote com¬ 
 munity, agreement, friendly or hostile meeting, the person 
 or thing with which such a community, agreement, or such 
 a meeting takes place, is in the Dative. 
 
 a) Verbs of this kind are : κοινωνεω, I share ( τινί τίνος, 
 something with one ); συμφωνεω, ομοΧογεω, συνάγω, όμο- 
 νοεω, I agree ; όμοιόομαι, I resemble ; όμιΧεω, I associate 
 with y ΕιαΧεγομαι, I converse ; Ειαφερομαι, I differ ; μάχο- 
 μαι, I fight / ερίζω, I dispute ; ret έργα ου συμφωνεί τοίς 
 λυγοις, the deeds do not harmonize with the icords ; poet. 
 κακοίσιν μη προςομίΧει ανΕράσιν, αΧΧ αιει των αγαθών εχεο, 
 with bad men do not associate , but always hold to the 
 good. 
 
 b ) Adjectives : ίσος, like; 6 μοιος, παραττΧησιος, simi¬ 
 lar / ύ αυτός, the same y οικείος, ίΕιος, peculiar ; κοινός, 
 common (compare 414, l); ομώνυμος, of like name ; συν¬ 
 ώνυμος, of like meaning; Ειάφορος, different; ενάντιος, 
 Opposite: ώττΧισμενοι ησαν τοΐς αυτοΐς Κύρω όττΧοις, they 
 were armed with the same weapons as Cyrus. 
 
 c) Adverbs: besides those derived from the adjectives 
 just mentioned, especially αμα, at the same time; όμοΰ, 
 together: αμα τω εταίρω, at the same time with his friend. 
 
 § 437. The Dative is used with many verbs which, com- 
 
 kj j y 
 
§ 440 . 
 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 253 
 
 pounded with prepositions, denote a contact or union, es¬ 
 pecially with such as are compounded with εν, συν, επί, 
 yet also with those compounded with προς, παρά, περί, 
 υπό, as : επιστήμην εμποιείν rij φνχί), to bring knowledge 
 into the soul; h τικεΐσθαί τινι, to press upon, to urge, one; 
 επίτιμον tlv'l tl, to reproach one with something; προςιεναι 
 τω δί/μφ, to come before the people; παρίστασθαι, παρείναί 
 rivt, to support one; περιπίπτειν τινί, to meet one. 
 
 § 438. 4. The Instrumental Dative, answering to the 
 Latin Ablative, denotes that by or by means of which an 
 action is brought about: hence 
 
 a) the means or instrument (compare δία, § 458) : Horn. 
 τον μεν κατά στήθος βάλε δουρί, the one he struck on the 
 breast with the spear; ο ρω μεν το7ς όφθαΧμοΊς, we see with 
 the eyes; ούδεις* έπαινον ηδοναΐς εκτησατο, no one gained 
 praise by pleasures; ζημιοΰν τινα Θανάτω, to punish one 
 with death; Horn, τίσειαν Ααναοί εμά δάκρυα σοίσι βεΧεσ- 
 σιν, may the Danai pay for my tears by thy darts. 
 
 Obs .—Hence the Dative is used with χρήσθαι , to make use of; as the 
 Ablative with uti in Latin. A second predicative Dative is often 
 added (§ 361, 10): τούτων τισι φύλαζιν ίχρήτο, some of them he used 
 as guards. 
 
 § 439. b) the operating power or cause from which an 
 action proceeds : άνθρωπος φύσει ποΧιτικόν, man (is) by 
 nature fitted for the state ; ποΑΧάκις ayvoia άμαρτάνομεν, 
 we often err from ignorance ; φόβο), from fear. 
 
 Ohs. —With verbs of emotion, the Dative expresses the ground or 
 occasion of the emotion : ήδομαι, χαίρω τι; μουσική, I delight in 
 music; λνποΰμαι, I am grieved; χαλεπαίνω, I am angry; στέργω , 
 άγαττώ, I am satisfied (with something); αΐσχύνομαι , I am ashamed 
 (about something). 
 
 § 440. c) the measure, by which a thing is measured, 
 by which one thing surpasses another, by which it is dis¬ 
 tinguished : τά μεΧΧοντα κρίνομεν τοίς yεyεvημεvoις, the fu - 
 
254 
 
 THE DATIYE. 
 
 441 . 
 
 ture we judge of by the past; δέκα ετεσι προ της εν Σαλα- 
 μίνι μάχης οι ’Αθηναίοι εν Μ αραθωνι ένίκησαν, ten years 
 before the battle of Salamis the Athenians conquered at 
 Marathon ; πολλω μείζων , multo major (also πολύ, § 404, 
 Obs .); διαφέρειν τίνος φρονήσει, to differ from any one in 
 insight. 
 
 § 441. 5. The freer use of the Dative expresses: 
 
 a) the way and manner, or an accompanying circum¬ 
 stance : τοντω τω τρόττω, in this way ; βία, by force ; 
 σπουδή, with zeal; σιγή, in silence ; εργω, in fact ; τώ 
 δντι, in truth; Ιδία, privatim ; δημοσία, publice ; Horn. 
 νηπιέτισι, in his folly (§ 362, Obs.). 
 
 Obs. —The Dative with αυτός should be particularly noticed: b 
 Φίλιππος πεντακοσίονς ιππίας ελαβεν αντοΊς τοΊς οπλοις, Philip toolc 
 five hundred horse together with their armor. (Compare the Dative 
 of community, § 436.) 
 
 § 442. b) The plctce where something happens is ex¬ 
 pressed by the Dative more rarely in prose than in poetry: 
 Μ αραθώνι, at Marathon; Horn. E Χλάδι οϊκία ναίων, in¬ 
 habiting his house in Hellas; Horn, τόζ ωμοισιν ίχων, 
 having the bow on his shoulders; poet. υδοΊς, on the icay . · 
 
 § 443. c) Time is expressed by the Dative as definitely 
 limited in answer to the question when : τήδε τή νυκτί, hue 
 node; τή υστεραία, on the following day; τετάρτιο ετει, in 
 the fourth year ; Όλυμπίοις, at the Olympic games ; poet. 
 χειμερίω νότιο, in a stormy south wind. 
 
 Obs. —Notice the difference between the Accusative (§ 405) and the 
 Genitive (§ 426), in their application to relations of time. 
 
447 . 
 
 THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 255 
 
 Chap. XVII.—The Prepositions. 
 
 § 444. Prepositions have a double use. Either they are 
 combined with a verb; to define the direction which the 
 action of the verb takes, or they are used independently, 
 and serve, in connection with different cases, to point out 
 the relation of single words in a sentence to one another 
 more distinctly than could be done by the cases alone. 
 
 § 445 . Ohs. 1 .— As the name pmpositio ( πρόθεσις ) points to the first 
 of these uses, those prepositions which are not combined with verbs, 
 such as: άνευ, without (poet. δίχα, χωρίς ) ; αχρι, μέχρι, till; μεταζύ, be¬ 
 tween; 'ένεκα, on account of; π\ην , besides , are called spurious. They 
 are all used with the Genitive (compare § 415), except ώς, to, which 
 has the Accusative. 
 
 § 44G. Ohs. 2.—All Prepositions were originally adverbs; many of 
 them are still used as such in poetry, and a few even in prose: περί , 
 beyond, very; μετά, later; πρός, in addition. On account of this ori¬ 
 gin, their position in Homer is very free; they may be separated 
 from their verb as well as from their substantive : Horn, tv δ’ αυτός 
 Ιδνσετο νωροπα- χαλκόν, and he himself put on the glittering brass ; άμφί 
 δε χαίται ωμοις άΐσσονται , and the manes leave around the shoulders. On 
 the anastrophe in placing the Prepositions behind, see § 90. In prose 
 only περί is sometimes thus used. 
 
 § 447. With regard to the eases joined witli Prepositions, 
 the following; general rules are to be noticed: 
 
 1. The Accusative with Prepositions expresses the object 
 upon which, over which, toward which an action extends 
 (§§ 395, 405), and with many Prepositions the goal of an 
 action itself (§ 406). 
 
 2. The Genitive frequently denotes the place from which 
 an action proceeds (§ 425), often also a moral relation 
 (§ 408, etc.), while it depends on other Prepositions in the 
 same way as on the adverbs mentioned in § 415. 
 
 3. The Dative denotes a more external connection (§§ 435, 
 442). 
 
256 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 448. 
 
 General View of the Prepositions. 
 
 § 448. I. Prepositions which can have only one case: 
 
 A) the Accusative : άς, ως. 
 
 B) the Genitive : αντί, από, εκ (εξ), ττρο- —a νεν, άχρι, 
 
 μί\ιοι, μεταζυ, ενεκα, ττλήν. 
 
 C) the Dative : εν, συν (fvv). 
 
 II. Prepositions which can have two cases: 
 
 A) the Genitive and Accusative: οιά, κατά, υπέρ. 
 
 B) the Dative and Accusative : άνά. 
 
 III. Prepositions which can have all the three oblique 
 cases : άμφί, εττί, μετά, παρά, περί, προς, υπό. 
 
 I. Prepositions which can have only one Case. 
 
 § 449. A) Prepositions with the Accusative. 
 
 l. είς or ες (Lat. in, c. Accus., and inter'), to, into, points 
 out the goal toward which the action is directed. The 
 opposite is εξ, out. είς is used : 
 
 Cb) of place : ol A ακε^αιμόνιοι ειςεβαΧον εις την Αττικήν, 
 the Lacedaemonians invaded Attica; εις S ικαστηριον είς- 
 ιεναι, to come into court; Χεγειν εις το πΧηθος, to spealc to 
 the multitude; είς άντρας εγγράφει)’, to enroll among men. 
 Compare εν, § 456, a. 
 
 b) of time : εις την νστεραίαν, in cliem proximum,for 
 the next day; εις ίσπεραν, toward evening; poet, έτος ι}ς 
 έτος, year by year; είς καιρόν, for the rigid time. 
 
 c) of measure and number : εις $ιακοσίους, up to two 
 hundred; εις όύναμιν, up to one'spower, as much as is in 
 one's power. 
 
 d) of purpose : χρήσιμον εϊς τον πόΧεμον, useful for the 
 war; εις τόΐε ηκομεν ,for that we have come. 
 
 In compounds it is to be translated by into, in, to. 
 
 § 450. 2. ως (compare § 631), to, only of persons: Horn. 
 
453. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 257 
 
 αιει τον όμοίον άγει θεός ως τον όμοίον, God always brings 
 like to like. 
 
 § 451. B) Prepositions with the Genitive. 
 
 1. αντί (compare Horn, άντα, άντην, αντίκρυ ), originally 
 opposite to (compare εν-αντί-ος), then instead of for: 
 Horn, ayrt κασιγνητου ζεΐνός θ' ικέτης τε τετυκται, a stranger 
 and a suppliant is instead of a brother (like a brother); 
 αντί θνητού σώματος αθάνατον $όζαν αλλ,α ^,α σ θα ι , to e V— 
 change a mortal body for immortal glory. 
 
 In compounds it signifies against. 
 
 § 452. 2. «—ο (Lat. ab, a, Engl, off), from, in the sense 
 of separation, severance, and origin : 
 
 a) of place: Horn, άφ' ίππων άλτο χαμάζε, he sprang 
 off the chariot to the ground. 
 
 b) Op time: from, since: απ' εκείνης της ημέρας, from 
 that day. 
 
 c) of cause : by, from, through : αυτόνομος άπο τϊ]ς ε'ιρη- 
 νης, independent thro ugh the peace. 
 
 Phrases: από σκοπού, far from the goal; άπο γνώμης, 
 contrary to expectation; από στόματος Χεγειν, to speak 
 from memory; οί άπό σκηνης, those of the stage, the act¬ 
 ors. 
 
 In compounds it signifies from, off, aiuay. 
 
 § 453. 3. εκ, before vowels εζ (Lat. ex, e), out of (op¬ 
 posed to εις), denotes removal from within or from among : 
 
 a) of place : εκ Σπάρτης φεύγει, lie is banished out of 
 Sparta. 
 
 b) of time : εκ παίοων, from boyhood (a pueris). 
 
 c) of origin : εκ πατρός χρηστού εγ ενετό, he sprang from 
 a brave father / seldom with a Passive verb: τιμάσθαι εκ 
 τίνος, to be honored by any one. 
 
 d) close connection and conformity with: after, secun¬ 
 dum : Xoyov εκ λόγου Χεγειν, to deliver speech after speech; 
 
258 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. 
 
 454. 
 
 εκ τών 6 μολογ ου μινών, according to the agreement (Lat. 
 •secundum). 
 
 Phrases: εκ $εξιάς, on the right / it, 'ίσου , equally $ %ήσαί, 
 κριμασαι τι εκ τίνος, to fasten, to hang one thing to another 
 (Lat. p> endure ex, ab aliqua re). 
 
 In compounds : out, away. 
 
 § 454. 4. ττρό (Lat. pro), for, before, instead. 
 
 a) of place, before : προ Ουρών, before the door. 
 
 b) of time : προ της μάχης, before the battle. 
 
 C ) of 'preference : προ τούτων τιθνάναι μάλλον άν ελοιτο, 
 he would choose death before this, i. e., rather than this. 
 
 d) for, a rare use : προ παίοων μάχισθαι, to fight for the 
 children. 
 
 Phrase : προ πολλου ποιιίσθαι (c), to prefer greatly. 
 
 In compounds: before,forth,beforehand,forward. 
 
 § 455. The spurious Prepositions : 
 
 5. άνιυ, without (poet, χωρίς, δίγα, άτιρ). 
 
 6. άχρι, μίχρι, until. 
 
 7. μιταζυ, between. 
 
 8. ενικά, also ενεκεν, είνεκα (poet, ουνεκα), for the sales of 
 an object to be attained (Lat. causa ): της υγιείας ενεκα 
 χρώμεθα τω Ιατρω, we employ a physician for the sake of 
 health. (Compare Ζιά with Acc., § 458, B.) 
 
 9 . πλην, besides {preeter). 
 
 Obs.— πλην is often used quite adverbially without governing a 
 case : poet, ούκ dp’ ’Αχαιοϋς άνδρες είσί ττλήν οδε ; have then the 
 Achceans no men but this ? It might be ττλήν τοΰδε , besides this f 
 
 § 456. C) Prepositions with the Dative. 
 
 l. εν (Horn, εν (, εν, Lat. in, c. Ablat., and inter), in, an¬ 
 swers to the question where ? 
 
 a) ofplace : εν ΆΘηναις, in Athens / also among {inter)', 
 εν τούτοις, among them; εν S /ιμω λεγειν, to speak before the 
 people (compare § 449, a). 
 
458. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. 259 
 
 b) of time : εν τοντω τω ετει, in that year. 
 
 (?) a ‘moral relation : with: εν τω Θειο το της μάχης τεΧος, 
 the result of the battle rests with God. 
 
 t/ 
 
 Phrases: η εν Μ αραθώνι μάχη, the battle at Marathon ; 
 ty τοϊς πρώτος, first by far j εν καιρω, at the right time y 
 εν προςθηκης μερει, in addition ‘ εν χερσί τιθεναι, to put 
 into the hands (compare Lat. in mensa ponere). 
 
 In compounds . m, vnto, on. I lie accented ενι — ενεστι 
 signifies it is in, it exists, it is possible. 
 
 § 457. 2. συν or ζυν (Lat. cum), with, denotes compan¬ 
 ionship (opposed to άνευ, compare μετά with Gen., § 4G4, 
 B); συν Αθηνμ ενίκησεν, he conquered (with the help of) 
 Athene / συν νόμω, in accordance with the law (opposed 
 to παρά with Acc., § 465, C, b). 
 
 In compounds : with, together. 
 
 II. Prepositions which can have two Cases. 
 
 The Genitive and Accusative. 
 
 Obs. —Here, as every where in what follows, that use of a Preposi¬ 
 tion is placed first in which its original meaning is most mani¬ 
 fest. 
 
 § 458. l. δίά (akin to δύο, as between is to tivo [twainf. 
 originally between, then through. 
 
 A) with the Genitive: 
 
 a) of space : most frequently through (Lat. per): Horn, 
 δία μεν άσπιλος ηΧθε φαεινής οβριμον ε·γχος, through the 
 glittering shield pierced the mighty lance. 
 
 b) instrumented : by or with : cia των όφθαΧμών ο ρώμεν, 
 by (by means of) the eyes we see (compare § 438). 
 
 c) of space and time : among (inter), during, in : δία 
 χειρων εχειν, to have in hand / δία νυκτυς, during night / 
 δία φιΧίας ιεναι, to be onfriendly terms. 
 
 Phrases: δίά στόματος εχειν, to have in the mouth, to 
 
260 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. § 459. 
 
 be talking about; δι ούδενος ποιεΐσθαι, to deem as nothing / 
 διά μηκρου , after a long interval, interruption. 
 
 B) with the Accusative : 
 
 a) of space and time, almost exclusively in the poets : 
 through , during: Horn. διά δώματα, through the rooms; 
 Sia νύκτα, during night. 
 
 V) usually caused : on account of (the operating cause) 
 (compare 'ένεκα, § 455, 8) : δια την νόσον χρώμεθα τιο ιατρω, 
 we employ the physician on account of the illness. 
 
 Phrases : αύτύς δι εαυτόν, by himself / δια τί ; why? 
 
 In compounds, διό is through , or denotes separation , like 
 Lat. dis- : διαφέρω =differr e, διαιρέω, I sever. 
 
 § 459. 2. κατά (compare Adv. κάτω, dowri), originally 
 downward , down (the opposite to ava). 
 
 A) with the Genitive : 
 
 a) of space: down from,: Horn, βη δέ κατ ΟύΧύμποιο 
 καρηνων, he came down from the heights of Olympus / 
 below {sub ): rd κατά γης, things below the earth. 
 
 b) tropically : about , against: Χέγειν κατά τίνος, to speah 
 about , against one. 
 
 Phrases : πολίν κατ άκρας εΧείν, to capture a city com¬ 
 pletely y κατά νώτου, behind. 
 
 B) with the Accusative it denotes in its most general 
 sense extension over , relation to, direction toward some¬ 
 thing : 
 
 a) of place : κατά poov, down a stream * κατά γην καί 
 ΟάΧασσαν, by land and sect j Horn. Ζευς έβη κατά δαιτα, 
 
 Zeus went to the feast. 
 
 b) of time : κατ εκείνον τον χρόνον, at that time y ο l 
 καθ' ημάς, our contemporaries. 
 
 c) of other relations: κατά τούτον τον τρόπον, in this 
 way; κατά πάντα, in every respect / κατα δύναμιν, accord¬ 
 ing to ability , as much as possible y κατά τούς νόμους, in 
 accordance with the laws; κατ εμέ, as regards me; κατά 
 Πίνδαρον άριστόν ύδωρ, according to Pindar , water is best. 
 
461. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DAT. AND ACC. 
 
 261 
 
 d) distributive in divisions: Horn, κατά φυ\α, by tribes; 
 κατά τρεις, by threes ,* καθ' ημέραν, daily. 
 
 In compounds: down, downward, against, toward, very 
 often untranslatable. 
 
 5 460. 3. υπέρ, Horn, also υπείρ (Lat. super), radical mean- 
 in 2 : over. 
 
 A) with the Genitive : 
 
 d) of space : 6 ηΧιος υπέρ ημών πορεύεται, the sun passes 
 over its. 
 
 b) tropically, for: μάχεσθαι υπέρ τίνος, to fight for any 
 one (originally over, e. g., over a corpse): 6 υπέρ της πα- 
 τρίδος κίνδυνος, the danger for one’s country; instead of: 
 εγώ υπέρ σου άποκρινοΰμαι, I will answer instead of you. 
 
 B) with the Accusative : 
 
 over, beyond —of space and measure: Horn, υπέρ ουδόν 
 έβησετο, lie went over or beyond the threshold / υπέρ δυνα- 
 μιν, beyond {his) power. 
 
 In compounds: over, away over, excessively, for. 
 
 With the Dative and Accusative. 
 
 § 461. 4. άνά (compare adv. άνω, above), originally upon, 
 up (opposed to κατά). 
 
 A) with the Dative only poet., on the top of, upon: 
 Horn, χρυσέω άνά σκηπτρω, on the top of a golden staff. 
 
 B) with the Accusative άνά denotes the direction up¬ 
 ward, up> toward something, then spreading out over some¬ 
 thing (compare κατά). 
 
 a) of space: άνά poov,up the stream y άνά πάσαν την 
 γην, over the ivhole earth, over the whole country. 
 
 b) of time : άνά πάσαν την ημέραν, per totum diem. 
 
 c) tropically : άνά λόγον, in accordance with. 
 
 d) distributive : άνά τέτταρας, by fours (four men deep, 
 compare κατά, § 459, d). 
 
 Phrase : άνά στόμα εχειν, to have in the mouth, to be talk¬ 
 ing about (compare διά). 
 
 In compounds: up, upward, again, back. 
 
262 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 462. 
 
 III. Prepositions which can have three Cases. 
 
 Obs .—The original meaning is usually most manifest in connection 
 with the Dative. 
 
 § 462. l. αμφί (Lat. amb-, German um, akin to αμφω, 
 loth), radical meaning around (i. e., on both sides, compare 
 περί). 
 
 A) with the Dative : 
 
 only poet. : Horn. Ιδρώσει τεΧαμών αμφΧ στηθεσσι, the belt 
 around the breast will sweat; αμφί φόβψ, f rom fear. 
 
 B) with the Genitive : 
 
 Horn, αμφΧ φιΧότητος αείδειν, to sing about love. 
 
 C) with the Accusative : 
 
 of place, time, measure, occupation: αμφΧ τά opia, about 
 the boundaries ; αμφΧ tovtov τον χρόνον, about this time ; 
 αμφΧ τα εξήκοντα, circiter sexaginta / αμφΧ δεΐπνον πονεΐν, 
 to be occupied about a meed. 
 
 Phrase: ol αμφί τινα, any one with his attendants; 
 hence even: οι αμφΧ Πλάτωνα, Plato and his followers. 
 
 In compounds: about, around, on two sides, doubly. 
 
 § 463. 2. επί, radical meaning upon, on, on the surface, 
 ly. 
 
 A) with the Dative : 
 
 a) of space : Horn, επΧ χθον X σίτον εδοντες, eating bread 
 on earth / επΧ τμ θαλάσση οικεΐν, to dwell by the sea. 
 
 b) of time: επΧ τοντοις, thereupon. 
 
 c) of an ethical relation : επΧ τοΊς πράγμασιν είναι, to 
 preside over the business ; επΧ τοίς ποΧεμίοις είναι, to be in 
 the power of the enemy: επί τινι χαίρειν, to rejoice at a 
 thing; especially also of purpose: επΧ παιδεία τούτο εμαθες, 
 you learned this for education; and of condition: επΧ 
 τόκοις δανείζειν, to lend on interest; επΧ τουτω, on this 
 condition. 
 
 B) with the Genitive : 
 
 a) of space, in answer to the question where: Κηρός* 
 
465. PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 263 
 
 προυφαίνετο εφ' 'άρματος, Cyrus appeared on a chariot ; 
 and to the question whither: επί Σάμου πλεΐν, to sail to 
 Samos. (Compare § 419, c.) 
 
 b) of time: επ\ K ροίσου άρχοντος,ίη the reign of Croesus; 
 also in many connections : near, by. 
 
 C) with the Accusative: 
 
 on, on-to : άναβαίνειν εφ ’ 'ίππον, to mount {on-to) a horse; 
 επΧ $εζιά, on the right. 
 
 Phrases: ώς επί το τ To\v,for the most part; το επ' εμε, 
 for my pari. 
 
 In compounds : on, at, by, in addition, be-, very often 
 
 untranslatable. 
 
 i 
 
 § 464. 3. μετά (German mit), radical meaning in the 
 midst. 
 
 A) with the Dative: 
 
 in poet, only : amid, among {inter): Horn. "Εκτορα, ος θεός 
 εσκε μετ άνάράσι, Ilector , who was a god among men. 
 
 B) with the Genitive: 
 
 with, in the sense of participation with (compare συν, 
 § 457): μετά των ζυμμάχων κινΕυνενειν, to fight with (in 
 alliance with) the cdlies; μετά δακρύων, with tears. 
 
 C) with the Accusative: 
 
 a) into the midst, among: poet. : Horn. Ιών μετά έθνος 
 εταίρων, going among the crowd of companions. 
 
 b) usually after: Horn, οϊχονται μετά δεΐπνον, they go 
 after {for) a meal; μετά τον ΪΙεΧοποννησιακον ποΧεμον, 
 after the Peloponnesian War. 
 
 c) seldom in (as with the Dative): μετά χεϊρας εχειν, to 
 have in hand (compare &«) : μεθ' ημέραν, interdiu. 
 
 In compounds : with, after, trans- {μετατιθεναι, trans¬ 
 pose). 
 
 § 465. 4. παρά (Horn, πάρ, παραί), radical meaning be¬ 
 side, near. . 
 
 A) with the Dative: 
 
 at or near: Horn, παρά νηυσί κορωνίσι μιμνάζειν, to linger 
 
264 PREFOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 466. 
 
 near the curved ships/ και παρ' εμοί τις εμπειρία εστίν,Ι 
 
 also have some experience (with me also is, etc.). 
 
 B) with the Genitive: 
 
 a) from, with verbs of motion, and such as denote re¬ 
 ceiving either bodily or mentally : Horn. άπονοστεΊν παρά 
 νηων,ΐο return from the ships / λαμβάνειν, μανθάνειν παρά 
 τίνος , to receive, learn from some one. 
 
 b) by, very rare, and only poet.: ναιετών παρ' Ίσμηνου 
 ρείθρων , dwelling by the waters of the Ismenus. 
 
 C) with the Accusative : 
 
 a) to : Horn, τώ δ 1 αυτις 'ΐτην παρά νηας, they went again 
 to the ships. 
 
 b) along, near by: 
 
 of place : Horn, παρά Giva θαλάσσης, along the sea beach. 
 
 of time: during: παρ' όλον τον βί ον, per totam vitam , 
 during the whole of life / 
 
 compared with: δα τάς πράξεις παρ' άλληλας τιθεναι, 
 you must put the acts by the side of (or compare with) 
 one another; with the comparative: μείζόν τι παρά τούτο, 
 something greater than this ; 
 
 on account of (compare propter, near, and on account 
 of) : παρά την ημετέραν αμέλειαν Φίλιππος ανξεται, on ac¬ 
 count of o ur neglect Ph ilip becomes great. 
 
 Taken negatively; besides: εχομεν τι παρά ταΰτα άλλο 
 λεγειν, we have something else to say besides this / 
 
 contrary to (opposed to κατά with the Acc.: παρά τον 
 νόμον, contrary to the law, properly past the law, by evad¬ 
 ing the law. 
 
 Phrases : παρά μικρόν, nearly/ παρ' ονόεν ποιεΐσθαι , to 
 deem as nothing. 
 
 In compounds: near, at,past, beyond, over (παραβαίνειν, 
 overstep). 
 
 § 466. 5. περί (Horn. adv. περί, very— \jA. per in per- 
 magnus), radical meaning around (from above), compare 
 άμφί. 
 
§ 467. PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 265 
 
 A) with the Dative : 
 
 round, around, near, for: Horn, περί Σκαιί/σι πνλησι, 
 round the SJccean gate; περί τοίς φίΧτάτοις κυβενειν, to 
 gamble for wliat is dearest. 
 
 Horn, περί κή pi, at heart ; περί φόβω, from fear. 
 
 B) with the Genitive: 
 
 a) mostly in a figurative sense, about, Lat. de: riva 
 &υζαν Ιχεις περί τούτων ; what opinion have you about 
 this ? βουΧενονται περί τού ποΧεμον, they consult about the 
 viar. 
 
 b) in Horn. over, above : περΧ πάντων εμμεναι άλλων, to 
 be- above all others ; hence the prose phrases: περί ποΧΧού 
 ποιεΊσθαι, to place above much, i. e., estimate highly ; περί 
 ούϋενος ποιεϊσθα, place above nothing, i. e., estimate at 
 nothing at all. 
 
 C) with the Accusative : 
 
 almost the same as άμφί (§ 462) : περ\ Α'/γυτ rrov (around, 
 i. e., every where in Egypt), about the country of Egypt; 
 figuratively: in regard to, about, concerning: περί φιΧο- 
 σοφίαν σπουδάζειν , to be zealous cd)out philosophy. 
 
 In compounds (with adjectives = Latin per-): round, 
 round about, besides, over. 
 
 § 467. 6. προς (Horn, προτι, ποτί), akin to τ too, 
 radical meaning at, to (toward the front), compare παρά, 
 
 A) with the Dative: 
 
 a) at, near: ο Κύρος ήν προς ΒαβυΧώιη, Cyrus was near 
 Babylon. 
 
 b) on, to : Horn. ποτ\ St σκηπτρον βάΧε ya'uj, he threw 
 the staff on the ground; τον νούν προςέχετε προς τούτω, 
 give your mind to this. 
 
 c) besides, in addition to: προς τούτοις, besides this; 
 προς τοΐς άΧΧοις, besides the rest. 
 
 B) with the Genitive: 
 
 d) with, in the sense of community : Horn, προς yap 
 Αιός ε'ισιν άπαντες ζεΐνοί τε πτωχοί τε, with (protected by) 
 
 Μ 
 
266 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 468. 
 
 Zeus are all strangers and the poor; προς τίνος είναι, to 
 he with (on tlie side of) any one / προς ιατρού εστιν, it is 
 with (belongs to) a physician, medici est / πρός τίνος λε- 
 γειν, to speak for (in behalf of) any one ; προς Θεών, with 
 (in presence of, by) the gods, per deos, form of an oath. 
 
 b) toward (versus ) : προς μεσημβρίας , toward the south, 
 compare προς with Ace. 
 
 c) from, by (compare παρά with Gen.) : όλβος προς θεών, 
 Messing from the gods; sometimes with Passive verbs: 
 προς τίνος φίΧεϊσθαι, to he loved by some 07ie. 
 
 C) with the Accusative : 
 
 a) to : έρχονται προς ημάς πρέσβεις, embassadors COTYie 
 to US y προς τον ϋημον ά^ορενειν, to Speak to the people. 
 
 V) toward, against ( versus, adversus, erga ): προς βορ- 
 ρο iv, toward the north (compare προς with Gen.) ; $ικάζε- 
 σθαι πρός τινα, to enter cm action against any one · πιστώς 
 δ ιακείσθαι πρός τινα, to be faithfully disposed toward some 
 one; προς βασιλέα σπόντας ποιεϊσθαι, to make a treaty to¬ 
 ward (with) the king. 
 
 c) in regard to, according to : ΰιαφερειν προς αρετήν, to 
 differ in regard to virtue; προς τά κάλλιστα τών υπαρ¬ 
 χόντων $εΐ τά λοιπά πράττειν, we ought to arrange the 
 future according to the best of the present means; πρός 
 ταΐιτα, according to this. 
 
 Phrases: πρός iff ον η v, according to pleasure ; πρός χά- 
 ρ IV, in favor of; πρός βίαν, by force / ουάεν πρός εμε, 
 nothing to me. 
 
 In compounds : to, in addition, near, together with. 
 
 § 468. 7. υπό (Horn, also νπαί, Lat. sub), 
 radical meaning under, below. 
 
 A) with the Dative : 
 
 under: Horn, τών υπό ττοσσΐ piya στεναχίζετο γαϊα, un¬ 
 der their feet the earth loudly groaned; νπ' ΆΘηναίοις 
 είναι, to be under (subject to) the Athenians ; poet, χερσίν 
 
§ 470 . 
 
 THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 267 
 
 v(f ημετερησιν άλονσα, (Troy) conquered under (by) our 
 hands. 
 
 B) with the Genitive: 
 
 a) under, in space: νπο yrjg, under the earth / in the 
 sense of dependency : ini αυλητών χορεύειν, to dance un¬ 
 der (the guidance of } flute-players ; hence 
 
 b) by, with Passives and verbs of Passive meaning: 7) 
 πόλις εάλω νπο των 'Ελλι'ινων, the city was taken by the 
 Hellenes / πολλοί άπεθανον νπο των βαρβάρων, many were 
 hilled by the barbarians. 
 
 c) from, because of: νπο γηρως ασθενής ην, lie was weak 
 from old age. 
 
 C) with the Accusative : 
 
 d) under : Horn, ώς είπών νπο πόντον ε&νσετο κνμαίνοντα, 
 
 having thus spoken, he dived under the billowy sea; νπο 
 το όρος ηνλίζοντο, they spent the night under (at the foot 
 of) the mountain. 
 
 b) of time ; toward (Lat. sub): νπο νύκτα, toward night / 
 νπο την νύκτα, during the night. 
 
 In compounds : under, down under, gradually, secretly, 
 often untranslatable. 
 
 Chap. XVII Γ. —The Pronouns. 
 
 § 469. 1 . The Nominative of the Personal Pronouns is 
 used, as in Latin, only when the person is to be mentioned 
 with special emphasis: και σύ οφει αντόν, iu quoque eum 
 viclebis, i. e., ον μόνον εχώ (not merely I). 
 
 § 470. 2. The place of the Possessive Pronoun is fre¬ 
 quently supplied by the article (§ 373). On the article 
 with the Possessive Pronoun, § 388. 
 
 a) Instead of the Possessive Pronoun, the Greek likes to 
 use the Genitive of the corresponding Personal Pronoun. 
 Such a Genitive, when the substantive to which it belongs 
 lias the article, usually stands either before the article or 
 
268 
 
 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 471 . 
 
 after the substantive: σου ύ υιός or ο υιός σου, thy son, 
 not ό σου υιός. 
 
 h) As the Possessive Pronoun approaches very near to a 
 possessive Genitive (§ 408, 2 ), it may be qualified by a 
 Genitive : τάμα δυστήνου κακά, my ills, the unfortunate 
 
 one’s [mea miseri mala]. 
 
 § 471. 3. The Reflexive Pronoun refers either to the 
 subject of the clause in which it occurs : ώ αγαθέ, μή αγνοεί 
 σεαυτον, good friend,he not ignorant of thyself ; or, in de¬ 
 pendent clauses, it refers back to the subject of the leading 
 clause : ειςιεναι εκελευσεν, εΐ μελλοις συν εαυτερ εκπλεΐν, he 
 hade yo u enter, if you were going to sail away with him 
 {secum). 
 
 Obs. a) —Instead of the Reflexive Pronoun, the usual Personal Pro¬ 
 nouns also may be employed : δοκω μοι ούκ άπαράσκενος είναι , I 
 think myself not to be unprepared. 
 
 Obs. b) —The simple Pronoun of the third person, oi, ol, ε, etc., is 
 commonly used reflexively by the Attic writers, but in Horn, it 
 is exactly like the English, of him, to him, him, etc. (like the 
 Attic αυτόν , αύτορ , αυτόν , etc., according to § 474) : λεγεται ’ Απόλ¬ 
 λων εκδεΊραι Μ αρσύαν ερίζοντά οι περί σοφίας , dicituv Apollo MarsyCR 
 cutem detraxisse de arte secum certcinti; Horn, αυτόματος δε οί ήλθε 
 —Μενέλαος, sponte sua ad cum renit Menelaus. 
 
 Obs. c )—The Reflexive of the third person sometimes supplies the 
 place of that of the first and second : δε~ι ημάς άνερ'εσθαι εαυτούς , 
 ice must ask ourselves; in like manner, the Possessive ός some¬ 
 times stands for the Possessive of the first two persons: Horn. 
 ov yap εγωγε ής γαίης δύναμαι γλυκερώτερον άλλο ίδεσθαι^/ον I can 
 see nothing sweeter than my own country. 
 
 § 472. The following are used as Possessives of the Re¬ 
 flexive Pronouns: 
 
 a) the Genitives of the Reflexive Pronouns, especially in 
 the Singular: εμαυτού, σεαυτού, εαυτού. A lien the sub¬ 
 stantive to which they are joined has the article, the Gen¬ 
 itives stand between the article and the substantive: Ζευς 
 την ’ Αθήναν εφυσεν εκ τής εαυτού κεφαλής, Zeus JOTOduced 
 Athene out of his own head. 
 
 l>) the Possessives of the Personal Pronouns, especially 
 
475. DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. 269 
 
 in the plural: ημετερος, ύμετερος : σφετερος is exclusively 
 Reflexive. 
 
 c) The Possessives in connection with the Genitives of 
 αυτός : μμετερος αυτών , etc. 
 
 § 473. The Reflexive Pronoun in the Plural is also used 
 instead of the Reciprocal Pronoun αλλήλων : (όελεγόμεθα 
 όμίν αυτοΊς, ice conversed with one another (among our¬ 
 selves). 
 
 § 474. On αυτός, selfl, and ύ αυτός, the same, see § 389. 
 αυτός in the oblique cases, like the Lat. is, ea, id, is used 
 as a Personal Pronoun referring to some person or thing 
 mentioned before: εόεοντο αυτού παραμεΊναι, they wanted 
 him to remain. 
 
 The Genith T e αυτού, ης, ών, like the Lat. ejus, eorum, is 
 the Engl, his, her, their, when it does not refer to the sub¬ 
 ject. Its position is that pointed out in § 470, a: ό νιος 
 αυτού or αυτού 6 υιός, filius ejus. Still the Genitive ot 
 αυτός often supplies the place of the Reflexive of the third 
 person. 
 
 § 475. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns, ούτος points 
 more to what precedes and is already known; υδε to what 
 follows and has not yet been named; so likewise are dis¬ 
 tinguished τοιούτος, of such quality / τοσούτος , so great / 
 τηλικούτος, SO old —from τοίυςδε, τοσοςδε, τηΧικό ςδε. On 
 the article with these Pronouns, § 389. 
 
 On the demonstrative uses of υς·, § 213, Ohs. 
 
 § 4755. The Interrogative Pronouns mentioned in § 216 : 
 τ!ς, πότερος, πο7ος·, etc., are used exclusively in direct ques¬ 
 tions. In indirect ones the compound Relatives όστις, όπο- 
 τερος, όποιος, etc., are employed. The former, however, 
 are often used in indirect questions, though the latter never 
 in a direct one: τις ει ; who are you ? είπε μοΐ, όστις ε'ι, or 
 τις εΐ, tell me who you are. 
 
 On the Attraction with Relative Pronouns, §§ 597-603. 
 
270 
 
 THE ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 § 476 . 
 
 Chap. XIX. —The Voices of the Verb. 
 
 § 476. l. The Active Voice. 
 
 1. The Active voice not unfrequently has an intransitive 
 as well as a transitive meaning. Thus ελαννειν means to 
 drive and to ride ; ίχειν, to have, hold, and to he in a con¬ 
 dition (καλώς εχει, bene se habet ); πράττειν,ίο do and to 
 be (εν πράττω, I am doing well) ; ΰηλουν, to male and to 
 become manifest. 
 
 In some verbs different tenses are assigned to the different mean¬ 
 ings. See above, §§ 329, 3o0. 
 
 2. Simple verbs which are transitive often become intran¬ 
 sitive when compounded : βάλλειν, to throw — μεταβάλλειν, 
 to change; εςβάλλειν and εμβάλλειν, to fall into, issue (of 
 rivers); Sdovai, to give —ivSiSovai, to give in; επι^ι^όναι, 
 to grow ; κόπτειν,ίο cut; προκόπτειν, proficere, make prog¬ 
 ress ; φερειν, to bear ; ΰιαφερειν, dfferre, to differ or be dis¬ 
 tinguished. 
 
 3. The Active often denotes an action which the subject 
 accomplishes not immediately, but mediately, that is,, causes 
 or allows to be done by others: ό Κηρός* κατεκανσε τά βα¬ 
 σίλεια, Cyrus had the royal castle burned down. This is 
 called the Causative use. 
 
 § 477. 2. The Middle Voice. 
 
 Its primary meaning is reflexive, i. e., the action of the 
 verb in the Middle refers back to the subject from which 
 it issues. 
 
 The Middle, in the first place, may be either transitive 
 or intransitive; it is transitive when it can have an object 
 in the Accusative: πράττομαι χρμματα, I gain for myself 
 money; intransitive when it is incapable of having such an 
 object: άπεχομαι, I restrain myself. 
 
 The Middle, farther, can \ r ary much in its mode of refer¬ 
 ring back to the subject. We distinguish : 
 
480 . 
 
 THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 271 
 
 § 478. l. The Direct Middle, 
 
 in which the subject is at the same time the direct object 
 of the verb: λούομαι, I wash myself / τρέπομαι, I turn my- 
 self; επιδείκνυμαι, I show my self y 'ίσταμαι, I jplace myself} 
 καλύπτομαι, I hide myself This kind of Middle is the 
 rarest. The Active with the reflexive pronoun in the Ac¬ 
 cusative is more generally used to express direct Reflexion. 
 
 Obs. —Through the direct Middle, several middle verbs have be¬ 
 come intransitive or passive : παύω, I cause to stop; παύομαι, I 
 stop myself \ cease ; φαίνω, I show ; φαίνομαι , I show myself “ appear ; 
 ’ίημι, I send; ! ϊεμαι , I send myself ,‘ hurry. 
 
 § 479. 2. The Indirect , or Dative-like Middle (§ 431), 
 in which the subject is but indirectly affected by the ac¬ 
 tion. Here the action takes place for or in the interest 
 of the subject, so that in other languages the Dative may 
 generally be used to denote the reflex influence : πορίζω, 
 I provide ; πορίζομαι, I provide for myself e. g χρήματα, 
 money / αγομαι γυναίκα, I take a wife to myself; μισθοΰ- 
 μαι στρατιώτας, I hire soldiers for myself (but μισθοΰν, 
 hire out , μισθοΰν εαυτόν, to hire one’s Self out ) ; μεταπεμ- 
 πομαί τινα, I send for some one} Horn, αυτός εφέλκεται 
 avSpa σίδηρος, the iron itself draws a man to it. Hence 
 the Athenian says: ύ νομοθετης τίθησι νόμους, the lawgiver 
 gives laws , but ό δήμος τίθεται νόμους, the people gives laws 
 to itself 
 
 Obs. —The interest of the subject sometimes consists in an object 
 being removed from its reach : αμύνομαι κίνδυνον, I ward off dan¬ 
 ger from me; προΐβμαί τινα, I send some one away from me; άπο- 
 νόσβαι vavv {to give away for one's interest ), to sell a ship. (Com¬ 
 pare § 324, 7). 
 
 § 480. 3. The Subjective or ethical Middle. 
 
 This denotes that an action originates not only external¬ 
 ly, but also internally from the subject, i. e from its means, 
 power, or disposition : παρεχειν, to furnish ; παρεχεσθαι, to 
 furnish from one’s own means / ποιεΐν ειρήνην, to make 
 peace; ποιείσθαι ειρήνην, to strive to make peace; λα μ- 
 
272 
 
 THE MIDDLE VOICE. § 481 . 
 
 βάνειν τι, to take something ; \αμβάνεσθαί τίνος , to lay 
 hold of something ; σκοπείν, to look at ; σκοπείσθαι, to re¬ 
 flect. 
 
 Obs. —The subjective Middle is formed also from intransitive verbs; 
 it then expresses a state more intensively than the active: ποΧι- 
 τενειν, to be a citizen; ποΧιτενεσθαι, to act as a citizen ’ βονΧενειν, to 
 give advice; βονΧεύεσθαι, to deliberate with one's self. 
 
 § 481. 4. The Causative Middle. 
 
 As the Causative Active (§ 476, 3) expresses an ac¬ 
 tion only occasioned by the subject, so the Middle is often 
 used to denote that the subject has an action done for 
 or on itself: 6 πατήρ διδάσκεται τον υιόν , the father has 
 his son instructed; παρατίθεμαι δειπνον, I have a meal 
 placed before me ; Δικάζομαι, I have judgment pronounced 
 for me; άποτεμνομαι τάς χεΊρας, I have my hands cut 
 
 off- 
 
 § 481 b. As examples, the following more important verbs 
 may be adduced, whose meaning in the Middle essentially 
 differs in various ways from that of the Active : άρχω, I 
 am first, άρχομαι, I begin; 6 ρμτωρ γράφει νόμον, the ora¬ 
 tor proposes (writes down) a law; b κατήγορος γράφεται 
 τον άδικμσαντα, the accuser prosecutes (has the name writ¬ 
 ten down) the wrong doer; τιμωρώ τινι,Ι help one; τιμω¬ 
 ρούμαι τινα, I avenge myself on one ; αίρω, I take, αίρουμαι, 
 I choose; δανείζω, I put out to interest; δανείζομαι, I 
 borrow at interest; πείθω, I persuade, πείθομαι, I allow 
 myself to be persuaded, 1 obey. 
 
 One and the same Middle may occur in different senses : διδάσκομαι 
 (4),/ cause to teach, or (1) I teach myself, learn; τρέπομαι (1), I 
 turn myself , or (2) I turn to myself; τρέπονται τάς γνώμας, they 
 change their opinion ; τρέπονται τους ποΧεμίονς, they turn away (put 
 to flight) the enemy (§ 479, Obs.). 
 
 § 482. Obs. — The deponents are distributed among the different 
 kinds of Middle verbs, and differ from the verbs mentioned only by 
 having no active form. Thus νπισχνονμαι, I pledge myself, is a direct 
 Middle; but δέχομαι, I receive; κτάομαι, I acquire, are indirect; άγω- 
 
USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 273 
 
 ν'Ζομαι, I contend ; οΖμαι , I think , are subjective: άναβιώσασθαι, to revive , 
 is causative. On the Passive Deponents, § 328. 
 
 § 483. 3. The Passive Voice 
 
 lias a freer use in Greek than in Latin, viz.: 
 
 1. even such verbs as in the Active take a different case 
 from the Accusative, form a Passive: καταφρονώ τίνος 
 (§ 424), I desjpise one / καταφρονεΊται τις i) π εμοϋ ’ ττιστεν- 
 ουσι τώ βασιΧει, they trust the Icing / ύ βασιΧενς πιστεύεται 
 νι τ αυτών ; ετ τιβουΧενει τις ποΧεμίω, he plots against the 
 enemy; b ποΧεμιος h τιβουΧενεται νπ αυτόν, a plot is made 
 against the enemy by him. 
 
 2. Neuters of Passive participles may be formed even 
 from intransitive verbs : τα στρατευόμενα, the warlike meas¬ 
 ures ; τα σοι πεποΧιτευμενα , your political course, your 
 policy. 
 
 3. The exclusively Passive forms even of Deponents are 
 sometimes used in a Passive sense; βιάζομαι, I force, εβι- 
 άσΟην, I was forced / in like manner a Passive may be 
 formed from a Middle : αιρεω, I take, ai ρέομαι, Pass., I am 
 chosen; μετεπεμφθη, he leas sent for, μεταπεμπομαι, I send 
 for (§ 479). 
 
 Chap. XX.—Use of the Tenses. 
 
 § 484. In marking the time, the Greeks distinguished: 
 
 1. The Order of time. The three Orders of time being 
 the Present, the Past, and the Future. 
 
 2. The Kind of time. In regard to the Kind of time, 
 an action is either 
 
 a) going on, e. g., γηνώσκειν (gradually), to learn to 
 know ; or, 
 
 b) momentary, e. g., y νώναι , to perceive, know ; or, 
 
 XI 2 
 
274 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 485. 
 
 c) completede. g Ι^νωκίναι, to have learned, to know 
 (Lat. nosse). 
 
 Obs .—The momentary action may be compared to a point , the ac¬ 
 tion going on to a line , and the completed action to a surface. 
 
 An action going on is indicated by the forms of the 
 Present-Stem. 
 
 A momentary action is indicated by the forms of the 
 Aorist-Stems. 
 
 A completed action is indicated by the forms of the 
 
 Perfect-Stem. 
 
 The Future denotes the future Order of time of an ac¬ 
 tion going on, as well as of a momentary action: γηώσομαί, 
 I shall (gradually) get to know, and I shall perceive / the 
 Third Future ( futurum exactum) that of a completed 
 action : Ιγνωκως ϊσομαι, I shall have learned (Latin no- 
 vero). 
 
 In the Present, Aorist, and Perfect, only the Indicative 
 indicates a definite Order of time; the other Moods, the 
 Infinitive and the Participle, resemble the corresponding 
 Indicative only in regard to the Kind, not in regard to the 
 Order of time. 
 
 The following table presents a general view of these 
 relations: 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Going on. 
 
 Subj 
 
 Ind. Pres. 
 
 Opt., Imperat., 
 
 Imp erf. 
 
 Inf., Part., of tli 
 
 e Present. 
 
 Momentary. 
 
 S 
 
 ubj., Opt., Imper 
 
 Aor. Ind. 
 
 at., Inf., of the j. 
 
 4 orist. 
 
 Completed. 
 
 Subj 
 
 Perf. Ind. 
 
 Opt., Imperat., 
 
 Pluperf. 
 Inf., Part., of tli 
 
 Futurum exact. 
 
 e Perfect. 
 
 § 485. Obs .—As the English as well as the Latin language gener¬ 
 ally neglects the distinction between an action going on and a Mo¬ 
 mentary action, it is difficult to comprehend it. A similar distinc- 
 
§ 488 . 
 
 TIIE PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 275 
 
 tion, however, may be perceived in some English verbs, as flee (φεύ¬ 
 γε iv) and escape (φνγεΊν); flicker and flash; fear ( ψοβεισθαι ) and he 
 frightened ( φοβηθήναι , δ είσαι ) ; iconder (θανμάζειν) and to he surprised 
 (θανμάσαι ) ; to he busy about (ττράσσειν) and to accomplish (πράζαι ) ; 
 γελάν, to be laughing , and γελάσαι , to burst out laughing. 
 
 l. Forms of an Action in Progress. 
 a) The Present Indicative. 
 
 § 486. The Present Indicative denotes, as in English 
 and Latin, an action going on or in progress at the present 
 time: ικετενομεν σε παντες, we all implore thee. Hence 
 by the Present are expressed general assertions, valid for 
 all times, and therefore also for the Present: ϊστι θεός*, 
 there is a God. 
 
 Obs. —Actions whose commencement indeed belongs to the Past, 
 but whose effects extend to the Present, are sometimes expressed 
 by this tense : ακούω, I hear , also in the sense, I have heard and 
 still bear in mind ; νικάω , I conquer , i. e.,I am victorious; φεύγω , 
 lam banished; άδικέω, I am wrong (have done wrong); θνήσκει , 
 he is dead. In this sense alone are used ήκω, I am come; ο’ίχομαι , 
 I a m gone. 
 
 § 487. By a lively apprehension a past action may be 
 represented as present, hence the use, very frequent in 
 Greek, of the Historical Present, which frequently alter¬ 
 nates with past tenses: poet, και πώς όραται καί τιρεθη ; 
 and how is she seen , and was she captured f επεί hydro 
 ΆρχίιΙαμος και εττορεύετο εττι τους αντίπαλους, ενταύθα ούτοι 
 ούκ ίοεζαντο τους περί τον Άρχί^αμον, αλΧ εγ κλΐνουσιν , as 
 Archidamus took the lead and marched against the enemy, 
 the latter did not wait for the troops of Archidamus, hut 
 retreat. 
 
 § 488. V) The Imperfect 
 
 is the Preterite of an action in progress, like the Latin 
 Imperfect. 
 
 The Greek therefore uses the Imperfect where he wishes 
 to describe past states or past actions in their progress, in 
 their continuance along with others, or in their frequent, 
 
276 
 
 THE IMPERFECT. 
 
 489 . 
 
 continued repetition: Horn, οί μεν άρ οίνον εμισγον εν\ 
 κρητηρσι καί ύδωρ, <κ δ’ αύτε σι τογγοίσί πολντρμτοισι τράπεζας 
 νίζον καί προτίθεν, τοί δε κρεα πολλά δατενντο, some were 
 mingling wine and water in mixing-howls, others cleaning 
 tables with porous sponges, a nd placing them, the rest were 
 carving much meat / τούς μεν ούν πελταστάς ε^έζαντο οί 
 βάρβαροι κάΐ εμάχοντο, the barbarians met the peltasts, 
 and then were fighting ,—Horn, όφρα μεν μώς ην καϊ άεζετο 
 ιερόν ημαρ, τόφρα μάΧ άμφοτερων βέλε’ ηπτετο, πίπτε τε 
 λαός , as long as it was morning, and holy day increasing, 
 so long the darts of both were striking and people falling. 
 — ούποτε μεΐον άπεστρατοπεδενοντο οί βάρβαροι των 'Ελλή¬ 
 νων εζμκοντα σταδίων, the barbarians (did not encamp) used 
 never to encamp less than sixty stadia from the Hellenes. 
 
 § 489. Ohs. 1.—Tlie Imperfect frequently expresses a merely at¬ 
 tempted but not accomplished action : πρώτος Κλέαρχος τονς αυτόν 
 στρατιώτας έβιάζετο ίέναι , οι δε αυτόν έβάλλον, ύστερον δε έπεί εγνω οτι ον 
 δυνησεται βιάσασθαι, συνηγαγεν εκκλησίαν, first ClearchllS tried to force 
 his soldier's to go , lout they shot at him ; afterward , however, as he perceived 
 he would not l>e able to force them , he summoned a meeting. So εδίδου 
 sometimes means he offered to give , to distinguish it from εδωκεν , he 
 gave. 
 
 § 490. Obs. 2.—The Imperfects of the verbs which denote should 
 and must are used, just as in Latin, to denote what should be done 
 in opposition to what was done : εδει τους λέγοντας μήτε προς εχθραν 
 ποιεΊσθαι τον λόγον μήτε προς χάριν , the speakers ought to have made their 
 speeches neither from fear nor from favor (Lat. oportebat) ; so χρην, it 
 ought; είκος ην , it would be fair. 
 
 On the Imperf. with dv , § 494, Obs. 1, and § 537, etc. 
 
 § 491. c) The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, Infinitive, 
 
 and Participle Present 
 
 simply express an action in progress, whether it lie in the 
 present, past, or future : μαινόμεθα ττάντες, όπόταν ύρ^ιζω- 
 μεθα, we are cdl mad when we are angry/ ελε-γο v τω 
 Εύθυδ ημω, ότι πάντες έτοιμοι εΊεν μανθάνειν, they told Pu- 
 thydemus that they were all ready to learn · ούτω ποιήσω, 
 
492 . 
 
 THE AORIST INDICATIVE. 
 
 277 
 
 όπως uv συ κεΧεύης, I will do as you TilCiy bid 'Die (sic 
 again, ut tu me agerejubebis ); ταύτα Χεγων θορύβου ηχούσε, 
 Siu των τάξεων Ιόντος και ηρετο, τις ό θόρυβος είη, SCiying 
 this , lie heal'd a noise pass through the ranks, and asked 
 what the noise was. 
 
 Ohs. —These Present forms sometimes, like the Imperfect (§ 489), 
 express a mere attempt : to άποδιδράσκοντα μή δύνασθαι διποδραναι 
 πολλή μωρία, for a man not to le able to run away when he tries to 
 run away is great stupidity. 
 
 § 492. 2. Forms of λ Momentary Action. 
 a) The Aorist Indicative 
 
 is the Preterite of a Momentary action, and therefore de¬ 
 notes the actual beginning of an action in the past, similar 
 to the Historical Perfect of the Latins. 
 
 * The Greeks employ the Aorist Indicative when they 
 wish to narrate past facts, to state past actions simply as 
 having happened, or to represent them as individual facts 
 without reference to other actions : μετά την εν Κορώνει a 
 μάχην οι Αθηναίοι εξεΧιπον την Βοιωτίαν πάσαν, after the 
 battle at Coronea the Athenians left all Boeotia ;— Παυ¬ 
 σανίας* εκ Αακε&αίμονος στρατηγός υπό Ελλήνων εξεπεμφθη 
 μετά είκοσι νέων από ΤΙεΧοποννησου , ξυνεπΧεον $ε καί Αθη¬ 
 ναίοι τριάκοντα ναυσΊ και εστράτευσαν ες Κύπρον και αυτής τά 
 ττολλα κατεστρεφαντο, Pausanias was sent out from Lace- 
 ddemon as general fog the Hellenes, with twenty ships from 
 the Peloponnese, hut Athenians also accompanied him 
 (accompanying circumstance) with thirty ships, and they 
 proceeded to Cyprus and subdued the greater part of it; 
 τοξικην και 'ιατρικήν και μαντικήν 'ΑπόΧΧων άνεύρεν , Apollo 
 invented- the arts of archery, medicine, and prophecy ;— 
 Horn, την cl ποΧυ πρώτος ίϋε T ηΧεμαχος θεοειδής, βή S’ 
 ιθυς προθύροιο , νεμεσσηθη ο εν\ θυμιρ ζεΐνον ϋηθά θύρησιν 
 εφεσταμεν , ίγγναι £ε στας χειρ ελε οεζιτερην και εόεζατο 
 χάΧκεον εγχος, but her first Telemachus of form divine 
 beheld, and he went straight to the porch, and was grieved 
 
278 
 
 THE AOKIST INDICATIVE. 
 
 § 493 . 
 
 at heart that a stranger stood a long time at the door, and 
 going near he took him by the right hand and eased him 
 of his brazen spear. 
 
 § 493. As the Aorist Indicative simply expresses an ac¬ 
 tion as having taken place in the past, it answers to all the 
 different Preterites in other languages, especially often in 
 subordinate sentences to the Latin and English pluperfect: 
 Ααρείος K υρον μεταπεμπεται (§487) απυ της αρχής ής αυτόν 
 σατράπην Ιποίησεν, Darius has Cyrus sent for from the 
 province, over which he had made him satrap ( fecerat ). 
 Thus the Aorist is used with the Conjunctions of time, 
 επεί, ως, οτε, as, when, like the Latin Perfect with post - 
 quam, uhi, ut : ως 6 Κύρος τίσθετο κραυγής, άνεπηϋησεν 
 επί τον /7Γ7 τον ώσπερ εν0ουσιών, when Cyrus perceived (ut 
 audivit) a cry, he sprang upon his horse like one inspired. 
 
 § 494. The Aorist Indicative is used in statements of experience im¬ 
 plying that a thing once happened , but admitting an application to 
 all times : poet, τιρ χρόνιρ η δίκη πάντως ηλθ’ άποτισαμενη , with time 
 avenging justice always came (and hence always comes); καί βραδύς 
 ευβουλος εϊλεν ταχνν άνδρα διώκων, even a slow man , when well advised , 
 overtook (overtakes) by pursuit a quick man. In English we employ 
 the Present in such general assertions, and often add such adverbs 
 as usually , commonly , always , etc. : τάς των φαύλων συνουσίας ολίγος 
 χρόνος δάλυσεν, a short time usually dissolves the associations of the bad. 
 This Aorist is called the gnomic Aorist, because it is often used in 
 gnomes, proverbs, or maxims. In Horn, it is often also used in com¬ 
 parisons. 
 
 Obs. 1.—In expressing what usually happens, the Aorist sometimes 
 has άν in order to express the case as one that may have occurred, 
 and therefore may occur oftener: ελεξεν άν , he may have said. In 
 the same way the Imperfect is used, but referring to an action 
 in progress : άναλαμβάνων αυτών τά ποιήματα διηρώτων άν , τί λέ- 
 yoi':v 7 taking up their poems I would ask what they meant. 
 
 Obs. 2.—The Aorist Indicative, especially in the 1 Pers. Sing., is 
 frequently used to express actions and states beginning only at 
 the moment of speaking: h /έλασα, I burst out laughing; poet. 
 επήνεσ ipyov καί πρόνοιαν ην εθου, 1 praise the deed and the pru¬ 
 dence which you have exercised. 
 
 On the Hypothetical Aorist, § 537, etc. 
 
§496. THE AOR. SUBJ., OPT., IMPERAT., AND INFIN. 279 
 
 § 495. b) The Aorist Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative; 
 
 and Infinitive 
 
 denote a Momentary action simply, whether of the present, 
 past, or future : οι τριάκοντα τ τροςεταζαν awayaytiv Αίοντα, 
 iv άποθάνοι, the Thirty commanded to tale Leon away to 
 die j απορώ, τί πρώτον μνησθώ, I am in doubt what first 
 to mention; μη θαυμάσητ£, tav παράδοξον άπω τι, be not 
 surprised if I say something strange; συ μοι άπόκριναι, 
 ώ 7 ταί, give me an answer, boy; ply a ο'ιμαι toy ον το άρχην 
 καταπράζαι, πολύ δ’ ϊτι μάζον το λαβυντα 8ιασώσασθαι, I 
 
 deem it a great thing to found a government, but a still 
 greater to maintain it after acquiring it. 
 
 Obs. —The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive Aorist, 
 therefore, differ from the corresponding forms of the Present, 
 just as the Aorist Indicative differs from the Imperfect; the 
 Aorist forms express a single fact, conceived as a point, the 
 Present, as a state or condition, sometimes of long duration : 
 χαλεπόν το ποιείν, το δε κελευσαι ρόδιον, it is difficult to do , easy to 
 command; d mj εχεις άντιλεγειν , αντίλεγε * εί δε μή, παΐισαι πολλάιας 
 λίγων τον αύτδν λόγον , if you have any thing to say in reply, reply 
 (even in a long speech), if not, cease (at once) frequently repeating 
 the same statement. 
 
 § 496. The Aorist Participate regularly expresses some¬ 
 thing which to oh place earlier or before the act of the prin¬ 
 cipal verb : Κροΐσος f Αλυν δίαβας* ρεγάλαν αρχήν καταΧυσει, 
 Croesus, after crossing the Ilalys, will overthrow a great 
 empire; παθών δε τε νηπιος εγηω (§ 494), after suffering 
 (by suffering) even a fool becomes knowing. 
 
 Obs. —As the Aorist generally indicates the moment at which an 
 action actually begins (§ 485), so the Aorist Participle also only 
 expresses that the beginning of an action took place before an¬ 
 other action, while its progress may continue simultaneously with 
 that other : γελάσας είπε, he began to laugh and said (laughing) 
 \risu oborto dixit]. Horn, ώοε δε τις ε’ίπεσκεν ίδιον ες πλησίον άλλον, 
 thus would say many a one while looking at his neighbor; χάρισαί 
 μοι άποκρινάμένος, answer and oblige me, inasmuch as the χαρίσασθαι 
 follows immediately after the beginning of the answer. 
 
280 
 
 THE FUTURE. 
 
 § 497 . 
 
 § 497. As tlie Aorist Indicative may frequently be translated by tlie 
 Pluperfect (§ 493), so also the Aorist Optative and Infinitive in asser¬ 
 tions generally denotes something which tool· place before: oi ’Ινδοί 
 ελεζαν on πέμφειε σφδις ο ’Ινδών βασιλεύς (Inch on επεμφ/ε), the Indians 
 said that the ling of the Indians had sent them ; Κύκλωπες λέγονται lv 
 Σικελία οίκησαι , the Cyclops are said to have dwelt in Sicily. 
 
 § 498. Many verbs whose Present-Stem expresses a state, 
 denote in all the Aorist forms the entrance into this state: 
 αρχειν,ίο rule , αρζαι, to obtain dominion; βασιλενειν, to 
 be king, βασιλεΰσαι, to become king; 'ισχυειν, to be strong, 
 Ισχυσαι, to become strong ,* σιγάν, to be silent, σιγησαι, to 
 become silent; ίχειν, to have, σχεΊν, to obtain; φαίνεσθαι, 
 to appear, φανήναι, to become apparent; νοσείν, to be ill, 
 νόσησα i, to become ill; πολεμείν, to be at war ( helium ge- 
 rere), πολεμήσαι, to begin war (helium inferre). (Compare 
 § 485.) 
 
 Ohs. —This meaning, however, is not always attached to these forms; 
 and επολέμησαν may also signify simply helium gesserunt (§ 492). 
 
 § 499. 3. The Future 
 
 expresses the futurity both of an action in progress and of 
 a Momentary action: άρζω, I shall become ruler, and I 
 shall ride. 
 
 Ohs. 2.—The 2 Person Future with ov nearly resembles the negative 
 Imperative: ούκ επιορκησεις, thou wilt (shalt) not swear falsely. 
 
 § 500. The Future Indicative in relative clauses, and in clauses 
 with δπως, that , is worthy of notice, for there the Future denotes 
 what may or should happen: ονκ εχομεν ότου σίτον ώνησόμεθα, we have 
 nothing with which ice can huy food (non habemus , quo cihum emamus) ; 
 δεϊ 'άπαντα άνδρα τοντο παρασκενάζεσθαι , όπως ώς σοφώτατος εσται , every 
 man should talee care to he (that he shall he) as wise as possible (compare 
 § 553). The Participle is similarly used : i) χώρα πολλή καί άγαθή ήν 
 καί ενήσαν όί εργασόμενοι , the land was large and good , and there were 
 people to (icho could) cultivate it; τίς εσται ύ ήγησυμενος; who will he 
 there to ( who can) guide us ? (compare §§ 380, 578). 
 
 Ohs.—iiv (Horn, κέ) is sometimes added to the Future Indicative 
 to denote that a case may possibly occur: εύ οίδ’ ότι άσμενος αν 
 
503 . 
 
 THE PERFECT INDICATIVE. 
 
 281 
 
 7 τρός uvcpa olor συ εΐ άπαλλαγήσεται , I well hnow that lie will l)G glad 
 to he reconciled to a man such as you are; Horn. 6 δε κεν κεχολώ- 
 σεται ον κεν 'ίκωμαι , and he will doubtless be in wrath whom I come 
 upon. 
 
 § 501. The verb μέλλω is used with the Present, Future, 
 or, though more rarely, the Aorist Infinitive, to express 
 an immediately approaching , or, at least, intended action: 
 μέλλω υμάς άχειν tig ’ Ασίαν, I am going to lead you to 
 Asia (in Asiam vos ducturus sum). This is called the 
 periphrastic Future. 
 
 Obs. 1.— μέλλω may also be used in other tenses than the Present 
 with an Infinitive, like esse in Latin, with the Part. Put.: πλησίον 
 ήδη ήν ο σταθμός ένθα εμελλον καταλΰσειν , jam prope adercit Statio 
 ubi deversuri erant , where they wished to rest. 
 
 Obs. 2.— πώς or τί ου μέλλω , is elliptical in the sense of T Vhy should 
 I not ? 
 
 4. Forms of a Completed Action. 
 
 § 502. a) The Perfect Indicative 
 
 is the Present of a completed action, i. e by the Perfect 
 the Greeks denote an action -completed for and with ref¬ 
 erence to the Present: poet, λόγος λέλεκται πας, the whole 
 speech has been spoken \_dixi\ ; εύρηκα, I have found , I 
 have it ; Horn, ηϋη yap τετέλεσται a μοι φίλος ήθελε θυμός, 
 for noic has been finished what my dear soul desired / 
 η πόλις έκτισται παρά των Κ ορινθίων, the city has been 
 founded by the Corinthians (of a still existing city); τα 
 χρήματα τοΊς πλουσίοις η τύχη ου δ εάωρηται αλλά άεάάνεικεν, 
 Fortune has not given , but lent (at interest) their money 
 to the rich. 
 
 § 503. Obs. —Several Perfects have an entirely Present meaning, 
 inasmuch as they present in a conrpleted state the action of which 
 the gradual accomplishment is expressed by the present: μιμνήσκομαι , 
 I remind myself; μεμνημαι,Ι -bear in mind , remember ( [memini ); καλεομαι, 
 I am named ; κίκλημαι , my name is; πείθομαι A follow ; π'εποιθα , I con¬ 
 fide in; όλλνμμ I am perishing; ίίλωλα, I am lost; κτάομαι, I acquire ; 
 κεκτημαι , I possess ; ' ίσταμαι , I place myself; εστηκα , I stand ; βαίνω , I go ; 
 βίβηκα , I am gone. 
 
282 
 
 THE FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 504 . 
 
 § 504. b) The Pluperfect 
 
 is the Preterite of a completed action, i. e by the Pluper¬ 
 fect the Greeks express an action completed for and with 
 reference to a past time : Horn, c )r) τότε y άτρεμας εΰδε 
 λελασμενος όσσ επεπόνθει, then truly lie slept quietly, for¬ 
 getting what he had suffered / tv τοίς Αράκοντος νόμοις 
 μία άπασιν ώριστο τοίς αμαρτάνονσι ζημία Θάνατος , in Όνα- 
 cds laws death had been appointed for all criminals as 
 the only punishment —says an Athenian after the laws 
 were abolished. (As long as they were in force : ωρισταιβ 
 
 Obs. —Tlie Pluperfects of tlie Perfects enumerated in § 503 are to 
 be translated by Imperfects. 
 
 On the Aorist in the sense of the Latin Pluperfect, § 493. 
 
 § 505. c) The Future Perfect (Futurum Exactum) 
 
 is the Future of a completed action, i. e ., it denotes an 
 action which will be completed in the future. It is only 
 in the Middle that the Greeks have a special form for this 
 Third Future, which has generally a Passive meaning. In 
 the Active, the circumlocution by means of the Perfect 
 Participle and the Future of είναι must be used (§ 291): 
 άν ταντ είόώμεν, τά $εόντα εσόμεθα εγνωκότες, when we 
 know this , we shall (thence) have got to know our duty ; 
 Horn, εμοί δε Χελείφεται άλγεα λνγρά, but I shall have 
 gloomy woes left me. 
 
 Obs .—The Future Perfect of the Perfects mentioned in § 503 serves 
 as a common Future : μεμνησομαι , meminero , etc. 
 
 § 506. d) The Perfect of all the Moods, of the Infinitive , 
 
 and of the Participle, 
 
 expresses a completed action generally, and may refer to 
 any of the three Orders of time : ον βονλενεσθαι ωρα αλλά 
 βεβονλενσθαι, now is not the time to consult , but to have 
 consulted (to be resolved); ζΖερζης ώς επνΟετο τον Γ Ελλ//σ- 
 ποντον εζενχθαι, ττροίρ/εη εκ των Έάρδεων, when Xerxes 
 
§ 511 . 
 
 USE OF TIIE MOODS. 
 
 283 
 
 learned that the Hellespont had been bridged over (and 
 was still provided with a bridge, otl εζευκτο), he marched 
 forward from /Sardis / ταΰτα μεν ovv 7Γροειρήσθω, thus 
 much be said beforehand (now to something else); Horn. 
 εσσεται ήμαρ οτ αν ποτ όλώλρ ’ Ιλίος ίρή, a day will come 
 when holy Ilios will be lost (has been lost); χρήσιμον τι 
 εσκεμμενος ήκω, I am come after having devised something 
 useful. 
 
 Chap. XXI.— Use of the Moods. 
 
 A) The Moods in Simple Sentences. 
 
 § 507. i. The Indicative. 
 
 The Indicative, in accordance with the usage of other 
 languages, is employed simply to state something positively 
 or negatively, or simply and directly to ask a question : 
 poet, τής αρετής Ιδρωτα θεοί προττάροιθεν εθηκαν , the gods 
 placed sweat before virtue; Horn, πόθεν εΊς άντρων ; from 
 what class of men are you f 
 
 Obs. —On the Indicative in hypothetical sentences with or without 
 άν, § 536, etc.; in sentences expressing a wish, § 515. On the 
 Aorist Ind. with av, to express what usually happens, see § 494. 
 
 2. The Subjunctive. 
 
 § 508. The Subjunctive expresses what ought to take 
 place; it always refers to the present, to reality. Hence 
 it is used in the following cases: 
 
 § 509. l. as a challenge in the first person : ϊωμεν, let us 
 go \eamus\ ; φερε S/j, τας μαρτυρίας υμίν avayi ;ω, well , come ! 
 let me read you the testimonies \recitem~\. 
 
 § 510. 2. with the negative μή in prohibitions and in 
 negative admonitions (compare § 518): μή τοΐ/το ποιήσγς, 
 ne hoc feceris, you ought not to do this. 
 
 § 511. 3. In hesitating questions, where it is asked what 
 
284 
 
 THE OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 § 512 . 
 
 should be done : τι φώ ; what am I to say f Horn, πώς 
 τίς τοι πρόφρων επεσιν πείθηται 'Αχαιών ; how shall any oj~ 
 the Admans willingly trust thy words f δε'ξεσθε ημάς i) 
 απίωμεν ; will you receive us, or are we to depart f 
 
 § 512 . 4. with μι ι in sentences expressmg t /kw' > or anxiety : 
 μη aypoiKorepov ij to αΧηθες ειπειν, if it he not rather rude 
 to say the truth. If the anxiety is to be negatively ex¬ 
 pressed, μη ου is used : Horn, μη νύ τοι ου χραίσμμ σκήπτρου 
 και στέμμα ΘεοΊο , lest the staff and wreath of the god should 
 not help thee , i. e ., it will certainly be of little help to thee 
 |~Lat. vereor ne non or ut te juvet\. Compare §§ 533 , 616 , 
 Ohs. 3 , § 621 , a. 
 
 § 513. Obs. —The Homeric language employs the Subjunctive of 
 future events, quite like the Fut. Inch, to express a thing that is to 
 be expected (§ 545) : ου γάρ πω τοίους ίδον άντρας ουδέ ΊδωμαεΑ 0 ^ never 
 yet did I see such men nor may (shall) I see them, av is sometimes 
 added in Horn, to this Subjunctive : ουκ dv tol χραίσμφ κίθαρις τά τε 
 δώρ ’Αφροδίτης , the lyre and Aphrodite's gifts would not help thee. Com¬ 
 pare § 500, Obs. 
 
 3. The Optative. 
 
 § 514. 1. The Optative alone (without the particle a i) 
 is used to express a wish that something may take place: 
 poet, ώ παΊ, yivoio πατρος ευτυχέστερος , Ο hoy ! may you 
 he happier than your father [Lat. Pres, or Perf. Subj.]. 
 
 The particles used (like Latin utinani) to introduce a 
 wish are: εΐ (Horn, cu), εΊθε (Horn, α'ΐθε), ει yap, ώς. 
 
 § 515. Obs. —If it is to be intimated that a wish is not to be realized , 
 it is referred to the past, and expressed by the Imperfect or Aorist 
 Indicative : Π θ' ήσθα δυνατός δράν ίσον πρόθυμος εΐ, would that you were 
 able to do what you icish / είθε σοι τότε συνε-γενόμην, would that I then 
 had met you. The same kind of wish is expressed by the Aorist 
 δόφελον (properly “I owed”) and the Infinitive: δλεσθαι ωφεΧον tyt 
 όμερμ, would that I had perished on that day [Lat. Impcrf. and Plup. 
 Subj.]. Compare § 537. 
 
 § 516. 2. The Optative with the particle av (Horn, κε or 
 
519 . 
 
 THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 285 
 
 κίν) expresses possibility : τούτο yivoir av, that (could) 
 might be j ri yap ylvotf αν έλκος μεΐζον η φίλος κακός ; 
 what greater evil could there be than a bad friend / που 
 όητ αν εϊεν οι ζενοί ; why ! inhere can the strangers be f 
 [Latin Pres, and Perf. Subj.]. The Optative with av is 
 therefore called the potential Optative. 
 
 § 517. Obs. 1.—Hence the Optative with av is used in modestly ex- 
 . pressed assertions : ονκ αν λέγοιμι, I would not say \non dixerim] ; dp a 
 άν σνσκευάζεσΟαί ε’ίη, it is perhaps time to break up; ούκ αν δύναιο μή 
 καμων ευδαιμονείν , you could not , without taking trouble , be happy. 
 
 Obs. 2. — In the poets the Optative in a potential sense is also used 
 without av : Horn, ρέΐα θεός y εθελων καί τηλύθεν άνδρα σαώσαι, a god 
 who is willing can easily save a man even afar off. But this use of the 
 Optative to denote a possible and merely imaginary case is originally 
 peculiar to this mood, and hence is preserved in dependent clauses, 
 §§ 528, 529, 532, Obs., 546, 552, Obs. 
 
 § 518. 4. The Imperative. 
 
 The Imperative is the mood of command, and, with neg¬ 
 atives, of prohibition. 
 
 A prohibition in the second person can be expressed only 
 in two ways, viz., either with μη and the Present Impera¬ 
 tive : μη πράττε, of a continued action, or with μη and the 
 Aorist Subjunctive: μη πράζγς, of a Momentary action, 
 do not do : ταύτά μοι πραζον, τεκνον, καί μη βρά^υνε μηεΐ 
 επιμνησθμς ετι Τροίας·, do me this , child , and delay not nor 
 think farther of Troy. 
 
 In the third person also μη with the Aorist Imperative 
 is admissible : μη^είς υμών προς^οκησάτω άλλως, let none 
 of you expect otherwise. 
 
 On the Infinitive instead of the Imperative, see § 577. 
 On the Imperative as a substitute for a hypothetical clause, 
 § 545, Obs. 3. 
 
 B) The Moods in Compound Sentences. 
 
 § 519. Preliminary remarks on the connection of sen¬ 
 tences with one another. 
 
286 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. § 519. 
 
 1. Two simple sentences (§ 361, 2) may be combined in 
 two ways, viz., either 
 
 a) so that the one may be quite independent of the other 
 —this combination is called Co-ordination, or Parataxis 
 ( παραταξίζ*). 
 
 b ) so that they mutually are referred to each other, and 
 express a complete thought only in their combination — 
 this combination is called Subordination, or Hypotaxis 
 (υπόταζις). 
 
 2. Of two Co-ordinate sentences each is a principal sen¬ 
 tence, and in every respect independent of the other: κοινή 
 ι η τνχτ] καί το μέλλον αόρατον, fortune is common, and the 
 future invisible / tovto εγώ ο υτ είρηκα , ο ντε λεχοιμι αν, 
 I have neither said that, nor could I say it. 
 
 On the manner in which co-ordinate sentences may be 
 combined, § 624, a. 
 
 3. By Subordination two sentences are combined in such 
 a way that one expresses the principal idea, the other a 
 secondary one. The former is called the leading sentence, 
 the latter the secondary, dependent or Subordinate. One 
 leading sentence often has several subordinate ones de- 
 pendent on it. The moods of subordinate sentences are 
 in many ways determined by the leading sentence : Ήσ- 
 σαφερν7]ς ^ιαβαλλει τον Κνρον προς τον αδελφόν, ως ετ τι- 
 βουλεύοι αντω, Tissajohernes brings a calumny against Cy¬ 
 rus before his brother, (saying) that he was plotting against 
 him y Horn, σοι αμ εσπόμεθ \ οφρα συ χαίρμς, we have fol¬ 
 lowed thee that thou mayst rejoice. 
 
 4. The Correlative connection of sentences is a special 
 kind of subordination. Of two correlative sentences, one 
 always refers to the other. The one is called the Prota¬ 
 sis, and the other the Appoclosis. The Protasis, which re¬ 
 quires to be completed by another sentence, is subordinate 
 (3). The Apodosis is a leading sentence, which furnishes 
 the necessary completion: Horn, ως ’ /δει', ως μιν εδυ χόλος , 
 
520. THE MOODS IX COMPOUND SENTENCES. 287 
 
 as he saw it wrath seized him / Horn. οττποΐόν κ είπησΟα 
 ϊττος τοίόν κ εττακουσαις, the hind of word you sjpeaJc ? such 
 you will hear. 
 
 Obs. 1.—Tliis correlation is frequently expressed by two Pronouns 
 or Particles referring to each other (§§ 216, 217), as in the exam¬ 
 ples just quoted, but not always: d π y έχεις άντιλέγειν, άντίλεγε, 
 if you can in any way reply, reply. 
 
 Obs. 2.—The Apodosis often precedes the Protasis : ούτος βέλτιστος 
 άν εΐη οστις κοσμιώτατα τάς συμφοράς φέρειν δύναται, he would be the 
 best who can bear calamities with most dignity. 
 
 5. From the subordination of one clause to another there 
 arises a compound sentence. 
 
 Obs. 1.—The same thought may often be as well expressed in two 
 Co-ordinate sentences as in one Compound sentence: μηδενί συμ¬ 
 φοράν δνειδίσι^ς, κοινή γάρ ή τύχη, reproach 7io one with a calamity, 
 for fortune is common; or έπεί ή τύχη κοινή εστι, μηδενί συμφοράν 
 όνειδίσης, since fortune is common , reproach no one with a calamity. 
 The Homeric language abounds in series of Co-ordinate sentences 
 (the paratactic arrangement). . 
 
 Obs. 2.—Frequently a word belonging to the Dependent sentence 
 is drawn into the Principal sentence, where it may appear in 
 different cases. If the Principal sentence stands first, the ar¬ 
 rangement is called prolepsis (πρόληψις, taking beforehand) : καί 
 μοι τον υιόν είπε, εί μεμάθηκε την τέχνην — καί μοι είπε, εί δ νιος 
 μεμάθηκε την τέχνην (§ 397). Horn. Ύνδείδην δ’ ούκ αν γνοίης, πο- 
 τεροισι μετείη, you could scarce perceive on which side Tydides stood; 
 καί τών βαρβάρων έι τεμελεΊτο, ώς πολεμέΐν ικανοί ε’ίησαν, he cdso took 
 care that the barbarians should be capable of carrying on icar. On 
 the other hand, a substantive may pass from the Principal to 
 the Subordinate sentence : Horn, μετά δ’ ί'σσεται ήν τότ άπηνρων 
 κούρην Βρισήος, among them also will be the daughter of Brises, ichom 
 I then took away (compare § 602). 
 
 6. On the different kinds of sentences according to their 
 substance, § 624, etc. Only those kinds will here be no¬ 
 ticed which are most important in regard to the use of the 
 Moods. 
 
 § 520. The use of the Moods in Dependent sentences is 
 subject to the following general rules: 
 
 1. The Indicative in Greek is very extensively used 
 
288 
 
 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 521. 
 
 even in Dependent sentences, the Greeks merely annexing 
 or inserting many sentences without any mark of depend¬ 
 ence where the Latin language marks the dependence by 
 the Subjunctive or Infinitive : μη μ avlpy, τις είμι, ask me 
 
 not who I am [_ne me interroges , quis sim ]. 
 
 § 521. 2 . The Subjunctive in Dependent sentences also 
 denotes always that which ought to take place, and can 
 generally be employed only when the leading sentence 
 contains a principal tense. 
 
 Every verbal form is regarded as a Principal tense which 
 connects the action with the present ; hence the Present 
 (except the Historical Present, § 487), the Perfect , and 
 the Future Indicative, and all tenses of the Subjunctive 
 and Imperative. 
 
 § 522. 3. The Optative (without civ ) denotes something 
 merely conceived or supposed (§ 517, Obs. 2), and generally 
 can be employed only when the Principal sentence contains 
 
 an Historical tense. 
 
 Every verbal form, however, is regarded as an Historical 
 tense which connects the action with the past, hence the 
 Historical Present (§ 487), the Indicative of the A or is t, 
 the Imperfect and Pluperfect. 
 
 A Dependent clause, moreover, frequently has the Op¬ 
 tative when this mood occurs in the Principal sentence. 
 
 § 523. 4. In indirect speech (oratio obligua) the Opta¬ 
 tive (without civ ), but only after an Historical tense , is 
 used to denote somethino* which is to be stated, not as the 
 opinion of the speaker, but of another person : ol 'Αθηναίοι 
 Γίερικλεα έκακιζον , ότι στρατηγός ων ουκ επεζάγοι επί τους 
 πολεμίους, the Athenians reproached Pericles because , be¬ 
 ing a general , he did not lead them out against the enemy 
 \_quod non duceretj ; ε'ΰζαντο σωτήρια Ουσειν ένθα πρώτον 
 εις φιλίαν γην αφίκοιντο, they vowed to offer thank-offerings 
 whenever they should first come to a friendly land / εί τις 
 πόλις επ\ πόλιν στρατευσοι, επ) ταύτην εφη ιεναι , SI qua CIO- 
 
526. MOODS IX DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS, ETC. 289 
 
 ita-s contra [aliam] civitatem pugnatura esset, contra hanc 
 se dixit iturum. 
 
 In this case, however, the Indicative also is admissible 
 according to § 520, but never the Subjunctive, even after a 
 Principal tense, its employment being limited to the case 
 mentioned in § 527. 
 
 § 524. 5. The Potential Optative (with av) may occur in 
 Dependent, in the same sense as in Independent, sentences 
 (§ 516), to denote something as merely possible: λέγω, οτι 
 τούτο ουκ αν γενοιτο, I say that this probably could not 
 happen. 
 
 The farther use of the Moods in Dependent sentences is 
 treated of specially in what follows, according to the differ¬ 
 ent kinds of Dependent sentences. 
 
 I. Moods in Dependent Assertions and in De¬ 
 pendent Interrogative Sentences. 
 
 § 525. Sentences containing Dependent assertions are 
 those which annex the substance of a speech or opinion to 
 a Principal sentence by means of the conjunctions, on, ώς, 
 that; Dependent or indirect Interrogative sentences are 
 connected with the Principal sentence by means of ε\, 
 
 7t6 τερον ... ?/ [ utrum ... an], whether ... or (in double ques¬ 
 tions), or Interrogative Pronouns (§ 214) or Adverbs. 
 
 § 526. l. The Indicative 
 
 is used in those sentences which, when conceived independ¬ 
 ently, would have the Indicative, and thus, 
 
 a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense , the 
 Indicative must be used (§ 521): είπε μοι, τίνα γνώμην 
 εχεις, tell me , what opinion you have (direct: τίνα γνώμην 
 εχεις) [Lat. die mihi, quam sententiam habeas] ; 
 
 b) when the leading sentence has an Historical tense 
 the Indicative may be used (§ 522): είπον, ηντινα γνώμην 
 είχον, dixi quam sententiam haberem ; ηκεν αγγεΧλων τις, 
 
 Ν 
 
290 MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS, ETC. § 527 
 
 ως Έλάτεια κατείληπται , some one came bringing the news 
 that Elatea ivas taken (direct : Έλάτεια καταληπτοί). 
 
 Besides the Indicative, the Optative also is in this ease 
 admissible, § 528, a. 
 
 § 527. 2. The Subjunctive 
 
 can not occur at all in Dependent assertions, and in De¬ 
 pendent Interrogative sentences only if, when conceived as 
 independent, they would necessarily have the Subjunctive,, 
 and thus 
 
 ct) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense the 
 Subjunctive must remain: βουλώνομαι, πως σε απο δρ ώ, 
 I am planning hoio to escape from you (direct accord¬ 
 ing to § 511: πώς σε απο δρώ [delibero, quo moclo te effu- 
 giam ~\; 
 
 l·) when the leading sentence has an Historical tense 
 the Subjunctive may sometimes occur: έβονλευόμην, πώς 
 σε αποΰρώ ; but the Optative is more frequent in this case 
 than the Subjunctive (§ 528,5). The Subjunctive in De¬ 
 pendent Interrogative sentences accordingly is to be trans¬ 
 lated by may or shall. 
 
 § 528. 3. The Optative (without av ) 
 may occur in such sentences : 
 
 a) as a substitute for the Indicative (§ 526, b\ i. e 
 when there is an Historical tense in the leading sen-, 
 tence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived inde¬ 
 pendently, ought to have the Indicative: είπον, ι\ντινα 
 Ύνώμην ζχοιμι (direct : αχόν) [Lat. dixi, quam sententiam 
 habereni] ; ε^νωσαν ότι κενός 6 φόβος αη, they knew that 
 the fear was groundless (direct: ύ φόβος κενός ην), com¬ 
 pare § 523. 
 
 b) as a substitute for the Subjunctive (§ 527, 5), i. e., 
 when an Historical tense occurs in the leading sentence, 
 in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived independent¬ 
 ly, ought to have the Subjunctive: εβονλενόμην,πώς σε 
 αποδραίην (direct: πώς σε απο^ρώ) [Lat. deliberabam, quo 
 
530. 
 
 MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. 
 
 291 
 
 modo te ejfugereni\, I was reflecting how I should escape 
 you. 
 
 In the second case the Optative is to be translated by 
 should. 
 
 Obs. —Which of the two meanings belongs to the Optative is gen¬ 
 erally perceived from the connection quite as easily as in the 
 Latin nesciebat quid facer et, he lcnew not what he did or what he 
 should do. 
 
 § 529. The Optative as a substitute for the Indicative is found also 
 without a Conjunction in the continuation of a direct speech: ελεγον 
 πολλοί, ότι παντός άζια λέγει (§ 526, b), χειμών yap ειη και ο’ίκαδε άπο- 
 πλεΊν ον όννατόν εΐη, many said that he says what is worthy of the ut¬ 
 most regard, for that it was winter, and that it was impossible to sail 
 home. 
 
 On the Infinitive in assertions, § 560. On the Participle in asser¬ 
 tions, § 593. 
 
 Mixed examples: 
 
 Πυθαγόρας* ο Σαμιος πρώτος εν τοΊς 'ΈΧλησιν ετόλμησεν εΐ- 
 πεΐν, οτι το μεν σώμα τεθνηζεται (§ 291), η δε ψυχή άναπτάσα 
 (§ 316,5) ο ιχησεται αθάνατος και άχηρως, Pythagoras the 
 Samian was the first among the Greeks who ventured to 
 maintain that the body will he dead, hut the soul, flying 
 upward, will depart immortal and ever young ; Θεμιστο¬ 
 κλής νέος ετι ών ελεγεν, ώς καθευΰειν αυτόν ουκ ειάη το τού 
 Μιλτιάδου τρόπαιον, Themistocles , when still young , used to 
 say that the trophy of Miltiades would not let him sleep · 
 Απορώ, τού (§ 214 ,Obs. 1) πρώτον μνησθώ, T am at a loss 
 what to mention first ; oi Επιδομι noc τον θεόν επηροντο, εΐ 
 παρα^οΐεν Κ ορινθίοις την πόλιν, the Epidamnians asked the 
 god whether they should give up their city to the Corinth¬ 
 ians. 
 
 II. Moods in Sentences of Purpose, or Final 
 
 Sentences. 
 
 § 530. Sentences which express an object or a purpose 
 are introduced by the Conjunction iva (Horn. o<ppa), ώς, 
 όπως, in order that, that, in order to, μη, or ύπως μη, f iva 
 μη, in order that not. 
 
292 
 
 MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. 
 
 531. 
 
 As such sentences express something which is expected 
 to happen, they take : 
 
 § 531. l. The Subjunctive 
 
 a) necessarily when the leading sentence has a Principal 
 tense : dig καιρόν ηκεις , οττως της 3ίκης ακόυσες, you have 
 come at the right time to hear the trial [in tempore odes , 
 ut causam audias\. 
 
 V) more rarely when the leading sentence has an Histor¬ 
 ical tense : dig καιρόν ηκες, οττως της ΰίκης ακονσης [aderas 
 ut Ciudires\ ; επίτηδες σε ονκ τ/γείρον, 'ίνα ως ήκιστα δίάγρς, 
 I purposely did not walce you , that you might pass your 
 time as pleasantly as possible. 
 
 Obs .—The Conjunctions ώς, οττως, sometimes have άν (Horn, κε, κεν) 
 added, to them in this sense : τουτ αυτό νυν δίδασχ, 'όπως άν εκ- 
 μάθω, explain that very thing now that I may learn it. The pur¬ 
 pose is thereby represented as one whose attainment depends on 
 conditions (as here, if you explain it). Compare § 554. 
 
 § 532. 2. The Optative 
 
 as a regular substitute for the Subjunctive (§ 531, b), when 
 the leading sentence has an Historical tense: επίτηδες σε 
 ουκ ήπειρον, ίνα ώς ?]δί στα diciyoig ; Horn. Τυδείδ?? Αιομη^εϊ 
 Παλλας Άθηνη ^ώκε μένος και θάρσος 'ίν εκόηΧος μετά ττάσιν 
 Άpyείoισι yivoiTo, to Tydides Diomedes Pallas Athene 
 gave strength and courage that he might be distinguished 
 among all the Argives [Diomedi Minerva animos cledit , 
 ut insignis fieret inter cunctos Argivos\. 
 
 Obs. —The distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in 
 sentences of purpose after an Historical tense consists in the 
 rarer Subjunctive expressing the sentence more as an object or 
 demand that may be attained, the Optative more as the thought 
 or conception of the acting person (compare §§ 521, 522). 
 
 On the Future Indicative with οττως, §§ 500, 553. On the hypo¬ 
 thetical Indicative in Sentences of Purpose, § 500. On the non¬ 
 intended consequence (ώστε), § 565. 
 
 § 533. Sentences expressive of fear, introduced by μη (Lat. ne) or 
 μή ου (Lat. ut ), follow the construction of sentences of purpose (com¬ 
 pare § 512). They have the Subjunctive necessarily when dependent 
 
536. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 293 
 
 on a Principal tense: ου φοβεϊ, μή ήδη πρεσβντερος ι]ς ; do you not fear 
 to he already too old \nonne times , ne estate provectior sis] ? Tlie Optative 
 is commonly used after an Historical tense: εφοβονντο , μή τι πάθοι , 
 they feared he might suffer someichat [verebantur ne quid illi accideret ]; 
 but not unfrequently also the Subjunctive: ot Αθηναίοι τους ζυμμάχονς 
 εδεδίεσαν , μή άττοστώσιν, the Athenians were alarmed lest the allies should 
 revolt (compare § 519, 5, Obs. 2). 
 
 Obs. — μή and όπως μή after verbs of fearing seldom have the Fu¬ 
 ture Indicative , oftener the Perfect Indicative when the fear refers 
 to a completed action: φοβούμεθα , μή άμφοτερων ΐ)μαρτήκαμεν , we 
 fear ice have failed in both. 
 
 Mixed examples: 
 
 τούτο ον προμρημαι \tyuv, 'iva τισ\ν υμών άπε\6άνωμαι, I 
 have not chosen to say this in order to he hateful to some 
 of you; Κύρος φί\ων ωετο $ είσΘαι , ώς συνεργους εχοί, Cy¬ 
 rus thought friends necessary that he might have helpers; 
 Αε^οικα, μη επιΧαθώμεθα τής οίκα^ε ό$οΰ, I Ctm afraid lest 
 we should forget the way home; Φίλί7Τ7τος εν φόβω ην, 
 μη εκφύγοι τα πράγματα αυτόν , Philip was in fear lest the 
 affairs might escape him. 
 
 III. The Moods in Conditional Sentences. 
 
 § 534. Conditional or hypothetical sentences belong to 
 the Correlative sentences (§ 519, 4). The Protasis states 
 a condition under which something is to occur; the Apod¬ 
 osis states that something happens under a certain con¬ 
 dition. Both sentences together form a Hypothetical Pe¬ 
 riod. 
 
 § 535. In the Protasis, d (Horn, αΐ), εάν (i. e., ει-άν ), 
 contracted to ην or dv (Horn, a κε-ν), if are employed; in 
 the Apodosis the particle an is sometimes used to show that 
 it is true only under certain conditions. 
 
 In Greek there are four principal forms of the Hypo¬ 
 thetical Period : 
 
 § 536. l. in the Protasis a with the Indicative , in the 
 Apodosis the Indicative without an, or the Imperative. 
 
294 
 
 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 537. 
 
 This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed when 
 the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be 
 represented as one absolutely necessary, actual, without any 
 opinion being expressed by the speaker as to the probabil¬ 
 ity or improbability of the case: εί θεοί είσίν, εστι καί έργα 
 θεών, if there are gods, there are also works of gods; σοι 
 εϊ Try αλλρ δεδοκται, λεγε καί δίδασκε, if you have any dif¬ 
 ferent opinion, speak and explain. 
 
 Obs .—All tenses may be used in this form, consequently also His¬ 
 torical tenses. If these latter occur, care must be taken not to 
 confound this first principal form with the second: εξήν σοι 
 άπι'εναι εκ τής ττύλεως, εί μή ήρεσκόν σοι οι νόμοι , you were free to 
 leave the city if its laics did not please you (in the present: εξεστι 
 — εί μη άρ'εσκονσι) ; εί τι των δεόντων επράχθη, τον καιρόν , ονκ εμε 
 φησιν αίτιον γεγενήσθαμ if any thing right was done , he says that the 
 occasion , not f was the cause. A sure sign of the second principal 
 form is the particle av in the apodosis. 
 
 § 537. 2. in the Protasis, εί with the Indicative of an His¬ 
 torical tense; in the Apodosis, liv with the Indicative of 
 an Historical tense. 
 
 This form of the Hypothetical Period is applied when 
 the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be 
 represented indeed as one quite necessary, but at the same 
 time neither of them as real. The Indicative in such con¬ 
 ditional sentences is called the Hypothetical Indicative, 
 which, therefore, always denotes the opposite to reality 
 (compare § 515). 
 
 In such Conditional Sentences, a sentence contradictory 
 of the Protasis may always be supplied in thought. 
 
 Hence the Protasis may have the following forms: 
 
 § 538. a) The Imperfect is used when a condition is 
 stated as not existing at present: εί τον Φίλιππον τά δίκαια 
 πράττοντα εώρων, σφοδρά αν θαυμαστόν ι)~γονμην αυτόν, if 
 I saw (were to see) Philip acting justly, I should deem 
 him very admirable. Here we may oppose to the Protasis 
 the thought νυν δε ουχ όρώ τα δίκαια πραττοντα, but now 
 
541. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 295 
 
 I see him not act justly. The verb of this contradiction 
 to be supplied is in the Present. 
 
 To this form corresponds in Latin the Imperfect Sub¬ 
 junctive: si viderem,putarem. 
 
 § 539. b) The Aorist Indicative is used when a condi¬ 
 tion is stated which did not take place in the past: απί¬ 
 θανου αν , si μη η των τριάκοντα apyj) κατεΧύθη, I should 
 have died if the government of the thirty had not been 
 overthrown. 
 
 Here w T e may oppose to the Protasis the thought κατ- 
 ί\υθη Si, but it was overthrown. The verb of this contra¬ 
 diction to be supplied is in the Aorist. 
 
 To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub¬ 
 junctive: periissem, nisi dominatio eversa esset. 
 
 § 540. e) The Pluperfect is used when a non-compleied 
 condition is stated: d τούτο ώμοΧόγητο ημΐν, paSiwg άν 
 $ΐζμαχυμϊθα, if in this we had been agreed, we should eas¬ 
 ily carry the contest through. 
 
 Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought aXX 
 ούγ ώ yoXoy ηται, but we have not been agreed. The verb 
 of this contradiction to be supplied is in the Perfect. 
 
 To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub¬ 
 junctive : si inter nos convenisset. 
 
 § 541. The Apodosis to’a Hypothetical Protasis of this 
 kind may have either the Imperfect or the Aorist Indica¬ 
 tive, or the Pluperfect with άν [Horn, κε-ν], and that quite 
 independently as to which of the three tenses occurs in 
 the Protasis. In this case, also, the Imperfect corresponds 
 to the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive; the Aorist and Plu¬ 
 perfect, to the Latin Pluperfect Subjunctive: si tots ε/3ο- 
 ηθησαμζν, ονκ άν y)vio\Xsi νυν ο ΦίΧιππος, if we then had 
 rendered help, Philip woidd not now be troublesome ; “ 
 αυτάρκη τά ψηφίσματα ήν, ΦίΧιππος πάΧαι άν sSsScoksi Si κην, 
 si plebiscita per se sujjicerent, Philippics dudum poenam 
 dedisset. 
 
296 
 
 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 542. 
 
 § 542. Obs. 1.—Tlic particle άν is sometimes omitted in the apodo- 
 SlS : φσχννόμην, εί υπό πολεμίου γε υντος έζηπατί/θην, I should be ashamed 
 if I had been deceived by an enemy. 
 
 § 543. Obs. 2.—The Imperfect sometimes refers to a past time when 
 the continuance of an action is to be made particularly emphatic : 
 εί τουτ εποίει (not εποίησεν) έκαστος, ενικών av, if each had been acting 
 so, they would be victorious. On the other hand, the Aorist is sometimes 
 used referring to present time, when the rapid commencement of an 
 action is to be indicated: εί τις σε i' /ρετο, τί άν άπεκρίνω (not άπεκρίνου) ; 
 if any one ashed you, what answer would you give ? 
 
 § 544. Obs. 3.—A Hypothetical Apodosis may stand alone, the Prot¬ 
 asis being supplied in thought or deduced from the context: εβου- 
 λύμην άν, I should like (εί εδννάμην, if I could, dared) ; CL υμάς αύτονς 
 πάλαι αν άπολώλειτε, you would long since have 'perished through your¬ 
 selves (i. e., if left to yourselves). 
 
 § 545. 3. in the Protasis , εάν ( ijv, av, Horn, εί κε-ν) with 
 the Subjunctive ; in the Apodosis, the Indicative of a 
 Principal tense or the Imperative. 
 
 This form of the Hypothetical Period is used to ex¬ 
 press or prescribe something in regard to a case that is 
 to be taken for granted and expected. It is admissible 
 only in connection with present and future time (§ 521), 
 and is met with chiefly in maxims or proverbs: δεΐ τα βέλ¬ 
 τιστα av A των η8εων, civ μη συναμφότερα εζμ, λαμβάνειν, 
 you must choose what is best rather than what is agree¬ 
 able, when both together are not allowed ; αν τα τ -αρεληλυ- 
 θυτα μνημονε^ς , αμεινον περ\ των μελλόντων βουλενσει, if 
 you remember the past, you will judge better about the 
 future. 
 
 Obs. 1.—The Aorist Subjunctive in such conditional sentences often 
 comes very near to the Latin Future Perfect: νέος άν πονησ^ς, 
 γήρας εζεις ευθαλές, si juvenis laboraveris, senectutem habebis jucun- 
 dam. 
 
 Obs. 2 .— We find εί with tlic Subjunctive in Homer, and occasion¬ 
 ally also in Attic writers, in the same sense as εάν, εί άν, and εΐ 
 κε-ν '. Soph, άνδρα, κεΐ τις y σοφός, το μανθάνειν 7 τόλλ’, αισχρόν ου- 
 civ,for a man , even if he is wise, to learn much, is no disgrace. 
 
 Obs. 3.—The Subjunctive in Conditional sentences is akin to the 
 
548. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 297 
 
 Subjunctive of Challenging (§ 509). The speaker thereby puts 
 or demands an assertion, to which, for the present, he requires 
 the hearer's assent: τούτο εάν σκοπητε, ενρησετε , on πάντων άριστα 
 εχει , if you consider this you will find that it is the l)est of all; 
 which is almost identical with the challenge : consider this, etc. 
 [compare Lat. Naturam expellas furca, tamen usque recurret\. In 
 a similar way the Imperative sometimes takes the place of a 
 Hypothetical Protasis : ΡοθΡ.^λούτ-ει τε yap κατ’ οίκον, εί βούλει, 
 μεγα και ζή τύραννον σχημ’ εχων, εάν δ’ άπη τούτων τύ χαίρειν , 
 τά\\’ εγώ καπνού σκιάς ονκ αν πριαίμην, for 1)6 rich , if you will, at 
 home , and live in the splendor of a great ruler; hut if joy he wanting 
 to it, I would not give the shadow of smoke for the rest. (Compare 
 § 549.) 
 
 § 546. 4. in the Protasis, εί with the Optative ‘ in the 
 Apodosis, αν (κε-ν) with the Optative. 
 
 This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed in¬ 
 tentionally to represent what is said as quite uncertain, as 
 merely possible, as a merely conceived case: εί τις κεχτ*]- 
 μενος είη ττΧουτον, χρωτο οε αυτω μι'ι, άρ αν ευΣαιμονοί ; 
 should any one possess wealth and not make use of it 
 (suppose any one possessed), ivould he be happy f Com¬ 
 pare §§ 516, 517, Ohs. 2. The Present or Perfect Sub¬ 
 junctive in Latin corresponds to this form : si possideat 
 (or possederit), num beatus sit f 
 
 Ohs .— In Homer the Protasis of such a period also sometimes lias 
 κε-ν or αν : εί τούτω κε Χάβοιμεν, άροίμεθά κεν κΧεος εσθΧόν, if we 
 should get these two, we should get glorious fame. The Attic writers 
 " very rarely use av in the Protasis. 
 
 § 547. Since εί with the Optative intimates that a thing 
 is merely possible, it expresses in reference to the past 
 what possibly might have been, i. e ., a repeated case (com¬ 
 pare § 494, Obs. 1); the Apodosis then usually has the In¬ 
 dicative : εί 7 τον εζεΧαννοι ’A στυάγης, l(f \ Ιπττου χρυσοχαΧίνου 
 περιηγε τυν Κυρον, if ever Astyages rode out (might ride 
 out), he took Gyrus with him on a horse with a golden 
 bridle. 
 
 § 548. ει with the Optative in the oratio obliqua takes 
 the place, according to § 523, of tl with the Ind. (1), or 
 
 N 2 
 
298 
 
 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 549. 
 
 εάν with the Subjunctive (3), when a Hypothetical sen¬ 
 tence depends on a Historical tense: βει Κύρος, ότι ε'ί τι 
 μάχης ποτέ £ εησοι, εκ των φίΧων αυτω παραστάτας Χηπτεον 
 είη, Cyrus knew that , if ever any battle should be necessary, 
 he would have to take his supporters from his own friends. 
 In direct language, Cyrus would say, ην ποτ^ε &r/<ry or εΐ 
 ποτέ Οίεησει—Χηπτεον εστί. If, in its relation to the time of 
 the governing verb, the condition lies in the Future, the 
 Future Optative is used. We seldom, in this case, find εάν 
 with the Subjunctive. 
 
 The following general remarks also are to be observed 
 in regard to Conditional sentences. 
 
 O 
 
 § 549. i. The two members of a Hypothetical Period are 
 not so dependent on each other as that the one necessarily 
 requires a special form in the other. A Protasis of one 
 form may, on the contrary, be joined with the Apodosis of 
 another form. It occurs very frequently that a Protasis is 
 in the first or third form, and the Apodosis in the fourth, 
 in order to represent the Assertion which it contains as 
 merely possible : εΐ τούτο Χ^εις, άμαρτάνοις άν, if you mean 
 this, you woidd be in error / εάν εθεΧησητε πράττειν άζίως 
 υμών αυτών,ίσως άν μεχα τι κτησαισθε ayaOov,if you should 
 be disposed to act in a manner worthy of yourselves, you 
 woidd perhaps gain great good. The connection of a 
 Protasis of tlie second form with an Apodosis of the fourth 
 is rare: Horn, καί vv κεν εν θ' άπόΧοιτο avat, άντρων Αι¬ 
 νείας, εΐ μη άρ οζυ νόησε Αιός θυχάτηρ Άφροάίτη, and now 
 assuredly AEneas, ruler of men, would there have perished, 
 if Zeus's daughter Aphrodite had not kept a sharp look¬ 
 out. 
 
 § 550. 2. A Hypothetical Period may partly or entirely be inserted 
 in another sentence. The most peculiar in this respect are sentences 
 expressing a purpose, when connected with Conditional sentences: 
 
 εί yap ώψε'λον οΐοίτε είναι οί πολλοί τά μέγιστα κακά εζεργάζεσθαι , ίνα ο'ιοίτε 
 η σαν αύ καί αγαθά τά μέγιστα , I would that the many were capable of 
 doing (to a man) the greatest evil , in order that they might also , on the 
 
§ 552 . 
 
 MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 299 
 
 other hand , he capable of (effecting) the greatest good (instead of: for if 
 they were capable, they would also be capable). The Hypothetical 
 Indicative here denotes the impracticable purpose (§§ 515, 537). 
 
 On the Hypothetical Participle, §§ 583, 595. On the Hypothetical 
 Infinitive, § 575, etc. 
 
 Mixed examples: 
 
 Et υπό φίλων εθελεις άγαπάσθαι, τους φίλους ευεργετητεον, 
 if you wish to he loved by your friends, you must benefit 
 your friends; Ei το ε\ειν ούτως ώσπερ το λαμβάνειν μου 
 ην, πολύ ΐιν διεφερυν ευδαιμονία οι τ τλουσιοι των πενητων, 
 if having were as sweet as getting, the rich woidd be 
 greatly distinguished above the poor in blessedness / Poet. 
 Et πάσι ταυτυ καλόν εφυ σοφόν (Τ άμα, ουκ ην αν άμφίλεκτος 
 ανθρώττοις ίρις, if the same things were to all beautiful 
 and wise,people would have no bitter disputes; Πλανώ v 
 προς τινα των τ ταί δων, μεμαστίγωσο άν, εφη, ει μη ώργιζόμην, 
 Plato said to one of his servants, you ivould have been 
 flogged if I were not angry ; ’Ear μεν τι νμίν δοκώ αληθές 
 λεγειν, Συνομολογήσατε, if you thin /ΰ I utter any truth, 
 agree with me / Et πόλις άιιδρών αγαθών γενοιτο, περιμά- 
 χητον άν ε'ίη το μη αρχειν, ώςπερ νυνί το αρχειν, if there 
 were a state (consisting) of good men, it would be an object 
 of contention to avoid ruling (how one might not rule), 
 as now to rule / ’Hr των στρατιωτών δόγμα Τ εΐ τις, άπονε 
 η στρατιά εζίοι, ιδία ληίζοιτο, δηαόσια είναι τά ληφθεντα, it 
 was a decision of the soldiers, if, when the army went out, 
 amy one tooh booty by himself, what he tooh was common 
 property (direct εάν ληιζηταί — δημόσια έστω). 
 
 IV. The Moods in Relative Sentences. 
 
 § 551. Relative sentences are those which are connected 
 with others by means of Relative pronouns (§§ 213, 214, 
 216) or Relative adverbs (§ 217). 
 
 § 552. In Relative sentences all moods are possible i:i 
 the same meanings as in independent or hypothetical sen- 
 
300 
 
 MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 § 553 . 
 
 tences : ούκ εχω o τι πρώτον Χάβω, I have (know) not what 
 I shall take first (§ 511, compare § 527); ορώ σε ΰιώκοντα 
 ών μη τνχοις, I see you pursuing what , I pray, you may 
 not attain (§ 514); υμείς εστε παρ' ών civ κάΧλιστά τις 
 τοΰτυ μάθοι, you are they from whom any one might best 
 learn this (§ 516); ούκ ηθελον Χεγειν προς υμάς τοιαυτα 
 οΐ αν ύμίν η^ιστ ην ακούειν, I did not wish to say to you 
 such things as might he pleasantest to you to hear. Com¬ 
 pare § 544. 
 
 Obs .— Sometimes, especially in tlie Poets, Relative sentences liave 
 the Optative without av in an indefinite assertion, very much 
 like the potential Optative with άν : ον πόλις στησειε , τουδε χρή 
 κλνειν, whom the state mail appoint, him ice must listen to (compare 
 § 517, Obs. 2). 
 
 § 553. On the Future Indicative in Relative sentences 
 expressive of purpose, see § 500. όπως , how, that, in or¬ 
 der that, very frequently has the Future Indicative (yet, 
 according to § 531, also the Subjunctive of other tenses) 
 after verbs which denote looking after, caring for, striving, 
 avoiding: σκοπεί , όπως τα πράγματα σωθησεται, see that 
 the a fairs (the state) shall be safe y Set εκ παντός τρόπου 
 ιιπαντα clvSpa τούτο παρασκευάζεσβαι, όπως ως* σοφώτατος 
 εσται, every one ought to take care in every way to (that 
 he shall) become as wise cos possible. 
 
 Obs .— όπως is often used in challenges and warnings in such a 
 manner that the governing sentence has to he supplied: όπως 
 παρεσει είς την εσπεραν , that you shall be here for the evening (more 
 completely somewhat like: σκόπει όπως, see that you , etc.) ; όπως 
 περί τον πολέμου μηδέν ερεΊς, that you shall say nothing about the 
 war (supply something like : ψυλάττον, tale care). 
 
 § 554. The particle civ (Horn, κε-ν) is added to the Rel¬ 
 ative when the Relative sentence expresses something mere¬ 
 ly conceived, so that the assertion contained in the leading 
 sentence is true only when what is asserted in the Relative 
 sentence really occurs. Such a Relative is called a Hypo¬ 
 thetical Relative. The Hypothetical Relative with av in 
 
§ 555 . 
 
 MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 301 
 
 general is used only where the verb in the leading sentence 
 is in a principal tense , and is then accompanied by the Sub- 
 junctive. Such a Relative sentence may easily be changed 
 to a Hypothetical sentence of the third form (§ 545); παν 
 ο τι αν μεΧΧης ερεΊν πρότερον επισκοπεί τη γνώμη, whatever 
 you may be about to say ( = έάν τι ερεΊν μελλης), examine 
 it first in your mind / in which it is left quite undecided 
 whether one wishes to say any thing; επεσθε οπη civ τις 
 ιγγηται, follow wherever any one may lead you (=εάν τίς 
 π η ηγηται), where you must first wait to know whether any 
 one leads. 
 
 Obs. 1. —As tlie Relative is generalized by the addition of av , it 
 may often in English be translated by ever (Lat. cunque ) : ος av 
 τούτων τι Spy τεθνάτω, quicunque horum aliquicl fecerit, perito; 
 λέγε υσ av 9k\yc, say whatever you wish (compare εάν τι Θελης 
 λέγε). 
 
 Obs. 2.— In the same sense the Poets use the Subjunctive with a 
 Relative without av (or κ'ε-ν ) : των δε πημονών μάλιστα λυπούν’ α'ί 
 φανών αυθαίρετοι , the sufferings afflict most which appear self-caused 
 (compare εί with the Subj., § 545, Obs. 2). Homer has also the 
 Fut. Inch with κέ and the Relative (§ 500, Obs.). 
 
 § 555. If the verb in the leading; sentence is an Ills- 
 torical tense or an Optative, the Relative without civ with 
 the Optative is used, quite in the same sense, as a sub¬ 
 stitute for the Subjunctive (§§ 522, 523). These Relative 
 sentences take the place of those mentioned in § 554, in 
 the same \vay as the fourth kind of Conditional sentences 
 takes the place of the third (§ 548): εκεΧενσεν αύτοΊς επε- 
 σθαι, οποί τις ιγγοΐτο, he bade them follow wherever any 
 one might lead. Thus we read in Homer: ον Si κ εγών 
 απάνενθε μείξης εθεΧοντα νοήσω μιμνάζειν, ου οί επειτα αρ- 
 κιον εσσεΊται φνγεειν κυνας ?)δ’ οιωνούς, but whomsoever I 
 may see inclined to remain away f rom the battle , to him 
 there shall be no security of escaping dogs and birds {i. e., 
 death), but: οντινα μεν βασιΧηα κα) εζο\ον civSpci κιχείη, 
 τον δ’ αγιινοΊς επεεσσιν ερητύσασκε, but whatever (where a) 
 Icing or prominent man he might meet with , him he 
 
302 MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES. § 556. 
 
 soothed with gentle words. Horn, ως άποΧοιτο καί άλλος 
 υ τις τοιαντά γε ρεζοι, so may any other jperish icho shall 
 do such things (but 6ς αν ρεζμ — άποΧεσθω). 
 
 Obs. 1.— Tliis Optative often implies repetition : οντινα ιαχείη, as 
 often as he might find one (§ 547). 
 
 Obs. 2. —The Subjunctive and the Relative with av occur only ex¬ 
 ceptionally after an Historical tense, and the Optative with the 
 Relative and av , in the same case (compare § 546, Obs.). 
 
 V. The Moods in Temporal Sentences. 
 
 § 556. Temporal Sentences, i. e., those which indicate 
 time, are properly only a particular kind of Relative sen¬ 
 tences, and follow them almost entirely in the use of the 
 Moods. The particles of time employed in such sentences 
 are: επεί, επειδή, ώς ( when, after, as) ; 6τε, οπότε, ηνίκα, 
 when, as; εως, εςνε, μεχρι-ς, till ; τ τρίν, before ; in Horn. 
 οφρα, as long as, till ; ημος, when ; and besides the Rela¬ 
 tive expressions: άψ* ου, εξ ον, since; tv J>, whilst; άχρι 
 ού, tig ο, until. 
 
 In these sentences the Indicative is used when any 
 thing actual is stated; the Optative may supply the place 
 of the Indicative in indirect speech after an Historical tense 
 (§ 522). 
 
 § 557. When a Temporal sentence states something mere¬ 
 ly conceived, occurring only conditionally, the particle of 
 time, like the Relative, has αν (κί-ν) joined to it (§ 554). 
 This occurs usually only when the leading sentence has 
 a principal tense, and the Subjunctive must then follow. 
 By combination with civ are formed the Hypothetical par¬ 
 ticles of time: όταν, όπόταν, επεάν or επην, επει^άν : επει- 
 cav πάντα άκονσητε, κρίνατε, when ye have heard all, judge ; 
 εως άν σώζηται τ'υ σκάφος, τότε χρη καί ναύτην καί κυβερνή¬ 
 την καί πάντ άν^ρα προθύμους είναι, as long as the vessel is 
 safe, the sailor, the pilot, and every one ought to be zealous. 
 
 Obs .— Here also av is sometimes wanting (§ 554, Obs. 2). 
 
558 . 
 
 MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 303 
 
 § 558. If the leading verb is in an Historical tense, the 
 particle of time with the Optative without av occurs in the 
 same sense : ί-λΕγίη ότι, επειδή πάντα άκουσειαν, κρίνειαν. 
 
 Obs. 1.— Here, too, tlie Optative often implies repetition (compare 
 § 554, Obs., and § 547), so that ore, οπότε, επεί, with the Optative, 
 may be translated by “ as often as,” “ whenever ύ πότε ol 'ΈΧ- 
 Χηνες τοΊς πολεμίοις επίοιεν, ρφδίως άπεφευγον , as often as the Hel¬ 
 lenes went up to the enemy, the latter readily fled. 
 
 Obs. 2. —Here, too, exceptionally, av and the Subjunctive sometimes 
 occur after an Historical tense (§ 555, Obs. 2). 
 
 On πριν with the Infinitive, § 565. 
 
 Mixed Examples of Relative and Temporal Sentences. 
 
 Υμείς πάντα Χογισάμΐνοι ταυτα χειροτονείθ', ο τι άη υμίν 
 coxy μάΧιστα συμφερειν ry πόΧει, after having weighed all 
 this, vote for what you think will most benefit the state; 
 Ol των βαρβάρων ιππείς, ώτινι εντυγχάνοιεν ' ΕΧΧηνι, πάντας 
 εκτεινον , the cavalry of the barbarians, whatever Greek they 
 met, killed them all; ay iyco ?]κω, αί σιτον^αι μενον- 
 
 των, till I come, let the treaty remain; Poet. Μηποτ επαι- 
 νησι^ς, πριν αν είδμς avSpa σαφηνώς, opyrjv tea ι ρυθμόν καί 
 τρόπον ο στις άν y, never praise a man before you clearly 
 knoiv his temper, and bearing, and character; Έτ τει$η τι 
 εμφά^οιεν, άνίσταντο καί επορευοντο, after having ■ eaten 
 something, they rose and proceeded; f O Σωκράτης τους 
 
 συνόντας εποίει, ου μόνον οπότε υπό των ανθρώπων όρώντο, 
 απεχεσθαι των αδίκων καί αισχρών, αλλά καί οπότε εν ερημιά 
 είεν, Socrates caused his disciples to abstain from what 
 was unjust and shameful, not only when they were seen by 
 men, but also when they were in solitude. 
 
304 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 § 559 . 
 
 Ciiap. XXII. —The Infinitive. 
 
 A) The use of the Infinitive generally. 
 
 § 559. l. The Infinitive is a verbal noun (§ 225, 5) which, 
 as such, has certain properties in common with a verb, oth¬ 
 ers with a noun. 
 
 With a noun the Infinitive agrees 
 
 O 
 
 a) in expressing the action of a verb in general, like the 
 nomina actionis (§ 342): η τοιιϊν, πράττειν, doing · compare 
 ποίησίς, πραζις. 
 
 b) in the fact that it may have the article like nouns : to 
 ttchuv, ro 7 τράττΕΐν, the doing j compare ττοίησις , ί) πραζις. 
 
 With the verb, on the other hand, the Infinitive agrees 
 
 a) in its power of denoting different times : ποιύν, τ τοι- 
 ι\σαί, 7 γπ τοιηκίναι, and of being formed from the Active, the 
 Middle, and the Passive : ττοιησαι, τ τοιι'ισασθαι, ποιηθηναι. 
 
 b) in being occasionally joined with av, and thereby shar¬ 
 ing the functions of mood (§ 575, etc.). 
 
 c) in governing the same case as the verb to which it 
 belongs: 7 τοιύν rci δέοντα, doing your duty / ‘χρησθαι τοΊς 
 οπλοις, making use of arms. 
 
 d) in being qualified, like the finite verb, by adverbs, 
 never by adjectives : καλώς πράττζιν, doing nobly , but καλή 
 7 τραζις, a noble action. 
 
 2. The Infinitive is used very extensively in Greek. 
 Very often, besides the more definite mode of expression, 
 by means of a Conjunction with a finite verb , the less def¬ 
 inite, by means of the Infinitive, is admissible. 
 
 § 5G0. The Infinitive serves to complete and qualify dif¬ 
 ferent sorts of verbs, viz.: 
 
 1. those which express the occasion, capability, modality 
 of an action: ΰυνανται aKzXOuv,they can go away · μύζον 
 
562 . 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 305 
 
 τι εχει είπείν, he has something greater to say (can say); 
 Poet, ουτοι συνεχθειν αλλά συμφιΧεΊν εφυν, I am bom not 
 to join in hating hut in loving · αρχομαι λέγειν, I begin 
 to speak · επιτρέπω σοι ποιείν ο τι uv βουΧη,Ι leave you to 
 do ·whatever you wish · 
 
 2. such verbs as denote appearance, perception, opinion: 
 δοκεΐς Ιιμαρτύν ,you seem to have erred j 
 
 3. such verbs as denote striving after something, impel¬ 
 ling toward, or frightening, deterring, preventing some¬ 
 thing: μη σπεύδε ττλο υτείν,ίΐο not hasten to be rich / Horn. 
 κεΧεαί με μυθησασθαι , you bid me to speak y πάντες αι- 
 τοννται τους θεούς τα φαΰΧα αποτρεπειν, omnes homines 
 precantur deos, ut mala avertant; φοβούμαι διεΧεχχειν σε , 
 I am afraid of refuting you; εΧεχον σοι μη χαμείν, dixi 
 tibi, ne uxorem duceres j τις αυτόν κωΧυσει δεύρο βαδίζειν ; 
 quis eum impediet , quominus hue veniatf ανεβάΧΧετό μοι 
 διαΧεχθηναι, he put off conversing with me. 
 
 § 561. Even the purpose of an action may be expressed 
 by the mere Infinitive, as in English by the Infinitive with 
 to or in order to : ξενοφών το ημισυ του στρατεύματος 
 καΓελ/7τε φυΧάττειν το στρατοπέδου, Xenophon leff half the 
 army behind to guard the camp j παρέχω εμαυτον τω ιατρω 
 τεμνειν και καΐειν, I give myself up to the physician to cut 
 and burn (me); πιείν διδόναι τινί, to give any one (some- 
 thing) to drink. 
 
 Obs .— Not only with verbs of this kind, but also with those men¬ 
 tioned in § 5G0, this Infinitive has a much wider application in 
 Ilomer: αριστεύεστε μάχεσθαι, he used to be the first in fighting j εΐσί 
 καί ο'ΐδε τάύ’ είπεμεν, these too , then , are (able) to say this; βϊ} ikvai, 
 he started to go ; ζυνεηκε μάχεσθαι, he urged (them) to fight. 
 
 § 562. The Infinitive serves to complete or qualify ad¬ 
 jectives of different kinds, partly in the sense of the En¬ 
 glish Infinitive with to , partly corresponding to the Latin 
 supine in u: χαΧεπον εν ρειν, difficult to find [difficile in - 
 ventu] ; οικία ηδίστη ενδιαιτασθαι, a house very pleasant to 
 
306 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 § 563 . 
 
 live in j αζιός εστι πληγας λαβεΐν, lie deserves to get blows / 
 όζντατοί εστε γνώναι τα ρηθέντα, you are very keen in per 
 ceiving ichat is said / δεινός λεγειν, powerf ul in speak¬ 
 ing ’ b χρόνος βραχύς αζίως διηγησασθαι τα πραχθεντα, 
 the time is short for worthily narrating what has hap¬ 
 pened. 
 
 Obs .— In Ilomer such Infinitives are particularly frequent: μ'εγα και 
 εσσομενοισι ττνθ'εσθαι, (JTGCit also for posterity to learn ; θείειν άνεμοι- 
 σιν ομοωμ tike the winds in running; so with some substantives: 
 θαΰμα ίδεσθαι, a wonder to see. 
 
 On οϊος, οίόςτε , and όσος , with the Inf., § 601. 
 
 § 563. The Infinitive, as in English and Latin, is used 
 as the Subject of a sentence to which the predicate is a 
 neuter adjective, a substantive, or an intransitive verb : 
 7 τασιν άδείν χαλεπόν, to please all is difficult / κίνδυνός 
 εστιν ηττασθαι , there is danger of being worsted / συν spy ον 
 λεγειν, speaking is your business. 
 
 § 564. The Infinitive is used in a freer way, without depending on 
 a particular word, with and without the particle ώς, in several phrases 
 almost like a tree Accusative. (§ 404): ώς είπείν, so to speak; εμοί δο¬ 
 κέ Tv, as seems to me; ολίγον δ εάν, almost; το νυν είναι, for the present; 
 κατά τούτο είναι, in this respect. 
 
 On εκων είναι, § 570, 01)8. 
 
 § 565. The Conjunctions ώστε , so that; πριν, before, and 
 its Homeric synonym πόρος, are joined with the Infinitive : 
 Φιλομαθέστατος ην ο Κύρος, ώστε πάντα πόνον άνατληναι του 
 επαινεΊσθαι ενεκα, Cyrus was very fond of learning, so as to 
 endure any trouble for the sake of being praised / πριν την 
 αρχήν όρθώς υποθεσθαι, μάταιον ηγούμαι περ\ της τελευτής 
 όντινουν ποιεισθαι λόγον, before properly establishing the 
 foundation, I deem it useless to make any words whatever 
 about the end. 
 
 Ohs. 1.—These conjunctions may also be joined with the finite verb 
 (compare § 556); ΐόστε with the indicative represents a sentence 
 as an actual consequence more independent and by itself, and 
 may accordingly be often translated by therefore , hence: είς την 
 νστεραίαν ούχ ήκεν, ωςθ’ cl "Ελληνες εφρόντιζον, he came not on the 
 following day, therefore the Hellenes became anxious. 
 
§ 567 . 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 307 
 
 Obs. 2.—For πριν we also find πριν ή, prius-quam; properly πριν , 
 when it means sooner than , is always to be regarded as an abbre¬ 
 viation for πριν ή, πριν originally answering entirely to the Latin 
 2 )rius. On the Infinitive after ?/, than, see the following §. 
 
 On if φτε, on condition that , with the Infin., § G01. 
 
 § 566. After a comparative, the Infinitive is preceded by ή ώστε or 
 ή alone in the sense of than that: φοβούμαι μη τι μείζον η ίυςτε φερειν 
 δόνασθαι κακόν τρ πόΧει συμβφ, I fear lest too cjreat an evil should befall 
 the state for it to be able to bear (greater than that it should be able). 
 
 On the Genitive of the Infinitive with the Article, which also is 
 possible here, § 574, 3, Obs. 
 
 B) The case of the Subject and Predicate with the 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 § 567. The Subject of the Infinitive is that word from 
 which the action of the verb in the Infinitive proceeds. 
 When the Subject is to be expressed with the Infinitive, it 
 appears : 
 
 l. most generally , as in Latin, in the Accusative, which 
 gives rise to the construction of the Accusative with the 
 Infinitive : nyyeiXciv τον K υρον νικησαι , nuntiabant Cy - 
 rum vicisse. The use of the Accusative with the Infin¬ 
 itive, like that of the Infinitive alone (§ 559, etc.), is more 
 common in Greek than in Latin. Not only can the sub¬ 
 stance of a statement or perception—which, however, may 
 be also expressed in one of the forms discussed, § 525, 
 etc.—be given in this construction, but also the effect and 
 consequence of an action. Ilcnce the Accusative with 
 the Infinitive also occurs after verbs of happening, and is 
 admissible after verbs of commanding, demanding, forbid¬ 
 ding : πάντες όμο\ο yovai την ομόνοιαν piy ιστόν ayaObv εί¬ 
 ναι, all agree that concord is a very great good; συνέβη 
 μη^ενα τω# στpaτηyώv τταρείναι , it happened that none of 
 the generals was present / typaipa αποπΧεϊν την ταχίστην 
 τους πρέσβεις, proposui ut guam celerrime legatiproficis- 
 cerentur. 
 
308 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 568 . 
 
 Tlic Accusative with the Infinitive is properly dependent on the 
 verb of the leading sentence (compare the English : I hear you 
 sing, I bid you go), and is explained by the prolepsis mentioned 
 in § 519, 5, Obs. 2. Instead of ήγγειλαν οτι δ Κύρος ενίκησεν , we 
 might have : ήγγειλαν τον K ΰρον οτι ενίκησεν ; and for on ενίκησεν , 
 νικησαι , according to § 560, 2 ; thus we obtain ήγγειλαν τον Κϋρον 
 νικήσαι. If the governing verb is intransitive or passive, the Ac¬ 
 cusative is of a freer kind (§ 404) : ελπίς ίστι πάντα καλώς ΐ-χειν, 
 there is hope that all is well. 
 
 Obs. 1.—The impersonal verbs hi and χρή, it is necessary , are joined 
 with the Accusative and Infinitive like the Latin oportet: χρή 
 τολμάν χαλεποΐσιν εν άλγεσι κείμενον άνδρα, the man that lies in 
 painful sufferings ought to be courageous. 
 
 Obs. 2 .—As a continuation of an Accusative with the Infinitive, 
 the same construction may be employed in indirect speech in 
 Relative sentences and after Conjunctions, denoting time and 
 circumstances : τοιαϋτ’ άττα σφάς εφη διαλεχθ'εντας ί'εναι * επεί δε 
 γεν'εσθαι επί τη οίκίει τη ’Αγάθωνος, άνειργμ'ενην καταλαμβάνειν την 
 θνραν , he said that after such conversation they went ; but that , when 
 they reached Agathoris house , they found the door open. 
 
 § 568. 2. A Predicate referring to such a Subject must 
 necessarily be in the Accusative: τον aSu coy καί πονηρον 
 άν$ρα φημί άθλων είναι, I maintain that the unjust and 
 had man is miserable. 
 
 Not unfrequently a Predicative expression requires an 
 indefinite Subject {τινα) to be supplied: τα τοιαντα εζεστι 
 ( τινα ) μετρΐ]σαντα και αριθμησαντα elSevai, one may Jcnow 
 
 such things by measuring and counting. 
 
 § 569. 3. When the Subject of an Infinitive is the same 
 as that of the leading sentence , it is usually not expressed 
 at all: νομίζω νενικηκέναι, jputo me vicisse, I think I have 
 conquered; ελπίζεις τενζεσθαι ών αν δερ, you hope to obtain 
 what you need; υπεσχετο παρεσεσθαι είς την εσπεραν,φρηο- 
 misit se affuturum ad vesperam. 
 
 Obs. —For greater emphasis, especially when opposition to some¬ 
 thing else is to be expressed, the subject may be added, and that 
 either in the Accusative or Nominative : Herod, οι βΧγνπτιοι ενό- 
 μιζον εωυτονς πρώτους γεν'εσθαι ανθρώπων , the Egyptians thought 
 that they first of all men came into existence; εί οΐεσθε Χαλκιδεας 
 ή Μ εγαρεας την 'Ελλάδα σώσειν, υμείς δε άποδράσεσθαι τά πράγματα. 
 
571 . 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 309 
 
 ούκ όρθώς οίεσθε, if you think the Chalcidians and Megarians will 
 save Greece , hut you escape from trouble , you are mistaken. 
 
 § 570. 4 . Predicative qualifications referring to the Prin¬ 
 cipal Subject are in the Nominative: 6 'Αλέξανδρος εφα- 
 σκεν είναι Αιος υιός, Alexander dicebat se esse Jovisfilium ; 
 εγώ ούκ ομολογήσω άκλητος ηκειν, αλλ ’ υπό σου κεκλημένος, 
 I will not acknowledge that I am come uninvited , but in¬ 
 vited by you; oi δοκοϋντες σοφοί είναι, they who seem to be 
 wise. 
 
 Ohs. — From tlie Predicate, ίκών , joining the freer Infinitive, είναι 
 (§ 504), arises the combination εκων είναι : τοντο εκών είναι ού 
 ποιήσω, this (if I am) to he of free will I will not do. 
 
 § 571. 5. In many cases a personal instead of an im¬ 
 personal form of expression is used in Greek, the Subject 
 of the Infinitive being made the Subject of the leading 
 sentence; so, instead of the English 44 it was announced 
 that Cyrus had conquered” ( ηγγέλθη τον Κΰρον νικησαι), 
 we have, ο Κύρος ηγγέλθη νικησαι, Cyrus was announced 
 to have conquered. This form of expression occurs not 
 only—as in Latin with dicitur , vicletur — with δοκεί, εοικε, 
 it seems ; λέγεται [ dicitur , traditur ] ; αγγέλλεται, it is an¬ 
 nounced; b μολογείται, it is agreed, but also with συμβαί¬ 
 νει, it happens, and with several adjectives with είμί, as: 
 δίκαιος, just; επιτι'ιδειος, έπικαίριος, fitting; επίδοξος, prob¬ 
 able ; αναγκαίος, necessary ; αυτός μοι δοκώ ενθάδε κατα - 
 μενείν, it appears to me that I myself shall remain here; 
 δίκαιος εί άγειν ανθρώπους, it is just that you, should lead 
 men (you are justified in leading men); επίδοξοί εισι το 
 αυτό πείσεσθαι, it is to be expected that they will suffer the 
 same; Poet, πρέπων εφυς προ τώνδε φωνε iv,it becomes you 
 to speak in their presence. 
 
 The personal construction is explained, like that of the 
 Accusative with the Infinitive (§ 567), by prolepsis (§ 519, 
 5 , Obs. 2). For ηγγέλθη ότι ο Κύρος ένίκησε there might 
 be ηγγέλθη ύ Κύρος ότι ένίκησε, and for this again ηγγέλθη 
 
310 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 572 . 
 
 ό Κύρος 
 οί 
 
 νικ?]σαι 
 
 for 
 
 επίδοξου 
 
 εστιν 
 
 « 
 
 Ο TL 
 
 \ 
 
 το 
 
 αυτό 
 
 πεισονται- 
 
 ίΤΤΙ 
 
 ίδοξ< 
 
 -.ισι 
 
 « 
 
 ο τι 
 
 V 
 
 70 
 
 αυτό 
 
 πείσονται, ancl hence 
 
 επίδοξοί 
 
 εισι 
 
 70 αυτό πείσεσ 
 
 εσθαι. 
 
 Obs. — The Accusative construction, however, is almost every where 
 applicable : λέγεται τον K ΰρον νικήσαι , dicunt Gyrum mcisse. 
 
 § 572. 6. Predicative qualifications referring to a Gen¬ 
 itive or Dative may be in these cases: ηλθον επί r iva 
 των Εοκούντων σοφών είναι, I came to one of those who 
 seem to he wise / ελεγον τοϊς ϋοκούσι σοφοΊς είναι, Isaicl 
 to those ? etc. ; Κυρου εδέοιπο ως* προθυμότατου γ ενεσθαι, 
 they begged Cyrus to he as ready as possible · π αντί άρ- 
 χοντι προςηκει φρονίμω είναι, it becomes every ruler to be 
 judicious. 
 
 Still the Predicate is often in the Accusative: συμφέρει αντοΊς φίλους 
 ε ναι μάλλον η πολεμίους , it is to their advantage rather to befriends 
 than enemies. 
 
 C) The Infinitive with the Article. 
 
 § 573. The Substantive nature of the Infinitive is made 
 more manifest by prefixing the Article. Yet the Infinitive 
 with the Article must nevertheless have a noun in the case 
 required by the verb to which the Infinitive belongs: ro 
 νας* μ do v ας φευγειν, the shunning of pleasures / the Infin¬ 
 itive in this case also is qualified by adverbs.: το καλώς ζην, 
 living rightly. 
 
 The rules given §§ 567-572 for the case of the Subject 
 and Predicate are applicable also to the Infinitive with 
 the Article. Thus the Accusative with the Infinitive is 
 often preceded by the Article: 76 προει^εναι τον θεόν το 
 μέλλον καί το προσιιμαίνειν ώ βούλεται, καί τούτο πάντες 
 καί λεγουσι καί νομίζουσι, Coeds foreknowing the future 
 and pointing it out beforehand to whom he will, cdl assert 
 and believe. 
 
 § 574. By having the Article prefixed the Infinitive be¬ 
 comes declinable , and thus answers to the Latin Gerund. 
 
574 . 
 
 TIIE INFINITIVE. 
 
 311 
 
 1. A omi native : 
 
 Poet. to φρονείν ευδαιμονίας πρώτον υπάρχει, to he thought- 
 ful is the first step to happiness ; το άμαρτάνειν ανθρώπους 
 όντας ούδεν θαυμαστόν, that those should commit errors who 
 are human is nothing surprising. 
 
 2. Accusative: 
 
 αυτό το άποθνησκειν ουδείς φοβείται, dying itselfi no one 
 dreads. Especially to be noticed is the Accusative with 
 the Prepositions εϊς, κατά, in reference to; διά, on account 
 of, because / προς, επί, besides : Κύρος* διά το φιλομαθές 
 (Nominative according to § 570) είναι πολλά τους παρόντας 
 άνηρώτα, Cyrus, through being eager for knowledge, asked 
 those present about many things ; προς τό μέτριων δείσθαι 
 καλώς πεπαίδευμαι, I have been well trained to require what 
 is moderate. 
 
 Obs. —This Accusative of tlie Infinitive with the Article has some¬ 
 times a freer connection with a verb or adjective after the man¬ 
 ner of the freer Accusative (§ 404): ol Ηελοποννήσωι άνελπιστοί 
 ε σι το ες την γην ήμών εςβάΧΚειν : the Peloponnesians have no hope in 
 regard to-invading our country. 
 
 3 . Genitive : 
 
 επιθυμία του πιεΐν, desiderium bibendi ; το ευ πράττειν παρά 
 ττ)ν άζίαν αφορμή του κακώς φρονείν τοίς ανοητοις γ/γηεταί, 
 prosperity without merit is an occasion to fools of base 
 sentiments; εμο\ ουδεν πρεσβυτερον του ότι βέλτιστου εμε 
 γενεσθαι (§ 416), nothing is more important to me than 
 my becoming as good as possible. Especially to be noticed 
 is the Genitive with the prepositions εκ, from; προ, be- 
 fore ; ενεκα, because, on account of; υπέρ, for, for the sake 
 of, in order to; διά, by, through; άνεν, without; ol άν¬ 
 θρωποι πάντα ποιοΰσιν υπέρ του μι) δούναι δίκην, people do 
 every thing in order not to suffer punishment. 
 
 Obs. —Purpose is often expressed by the Genitive of the Infinitive 
 even without a preposition : τού μή διαφενγειν τον λαγών εκ τών 
 ωκτνων σκοπούς καθίσταμεν , ice place scouts that the hare may not 
 escape from the nets. (Compare the rare use of the Lat. Genitive 
 of the Gerundive: arma cepit opprimundce libertatis.) 
 
312 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 575 . 
 
 4 . Dative. 
 
 The Dative is especially frequent to express %n$brumen- 
 tality (§ 438); it is then, like the Latin Ablative of the 
 Gerund, to be translated, by : Φίλιππος κεκράτηκε τω προ- 
 τερος (§ 570) προς τους πολεμίους Ιίναι, Dhilip has gained 
 the victory by going first against the enemy [compare the 
 Latin docendo discimus'] , also with the prepositions εν, 
 in· επί, on, on condition that / προς, besides, and others: 
 προς τω μηδέν εκ της πρεσβείας λαβεϊν τους αιχμαλώτους 
 εκ τών ιδίων ελυσάμην, besides gaining nothing from the 
 embassy , I set free the captives at my own expense. 
 
 D) The Infinitive with av. 
 
 § 575. By the addition of av the Infinitive acquires a 
 potential or hypothetical meaning, and denotes therefore 
 either that something only might happen, or that under 
 certain circumstances something would happen or would 
 have happened. Here two cases are possible: 
 
 l. the Infinitive with av can be replaced by the Optative 
 with αν: μάλιστα οιμαι αν σου πυθεσθαι (πυθοίμην άν), I 
 think I could learn it best from you / δοκεΐτε μοι πολύ 
 βελτιον άν περί τού πολέμου βουλευσασθαι (βελτιον άν βου- 
 λεύσαισθε), ει τον τόπον της χώρας προς fjv τολεμεΐτε εν - 
 θυμηθείητε, it seems to me you would much better settle 
 about the war, if you took into acco unt the localities of 
 the country against which you are making war. 
 
 This Infinitive with av therefore answers either to the Potential 
 Optative (§ 51G), or to the apoclosis of a Hypothetical Period of 
 the fourth form (§ 546). 
 
 § 57G. 2. The place of an Infinitive with άν can be sup¬ 
 plied by the Hypothetical Indicative with άν: Κύρος εΐ 
 εβίωσεν , άριστος άν δοκεΐ αρχών γενεσθαι (άριστος άν iyl- 
 viTo),if Cyrus had lived, it seems he would have become 
 one of the best of rulers y τούς ταύτα άρνοούντας Σωκράτης 
 ανδραποδώδεις άν κεκλησθαι ip /εΐτο (εί τινες ταύτα hyvoovv, 
 
578 . 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 313 
 
 εκεκΧηντο av a νόραττοόώόεις), Socrates thought that, if any 
 did not know this, they would he called slavish. 
 
 This Infinitive with av thus answers to the apoclosis of a Hypo¬ 
 thetical Period of the second form (§ 537, etc.). 
 
 Obs .—The context must show into which of the two forms the 
 Infinitive with av is to be resolved. 
 
 E) The Infinitive instead of the Imperative , 
 
 § 577, belongs almost entirely to poetry; it is used for 
 the second, and rarely for the third person. The Subject 
 and Predicate are in the Nominative: Horn, θαρσών νυν, 
 
 Αιόμη^ες, h Λ Ύρώεσσι μάχζσθαι, courageously now , Dio¬ 
 mede, fight against the Trojans / παιδα δ’ εμοί Χΰσαί τε 
 φίΧην τά τ αττοινα ^εχεσθαι, deliver ujp to me my dt 
 
 and accept the ransom. 
 
 Ciiifp. XXIII.— The Participle£§^^ 
 
 Preliminary Remark. - '/rfyh 
 
 V Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 559, l), isiijQ^ri^ 
 
 
 noun (§ 225, 5 ). It has the same things in common 
 the verb as the Infinitive, the same points also in common 
 with the noun; but it is distinguished from the Infinitive 
 inasmuch as the latter resembles a nomen actionis , whereas 
 the Participle has the nature of an adjective. 
 
 A) Their Attributive Use. 
 
 § 578. A Participle, corresponding to an adjective or to 
 a relative sentence, is joined to a substantive, to ascribe to 
 it a permanent quality : ποΧις ενρείας ayviag εχονσα, i. e ., 
 Horn. ευρυι'νγυια or η ενρείας ayviag £\si, a city having 
 broad streets; ai καΧούμεναι Αίολου νήσοι , the so-called 
 islands of AEolus ; 6 παρών καιρός, the present opportu¬ 
 nity (compare § 361, ll). 
 
 O 
 
314 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 579 . 
 
 Obs. —Like an adjective, the Participle also becomes a substantive 
 by having the article prefixed : oi παρόντες , those present (com¬ 
 pare § 379) : 6 τυχών, the first comer. Such participles may often 
 be translated by substantives: b δράσας , the doer ; oi λέγοντες, the 
 speakers; to συμφέρον, the advantage; τα δέοντα, the duty; προς το 
 τελευταϊον (§ 361, 8) έκβάν έκαστον των πριν υπαρζάντων κρίνεται, 
 every thing that happened before is judged of in accordance with its 
 final result. 
 
 On the peculiar use of the Fut. Part, with the Article, § 500. 
 
 B) Their Appositive Use. 
 
 § 579. The Participle serves to ascribe to a substantive 
 a merely transient quality or activity. In this case the 
 Participle is a shorter and less definite mode of expression 
 for what is otherwise expressed by subordinate clauses with 
 conjunctions of the most different kinds (compare § 583, 
 Ohs.). 
 
 A Participle used in this way is: 
 
 § 580. 1. Temporal, 
 
 with the distinctions of time mentioned in Chap. XX. (esp. 
 § 496): 7 τροςεχετε τουτοις άνα'γΐ'γνωσκομενοις τον νουν, give 
 attention to this while being read / Horn, ώς άρα φωνησας 
 άπεβησετο — hru ως εφώνησε, after having thus spoken he 
 went away. Observe especially Ίχων and φερων in descrip¬ 
 tions, which may frequently be translated by the English 
 with : τάς ναυς άπεστειλαν εχοντα Άλκίδαν, they sent away 
 Alcidas with (having) the ships / δρώμενος, in a similar 
 sense : πολλή τεχνμ χρώ μένος, with (using) much skill. 
 So, also, άρχόμενος , at first / τελευτών, Clt last / διαλιπών 
 χρόνον, after a time / ευ ποιων, fortunately ; καλώς ποιων, 
 justly. The Participle ών can not be omitted when being 
 is to be ascribed to a substantive: 'Αλκιβιάδης ετι παίς ών 
 εθαυμάζετο, while yet a hoy (Lat., merely puer) Alcibiades 
 was admired (§ 428, Obs.). 
 
 § 581. 2. Causal and final, 
 
 where the Participle is to be resolved by since , by or by 
 
583 . 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 315 
 
 the fact that, when referring to the present or past, and by 
 that, in order that, when referring to the future : ούκ εστιν 
 άδικούντα δνναμιν βεβαίαν κτησασθαι, firm power is not 
 to he gained by acting unjustly / τον αδικούντο, παρά τούς 
 δικαστάς άγειν δει δίκην δώσοντα, he who acts unjustly Ought 
 to be brought before the judges in order that he may suffer 
 punishment. 
 
 § 582. 3. Concessive, 
 
 a somewhat rarer use : το ϋοωρ ευωνότατον άριστον ον , water is the 
 cheapest though it is the test / υμείς υφορώμενοι τά πεπραγμένα καί 
 δυςχεραίνοντες ηγετε την ειρήνην 'όμως , though suspicious of what had 
 teen done , and indignant , you still maintained the peace. 
 
 § 583. 4 . Hypothetical, 
 
 a very frequent use, where the Participle is to be resolved 
 by if and corresponds to one of the forms of the Hypo¬ 
 thetical Protaseis mentioned in § 534, etc.: τούς φίλους 
 ευεργετούντες και τούς εχθρούς δννησεσθε κολάζειν , if you 
 benefit your friends you will be able also to punish your 
 enemies (εάν); also with the article: ο μη δαρείς άνθρωπος 
 ού παιδεύεται, a person is not educated if he has not been 
 beaten. Such a Participle with μη may often be translated 
 by without: ούκ εστιν άρχειν μη διδόντα μισθόν, a man can 
 not ride without giving pay. 
 
 Ohs. —With the varied use of the Appositive Participles, it must 
 not be overlooked that such a Participle of itself does not clear¬ 
 ly express any of the meanings developed in §§ 580-583, but 
 that we make use of the one or the other turn in translating 
 only in order to express in a more precise way what is simply 
 suggested by the Participle. Hence there are many transitions 
 between these meanings, especially between the Temporal and 
 Causal, but also between the Temporal and Hypothetical mean¬ 
 ings, just as in Latin sentences introduced by quum : πάντα ταυτα 
 συνιδόντας άπαντας (υμάς) δεϊ βοηθέ Ζν, it tecomes every one of you , 
 when you have considered all these things , to render help; νομίζω 
 άμεινον άν υμάς περί ών νυν ερώ κρΖναι , μικρά των πρότερόν ποτέ 
 ρηθ'εντων μνημονεύσαντας, I think you would tetter judge about what 
 I am now going to say , when you remember a little what was said 
 before. 
 
316 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 584 . 
 
 C) The Participle with an Absolute Case. 
 
 § 584. The Participle with a noun or pronoun in the Absolute 
 Genitive (§ 428) or Accusative serves to point out the circumstances 
 mentioned in §§ 579-583. The noun or pronoun to which the Par¬ 
 ticiple refers may be regarded as its subject , since from it proceeds 
 the action expressed by the Participle. This construction, therefore, 
 may be resolved by a separate clause, beginning with a conjunction, 
 in which the word in the Genitive or Accusative must appear in the 
 Nominative : τούτων άναγιγνωσνομίνων τον νουν προςεχετε , attend while 
 this is being read (compare § 580). 
 
 l. The Absolute Genitive (compare § 428), 
 for which may be substituted clauses with temporal, causal, 
 concessive, or hypothetical conjunctions : Περικλεούς ηγου¬ 
 μένου πολλά καί καλά έργα άπεάείζαντο οι Αθηναίοι , as long 
 as Pericles led them (.Pericle duce ), the Athenians pro¬ 
 duced many and splendid works / ναυμαχίας γενομενης 
 τετταρας τριηρεις λαμβάνει Γοργώπας, navcdi pugna facta 
 Gorgopas guattuor triremes capit; όλης της πόλεως εν 
 τοίς πολεμικοίς κιν^υνοις επιτρεπόμενης τοί στρατηγέ, μεγάλα 
 τά τ αγαθά κατορθοΰντος αυτου, κολ τα κακά 8 ιαμαρτάνοντος 
 εικος γενέσθαι, as the whole state in the dangers of war is 
 committed to the care of the general , it is natural both that 
 great good should happen when he is successful , and great 
 evil when he fails. Poet, γενοιτ άν παν θεού τεχνωμενου , 
 all may he done if a God contrives it (ει τεχνωτο). 
 
 § 585. The Absolute Genitive differs from the corresponding Latin 
 construction of the Ablative Absolute in the following points : 
 
 a) The subject of the Participle is more frequently omitted in Greek 
 when it is either easily understood from what precedes, or from the 
 meaning of the verb, or when it remains indefinite (compare § 361, 3, 
 Obs. 2): προϊόντων , as (they) went forward ; ϋοντος , when he (Zeus) rains; 
 ίξαγγελθεντων, when it had been announced. 
 
 b) On the necessity of the Participle of είναι — σου παιδός όντος [Lat. 
 te puero] , see §§ 580, 482, Obs. An exception occurs in the case of the 
 adjectives εκών and άκων , which very much resemble Participles: ψοϋ 
 εκόντος , with my will; ψοϋ άκοντος , me invito. The Poe£s take other 
 licenses. 
 
 c) As the Greeks have two active Participles to express a past ac¬ 
 tion, they use the Absolute Genitive of a Passive Participle less fre- 
 
587 . 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 317 
 
 quently than the Romans do their Absolute Ablative : ό ΚΓφος, τον 
 ΚροΊσον νικησας, κατεστρεψατο τους Αυύούς, Cyrus , Crosso victo , Lydos sibi 
 subjecit. 
 
 d) The Absolute Genitive is employed even where the subject of 
 the Participle is mentioned also in the leading sentence : ταντ είπόν- 
 τος αύτού εύοξ'ε τι λέγειν τφ ’Αστυάγει, after thus speaking he seemed to 
 Astyages to say something (of importance). [Lat. ita locutus—visus est .) 
 
 § 586. 2. The Absolute Accusative 
 is usual in the case of some impersonal verbs, especially 
 δέον, it being a duty / εξόν, παρόν, it being allowed, fea¬ 
 sible ; προςηκον, it being befitting · δόξαν, it having been 
 decided ; ούδεις εξόν ειρήνην άγειν πόλεμον αιρήσεται, no 
 one , being allowed to be at peace, will choose war · ποΧ- 
 Χακις ύμίν εξόν πΧεονεκτήσαι ονκ ηθελήσατε, though it was 
 often easy for you to gain more, you were unwilling; oi 
 Συρακούσιοι icpavyrj ουκ oXiyy εχρωντο, αδύνατον όν εν νυκτί 
 αΧΧω τψ σημήναι, the Syracusans raised no small shout, it 
 being impossible to make a signed during the night by any 
 thing else. 
 
 D) Supplements to Participles. 
 
 § 587. For the sake of greater clearness, certain particles 
 are added to Appositive Participles, as well as to Participles 
 joined with an absolute case; they give more distinct 
 prominence to the idea expressed by the Participle. Such 
 Supplements to Participles are : 
 
 1. ϋμα, at the same time, denoting contemporaneousness ; oi "Ελληνες 
 εμάχοντο 'άμα τ τορενόμενοι, the Hellenes fought while marching. 
 
 2. μεταξύ, between, amidst, with pretty nearly the same meaning: 
 επίσχε με λεγοντα μεταξύ , he checked me in the midst of my speech. 
 
 3. αύτίκα and ευθύς, to express immediate succession : τφ ύεξιφ κέρςι 
 ευθύς άττοβεβηκότι εττίκειντο, they pressed upon the right wing immediately 
 after its landing. 
 
 4. τότε, εΊτα (κφτα), εττειτα, όντως, are added to the principal verb to 
 indicate that the action of the Participle was past before, and take 
 up the substance of it with various accessory ideas: καταλιπών φρου¬ 
 ράν όντως επ’ οίκου άνεχώρησεν, after having left a garrison, he thus went 
 
318 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 588 . 
 
 away home; Poet, μη νυν ψυγόντες εΙΘ’ άλώμεν ύστερον , lest though now 
 escaping ice should afterward he caught. 
 
 5. καίπερ (more rarely καί alone), witli a Participle, to be translated 
 though , renders prominent the concessive meaning: καίπερ ούτω σοφός 
 ων βελτίων αν γίνοω, though so wise , you might perhaps become better; 
 Homer often separates καί from περ : οι δε καί άχνΰμενοί περ επ’ αυτυρ 
 ήδν γέλασσαν, and though vexed they heartily laughed at him; όμως, in 
 the same sense though or yet , is used with the principal verb: Herod. 
 'ύστερον άπικόμενοι της συμβολής ιμείροντο όμως θεησασθαι τους Μ ηδονς, 
 though they did not come till after the engagement, yet they desired to see 
 the Medes. 
 
 C. Ιίτε, with a Participle (like olov , ola δη), answers to the English 
 in as far as, since, and brings into prominence its causal meaning: 
 κατέδαρθε πάνυ πολύ Ιίτε μακρών των νυκτών ούσών , he slept a great while 
 since the nights were long. [Compare Lat. quippe quum, quippe qui .] 
 
 § 588. 7 . ώς and ώςπερ added to a Participle suggest 
 that what is expressed in the participle is subjective, i. e., 
 is the opinion, the conception, the view of the principal 
 subject. Both particles are joined to the Appositive Par¬ 
 ticiple as well as to a Participle connected with an abso¬ 
 lute case, either the absolute Genitive or the absolute Ac¬ 
 cusative. The latter case in this connection is far more 
 extensively used than without those particles (§ 586). If 
 the opinion expressed in the Participial construction is to 
 be characterized at once as false, ως and ώςπερ may be 
 translated by CIS if : ϋε^ίασι τον θάνατον ως ευ εΐϋότες ότι 
 μεριστον των κακών Ιστιν, they feciv death as if they well 
 knew that it was the greatest of evils j but by in the be¬ 
 lief that, since, in the feeling that, etc., if the correctness 
 of the opinion is to be left undecided : ημείς τ τάντες εβΧεπ- 
 ομεν προς αυτόν ως αυτίκα μάΧα άκουσόμενοι θαυμασίονς 
 τινάς λογους·, we all looked at him, expecting immediately 
 to hear some wonderful statements / Poet, εζεστι ψωνείν 
 ώς εμού μόνης πεΧας, you may speak out since (in the con¬ 
 viction that) I alone am near / Xlyei ώς* ^ιόακτου οάσης της 
 αρετής, he speaks thinking that virtue is capable of being 
 taught ; άπεβΧεφατε προς άΧΧηΧους ώς αυτός μεν έκαστος 
 ου ποίησών τό οόζαν, τον όε πΧησίον πράζοντα (absolute 
 
590 . 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 319 
 
 Accusative), you looked at one another thinking that each 
 one of you would not do what was decided upon, hut that 
 his neighbor would. 
 
 E) The Predicative Participle. 
 
 § 589. The Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 560), serves 
 to complete a verb, by attributing to a word contained in 
 the sentence something which is not a mere addition, but 
 an essential part of the statement. The Supplementary or 
 Predicative Participle may refer either 
 
 1. to the subject of the sentence (§ 361, 5, 7, 8): παύεσθε 
 αεί περί των αυτών βουλευόμενοι , cease always consulting 
 about the same things; ίσθι λυπηρός lov,know that you 
 are troublesome, or 
 
 2. to a dependent word in the sentence (compare § 361, 
 10, and § 403) : ό πόλεμος επαυσε τους ’Αθηναίους άε\ περί 
 των αυτών βουλευομενους, the war caused, the Athenians to 
 cease from cdways consulting about the same things ; οίόα 
 αυτόν λυπηρόν όντα, I know him to be troublesome. 
 
 In English such Predicative Participles are mostly ex¬ 
 pressed by the Infinitive with to, or by sentences with that, 
 sometimes also in other ways. In some cases, however, 
 the English language also makes use of a Participle in a 
 similar way : I feel myself affected by it, he found him 
 armed (compare § 361,10, Obs.). 
 
 The verbs which admit of a Supplementary Participle 
 may be classified as follows: 
 
 § 590. l. Verbs which express a condition, 
 as: εχω,Ι am in a condition; τυγχάνω, I chance to be 
 (Poet, κυρεω) ; λανθάνω, I escape notice; φαίνομαι, $ηλόω, 
 φανερός, δΓ/λυς ε'ιμι, I am manifest / εοικα,Τ seem ; $ια- 
 τελεω, όιάγω, I continue ; ανέχομαι, καρτερεω, I hold Out, 
 endure; κάμνω, I (grow weary ; απαγορεύω, I despair; as 
 well as the verbs which denote the beginning, interrupt¬ 
 ing, or ending of a condition; άρχομαι, I begin; φθάνω, 
 
320 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 591 . 
 
 I am beforehand; οίχομαι, I depart, I am off· h τι-, Sia- 
 λεΐπω, I break off , I suspend· πάνω, I make to cease (παύ¬ 
 ομαι, I cease). In translating we frequently change the 
 Participle into the principal verb, and render the principal 
 Greek verb by an adverb. Examples : κηρυζας εχω (more 
 emphatic than έκήρυζα, compare Latin nuntiatum habeo), 
 I have announced / τις ίτυχε παραχενόμενος ; who hap¬ 
 pened to be present ? δ ιατελώ εύνοιαν εχων πάσιν νμίν, I 
 continue cherishing a kindly feeling for you all · μη καμής 
 φίλον άν^ρα ευεργετών, dorCt grow weary of benefiting a 
 friend ,* dXXa μνρία επιλείπω Χεγων,Ι refrain from say¬ 
 ing innumerable other things; Horn, ώ'χετ’ ύποπτα μένος, 
 he was gone flying away. 
 
 Obs. —Even the verb είμί may be joined with a Participle: y tgvto 
 ouk εστι γιγνόμενον παρ’ ημΐν ; is this not happening (usual) among 
 us? A Participle is necessarily so used with είμί to complete 
 certain verbal forms (compare §§ 287, 291), especially the Par¬ 
 ticiple of the Perfect or Aorist with είμί instead of the Future 
 Perfect: δεδωκώς or δονς ίσει — dederis. 
 
 § 591. 2. Verbs of perceiving, 
 
 as: όράω,Ι see (περιοράω, I overlook, endure ); ακούω, I 
 hear ; olSa, I know / μανθάνω, I learn y γίγνώσκω, I get to 
 know · αισθάνομαι, 1 perceive j ευρίσκω, I find / μεμνημαι, 
 I remember. In several of these the object is in the Gen¬ 
 itive, according to § 420. Examples : ώς είδον αυτους πε- 
 λάζοντας, οι λεηλατοΰντες ευθυς αφεντες τα χρήματα εφευχον, 
 cum eos appropinguantes vidissent , prcedantes prceda sta¬ 
 tion relict a fug am capessiverunt · ηκονσά ποτέ Σωκράτονς 
 περί φίλων ΰιαλεγομενου, I once heard Socrates discoursing 
 about f riends [audivi Socratem disputantem ] ; Χερσόνη¬ 
 σον κατεμαθε πόλεις ενύεκα η δώδεκα εχονσαν, he learned 
 that the Chersonese had eleven or twelve cities; άνθρωποι 
 καλοί καγαθοί επειύαν γνώσίν απιστουμενοι (compare § 483, 
 ΐ), ου φιλουσι τους απιστονντας, when good men perceive 
 that they are distrusted , they do not like those ivho distrust 
 them. 
 
595 . 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 321 
 
 Obs .—With σύνοιϋά μοι, I am conscious , the Participle may be con¬ 
 nected with the Nominative of the Subject or the Dative ( μοί ): 
 εμάντφ συνφδειν ονδ'εν επιστάμενος or ετησταμενφ, I was conscious of 
 knowing nothing. In the sense of “ to be aware” it may also have 
 the Accusative with the Participle. 
 
 § 592. 3 . Verbs of emotion, 
 
 as: ypipto, η^ομαι, τερπομαι, T rejoice ; αγαπάω, I (till sat¬ 
 isfied; χαΧεπως φέρω, cegre fero ; άχθομαι, I am dissatis¬ 
 fied ; ayavciKTtM, I am vexed; αισχύνομαι, I am ashamed ; 
 μεταμεΧομαι or μεταμεΧει μοι, I repent. Examples: Horn, o 
 1ε φρεσ\ τερπετ ακούων, but he rejoiced in heart at hear¬ 
 ing (it) ; μεταμεΧει αυτω "φευσαμενω, lie repents having told 
 a lie. 
 
 § 593. 4. Verbs of pointing out and asserting, 
 as: δ είκνυμι , αποφαίνω, I show; Εξελέγχω, I prove, con¬ 
 vict; ayytXXii), I announce; 6/κολογέω, I assent. Exam¬ 
 ples: Φίλιππος 7 rcivrci ενεκα εαυτοϋ ποιων εξελρλεγκταί, it 
 has been proved that Philip does every thing for his own 
 sake; αποφαίνουσι τους φεvyovτaς πάΧαι πονηρούς όντας, 
 they make manifest that the banished had long been base. 
 
 § 594. Obs. —The Infinitive, according to § 5G0, may be used as w T ell 
 as the Participle with many of the verbs enumerated in §§ 590- 
 593, but in a somewhat different sense : άρχομαι διδάσκων, I begin 
 to be a teacher ; άρχομαι δίδασκαν, I begin to teach (my teaching); 
 αισχύνομαι Χέγων, I am ashamed though I say it / αισχύνομαι Χέγειν, 
 shame preterits me from saying. 
 
 Γ) The Participle with civ. 
 
 § 595. By the addition of the Particle av the Participle, 
 in every case like the Infinitive (§§ 575 and 576), acquires 
 the meaning of possibility or that of an Apodosis in a 
 Hypothetical Sentence, and may therefore be resolved in 
 two ways: 
 
 1. by the Optative with liv (§§ 516 and 546): 
 
 εγω ειμι των ηέεως μεν αν ελερχ^υεντων, ηόεως ο αν εΛεγ- 
 
 ζάντων, I am one of those icho would gladly be refuted 
 (o i αν εΧεγχθεΐεν), and would gladly refute (oi av ελεγ- 
 
 O 2 " 
 
322 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 596 . 
 
 ζειαν) ; ευρίσκω ταύτην αν μόνην Γ γενομενην των μΕΧΧόντων 
 κινόύνων αποτροπήν, I find this would he the only pre- 
 vention of the coming dangers ( ότι αν γίνοιτο); ίσμΕν και 
 υμάς αν και άλλους, έν τή αυτή δυνάμει ημίν γινομένους, 
 
 ΰρώντας αν αυτό, we know that you as well as others in 
 the same position woidd do the same thing , i. e., ότι ει 
 γενοισθε SpcoTE civ, 
 
 2. By the hypothetical Indicative with av (§ 536, etc.): 
 Φίλιππος ΪΙοτΊαιαν ίλών και δυνηθεϊς αν αυτός εχειν, ει 
 εβουληθη, Ολυνθιοις απέδωκεν, when Philip had' taken I J o- 
 tidcea , and might have (ότε εόυνηΟη av) kept it himself if 
 he had wished , he gave it hack to the Olynthians. 
 
 G) The Verbal Adjectives. 
 
 § 596. Verbal Adjectives are, like Participles, verbal 
 nouns of an adjective kind, but differ from participles by 
 a usage much more restricted, and referring to no special 
 time, which has been treated of generally in § 300. 
 
 The Verbal Adjectives in -τεος, implying necessity , are 
 worthy of notice. A double construction is here possible : 
 
 1. The object of a necessary action becomes the subject , 
 and the Verbal Adjective agrees with it: 6 πατήρ σοι τιμή- 
 τεος εστίν, pater tibi venerandus est / i\ πόλις τοΊς πολίταις 
 ώψελητεα, the state must be assisted by its citizens. In 
 this construction the subject is emphatic. 
 
 2. The Veutral or impersonal construction, where the 
 necessity of the action is made specially prominent; the 
 object of the action is in each instance in the case required 
 by the verb: ΰιωκτέον την αρετήν, we must pursue virtue · 
 ειρηνην ακτεον εστίν, pax agenda est / απτεον του πολέμου, 
 you must try war · βοηθητε ον ημΊν εστι τοΊς π pay μασιν , we 
 must help the state. 
 
 The person who is to, or must do something, is in both 
 cases in the Dative: in the second, according to the anal¬ 
 ogy of (§ 567, Obs. 1), sometimes in the Accusative: 
 
597. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 323 
 
 ούΒενι τρόπω εκόντας ά^ικητέον, in 710 WCiy must 7J0U will- 
 ingly do injustice. 
 
 Obs. 1. —The Verbal Adjective sometimes has the meaning of a 
 Middle : πειστεον ίστίν , we must obey ( πείθομαι , not πείθω). 
 
 Obs. 2.—In the Neuter construction we often find the Plural: πο- 
 λεμΐ]τεα ίστίν, we must fight (compare § 364). 
 
 Chap. XXIV.— Some Peculiarities of Relative 
 
 Clauses. 
 
 A) Attraction. 
 
 § 597. l. The Relative Pronoun in general follows the 
 rule that it agrees in Gender and Number with its ante- 
 
 O 
 
 cedent, that is, with the word to which it refers, but in Case 
 with what follows; that is, it accommodates itself to the 
 sentence in which it stands: μεμνησθε τού όρκου ον όμω- 
 μόκατε, he mindful of tl\e oath which you have sworn. 
 
 2. An exception from this rule is the Attraction , or the 
 process by which the Relative is attracted in Case also by 
 the word to which it refers, so as to take its case: μεμνησθε 
 τού ορκου ού ομωμόκατε. 
 
 3 . With Attraction another process is frequently com¬ 
 bined, viz., shortening. This consists in the Article or 
 the Demonstrative Pronoun being left out, and the Rela¬ 
 tive, with the word to which it refers, being drawn together 
 info a single clause: μεμνησθε ού ομωμόκατε ορκου. 
 
 4 . If the word referred to by the Relative is a mere pro¬ 
 noun, the Relative remains quite alone, but stands in the 
 case which the Demonstrative would have had: μεμνησθε 
 ού ομωμόκατε — μεμνησθε τούτου ο ομωμόκατε, remeniber that 
 which you have sworn ‘ αμελώ ών με πράττεεν^; αμελώ 
 τούτων α με Set ττραττειν, I neglect what Τ should do , 
 
324 PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 598. 
 
 § 598. Attraction, however, can occur only under the 
 following conditions : 
 
 1. The Relative clause must be closely connected with 
 the word to which it refers, must be an essential part of 
 it. Attraction is inadmissible in a Relative clause, which 
 only loosely adds a remark to a substantive, which might 
 quite as well be wanting, or be annexed by means of καί 
 and a demonstrative pronoun. 
 
 2. The sentence must be such as would have the Rela¬ 
 tive pronoun in the Accusative , but its antecedent in the 
 Genitive or Dative : τις η ώφεΧεια τοις θεοΐς τύγχανα ούσα 
 απο των δώρων ών παρ' υμών Χαμβάνουσιν, what advan¬ 
 tage have the gods from the presents which they receive 
 from you f είςφερετε αφί όσων έκαστος εχε*, contribute 
 from what each has (απο τοσούτων οσα) ; λέγείς ου σύμ¬ 
 φωνα οίς το πρώτον ελεγες, you do not say what harmon¬ 
 izes with what you first said ( τοντοις a); τω μγεμονί πισ- 
 τεύσομεν ω αν Κύρος δω, we shall trust the commander 
 whom Cyrus gives (us) (τουτω δν). 
 
 Ohs. — Attraction very seldom takes place with other cases : ών iv- 
 τνγχάνω μάλιστα άγαμαι σ£, i. e. y τούτων οίς , I admire you most o f alt 
 
 I meet. 
 
 § 599. All clauses subordinate to a Relative Sentence, 
 so far as they consist of words referring to the Relative, 
 and are capable of inflexion, must likewise be modified in 
 the Attraction : οίς ονσιν νμετεροις εχει, τούτοις πάντα τάΧ- 
 Χα άσφαΧώς κεκτηται , i. e α οντα νμετερα εχεί, τούτοίς, lie 
 keeps cdl the rest in safety by means of what he has of yours. 
 
 § 600 . οϊος, and sometimes 'όσος and ήλίκος, have quite a peculiar 
 attraction; viz., είναι is often omitted when it would stand with οϊος 
 in the nominative, and the latter is put in the same case as its ante¬ 
 cedent : οίψ γε εμοί παντάπασιν άπορον roiro, i. <?., τοσοντψ οίος εγώ είμι , 
 that is quite impossible to such a man as I am. Sometimes the article 
 is prefixed at the same time : τοΊς οίοις ημΊν, to such as ice. By the 
 same ellipsis δςτιςοϋν acquires the fixed meaning, whoever , i. e., any 
 whatever: ούκ εστι δικαίου άνδρυς βλάπτειν όντινονν άνθ ρύπων, it is not· 
 a just man's nature to injure any person whatever ( i. e., any one, who- 
 
603. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 325 
 
 ever lie may be). [Compare Lat. cuicunque homini nocere.'] So ocnc 
 βοΰλε l means the same as ουτος ον βούλει, like quivis. 
 
 § 601. Other Relative expressions, all involving either 
 Shortening or Attraction, are : 
 
 avV ών, because, i. e., αντί τούτων a, or αντί τούτων ότι : 
 σύ εύ εποίησας άνθ' ών επαθες , you did good because you 
 received good (for that which you received). 
 
 if ώ, if ώτε (Herod. επ\ τούτω, επ' ώτε), for the JJUV- 
 yjose of on condition that, i. e., επ\ τούτεο ώςτε, often with 
 the Infinitive : οι τριάκοντα μρεθησαν if ώτε συγγράψαι 
 νόμους , the thirty were chosen for the purpose of drawing 
 τιρ laws. 
 
 εζ ον , af ον , ex quo, since, i. c., since the time that. On 
 
 i r> tr » ~ O r: r n 
 
 εν ω, εις ο, αχρι ου, § ΟΟυ. 
 
 οίος, more complete τοιοντος οίος, with the Infinitive, of 
 the kind that, of the kind to, and οΊόςτε, with the Infinitive, 
 able, possible : ούκ ην ώρα oia άροειν τό πεδίου, it was not 
 the season to water the field q ούγ ο'ιοίτε η σαν βοηθϊισαι, 
 they were not able to render help (compare § 562). όσον, 
 for τοσοντο όσον, enough to, with the Infinitive: εχομεν 
 όσον άποζην, we have enough to live on. 
 
 § 602. An inverted Attraction takes place when a noun 
 or pronoun is put in the same case as the Relative which 
 refers to it: την ουσίαν ην κατεΧιπε τω υιεΐ ού πΧείονος αξία 
 εστιν, the property which he left his son is not worth more, 
 instead of η ουσία ην j Poet, ταςδ* S' ιιςπερ ε'ιςορας ηκουσι 
 πρός σε, those whom you see (the girls) have come to you 
 (α'ίόε ας). So ουρείς, μη^είς, become one word, as it Avere, 
 with όςτις ού : ούΕενί ότω ούκ αποκρίνεται, properly ουρείς 
 εστιν ό τω ούκ, nobody whom he does not answer. Observe 
 also such expressions as: θαυμαστός όσος, i. e., θαυμαστόν 
 εστιν όσος, wonderf ully great / θαυμαστώς ώς, i. e., θαυ¬ 
 μαστόν εστιν ώς, it is wonderful how. Compare § 519, 5, 
 Obs. 2. 
 
 § 603. Λ singular anomaly is presented by Relative sentences after 
 ίση, in the sense of “ there is.” am is in the Singular even when the 
 
326 COMBINATION OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 604. 
 
 relative is in tlie Plural : ϊστιν ο'ΐ , there are those who , i. e., some ; ΐστιν 
 οίς ονχ όντως ίδοξεν, there are some to whom it did not appear so. So 
 tanv ore (=ztviore ), sometimes j Ισην oi>, in some vlaces / Ιστιν ?}, 27 Z 
 ways. 
 
 B) Complication. 
 
 § 604. In translating Greek Relative clauses into En¬ 
 glish, difficulties sometimes arise through the particular re¬ 
 lations of the sentences: 
 
 1. When the Relative as an Accusative of the Subject 
 belongs to an Infinitive: οι ττοΧεμιοι, ους ωοντο αποφυγήν, 
 ίζαίφνης παρησαν, hostes , quos aufugisse putabant , subito 
 aderant , the enemy , whom they thought to have fled, were 
 suddenly there. 
 
 2. When the Relative depends on a 'participle: κατα- 
 Χαμβανουσι τεΊ\ος δ τειχισάμενοί ποτέ ' Ακαρνανες κοιναΊ 
 δικαστήρια) ε\ρώντο { — ιό εχρώντο τει\ισάμενοι αυτό), they 
 take possession of the fort which the Acarnanians , after 
 building it , used as a common judgment hall. 
 
 3. When the Relative is in the Genitive dependent on a 
 comparative: αρετή, ής ουδεν κτήμα σεμνότερου, virtue , than 
 which no possession is more venerable (§ 416). 
 
 4. When the Relative depends on the verb of an inserted 
 clause ι αιρουμεθα αυτομόΧους, οίς* όττόταν τις ττΧείονα μισθόν 
 δίδω, μετ εκείνων ακοΧουθησουσιν {duces) eiigimus trans- 
 fugas, quibus si quis plus stipendii prcehuerit illos se- 
 quentur (i. e., di, όττόταν τις — δίδω, ακοΧουθησουσιν, qui , si 
 Us — -prmbuerit , sequentur ), we choose deserters, who , if any 
 one gives them more pay, will follow him. 
 
 Obs. —In the cases enumerated under 2 and 4, as well as those dis¬ 
 cussed in § 005, and others besides, the Greek language satisfies 
 itself with putting only once a word which has to be supplied in 
 different cases for several clauses belonging to one another. 
 
 § 605. C) Combination of several Relative Clauses. 
 
 When several Relative clauses follow one another, the Relative pro¬ 
 noun need be expressed only once, even when, the second time, it 
 would require to be in a different case : Horn, άνωχθι c ί μιν γαμίεσθαι 
 
606 . 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 3 21 
 
 τιΐ) οπφ τε πατήρ κεΧεται καί άνύάνει αυτή, bid her marry whomsoever her 
 father urges and (who) pleases herself; Άριαίος, dr ημείς ήθελομεν β α- 
 σιΧέα καθιστάναι καί [oj] εδώκαμεν καί [άφ’ ού] εΧάβομεν πίστα, ούτος ημάς 
 κακώς ποιεϊν πειράται , Ariceus , whom we wished to make king, and (to 
 whom we) gave and (from whom wc) received pledges of fidelity, at¬ 
 tempts to ill use us. 
 
 Ohs .— Sometimes, instead of the repeated Relative, αυτός is substi¬ 
 tuted in the case required by the construction of the sentence. 
 So likewise μίν in Homer; οί πρόγονοι, οίς ούκ εχαρίζονθ’ οι Χεγον- 
 τες ούδ’ ΙφίΧουν αυτούς, ώςπερ υμάς ούτοι νυν, πεντε καί τετταράκοντα 
 ετη τών Ελλήνων ήρζαν εκύντων, your ancestors , whom the speakers 
 did not gratify, nor did they flutter them , as these now do you, Tided 
 forty-five years over the readily submitting Hellenes. Horn.; άντί- 
 θεον ΤίοΧύφημον, οου κράτος εστί μ'εγιστον πάσιν ΚνκΧώπεσσι, θόωσα 
 δε μιν τ'εκε νύμφη, godlike Polyphemus, whose power is the greatest 
 among all the Cyclops, and him (whom) the nymph Tlioosa bore. 
 
 Chap. XXV. —Interrogative Sentences. 
 
 § 606. 1. The simple direct question may be introduced 
 by the Interrogative pronouns or adverbs mentioned § 214, 
 etc. In Greek several different questions may be included 
 in one interrogative sentence; Horn, τις ττόθεν εϊς άντρων ; 
 what mail, whence are you ? αττο τούτων φανερόν yei η'ισεται, 
 τις τίνος αίτιος Ιστιν, from this it will he clear who is 
 chargeable with what (who is chargeable and with what). 
 
 Obs. 1.—An Interrogative pronoun may be joined with a demon¬ 
 strative : άγγεΧίαν φέρω βαρείαν ’ τίνα τούτην ; I bring heavy tid¬ 
 ings ; what (is) that ? (τις αυτή εστίν ,') 
 
 Obs. 2. —A question may also be expressed in a subordinate clause 
 and by a participle: πότε « χρή πράζετε ; ίπειδάν τί γενηται ; when 
 will you do your duty? when what shall happen? τί ίοών τον K ρι- 
 τύβουΧον ποιουντα ταντα κατέγνωκας αυτού ; what have you seen 
 Critobulus doing that you have charged him with this ? oi πάΧαι 
 ’Αθηναίοι ού ύιεΧογίσαντο, υπέρ οία πεποιηκότων άνθρώπων κινδννεύ- 
 σονσιν, the old Athenians did not calculate hoio much people have 
 
328 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 607 . 
 
 done for whom they were going to incur risk. Of this kind also are 
 the phrases: τί παθών ; what have you passed through, that ? τί 
 μαθών 5 what have you got to know, that ? τί παθών άδικεΊς την πα¬ 
 τρίδα ; what have you passed through to make you act unjustly to¬ 
 ward your country f 
 
 § 607. 2. When the question refers not to a single word, 
 but to a whole sentence, it may be indicated 
 
 a) merely by the tone of voice : ού φοβεΐ μι) ήδη πρεσ - 
 βύτερος yg ; do you not fear that you are already too old? 
 
 h) by Interrogative particles , which, in translating into 
 English, can not always be expressed by separate words, 
 but often may be rendered by the position of the words 
 and the tone of pronunciation. The most important Inter¬ 
 rogative particles are apa and η, both comparable to the 
 Latin affix -ne. Which answer is expected is indicated by 
 neither of these particles ; ap ειμ\ μάντις ; am I a prophet? 
 r) ούτοί πολέμιοί εισιν , are those enemies? 
 
 Ohs .—If an affirmative answer is to be specially indicated oh is add¬ 
 ed ; if a negative , μη is added to cipa. Hence άρα oh corresponds 
 to the Latin nonne. άρα μη to the English surely not. 
 
 § G08. Of other Interrogative expressions the following may be no¬ 
 ticed : ή γάρ ; isn't it ? η που ; surely ? άλλο τι ή, properly άλλο τι ίστιν 
 η ; does any thing else happen than ? hence, also with ή omitted (com¬ 
 pare § G20, Ohs.), like the Lat. nonne, where an affirmative answer is 
 expected: άλλο τι η άδικοϋμεν; are ice not doing wrongf άλλο τι ovv 
 πάντα ταντα civ ε’ίη μία ίπιστημη ; would not this, then, he all one science ? 
 oh put in a question also anticipates an affirmative answer, and may 
 be compared with nonne and the English not. The opposite to it is 
 μη, which may often be translated by surely, as μών, formed from μή 
 ovv, surely not, alw T ays points to a negative answ T er. μή Άχιλλέα ο’ίει 
 φροντίσαι θανάτου καί κινδύνου ‘, surely you do not think Achilles cared 
 about death and danger ? 
 
 § 609. 3. The indirect question in Greek, according to 
 § 520, is by no means clearly distinguished in regard to 
 Mood from the direct. So likewise the direct Interroga- 
 lives, pronouns and adverbs, are often used instead of the 
 indirect ones: αι γυναίκες ηρώτων αντονς, τινες εΐεν, the 
 women ashed them who they were (§ 475, h). 
 
612 . 
 
 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 329 
 
 § 610. 4 . The English indirect Interrogative if or whether 
 is represented by εΐ (§ 525, etc.), more rarely by lav (with 
 the Subj.), sometimes by apa , and in Homer by η (ηε). 
 Whether or not or whether perhaps may be rendered by 
 μη : σκοπείτε, εϊ οίκαίως \ρησομαι τευ λογω, see whether I 
 speak justly; όρα, μη παίζων ελεγεν, see whether or not he 
 spoke in jest. 
 
 On tlie subject of the Interrogative Sentence being drawn prolcp- 
 tically into the principal sentence, see §§ 397, 519, 5, Ohs. 2. 
 
 § 611. The direct double question (disjunctive question) 
 is most generally introduced by πότερον ( πάτερα )— η, Lat. 
 utrum—an : πότερον 8ε$ρακεν η ου ; πότερον ακων η εκών ; 
 has lie done it or not f willingly or unwillingly f In an 
 indirect double question the same Interrogatives may be 
 used, but also ci— η, whether — or, and είτε — είτε : απορου¬ 
 μεν, είτε ακων είτε εκών 8ε$ρακεν, we are in doubt whether 
 he did it willingly or unwillingly. 
 
 Ohs .—The Homeric language has for the direct, but more frequent¬ 
 ly for the indirect double question, the conjunctions ή (ή it), ?} 
 (ήε) : η νμμ εν νήεσσι Τϊοσειδάων εδάμασσεν , ή που άνάρσιοι άνδρες 
 εδηλησαντ επί χφσον ; did Poseidon overpower you in your ships , or 
 have hostile men injured you on land? είπε δε pot μνηστής «λόχου 
 βουλήν τε νόον τε , ήέ μένει παρά παιδί καί εμπεδα πάντα φυλάσσει , 
 ή ήδη μιν εγημεν ’Αχαιών οςτις άριστος , tell me the purpose and in¬ 
 clination of the wooed wife , whether she remains with the son and 
 guards all caref ully , or whether he who is the best of the Achceans has 
 already married her. ή (ήέ) is also used for ή (ήε) in the second 
 member. 
 
 Chat. XXVI. —The Negatives. 
 
 A) Simple Negatives. 
 
 612. The Greeks have two different negatives, ου and 
 Numerous compounds and derivatives are formed 
 
330 
 
 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 § 613 . 
 
 from each, as : ούτε, μήτε , ουρείς, μη^είς, ούδαμως·, μηδαμώς. 
 The principal distinction between ού and μη is that ου 
 denies , but μη declines. Hence arise the following special 
 rules: 
 
 § 613. 1 . ου is used in all direct statements, whether 
 the reality of something is denied by the Indicative , or 
 the possibility or probability of something by the Opta¬ 
 tive with αν ; Φίλιππος ουκ άγει ειρηνην , Philip does not 
 maintain peace ; ουκ αν ay οι εΙρηνην, he would not {will 
 hardly) maintain peace; ουκ αν Γύναιο μη καμών εύΐαι- 
 μονείν, you could not he happy without laboring (§ 516). 
 
 Obs.—ov is also used in tlie peculiar Subjunctive of the Homeric 
 language mentioned § 513. 
 
 2. ου is used in direct questions to which an affirmative 
 answer is expected (§ 60S), but μη when a negative an¬ 
 swer is expected (§ 608). 
 
 § 614. 3. In independent sentences μη is used with the 
 Subjunctive (§§ 510, 512), with the Optative of wishing 
 (§ 514), with the Indicative of wishing (§ 515), and with 
 the Imperative: μη θορνβησητε, do not make a disturb¬ 
 ance; μη ylvoLTopnay it not happen; Horn, ώς* μη ωφελλε 
 Ύενεσθαι, would it never happened! μηποτ επ' άπρηκτοισι 
 νοον εχε, never devote your thoughts to what is imvrac- 
 ticable. 
 
 Ohs. —In these cases μή generally corresponds to the Latin ne. It 
 is often used in negative oaths with the Indicative, in so far as 
 the swearer declines something (§ 612): Horn, ’ίστω νυν roce Vena 
 . ... μή εμήν ίυτητα Ποσεκϋάωΐ' .... ιτημαίνει Τρώας , let GaiCt 
 now hnow this .... not with my consent does Poseidon afflict the 
 Trojans. 
 
 § 615 . 4. ου in general is used in all those dependent 
 sentences which do not express a negative purpose or 
 a condition: ιβειν, on ού p/fiov εϊη, I knew it was not 
 easy; a ουκ εάτε τούς παΐ$ας ποιεϊν, ταυτα αυτοί ποιείτε , 
 
 what you do not allow your children to do you do your¬ 
 selves. 
 
§ 616 . 
 
 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 331 
 
 Obs. 1.—In indirect questions ου as well as μή may be used with 
 εί in tlie sense of whether: σκοπώμεν , εί πρεπει η ου, let us consider 
 whether it is becoming or not; ττεφάσομαε μαθεϊν, εί άΧηθες η μη : I 
 will try to learn whether it is true or not. 
 
 Obs. 2.—In such Relative Sentences as contain quite a general idea, 
 μη may be used : a μή οϊδα , ου δε ο’ίομαι είδεναι , what I do not know , 
 I do not think I know. 
 
 § 616. 5. μη in general is used in all those dependent 
 sentences in which a negative purpose or a condition is 
 expressed ; hence μη is the negative in sentences denot¬ 
 ing intention or purpose (§ 530), in those indirect Inter¬ 
 rogative and Relative sentences where a purpose of hin¬ 
 dering is implied, in all the Protaseis of Hypothetical 
 Periods <)§ 534, etc.), and lastly in Hypothetical Rela¬ 
 tive (§ 554) clauses, as well as in Hypothetical Temporal 
 clauses (§§ 556, 557): lew τις καμρ, παρακαλείς Ιατρόν , 
 όπως μη αποθάνη, when any one is ill, you send for a 
 physician , that he may not die y φηφίσασθε τοιαυτα Ιζ ών 
 μηόεπο re νμιν μεταμεΧησει, vote for such things CCS will 
 never cause you to repent [ea quorum numquam vos 
 pcemteat] ·, opa y όπως μη σοι αποστήσονται , see that they 
 do not abandon you y Ιζήν σοι άπιεναι lie της πόλεως , εί 
 μη ηρεσκόν σοι οι νόμοι , it was at your choice to leave the 
 state, if its laws did not please you / Θεάσασθε, ώς σα¬ 
 θρόν Ιστι παν , 6 τι αν μη δικαίως y πεπρα^μενον , see , llOW 
 rotten every thing is, which is not justly done y μεγίστη 
 yiyxnTai σοχτηρία , orav yvvrj προς ανόρα μη όι\οστατί), it is 
 the greatest safety when a wife is not at variance with 
 her husband. 
 
 Obs. 1.—In sentences of this kind, sometimes oh is used to negative 
 a Single word: πάντως όντως εχει, εάν τε ού ψητέ εάν τε ψητέ , it is 
 entirely so whether you deny or assert it. 
 
 Obs. 2.—The Optative expressing repetition likewise has μη (§ 547). 
 
 Obs. 3.—With verbs of fearing, μη. like the Latin ne, signifies lest or 
 that: δεδοίκα. μη επιλαθώμεθα της ο’ίκαδε ΰδοΰ : I fear lest we forget 
 the way home (compare § 533). Even without a governing verb 
 the fear that something may happen is introduced by μή, which 
 in this case is to be translated if only not , or if but not: μή έτη- 
 
332 
 
 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 617 . 
 
 λαθώμεθα τής οΐκαδε οδού, if only ice do not forget the way home 
 (compare §§ 620, 621, and 512). 
 
 § 617. 6. The Infinitive generally lias μή, particularly 
 when the Infinitive has the article : τάς όμοιας χαμίτας μη 
 avridi^ovai αισχρόν, not to return equal thanks is base y 
 σοι ro μη σι^ήσαι Χοιπόν ήν, it remained for you not to be 
 silent. 
 
 Ohs. 1.— ου may be put with the Infinitive after verbs of declaring 
 and conceiving: ομολογώ ου κατά τούτους είναι ρήτωρ, I acknowledge 
 I am not an orator in their sense. 
 
 Ohs. 2. — ώςτε, so that , when joined with the Infinitive generally has 
 μή , more rarely ού. 
 
 Ohs. 3.—After verbs of hindering, forbidding, refusing, denying, and 
 others which contain the idea of declining (§ 612), μή is usually 
 added to the Infinitive, and is rendered in English by from, or 
 
 . not expressed at all: κωλυόμεθα μή μάθε 1v,we are hindered from 
 learning; ήρνοϋντο μή πεπτωκεναι, they denied haring fallen. 
 
 § 618. 7. With Participles μη is used when they are to 
 be understood hypothetically, i. e,, in the sense of a Hypo¬ 
 thetical Protasis (§ 583): ουκ civ Γύναιο μη καμών tvdcti- 
 μονειν, i. e., d μη κάμοις (§ 613); so, likewise, when the 
 Participle has the article, if it can be resolved into a hypo¬ 
 thetical or a hypothetical relative clause : ύ μη ΰαρύς άν¬ 
 θρωπος oi) τ ταιόευεται, i. e tav τις μη ^apy, Or ός άν μη 
 ciaprj (§ 583). 
 
 Ohs. 1. -When μή is added as a Negative to single words, they are 
 likewise to be taken hypothetically: ro μή άγαθόν, the not good, 
 i. e., 6 άν μή αγαθόν y. 
 
 Ohs. 2. —With Participles as well as with other words μή often oc¬ 
 curs as a Negative on account of the prohibitive, declining, or 
 hypothetical nature of the whole sentence : ψηφισασθε τον πόλεμον 
 μή φοβηθεντες το αύτίκα δεινόν , determine upon the war without fear¬ 
 ing the immediate danger. 
 
 B) Several Negatives combined. 
 
 § 619. l. A Negative is not neutralized by a subsequent 
 compound Negative of the same kind, but only continued. 
 In translating, the Negative is employed only once in En- 
 
621 . 
 
 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 333 
 
 glish, and the place of the other Negative is supplied by 
 an indefinite: Poet, υνκ εστιν ούδευ κρεισσον η νόμοι πό\ει, 
 there is not any thing better for a state than laws / ου δεις· 
 πωποτε Έωκριιτους ούδευ ασεβες ουδέ ανόσιου ούτε πράτ- 
 τοντος ειδεν, ούτε Χεγοντος ηκουσεν, no one ever either saw 
 Socrates doing or heard him say ing any thing impious or 
 unholy. 
 
 Obs. —A Negative is neutralized by a subsequent simple Negative 
 of tlie same kind : ούδε'ις άι>θρώπων άδικων τίσιν ούκ άποδώσει, ΊΙΟ 
 one who does icrong will not (i. e., every one will) pay the penalty. 
 
 § 620. 2. ού followed by μη with the Subjunctive or Fu¬ 
 ture Indicative is an emphatic negative. This mode of 
 speaking is to be explained by the idea of fear being sup¬ 
 plied after ού (compare § 016, Obs. 3): ού μη ποιήσω, 
 about the same as ού φοβητεον μη ποιήσω, there is no fear 
 that I shall do it, i. e., I shall certainly not do it: ούδεις· 
 μηποτε ευρησει το κατ εμε ούδευ εΧΧειφθεν, no one will ever 
 find that any thing, as far as depends on me, is neg¬ 
 lected / ού μηποτε εζαρνος γενωμαι, I shall certainly never 
 deny. 
 
 § 621. 3. μη followed by ού is used in very different 
 ways : 
 
 a) After verbs of fearing, μη ου corresponds to the Lat. 
 ne non or ut, and is to be translated by that not: SiSoiKa, 
 μη ού Θεμιτόν y, vereor, ne nonjustum sit, I fear that it is 
 not just (compare § 616, Obs. 3); also without a governing 
 verb, μη ου θεμιτόν y, if it be but not not right, i. e., if 
 it be only not wrong (compare § 512, and § 616, Obs. 3); 
 Horn, μη vv toi ου χμαισμ/; σκήπτρου και στέμμα ΘεοΓο, the 
 god's staff and garland will surely not help you. 
 
 b) In indirect questions where μη would mean if per¬ 
 haps (§ 610), μη ου means if or whether perhaps not: αθρει 
 μη οίι τούτο y το αγαθόν, looh whether perhaps this is not 
 the good. 
 
 Obs .—In tlie cases adduced under a and b, μη is a Negative Con¬ 
 junction, and ού the Negative to a special word. 
 
334 
 
 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 622 . 
 
 c) μη ου is used with the Infinitive after Negative ex¬ 
 pressions, in the sense of so as not, or not to : ούδέΐς οίόςτε 
 άλλως λέγωη μη οι) καταγέλαστος ε'ιναι, no one speaking 
 
 otherwise is able not to he ridiculous. 
 
 d) μη ου is farther used with the Infinitive after nega¬ 
 tive verbs, or questions containing verbs of hindering, for¬ 
 bidding, denying, refusing (§ 617, Ohs. 3). The Infinitive 
 in this case is often preceded by the Article. In English 
 the negative is not expressed: on κωΧυόμεθα μη ου μαθεΐν, 
 we are not hindered from learning · μη παρμς το μη ού 
 φράσαι , do not omit saying it / τίνα οίει ΙιπαρνησεσΘαι μη 
 οι) ft ε~τίστασθαι τα ο ίκαια ; who do you think will deny 
 at all understanding what is just? 
 
 Ob8.—ov is here only a, repetition of the Negative contained in the 
 principal sentence. 
 
 C) Some Negative Phrases. 
 
 § 622. 1. obbtv, μηόέν, and oim, μητι , nothing , are often 
 used as free Accusatives, like the Latin nihil, meaning 
 not , not at all * compare § 404, Obs. 
 
 2. oi> πω, μηττω, not yet , are to be carefully distinguished 
 from ουκετι, μηκετι, no longer : ουπω τ τεποίηκα, nondum 
 feci/ ουκετι ποιήσω, non amplius faciarn. 
 
 3. ουχ οτι stands for on λέγω οτι, I do not say that , not 
 to mention j και ουχ on ο Κρότων εν ησυχία ήν, αλλά και 
 οί φίΧοι αυτοί), and not to mention (i. e ., not only) Crito 
 was quiet , but his f riends also were. 
 
 4. μη on for μη είπω οτι (μη όπως) means don't suppose , 
 nedum , by which the mention of something is declined 
 as unnecessary, and hence may sometimes be translated in 
 Negative sentences by not only hot : μη bn Θεός, άλλα 
 και άνθρωποι ου φιΧοΰσι τους απιστουντας, don't suppose 
 that only God, but men also do not love the faithless [non 
 homines infidos amant; nedum deus\ In like manner 
 ooy όπως, properly not that, don't suppose , may frequent- 
 
§ 624 . a. 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 335 
 
 ly be rendered in connection with Negatives by not only 
 not. 
 
 5. μόνον ου, μόνον ουχί, only not , is equivalent to al¬ 
 most, nearly; όσον ον, temporal [ tantum non\, nearly 
 almost : καταγέλα υπ ανόμων ο'νς συ μόνον ου προςκυνεις, 
 you are ridiculed by men whom you almost worship. 
 
 6. ου μην or ου μεντοι αλλά, however , notwithstanding , 
 is to be explained by an ellipsis: ό Ίππος μικρού εκείνον 
 εζετραχήλισεν * ού μην (viz., εξετραχμλίσεν) άλλα επεμεινεν 
 ό Κύρος, the horse nearly threw him off \ {did) not , however, 
 but Cyrus kept his seed. 
 
 On ούτε, μήτε, ουδέ, μηδε, § 625. 
 
 Chap. ΧΧΥΙΙ.— The Particles. 
 
 § 623. Particles are also indeclinable words which serve 
 partly to connect sentences, partly to give emphasis to 
 particular parts of a sentence, and to enliven language. 
 The Particles which serve to connect sentences are called 
 Conjunctions; those which give prominence to particular 
 parts of a sentence, or impart animation by making entire 
 sentences prominent, are called emphatic particles. 
 
 In regard to position, they are either prepositive, i. e., 
 take the first place in a sentence, or postpositive , i. e., al¬ 
 ways stand after at least one other word in a sentence. 
 
 Ohs .—The Conjunctions are divided into various classes according 
 to their meaning. Several Conjunctions, however, belong equal¬ 
 ly to different classes. They will be arranged according to their 
 original or primitive signification. 
 
 A )'Conj unctions. 
 
 Preliminary Remark. 
 
 § 624. a. The Conjunctions are here enumerated without 
 regard to the formal relation of sentences to one another 
 (§ 519). But 
 
336 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 § 624 . 
 
 1 . Co-ordination is implied in all Copulative and Dis¬ 
 junctive Conjunctions, the Adversative Conjunctions with 
 the exception of όμως , which is used principally in the 
 Apodosis, among the Causal Conjunctions yap, and all Illa¬ 
 tive Conjunctions except ωςτε ; 
 
 2 . Subordination is implied in all the rest. 
 
 Obs .—Much more rarely than in modern languages, more rarely 
 also than in Latin, is one word or one sentence added to another 
 in Greek without some Conjunction. The Asyndeton ( άσύνδετον , 
 want of connection ) takes place more frequently only in an Epex- 
 egesis (h τεζηγησις), i.e., a subsequent explanatory addition to some¬ 
 thing already alluded to in the previous sentence: dpi τις -γελοίος 
 ιατρός' ίώμενος μεΊζον τό νόσημα ποιώ, lam an odd physician / b>J 
 curing the disease I male it worse. Wherever the Asyndeton oc¬ 
 curs in other cases, the speaker generally intends to produce a 
 special effect by it. 
 
 I. Copulative Conjunctions. 
 
 % 624. b. 1 . The two Copulative Conjunctions are καί, 
 which in general corresponds to the Latin et, and the post¬ 
 positive enclitic τε, which in general corresponds to the 
 Latin que. The language of poetry has besides 17 δε and 
 7δε', with the meaning and [compare atque], 
 
 2 . The Greeks, like the Homans, are fond of expressing 
 the idea of addition in two connected parts of a sentence, 
 either by καί — καί or τε — καί, or τε — τε : και κατά γ?/ν και 
 κατά θάλασσαν, both by land and by water / Horn. Αηοειδαί 
 τε και άλλοι εϋκνημιόες Αχαιοί, ye Atridce as well as ye 
 other well-greaved jAchccans y Horn, αίει yap tol ίρις τε 
 φίλη πόλεμοί τε μάχαι τε, for strife is cdways pleasant to 
 yon, and wars and battles. 4Ve may farther add the Epic 
 ημει> — ι)8ε, cos well — as also. 
 
 Obs .—In single instances we also find τε — de, where the second 
 member is made more prominent by contrast. 
 
 3. και lias, moreover, the meaning also : Horn, παρ' εμοιγε 
 και άλλοι, οϊ κε με τιμι)σονσι, with me are also others , who 
 will honor me. 
 
625 . 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 337 
 
 In this sense, also, καί is frequently used in both the 
 connected parts of a sentence: και ημίν ταύτά δοκεΐ απερ 
 και βασιλεΐ, we also approve the same thing as the Icing 
 {does also). The meaning also by intensification becomes 
 even : καί λίαν , even very much ; and in the opposite case 
 even but: και βραχυν χρόνον, even but a short time. και 
 δε answers to the English and also : δίκαιον και πρεπον δε 
 αμα, just and at the same time also becoming. 
 
 After words of resemblance or likeness καί means as : 
 ομοίως καί, cegue ac. 
 
 4. άλλως τε καί properly means “ both in other respects, and also 
 it serves to give prominence to the subsequent word or words, and 
 may be translated by especially: χαλεπόν εστι διαβαίνειν τον ποταμόν 
 άλλως τε και πολεμίων πολλών εγγύς όντων, it is difficult to cross the river , 
 especially as many of the enemy are near, καί δή καί is used to make 
 the last part of a series emphatic : Herod. K ροίσου βασιλεύοντος άπι- 
 κνίονται ες Σάρδις άλλοι τε οι πάντες εκ της 'Ελλάδος σοφισταί , καί δη καί 
 Σόλων , during the reicjn of Croesus there came from Hellas both all the 
 other wise men and especially Solon [Lat. cum — turn], 
 
 5. In the Epic Dialect τε is frequently employed to indicate the 
 agreement not only of separate parts of a sentence, but of whole sen¬ 
 tences, often, too, in connection with other Particles, such as καί, μεν , 
 δε, άλλα, and with relatives (οςτε, όσοςτε). In these cases τε must gen¬ 
 erally be left untranslated or rendered by an unaccented also: Horn. 
 ός κε θεοίς επιπείθηται μ άλα τ’ εκλυον αυτού , whoever obeys the gods they 
 greatly listen to him also. 
 
 Obs. —The τε in ώςτε , οϊόςτε, which occurs also in prose, is of the 
 same origin. 
 
 6. The rising climax is also expressed by ου μόνον — 
 αλλά καί, not only — but cdso. On ονχ ότι, μη ότι, ουχ 
 όττως, see § 622. 
 
 § 625. 1. The Particles ουδέ', μηδέ and ούτε, μήτε, serve 
 to form a negative series. Two different meanings belong 
 to ουδέ and μηδε', viz.: 
 
 a) nor cither , and not / in this sense they are used to 
 connect a single member of a sentence with a preceding 
 one negatively : Horn, βρώμης ουχ a- ττεαι ουδέ ποτητος, 
 you touch not meat nor drinJe either / προς σου ουδ’ εμού 
 φράσω, to your advantage and not to mine I will spealc. 
 
 P 
 
338 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 § 626 . 
 
 b) also not, not even : ελπίζω ούδε τους πολεμίους μενεϊν 
 ετι, I hope that the enemy also will not longer stay; ούδε 
 τοΰτο εζήν, not even this was allowed [ne hoc guidem lice- 
 hat]. 
 
 2. ούτε — ούτε , μήτε — μντε, are used with mutual refer¬ 
 ence to each other, and may be translated neither—nor : 
 Horn, ούτε ποτ ες πόλεμον πωλεσκετο, ούτε ποτ εις ciyopi'iv, 
 he neither went to war nor to the assembly. Sometimes.^ 
 a negative member of a sentence is brought into relation 
 with a positive one by means of ούτε or μήτε — τε [Latin 
 negue — et\ : ωμοσαν μήτε προδώσειν αλλ//λους σύμμαχοί 
 τε εσεσθαι , they swore not to betray one another and to be 
 allies. 
 
 Obs. —If something else be added to two members connected by 
 ούτε — ούτε , or μήτε — μήτε , it may be done by ούδέ, μηδέ. When, 
 on the contrary, ούδε or μηδέ corresjDonds to a preceding ούτε or 
 μήτε, it must be called an irregularity (compare τε — δε, § 624, 2, 
 Ohs.), and the member thus added is emphatic: άλλά yap ούτε 
 τούτων ούδέν έστιν άληθές, ούδε y εί τίνος άκηκόατε, ώς εγώ παιδεύειν 
 επιχειρώ ανθρώπους, but neither is any of these things true , nor even 
 if you have heard from any one that I undertake to train men. 
 
 II. Disjunctive Conjunctions. 
 
 § 626. l. η, carefully to be distinguished from ij (§§ 643, 
 607), means 
 
 a) or, and in this sense is often doubled: ij — η, either — 
 or, for which ?/rot— i) is used when greater emphasis is to 
 be given to the first member of a sentence: i) αστός τις rj 
 ξένος, either some citizen or a stranger. 
 
 b) than, after comparatives and comparative adjectives 
 like άλλος , alius ; ετερος , alter ; διάφορος , different; εν¬ 
 άντιος , Opposed to, etc.: τίνι άν μάλλον πιστενσαιμι rj σοί ; 
 whom should I trust more than you ? ούδεν άλλο έπιτη- 
 δεύονσιν i) άποθνησκειν, they think upon nothing else than 
 dying. 
 
 Obs .—After πλέον (πλεΤον, contracted πλεΐν), mare, and ελαττον, μεΐον, 
 less, ij is sometimes omitted with numerals, just as quam is after 
 
§ 629 . 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 339 
 
 plus: ΐτη γεγονώς ττλειον έβδομηκοντα , more than seventy years old 
 [plus septuaginta annos natus\. The same is the case also after 
 άλλο τι ill questions (§ 608). 
 
 § 627. 2 dire — είτε, lavre — εάντε, are used like the Latin 
 sive — sive, when it is to be left undecided which of two 
 sides is to be chosen : είτε αληθές είτε ψευδός, ού καλόν μοι 
 δοκει τούτο τουνομα εχειν, whether true or false, it seems to 
 me not fair to have this name. 
 
 III. Adversative Conj unctions. 
 
 § 628. l. Si expresses so slight a contrast or opposition 
 that, though it is generally rendered by but, it may also, 
 and especially in Horn., be translated by and. The Greeks, 
 however, also like to indicate the first of two sentences 
 which are contrasted to one another, and this they do by 
 μεν , in truth, truly, indeed / but it may often be left un¬ 
 translated : Horn, άλλοι μεν pa θεοί τε και ανερες ίππο- 
 κορυσται εύSov πανννχιοι, Αία S' ούκ εχε νηΰυμος ύπνος, the 
 other gods , indeed , and the horse-hair crested men slept 
 through the night , but sweet sleep did not hold Zeus. As 
 here, μεν — Si express a contrast, so elsewhere they indicate 
 only a difference : Ααρείου και Παρυσάτιδος yiyvovTai τταίδες 
 Svo, πρεσβύτερος μεν Άρταζερζης, νεώτερος δε Κύρος, Darius 
 and Parysatis had two children, the elder Artaxerxes, the 
 younger Cyrus / Ilom. ττερι μεν βουλή Ααναων περί S' εστε 
 μαχεσθαι, in council on the one hand, and in battle on the 
 other, you are distinguished among the Danai. 
 
 Obs. —In ITomer an Apodosis also may be opposed to its Protasis 
 by means of δε, especially when the Protasis is introduced by a 
 temporal conjunction: εως ύ ταΐ>θ’ ωρμαινε κατά φρένα καί κατά 
 θυμόν, ήλθε δ’ Άθηνη, while lie pored on this in his mind and spirit 
 Athene came. This is founded on a combination of co-ordination 
 and subordination. Compare § 519,1 and 5, Ohs. 
 
 . § 629. 2. αλλα, yet, but (originally Acc. Plur. Neut. of 
 άλλος), denotes a stronger contrast than Si : Horn, ενθ' 
 άλλοι μεν πάντες επευφήμησαν Αχαιοί — αλλ’ ούκ Ατρειδρ 
 λχαμεμνοΐΊ yvSave Ονμιο, αλλα κακώς αφιει, then all the 
 
340 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 § 630 . 
 
 other Achceans assented, yet it did not meet the feelings 
 of Atrides Agamemnon, but he harshly dismissed him. 
 
 Obs. 1.—After a hypothetical sentence either expressed or under¬ 
 stood, αλλά, sometimes with a strengthening yk added to it, may 
 frequently be rendered by but or yet at least: ei μη πάντα , άλλα 
 πολλά y ϊστε , if not all , yet you Tcnow at least much; Poet, ώ θεοί 
 π ατριροι συγγένεσθε y άλλά νυν , oh gods of my fathers , be With me at 
 least now [if not before]. 
 
 Obs. 2.— άλλά frequently serves to break off a long discussion and 
 emphatically to introduce a request: Horn, άλλά πίθεσθε καί νμμες, 
 
 but do you also follow me. 
 
 Obs. 3.—After negatives άλλ’ y or άλλά alone means except: άργύρων 
 μεν ούκ ί'χα» ά\λ’ η μικρόν τι , I have no money except a little. On ου 
 μην άλλά, § 622, 6. v 
 
 § 630. Other Conjunctions which point out a contrast or 
 a transition to something different are: 
 
 3. αυ, αυτε, properly again, then on the other hand, yet. 
 
 4. Horn, avrcipy and ατάρ, but, on the contrary, yet. 
 
 5. μεντοι , certainly, however, see § 643, 13, 
 
 6 . καίτοι, and yet, still. 
 
 7. όμως , nevertheless, yet, denotes a strong contrast [Lat. 
 tamen, nihilominus\ On όμως as a supplement to a par¬ 
 ticiple, § 587, 5. 
 
 IY. Conjunctions of Comparison. 
 
 § 631. 1. ώς·, as (Lat. ut), 
 
 is properly the adverb of ΰς, η, 6 . It differs in accent from 
 ως, so or thus (§ 99), except when in poets and the Homeric 
 Dialect it is placed after the word compared (§ 98, a), in 
 which case it is oxytone: πατήρ ως ήπιος ήεν, he was gen¬ 
 tle as a father. Like the Lat. ut, it is employed in very 
 different ways: 
 
 a) In its original comparative sense ως means as or how, 
 and is used in comparisons : ως βονλει, as you wish · μα- 
 κρον ως yipovn, far for me an old ma7i (Lat. tcrnguam ); 
 Horn, ως μοι δ εχεται κακόν εκ κακού αιεί ( how With me one 
 evil always follows another, Lat. quam) ; with superlatives 
 
§ 632 . 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 341 
 
 like the Lat. quam : ώς τάχιστα, quam celerrime, as quick¬ 
 ly as p>ossible (compare ότι). In statements of number and 
 measure it means about, nearly: ώς 8εκα, about ten · ώς 
 επ\ το πολύ, for the most part / with verbs of motion or 
 action it indicates what is merely intended, apparent: άπψι 
 ώς εις τούς πολεμίους, he went away in the direction of the 
 enemy (as if he went against the enemy) ; hence it occurs 
 with participles in the manner described § 5 88. On its 
 use with the Infinitive, § 564, and on ώς as a preposition, 
 § 450. 
 
 b) In a temporal sense ώς means when, as soon as (com¬ 
 pare Lat. ut) : Horn, ώς έί8\ ως μιν μάλλον εάν χόλος, when 
 he saw him, anger pierced him the more · ώς τάχιστα εως 
 ύπεφαινεν, εθύοντο, as soon as dawn appeared, they sacri¬ 
 ficed [Lat. ut primuin]. 
 
 c) In a causal sense ώς means as (Latin quum), since, 
 and with subsequent statement of the reason, for: Ιεομαι 
 σου παραμεΐναι, ώς εγώ ήκιστα άκούσαιμι σου, I beg you to 
 stay here, as I shoidd hear you with the greatest pleas¬ 
 ure, 
 
 cl) After verbs of saying and declaring ώς means that: 
 ηκεν αγγελλων τις, ώς Έλάτεια κατείληπται, some one came 
 announcing that Elatoea has been taken. § 526, b. 
 
 e) ώς is rarely used in a consecutive sense, so that (ώςτε). 
 
 /) in a final sense ώς means in order that: ώς μη πάντες 
 όλωνται, in order that all may not perish. Compare § 530, 
 etc. 
 
 g) On ώς expressing a wish (Lat. utinam), see § 514. 
 
 § 632. 2. ωςπερ, as, 
 
 is only a strengthened ώς (compare § 641, 3), and is used 
 only in a comparative sense. 
 
 3. όπως, how, that, in order that, 
 is principally used as a final Conjunction, and may then 
 
342 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 633 . 
 
 be translated by that, or in order that, compare § 530, etc. 
 On ουχ οττως , § 622, 4. 
 
 4. ώστε, as, so that, 
 
 has rarely the comparative meaning as, generally the con¬ 
 secutive so that, when it is followed either by an Infinitive 
 or a finite verb. Compare § 565. 
 
 5. Horn, ηντε, as, just as, like, only in comparisons. 
 
 § 633. V. Declarative Conjunctions. 
 
 1. bn, that, because [Lat. quod~\, 
 
 is originally nothing but the Xeuter of the pronoun οςτις, 
 b τι, on the distinction of which from on, compare § 214, 
 Obs. 2 . Like the Latin quod, bn has two principal mean¬ 
 ings, the declarative that and the causal because. 
 
 a ) otl means that after verbs of saying and declaring 
 (compare § 525): Ηράκλειτος· λεγεί, on ττάντα χώρε? καί 
 ούόίν μενει, Heraclitus says that every thing moves, and 
 nothing is stationary. Hence the phrase SijXov bn (also 
 written δηλονότι), it is clear that, manifestly. 
 
 Obs. —Sometimes, also, a direct speech is introduced by on, so that 
 the Conjunction is, as it were, a mere sign of quotation: ictjXov 
 r) γραφή , on Θεμιστοκλής ήκω παρά σε, the letter stilted (that) I The- 
 rnistocles am come to you. 
 
 b) because, that [Lat. quod\ : Horn, χωόμενος, οτ apt- 
 στον Αχαιών ούδεν ετισας, angry that you have not hon¬ 
 ored the best of the Achceans. 
 
 The use of otl (or o n) with a superlative deserves at¬ 
 tention : bn τάχιστα like ως τάχιστα, as quickly as possi¬ 
 ble / and ότι μη, except, besides : ούκ ην κρηνη b τι μη μία, 
 there was no fountain except one. 
 
 2. ως, that, § 631, d. 
 
 3. ckjti, that, § 636, 2 . 
 
 4. ουνεκα, that, § 636, 3. 
 
635 . 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 343 
 
 λ I. Temporal Conjunctions . 
 
 § 634. (Respecting the Moods, see § 556, etc.) 
 
 1. οτε, οπότε , when, \jquando, cum ] : όταν, όπόταν, 
 
 when, if: ην ποτέ \ρυνος, οτε θεοί μεν ησαν, θνητά 3ε γένη 
 ούκ ην, there once was a time ivheti gods existed, hut mor¬ 
 tal races did not exist y Horn, οί S' οτε Si) λιμενος πολυ- 
 βενθεος εντός ικοντο, ιστία μεν στείλαντο, hut when they got 
 within the deep harbor they furled the sails, οτε and 
 υ7Γοτε with the Optative, according to § 558, Ohs. 1, mean 
 whenever, as often as: Horn, ένθα πόρος κοιμαθ ' οτε μιν 
 γλυκύς ύπνος ίκόνοι, where formerly he used to lie down 
 whenever sweet sleep came upon him. Sometimes οτε has 
 the causal meaning since. 
 
 2. Horn. εντε = οτε. 
 
 3. 11 νίκα, οπηνίκα, when, at the time when (§ 217), de¬ 
 notes rather a point of time : ηνίκα ην Sείλη, εξαπίνης επι- 
 φαίνονται οι πολέμιοι, when it was evening the enemy sud¬ 
 denly appeared. 
 
 4. ημος, poet, when : 
 
 Hom. ημος δ’ ?)ε\ιος μισόν ουρανόν άμψιβεβήκει, καί τότε δή χρνσεια 
 πατήρ ίτίταινε τάλαντα , when (at the moment) the sun had entered 
 mid heaven, just then the father raised the golden scales. 
 
 § 635. 5. επεί, after, when, as : επεάν, επην, επάν, when j 
 Horn, αυτό p επε\ πόσιος και εδ ητυος εξ ερον εντο, but when 
 they had quenched the desire for food and drink / Κύρος 
 υπεσγετο avepi εκιιστω Sωσειv πεντε αργυρίου μνας, επάν 
 ε'ις Βαβυλώνα ηκωσιν, Cyrus promised to give each man 
 five silver mince when they should come to Babylon, επεί 
 frequently introduces a reason, and then is to be translated 
 v because or for: Horn, αλλά πίθεσθε καί υμμες, επει 
 πείθεσθαι αμεινον, but do you also obey me, for it is better 
 to obey. 
 
 6 . επειδή, now since, since: επειΰάν, when, is επεί strength¬ 
 ened by Srj (§ 642), and points more strongly to the reason 
 
344 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 636 . 
 
 assigned than επεί : επειδή άνεωχθη το δεσμωτηριον, εις- 
 ηΧθομεν, now since the prison was opened we entered. 
 
 7. εως, as long as, till [ quamdiu, dum, donee ]: εως ετι 
 εΧπίς , as long as there is still hope; περιεμενομεν εως άνοι- 
 χθείη το δεσμωτηρίου, we waited till the prison should he 
 
 opened. 
 
 8 ^ 
 
 . tare 
 
 9. μέχρι, άχρι (compare § 455 
 
 10. poet, οψρα, as long as, till: 
 
 Horn, υφρα μεν ήως ην, as bug as it was morning; Horn, εχει κότον , 
 ύφρα τελεσσφ, he nurses wrath till he f ulfills it. ΰφρα is very often 
 a Particle of purpose or intention, and then to be translated by 
 that , in order that: Horn, ΰφρα μή οΐος άγεραστος εω, in order that 
 I may not he alone unhonored. 
 
 11 . πριν, before, sooner \_priusguam~\ (compare § 565), 
 is joined sometimes with the Infinitive, sometimes with a 
 finite verb. Its original adverbial meaning, previously, 
 earlier, has been preserved, especially in ro πριν, formerly. 
 In Horn, the Conjunction πριν may refer back to the ad¬ 
 verb πριν : ούδ’ δγε πρ\ν Δαναοϊσιν άεικεα Xoiyov άπωσει, 
 πριν y από πατρ\ φίΧω δόμεναι εΧικώπιδα κονρην, and lie 
 will not avert the dreadful suffering from the Danai be¬ 
 fore they have given bach the guich-eyed maiden to her 
 father. 
 
 12 . 7 ταρος, Horn. =πριν. 
 
 VII. Causal Conjunctions. 
 
 § 636. 1 . ότι, § 633, b. 
 
 2. διότι, because, properly διά τούτο ότι, for this reason 
 that, or that. 
 
 3. ουνεκα, because, poet., from ου ενεκα, for τούτον ενεκα 
 ότι, for this reason that / because, also declarative that. 
 So likewise ύθούι^κα from ότον (οΰτίνος) ενεκα. 
 
 4. επεί, § 635, 5. 
 
 5. ότε, § 634, 1 . 
 
 6. yap (always postpositive),^/ 1 , namely, to ivit. Spe¬ 
 cial peculiarities in the use of yap arc : 
 
637 . 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 345 
 
 a) In animated discourse the sentence containing a rea¬ 
 son is often put before the one for which the reason is 
 given, especially after a Vocative : Horn. Άτρείΰη, πολλοί 
 yap τεθνάσι καρηκομόωντες Άγαηκ— τμ σε χρά πόλεμον 
 
 τταΰσαι, Atrides,for many ricli-liaired Achceans have died, 
 therefore you o ught to put an end to the war. 
 
 b) By namely, yap may be translated when it introduces 
 the substance of a speech or opinion before announced, so 
 especially after τεκμήριου δε, μαρτυρίου δε (supply εστι ),for 
 that there is a proof a testimony. 
 
 c ) In answers yap may often be rendered by yes, cer¬ 
 tainly, but must in reality be explained by an ellipsis: 
 aywviariov μεν apa i)ptv προς τους άντρας ; αΐ'άγκη γάρ, 
 εφη, must we then contend with the men f yes, it is nec¬ 
 essary, said he —the complete answer would be, we must 
 contend, for it is necessary. 
 
 d) In animated questions γάρ serves to give emphasis 
 like the Lat. nam: τί yap ; quidnam f how so f η yap ; 
 ου yap ; is it not so ? πώς yap ου ; how could it be other¬ 
 wise f el yap is the Lat. utinam. αλλά yap [ cot enim~\ 
 corresponds to the English but surely / ου yap αλλά prop¬ 
 erly : for it is not so, but, hence however. 
 
 VIII. Inferential Conjunctions. 
 
 § 637. 1. apa (Ep. ap and enclitic pa, poet, also apa, 
 postpositive), then, therefore, accordingly, always refers to 
 something known or resulting from what has gone before. 
 It is most frequently used in Homer to connect sentences 
 slightly : ως* άρ εφη, thus then he spoke/ Ατρεί^ης δ’ apa 
 vija Οοην άλαδε προερυσσεν, and Atrides accordingly drew 
 the fleet ship to the sea (as was to be expected), ουκ apa 
 often means not forsooth, ει apa if then or if perhaps, and 
 in indirect questions whether perhaps. 
 
 On the Interrogative apa, § 607, b. 
 
 2. oar (New Ion. ών, postpositive), then, consequently, is 
 
 Γ 2 
 
346 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 638 . 
 
 more emphatic than apa: Horn, ήτοι νόστος άπώΧετο πα- 
 τρός εμοΊο * out ούν α-γγελίμ ετι πείθομαι , εί ποθεν εΧθοι, 
 ούτε θεοπροπίης εμπάζομαι, surely my father’s return is 
 lost, therefore I no longer believe a message, if one comes 
 from any where, nor concern myself about joroj)hecy. μεν 
 ovv (compare § 643, 12 ), no doubt, certainly, well then; 
 δ’ ovv , certainly / αλλ’ ουν, certainly / γαρ oim, yet 
 surely. When joined to relatives, ouv has the generalizing 
 meaning of the Lat. cungue: όςτιςονν, whoever, guicungue 
 (§§ 218, 600). 
 
 By combination with oue we obtain the Negative ovk- 
 ovv, not then, to be carefully distinguished from ονκονν , 
 which is properly an Interrogative, then f but as an 
 affirmative answer is expected after an interrogative with 
 ov (§ 608), it has acquired the positive meaning, therefore, 
 accordingly, now: ούκονν ϊμοη/ε 8οκεΐ , hence I do not think 
 SO y Poet, ούκονν όταν όη μη σθενω, πεπανσομαι, well, then, 
 I will cease ivhen I really have no strength. 
 
 3. vvv (enclitic, postpositive), a weakened vvv, corre¬ 
 sponds to the unaccented English now. 
 
 4. Toivvv, hence, therefore, surely, is a vvv strengthened 
 by the assuring tol (§ 643,10). 
 
 5. Toiyap, so then, therefore, yet / more emphatic toij άρ¬ 
 τοι, Toiyapovv. 
 
 6. ωςτε, SO that, § 632, 4. 
 
 IX. Final Conjunctions . 
 
 (Respecting the Moods, § 530, etc.) 
 
 § 638. l. tva, that, in order that, in order to [Lat. ut\, 
 as an adverb also signifies where in a relative sense and in 
 indirect questions: ονχ όρας ίν εί κακόν ; do you not see 
 in what (position of) evil you are ? iva as a Particle of 
 purpose is elliptical in ίνα τί ; where y^Tai must be sup¬ 
 plied, i. e., that what may happen? why? 
 
§ C39. 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 347 
 
 On 2. ώς and 
 
 3. οττως, see §§ 631, 632, 3. 
 
 4. υφρα, § 635, 10. 
 
 5. μι) = Lat. ne, that not, m order that not, §§ 530, 
 etc., 614 ; after verbs of fearing, § 616, Obs. 3. 
 
 X. Hypothetical Conjunctions. 
 
 (Respecting the Moods, § 535, etc.) 
 
 § 639. 1. a, if, 
 
 in indirect questions whether, § 610; in wishes (where a'0e, 
 a γάρ are also used), if only, if but, § 514. Observe also 
 a μη in the sense of excepjt, like the Lat. nisi: ημίν ουΰεν 
 εστιν αγαθόν άλλο a μη όπλα και αρετή , have no other 
 good except weapons and valor; ει μη a, nisi si, unless; 
 ε'ίπερ, siquidem , indeed, certainly if, contains an em¬ 
 phatic assurance : Poet, η και γεγηθώς ταΰτ oa Χεζειν So- 
 
 κεΐς ; είττερ τί γ’ εστι της αλήθειας σθένος, do you really 
 think you will always speak thus joyously f (answer) if 
 indeed (certainly if) there is any force in truth. 
 
 2. εάν, i. e., ει av (or, ην), if; 
 
 in indirect questions, whether, § 610. 
 
 3. άν, I suppose,perhaps (postpositive), 
 
 always denotes that something may happen only under 
 certain conditions, and hence is often untranslatable. 
 
 On av with the (potential) Optative, § 516. 
 
 “ ee (hypothetical) Indicative, § 537. 
 
 ee Indicative, denoting repetition, § 494. 
 iC iC Future Indicative, § 500, Obs. 
 
 “ “ Subjunctive with relatives, § 554. 
 
 “ “ “ with particles of time, § 557. 
 
 £C Infinitive, §§ 575, 576. 
 
 iC Participles, § 595. 
 
 Obs .— av is often used twice in tlie same clause: ονκ άν όρθώς ουδ’ 
 νγιώς ύ rovro ποιησας περί οΰδενδς άν Χογίσαιτο , he who did this WOllld 
 not , I suppose, judge correctly or soundly about any thing. 
 
348 THE PARTICLES. § 640. 
 
 _ * - 
 
 4. Horn, κέ , k&p (enclitic and postpositive) is used almost entirely 
 like άν. 
 
 XI. Concessive Conjunctions . 
 
 § 640. 1 . α καί (εάν καί), if even, although , 
 denotes a simple concession: poet, πόλιν, el και μη βλέ¬ 
 πεις , φρονείς δ’ όμως , οία νόσιο ζυνεστιν , though you have 
 not sight, yet you are aware in what misery the city is 
 involved. 
 
 2. καί εί (και εάν, κάν), even if even though, 
 
 denotes an emphatic concession, like etiamsi : ηγείτο άν- 
 δρος είναι αγαθού ώφελείν τους φίλους, και εί μηδεις μελλοι 
 είσεσθαι, he deemed it to belong to a good man to benefit 
 his f riends, even if no one should know it. 
 
 Ohs. — The distinction between d καί and καί εί consists mainly in 
 the former giving the emphasis of the καί to the Protasis, the 
 latter to the Apodosis. Hence the meaning is in many cases al¬ 
 most the same. 
 
 3. καίπερ with the participle, § 587, 5. · 
 
 In the Apodosis, the Concessive Conjunctions are often followed 
 by 'όμως , notwithstanding , § 630, 7. 
 
 B) Particles of Emphasis. 
 
 § 641. 1 . γε (enclitic and postpositive), at least [Latin 
 quidem ], gives the word before it greater weight, and is 
 often represented in other languages merely by a more 
 emphatic accent on the word to which γε is attached: 
 Horn, ε'ιπερ γάρ W E κτωρ γε κακόν και άνάλκιΕα φησει, άλλ' 
 ου πείσονται Τρώες, for if Hector shall call (you) base 
 and effeminate , yet the Trojans ivill not believe (it); 
 Horn, αλλά συ, εί δυυασαί γε, περίσγεο παιδυς, but do you , 
 if you can,protect your son / τοντό γε οίμαι υμάς άπαντας 
 r )σθησθαι, this at least I think you all have perceived; 
 Horn, ο τις τοιαΰτά γε ρεζοι, whoever should do such things, 
 γε is very frequently affixed to pronouns : εγωγε, ego qui- 
 
642. 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 349 
 
 dem , ογε (Horn, he, he specially) ; οςγε strengthened ος, 
 qui quidem. 
 
 2. yovv (postpositive), at least [Lat. certej, is compound¬ 
 ed of yk and ovv, and hence more emphatic than γε alone. 
 
 3. Trip (enclitic and postpositive),^’ ust, exactly, very, 
 shortened from the adverb περί, very (§ 466), serves to give 
 precision to the relative : οςπερ (§ 218), the very one who ; 
 ωςπερ ,just as. In Homer it is added to participles in a 
 sense similar to that of καίπερ (§ 587, 5) : μη δ’ ούτως αγα¬ 
 θός περ εων θεοείκεΧ \\χιλλεύ κλεπτε νοω, be not so stealthy 
 in purpose, divine Achilles, though you are so very noble 
 {ironical). 
 
 § 642. 4. δ// {certainly, to be sure, well then, therefore), 
 points to what is obvious in a single idea or in a whole 
 sentence, δή is used principally in three ways : 
 
 a ) to emphasize single words: ττοια εστιν u ημάς ωφελεί \ 
 ύγίεια καί ίσχυς και κάλλος καί πλούτος 8η, what hind of 
 things are those which benefit us f health, and strength, 
 and beauty, and, certainly, wealth · 8ηλα δή, to be sure it 
 is clear · νυν ορατέ δή, now you surely see; aye δ?/, well! 
 come · τι δή ; what then f μάλιστα δ//, very much so, at the 
 beginning of an apodosis; και τότε δή, now, just then. On 
 και δή και, § 624, 4. 
 
 b) to confirm a sentence by referring to what precedes: 
 roy μεν δή π t μπει, him, then, he sends j Poet, οι τηλικοί8ε 
 και 8ι8αζ6μεσθα δή φρονείν προς ανδρδς τηλικού8ε ; we even 
 at such an age are, then (according to the preceding 
 speeches), to be taught wisdom by a man of such an 
 age? ώς εν τινι φρουρά Ισμεν οι άνθρωποι , και ού δει δή 
 εαυτόν εκ ταύτης λύειν, we men are, as it were, placed 
 at some post, and it is therefore not prop>er to aban¬ 
 don it. 
 
 c) referring to time, very much like the particle of time, 
 ήδη, Lat. jam : καί πολλά δ») άλλα λεζας είπεν, and after 
 having already stated many other things, he said / νυν δί/. 
 
350 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 643 . 
 
 just now . Horn, τά Srj νυν πάντα τελείται, Cill that is just 
 
 now being done . 
 
 5. δήπου, surely, I suppose, also δήπουθεν , 
 
 is often used ironically in assertions wliicli admit of no reply: 
 τρέφεται δε ψνχή τίνι ; μαθήμασι δήπου, the Soul is nourished by what? 
 (answer) surely by learning, τί δήπου, loell, then, what do you sup¬ 
 pose ? 
 
 G. δ ήτα, certainly, 
 
 negative ου δήτα, certainly not; τί δ ήτα, well! what then? 
 
 7. δήθεν, clearly, evidently. 
 
 8 . δαί, 
 
 another form of δή, but only used in questions: τί δαί', well! 
 what? how so? 
 
 § 643. 9. ?/, verily , truly 
 
 (to be distinguished from ?), or, than , § 626), strengthens 
 an assurance, η μην (Horn. η μεν) is the common form 
 of an oath: ωμοσαν ορκους ή μην μη μνησικακησειν, they 
 swore that they woidd truly not cherish revenge. On the 
 Interrogative η, §§ 607, 608. 
 
 In Homer η is appended to εττεί and τί , to add strength 
 to them: επεί η, τί η, for which also επειη, τιη is written. 
 
 10. τοί (enclitic and postpositive), I assure you, let me tell you. 
 ovroi, truly not; strengthened forms: τοίγαρ, τοιγαροϋν, Tor /άρτο. 
 (§ 637, 5). 
 
 11. ήτοι , verily, faith {ή and τοί), 
 
 serves as a naive assurance in Epic poetry: ήτοι δγ’ ώς είπών κατ 
 άρ εζετο, now when he had so spoken he sat down. 
 
 On the disjunctive ήτοι — ή, either, or, see § 62G, a. 
 
 12. μην (Horn, μάν , μεν), verily, tridy [Latin verum, 
 vero], 
 
 Horn. ώ$ε yap εζερεω, καί μην τετελεσμενον εσται, for SO 
 will I sjpeak out, and truly it will be fulfilled ή τί μην ; 
 why! what? why not? (compare § 404, Obs.). 
 
 13. μεντοι, yet, however, certainly, Lat. vero, 
 
 from μεν, the weaker form of μην: ες Οινιά^ας εστράτευσαν 
 κα\ επολιορκουν , ου μεντοι είλον γε , αλλ’ άνε\ωρησαν επ 
 οίκου , they made an expedition against (Eniadce, and be~ 
 
643 . 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 351 
 
 sieged it; yet they did not conquer it, hut returned 
 home. 
 
 14. vat, yea, in fact. 
 
 15 . νη, tridy, 
 
 followed by the names of gods in the Accusative, who are 
 invoked as witnesses in an oath: vr) Δία, by Zeus. 
 
 16. μά, tridy, 
 
 in negative oaths: ου μά Δία, no, by Zeus / also in positive 
 ones, when vai precedes: va\ μά Δία, tridy by Zeus (§ 399, 
 Obs.). 
 
 17. Horn, θην (enclitic), truly , surely , 
 
 similar to the Attic οηπου (§ 642, 5), often with an ironical mean¬ 
 ing : ου θην μιν πάλιν αντις άνησει θυμός άγηνωρ νεικείειν βασιλήας, 
 his courageous heart will surely not again incite him to taunt Icings. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 VERSIFICATION. 
 
 § 644. In poetry, regard is had in the selection and ar¬ 
 rangement of words to the quantity of syllables. The reg¬ 
 ular recurrence of long and short syllables creates rhythm, 
 or measure, by which each verse has a regular movement 
 and flow of its own. 
 
 1. Verse. —Each single line is a verse. 
 
 2. Feet. —A verse is composed of arrangements of syl¬ 
 lables by twos, threes, etc., called feet. 
 
 3. Metre. —The arrangement of feet by which a verse is 
 constituted is called metre , and the kind of metre is named 
 from the prevailing foot. Thus iambic metre signifies a 
 metre of which the iambus is the fundamental foot. 
 
 Ohs. —In the terms monometer, dimeter, etc., “meter” signifies the 
 number of times a foot or a group of feet is used in the verse; 
 e. g., in dactylic, Ionic, and bacchic metres one foot forms a 
 “ meterand a dactylic, Ionic, or bacchic dimeter, trimeter, 
 tetrameter, hexameter, is a metre of two, three, four, and six feet 
 respectively. In all other verse two feet form a “ meterand 
 an iambic dimeter, for example, or trimeter, tetrameter, or hex¬ 
 ameter, is a metre of four, six, eight, and twelve feet respectively. 
 
 For rules of quantity, compare §§ 74-78. 
 
 § 645. Kinds of Feet. 
 
 1. Four Dissyllabic: 
 
 Spondee (two long syllables). 
 
 “ ~ Trochee (one long and one short syllable). 
 w “ Iambus. 
 w ~ Pyrrhic. 
 
354 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 64a 
 
 2. Eight Trisyllabic: 
 
 Molossus. 
 w ~ _ Bacchius. 
 
 w Antibacchius. 
 
 ” ~ w Dactyl. 
 
 ^ ^ _ Aimpaest. 
 
 “ “ Creticus. 
 
 w ~ ~ Amphibrach. 
 
 "" w "" Tribrach. 
 
 3. Sixteen Tetrasyllable: 
 
 w ^ ^ p roce t eusma tlc. 
 
 - - ~ ~ Firgt jpa?on. 
 w ~ "" Second Paeon. 
 
 ~ ~ w Third Paeon. 
 
 www- poy^p Pagon. 
 
 w ~ lonicus a Majore. 
 w ~ lonicus a Minore. 
 
 _ w w _ QPoriambus. 
 w - Antispast. 
 
 w _ w _ pij am p us> 
 
 _ w _ w p^rochee. 
 w First Epitritus. 
 
 _ w Second Epitritus. 
 w Third Epitritus. 
 w p ourt p Epitritus. 
 
 Dispondee. 
 
 § 646. Resolution and Contraction. —A long syl¬ 
 lable is considered equal in time to two short ones. Hence 
 a long quantity may be resolved into two short ones, or two 
 short ones may be contracted into a long one. Thus a 
 dactyl by contraction may be replaced by a spondee, or a 
 spondee by resolution by a dactyl; and a dactyl, first by 
 contraction, then by resolution, may pass over into an ana¬ 
 paest. 
 
 § 647. i. Arsis and Thesis. —One syllable of every 
 
647. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 355 
 
 foot receives a stronger emphasis—ictus—than the others. 
 This emphasis is called the arsis ( αρσις , raising). The 
 thesis (θέ'σίς·, laying down) is the lowering of the voice 
 which occurs in the pronunciation of the other syllables. 
 
 a. Tlie syllable upon which the arsis occurs is said to stand in ar¬ 
 sis, and those upon which the thesis, in thesis. Less properly 
 the syllables themselves are called arsis and thesis. 
 
 l·. Each foot properly has its own arsis, but when a foot stands for 
 another (§ 646) it takes the arsis of that foot. Thus, in ana¬ 
 paestic metre, a dactyl taking the place of an anapaest will re¬ 
 ceive the arsis upon the second syllable instead of the first. 
 
 2. Caesura. —The regular arrangement of syllables in 
 feet has the effect, in most kinds of verse, of dividing each 
 verse into two rhythmical parts. The pause between the. 
 two is called a caesura , a cutting (credo, to cut). It, of 
 course, always occurs at the end of a word, never in a 
 word; while it may occur either in a foot, separating one 
 part from another, or at the end of a foot. 
 
 a. The ending of a word at any time before the ending of a foot is 
 a caesura of the foot. When the caesura falls between the arsis 
 and thesis of a foot, it is a caesura also of the rhythm. The 
 principal caesura, which divides a verse into two equal or nearly 
 equal parts, is called the caesura of the verse. There are, there¬ 
 fore, three caesurae: 
 
 1. Caesura of the foot. 
 
 2. Caesura of the rhythm. 
 
 3. Caesura of the verse. 
 
 3. Catalectic, Acatalectic, and Hypeecatalec- 
 tic. —If the last foot of a verse is not complete, the verse 
 is called catalectic (καταληκτικός, leaving off, stopping). A 
 complete verse is acatalectic , and one more than complete 
 is hyper catalectic. 
 
 4. Syncope. — Sometimes one or more theses will be 
 omitted, and thus a modification of rhythm occurs; this is 
 called syncope. 
 
 5. Anacrusis.— An unaccented syllable prefixed to a 
 
356 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 648. 
 
 verse beginning with an accented syllable is called an ana¬ 
 crusis. It sometimes consists of two short syllables. 
 
 6. Basis and Ecbasis. —A trochee, iambus, tribrach, or 
 spondee may be used to introduce a verse in the same way 
 as the anacrusis, and is then called a basis (step). The 
 same placed at the end of a verse is called ecbasis. 
 
 Note. — Anacrusis , lasts, and ecbasis are extra rhythmic, i. e., count 
 as no part of the metre. 
 
 § 648. Arrangement of Verses. —Verses may be 
 arranged— 
 
 1. by the line, i. e ., by the continued repetition of one 
 kind of verse, as in dactylic hexameter or iambic trimeter; 
 
 2. by distichs (δίστιχος, double row), i. e., by couplets of 
 verses, the one differing from the other in length or in 
 kind, or both, as in elegiac verse (difference in length), and 
 in lyric verse when an iambic verse will alternate with a 
 trochaic; 
 
 3. by systems, i. e., a number of verses in connected series, 
 concluding with a verse either catalectic or of particular 
 rhythm, and thus forming a whole; for example, an ana¬ 
 paestic system is a succession of anapaestic dimeters acata- 
 lectic, with sometimes a monometer, and always ending 
 with the dimeter catalectic (paroemiac); 
 
 4. by strophe and antistrophe. A strophe (σ-ρο^ρ, a 
 turning) is a combination of several verses, either like or 
 different, into a rhythmical whole. It may be repeated. 
 When repeated once only, the second is called an anti¬ 
 strophe. 
 
 The strophe was sung by the chorus in tragedy or com¬ 
 edy when making an evolution from right to left of the 
 orchestra, and the antistrophe in making the return move¬ 
 ment. 
 
 a. To a stroplie and antistroplic a third strophe differing in form 
 may be added as a conclusion, and is called an ej>ode; or it may 
 
649. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 357 
 
 precede, and is then called a proode; or it may come between, 
 and is then called a mesode. 
 
 DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 
 
 § 649. Dactylic Verse. —The fundamental foot is the 
 dactyl. By contraction of the last two quantities into one, 
 a long syllable may take the place of the two short ones, 
 and so a spondee replace a dactyl. The long quantity, 
 however, as a rule, can not be resolved into two short ones, 
 so that only in rare cases does a proceleusmatic ( w w "") 
 replace a dactyl. The arsis falls upon the first syllable. 
 The rhythms commonly used are the following: 
 
 1. Dimeter (compare § 644, 3, Obs .): 
 
 εζαννσεις χρέος, ~ ~ "" Soph. (Ed. Tyr., 157. 
 
 ώ μεγάλα φάτις, ω,~ ~ ~ - (hypercatalectic or pentliemi- 
 
 meris), Soph. Ajax, 173. 
 
 ώδε πρόκειμαι, — ~ ~ (catalectic), Soph. Ajax, 427. 
 
 2. Trimeter: 
 
 μ$ κράτος αντίπαλον Ζευς , “ ~ ~ ~ ~ ^ ~ ^ sc ] 1# p r> Vinct., 
 
 537. 
 
 εΐτ επί τάς άννδρονς, — ^ ~ ^ — (catalectic or penthemime- 
 
 ris; same as dimeter hypercatalectic), Eur. Ale., 115. 
 
 3. Tetrameter: 
 
 1] ρά σε Ύανροπόλα Αιδς * Αρτεμις , ~ ν " — — ν " — 'q Sopll. 
 
 Ajax, 172. 
 
 καρποφόρου Αφΰας, ίεράν, — (catalectic), Pind. 
 
 Pyth. IV., 6. 
 
 των μεγάλων Ααναών ϋπο κλι/ζο μίναν, — ^ ^ ^ ^ ~ ^ — 
 
 (hypercatalectic), Soph. Ajax, 225. 
 
 4. Pentameter (the pentameter acatalectic does not oc- 
 cur): 
 
 Αίλινον, Αίλινον είπε, το δ' ευ νικάτω, ~~ ^ w — — ^ ~ 
 
 (catalectic in dissyllabam), iEsch. Again., 121. 
 
 (The catalectic in syllabam = tetrameter hypercatalectic.) 
 
 5. Hexameter : 
 
 T(ij ί κελος πολίεσσιν οχησατο κνμασιν Ερμης, 
 
 - ? Odyss., 5 : 54. 
 
358 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 650. 
 
 6. Elegiac distich consists of a dactylic hexameter and 
 a dactylic pentameter (so called, really two catalectic tri¬ 
 meters) : 
 
 φχετο μεν Π ίσης, μεγάλη θεός , ιρχετο δ’ άνδρών 
 Σωφροσύνη , Χάριζες τ , ω 0ίΧε, γην ελιπον. 
 
 § 650. Hexameter. — This is the metre of Epic poetry, 
 e. g ., of the Iliad and Odyssey of Homer. It is therefore 
 called Epic or Heroic hexameter. A spondee may stand 
 in any place, or in all the places at once. It always stands 
 in the last place. A dactyl regularly occupies the fifth 
 place, but sometimes a spondee, and then the verse is called 
 spondaic. The caesura regularly occurs after the arsis of 
 the third foot, but sometimes in the thesis of the third foot 
 or after the arsis of the fourth. A caesura after the fourth 
 foot is called the bucolic, from its frequent use in pastoral 
 poetry. 
 
 § 651. Trochaic Yerse. —The fundamental foot is the 
 trochee. By protraction of the short quantity, a spondee 
 may replace the trochee, or, by resolution of the long, a 
 tribrach may replace the trochee. The arsis falls on the 
 first syllable. The rhythms used are the following: 
 
 1. Monometer, not used alone, but always with other 
 rhythms. Compare Logaoedic Yerse. 
 
 2. Tripody (ithyphallicus): 
 
 ην ο ταντα ττράσσων, — ^ Soph. El., 200. 
 
 3. Dimeter: 
 
 ποώδες tv τιμάΐς 'ίμιχθεν , — w — c; — — Pincl. Isth., 2, 29. 
 
 κλίνατ , ού σθένω ποσίν , ~ ~~ w — — (catalectic), Elir. Ale., 266. 
 
 4. Trimeter: 
 
 θεύμοροι νίσσοντ επ’ ανθρώπους άοιδαί , ~ ^ — ~ — — ~ ? 
 
 Pincl. 01., 3,10. 
 
 ζών κακώς , εύκλειαν αίσχνναι θέλει, ~ ^ ~ ^ ~ ^ ~ — (catalec¬ 
 
 tic), Sopli. El., 1082. 
 
§ 652. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 359 
 
 5. Tetrameter: 
 
 τις νιν άνθρώπων τεκεν ; ποιας δ’ άποσπασθεϊσα φυτλας, 
 
 — - pj nc i Pytlmg., 9, 33. 
 
 κλεινός Αίακοΐι λόγος , κλεινά δε και ναυσικλυτός, 
 
 — 3 — w — w — Pind. Frag. Istli., 4,1. 
 
 § 652. Logxcedic Verse. — Dactyls and trochees to¬ 
 gether formed a simple rhythm, which, from its similarity 
 to the rhythm of common speech, was called logaocdic 
 (λογαοί&κυς). The same was true of anapaests and iambi. 
 Hence there are two kinds of logaocdic verse, 
 
 a. the dactylic logaocdic; 
 l·. the anapaestic logaoedic. 
 
 1. Dactylic Logaoedic Verse. 
 
 This may consist of only two feet, but never more than 
 six. In case of more than one dactyl, the dactyls are never 
 separated. The trochees may be arranged together before 
 or after the dactyls, or separated, and stand part before and 
 part after, but never between them. 
 
 1. One dactyl and one trochee— Adonic Verse : 
 πλησίον " Αιδας , ~ w — Elir. Ale., 268. 
 
 τούτον, στόμα , pTxpov‘,~ | — - ^ ^ (same with anacrusis), Pind. 
 
 01., 9, 36. 
 
 2. One dactyl and two trochees— Pherecratean : 
 
 εύπατριδάν τ’ άρωγαί , — w — "" ~ (1st form), Soph. El., 859. 
 δαρόν ουκ άτιόνητοι , — ·-' — ^ ~ (2d form), Soph. El., 1065. 
 
 η πόλις η φίλων, — ^ ^ ^ — (1st form catalectic), Eur. Med., 847. 
 
 εντί τρανματίαι, — ^ ^ ~ - (2d form catalectic), Pind. Frag., 141 
 
 (208). 
 
 κακά νιν ελοιτο μοίρα, w | — ~ w ~ ~ ~ (1st form with anacrusis, 
 
 parcemiac ), Soph. (Ed. Tyr., 887. 
 
 και τό πριν επαρκέσει, - | — ~ w _ _ (i s i f 0 rm catalectic with 
 
 anacrusis), Soph. Antig., 612. 
 
 3. One dactyl and trochaic pcnthemim —Glyconic : 
 
 ημενος ον φρόνημά πως, - — (l s l form), iEscll. Sup., 94. 
 
 δωσονσ άντιφύνονς δόκας, — ^ w — ^ — (2d form), Soph. El., 
 
 248. 
 
360 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 652. 
 
 φώτα βάντα πανσαγίφ, — - — - (3d form), Soph. Antig., 
 
 107. 
 
 ξνμμάρτυρας νμμ επικτώμαι , — | — w ^ — (i s £ f orm with 
 
 anacrusis), Soph. Antig., 84G. 
 
 4. One dactyl and three trochees: 
 
 και π αραμειβόμεσθ’ άδέρκτως, ~ ~ — — 3 Soph. (Ed. Col. ? 
 
 130. 
 
 στ'εγειν ; η τι Χέγειν προς άνδρ υπόπταν ; | ~ ~ — w ~' w 
 
 (same with basis), Phalacean, Soph. Phil., 136. 
 
 5. One dactyl and four trochees— Sapphic (Jiendeca- 
 syllable): 
 
 παϊ Αίος , δοΧόπΧοκε , Χίσσομαί σε, — — — w ~ ^ — Sappho, 
 
 1, 2. 
 
 το δηντε κνμα των προτερων δνω , ~ | ~ — — w — — (same 
 
 catalectic with anacrusis), Alcaic ( liendecasyllable ), Ale., 11). 
 
 6. Two dactyls and one trochee = dactylic trimeter cata¬ 
 lectic. 
 
 7. Two dactyls and two trochees—A lcaic ( decccsylla - 
 
 hie ): 
 
 vcii φορημεθα σνν μεΧαίνφ, ~ ^ — ^ ^ Ale., 18. 
 
 8. Two dactyls and three trochees: 
 
 ώ πόλις, ώ γενεά τάΧαινα , σε, — ~ w ^ ^ — —, g 0 pll. 
 
 El., 1413. 
 
 9. Three dactyls and two trochees —Praxillean : 
 
 avTirinrif, δ’ επι γα ττεσε τανταΧωθε'ις , ~ w — ~ ^ — ^ 
 
 Soph. Antig., 134. 
 
 Syncopated Forms. 
 
 10. Piierecratean catalectic is sometimes repeated, 
 the two making one verse. 
 
 11. Piierecratean catalectic, second form followed 
 by first form, constitutes the Asclepiadean verse. 
 
 12. The Greater Asclepiadean is the same two phe- 
 recratean verses with a choriambus between. 
 
 13. The Priapean is the glyconic and piierecratean 
 joined. 
 
652. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 361 
 
 14. The Eupolidean is a glyconic and a trochaic di¬ 
 meter catalectic. 
 
 2. Anapaestic Logaoedic Verse. 
 
 Like the dactylic logaoedic, it can never have more than 
 six feet. The arsis of both anapaest and iambus is on the 
 long syllable. 
 
 1. One anapaest and one iambus: 
 
 βοτάνα τε νιν , — ~, Pincl. Nem.> VI.,43. 
 
 2. One anapaest and two iambi: 
 
 7 ro\iv άλλ’ άνάσχου, v " ~ w ~ ~ (catalectic), Eur. Heracl., 380. 
 
 3. One anapaest and three iambi: 
 
 to t έπειτα καί to μέλλον , — — ^ (catalectic), Soph. An- 
 
 tig., 611. 
 
 4. One anapaest and four iambi: 
 
 διάπειρά τοι β ροτών έλεγχος, — — — — (catalectic), 
 
 Pind. 01., IV., 18. 
 
 5. Two anapaests and one iambus: 
 
 7 rpiv ’Ολύμπιος άγ Γ μών , ~ } pind. 01., IX., 57 
 
 6. Two anapaests and two iambi: 
 
 φόνιόν τ άπόπανσον Αιδαν , ^ v "' — (catalectic), Ellf. 
 
 Ale., 225. 
 
 7. Two anapaests and three iambi: 
 
 τον άνάλιον οίκον οίκετενοις , ν — w ^ ~ ~ ^ (catalectic), 
 
 Eur. Ale., 437. 
 
 8. Two anapaests and four iambi: 
 
 τις έφαμερίων άρηζις ; ούδ’ ίδέρχθης, ^ ^ ^ ^ — ν " — * 
 
 (catalectic), iEsch. Prom. Vine., 556. 
 
 9. Three anapaests and one iambus : 
 
 άσεβοϋσ , άδικουσί τε την πόλιν, — w ~ w Arist. 
 
 Thesm., 367. 
 
 10. Three anapaests and two iambi: 
 
 ποτέ, μέν κακόν , άλλοτ’ επ’ εσθλον έρπει , w ~ ~ w ~ ^ — — 
 
 (catalectic), Soph. Antig., 367. 
 
362 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 653. 
 
 11. Four anapaests and one iambus : 
 
 μεγάλων προσορώσα δόμοισι βλάβαν νέων , 
 
 —, _ w - Sopii. Traci]., 842. 
 
 12. Four anapassts and two iambi: 
 
 άτελέστατα yap καί άμάχανα τους θανύντας , 
 
 (catalectic), Stesich., 51. 
 
 § 653. Iambic Vebse. — The fundamental foot is the 
 iambus. The arsis falls upon the long syllable. By pro¬ 
 traction the short may become long, and accordingly a 
 spondee often replaces an iambus, but only in the odd 
 places (first, third, etc.). By resolution (§ 646) the tri¬ 
 brach may appear, and by both protraction and resolution 
 the dactyl, and by protraction and then resolution the an¬ 
 apaest. When these feet replace iambi, the anapaest has 
 its usual arsis; the others receive it upon the second syl¬ 
 lable, as follows : the tribrach - - 
 
 spondee - -, 
 dactyl - ~ 
 anapaest - - 
 
 The “ meter” is two feet. A dimeter therefore is a verse 
 of four feet, and a trimeter of six feet, and so on. This 
 measure is very common, and easily recognized. 
 
 1. Monometer, w ~ ~ “, occurs mostly in connection with 
 systems or other rhythms. 
 
 2. Dimeter, occurs frequently as a sin¬ 
 
 gle verse, and also in systems. 
 
 ομοιον ώστε ποντίαις , ~ — — Sopll. Antig., 586. 
 
 3. Trimeter, known also by the Latin name senarius , 
 
 mog £ common? being the metre 
 of the dialogue in tragedy and comedy ; e. g.: 
 
 φέρ ’ είπε δή το δεινόν, εί yap τώνδέ μοι 
 
 μεΊζόν τι λέξεις , ούκ άν άντείποιμ’ ετι. — Soph. El., 876, 377. 
 
 καλώς δέ σώσαι παίδα κευκλεώς θανεϊν. 
 
 μόνος yap αύτοΊς ησθα , κουτις ελπίς ήν 
 
 σου κατθανόντος άλλα φιτνσην τέκνα. — Eur. x\lc., 292, 293, 294. 
 
§ 657. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 363 
 
 όρώ, Τίρομηβεί /, και παραινεσαι γε σοι 
 
 θεΧω τά Χψστα , καίπερ υντι ποικίΧφ. — ^Escll. Prom. Vine., 315, 316. 
 
 The caesura is commonly in the third foot, sometimes in 
 the fourth, rarely at the end of the third, and sometimes is 
 wanting. 
 
 § 654. Scazon. —The satirists often substituted a spondee 
 for the last iambus of the trimeter. The rhythmical break 
 had a humorous effect. The verse was then called claudus , 
 lame, or scazon , hobbling. 
 
 § 655. Ischiorrhogic (limping) verse was iambic tripody 
 in which spondees occurred irregularly in the second or 
 third place. 
 
 § 656. Syncopated forms in each kind of iambic verse 
 also occur. 
 
 § 657. Anapaestic Verse. —The fundamental foot is the 
 anapaest, which is the reverse of the dactyl, as the iambus 
 is of the trochee. The arsis falls on the long syllable. 
 By contraction of the two shorts into one long, a spondee 
 may replace an anapaest, and by contraction of the two 
 shorts and resolution of the long a dactyl often occurs. 
 Sometimes, also, by the resolution of the long, a proce- 
 leusmatic may be used. The arsis in such case fails 
 on the last syllable of the spondee, —-, 
 on the second syllable of the dactyl, - ~ and 
 on the third of the proceleusmatic, - - 3 
 The meter” consists of two feet. Monometers and tripo- 
 dies are used, also the tetrameter (catalectic in Aristopha¬ 
 nes), but the most common are the following. 
 
 1. Dimeter, the principal element in anapaestic systems: 
 
 τί σν τ τρυς μεΧάθροις ; τί συ τ£δε 7 τοΧέϊς, ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 ΦοΊβ' ; άδικε Ίς αύ τιμάς ενερων, ~ w , Eur. Ale., 29, 30. 
 
 2. Dimeter catalectic, Parcemiac, which always forms 
 the close of an anapaestic system: 
 
 αυτά ττροθανεΊν ΤΙεΧίου τ τάϊς, ^ w — w .Eur. Ale., 37. 
 
364 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 658. 
 
 § 658. Anapaestic systems are classed as strict and free. 
 
 a. The strict system consists of dimeters, sometimes interrupted by 
 monometers, with a paroemiac (which is often preceded imme¬ 
 diately by a monometer) for a close. The verse itself also is so 
 far restricted as never to allow a proceleusmatic, or even a dac¬ 
 tyl followed by an anapaest. 
 
 l·. The free system consists of dimeters concluded not only by a 
 paroemiac, but having a paroemiac at the beginning and middle, 
 and sometimes repeated. The verse also w T ill often consist of 
 spondees only, or of dactyls only. 
 
 § 659. Choriambic Verse. —The choriambus occurs 
 only by syncope (§ 647, 4) in dactylic, logaoedic, and ana¬ 
 paestic verses. There are thus formed, however, a chori¬ 
 ambic dimeter, trimeter, and tetrameter. 
 
 1. Dimeter: 
 
 οντε βαθειάν κυλικών , — ν " ^ — , Sopll. Ajax, 1200. 
 
 νείμεν εμο'ι τερφιν όμιλεϊν, — — (hypercatalectic), 
 
 Soph Ajax 1201 
 
 2. Trimeter: 
 
 εί δε κνρεί τις πελας οιωνοπόλων , — ~ ^ — , ^Tlsch. 
 
 Sup., 56. 
 
 3. Tetrameter : 
 
 c hnw μεν ονν , δεινά ταράσσει σοφός οίωνοθετας , 
 
 — -__-__-^ ~ goph. (Ed. Ty r., 483. 
 
 άλλα δ’ επ’ άλλοις επενώμα στνφελίζων μεγας Αρης , 
 
 — ^ ^-~ -~ - (hypercatalectic), Soph. 
 
 Antig., 139. 
 
 § 660. Cretic Verse. —Syncopation (§ 647, 4) in tro¬ 
 chaic, iambic, and logaoedic rhythms gives rise to cretic 
 rhythms. There are cretic rhythms proper, in which the 
 creticus is the fundamental foot. By resolution a first or 
 fourth paeon (- ~ ~ w -) may replace a creticus. 
 The arsis occurs upon the first syllable, with a slighter 
 ictus on the third. The following are the common forms: 
 
661. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 365 
 
 1. Dimeter (occurs singly and in connection with other 
 rhythms): 
 
 ώ κτανόντας τε και , ~ ~-~ Soph. Antig., 12G3. 
 
 τί δήτ εμού βλεπτύν, ή, w | - w - w ~ (with anacrusis), Soph. 
 
 (Ed. Tyr., 1337. 
 
 2. Trimeter : 
 
 ψράζε τα δνσπΧάνφ παρθένψ , - ^Esch. Prom. 
 
 Vine., 626. 
 
 3. Tetrameter (often used by comic poets): 
 
 αυτόματα τ τάντ άγαθιί τιρδέ γε πορίζεται , 
 
 - - Arist. Ach., 978. 
 
 4. Pentameter: 
 
 οΐ εχει σπεισάμενος εμπορικά χρήματα διεμποΧάν , 
 
 - -- ----- — Arist. Ach., 972. 
 
 § 661. Ionic Verse. —The fundamental foot is the Ionic 
 a minore (-' w ), with the arsis on the first long. It 
 gives the verse a “character of discord and wild enthusi¬ 
 asm” (Munk), and is used in erotic poetry, and Dionysiac 
 hymns, and songs to Cybele; also in the choruses of dram¬ 
 atists. 
 
 1. Dimeter: 
 
 μετά μεν πλείονα τίκτει , , 
 
 σψετέρα ο εΐκότα γέννφ, (1st form, pure), jEsch. 
 
 Again., 734, 735. 
 
 τί με φεύγεις τον γέροντα ; ~-- — - (2d form, polyschema- 
 
 tist ), Anacr., 64. 
 
 δότε μοι λύρην Όμηρον , — — — — — — — (3d form, with anacla- 
 
 sis), Anacreontic, Anacr., 48. 
 
 a. In the polyschematist (many-formed) the quantities are preserved, 
 but assume the trochaic form in the second foot. 
 
 l·. Anaclasis (άνάκΧασις, a breaking) occurs by an interchange of 
 the last long of the first foot with the first short of the second 
 foot. The form thus produced is the most common of the three. 
 It is chiefly the form of the Anacreontic verse. 
 
366 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 662. 
 
 2. Trimeter : 
 
 από μοι θανεη> γενοιτ. ου yap άν αΧΧ>/, 
 
 ^ ^ ^-~ - (anaclasis), Anacr., 48. 
 
 3. Tetrameter : 
 
 7 ταρακλίνασ επεκρανεν Οε γάμου πικράς τελευτάς , 
 
 -~ - - - -~ ~-, yEscli. Again., 721. 
 
 a. Tlie tetrameter catalectic is tlie Gallianibic verse, the verse of 
 the songs of the priests of Cybele. 
 
 § 662. Dochmiac Rhythms.— A dochmius consists of 
 a bacchius and an iambus, w w ~. The arsis falls upon 
 the first long, with a secondary ictus upon the last long. 
 By production of the shorts and resolution of the longs, a 
 great variety of forms was produced, which were freely 
 used. 
 
 1. Monometer : 
 
 άψυκτοι κάνες, w — ~ w ~, Soph. El., 1388. 
 ίώ δυσπότμων , ~ — Soph. Antig., 8G9. 
 
 στερεά θανατόεντ\ "" — , Soph. Antig., 1262. 
 
 'Ελλάνωι; άναξ , — “ ~ v "' — , Soph. El., 483. 
 
 εϊδομεν a θρηνείς, ~~ ^ w ~ — — , Sopll. El., 853. 
 τους εμός ’ίδε πατήρ, — ν " — ^ ? Soph. El., 205. 
 
 2. Dimeter : 
 
 το ΰυσεριστον αίμα φυσών ”Αρης , ^ w — w — — ·— ? Soph. 
 
 El., 1385. 
 
 3. Trimeter : 
 
 ωμοί εμάς άτας, οίος άρ’ αιμάχθης, άφαρκτος φίλων, 
 
 ~ w ~-1 — ---- | ~- w —, Soph. Ajax, 010. 
 
 § 663. Bacchic Rhythms. —The bacchius, as the fun¬ 
 damental foot of a verse, was not freely used. The fol¬ 
 lowing are examples : 
 
 l. Monometer: 
 
 ζνναινε7ς, w , 
 
 τί μήν ον ; ν " ~ — , Soph. El., 1279,1280. 
 
§ 663. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 367 
 
 2. Dimeter: 
 
 7 τεττράσθαι πεττράσθαι, — “ — — , Aristopll. Acli., 735. 
 
 3. Tetrameter : 
 
 τις αχώ, τίς όδμά πηοσεπτα μ άφεγγης, 
 
 --~- w -, ASsch. Prom. Vine., 115. 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 άάω , Aor. Pass. (Horn.) άάσθην , 
 § 298. 
 
 άγαμαι , § 312, 8; § 328, 2. 
 αγγέλλω, § 252; ρρ. 122,123. 
 άγείρω, § 253 ; § 257, D. 
 άγροχα, § 279. 
 άγινέω , § 323, D. 39. 
 άγννμι, § 319,13 · §275,2; §330,1. 
 άγω, 2d Aor., § 257 — 1st Aor., 
 § 268, D.—Perf., § 279. 
 άδησω, § 322, D. 23. 
 
 $δω, § 266. 
 
 άέξω, § 322, D. 13. 
 άεσα, § 327, D. 17. 
 άημι , § 313, D. 3. 
 
 αίϋίομαι , § 301,1; § 326,10, and D. 
 
 — Fut. Horn., § 261, D. 
 αΐνεω , § 301, 3. 
 αιννμαι, § 319, D. 27. 
 αίρέω, § 327,1; § 275, D. 1. 
 αίρω, § 262; § 270, Obs. 
 αισθάνομαι , § 322,11. 
 αίσθομαι , § 322, 11. 
 αισχύνω , § 286, D. 
 
 άκάχημαι , § 319, D. 30. 
 άκαχίζω , § 319, D. 30. 
 άκαχμένος , § 47, D. 
 άκ'εομαι , § 301, 1. 
 άκήκοα , § 275,1 ; § 280, Obs. 
 άκηχίδατο , § 287, ϊ). 
 ακούω, Perf. Act, § 275, 1; § 280, 
 Obs.—Perf. Mid., § 288. 
 άκροάομαι, Fut., § 261. 
 
 1 ά\ά\ημαι, § 275, D. 1. 
 άΧαΧκον, § 326, D. 11. 
 άΧάομαι, § 328, 2; § 275, D. 1. 
 
 άλα7τά£ω, § 251, D.—Fut., § 261, D, 
 άΧδαίνω, άΧδησκω , § 324, D. 30. 
 άΧεασθαι, άΧεύασθαι, § 269, D. 
 άΧειφω, § 275,1, ρ. 120. 
 άλε^, άΧημεναι, § 325, D. 
 άΧέξω, § 326,11. 
 άλέω, § 301, 1. 
 άΧθομαι, § 326, D. 39. 
 άΧίσκομαι , § 324,17— Perf., § 275 > 2 
 — 2d Aor., § 316,12. 
 άΧιταίνω, § 323, D. 37. 
 άλλάσσω, Perf., § 279, Obs. 2—26 
 Aor., § 294, Obs. 
 
 ίίΧΧομαι, § 252—1st Aor., § 270, Obs. 
 
 —2d Aor., § 316, D. 32. 
 άΧμενος, § 316, D. 32. 
 άΧνσκω, § 324, 27. 
 άΧφάνω, § 323, D. 38. 
 άΧώναι, § 324,17; § 316,12. 
 αμαρτάνω, § 322,12, and D. 
 άμβΧίσκω, § 324, 18. 
 άμεναι, § 312, D. 13. 
 άμιΧΧάομαι, § 328, 2. 
 άμπεχομαι, άμπισχνονμαι, § 323, 36. 
 άμπΧακίσκω, § 324, 23. 
 άμπνύνθη, § 298, D. 
 άμπνυτο, § 316, D. 29. 
 άμφι'ενννμι, § 319,5, and D. — Auglll., 
 § 240. 
 
 αμφιώ, § 319, 5. 
 άναβιώσκομαι, § 324, 11. 
 άναγιγνώσκω, § 329, D. 
 άναλίσκω , άναΧώσω, § 324, 19. 
 άνδάνο), § 322, 23, and D. — Imp., 
 § 237, D. 
 
 άνεχομαι, Allgm., § 240. 
 
368 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 άνειργα , § 279, Obs. 1. 
 άνεφχα, § 275,2; § 279, Obs. 1. 
 άνηνοθεν , § 275, D. 2. 
 άνοίγννμι, Perf., § 275, 2; § 275, 
 Obs. 1. 
 
 ανοίγω, Augm., § 237. 
 άνορθόω , Augm., § 240. 
 άντιβολέω, Augm., § 239. 
 άνυμι, § 319, D. 28. 
 ανωγα, § 317, D. 11— Perf., § 283, D. 
 απαντάω , Fut., § 266. 
 άπαυράω , § 316, D. 18. 
 άπαφίσκω , § 324, D. 33. 
 άπεϊπον , § 327,13, Obs. 
 άπεχθάνομαι , § 322, 16. 
 άπόερσα, § 270, D. 1. 
 απολαύω, Fut. Mid., § 266. 
 άποόρας, § 316, D. 18. 
 όραίρηκα , § 275, D. 1 ; § 327, D. 1. 
 άραρίσκω , § 324, D. 34— Perf., § 275, 
 D. ί. 
 
 άραρνϊα , § 324, D. 34 ; § 280, D. 
 άρεσκω, § 324,10. 
 άρηρα, § 275, D. 1; § 324, D. 34. 
 άρήροται, § 275, D. 1. 
 άρηρώς , § 280,1). 
 άρκέω, § 301, and D. 
 άρμενος , § 324, D. 34. 
 άρμόττω , § 250, Obs. — Fut., § 260,3. 
 άρν'εομαι , § 328, 2. 
 αρννμαι , § 319, D. 29. 
 άρόω, § 301,1— Perf. Pass., § 275, 
 D. 1. 
 
 άρύω,§ 301,1. 
 
 άρχω , ρ. 116 . 
 
 άσμενος , § 316, D. at end. 
 
 αόξάνω, ανζω, § 322,13, and D. 
 
 άφάσσω, § 250, D. 
 
 άφίημι, § 313, 1. 
 
 άφύσσω, Fut. and 1st Aor., § 269, D. 
 άχθομαι , § 326,12; § 328, 2. 
 άχνυμαι , § 319, D. 30 ; § 287, D. 
 
 β αδίζω, Fut. Mid., § 266. 
 βαίνω, § 321, 1, and D. — 2d Aor., 
 § 316,1, and D.—Perf., § 317,1, 
 and D.—1st Aor. Mid., § 268, D. 
 —Signif., § 329, 2. 
 βάλλω, § 254; § 255, 2, and D.; 
 
 § 316, D. 19 — Perfect, § 282; 
 § 287, D. 
 βάπτω , § 249. 
 βεβληκα , § 282 ; § 285. 
 βεβονλα , § 326, D. 14. 
 βεβρώΒω, § 324. D. 13. 
 βεβρώς, § 317, D. 16. 
 βείομαι , βεομαι , § 265, D. 
 βείω, § 316, D. 1. 
 βηφ, § 316, D. 1. 
 βιβάς, § 312, D. 14. 
 βιβρώσκω , § 324,13, and D. — Aor., 
 § 316, D. 23— Perf. Part., § 317, 
 D. 16. 
 
 βίόω, § 316,13. 
 βιώσκομαι , § 324, 11. 
 βλάβεται , § 249, D. 
 βλάπτω , § 249— Perf., § 279, 1— 
 Aor. Pass., § 299. 
 βλαστάνω , § 322, 14. 
 βλεΤο, § 316, D. 19. 
 βλησΒαι, § 316, D. 19. 
 βλίττω , § 250, Obs. 
 βλώσκω, § 324; § 51, D. 
 βοάω, Fut. Mid., § 266. 
 βόλεται, § 326,0.14. 
 βόσκω, § 326, 13. 
 
 βούλομαι , § 326,14— Augm., § 234, 
 Obs. ; § 233, D. 5, 6 ; § 328, 2. 
 βράσσω, § 250, Obs. 
 βννώ, § 323, 32, and D. 
 βώσας , § 35, D. 1. 
 
 γαρεω, § 325,1, and D. 
 γάννμαι , § 319, D. 31. 
 γέγαρεν, § 317, 2, and D. 
 γεγονα, § 327, 14. 
 γεγωνέω, § 325, D. α. 
 γεγώς, § 317, 2, and D. ; § 327, 
 D. 14. 
 
 γείρομαι , § 329, 8. 
 
 )ελάω, § 301,1— Aor. Pass., § 298— 
 Fut. Mid., § 266. 
 γενίσθαι , § 327,14. 
 γενησομαι , § 327, 14. 
 γέί'7 -o, § 316, D. 33. 
 γηθ'εω , § 325, 2. 
 
 γηράσκω , § 324, 1— Inf. Aor., § 316, 
 2, and D. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 369 
 
 γίγνομαι ( γίνομαι ), § 327,14— Perf., 
 § 317, 2, and D. 
 
 γιγνώσκω, § 324,14—Aor., § 31G, 14. 
 
 γνώναι, § 316, 14. 
 
 γνώω, § 316, 14, D. 
 
 γοάω, § 325, D. 11. 
 
 γράφω, Perf., § 278. 
 
 δαησομαι , § 326, D. 40. 
 
 δαίζω , § 251, D. 
 
 δαίννμι, § 319, D. 32. 
 
 δαινΰτο , § 318, D. ; § 319, D. 32. 
 
 £α«ω, § 253, D. — Perf., § 330, D. 9. 
 
 δάκνω , § 321, 8. 
 
 δαμείω , § 293, D. 
 
 δάμνημι. § 312, D. « — Subi. ΑθΓ. 
 
 Pass., § 293, D. 
 δαρθάνω , § 322,15, and D. 
 δατέομαι , § 325, D. δ— 1st ΑθΓ. Inf., 
 § 269, ί). 
 δέατο , § 312,14 δ. 
 δέγμαι , § 273, D. 
 
 £!<W, § 324, D. 28; § 326, D. 40. 
 δεδάηκα , § 326, D. 40. 
 δέδεγμαι, § 318, D. 
 δέδηχα , § 321, 8. 
 δεδια , § 317, 5, and D. 
 δέδμημαι, § 312, D. ίϊ. 
 δέδοικα, § 317, 5, and D. 
 δέδρομα , § 327, D. 11. 
 δειδέχαται , § 318, D. 
 δείκννμι, § 318, 2 and 4, and D. 
 δεΊσαι, § 317, 5— Augm., § 234, D.; 
 §77, D. 
 
 § 318, D. 
 
 δερκομαι^ 257,D.; §59,D.; §328,2. 
 δένομαι (δέομαι), § 326, D. 15 ; § 328,2. 
 δέχθαι, § 316, D. 34. 
 δέχομαι, Perfect, § 273, D.—Aorist, 
 § 316, D. 34; § 328,4. 
 
 $£ω,§ 301, 2; § 244, Obs. 1. 
 δέω, δέομαι, § 326, 15. 
 δηζομαι, § 321, 8. 
 διαιτάιο Augm., § 240. 
 διαλέγομαι, Perfect, § 274, Exc. ; 
 § 328, 2. 
 
 διδάσκω, § 324, 28, and D.—Aor., 
 § 326, D. 40. 
 δίδημι, § 313, 2. 
 
 Q 
 
 δίδωμι, § 305, and D.; § 307; § 308 
 —Aor., § 310—Fut., § 310, D. 
 διδράσκω , § 324, 2—Aor., § 316, 3, 
 and D. 
 
 δίεσαν, § 313, D. 4. 
 δίζημαι, δίζω, § 313, D. 5. 
 διψάω, § 244, 2. 
 διώκω, § 338, D. 
 δοάσσατο , § 312, D. 14 δ. 
 δοκέω, § 325, 3. 
 δονπέω, § 325, D. C. 
 δραμονμαι , § 327, 11. 
 δρατός , § 300, D. 
 δράω, Aor. Pass., § 298. 
 δύναμαι, § 312, 9— Augm., § 234, 
 Obs. — Accent of Subj. and Opt., 
 § 309 ; § 328, 2. 
 
 δύω, δννω, § 321, 7, and D.; § 301, 
 4—1st Aor. Mid., § 268, D.—2d 
 Aor,, § 316,16, and D.—Signif., 
 § 329, 4. 
 
 εαγα, § 275,2; § 319,13. 
 εαδα, § 322, Γ). 23. 
 έάλων, § 316,12; § 324,17. 
 έάνδανον, § 237, D. 
 έαζα, § 319, 13. 
 εαται, ε'ίαται, § 315, D. 2. 
 εάω, Augm., § 236. 
 έβρων, § 324, D. 13. 
 εγδούπησα, § 325, D. C. 
 εγείρω, 2d Aor., § 257, D. — Perfect, 
 § 275,1; § 317, D. 12; § 330,2. 
 εγοον, § 325, D. τι. 
 έγρετο, § 257, D. 
 
 έγρηγορα, § 275,1; § 317, D. 12. 
 
 έγρηγόρθασι, § 317, Γ). 12. 
 
 εδδεισα, § 234, D. 
 
 έδηδα, εδήδοται , § 327, D. 4. 
 
 εδμεναι, § 315, D. 3 ; § 327, D. 4. 
 
 έδομαι, § 265 ; § 327, 4. 
 
 εδραθον, § 322, D. 15. 
 
 εδρακον, § 257, D. 
 
 εδραμον, § 327, 11. 
 
 έείσατο, § 314, D. 1; § 327, D. 8. 
 
 εέρχατο, § 287, D. 
 
 ΐέσσατο, § 269, D. ; § 319, D. 5. 
 
 'έζομαι , § 251 δ; § 326,21. 
 
 έηνδανον , § 237, ϊ). 
 
 2 
 
370 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 εθεΧω. See 6έ\ω. 
 
 εθίζω , Augm., § 236— Perf., § 278. 
 
 εθρεζα, § 327, D. 11. 
 
 ειδον, § 327, 8 , and D. 
 
 εικάθω , § 338, D. 
 
 ε7κε, είκτον, § 317, D. 7. 
 
 ε/λέω, § 325, D. cl, 
 
 είΧηΧουθα , § 40, D. 5 § 317, D. 13; 
 § 327, D. 2. 
 
 εϊ\?/ 0 α, § 274, Exc.; § 322, 25. 
 εί'λ^χα, § 274, Exc.; § 322, 27. 
 είλοχα, § 274, Exc.; § 279. 
 είλον, § 327,1. 
 
 εϊλω, § 253, D. —1st Aor., § 270, 
 D. i. 
 
 είμαι, § 319, D. 5. 
 
 έίμαρται , § 274, Exc. 
 
 εΐμί, § 315,1, and D. 
 
 εΊμι, § 314,1, and D.; § 327, 2. 
 
 είνυον , § 319, D. 5. 
 
 είξασε, § 317, 7. 
 
 εΐπον, § 327, 13 ; Imper. Accent, 
 § 333,12. 
 
 ε’ΐργνυμι , ε'ίργω, § 319, 15, and D. 
 ε’ίργω , Perf. and Pluperf., § 287, D.; 
 § 338, D. 
 
 είρηκα , § 274, Exc.; § 327,13. 
 είρομαι , § 326, D. 16. 
 ει’ρυαται , § 314, D. 2. 
 εφω, 1st Aor., § 270, D. 3—Perf. and 
 Pluperf. Mid., § 275, D. 2; § 327, 
 D. 13. 
 
 είσα , § 269, D. 
 είσάμην , § 314, D. 1. 
 εΐσκω , § 324, D. 35. 
 ε’ίσομαι , § 314, D. 1. 
 εί'ωθα, § 275, 2; § 278. 
 εκεκΧετο , § 61, D.; § 257, D. 
 εκιον , § 319, D. 34. 
 εκκΧησιάζω, Auglll., § 239, Exc. 
 ΙκΧηθάνω , § 322, D. 26. 
 εκρησα , § 319, D. 1. 
 εκταν , § 316, D. 4. 
 εΧάμφθην , § 322, D. 25. 
 ΐλαυι/ω, § 321, 2 , and D. — Perfect, 
 § 275, 1— Pluperf., § 287, D.— 
 Put., § 263. 
 
 ίλΙγχω, Perf. Mid., § 275,1; § 286, 
 Obs. 
 
 ελε Tv, § 327, 1. 
 
 εΧεύσομαι , § 327, 2. 
 
 εΧησα , § 322, D. 26. 
 
 εΧΐ]Χάδατο , § 287, D. ; § 321, D. 2. 
 
 εΧήΧνθα, § 327, 2. 
 
 ελθεΊν, § 327,2; § 333,12. 
 
 έΧίσσω , Augm., § 236; § 250 
 
 έΧκύω , έλκω, Augm., § 236; § 301,1. 
 
 ελττω, Perf., § 275, D. 2. 
 
 ελσα, § 270, D. 1; § 325, D. ίΖ. 
 
 εμεμηκον, § 283, D. 
 
 ε/εέω, § 301, 1. 
 
 εμμεναι , § 315, D. 1. 
 
 εμμορα , § 274, D. 
 
 εμνημνκα , § 275, D. 1. 
 
 εμοΧον, § 324, 12. 
 
 ivaipoj , Augm., § 239, Exc. 
 
 ενάντιοί)μαι , Auglll., § 239, ExC. ; 
 
 § 328, 2. 
 ενασσα , § 329, D. 
 ενδυνεω , §'321, D. 7. 
 ενείκαι (ενείκοι), § 327, D. 12. 
 ενένιπον , § 257, D. 
 ενεττω , § 327, D. 13. 
 ενηνοθεν , § 275, D. 2. 
 ενηνοχα , § 327, 12. 
 ενήνεγμαι, § 327, 12. 
 ενίτττω, § 250, D. ; § 257, D. 
 ενίσπω, § 327, D. 13. 
 ενίσσω , § 250, D. 
 εννεττε , § 327, D. 13. 
 εννυμι, § 319, 5, and D. 
 ένοχΧέω, Augm., § 240. 
 εοίκα, § 317, 7, and D. 
 εολττα, § 275, D. 2. 
 εοργα, § 275, D. 2 ; § 327, D. 3. 
 εορτάζω , Augm., § 237. 
 εττανρίσκομαι , § 324, 24, and D. 
 επηνρον, § 324, D. 24. 
 εττιεσασθαι , § 319, 5. 
 επίσταμαι , § 312, 10 — Accent of 
 Subj. and Opt., § 309; § 328, 2. 
 επΧητο , § 312, D.jf. 
 έπομαι , § 327, 5, and D.—Augm., 
 § 236. 
 
 επορον , § 285, D. 
 επραθον, § 257, D. 
 επτην , § 316, 5. 
 επώχατο , § 327, D. 6 . 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 371 
 
 εραμαι , § 312,11. 
 ίράω , Aor. Mid., § 301, D. 
 εργάζομαι, Augm., § 236. 
 ί'ογαθον, § 319, D. 15. 
 ερδω, § 327, 3, and Β. 
 ερείπω, § 329, D. 
 
 ερ'εσσω , § 250, Obs. — Fut., § 260, 3. 
 
 ερεΰγομαι , § 323, D. 40. 
 
 ερηρέδαται , § 287, D. 
 
 ερπνζω , έρπω, Allgm., § 236. 
 
 ερράδαταε, § 287, D. 
 
 ερρω, § 326, 17. 
 
 ίρρωγα, § 278; § 319,24. 
 
 ερυγγάνω, § 323, D. 40. 
 
 ερνκω , 2d Aor., § 257, D. 
 
 ερνσθαι , § 314, D. 2. 
 
 ερυω, Aor., § 301, D. 
 
 ερχαται , § 319, D. 15. 
 
 έρχομαι , § 327, 2. 
 
 ίρώ, § 327,13. 
 
 έσ 6 >/ω, εσθω, § 327,4, and D. ; § 315, 
 D. 3. 
 
 εσκλην, § 316, 10 . 
 
 εσκον, § 337, D. 
 εσπεισμαι , § 286, 1, Obs. 
 εσπόμην , § 327, 5. 
 εσπον , § 327, D. 13. 
 εσπωμαι , § 327, D. 5. 
 εσσαι, εσσαρ, § 269, D. 
 εσσυμαι , § 274, D. 
 εσταμεν , § 317, 4. 
 έστεώς , § 317,1). 4. 
 εστηζεο , § 291 ; § 311. 
 εστεάω, Allgm., § 236. 
 ετάθην , § 298. 
 ετάφην. See θάττΓω. 
 ετορον , § 326, D. 44. 
 εναΰον , | 322, D. 23. 
 ευ£ ω , § 326,18. 
 ίύκτίμενος , § 316, D. 25. 
 ευρίσκω, § 324, 25 ; § 333,12. 
 εχεα, § 269. 
 εχευα , § 269,1). 
 
 εχω, § 327,6, and D.—Augm., § 236 
 — Aor. Imper., § 316,11. 
 εψω, § 326,19, and D. 
 εωθα, § 275, D. 2. 
 εωμεν , § 312, D. 13. 
 εφνοχόει , § 237, D. 
 
 ε>ξα, § 319,19. 
 έώρων, § 237. 
 
 ζάω, § 244, 2. 
 ζεΰγννμι, § 319, 16. 
 ζέω, § 301,1. 
 ζώννυμι , § 319, 9. 
 
 V, § 312,1. 
 ήβάσκω , § 324, 3. 
 ήγαγον, § 257. 
 ήγερ&θοντο , § 338, D. 
 
 ?Ja, $εεν, § 314. 
 
 § 317, D. 6. 
 ηειρα, § 270, D. 3. 
 ηερ'εθονται , § 338, D. 
 ΐμκτο, § 317, D. 7. 
 
 »)(ca, § 313,1. 
 ηκαχον , § 319, D. 30. 
 ηλιτον , § 323, D. 37. 
 ήλλάγην, § 294, Obs. 
 ηλυθον , § 327, D. 2. 
 ήλων, § 316,12; § 324,17. 
 ?)μαι, § 315, 2, and D. 
 ημβλωσα , ήμβλωκα , § 324, 18, 
 ημβροτον , § 322, D. 12. 
 ημί, § 312,1. 
 ημπισχον , § 323, 36. 
 ημπλακον , § 324, 23. 
 ήμΰναθον, § 338, D. 
 ημνω, Perf., § 275, D. 1. 
 ήμφίεσα, § 319, 5. 
 ήν. See ει’/εί and ημί. 
 ηναρον , § 239, Exc. 
 ηνεγκ-ον,-α , § 327, 12. 
 ηνεικα , § 327,12, D. 
 ήνειχόμην, § 240. 
 ήνίπαπον , § 257, D. 
 ηνντο , § 319, D. 28. 
 ηνωγον , § 283, D. 
 ήνώρθονν , § 240. 
 ήνωχλονν , § 240. 
 ί)ξα, § 319, D. 13. 
 ηπαφον, § 324, D. 33. 
 ηρατο , § *319, D. 29. 
 ηραρον , § 324, D. 34. 
 ηριπον , § 329, D. 
 ήρόμην, § 326, 16. 
 ηρρηκα , § 326, 17. 
 
372 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 ή ρύ κακόν, § 257, D. 
 
 7)<ρίει, § 313,1. 
 νχα, § 279,1. 
 
 θάλλω, Perf., § 277, D. 
 θανεΊν, § 324,4. 
 θάπτω, § 54 c ; § 249; § 298. 
 θέλω ( ίθέλω ), § 326, 20. 
 θέρομαι, Fut., § 262, D. 
 θέω, § 248— Fut., § 260, 2. 
 θιγγάνω, § 322, 24. 
 
 0λάω, § 301, 1. 
 
 θνήσκω, § 324, 4— Perf., § 317, 3— 
 Perf. Part., § 276, D.—Fut. Perf., 
 § 291. 
 
 θόρνυμαι, § 324, D. 15. 
 θρεκτέον, § 327,11. 
 θρύπτω, § 54 c. 
 
 θρώσκω, § 324,15, and D.; § 59,1. 
 θύω, § 301, 2; Aor. Pass., § 53 l·. 
 
 ιάομαι , § 328, 4. 
 
 Ιαύω, § 327, D. 17. 
 tfl,§ 327,8; § 333,12. 
 ϊδμεν, § 317, D. 6 . 
 ιδρύω, Aor. Pass., § 298, D. 
 ϊδνΊα, § 317, D. 6 . 
 ιζάνω, Ίζω, § 322,17. 
 ϊ ζομαι, § 326, 21. 
 
 ίρμι, § 313,1, and D.—Perf., § 311. 
 ικάνω, § 323, 33. 
 ΐκμενος, § 323, D. 33. 
 ικνέομαι, § 323, 33, and D.—Aor., 
 § 268, D. 
 
 ϊλάσκομαι, § 324,5—Imperat.,§ 312, 
 D. 15. 
 
 ϊμάσσω, § 250, D. 
 
 Ιζον, § 268, D.; § 323, D. 33. 
 ΐσκε, § 324, D. 36. 
 
 'ίστημι, § 305, and D.—Perf., § 317,4. 
 
 καθεδοΰμαι, § 326, 21. 
 καθεύδω, § 326,18—Augm., § 240. 
 κάθημαι , § 315, 2—Augm., § 240. 
 καθίζω, § 326, 21—Augm., § 240. 
 καθίστημι, § 329,1, Obs. 
 καίννμαι, § 319, D. 33. 
 καίω, § 35, Obs.; § 253, Obs.—Fut., 
 § 260, 2—1st Aor., § 269, D. 
 
 καλέω, § 301, 3. 
 καλύπτω, § 249 ; p. 120. 
 κάμνω, § 321, 9, and D.—Perfect, 
 § 282. 
 
 κάμπτω, Perf. Mid., § 286,1, Obs. 
 κατ?]γορίω, Augm., § 239. 
 καύσω, § 260, 2. 
 κάω. See καίω, 
 κείαι, § 269, D. 
 κείμαι, § 314, 2, and D., Obs. 
 κείρω, Fut., § 262, D. 
 κεκαδησω, κέκαδον, § 326, D. 41. 
 κέκασμαι, § 319, D. 33. 
 κέκμηκα, § 282. 
 κεκορηώς, § 319, D. 6. 
 κεκοτηώς, § 277, Γ). 
 κέκτημαι, § 274, Exc. ; § 289. 
 κελαδέω, § 325, D. e. 
 κελεύω, Perf. Mid., § 288 — Aorist 
 Pass., § 298. · 
 
 κέλλω, Fut., § 262, Exc. 
 κέλομαι, Aor., § 257, D. 
 κεντέω, § 325, D.jf 
 κεράνννμι, § 319,1, and D.— Subj. 
 
 Mid., § 312, D. 16. 
 κερδαίνω, Perf, § 322, Obs. 1— Aor., 
 § 270, Obs. 
 κέσκετο, § 337, D. 
 κέχανδα, § 323, D. 41. 
 κεχαρησω, § 326, D. 38. 
 κεχάροντο, § 326, D. 38. 
 κέχυκα, § 281. 
 κηαι, § 269, D. 
 κηδω, § 326, D. 41. 
 κηρύσσω, § 250— Perf, § 279. 
 κικλησκω, § 324, D. 31. 
 κίννμαι (κινέω),§ 319, D. 34. 
 κίρνημι, § 312, D. 16 l·. 
 κιχάνω, § 322, 18. 
 κίχημι, § 313, D. 6. 
 κιών, § 319, D. 34. 
 
 κλάζω, § 251, Obs.—Perf, § 276, D. 
 κλαίω , i 326,22; § 253, Obs.—Fut., 
 § 260, 2 . 
 κλείω, § 301, 1. 
 
 κλείω, κληω, Perf. Mid., § 288. 
 κλέπτω, Perfect, § 279—Aor. Pass., 
 § 295. 
 
 κλίνω, Perf, § 282. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 373 
 
 κλύω, Aor., § 31G, D. 27. 
 κνάω, § 244, 2. 
 κομίζω , Fut., § 263; ρ. 118. 
 κόπτω, §249— Perf, §279; §277,D. 
 κορένννμι, § 319, 6, and D. 
 κορέω , Aor., § 301, D. 
 κορνσσω , § 250, D. — Perfect Pass. 
 Part., § 286, D. 
 
 κοτέω, § 301, D. — Perfect Part, 
 § 277, D. 
 
 κράζω, § 251—Perf.,§ 278; § 317, 8. 
 κρεμαμαι , § 319, 2 ; § 312,12—Ac¬ 
 cent of Subj. and Opt., § 309. 
 κρεμάνννμι , § 319, 2. 
 κρεμάω , § 319, D. 2. 
 κρημναμαι , § 312, D. 16 C. 
 κρίνω, § 253, Obs. — Perf., § 282; 
 § 286, Obs. 
 
 κρούω, Perf. Mid., § 288. 
 κρύπτω , § 249. 
 
 κτάομαι, Perf, § 274, Exc.; § 289. 
 κτείνω , Aor., § 316,4, and D. 
 κτ'εωμεν , § 316, D. 4. 
 κτίζω, § 316, D. 25. 
 κτίνννμι, § 319,17. 
 κτνπ'εω, § 325, D. 8 0. 
 κνίσκω , § 324, 21. 
 κνν'εω , § 323, 34, and D. 
 κνρεω, κύρω, § 325, 4— Fut., § 262, 
 Exc. 
 
 κΰσσα , § 323, D. 34. 
 
 λαγχάνω, § 322, 27, and D. — Perf, 
 § 274, Exc. 
 
 λαμβάνω, § 322, 25, and D. — Perf, 
 § 274, Exc. 
 
 λάρψοραι, § 322, D. 25. 
 λανθάνω, § 322, 26, and D. 
 λάζομαι , § 322, D. 27. 
 λάσκω, § 324, 29, and D. 
 λέγω, Perf, § 274, Exc.; § 279—2d 
 Aor. Mid., § 316, D. 35. 
 λείπω , § 248; § 254—Perf, § 278; 
 
 p. 120. 
 
 λεκτο , § 316, D. 35. 
 λεκτο, λέγρενος , § 316, D. 36. 
 λελαβέσθαι , § 322, D. 25. 
 λελακνΊα, § 324, D. 29. 
 λελασμαι , § 322, D. 26. 
 
 λέλαχον , § 322, D. 27. 
 λέλί;κα, § 324, 29. 
 λέλογχα, § 322, D. 27. 
 λελίνο, § 289, D. 
 λέζεο, § 268, D. 3. 
 
 λεΰω, § 288. 
 
 ληθω, § 322, 26. 
 λρκέω, § 324, D. 29. 
 λ/'/ξοραί, § 322, 27. 
 ληψομαε, § 322, 25. 
 λίσσομαι , § 250, D. — Augm., § 
 234, D. 
 
 λόε, § 244, D. 4. 
 λόεσσα, § 269, D. 
 
 λούω, § 244,4— 1st Aor., § 269, D. 
 λύω, ρρ. 103-109; § 231; § 301, 2 
 —Opt. Perf Mid., § 289, D.— 
 Aor. Mid., § 316, D. 28. 
 
 μαθεΊν. See μανθάνω, 
 μαίομαι , § 253, D. 
 μανθάνω , § 322, 28. 
 μάρναμαι , § 312, D. 16 d. 
 μαρτνρεω , § 325, 5. 
 μαστίζω , § 251, Obs. — Fut. accord¬ 
 ing to § 260, 3. 
 μάχομαι, § 326, 23, and D. 
 ρεύω, § 326, D. 42. 
 μεθνσκω , § 324, 22. 
 μείρομαι , Perf, § 274, D. 
 μέλει, § 326, 24, and D. — Augm., 
 § 234, Obs. 
 
 μέλλω, § 326, 25—Augm., § 234, 
 Obs. 
 
 μέλομαι, § 326, 24. 
 μέματον, μέμαμεν, § 317, D. 9 ; § 326, 
 D. 26. 
 
 μέμβλεται, § 326, D. 24. 
 μέμβλωκα, § 51,1).; § 282, D.; §324, 
 D. 12. 
 
 μεμετιμένος, § 313, D. 2. 
 μέμνημαι, § 274, Exc. ; § 284, D.— 
 Subj. and Opt., § 289, D. 
 ρένω, § 326, 26, and D. 
 μερμηρίζω, § 251, D. 
 μηκάομαι, § 325, D. 0. 
 μίγννμι , § 319,18, and D.; § 327, 7. 
 μιαίνω, pp. 122, 123. 
 pT kto, § 316, D. 37. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 374 
 
 μιμίομαι , Aor. Pass., § §28,4. 
 μιμνησκω , § 824, 6 ; § 274, Exc. 5 
 § 289, D. 
 
 μίσγω , § 827, 7— Aor. Mid., § 316, 
 D. 37. 
 
 μνάομαι , § 243, D. 3 5. 
 μοΧεΊν, μοΧουμαι , § 324,12. 
 
 /«βω, § 326, 27. 
 μνκάομαι , § 325, D.^?. 
 
 ναιετάω, Contract., § 243, D. 1. 
 ναίω, § 253, D. ; § 329, D. 
 νέμω, § 326, 28. 
 νέω, § 248. 
 ν£ω, § 251, Obs. 
 
 ξέω, § 301, 1. 
 
 ζνρέω, ζΰρομαι , § 325, 6. 
 
 ξυω, Perf. Mid., § 288. 
 
 οΜα, § 275, D. 1; § 326, 29. 
 υξω, § 251; § 326,29— Perf., § 275, 
 D.l. 
 
 οίγνυμι, οίγω, § 319,19, and D. 
 olcia, § 317, 6, and D. 
 οίδάνω, οίδέω, § 322, 19. 
 οίμαι, § 244,4. 
 
 οιμώζω, § 251, Obs. — Future Mid., 
 § 266. 
 
 οίνοχοέω , Augm., § 237, D. 
 ο'ίομαι, § 326, 30, and D.—2d Sing. 
 Pres., § 233, 3. 
 
 οισε, § 268, D. 
 οέσω, § 327,12. 
 οίχνέω , § 326, D. 31. 
 οΐχομαι , § 326, 31, and D. 
 όΧεκω, § 319, D. 20. 
 όΧέσκετο, § 337, D. 
 όΧισθάνω, όΧισθαίνω, § 322, 20. 
 ΰΧΧνμι, § 319, 20, and D. — Iterat., 
 § 337, D. 
 
 δμννμι, § 319, 21, and D. 
 ομόργννμι , § 319, 22. 
 δνίνημι , § 312, 2— Accent of Subj. 
 and Opt. Aor. Mid., § 309—Re- 
 dupl., | 308. 
 δνομαι , § 314, D. 2. 
 όζύνω, Perf. Micf, § 286, Obs. 
 οπτός, § 327, 8. 
 
 δττωττα, § 275,D.l. 
 δράω, § 327, 8, and D. — Augm., 
 § 237—Perf, § 275, D.l. 
 όργαίνω, 1st Aor., § 270, Obs. 
 όρεγννμί, όρέγω , § 319 3 D. 36. 
 όρεοντο, § 319, D. 37. 
 όρμενος , § 316, D. 38. 
 όρννμι, § 319, D. 37— 2d Aor. Mid., 
 § 316, D. 38—Imperat., § 268, D. 
 όροντο , § 327, D. 8. 
 όρόω, etc., § 243, D. A 3 a. 
 υρσο , όρσεο, § 268, D.; § 316, D. 38. 
 ορύσσω , § 250—Perf.,§ 275,1; § 278. 
 όρωρα , § 319, D. 37. 
 όρωρεχαται , § 319, D. 36. 
 όρώρνχα, § 275,1; § 278. 
 οσφραίνομαι, § 322, 21, and D. 
 ούΧόμενος, § 819, D. 20. 
 ουρ'εω, Auglll., § 237. 
 ουτάω , § 316, D. 20. 
 δφείΧω, § 326, 32; § 253, Obs. 
 όφεΧΧω, 1st Aor., § 270, D. 2 ; § 253, 
 Obs. and D. 
 όφΧισκάνω, § 322, 22. 
 όχωκα , § 327, D. 6. 
 υψομαι, § 327, 8. 
 
 7 ταθεΤν. See πάσχω. 
 πάΧΧω, Aor., § 257, D. — Aor. Mid., 
 § 316, D. 40. 
 παράκειμαι, § 314, 2. 
 παρανομεω, Auglll., § 239. 
 παροινεω, Augm., § 240. 
 
 7Γ αρρησιάζομαι, Augm., § 239. 
 πάσσω, § 250, Obs.—Fut. according 
 to § 260, 3. 
 
 πάσχω, § 327, 9, and D.—Perfect, 
 § 317, D. 14. 
 πατεομαι, § 325, 7. 
 πάνω, Aor. Pass., § 298. 
 πείθω, Aor., § 257, D.—Perf, § 317, 
 D. 15 ; § 330 — Fut. and Aor. 
 Part., § 326, D. 43; p. 118. 
 πεινάω, § 244, 2. 
 πείσομαι, § 327, 9. 
 
 πεΧάζω, § 316, D. 22—Imperat. of 
 1st Aor., § 268, D. 
 πέμπω, Perf, § 279; p. 120. 
 πεπαΧών, § 257, D. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 375 
 
 πέπιθον, § 257, D. 
 
 πέιτοιθα, § 317, D. 15. 
 
 πέπομαι, § 327, 10. 
 
 πέπονθα , § 317, D. 14. 
 
 πέποσβε, § 327, D. 9 ; § 317, D. 14. 
 
 πέπρωται , § 285, D. 
 
 πέπταμαι, § 274, Exc. ; § 319, 3. 
 
 πεπτεώς, § 317, D. 17. 
 
 πεπ τηώς, § 310, D. 21. 
 
 πέπτωκα, § 274, Exc. ; § 317, D. 17; 
 
 § 327,15. 
 πέπωκα, § 327,10. 
 πέρδομαι, § 326, 33. 
 πέρθω, 2d Αογ., § 257, D. ; § 59, D. 
 
 — Inf. Aor. Mid., § 316, D. 41. 
 πέρνημι , § 312, D. e. 
 πεσεΊν, § 327,15. 
 πεσοϋμαι , § 327,15. 
 πέσσω, § 250, Obs. 
 πετάνννμι , § 319, 3. 
 πένομαι, § 326, 34— 2 d Aor., § 01 C/ 
 § 257, D. ; § 316, 5, and D. 
 πετώ , § 319, 3. 
 πενθομαι , § 322, 29. 
 πεφησομαι , § 321, D. 10. 
 πεφιδέσθαι , § 257. D. 
 πεφιδήσομαι, § 257, D. 
 πέφνον, § 257, D. 
 π'εφραδον , § 257, D. 
 πεφύασι , § 277, D. 
 
 7 τεφνζότες, § 277, D. 
 πήγννμι,§ 319,23— Aor. Mid.,§ 316, 
 D. 39 ; § 330,4. 
 πιέζω, πιεζεω, § 325, D. Λ. 
 ττΤθι, § 316,15. 
 πίΧναμαι , § 312, D. 16 y. 
 πίμπΧημι, § 308 ; § 312, 3. 
 πίμπρημι, § 308 ; § 312, 4. 
 πίνω, § 321,4 ; § 327,10— 2d Aor., 
 § 316,15, and D. 
 πίομαι , § 265; § 327,10. 
 πιπίσκω , § 324, 20 ; § 329, 7. 
 πιπράσκω, § 324, 7. 
 πίπτω, § 327,15— Perf.,§ 317, D. 17. 
 πίσω, § 324, 20. 
 πιτν'εω , πίτνω, § 323, 35. 
 πίτνημι, § 312, D. (/. 
 πιφαΰσκω, § 324, D. 32. 
 πΧάζω, § 251, Obs. 
 
 πλάσσω, § 250, Obs. — Flit., § 260, 3. 
 πλέκω, ρ. 116— Aor. Pass., § 295. 
 πλέω, § 248— Fut., § 260, 2; § 264 
 Perf. Mid., § 288. 
 πΧήθω, § 312, 3. 
 
 πΧησσω, 2d Aor. and Fut. Pass., 
 § 295—Perf., § 278. 
 πΧητο (πελάζω), § 316, D. 22. 
 πΧίιτο (πίμπΧημι), § 312, D. 3. 
 πλώω, § 316, D. 24. 
 πνέω, § 248—Fut,., § 260 2; § 264 
 — Perf. Mid., § 285, D.—Aor., 
 § 316, D. 29. 
 ποθέω , § 301, 4. 
 
 ποΧεμίζω, § 251, D.—Flit., § 261, D. 
 πονέω , § 301,4. 
 πορείν, § 285, D. 
 ποτάομαι, Pllip. Mid., § 287,1). 
 πράττω, § 250—Perf., § 279, Obs. 1. 
 πρηθω, § 312, 4. 
 
 πρίασβαι , § 316, 8—Accent of Subj. 
 
 and Opt., § 309. 
 πρίω, Perf, § 288. 
 προθέονσιν, § 305, D. 
 πτάς , § 316, 5. 
 πτέσβαι , § 257, D. 
 πτησσω, § 316, D. 21. 
 πτίσσω, § 250, Obs.—Fut., § 260, 3. 
 πτύω, § 301, 1. 
 πυθέσθαι , § 322, 29. 
 πννθάνομαι , § 322, 29, and D. 
 
 ραίνω , Perf. Mid., § 287, D. 
 ρέζω, § 327, 3. and D. 
 ρερνπωμένοΓ , § 274, D. 
 ρέω, § 248 ; § 326, 35. 
 ρηγνυμι, § 319, 24 ; § 330,5. 
 ρηθήσομαι , § 327, 13. 
 ριγέω, § 325, D. 
 ριγόω, ριγών, § 244, 3. 
 ριπτέω, ρίπτω, § 325, 8, and D. 
 ρυησομαι, § 326, 35. 
 ρϋσθαι, etc., § 314, D. 2. 
 ρώνννμι, § 319, 10. 
 
 σαλπίζω, § 251, Obs. 
 σβένννμι, § 319, 7— 2d Aor., § 316, 
 9; § 318,5. 
 
 σέβομαι, Aor. Pass., § 328, 2. 
 
376 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 σείω, Perf. Mid., § 288. 
 σενω, § 248, D.—1st Aor., § 269, D. 
 —Perf. Mid., § 274, D.; § 285,D. 
 —2d Aor. Mid., § 316, D. 30. 
 σημαίνω , Aor., § 270, Obs. 
 σηπω, § 330, 6—Aor. Pass., § 295. 
 σιγάω, Put. Mid., § 266. 
 σιωπάω, Fut, Mid., § 266. 
 σκεδάννυμι , § 319,4. 
 σκεδώ, § 319,4. 
 
 σκέλλω, Aor., § 316,10 ; § 329,6. 
 σκίδνημι, § 312, D. 16 hj § 319,4. 
 σκλήναι , § 316,10. 
 σμάω , § 244, 2. 
 
 σπάω, § 301,1— Perf. Mid., § 288. 
 σπείρω , § 253 ; ρ. 122. 
 σπείσω , § 260, 1. 
 
 σπένδω, Fut., § 260,1— Perf. Mid., 
 § 286,1, Obs. 
 σπέσθαι, § 327, 5. 
 σπουδάζω, Flit. Mid., § 266. 
 σπών , § 327, 5. 
 
 στάζω, § 251, Obs. — Fut. according 
 to § 260, 3. 
 στείβω, § 326, 36. 
 
 στελλω, Perfect, § 282— Aor. Pass., 
 § 295. 
 
 στενάζω, § 251, Obs.— Fut., § 260, 3. 
 στερίσκω, στερώ, § 324, 26, and D. 
 στέρομαι, § 324, 26. 
 στίζω, § 251, Obs.—Fut., § 260, 3. 
 στορένννμι, § 319, 8. 
 στόρνυμι , § 319, 25. 
 στρέφω, Perl. Mid., § 285 — Perf., 
 § 278—Aor. Pass., § 328, 3. 
 στρώνννμι, § 319, 11. 
 στυγέω, § 325, D. 8 k. 
 στνφελίζω, § 251, D.—Fut., § 261, D. 
 σύτο, § 316, D. 30. 
 σφάλλω, § 252. 
 σφάττω, § 250. 
 σχεθέειν, § 338, D. 
 σχεΊν, etc., § 327, 6. 
 σχές,§316,11; § 327,6. 
 σχίζω, § 251. 
 
 σώζω, 1st Aor. Pass., § 298. 
 
 τάννμαι, ταννω, § 319, D. 38. 
 ταράσσω, § 250— Perf., § 277, D. 
 
 τάσσω, § 250— Perf., § 287 ; ρ. 116. 
 τεθηλιος, § 277, D. 
 τέθναμεν, § 317, 3. 
 τεθνεώτος, § 317, D. 3. 
 τεθνηζω, § 291; § 324, 4. 
 τείνω, Perf., § 282— 1st Aor. Pass., 
 § 298. 
 
 τελέω, § 301,1— Perf. Mid., § 288— 
 1st Aor. Pass., § 298. 
 τέμει (τέμνω), § 321, D. 10. 
 τέμνω, § 321,10, and D. 
 τέζομαι. See τίκτω. 
 τέρπω, Aor. Pass., § 59, D.; § 295, 
 D.—Aor. Mid., § 257, D. 
 τέτανων, § 257, D. 
 τέτακα, § 282. 
 τετάρπετο, § 257, D. 
 τετενχαται, § 322, D. 30. 
 τέτλαμεν, § 317, D. 10. 
 τέτληκα, § 317, D. 10. 
 τέτμηκα, § 321,10. 
 τέτμον, § 257, Γ). 2. 
 τετορησω, § 326, D. 44. 
 τετραίνω, Aor., § 270, Obs. 
 τέτρηχα, § 277, D. 
 τετνκεΊν, § 322, D. 30. 
 τεύχω, § 322, 30— Perf. Mid., § 285, 
 D. ; § 322,0. 30. 
 τήκω, § 330, 7— Aor. Pass., § 295. 
 τίθημι, ρ. 124; § 305, and D.; § 307 
 —Aor. Pass., § 53 5—Aor., § 310 
 —Perf.,§ 311. 
 τίκτω, § 249. 
 τίννμι, § 319, D. 35. 
 τίνω, § 321, 5, and D. 
 τιτράω, § 327, 16. 
 τιτρώσκω , § 324, 16, and D. 
 τιτνσκομαι, § 322, D. 30; § 324, D. 37. 
 τλήναι, § 316, 6, and D. 
 τμηγω, § 321, D. 10. 
 τραπέω, τραπείομεν , § 295, D. 
 τρέπω, Aor., § 257; § 294—Perf., 
 § 279—Perf. Mid., § 285. 
 τρέφω, § 54 c — Perf.,§ 285 — 2d Aor. 
 
 Pass., § 295—Aor., § 329, D. 
 τρέχω, § 54 c; § 327,11, and D. 
 τρησω, § 327, 16. 
 τρίβω, ρ. 120. 
 τρώγω, 2d Aor., § 257. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 377 
 
 τρώω, § 324, D. 16. 
 τυγχάνω, § 322, 30, and D. 
 τύπτω , § 326, 37, and D. ; § 249. 
 τνψω, § 54 c. 
 τνχεΊν, § 322, 30. 
 
 νπισχνονμαι, § 323, 36. 
 νποπτεύω , Aug'lll., § 239, ExC. 
 
 φαάνθην , § 321, D. 10. 
 φαγεΊν, § 327, 4. 
 
 0 ά€(ν),§ 321, D. 10. 
 φαείνω, § 321, D. 10. 
 φαίνω, § 253; § 321, D. 10; § 258; 
 § 267 ; § 273; § 292 — Perf., § 
 282; § 278— Aor. Pass., § 298, 
 D.; § 328, 3. 
 φάσκω , § 324, 8 . 
 
 φείδομαι, Aor., § 257, D.; § 326, D. 
 45. 
 
 φέρτε, § 315. D. 4; § 327, D. 12. 
 φέρω , § 327, 12, and D.—Imperat. 
 
 1st Aor., § 268, D. 
 φεύγω , § 322, 31—Fut. Mid., § 264 
 —Perf. Act., § 278—Perf. Mid., 
 § 285, D. 
 
 φημί, § 312,5 ; § 92, 3. 
 φθάνω , § 321, 3, and D.—2d Aor., 
 § 316,7, and D. 
 
 φθείρω , Perf., § 282; § 330, D. 11. 
 φθίνω , § 321, 6 , and D.—Aor. Mid., 
 § 316, D. 26. 
 φι\ίω , § 325, D. 1. 
 φΐλοτιμ'εομαι , Aor. Pass., § 328, 2. 
 φράγννμι , φάργννμι , § 319, 26. 
 φράζω, 2d Aor., § 257, D. 
 φράσσω, § 319, 26. 
 
 φνγγάνω, § 322, 31. 
 
 φυλάσσω, § 250. 
 
 φΰρω, Fut., § 262, D. 
 
 φύω, Aor., § 316,17, andD.; § 329,3. 
 
 χαίρω , § 326, 38, and D. 
 χαλάω, § 301, 1. 
 χανδάνω, § 323, D. 41. 
 χανονμαι , § 324, 9. 
 χάσκω, § 324, 9. 
 χείσομαι, § 323, D. 41. 
 χίω, § 248 — Fut., § 265 — Perf., § 
 281— 1st Aor., § 269— Aor. Mid., 
 §316,D. 31. 
 χραισμεω § 325, D. 8. 7Π. 
 χράω, χράομαι, § 244, 2—Flit., § 261. 
 χρεών, § 312, 6. 
 χρή, §312,6. 
 χρίω, Perf. Mid., § 288. 
 χρώνννμι, § 319, 12. 
 
 φάω, § 244,2. 
 
 φεύδω, Mid. and Pass., p. 118. 
 
 ώγμαι , § 327, D. 6 . 
 ιοθέω, § 325, 9—Augm., § 237. 
 ώμμαι, § 327, 8 . 
 ώνάμην, etc., § 314, 2, D. 
 ώνεομαι, Augm., § 237 — Perfect, 
 § 275, 2. 
 
 ώζνμμαι, § 286, 1, Obs. 
 ώρορον, ώρσα, § 319, D. 37. 
 ώσφρόμην, § 322, 21. 
 ώφείλω, § 326, 32. 
 ώφελλα, § 270, D. 2. 
 ώφθην, § 327, 8 . 
 ώφλον, § 322, 22. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX 
 
 {The numbers indicate the §, not the joages.) 
 
 ABODE. 
 
 ATTRIBUTE. 
 
 COMPLETED. 
 
 “Abode,” to be supplied,411. 
 
 Absolute Genit., 428; 5S4 — 
 Acc., 5SG. 
 
 Abstracts in the Plur., 3G2, 
 Obs.—mostly Fem., 103. 
 
 Accent , IT, etc.—General 
 rules, T9, etc. — of Nouus, 
 10T, etc.; 118; 123; 14S — 
 of Comparatives, iTl — of 
 Pron., 20T—Irregularities 
 in the declensions, 121 ; 
 123; 131; 133; 142; 163; 
 166; 181; 183—in Adverbs, 
 201; 165 — in Verbs, 229; 
 
 331, etc.—in the Strong 
 Aor., 255 —in the Perf., 
 2T6 ; 284 — in the Strong 
 Pass. Stem, 293 — irreg., 
 
 332, etc. — in derivation, 
 340, Obs. 4, etc. 
 
 Accusative, orig. ending, 1T3, 
 Obs. — meaning, 395 — of 
 the outer obj., 396, etc.—of 
 the inner obj., 400, etc.— 
 of double obj.,402, etc.—of 
 the predicate, 403 — free 
 Acc., 404, etc.—Adverbial, 
 201; 203; with Prep., 44T, 1 
 —with the Inf., 5GT, etc. 
 
 “ Accustomed to,” expressed 
 by Aor. and imperf. Ind., 
 with uv, 494, Obs. 1. 
 
 “ Acquainted with,” or “ig¬ 
 norant of,” with Genit., 
 414, 3. 
 
 Action, Suffixes for, 342. 
 
 Active, 4TG—Act.,Mid., Pass, 
 meaning, 32S. 
 
 Acute Accent, IT ; 80, etc.— 
 87 2 
 
 “ Adapted for” Suffix, 351. 
 
 Adjectives, decleus., 114; 12G; 
 154; 164, etc. — Compar., 
 19T—Genders, ISO, etc.—of 
 3 Endings, 185, etc. — of 2 
 Endings, 182; 189 — of lj 
 Ending, 190—Derived, 350 
 —Contr., 1S3—Subs, fem., 
 12T, 4—with Art., 3T9—fol¬ 
 low the Genit., 412, Obs. 
 
 Adverbs, 201, etc. — Correia- 1 
 tive, 21T, etc.—Nnm. Adv.,| 
 
 223—with the Art., 3T9— 
 as Adject., 3S2. 
 
 “Aim,” expiessed by Acc., 
 406. 
 
 Alphabet, 3. 
 
 Anastrophe, 90. 
 
 Aorist, weak, with transitive 
 meaning, 329—with k, 310 
 —strong with intransitive 
 meaning, 329—of proverbs 
 andguomes,494—Ind.,492, 
 etc.—in Coudit. sentences, 
 543—in Condit. sentences, 
 539 ; 541—Moods, 495, etc. 
 —Subj. in coud. sent., 545, 
 Obs. 1—Opt. and Inf. 49T 
 —Part., 496. 
 
 Apocope, G4, D. 
 
 Apostrophe, 15 ; G4; 65, D. 
 
 Apposition, 361,12; 3S5—Ap- 
 positive Partic., 5T9; 5S3. 
 
 Article , 106 — Crasis, 65 — 
 without Accent, 9T, 1—as 
 Demonstr. Pron., 212, D.— 
 for the Relative, 213, D.— 
 Origin in Homer, 36S; 3T0, 
 Obs.—omitted, 3TG, etc.— 
 Meaning, 369, etc.—Neut., 
 with Genit., 3S1; 410—Po¬ 
 sition, 3S3-390. 
 
 Aspirates, 82; 52, etc.—at the 
 begin, of two successive 
 syll., 53 ; 2T4, 1—Redupli¬ 
 cated by Tenues, 62. 
 
 Aspiration dropped or re¬ 
 moved, 32, D. — thrown 
 back, 54—omitted, 52, D.— 
 in the strong Perf., 2T9. 
 
 Assimilation, 45; 4T, etc. ; 
 50 b; 51; 56. 
 
 Asyndeton, 624 a, Obs. 
 
 Atona, 9T—before Enclit., 93 
 e; 98. 
 
 “Attempting an action,” ex¬ 
 pressed by the Imperf., 4S9. 
 
 Attic Deck, 132—Ending, 15T 
 —Future, 263—Reduplic., 
 2T5, 1; 2T8. 
 
 Attraction, 59T, etc.—invert¬ 
 ed, 604. 
 
 Attribute, 361, 11 — Attribu¬ 
 tive Adjective Art., 384— | 
 
 Attrib. compounds. 359, 2, 
 and Obs. (Comp. 3G0)—At¬ 
 tributive additions, 383- 
 3SG — Attrib. Partic., 5TS. 
 
 Augment, 234, etc.—Omitted, 
 234, D. ; 235—Double, 23T ; 
 240 — in Compounds, 238, 
 etc.—irreg., 2T0, D. 
 
 Barytones, 19. 
 
 “Be,” “become,” “make,” 
 etc., 41T ; 361, T. 
 
 “Begin,” “interrupt,” “end,” 
 verbs with Part., 590—with 
 Genit., 419 b. 
 
 “ Benefiting,” Verbs of, 39G. 
 
 “Buy]” Verbs with Genit., 
 421. 
 
 “ Capability,”zic ..,Verbs with 
 Inf., 560,1. 
 
 Cardinal Num., 220. 
 
 Case, 100—Use of, 392, etc.— 
 Endings, 100 — Acc., 142; 
 153—in Comps., 354, Obs. 
 
 “C«ws<;,”in the Genit., 40S, 
 T — 422; 426 —Dat., 439- 
 Part., 581. 
 
 Challenge or Command—in 
 the Subjunc.,509—by όπως, 
 553, Obs. 
 
 Characteristic, 249. 
 
 Circumflex, 21; 80; 83, etc. * 
 8T a. 
 
 Classes of Verbs in ω, 24T- 
 250; 320-32T; of Verbs in 
 μι, 305-319. 
 
 Collective Sing., 362. 
 
 Common Gend., 12T, 5; 140. 
 
 “ Community,’ expressed by 
 Dat. 43G. 
 
 Comparative, 192, etc. — de- 
 clens., 1T0, etc.—irreg., 199 
 —Adv., 203—with Genit., 
 416—Adj. and Verbs with 
 Genit., 416, Obs. 3 ; 423. 
 
 Compensation by lengthen¬ 
 ing, 42 — for v, 49, Obs. 3; 
 14T, 1 ; 233, 2 — for ντ, ιθ, νό, 
 50; 14T, 1; 1ST—for <r, 2T0. 
 
 Completed Action in Verbs, 
 4S4 ; 435 ; 502-50G. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX 
 
 380 
 
 COMPOUNDS. 
 
 Compounds, Divis. of Syll.,78 
 — Accent, 85; 131; 165 ; 
 183; 332 — Adj., 1S2, etc.; 
 1S9, 3 — Augm. in Comp. 
 Verbs, 238, etc.—treated as 
 simple Verbs, 402 — Avith 
 Genitive, 424 — with Dat., 
 43T. 
 
 Concessive Participle, 5S2. 
 
 Conditional Sentences, 534, 
 549 — negat., 616. 
 
 Conjunctions, 623, etc. 
 
 Connecting VoAvels, 233, 1, 2, 
 5; 262, etc. ; 275. 
 
 Consonants, Divis. of, 30, etc., 
 44 —in dividing Syll., 71, 
 etc. 
 
 Contraction, 36, etc.—in De- 
 clens., 11S; 122; 12S; 130, 
 etc. ; 103, D. ; 166 ; 10S — 
 Double, 167—Omitted, 35, 
 D. 1; 165; 160, D. ; 233, 
 D. 4; 243, D. ; 263, D.—of 
 the Pres. Stem, 243, etc.— 
 of Adv., 201—Contr. Syll. 
 long, 75, Obs.—Accent, 87; 
 163; 331—Contr. Fut., 259; 
 262, etc. 
 
 Co-ordination, 519,1 a, 2. 
 
 Coronis, 10; 05. 
 
 Correlation, 519, 4 — Oorrel. 
 Pron. 216 ; 218—Adv., 217, 
 etc. 
 
 Crcisis, 10; 65 —Accent in, 
 89. 
 
 Dative, Perispome, 109—Oxy- 
 tone, 133, 2—in Monosyll., 
 142 — in σι(ν), 08; 165, D. 
 — represented by φιν, 17S, 
 D.—Meaning, 429, etc.— 
 Avith Prepos.7447,3—of ad- 
 vant. and disadv., 431—of 
 interest, 431, etc.—ethical, 
 433 — of community, 436, 
 etc. — of instrument, 438, 
 etc.—of measure, 440 — 
 free, 441-443. 
 
 “ Declaration,” Verbs of— 
 with Acc. and Inf., 567 — 
 with Inf., 560, 2 — with 
 Part., 593 — Avith ου, 617, 
 Obs. 1—Sentences of, 525. 
 
 Decomposites , Augment in, 
 239. 
 
 Defectives in Compar., 200. 
 
 Defining Object, 400 c—Inf., 
 562. 
 
 Demonstrative Article, 369— 
 Pron., 212; 210; 475—fol¬ 
 lows the predicate, 367 — 
 Art. Avith, 389. 
 
 Denominatives, 339. 
 
 Dental Cons., 30—dissim. 40 
 — become σ, 47 ; 07—mutes 
 dropped before σ, 49; 147, 
 1; 1$9; 260—in Perf., 281 
 — Charact. in Verbs, 250, 
 
 Obs.-Fut., 260 , 3. 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 Deponents, 4S2—Pass.,328,2— 
 Pass. Mean., 328, 4; 4S3, 3. 
 
 Derivative Ending in Com¬ 
 paratives, 357. 
 
 Description expressed by the 
 Imperf., 4S8. 
 
 Desideratives, 353, Obs. 2. 
 
 Determinative Comps., 359,1, 
 and Obs. (Comp. 300). 
 
 Diaeresis , 9 ; 22, Obs. 
 
 Digamma , 3, D.; 34, D. ; 35, 
 D. 2; 63, D. ; 75, D. ; 160; 
 237 ; 233, Obs.; 360, Obs. 
 
 Diminutives, 347; 114. 
 
 Diphthongs, Pronunciation, 
 8—Origin, 26; 35, 2—be¬ 
 fore Vowels, 35, Obs.; 100; 
 24S, Obs.—without Augm., 
 235—spurious, 27. 
 
 Disjunctive questions. (See 
 Double question.) 
 
 Dissimilation, 40. 
 
 Distributives, 223. 
 
 Doric Flit,, 204. 
 
 Doubling of Consou., 62; 34. 
 
 Double questions, 611 — ού 
 and μή, 615, Obs. 1. 
 
 Dual represented by PI., 365. 
 
 Effect and Consequence ex¬ 
 pressed by Acc. and Inf., 
 567. 
 
 Elision , 64—Accents, SS—be¬ 
 fore Enclit., 96, 3. 
 
 Enclitics , 92, etc.—retaining 
 the Accent, 96. 
 
 Ending, 100 — c h an ge d in 
 Comps. 355—of the 1st De- 
 clens., 134—of 2d, 172. 
 
 Enjoying,verbs of, with Gen¬ 
 itive, 419 d. 
 
 Epexegisis, 624 a, Obs. 
 
 Ethical Dative, 433. 
 
 Exclamations, 393—in Acc., 
 399, Obs.—in Genit., 427. 
 
 Extent, exp. by Acc., 405. 
 
 Fear and Anxiety, 533 ; 512; 
 010, Obs. 3. 
 
 Feeling, verbs of, Avith Acc., 
 399—Avith Dat., 439, Obs.— 
 with Genitive, 422, Obs.— 
 with Part., 592. 
 
 Feminines, 103 ; 127 ; 138 ; 
 103. 
 
 Final letters, 07, etc. — Syll. 
 long—bef. vowels short, 75, 
 D. 2 — Contr. Accent, S7 ; 
 1S3. 
 
 Future, 499, etc., 4S4 — Act. 
 Avith trans. Meaning, 329 
 — periphrastic, 501 — Fut. 
 Perf., 505 — Ind. Avith se, 
 554, Obs. 2—Particip. Avith 
 Art., 500. 
 
 Gender, knoAvn by general 
 rules, 101, etc.; 127 — by 
 ending of Stem, 125; 137, 
 
 INTERROGATIVE. 
 
 etc.—by Declens., 105; 122 
 —in A Declens., 122—in O 
 Declens., 127—in Conson. 
 Declens., 137, etc. 
 
 Generic Article, 375. 
 
 Genitive Perispome, 100; 11S 
 —Oxvtone,133,2—Paroxy- 
 tone,*181—in Monosyll., 142 
 —represented by Dev and 
 0i/,17S, D.: 118—Meaning, 
 407—Avith Prepos., 447, 2— 
 Avith Subst.,408,etc.—Avith 
 Adj. and Adv., 414, etc.— 
 Avith Verbs, 417, etc.—free 
 Genit., 425, etc. 
 
 Gentile Names, 349 ; 350. 
 
 Grave accent, 19, etc.; 86. 
 
 Gutturals, 30—Avith σ form ξ, 
 48 ; 260—before μ, become 
 γ, 47 — Avith i, become σσ, 
 57—Charact. of Pres., 250; 
 251, D. 
 
 Heteroclites, 174. 
 
 Hiatus, 03—apparen t, 03, D. 4. 
 
 Hypothetical Sent. (See Con¬ 
 ditional Sent.). 
 
 Imperative, 228—1 Aor., 53— 
 26S,D.; 51S—iuCond.Sent., 
 545, Obs. 3—exp. by 2 Pers. 
 Fut. with ου, 499, Obs. — 
 supplied by Inf., 577. 
 
 Imperfect, 488, etc.—in Cond. 
 Sent., 543 — in Prot. and 
 Apod., 538 ; 541. 
 
 Inclination, 91, etc. 
 
 Incomplete Action, 4S4, etc. 
 
 Indefinite Subject, 361,3, Obs. 
 2—in Neut., 364. 
 
 Indefinite Pronouus,214,etc.; 
 216—Adv., 92, 4. 
 
 Indicative, 507 — in Depend. 
 Sent.,520; 523—in depend., 
 d eel ar., an d i n terrog. Sent., 
 526—in Condit. Sent., 536, 
 etc., 545 — in temp. Sent,, 
 556—hypoth. Ind. in Cond. 
 Sent., 537—in Sent, of pur¬ 
 pose, 550. 
 
 Indirect Object, 430 a. 
 
 Individualizing Article, 371, 
 etc. 
 
 Infinitive Act., in μεναι, μεν, 
 233, D. 3; 255, D.—ill ναι 
 Aor. and Perf. Accent, 333, 
 1-5; 26S, Obs. 1—Use, 559 
 —Avith Art,, 379—as Sub¬ 
 ject, 563; 574, 1—Acc., 2— 
 Gen., 3—Dat., 4—with μή, 
 and ού, 617 — Avith μή ου, 
 621 c, d —for Impel·., 577. 
 
 “ Injure ,” Verbs—with Acc., 
 396. 
 
 Instrument, suffix, 344—Da¬ 
 tive of, 438; 574, 4. 
 
 Interest or Advantage, Dat. 
 of,431, etc.—Middle of,479. 
 
 Interrogative Pron., 214; 216 
 
ENGLISH INDEX 
 
 381 
 
 IRRF.GUI.AE. 
 
 —direct andindirect,475 b; 
 009—in depend. Sent., 525 
 
 — joined with Demonstr., 
 606, Obs. 1. 
 
 Irregular Nouns, 177—Verbs, 
 320, Obs. 
 
 Iterative form, 334, D., etc.— 
 in Imperf. and Aor., 335, D. 
 
 Judicial Proceedings, Verbs 
 of—with Genit., 422. 
 
 Kinds of Verbs, 225, 2. 
 
 Labials , 30 — before μ 47 — 
 before σ, 48; 260 — verbal 
 stem. 249. 
 
 Lengthening, 40, etc. ; 147; 
 155, 165; 173, Obs.—in 
 
 Pres.,248—in the Put., 260, 
 2; 261 — in Redupl., 275 
 (Comp., 273, D. ; 278)—of 
 Vowels, 243, Γ). 3 ; 263, D. 
 
 Liquids, 33—in divis. of Syll., 
 
 Locative, 179. 
 
 Long by Nature, 75. 
 
 Manner, exp. by Dat., 441. 
 
 Masculines,Wl\ 137—disting, 
 from Fem., 113 ; 122; 134 
 —for Fem., 362, Obs. 2. 
 
 Material, suffix, 352, 3, 4 — 
 Genit., 408, 3; 414, 2; 41S. 
 
 Measure, in Dat., 440. 
 
 Mediae, 32. 
 
 Metaplasm, 175. 
 
 Metathesis, 59; with strong 
 Aor. Act. and Mid., 257 ; 
 D., 2S2, 285; with strong 
 Aor. Pass., 295,1). 
 
 Middle, 477, etc.—direct, 47S 
 
 — indirect, 479 — Subject¬ 
 ive, 480—Causative, 4S1 — 
 Aor. with Mid. meaning, 
 255,2 ; 271—Fut. with Act. 
 meaning, 264; 266; 328, 1 
 —with Pass, meaning, 266. 
 
 Modesty of Assertion, exp. in 
 Opt., with d v, 517, Obs. 1. 
 
 Momentary Action, 484 ; 492- 
 498. 
 
 Monosyllabic Stems, length¬ 
 ened, 142 b —in λ. v.p.Perf., 
 2S2—Accent of Mon. words, 
 142—with Enclit., 94. 
 
 Moods, 225, 4. 
 
 Multiplicative8, 223. 
 
 “Must” and “Should ,”Verbs 
 of, in Imperf., 490. 
 
 .Mites,31,etc.—Assimilation, 
 49, D.; 52—before Liquids 
 and Nasals, IS—Steins of 
 Verbs, 24S. 
 
 Name in Genit., 408, 9 — of 
 Animals, Gender, 140. 
 
 '‘Xame, ” · ‘ Select, ’’etc., Verbs 
 of, 361, 7,10; 392; 403. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Xarrative in Aor. Ind., 492. 
 
 Xasals, 33—in divis. of Syll., 
 72,1. 
 
 Xecessity, expressed by Ver¬ 
 bal Adj., 300. 
 
 Xegatives, 619, and Obs. 
 
 Xegative Pron. and Adv., 219. 
 
 Neuters, 104 ; 139 — Dental 
 Stems, 147 b; — Liquid 
 Stems, 151—Sigma Stems, 
 165—Marks of, 105,3 ; 125; 
 130—Accent, 340, Obs. 4 — 
 as Adv., 201 ; 203 ; 401 — 
 P!u. with Sing. Verbs, 363 
 —Adj. as Predic., 366. 
 
 Nominal Predicate, 361, 4, 
 etc. 
 
 Nominative Dual oxytone, 
 131,1—for Voc., 129 ; 393— 
 meaning, 392. 
 
 Nouns from Verbal Stems, 
 245. 
 
 Numbers, 100, 1; 225, 1 — 
 “two” in the PI.,365. 
 
 Numerals, 220, Obs. — with 
 Alt., 374. 
 
 Objective Inf., 561 — Genit., 
 574,3, Obs.—Part.,581; 361, 
 9; 395. 
 
 Objective Com; s., 359, 3, and 
 Obs.—Genit., -* 08 ,5 b; 413. 
 
 “Opinion to be if," Verb, 
 with Inf., 560, 2; 567. 
 
 Optative, 228 — Pres., 2 Pers. 
 Sing, in σθα, 233, D. 1 — 
 Perf. Mid., 2S9-514 — po¬ 
 tential with uv, 517, Obs. 2; 
 552, Obs.—in dep. sent., 524 
 —Opt.in dep.Sent.,522,etc. 
 —in indir. Speech, 523—in 
 depend.,declar., and inter. 
 Sent.., 52S—in Sent, of pur¬ 
 pose, 532—in Sent, of fear, 
 533—in Condit. Sent., 546, 
 etc.—in Relat. Sent., 655 — 
 in tcmpor. Sent., 550 ; 568 
 —exp. interest, 439. 
 
 Ordinal Numbers, 220 — in 
 Acc., 405, Obs. 1. 
 
 Oxytones, 17 — before Enclit., 
 93 a. 
 
 Paroxytones, 17—in Cras's, 
 89—Define Enclit., 93 c. 
 
 Participles, Declens., 187 — 
 Voc. Sing., 148—Perf. Act., 
 276, D. — Fem., 188 ; 277, 
 D.—Pres., Aor., and Perf. 
 Mid., 333, 6-10—with Art., 
 379, etc.; 578, Obs.—in 
 Dat., 435, Obs. — hypoth. 
 with μ/;, 583,618. 
 
 Particles, 92, 5; 623, etc. 
 
 Partitive Genitive, 408, 4; 
 412; 419. 
 
 Passive, 483 — with Dative, 
 434 — Aor. in Active verbs 
 with Mid. meaning, 328, 3. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Patronymics, 348. 
 
 Peculiar Charact. Suffix, 351 
 —Genit., 408, 8. 
 
 “Perceive ,” Verbs of, with 
 Genit., 420 ; 417, Obs. — 
 with Intin., 560, 2 —with 
 Part., 591. 
 
 Perfect, weak, 277, D. ; 2S0, 
 e t c.—strong, 277, etc.—iu- 
 trans. meaning, 330—trails, 
 and intrans. meaning, 329 
 
 — use of the Ind., 502 — 
 Moods, Inf., Part., 506 — 
 Perfects with Pres, mean¬ 
 ing, 503. 
 
 Period, hypoth., 534 — inter¬ 
 posed, 550—Negative, 616. 
 Perispomes, 21 — before En¬ 
 clit., 93 b. 
 
 Personal Endings, 226—Pro¬ 
 noun, 250, eic. ; 92, 2 — 
 Meaning,469—Genit.,470 a 
 
 — for reflec. pron., 471, Obs. 
 
 a, b —Personal Constr.,571. 
 Place, Suffix of, 345—Genit. 
 
 of, 412 ; 415; 425—Dative, 
 442—Adv. with Genit., 415 
 — Desig. of, 82,2; 179; 412. 
 Plenty and Want, Adject, of, 
 414, 2—Verbs, 418. 
 
 Plural, 3 Pers. PI. Mid. in 
 -αται, -ατο, 226, D.; 233, D. 
 6—1 Mid. in μεσθα, 233, D. 
 5 ; 362, etc. 
 
 Position, 71, etc. ; 193. 
 Possessive Article, 373 — 
 Pron., 20S—with Art., 388; 
 470 — of the reflective, 472 
 
 b, c —Poss. exp. by Genit., 
 
 - 408, 2 ; 414,1—by Dat., 422. 
 Possibility,expMy Verb Adj., 
 
 300—by Opt. with αν, 516, 
 etc.; 546 — by Part, with 
 IN, 595. 
 
 Predicate, 361, 3, etc. — de¬ 
 pendent, 361, 10; 589, 2 — 
 without Art., 378, 387. 
 Predicative A cc., 408—G enit., 
 417—Acc. with Inf., 570 — 
 Gen. or Acc., 572 — Part., 
 589. 
 
 Prepositions, lose their Ac¬ 
 cent, 88—Elision in dissyl., 
 64; 90; 23S—Anastrophe, 
 90 — Augm. aft. Prep., 288, 
 etc.—Use, 444—Adverbial, 
 446 —with Acc., 449 / — 
 Genit., 451, etc.—Dat., 466, 
 etc.—Genit. and Acc.,458— 
 with three cases,462, etc.— 
 spurious, 445. 
 
 Present Ind., 4SG, etc. — 
 Moods, Inf. Part., 491 — 
 hist., 487 — exp. by Ind. 
 Aor., 494, Obs. 2—enlarge¬ 
 ment of, 246—Stem, 231— 
 like the Verb Stem, 247— 
 with lengthened Stem 
 Vowel, 248 — from Verb 
 
382 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX 
 
 PRIMITIVE. 
 
 Stem with t, 249 — with i, 
 250, etc. 
 
 Primitive words, 339. 
 
 Principal Conjligations, 230 
 —first, 231,etc.; 320, etc.— 
 second, 302-319 — Declen¬ 
 sions, 111—first, 112-134— 
 second, 135. 
 
 Proclitics (see Atona). 
 
 “Prohibition” 518; 510; 499 
 —Prohibit, Hinder, Deny, 
 etc.—have the Intiu. with 
 μή, 617, Obs. 3 — with μη ου, 
 621 d. 
 
 Prolepsis, 519, 5, Observ. 2 
 (Comp., 56T; 571). 
 
 Pronunciation, 4, etc. 
 
 Proparoxxjtones, 17 — before 
 Enel.,93 d. 
 
 P roper ispomes, 21 —.b e fo r e 
 Enel., 93 d. 
 
 Proper Names in -«,115, D. 2 
 —a?, 174— κλΓ,τ, 167—with 
 Art., 371, Obs.; 375, Obs.; 
 3S7, Obs. 
 
 “Property,” Suffix of, 346; 
 343, Obs. 
 
 Quantity, in Orasis, 65 — in 
 Monosyll., 142 -doubtful, 
 75, D., 1—reversing quant., 
 37, D., 2 ; 161, Obs. 
 
 Quantitative Adj. and Adv., 
 224—with Art., 374. 
 
 Questions, dubious in the 
 Subj., 511. 
 
 Reciprocal Pron., 211. 
 
 Reduplication, 53, 10 a — in 
 the Perf., 273, etc.—in the 
 2 Aor., 257 d —in Verbs in 
 μι, 308. 
 
 Reflective Pron., 210—Mean¬ 
 ing, 471—3d for 1st and 2d 
 Pers., Obs. c — to denote 
 possession, 472 — for Re¬ 
 ciprocal, 473. 
 
 Relative Adj., 414. 
 
 Relative Pron., 213 ; 216 — 
 Crasis,65—Compound,214, 
 Obs. 2—Hypoth., 554—fol¬ 
 lows the Predic. Subst., 367 
 —used once only, 605. 
 
 Relative Sentences,551—with 
 Future Ind., 500—with μή, 
 615, Obs. 2—complication, 
 604—Connection, 605. 
 
 “ Reference to,” exp. by the 
 Acc., 404. 
 
 Rejection of letters, 61—of a 
 Vowel at begin., see Syn¬ 
 cope—of a vowel at end, 
 see Elision. 
 
 Repetition, exp. by the Opt., 
 547 (Negative, 616, Obs. 2) 
 555, Obs. 1; 558. Obs. 1. 
 
 SUI5J UJSCTIVE. 
 
 Result of an Act, 343—in the 
 Acc., 400 d. 
 
 Root, 245. 
 
 “Scare,” “Obstruct,” a d 
 other Verbs, with the Inf., 
 560, 3. 
 
 Semivowels, 31. 
 
 Sentences, Compound, 519, 3, 
 5—Principal, Subordinate, 
 519, 4—Moods of, 525, etc. 
 —Condit., 534; 549, etc.— 
 Negat.,616—ofExperience 
 in Aor. Ind., 494—Interr., 
 525—of Purpose, 530-533— 
 Negat., 616. 
 
 Shortening, at the beginn., 
 
 74, D.—of the final syll., 
 
 75, D. 2—in the Perf., 285, 
 D.—in the Subj., 22S, D.; 
 233, D. 2 — in Eel. Sent., 
 597, 3. 
 
 “Should,” exp. in depend. 
 Sent, by the Subj., 527 b, 
 Opt., 528 b. 
 
 “Shoic,” Verbs of with Part., 
 593; 5S0. 
 
 Sigma, future, 259; 260, etc. 
 —Aor., 269. 
 
 Singular, 3 Pers. in e (uj, 68, 
 4—Accent on Imp. Mid., 
 26S, 2 — Accent on 2 Aor. 
 Imper. Act. and Mid., 333, 
 11, 12, 302. 
 
 “Space,” exp. by the Accus., 
 399 b. 
 
 Spiritus, position, 12; 22 — 
 with μ and pp, 13 — Spir. 
 Asper, 60 b —in Augment, 
 235, Obs.—Spir. Lenis, 11. 
 
 Stem, 100—St. Vowel length¬ 
 ened, 147,2; 248; 253, Obs.; 
 261, 270, changed to e, 157. 
 
 “Strive,” “Aim at,” Verbs 
 with Genitive, 419 c —with 
 Inf., 560, 3. 
 
 Subject, 361,3—Omitted, Obs. 
 2—with Genit. Abs., 5S5 a 
 —of a Subordinate Sent, 
 as Object of the Principal 
 Sent., 397 ; 519, 5—Obs. 2— 
 Subj. of Prin. Sent, in the 
 Subord. Sent., 602 ; 519, 5, 
 Obs. 2. 
 
 Subjective Genit., 408', 5 a. 
 
 Subjunctive, 228—Shortened, 
 233, D. 2 ; 255, D. 1 ; 302, D. 
 —of the Perf. Mid., 289 — 
 of verbs in μι, accent, 309— 
 Meaning, 508, etc.—similar 
 to Fut., 513—in dep. sent., 
 521—in depend, assert, and 
 interrog., 527—in sent, of 
 purpose, 531, 532, Obs.— 
 exp. fear, 533—in condit. 
 sent., 545, 554, 555, Obs. 2 
 
 WORTH. 
 
 —in tempor. sent., 557,55S, 
 Obs. 2. 
 
 Subordination, 519, 3. 
 
 Substantive, degrees of, 199, 
 D.—joined to the Dat.,430, 
 Obs., 432, Obs. 
 
 Suffixes, 340; 178. 
 
 Superlatives, Adv., 203—with 
 Genit., 416, Obs. 2—withdv, 
 631 a —with ότι, 633,1 b. 
 
 Supplements to the Part., 
 361, 8. 
 
 Supplementary Aorist, 270, 
 etc. 
 
 Syllabic Augm., 234 — with 
 initial vowel, 237 — omit¬ 
 ted, 2S3. 
 
 Syllables of both quantities, 
 75, D., 1; 77. 
 
 Synizesis, 39; 66; 213, D., 3. 
 
 Syncope, 61 c; 257, D. 
 
 “ Taking part in,” with Gen¬ 
 itive, 414, 5 ; 419 a. 
 
 Temporal Adj., 352, 4, Obs.— 
 Augm., 234 b; 235. 
 
 Tenses, 225; 3 Prin. Tenses, 
 521 — Subord., 522—Tense 
 Stems, 227. 
 
 Tenues, 32—for Aspirates, 32, 
 D. 
 
 Time, in Acc., 399 b; 405 — 
 in Genit., 4i6—in Dat., 443 
 Adv. of with Genit., 415— 
 kinds, degrees of, 434,1, 2. 
 
 Transitive and Intransitive 
 Meaning, 329, etc.; 476 — 
 Mid., 477. 
 
 “Touch,” and other Verbs 
 with Genitive, 419 b. 
 
 Uncontracted Syll., 35, D., 1. 
 
 Verba Contracta among Iter- 
 atives, 336 d— V. pura, im¬ 
 pure, 247. 
 
 Verbal Pred.,361, 4—Nouns, 
 225, 5 —Stem, 245, etc.— 
 Pres. Stem, 246; 260, 3. 
 
 Vocal Stems, 1 Perf. 280. 
 
 Vowels, 24, etc.—in divis. of 
 Syll., 470 — before others, 
 74—long without Augm., 
 235—Changes, 40, etc.—in 
 2 Perf., 278—in derivation, 
 340, Obs. 3. 
 
 Weakening of Conson., 60. 
 
 u When,” expressed by Dat., 
 443. 
 
 “ Whither,” expressed by Ac¬ 
 cusative, 405. 
 
 “ Wish,” expressed in the 
 Opt., 514, etc. 
 
 Worth and Price, in the Gen¬ 
 itive, 40S, 6; 421. 
 
GREEK INDEX 
 
 d for n, 24, D. 2; 41, D. ; 115, 
 D.l; 121, D. 2; 235 D.; 270, 
 Obs. 
 
 d for η, 277, D. 
 
 U bee. ω, 268; 27S—bee. o,26S. 
 a bee. η, 40 ; 115,1, c; 116, d; 
 
 235; 270; 268; 278; 303. 
 a bee. e, 37, D. 2; 160 D.; 243, 
 D. 3. 
 
 a bee. ai, 24, D. 3. 
 d irom ao, αω, see ao. 
 d after e, i, p, 41; 115, 1, a; 
 116, c; 121; ISO; 261; 270; 
 278. 
 
 a before vowels, 235. 
 a, connecting vowel, 276; 
 336, D.; 33S, D.—in the 3 
 Plur., 302, 3. 
 
 a, characteristic of the First 
 or Weak Aorist, 268. 
 a,]) i vative,360—inAdj.with 
 the Geuit. 414, Obs. 5. 
 
 -a, ending of the Accus.,141; 
 
 156; 173, Obs.; 1S1; 276. 
 
 -a, quantity of, 117; 121; 161; 
 169; 181,1. 
 
 -a, Plur. ending of Neuters, 
 125,2; 136; 141; 173. 
 
 -a, Adverbs in, 202. 
 
 -a, Nom. of Substant. in, 172. 
 -a, from ao in the Geuit., 
 122, Obs. 
 
 αγαθός, Comparison, 109,1. 
 αγαμαι (άγάομαι), 312, 8— 
 Pass. Depon., 328, 2. 
 d 7 uvaKTeo>,with the Particip., 
 592. 
 
 αγαπώ, with the Dative, 439, 
 Obs.—with the Partic.,592. 
 ΰγγι τλλομαι, construed per¬ 
 sonally,571— αγγέλλω, wi th 
 a Partic., 593. 
 dye δή, 642, 4 a . 
 ΰγε<ρω, 2 Aoi'., 257, D.— Perf., 
 275,1. 
 
 ίχηήοχα, 279. 
 uyivtii), 323, D. 39. 
 dyi /υμι , 319, 13—Perf., 275, 2 
 —Signif. 330,1. 
 αγχι, Comparison of, 203, D. 
 
 —with the Genit., 415. 
 αγω, 2 Aor., 257—Imper. of 1 
 Aor., 268, D. 
 ΰδίΧφόί ,\oc. Sing., 129. 
 
 ! uKovit). 
 
 'ΰδικέω, with the Accus., 396 
 —Siguif., 4S6, Obs. 
 ae (a>?) into d, 38 ; into η, 243, 
 D. 2—into act, 336, D. 
 aei into a, 38— into a, 243, 
 Obs.—into at, 38, Obs. 
 αίξω, 322, D. 13. 
 αεσα, 327, D. 17. 
 
 -αζω, Verbs in, 353, 6—Fut. 
 263. 
 
 ΰη<5ώι/, Gen. Sing., 163. 
 άημι, 313, D. 3. 
 a/p, Masc., 140. 
 at, in the Corapar. for o or ω, 
 195—into rj, 235. 
 
 -at, Elided, ‘64, D.—Short in 
 regard to the Accent, 83, 
 Obs. 2; 108; 229; 26S,Obs.l. 
 at, a We, see et, eWe. 
 α.δ'ομαι, αϊδομαι, 301, 1 ; 326, 
 10—Pass. Depon., 328, 2— 
 with the Accus., 399. 
 
 ’λίδης, 177, D. 19 — ev, elr, 
 "λιδου, 411. 
 αιδώς·, 163. 
 
 -aiv, in the Dual, 173,4. 
 
 -atm, Fern, ending, 115,1 6. 
 αινέω, 301, 3. 
 αΐνυμαι, 319, D. 27. 
 
 -αινώ, Verbs in, 353, 7. 
 ai'f, of both genders, 140. 
 aipfc'to, 327,1—Perf., 275, D. 1 
 —Distinct, between Act. 
 and Mid., 481 b —Passive 
 meaning, 483, 3. 
 αίρω, Aor., 270, Obs. 
 
 -at?, Subst. in, 172. 
 
 -at?, in the Dat. PI., 119. 
 αισθάνομαι, 322, 11 —with the 
 Gen. ,420—with the Partic., 
 591. 
 
 αΙσχρό?, Comparison of, 198. 
 α'ισχίινομαι, with ACC., 399— 
 with Dat., 439, Obs.—with 
 Partic., 592—with the Inf., 
 594— αισχύνω, Perf., 2S6, D. 
 αΐτέω, with double Acc., 402. 
 άκαχίζω , 319, D. 30. 
 ά κεομαι, 301,1. 
 ΰκήκοα, 275,1; 280, Ob 
 άκηχνδατο, 287, D. 
 άκούω, Perf. Act., 275, 1 — 
 Perf. Mid., 28S—with the 
 Nom., 392, Obs.—with 
 
 άμεναι. 
 
 Gen., 420, and Obs.—with 
 Partic., 591. 
 
 ακρατο?, Comparison of, 196 b. 
 ακρυάομαι, Flit., 261 — With 
 Gen., 420. 
 
 άκων, Gen. Abs., 585 b. 
 ά\α\κον, 326, D. 11. 
 άΧάΧημαι, 275, D. 
 άΧάομαι, PUSS. DepOll., 32S, 2 
 —Perf., 275, D. 1. 
 αλγεινό?, Comparative of, 
 199, 8. 
 
 άΧδήσκω, 324, D. 30. 
 άΧίασθαι, 269, D. 
 άΧειφαρ, 176. 
 dXet ψω, Perf., 275,1. 
 ΰλεκτρνών, of both genders, 
 140. 
 
 αλεν, ΰλ/ι μεναι, 325, D. d. 
 άΧέξω, 326,11. 
 άλε'ω, 301, 1. 
 αΧηθεν, 165. 
 άΧθομαι, 326, D. 39. 
 αλί?, with Gen., 414, 2. 
 άΧίσκομαι, 327,17— Perf., 275, 
 2— Aor., 316, 12— with the 
 Genit., 422. 
 αΧιταίνω, 323, D. 37. 
 άΧκή, Dat. Sing., 175, D. 
 αλλά, 629 — αλλά γάρ, 636, 6, 
 d; dXX' r,, 629, Obs. 3— όλλ’ 
 ovv, 637, 2. 
 
 άλλάσσω, 1 Aor. Pass., 294, 
 Obs. 
 
 uXXtjXoiv, etc., 211. 
 άΧΧομαι, 1 Aor., 270, Obs.— 
 2 Aor., 316, D. 32. 
 άλλο?, 211 —uXXo τ i h j άλλο 
 τι ; 608. 
 
 αλλω? τε καί, 624, 4. 
 αλ?, 150. 
 
 αλόσκω, 324, 27, Obs. 
 άΧφάνω, 323, D. 38. 
 άΧΰιναι, 324,17. 
 ^(07rn?,irr’g.Nom.Sing.,145. 
 άμα, with Dat., 436 c — with 
 Part., 587,1. 
 
 αμαρτάνω, 322,12 —With Geil., 
 419 e. 
 
 άμβΧίσκω, 324,18. 
 αμείβομαι, with ACC., 39S. 
 άμείνων, Signif., 109, 1, Obs. 
 ύμελεω, with Genit., 429. 
 άμεναι, 312, D. 13. 
 
334 
 
 GREEK INDEX 
 
 ΰμιλλάομαι. 
 
 άμιλλάομαι, Depon. Pass.. 
 32S, 2. 
 
 αμνήμων, with Genit., 414, 3. 
 'άμοιροι, with Genit., 414, 5. 
 άμό ς, άμός, 2US, D. 
 άμπέχω, 53, d. 
 άμπισχ.ουμαι, 323, CC. 
 άμπλακ ισκω, 324, 23. 
 αμπνννβη, 298, D. —άμπνυτο 
 316, D. 29. 
 
 ίιμψί, 462 — without Ana- 
 strophe, 90. 
 
 άμφιεννυμι, 319, 5 — Augm.. 
 240— with double Acc.,402. 
 
 άμφω, άμφότεροι, άμφότερον 
 
 221 — αμφοτέρωθεν, with 
 Genit., 415. 
 
 -αν-, affixed to form the Pres¬ 
 ent Stem, 322. 
 ΰι/-, privative, 360. 
 
 ’<ii, see εάν. 
 
 'άν. 639, 3 — with particles of 
 time, 557—in the Apodosis 
 of Conditional Sentences, 
 535; 537 ; 541; Comp. 542 ; 
 546—with A or., 494, Obs. 1 
 — with Subj., 513 — with 
 Fut. Ind., 500, Obs.—with 
 Imperf., 494, Obs. 1—with 
 Ind., 536, etc.—with Inf., 
 575, etc.—with Opt., 516 ; 
 546—with Part., 595—with 
 Relatives, 554 ; 555, Obs. 2. 
 -av, Nom. Masc. and Neut., 
 172. 
 
 -av for άων, Gen. Plur. of 
 α -Decl., 11S, D. 
 
 ava, See άναξ. 
 
 άνά, 461 — Apocope, 04, D.— 
 without Anastrophe, 90. 
 ci!/a/30A\o/icu,with Inf.,560,3. 
 άναβιώσκομαι, 324, 11. 
 αναγκαίος· ειμ<, construed per¬ 
 sonally, 571. 
 
 αναλίσκω, αναλώσω, 324,19. 
 άναμιμνί σκω, with double 
 Acc., 402. 
 
 tivaf.Voc. Sing., 148, D. 
 ανάξιοί, with Genit., 414,4. 
 άνόάνω, 322, 23—Augm., 237. 
 ανδράποδου, Dat. PI., 175, D. 
 άν^γνων, άνέγνωσα, Diff. of 
 Sign if., 329, D. 
 άνευ, 445; 455, 5. 
 ανέχομαι, double Augm., 240 
 —with Part., 590. 
 ΰν7ωγα, ΰνί'ωχα, 319,19—Dis¬ 
 tinction, 279. 
 άνί,νοθεν, 275, D. 
 uvrp, 153; 177, 1—Genit., 51, 
 Obs. 2. 
 
 άνίρ, 65, Obs. 1. 
 άνθ' ών, 601. 
 
 ανοίγω, Augm., 237 — Perf., 
 275, 2; 279. 
 
 ανομίΐόω, double Augm., 240. 
 
 άντα, dvTf|v, άντικρύ, see 
 αντί. 
 
 avrt χαμαί, with Genit., 419 b. 
 
 αρχήν. 
 
 άντί, 451 — without Ana- 
 strophe, 90. 
 
 ανω, Compar., 204 — with 
 Genit., 415. 
 
 Ίνωγα, 517, D. 11—Pluperf., 
 283 D. 
 
 άξιος, with Genit., 414, 4 — 
 with Inf., 562. 
 
 άξιέιχρεως, 184. 
 
 ao into d, 37, D. 3; 122, D. 2 
 — into ω, 37: 122, D. 3 c — 
 into εω, 37, D. 2; 122, D. 3 
 b; 132 ; 243, D. 3. 
 
 -ao, Genit. Sing., 122, Obs., 
 etc., D. 3 b. 
 aoi, into ω, 37. 
 aov, into εω, 243, D. 3 b. 
 απαγορεύω, with Part., 590. 
 απαντάω, Fut. Mid. with Act. 
 
 meaning, 266. 
 άπαφίσκω, 324, D. 33. 
 ΰπεΐπων, 327,12. 
 άπειρος, with Genit., 419 e. 
 άπεχθάνομαι, 322, 16. 
 άπέχομαι, with Genit., 414,3. 
 άπό, 452— Apocope, 64, D.; 
 Compar., 204. 
 
 αποδίδομαι, with Genit., 421. 
 αποδιδράσκω, with ACC., 398. 
 άπόερσα, 270, D. 
 απολαύω, Flit. Mid. with Act. 
 meaning,266—with Genit., 
 419 d. 
 
 ’ Απόλλων , ACC., 171 ; VoC. 
 14S, Obs. 
 
 άποστερέω, with Doill). ACC., 
 t 402. 
 
 αποτυγχάνω, with Genitive, 
 419 e. 
 
 άπούρας, 316, D. IS. 
 άποφαίνω, with Part., 503. 
 
 U7T όχρη, 312, 6. 
 
 απτομαί, with Genit., 419 b. 
 
 -ap, Subst. in, 172. 
 
 άρα and άμα. Distinction, 99. 
 
 άμα (άρ), Apocope, 64, D.; 
 
 _ 637 ? 1. 
 
 άρα, in questions, 607 b —in¬ 
 direct, 610; up' ου, άμα μή 
 
 607, Obs. 
 
 άμαμισκω, 324, D. 34—Perf., 
 275, D.l. 
 
 άρείων, άρ.στος, 109, 1, and 
 Obs. 
 
 άρέσκω, 324,10. 
 άρηρώς, 2S0, D. 
 
 "Αρης·, 177, 2. 
 
 -apiov,Neutersin,347, Obs.l. 
 άμκεω, ΑθΓ., 301, 1. 
 άμμόττω, 250, Obs. — Flit., 
 260, 3. 
 
 άρνεομαι, Depon. Pass., 328,2. 
 αμνός·, etc., 177, 3. 
 άρνυμαι, ΑθΓ., 319, D. 29. 
 ύμόω, 301,1— Perf. Pass., 275, 
 D.l. 
 
 αμμην, 189, 3. 
 άρύω, 301, 1. 
 αρχήν, 405, Obs. 2. 
 
 βασιλεύς. 
 
 άρχομαι and άρχω, Distinc¬ 
 tion, 481 b. 
 
 άρχομαι, with Genit., 419 δ 
 —with Inf., 560, 1—with 
 Part., 590—with Inf. and 
 Part., 594. 
 
 άρχω, with Genit.., 423 — Diff. 
 
 of Pres, and Aor., 498. 
 
 -ας. Ending of the Acc. PI., 
 141. 
 
 -άς·, Fern, in,· 138. 
 
 -ας, Neut. in, 139. 
 
 -ας, Subst. in, 172. 
 άσμενος, 319, D. — Compar., 
 _ 196 b. 
 
 άσσον, άσσοτέρω, 203, D. 
 άστήρ, Dat. PI., 153. 
 άστυ, 15S — Gend., 139. 
 
 -αται, -ατο „3 PI. Mid., 226,1).: 
 
 233, D. 6 ; 2S7, and D. 
 άτάρ, αυτάρ, 630, 4. 
 άτε, with Part., 5S7, 6. 
 άτερ, 455, 5. 
 άττα, άττα, 214. 
 αν, αϋτε, 630, 3. 
 αυξάνω, αΰξω, 322, 13. 
 
 -αυς, Fem. in, 172. 
 ανήκα, with Part., 587, 3. 
 αάτώς·, 200— position with the 
 Art., 389—with Dat., 441, 
 Obs.—in the Genit. with 
 Possess.,474—for the Rel., 
 605, Obs. — ό αυτός, with 
 Dat., 436 b. 
 
 άφαιρεομαι, with doilb. ACC., 
 402. 
 
 άφάσσω, 250, D. 
 άφίπμι, 313,1—Augm. 240. 
 άφ’ οΰ, 556 ; 601. 
 έιψύσσω, 1 ΑθΓ., 269, D. 
 άχαρις, compar. 193, D. 
 άχΟομαι, 326, 12 — Depcn. 
 Pass., 328, 2—with Part., 
 592. 
 
 άχνυμαι, 319, D. Γ0 — Plup. 
 2S7, D. 
 
 άχμί(ς), 69, Obs. 3 ; 445; 455 
 b; without Elision, 64, Obs. 
 1 — άχρι οΰ, 556. 
 
 -αω, Verbs in, 353, 2, and 
 Obs. 2—lengthening, 243, 
 D. 3. 
 
 -αω, Fut. in, 263, D. 
 
 β, inserted between μ and p, 
 51, Obs. 2, and D.; β for μ, 
 sec μ. 
 
 βαδίζω, Fut. Mid. with Act. 
 meaning, 266. 
 
 βαίνω, 321, 1, and D—Perf., 
 317, 1 — 2 Aor., 316, 1 — 1 
 Aor. Mid., 268, D.—mean¬ 
 ing, 329, 2—of the Perf., 
 503. 
 
 βάλλω, Aor., 316, D. 19 — 
 Perf., 2S2—Signif., 476, 2. 
 βάρδιστος, 19S, D. 
 βασίλεια and βασιλεία, 117. 
 βασιλεύς, 161, D. 
 
GREEK INDEX 
 
 385 
 
 βασιλεύω. 
 
 βασιλεύω, with. Genit., 423— 
 Diff. of Pi es, and Aor., 498. 
 βεβρώθω, 324, D. 13. 
 βείομαι, βέομαι, 265, D. 
 βείω, βήΐ], etc., 316, D. 1. 
 βελτίων, βέλτιστος, 199,1. 
 βιάζομαι, Pass, meaning, 
 483, 3. 
 
 βιβάς, 312, D. 14. 
 βίβλος, Fem., 127, 5. 
 βιβρώσκω, 324,13—Aor., 316, 
 D. 23— Perf. Part , 317, D. 
 16. 
 
 βιόω , Aor., 316,13. 
 βλ, Redup., 274, Ex. 
 βλάβετ at, Horn. Pres., 249, D. 
 βλάπτω, Aor.Pass.,299—with 
 Acc., 396. 
 βλαστάνω, 322,14. 
 βλήσΟαι, etc., 316,19. 
 βλίττω, 250, Obs. 
 βλώσκω, 324,12 ; 51, D. 
 βοάω, Fut. Mid. with Act. 
 
 meaning, 236. 
 βόλεται, 366,1). 14. 
 βορράς, Genit. Sing., 122, 
 Obs. 
 
 βόσκω, 326,13. 
 βότρυς, Masc., 140. 
 βούλομαι, 326, 14 — Angm., 
 234,· Obs. — 2 Sing. Pres. 
 Mid.,233,3—Depon. Pass., 1 
 32S 2 
 
 βονς, 159; 160; 35, Obs.—of 
 two Genders, 140. 
 βράσσω, 250, Obs. 
 βράσσων, 198, 1). 
 βραχύς, with Inf., 502. 
 βρο toc, 51, D. 
 βννω, 323, 32. 
 βώσας, 35, L). 1. 
 
 y, Pronunt., 4—Character of 
 Verbs, 251, Obs. — their 
 Fut., 260, 3—Perf., 279. 
 
 * γαμέω , 325,1. 
 χάνομαι, 319, D. 31. 
 
 7 άρ, 630, 6 —yap ovv, 637, 2. 
 
 7 αστί-ρ, 153—Fem., 140. 
 
 77 , Char, of Verbal Stems, 
 251, Obs. 
 
 ye, 641,1—Affix, ibid, 
 yeyova, 327, 14. 
 
 •^ε^ωνέω, 325, D. Of. 
 
 7 είνομαι. Siguif., 329, S. 
 γελάω, 301,1—Aor. Pass., 29S 
 — Fut. Mid. with Act. 
 meaning, 266. 
 
 •γέλως, 109, I). 
 
 •γέμω, with Genit., 418. 
 
 7 ενέσΟαι, ycviyopat, elC., 327, 
 14. 
 
 •γέντο, 316, D. 33.· 
 
 7 εραιός, Compar., 194. 
 
 •γεύω, with Genit., 419, D. 
 •γηθέω, 325, 2. 
 
 7 ηράισκω, 324,1 — Aor., 316, 2. 
 yt into ζ, 5S ; 251. 
 yίyvoμaι, 327, 14—Perf., 317, 
 
 δεύτερος. 
 
 2 —with Genit., 417—with 
 Dat., 432. 
 
 yiyvu /σκω, 324, 14—Aor., 316, 
 14—with Part., 591. 
 yλ, yv, Redupl. with, 274, 
 Ex. 
 
 yoάω, 325, D. n. 
 yow, 177, 4. 
 
 7 οΰν, 641, 2. 
 
 7 ραΰς, 159. 
 
 7 ράφομαι, with Genit., 422. 
 
 7 ράφομαι and 7 ράψω, Diff., 
 481 b. 
 yvvt], 177,5. 
 
 6 inserted betw. v and P , 51, 
 Obs. 2; 2S7, D.; 612—Char¬ 
 acter, 251. See Dentals. 
 δαί, 642, 8 . 
 
 δαίμων, of two Genders, 140. 
 δαίνυμι, 319, D. 32 — Opt., 
 318, D. 
 
 δαίω, meaning, 330, D. 9. 
 δάκνω, 321, S. 
 δάκρυον, 175. 
 δάμαρ, 147, 1, Ex. 
 δάμνημι,312, D. 0 —Aor. Subj. 
 Pass., 293, D. 
 
 δανείζω, Diff. of Act. and 
 Mid., 481 b. 
 δαρθάνω, 322, 15. 
 δάς. Accent, of Genit. Pi. and 
 Dual, 142, 3. 
 
 δατέομαι, 325, D. b —1 Aor. 
 Inf., 269, D. 
 
 -δε, affixed, 94; 212; 216- 
 Enclitic, 92, 5—Local Suf¬ 
 fix, 178. 
 
 δέ, 62S — V ovv, 637, 2. 
 δ,'ατο, 269, D. 
 dty μαι, 312, D. 14, b. 
 δάδα ον, 324, D. 23; 323, D. 40. 
 δέδεyμaι, δίξω, etc., 318, D. 
 δέδια, δέδοικα, 317, 5, and D. 
 δεΐ (see δέω), with Acc. and 
 Inf., 567, Obs. 1— εδει, 490. 
 <3e<'0a>,formsPosition,77,D.— 
 doubling of the δ, 234, D. 
 δείκννμι, 318—with Partic., 
 593. 
 
 δείνα, Indef. Pronoun, 215. 
 δεινός, with Inf., 562. 
 δείρη, 115. 
 δενδρον, 175. 
 
 δέομαι, Depon. Pass., 328, 2 . 
 
 See δέω. 
 δέον, 586. 
 
 δέπας, Dat. PI., 169, D. 
 δέρκομαι, Depon. Pass.,328,2 
 —2 Aor., 257, D.; 59, D.— 
 with Acc., 400 c. 
 δεσμός, Nom. and Acc. PI., 
 175, D. 
 
 3e<rw0Tny,Vcc. Sing.121—Acc. 
 
 Sing. 174, D. 
 δένομαι, 326, D. 15. 
 δεύτατος, 199, D. (Defectives). 
 δεύτερος, with Genitive, 416, 
 Obs. 3. 
 
 δρατός. 
 
 δέχομαι, Perf., 273,D—2 Aor., 
 316, D. 34—Aor. Pass. Sig- 
 nif., 328,4. 
 
 δέω (I bind), 301, 2—Contrac¬ 
 tion, 244,1. 
 
 cSt'o), δέομαι (I am in want of), 
 326,15—with Genit., 418. 
 δή, 642, 4—Affix, 21S. 
 δίβεν, 642, 7. 
 ό;.λον ότι, 633,1 a. 
 δ>ιλόω, Meaning, 476, 1— δη- 
 λόω and όίίλόί e μι, with 
 Part., 590. 
 
 Αημήτ ηρ, 153. 
 
 δήν, makes position, 77, D. 
 δήποτε, Affix, 218. 
 δήπου, δί)πονΰεν, 642, 5. 
 
 -δης, Masc. in, 348. 
 δϊσα, 326, D. 15. 
 δήτα, 642, 6 . 
 δι into ζ,δδ; 251. 
 ό<ά, 448; 458— without Ana- 
 strophe, 90— with Inf. and 
 Article, 574, 2, 3. 
 δία, 181, D. 
 
 διά yω, διαλείπω, διατελέω, 
 
 with Part., 590. 
 δίαιτα, 115. 
 
 διαιτάω, with double Augm., 
 240. 
 
 διάκονέω, with dcub. Augm., 
 240. 
 
 διαλ 70 μαί, Depon.Pass.,328, 
 2—Redupl., 274, Ex.—with 
 Dat., 436 a. 
 
 διάλεκτος, Fem., 127, 5. 
 διαφέρομαι, 436 a. 
 διαφέρω, 423; 440. 
 διάφορος, 436 b. 
 διδάσκω, 324, 2 S, Obs.—Aor., 
 326, D. 40 — with double 
 Acc., 402 — διδάσκομαι, 481. 
 δίδημι, 313, 2. 
 
 δίδωμι, Compounds — Mean¬ 
 ing, 476, 2—with Inf., 561. 
 διδράσκω, 821, 2 —Aoi\, 816, 3. 
 δίεσαν, etc., 313, D. 4. 
 
 |<b£>iM a< > διζω, 313, D. 5. 
 δικάζομαι, Meaning, 481. 
 δίκαιός ειμι, consulted per¬ 
 sonally, 571. 
 
 δίκην, free Acc., 4C4, Obs. 
 δ ότι, 636, 2. 
 
 διπλάσιος, δισσός, etc., 223— 
 with Genit., 4 j. 0, Obs. 3. 
 δίχ a, 445. 
 
 ίΑψάω, Contr., 244,2. 
 
 !<W>kg), with Geuit.,422. 
 3μώ$·,0βη.Ρ1. and Dual,142,3. 
 δοίω, etc., 220, D. 
 
 [όοκίω, 325, 3—with Inf., SCO,2 
 —constr. personally, 571. 
 |cloK0r, Fem., 127, 5. 
 δέ>ξαν, Acc. Abs., 586. 
 ιδόρυ, 177, 6 . 
 
 \δυνπέω, 325, D. C. 
 
 δραμεΐν, δραμονμαι, etc., 327. 
 
 I it- 
 
 Ι^ματόϊ, 300, D, 
 
 II 
 
386 
 
 GREEK INDEX 
 
 δράω. 
 
 δράω, Aor. Pass., 29S. 
 δρόσος, Fem., 127, 5. 
 δύναμαι, 312, 9 — Augm., 234, 
 Obs.—Sabj., Opt., Accent, 
 309—Depon. Pass., 32S, 2— 
 with Inf., 560,1. 
 δίις, Compounds with, 360, 
 Obs.—Augm., 241. 
 δύω, δύνω, 321,7; 301,4 — lAor. 
 Mid., 268, D.—2 Aor., 316, 
 16—Meaning, 329,4. 
 
 e for a, 263, D.—bee. a, 257; 
 
 282; 285; 295; 298. 
 e bee. a, 40; 147, 2; 151; 161, 
 D.; 233,4; 235; 293. 
 e bee. et, 24, D. 3; 42 ; 147,1; 
 
 236; 243, D. B.; 270; 293, D. 
 C bee. 0,165: 278; 340, Obs. 3 
 —bee. ω, 278. 
 
 e for digamma, 34, D. 4; 
 237, D. 
 
 einserted, 254; 259, D. 
 e rejected, 153; 243, D. B.; 
 
 257, D.—in Synizesis, 59, D. 
 e contr. with preceding vow¬ 
 el, 166, D. 
 
 e affixed to the Stem, 322, 
 Obs.; 324, Obs ; 325, etc.— 
 considered as Stem-vowel, 
 43. 
 
 e in the Augm., 236; 275. 
 
 See Syllabic Augm. 
 e in Redupl.,275—asRedupl., 
 
 274, 3, 4. 
 
 e connecting vowel, 233, 1, 
 and D. 3, 6; 262 ; 336, D.; 
 33S, D. 
 
 -e in Nom. Acc. and Vocative 
 Dual, 141. 
 
 ea bee. d, 130—bee. η, 38. 
 
 -ea for eia, 1S5, D. — for w in 
 Acc. Sing., 1S5—in i and 
 v Stems, 157—in Diphth. 
 Stems, 161—bee. n and a, 
 ibid. —bee. η in the Acc. 
 PI., ibid. —bee. d or r? in 
 Fem. of Adj., 1S3—Ending 
 of the Plup., 283, D. 
 t'd·) a, 275, 2; 319,13. 
 eat bee. η, 38 — bee. ei, ibid., 
 Obs. ‘ 
 
 εάν, 639, 2 — in Condit. Sent., 
 535 ; 545; 54S—‘‘whether,” 
 610—Comp, eu 
 εάντε-εάντε, 627. 
 έαξα, 319,13. 
 
 -eu? bee. -ez? in Acc. PI., 157 
 —from (jac, 161, Obs. 
 ί-’αταζ, etc., 315, D. 2. 
 ΐαυτον, 210—used as a pos¬ 
 sessive, 472 a. 
 ίάω, Augm., 236. 
 tyyvr, Compar., 204 — with 
 Genit.,415. 
 εγδούττησα, 325, D. C. 
 έγβ/ρω, 2 Aor., 275,1).—Perf., 
 
 275, 1; 317, D. 12—Mean¬ 
 ing, 330, 2. 
 
 ειπον. 
 
 iypijyopa, 275. 
 εγχελυ?, 158. 
 
 eyu>, Synizesis, 66 — eyioye, 
 
 641.1. 
 
 εδμεναι, 315, D. 3 ; 327, D. 4. 
 εδομαι, Flit., 265. See εσθιω. 
 ee bee. ei, 36—bee. et and >j,j 
 243, D. B. — bee. n in the 
 Dual. See -η. 
 εερχατο, 287, D. 
 
 -ee? bee. et? in Nom. PI., 157 
 —bee. et? and η?, 161 d. 
 
 -εη for -eta, 185, D. 
 εης, 213, D. 
 εθίζω, Augm., 236. 
 et for e, 24, D. 3 — for at, 267, 
 etc.—from e, i, see e, t. 
 et, Redupl., 274, etc.—in the 
 Plup., 283. 
 
 -et in the Dat. Sing., 157; 
 161 b —connecting vowel, 
 233, 1—3 Sing. lnd. Act.,! 
 233, 2—2 Sing. Ind. Mid., I 
 233 3. 
 
 et, 639, 1 —Atonon, 97, 3— in 
 Cond. Sent., 535 — with 
 Ind., 536 —with Opt., 546, 
 etc.—for εάν, 545, Obs. 2. 
 et, e'iOe, et yap, in a wish, 514 
 —“ whether” in Depend. 
 Interr. Sent., 525; 610. 
 et->7, 611 — et κεν, see εάν — 
 el d pa, 637, 1— el yap, 637, 1 
 6 d —el καί, 640, 1—ei ιιή, 
 
 639.1. 
 
 -eta, Fem. in, 1S5—Quantity, 
 117; 341, Obs.; 342, Obs. 
 ειατο, 315, D. 2. 
 είδον, 327, S. 
 
 -e t), Fem. in, 115, D. 2. 
 eke, βικτον, 317, D. 7. 
 
 £Ϊκοσι(ν), 68, 3 ; 220. 
 et/eto, with Genit., 419 c. 
 εικών, Genit., 163. 
 εΐλεω, 625, D. d. 
 ε.λήλουθα, 40, D.; 317, D. 13. 
 ε’ίληψα, ειλρχα, 274, Ex. 
 ε’ίλοχα, 274, Ex.; 279. 
 ei\ov, etc., 327,1. 
 εϊλω, 253, D.—1 Aor., 270, D. 
 είμαι, 319, D. 5. 
 ε'ίμαρται, 274, Ex. 
 ειμί, 315, 1 — Enciit., 92, 3; 
 315, Obs. 2—with Partic., 
 287; 2S9; 291; 505; 590, 
 Obs. — with Genit., 417 — 
 with Dat., 432—Accent of 
 compounds of ε',μί, 315, 
 Obs. 3— ων, 42S, Obs.; 5S0 ; 
 _5S5 b — rip ovTt,441. 
 εΐμι, 314, 1 — Meaning, 314, 
 Obs. 
 
 ε'ινεκα, See ενεκα. 
 eiVt >ov, 319, D. 5. 
 ε'ίξασι, 317, 7. 
 
 -eiov. Neuters in, 345, 2. 
 ε'ίπερ, 639,1. 
 
 είπον, 327, 13—Aor. Impel’ 
 Accent, 333,12. 
 
 έμπειρος. 
 
 -εφ, Subs, in, 172. 
 
 e'ipyvi ιμι, 319,15. 
 
 el pyM, Perf. and Plup., 287, D. 
 
 —with Genit., 419 e. 
 ε'ίρηκα, 274, Ex.; 327,13. 
 είρομαι, 326, D. 16. 
 ε’ίρω, 1 Aor., 270, D.—Perf. 
 
 and Plup., 275, D. 2. 
 εις, 2 Sing, of ε\μί, 92, D. 
 el?, e?, 448 ; 449—Atonon, 97, 
 2—with Inf. and Art., 574, 
 2— el? 6, 556. 
 
 -et?,Nom. PL, 157; 161 d. 
 
 -εις, Masc. and Fem. in, 172. 
 -et?, 2 Sing. Ind. Act., 233, 2. 
 -εις-εσσα-εν, Adj. in, 352, 5: 
 187—Dat. Plur., 50, Obs. 1; 
 149. 
 
 είσα, def. Aor., 269, D. 
 είσκω, 324, D. 35. 
 είσομαι, etc., 314, D. 1. 
 εΐ'σω, with Genit., 415. 
 eira, with Part., 5S7,4. 
 είτε, 94— ε'ίτε-ε’ίτε, 611; 627. 
 ε’ίωθα, 275, 2 ; 278. 
 εκ, εξ, 69, Obs. 2 ; 448 ; 453— 
 with Augm., 238 —Atonon, 
 97, 2—with Inf. and Art., 
 574, 3 —unaltered, 45, Obs.; 
 47, Ex.— 'εξ ον. 556 ; C01. 
 έκάς, Compar., 203, D. 
 
 εκείνος, 212. 
 
 εκίκλετο, 257, D.; 61, D. 
 εκεχειρία, 53,10 d. 
 εκκλησιάζω, Augm., 239. 
 εκλείπω, with Acc., 39S. 
 εκληθάνω, 322, D. 26. 
 εκπλήττομαι, with ACC., 399. 
 εκτός, 327, 6. 
 i κτός, with Genit.,415. 
 ίκών, Genit. Abs., 5S5 6 — 
 7 kwv είναι, 570, Obs. 
 ελάσσων, ελάχιστος, 199, 4 
 — ελαττον, without ή, 626, 
 
 Obs. 
 
 έλαι/ι/ω, 321, 2 — Flit., 263 — 
 Perf., 275, 1—Plup., 287, D. 
 —Meaning, 476,1. 
 
 ^eyxM, Perf. Mid., 275, 1; 
 
 2S6, Obs. 
 ίλείν, 327,1. 
 
 Ιλενθερόω, w.th Genit., 419 e. 
 ελθείν, ελενσομαι, 327, 2. 
 εληλάδατο, 287, D. 
 έλίσσω, 236. 
 
 ίλκύω, έλκω, 301, 1— Allgm., 
 236. 
 
 ί λμα>?, 50, Obs. 2. 
 ελπ,ζω, with Inf.. 569. 
 ελπω, Terf., 275, D. 2— Mean¬ 
 ing, 330,D. 10. 
 ελσα, 270, D. ; 325, D. d. 
 εμαντοΰ, 210—PosS., 472 it. 
 ίμέμηκο v, 2S3, D. 
 
 Ιμέω, 301, 1. 
 εμμεναι, 315, T>. 1. 
 ί-'μμορα, 274, D. 
 
 ‘■μνέμνκα, 275, D. 1. 
 έμπειρος, with Genit., 414, 3. 
 
GREEK INDEX 
 
 387 
 
 e μπλε ως. 
 
 ίίμπλεωε, with Genit., 414, 2. 
 έμπροσθεν, with Genit., 415. 
 tv (iw), 448 ; 450—unaltered 
 in compounds, 49, Obs. 1— 
 bef. p, 51, Obs. 2—Atonon, 
 97, 2—with Inf. and Art., 
 574,4—ty ώ, 556. 
 
 -e(i'), 3 Sing., 68,4. 
 
 -o', Nom. of Neuters, 272. 
 
 -o/, 3 PI. Aor. Pass., 293, B. 
 -tvai, Inf., 276. 
 έναίρω, Aligm., 239. 
 εναντ ιόομαί, Bepon. Pass., 
 328, 2—Augm., 239. 
 ενάντιος, with Pat., 436 b. 
 ϋνασσα, Meaning, 329, P. 
 ενδεής, Avith Genit., 414, 2. 
 ενδύω, with double Acc., 402 
 —Meaning, 329,4. 
 ενείκαι (ενείκοι), 327, P. 12. 
 ένεκα, 445 ; 448; 445, S — with 
 Inf. and Art., 574, 3. 
 ένέπω, εννεπε, ειισπω, etc., 
 327, P.13. 
 
 eveprepoi, 199, P. (Pefect.). 
 ενήι /otiev, 275, P. 2. 
 ένήιΌχα, 327, 12. 
 evt, 90. 
 
 βΐΊ7Γτω, 2 Aor., 257, P. 
 
 ( νισσω, 250, P. 
 εννυμι, 319, 5. 
 
 όοχλί-'ω, double Augm., 240. 
 ti/Tos·, with Geuit., 415. 
 (ντρέπομαι, with Genit., 420. 
 Ιξΐλέ'ίχω, with Part., 593. 
 ({ικνονμαι, Avith Genit., 419 c. 
 εξόν, 586. 
 
 έξω, Comparath-e, 204 — with 
 Genit., 415. 
 
 co bee. ου, 37 — bee. ev, 37, P. 
 1 ; 165, P.; 233, P. 4; 243, 
 P.B.j C. 
 
 to, 60, cio, etc., 205, P. 
 eoi bee. oi, 37. 
 
 (οικα, 317, 7; 275, 2 — con¬ 
 strued personally, 571 — 
 Avith Part., 590. 
 έολπα, 275, P. 2. 
 έοργα, 327, P. 3. 
 εορτάζω, Augm., 237. 
 έός, 20S, P. 
 
 -cor, Genit. in, 161, P. 
 
 -cos·, Adj. in, 352, 4; 1S3—for 
 -6(09, 184, 1). 
 
 con bee. ov, 37—bee. ev, 37, P. 
 t 1; 243, P.B. 
 επανρίσκομαι, 324, 24. 
 έπ 6i, 556— επεάιν, επήν, επάν, 
 557; 635, 5—in Synizesis, 
 66—Avith Aor. Ind., 493— 
 “ Avhenever,” 55S, Obs. 1. 
 επειδή, 556; 635, 6. 
 έ’ποτα, Avith Part., 587,4. 
 ini, 448 ; 463 — Avith Inf. and 
 Art., 574, 2, 4. 
 
 έπιδοξυς, ίπικαίριόν e /μι, con¬ 
 strued personally, 571. 
 επιέσασθαι, 319, 5. 
 επιθνμεω, AA’ith Genit., 420. 
 
 ετάθην. 
 
 επιλαμβάνομαι, έπιλανθάνο- 
 μα<,ΑΑ Γ Β1ι Genit.,419 b; 420. 
 επιλείπω, with Part., 590. 
 έπι μέ λ ομαι, Pepon.Pass.,328, 
 2— Avith Genit., 420. 
 επίσταμαι, 312,10 — Accent, of 
 Subj.audOpt.,309—Bepon. 
 Pass., 32S, 2. 
 
 Ιττίστκμωΐ', Avith Genit.,414,3. 
 επιτήδειός εΐμι, construed per¬ 
 sonally, 571. 
 
 επιτρέπω, with Inf., 560, 1. 
 έπλητο, 312, B./. 
 έπομαι. 327, 5 — Augm., 236. 
 έραζε, 178, B. 
 έραμαι, 312, 11. 
 
 Aor. Mid.,301, P.—with 
 Genit., 420. 
 
 εργάζομαι, Augm., 236. 
 έργαθον, 319, P. 15. 
 έρδω, 327, 3. 
 
 fcptaoa>,250,Obs.—Flit., 260,3. 
 ερεύγομαι, 322, P. 40. 
 ερηρέδαται, 287, P. 
 έριζω, with Pat., 436 a. 
 rpitipos, Nom. PI., 175, P. 
 έρπω, έρπέζω, Aligm., 236. 
 έρμάδαται, 2S7, P. 
 έρρω, 326,17. 
 έρμωγα, 27S ; 319, 24. 
 έρρωμένος, Compar., 196 6. 
 έρση, 115. 
 ερσην, 1S9, Ρ. 
 έρυγγάνω, 323, Ρ. 40. 
 ερύκω, 2 Aor., 257, Ρ. 
 μυσθαι, etc., 314, Ρ. 
 ΐμύω, Aor., 301, Ρ. 
 έρχαται, etc., 319, Ρ. 15. 
 έρχομαι, 327, 2. 
 ερω, 327,13, and Obs. 
 έρως, 177, Ρ. 20. 
 έμωτάω, with doub. Acc.,402. 
 -69, Nom. of Neuters, 172. 
 
 -69, Ending of Nom. PI., 141; 
 173, S, 2. 
 
 εσθίω, 315, P. 3 (εσθω) ; 327, 4 
 — Avith Genit., 419 cl. 
 έσκο v, 337, P. 
 έσπεισμαι, 286,1, Obs. 
 εσπόμην, etc., 327, 5. 
 έσπον, 327, P. 13. 
 
 -εσσα, Fern, of Adj., 187. 
 έσσαι, et.C., 269, P. 
 
 -εσσί(ΐ'), Pat. Pi., 141, P.; 153, 
 P.; 158, P.; 105, P. 
 έσσυμαι, 274, P. 
 έσσων, 199, P. 2. 
 έστε, “until,”550. 
 
 -6στερο9, -εστατο9, Compar. 
 
 Ending, 196. 
 έστήξω, 311, 291. 
 εστί. Accented,90; 315, Obs. 
 
 2— έστιν o'l, οϋ, etc., 603. 
 εστιάω, Augm., 236 — Avith 
 Acc., 400 c — Avith Genit., 
 419 cl. 
 
 έσχατος, 200 ; 391. 
 
 έσω. Compar.,204. See είσω. 
 
 ετάθην, 298. 
 
 ζώννυμι. 
 
 έτάφην, see θάπτω, 
 έτερος, Avith Genit., 416, Obs.3. 
 ετησιαι, Geilit. PI., 123. 
 ετορον, 326, Ρ. 44. 
 ευ bee. ef, 35, P. 2; 24S, Obs. 
 _—from eo, € ov, see eo, eov. 
 el·, 202 — Augm. in Com¬ 
 pounds, 241— el ποιέω, Avith 
 Acc., 396. 
 εναδον, 322, P. 23. 
 ενδιος, Compar., 195. 
 εύεργετέω, with Acc., 396. 
 ευθέ), with Genit., 415— ευθύς, 
 Avith Part., 587,3. 
 svkti μένος, 316, P. 25. 
 ευλαβέ ομαι , Pepon. Pass., 32S, 
 2—with Acc., 899. 
 ei'i/oi!9. Accent, 183—Compar., 
 196 c. 
 
 εϊ’ρίσκω, 324, 25— Avith Part., 
 591. 
 
 ευρύς, Acc. Sing., 157, P. 
 
 -ενς, Genit. in, 101, B.; 165, P. 
 -6t'9, Nom. Sing., 341,1; 349, 
 1; 137; 172. 
 ei'Te, see ore. 
 
 εύφαίνω, Meaning of the Aor. 
 
 Pass., 328,3. 
 
 -ενω, Verbs in, 353,4. 
 έφαγον, 327, 4. 
 
 Ιφ' ω, έφ’ ώτε, 001. 
 εχεα, 209. 
 
 Ιχθρός, Compar., 19S. 
 έχω, 327, 6 — Augm., 236 — 
 Meaning, 476, 1 — Piff. of 
 Pres, and Aor., 49S—Avith 
 Inf., 560,1—Avith Part., 590 
 — έχων, 580 — έχομαι, A\ T ith 
 Genit., 419 b. 
 έφω, 326,19. 
 
 εω for ao, see ao — in the At¬ 
 tic Peclens., 132, etc.—in 
 Contracted Verbs, 243, P., 
 Herod.—as one Syll., 121, 
 P.3 b; 133,1; 157. 
 εω, Genit. Sing., 121, P. 3 b; 
 177, 11 — Verbs in, 248 ; 
 253, 3 —Fut., 260, 2; 204; 
 263. 
 
 έωθα, 275, P. 2. 
 έωμεν, etc., 312, P. 13. 
 
 -eoi!, Genit. of a-Peclens., 
 118, P. 
 
 t'cov <“ till”), 556 ; 035,7. 
 έως, Peel., 163. 
 
 -eto9, Genit., 101, Obs. 
 
 ζ, Pronunt., 5—Pres. Stems 
 in, 251, Obs. 
 ζάω. Contract., 244, 2. 
 
 -ζε, Local Suffix, 178. 
 ζεύγνυμι, 319, 16. 
 
 '/.εύς, 177,7. 
 ζέω, 301,1. 
 
 ζηλόω, with Acc., 398. 
 
 -ζω, Char, of Verbs, 251, Obs. 
 andP.—Fut.,260,3. Comp. 
 203. 
 
 ζώννυμι, 319, 9. 
 
388 
 
 GREEK INDEX 
 
 a. 
 
 », for «, 24, D. 1; 115, D. 2; 
 ISO, D.; 244, 2 ; 161, D.; 
 270, Obs. See e. 
 
 1 1 after o,lS0, Ex.—bee. ω,43. 
 n, Syll. Augm., 234, Obs. 
 
 -η, Voc. Sing., 121—in Acc. 
 PI., 157—in the Dual, 158; 
 166—in the Acc. Sing., 161, 
 D.: 166—Conn.Vowel, 233, 
 1—Ending of 1 and 3 Plur. 
 PI up., 2S3. 
 
 -r7,2Sing.Ind.audSubj.Mid., 
 ‘ 233, 3,4. 
 
 r) and ri, Synizesis, 66—Did'., 
 99; 643,9. 
 
 ή (>ie)-ri (ήε), 611, Obs. 
 ή, in inuir. questions, 610— 
 i'i and ή-ή, 626 a, and Obs. 
 —rt ancl ή ώστε, with Inf., 
 _ 566. 
 
 ti, Iuterr., 607 b— “really?” 
 643, 9 — η ή που, 608; 
 
 636, 6 d— ή μήν, 643, 9. 
 v, “he spoke,”312,1. 
 
 »/u, ί]ειν, 314. » 
 
 i βάσκω, 324, 3. 
 
 »Ι 7 αγο ν, 257. 
 i,6t, 624 b, 1. 
 
 ϊιδομαι, Depon. Pass., 32S, 2 — 
 with Dat., 439, Obs.—with 
 Part., 592. 
 ήδύς, Fem., 1S5, D. 
 ijeipa, 270, D. 
 
 >,k a, 313. 
 ήκιστ a, 199, 2. 
 ϋκω, Meaning, 4S6, Obs. 
 ν,λίκος, Attr. in, 600. 
 ήλι-ον, 323, D. 37. 
 ήλνθον, 327, 2. 
 ήμαι, 315, 2. 
 ήμβροτον, 322, D. 12. 
 
 Κμύν-ι,δ<-_, 624 b, 2. 
 ημί, r,v , ή, 312, 1. 
 ΰμος, 556; 634, 4. 
 ήμπισχον, 823, 36. 
 ήμπλακον, 324, 23. 
 ι.μφίεσα, 319, 5. 
 
 -ην, Νοηι., 172. 
 ήν, See εάν. 
 
 ήνεγκον, ήνεικα, 327,12. 
 ΐ,νικα, 556; 634, 3. 
 ΐ.νιπαπον, 257, D. 
 ήνντο, 319, D. 28. 
 
 »)0 bee. ω, 37- ηος, ηα, ηας, 
 
 161, Obs. — ηον bee. ω, 37. 
 ήπαρ, 176. 
 ήπαφον, 324, D. 83. 
 
 -up, Νοηι. 172. 
 ν ρ, 142, 4. 
 
 'ΐΙμακλΓ,?, 167, D. 
 ϊιραρον, 324, D. 34. 
 νριπον, Meaning, 329, D. 
 ι,ρύμην, 326, 16. 
 
 ->ιγ, Nom. Ρ1·, 161 d. 
 
 -a?, Nom. Sing., 172; 174, D. 
 -η?, Prop. Names in, 174. 
 
 -»i9, Adj. in, 355—Comp., 197. 
 -ησι(ν), Dat. Plur. of a-Decl., 
 ‘ 119, D. 
 
 (. 
 
 ησσων, 199, 2. 
 ήσυχος, Compar., 195. 
 ήτοι, 94; 643, 11 — >!το<- ή, 
 _ 626 α. 
 
 ήτορ, Gender, 139. 
 
 ήττάομαι, with Genit., 423. 
 
 ήττων, 199, 2. 
 
 ήΰτε, 632, 5. 
 
 ι,φιει, 240 ; 313,1. 
 
 ήχα, 279. 
 
 ήχι, 217, D. 
 
 ι,ως, 163, D. 
 
 θ, Prouunt., 7— in the Perf., 
 286, 4—in the Weak Pass. 
 Stem, 298—Nom. Sing, of 
 Stems in, 147, Obs. 2—Af¬ 
 fixed to Pres, and 2 Aor. 
 Stems, 33S, D.—bee. a, 307. 
 See also Dentals. 
 tiavelv, 324, 4. 
 θάπτω, 5-ί c; 298. 
 θαρρέω, with Acc., 399. 
 θασσον, See ταχύς, 
 θάτερον, 65, Obs. 1. 
 θαυμάζω, with Genit., 417, 
 Obs.; 422, Obs. 
 θαυμαστός ύσος, etc.. 602. 
 
 (lea, 115, D. 2 ; 117. 
 θέλω, εθέλω, 326, 20. 
 θέμις, 177, D. 21. 
 
 -θε(ν), Suffix, 178, 2 ; 68, D.— 
 for the Genitive, 205, D.; 
 178, D. 
 
 θεός, Voc. Sing., 129, D. 
 θερειος, 350. 
 θέρομαι, Flit., 262, D. 
 θεω, 24S—Fut., 260, 2. 
 θήλυς, as Fem., 185, Obs. 
 θήν, Enclit., 92,5; 643,17. 
 θηράω, with Accus., 39S. 
 θι bee. σσ, 57. 
 
 -θι, Lee. Sufi'., 178,1—Ending 
 , of 2 P. Impel·., 228; 302,5; 
 307. 
 
 θιγνάνω, 322, 24. 
 θλάω, 301,1. 
 
 θνύσκω, 824, 4—Perf., 317, 3— 
 Perf. Part., 276, D.—3 Fut., 
 291—Signif., 4S6, Obs. 
 θοιμάτιον, 65, Obs. 1. 
 θορνυμαι, 324, I). 15. 
 θριξ, 54 a; 145. 
 θρύπτω, 54 c. 
 θρώσκω, 59 ; 324,15. 
 θυηάτηρ, 153. 
 
 ει/- προ- θυμέομαι, Depon. 
 
 Pass., 32S, 2. 
 θύράσι(ν), 179. 
 
 θύω, 301, 2— Aor. Pass., 53, 
 10 b. 
 
 θώ<, Genit., PI. and Du.,142,3. 
 
 i,Pronunt.,4—Long by Nat., 
 83, Obs. 1 — Lengthened, 
 253, Obs .—t bee. «, ει, οι, 
 40; 27S —i of the Stem bee. 
 e, 157—Changes, 55; 16S; 
 250, etc. 
 
 ίσος. 
 
 -i, Locative Ending, 179 — 
 Demonst., 212—Neut. in, 
 139; 172. 
 
 -t, Nom. Ending in the PI., 
 134, 9 — Dat. Sing., 141; 
 173, 2. 
 
 μ sign ot the Opt., 22S-Ke- 
 dupl., 30S; 327, D. 17—Con¬ 
 nect. Vowel, 348; 351—Af¬ 
 fixed to the Stem in the 
 Dat. PI., 119; 134, 8. 
 t, Subscribed, S: 12; 27; 65, 
 Obs. 2—Dat. Sing., 134, 3; 
 169; 173,2. 
 
 i, Verbs in the Pres, with, 
 250, etc., 322, Obs. —their 
 Fut., 260, 3 ; 262. 
 ia for ιο, 348. 
 
 -la, Fem. in, 346, 3; 185, 
 etc. 
 
 ’ία, ιής, Ip, iw, 220, D. 1. 
 
 Ιάομαι, Meaning of the Aor. 
 
 Pass., 32S, 4. 
 ίαΐ'ω, 327, D. 17. 
 
 -ιαω, Verbs in, 353, Obs. 2. 
 
 Ιδέ (Conj.),624 5,1—(Impel*.), 
 327,8; 333,12. 
 
 -ίδιον, Neut. in, 347,1, Obs. 
 'ίδιος, with Genit.,414,1—with 
 Dat., 436 b. 
 ίδρις, 15S; 189,3. 
 ιδρύω, Aor. Pass., 29S, D. 
 ίδρώς, 169, D. 
 ιερός, with Genit., 414,1. 
 ιζάνω, 322,17. 
 ίζομαι, 326, 21. 
 
 -ιζω, \ 7 erbs in, 353, 5—Fut., 
 263. 
 
 m, Char, of the Op f 293 ; 
 
 302, 4. 
 ίημι, 313, 1. 
 
 .θυς, Super!., 193, D. 
 ίκμενος, 316, D.; 823, D. S3. 
 ίκνέομαι, ίκνυυμαι, 323, 53— 
 1 Aor., 26S, I). 
 
 -ικος, Adj. in, 351 — with 
 Genit., 414, 6. 
 
 ίλάσκομαι, 324, 5 — Impel'., 
 312, D. 15. 
 ίλεως, 1S4. 
 ίμάσσω, 250, D. 
 
 -iv , Subs, in, 172— iv. Dual 
 Ending in Genit. and Dat., 
 134,6; 173,4. 
 
 'iva, 63S, 1—in Sentences cf 
 Purpose, 530. 
 
 -ivo?, Adj. in, 352, 3, 4, Obs. 
 -io, Genit. Ending, 128, D. 
 -ioi/,Neut. in, 347,1. 
 
 -ιος, Adj. in, 350. 
 
 Ιξόν, 323, D. 33. 
 ίρος, 35, D. 1. 
 
 -<?, Nom. of Fem. in, 138; 172 
 —Barytones in Acc. Sing., 
 156. 
 
 ίσκε, 324, D. 36. 
 
 -ισκος, -ισκη. Subs, in, 347, 2. 
 ϊσοί, Compar., 195—withDat., 
 I 486 b. 
 
GREEK INDEX 
 
 389 
 
 -ιστερος. 
 
 - ιστερος, -ίστατον, Compar., 
 19Τ. 
 
 ιστημι, Perf., 317, 4— Mean¬ 
 ing, 329,1—of the Perf.,503. 
 ισχύω, DiiF. of Pres. and Aor., 
 49S. 
 
 ιχθύς, Dat. Sing., 158, D.— 
 Acc. P1.,15S—Masc.,140. 
 ιχώρ, Acc. Sing., 175, D. 
 
 -id)v, Nom. of Masc. in, 348, 
 Obs. 
 
 -ίων, -ιστός, Compar., 19S. 
 
 k, in ούκ, G9, Obs. 1 — New- 
 Ion. for π, 216, D—Asp. in 
 the Perfect, 279. See also 
 Gutturals. 
 
 -κα, 1 Aor. in,.310. 
 καθεδοϋμαι, 326, 21. 
 καθεύδω, 326, IS — Augm., 240. 
 κάθημαι, 315, 2 — Augm., 240. 
 καθίζω, Fut., etc., 326, 21— 
 Augm., 240. 
 
 καί, 624 b — Cras’s, 65 —with 
 Numbers, 222—with Part., 
 5S7, 5— καί c -ς, καί τόν, 369, 
 2 — καί <57, 624, 3 — καί-καί, 
 624, 2, 3 — καί δη καί, 624, 4 
 —καί 61 , 640, 2 — και τότε <3ί/, 
 642,4 α. 
 
 καίνυμαι, 319, D. 33. 
 καιπερ, with Part., 5S7, 5. 
 καίτοι, 630, 6 ; 94. 
 καίω, 35, Obs. : 253, Obs. — 
 Future, 260, 2—1 Aorist, 
 269, D. 
 
 κακόν λέγω, κακώς 7roito),with 
 
 Acc., 402; 396. 
 κακός, Compar., 199, 2. 
 καλε'ω, 301,3. 
 καλάς, Compar., 199,6. 
 κάμνω, 321, 9— Perfect, 282 — 
 with Acc., 400 b — with 
 Part., 590. 
 
 κάνεον, κάνουν, 131, 3. 
 κάρα, 177, D. 22. 
 καρτεράω, with Part., 590. 
 κατά, 448: 459—Apocope, 64, 
 D. — with Inf. and Art., 
 574, 2. 
 
 καταπλήττομαι, with ACC., 
 399. 
 
 κατηγορέω, Augm., 239. 
 κάτω, Compar., 204. 
 κεΐαί, etc., 269, D. 
 κείμαι, 314, 2. 
 κείνος, see εκείνος, 
 κείρω, Flit., 262,1). 
 κεκασμαι, 320, D. 33. 
 κέκλημ at, Meaning, 503. 
 κέκτημαι, 274, Ex. — Moods, 
 289—Meaning, 503. 
 κελαδάω. 325, D. e. 
 κελεύω, Perf., 288. 
 κελλω, Flit., 266, Ex. 
 κέλομαι, Aor., 257, D. 
 κε(ν), 68, D.—Enclit., 92, 5. 
 See άν. 
 
 κεντάω, 325, T).f. 
 
 κννέω. 
 
 κεράνννμι, 319, 1—Sub. Mid., 
 
 I 312, D. 16. 
 
 κ ερδαίνω, Aor., 270, Obs.— 
 Perf., 322, Obs. 
 κεσκετο, 337, D. 
 κΓ;αι, etc., 269, D. 
 κηδω, 326, D. 41. 
 κι,ρυξ, S3, Obs. 1; 145. 
 κικλήσκω, 324, D. 31. 
 κίνυμαι, 319, I). 34. 
 κίρνημι, 312, D. b. 
 κιχάνω, 321, IS. 
 κιχημι, 313, D. 6 ; 322,18. 
 κίχρημι, 312, 7. 
 κιών, etc., 319, D. 34. 
 κλάζω, 251, Obs.— Meaning 
 of the Perf. Act., 276,1). 
 Κλαίω, 253, Obs.; 326, 22 — 
 Fut., 260, 2. 
 κλάω, 301, 1. 
 κλείς, Acc., 156. 
 κλείω, κλί^ω, Perf. Mid., 2SS. 
 κλέπτης, Compar., 197. 
 κλέπ-ω, Perfect, 279— Aorist 
 Pass., 235. 
 
 -κλ ?, Proper Names in, 167; 
 174. 
 
 κλίνω, Perf., 282. 
 κλΰω, Aor., 316, D. 27. 
 κνάω, Contr., 244, 2. 
 κνίσση, 115, D. 2. 
 κοινός, κοινωνεω, with Genit., 
 414, 1; 419 a —with Dat., 
 436 a, b. 
 
 κοΊος, κόσος, etc., 216, D. 
 κολακεύω, with Acc., 336. 
 κόπτω and compounds,Mean¬ 
 ing, 476, 2. 
 κορέννυμι, 319, 6. 
 κορεω, Aor., 301, D. 
 κόρη, κόρρη, 115. 
 κορύσσω, 250, D. — Perfect, 
 2S6, D. 
 
 -κός, Adj. in, 351. 
 
 κοτέω, Aor., 301, D. — Perf. 
 
 Part., 277, D. 
 κράζω, 251—Perf., 317, 8. 
 κρατέω, with Genit., 423. 
 κράτος, etc., See κάρα, 
 κρατύς, Positive, 199, D. 1. 
 κρείσσω v, κράτιστος, 199, 1, 
 Obs. 
 
 κρεμάννυμι, κρέμαμαι, 319, 2; 
 312, 12—Acc. of Sub. and 
 Opt., 309. 
 κρεμάω, 319, D. 2. 
 κρέσσων, 199, D. 1. 
 κρήμναμαι, 312, D. C. 
 κρίνω, 253, Obs.—Perf., 2S2; 
 286, Obs. 
 
 κρούω, Perf. Mid., 288. 
 κρύπτω, with double Acc.,402. 
 κτείνω, Aor., 316,4. 
 κτίννυμι, 319, 17. 
 κτυπεω, 325, D. (J. 
 κυίακω, 324, 21. 
 κυκεών, Acc. Sing., 171, D. 
 κυλίω, Perf. Mid., 2S8. 
 κννέω, 323, 34. 
 
 μακράν. 
 
 κύντερος, 199, D. 
 κυρέω, κύρω, 325, 4 — Future, 
 262, Ex.—with Part., 590. 
 κύσαι, κύσσα, 323, D. 34. 
 κύων, 177, 8. 
 
 κωλύω, with Inf., 560,3. 
 
 λ doubled after the Syll. 
 Augm., 234, D. — Charac¬ 
 ter, 252. 
 
 λ, μ, v, p, Metathesis, 59 — 
 Position, 77, /. and D.— 
 Redupl., 274, 2 —Fut. of 
 Stems in, 262—Aor., 270— 
 Perf., 2S0. 
 
 λ, v,p, Monos. Stems in, Perf., 
 282—Aor. Pass., 29S. 
 λαγχά νω 322,27—with Genit. 
 
 and Acc., 419, Obs. 
 λα~)ώς, 174. 
 
 λάθρα, with Genit,., 415. 
 λάλον, Compar., 197. 
 λαμβάνω, 322, 25 — Perf., 274, 
 Ex.—with Genit., 419 5— 
 Meaning, 4S0. 
 λάμ\!/ομαι, 322, D. 25. 
 λαι/ίΐάι/ω, 322, 26—with Acc., 
 398—with Part., 530. 
 λάς, 177, 9. 
 
 λάσκω, 324, 29, and Obs. 
 λέγομαι, construed person¬ 
 ally, 571. 
 
 λέγω (collect), Perf., 279—2 
 Aor. M., 316, D. 35. 
 λείπομαι, with Genit., 423. 
 λέκτο, λέγμενος, etc., 316, D. 
 
 36; 268, D. 
 λέληκα, 324, 29. 
 λελο7χα, 322, D. 27. 
 λεύω, Perf. Mid., 28S. 
 λήθω, 322, 26. 
 ληκεω, 324, D. 29. 
 λί ξομαι, 322, 27. 
 λήχΐ/ομαι, 322, 25. 
 λί bee. λλ, 56 ; 252. 
 λίσσομαι, 250, D. 
 λλ, Pres. Stems in, 252. 
 λόε, 244, D. 4. 
 λόεσσα, 269, D. 
 τό λοιπόν, 405, Obs. 2. 
 λοΊσθος, λοίσθιος, 191), D. 
 
 -λθ9, Adj. in, 352, Obs. 
 λούω, Constr., 244, 4—1 Aor., 
 269, D. 
 
 λυπούμαι , with Dat., 439,Obs. 
 λύω, 301, 2—Perf. Opt. Mid., 
 289, D—Aor., 316, D. 28— 
 with Genit., 419 e. 
 λωίων, λωστος, 199,1. 
 
 μ bef. p,51,Obs. 2—bef. λ bee. 
 β, 51, D.—Change of pre¬ 
 ceding Cons., 47; 286, 1— 
 doubled after the Syll. 
 Augm., 234, D. 
 μά, 643,16. 
 
 -μα, Nom. cf Neuters, 343,1; 
 139. 
 
 μακράν, 4Γ5, Obs. 2. 
 
39ί) 
 
 GEEEK INDEX 
 
 μήλα. 
 
 μήλα, μαλλοι/, μάλιστα, 202 — 
 μάλιστα δή, 642 α. 
 μήν, See μ>';ν. 
 
 μανθάνω, 322, 2S — with Part., 
 591. 
 
 μήντίΓ, of both Genders, 140. 
 μάρναμαι, Imper., 312, D. d. 
 μαμ τνμεω, 325, 5. 
 μάρτνς, 177, 10. 
 μάσσων, μήκιστος, 198, D. 
 μασηζω, 251, Obs.—Future, 
 200, 3. 
 
 μάστιξ, 177, D. 23. 
 μάχομαι, μαχέομαι, 326, 23, 
 and D. — with Dat., 436 a. 
 με'γα?, 191 — Compar., 198 — 
 μεγα, 401. 
 μέδομαι, 326, D. 42. 
 μεθΰσκω, 324,22. 
 μείρομαι, Pei f., 274, D. 
 μει?, 177, D. 24. 
 
 μειων, See μικρός —μεΐον With¬ 
 out ii,G26, Obs. 
 
 μέλας, 1S6 
 
 μέλει, 326, 24 — with Cenit., 
 420. 
 
 μέλλω, 326, 85— Angm , 234, 
 Obs. — as Pllt., 501— -πως, τ. 
 ου μέλλω, 501, Obs. 2. 
 μέματον, etc., 817, D. 9. 
 μέμβλεται, etc., 326, 1). 24. 
 μέμβλωκα, 51, D. ; 2S2, D. ; 
 324, D.12. 
 
 μεμετιμένος, 313, D. 1. 
 μέμνημαι, 274, Εχ. — Sllb.Opt., 
 2S9, D. — Meaning, 563 — 
 with Part., 591. 
 μεν, COmp. μι v — μέν- δέ, 62S — 
 μεν ονν, 637, 2. 
 
 -μεν, 1 Pers. Dual and Plural 
 Act., 226. 
 
 -μεναι, -μεν, Inf. Act., 233, 
 D. 3 ; 255, D.— Aor. Pass.. 
 293, D. — in Verbs in μι, 
 302, D. 
 μέντοι, 630, 5. 
 με'νω, 326, 26. 
 μεσημβρία, 51, Obs. 2. 
 μέσος, Compar., 195— Mean¬ 
 ing, 301. 
 
 μεστός, with Genit.,414, 2. 
 μετή,44δ; 464 —Adverb, 446. 
 μεταδιδωμι, μετ αλαμβάνω. 
 
 with Genit., 419 a. 
 μεταμέλομαι, Dep. Pass., 32S. 
 
 2—with Part., 592. 
 με raf v,445 ; 448; 455, 7—with 
 Part., 587,2. 
 
 μεταπέμπομαι, Pass, mean., 
 4S3,3—Indir. Mid., 479. 
 ιχετέχω, μέτοχο?, with Genit., 
 419 a, and Obs.; 414,5. 
 μέχρι(ς), 69, Observ. 3 ; 445; 
 44S ; 455, 6; 556—without 
 Elision, 64, Obs. 1. 
 μ>;, Synizesis, 66—Neg., 612, 
 etc.—in sentences of pur¬ 
 pose, 530—with Verbs of 
 prohibiting,51S; 510—with 
 
 νέατος. 
 
 Verbs of fearing, 512 ; 533 ; 
 616, Obs. 3—with Future 
 and Perf. Inch, 533, Obs.— 
 with Hypoth. Part., 588- 
 in questions,608—“wheth¬ 
 er perchance,” 610— μη ου, 
 621 ; 512 ; 533 — μη in, 
 622, 4. 
 
 μηδείς, μήπω, etc., See ουδείς, 
 ουπω, etc. 
 
 μηκάιομαι, 325, D. Ο. 
 μέν, 643,12. 
 μήτηρ, 150, 153. 
 
 -μι, 1 Pers. Sing. Act., 226; 
 302, 1 — Subj., 233, D. 1; 
 255, D. 
 
 μιγννμι, 319, IS. 
 μικρός, Compar., 199, 3. 
 μιμέομαι, Meaning, 828, 4— 
 with Acc., 398. 
 μ·μνί ; σκω, 274, Ex.; 324, 6 — 
 μιμνησκομαι, with Genit., 
 420. 
 
 μίν, 205. D. 
 
 Μινών, Acc. Sing., 1G3, D.; 
 174, D. 
 
 μισγω, 327, 7—Aor. Mid., 316, 
 D. 87. 
 
 μν, in divis. of Syll., 72,1. 
 Mva, Genit. Sing., 116 c. 
 μνέμωυ, with Genit.,414,3. 
 μολονμαι, 324, 12. 
 μόνον ου, ουχί, 622, 5. 
 μονοφάγος, comp , 197. 
 
 -μος, Masc. in, 342, 2— Adj. 
 
 in, 352, Obs. 
 μυζω, 326, 27. 
 μυκάομαι, 325, D. p. 
 μυς, MaSC., 140. 
 
 v, before σ (and ζ) dropped, 
 49; 147,1; 149; 187—bef. 
 other Con son., 51—bee. γ, 
 51; 282—Present Stems in, 
 253 — dropped in Perfect 
 Stems, 2S2 ; 286, 1, Obs.— 
 inserted in 1 Aor. Pass., 
 29S, D.—affixed to Verl).- 
 Stem, 321—doubled after 
 the Syll. Angm., 234, D.— 
 doubled in the Pres.Stem, 
 318,3—movable, 68. 
 
 -v, in the Acc. Sing., 184, 4; 
 141; 155, etc. ; 173, 3—in 
 Neuters, 125—1 Pers. Sing, 
 in Hist. Tenses Act., 226— 
 3 PI. in Hist. Tenses, 226 ; 
 302, D. 
 
 -να, affixed to Verb.-Slems. 
 312, D. 
 
 -ναι, Inf., 302, 6; 333,1. 
 ναι, 643,14. 
 
 ναιβτάω, Contr., 243, D.l. 
 
 177,11. 
 
 v<5, vW, vr, dropped before a. 
 
 50—147,1; 149. 
 
 -νε, affixed to Verb.-Stems, 
 323. 
 
 VtUTO?, 200. 
 
 ο’ίκαδε. 
 νέμω, 326, 28. 
 νε'ω, 248—Fut., 2CO, 2. 
 νή, 643,15. 
 νιζω, 251, Obs. 
 
 νικάω ’ολύμπια, 400 c — Mean¬ 
 ing, 4S6, Obs. 
 viv, 205, D. 
 
 ΰπο-, δια-, εν-, προ- νοέομαι, 
 
 Dep. Pass., 328, 2. 
 νομίζω, with Genitive, 417— 
 with Inf., 569. 
 
 -νος, Adj. in, 352, Obs. 
 νοσεω,ϋϊίΤ. of Pres. and Aor., 
 498. 
 
 νόσος, Fern., 127,5. 
 
 -vti, 3 Plur. of ITinc. Tenses 
 Act., 226. 
 
 -ντων, 3 PI. Imper. Act., 22S. 
 -w affixed to Verb.-Stems, 
 304,2; 318,1. 
 
 νύμφα, Voc. Sing., 117, D. 3. 
 vv(v), 68, D.—Enelit., 92, 5— 
 Diff. of vvv and vvv, 99 ; 687, 
 3 — vvv δή, 642, 4 c. 
 νωιτερο?, 20S, D. 
 
 ξ , 34 ; 4S ; 260. 
 
 -ξ , Masc. and Fem. in, 172. 
 
 ξέω, 301,1. 
 
 ξνρέω , 325, 6. 
 
 ξύω, Perf. Mich, 28S. 
 
 o, bee. ov, 24, D. 3 ; 42 ; 147,1 ; 
 bee. oi, 24, D. 3 — bee. ω, 40 ; 
 147, 2; 151; 193; 233, 4— 
 bee. ε, 243, D. c — dropped 
 after αι, 194—for a, 268, D. ; 
 354—Conn.Vowel,178; 233, 
 1; 354. 
 
 -o, Genit. Ending, 122, Obs.; 
 128; 131, D. 
 
 6, for ί,ς, 213, D.—Neut. for 
 on, 633,1 — Orasis, 65. 
 ο μεν — ό δέ. 369,1 — τόν καί τύν, 
 369, 2. See τό. 
 οα bee. ω, 37— bee. α, 183. 
 οόε, 212; 475. See also De- 
 monst. Pron. 
 διρεσθαι. With ACC., 400 C. 
 ϋδωδα, 275, D. 1. 
 οε bee. ov, 37. 
 
 οει bee. oi or ov, 37 ; 243, Obs. 
 -οειδης, Adj. in, 359, 2, Obs. 
 όζω, 326, 29—Perf. 275, D. 1. 
 οη bee. ω, 37. 
 θι, ττόθΐ, τ όθι, 217, D. 
 όθούινεκα, 636, 3. 
 οι from ι, 40— bee. ω, 235. 
 
 -οι. dropped, 64, D.—Short in 
 regard to Acc., 83, Obs. 2; 
 108—Voc. ending, 163. 
 ο"γννμι, 319, 19. 
 οίδα, 317, 6 — with Part., 591. 
 οιόήνω, οιδέω, 322,19. 
 
 Ο.διπους, 174, D. 
 
 -oin, ending for -οια, 115, D. 2, 
 -oiiv, Genit. and Dat. Dual, 
 128, D.; 141, D. 
 
 >ικαδε, 94; 1 » 8. 
 
GREEK INDEX 
 
 ο,κειος. 
 
 ο'ικε'ος, with Genit., 414,1— 
 with Dat., 436 b. 
 οίκοι, 179. 
 
 o KTpos-'Compar., ICS. 
 οϊμαι, 244. 
 
 ο.μωζω, 251, Obs.—Fut., 260,3 
 —Mean, of Fut. Mid., 266. 
 -oiv, ending of Genitive and 
 Dative Dual, 141; 173, 4. 
 ο'.νοχοέω, Augm.j 237, D. 
 
 -oio, in the Genit., 128, D.— 
 2 Pel’s. Sing. Opt. Mid., 
 233, 5. 
 o'.o, 213, D. 
 
 ο’ίομαι , ui ομαι , 326,30—2 Pers. 
 Sing. Pres., 233, 3 — Dep. 
 Pass., 328, 2. 
 
 oio?, Attr. and Article, 600 — 
 with Inf., 601 — ο 7 όστε, 94 
 — o'or, ola όη, with Part., 
 587, 6. 
 oir, ICO. 
 
 οίσε, 268, D.— ο'σει , 327,12. 
 -οισι{ i), Dat. PI., 128, D. 
 ο σω, etc., 327,12. 
 οίχομαι, οϊχν^ω, 326, 31, and 
 D.—Meaning, 4S6, Gbs.— 
 with Part., 590. 
 ολέκω, 319, D. 20. 
 ΰλίγοί, Com par., 199,4. 
 Ιλιγωρίω, with Genit., 420. 
 νλισθιίνω, 322, 20. 
 όλλυμι, 319, 20—Meaning of 
 Perf., 329, 9; 503 — Itera¬ 
 tive, 337, D. 
 όλο r, Position, 390. 
 
 ’ Ολύμπια , 400 C. 
 όμιλίω, with Dat., 436 a. 
 όμνυμι, 319, 21 — ivith the 
 Acc., 399. 
 
 όμοιος, όμοιόομαι, όμολο·) έω 
 όμοΰ, etc., with Dat., 436 a, 
 b, c. 
 
 όμολογρομαί, constr. person- 
 ally, 571. 
 
 όμόργι/υμί, 319, 22. 
 ομώνυμοί, with Dat., 436 b. 
 όμως, 630,7—after Participle, 
 587, 5. 
 
 -oi/, Nom. of Neuters, 172. 
 ίίνειρος, 175. 
 
 όνινημι, 312, 2—Acc. of Aor. 
 Sub. and Opt. Mid., 309— 
 with Accus., 396. 
 ίίνομαι, 314, D. 
 όξίυω, Perf. Mid., 286, Ohs. 
 oo bee. ot>, 36 ; 130. 
 
 -009, Adj. in, 1S3. 
 r.ov, 213, D. 
 όπηνίκα, 634, 3. 
 όπισθεν, with Genit., 415. 
 οπότε, όπόταν, 550 ; 634, 1— 
 “ as often as,” 55S, Obs. 1. 
 όπωπα, 275, D. 1. 
 όπως, 632, 3—in sentences of 
 purpose, 530 — with av, 531 
 b, Obs.—with Future Inch, 
 500; 553 — in Challenges 
 and Warnings, 553, Obs.— 
 
 ούξ. 
 
 ί πως μύ, with Verbs of 
 Fearing, 533, Obs. 
 όράω, 327, S—Double Augm., 
 237—Perf., 327, 8; 275, D. 1 
 —with Part., 591. 
 
 <’’ργα< νω, Aor., 270, Obs. 
 όρρ-γνυμι, 319, D. 36. 
 ορέγομαι, with Gcn.t., 419 c. 
 i’ptoi/To, 320, D. 37. 
 όργις , 177,12—Acc. Sing., 156. 
 ϋρννμι, 319, D. 37—2 Aorist 
 Mid., 316, D. 38. 
 ορονται, 327, D. 8. 
 ορόω, 243, D. 3 ci. 
 ορσεο, 26S, D. 
 ορύσσω, Perf., 275,1. 
 υρωρα, 320, D. 37. 
 
 -09, Neuters in, 243, 2, and 
 Obs.; 139; 172—Ending of 
 Genit., 141; 157, D.; 173, 
 8 , 1 . 
 
 09, llelative, 213—Demonst., 
 212, D.; 213, Obs., and I).— 
 for the Possess, of 1 and 2 
 Pers., 471, Obs. c.; 2C8, D. 
 όσος, Attl'., 600 —< σον, 601 — 
 όσον ου, 622, 5. 
 όσσάτίθ9, 216, D. 
 όσαε, 177, D. 25. 
 
 < στις, 94—214, Obs. 2— > στις 
 and όστιςοΰν, Mean., 600. 
 οσφραίνομαι, 322,21, and Obs. 
 <·τε, όταν, 556; 634, 1 — with 
 Aor. Inch, 493—“as often 
 as,” 558, Obs. 1. 
 ότι and 6 τι, 214, Obs. 2. 
 ότι, 633, 1—without Elision, 
 64, Obs. 1 — in Dependent 
 Declarative Sentences, 525 
 — ότι μή, 633,1 b. 
 ότι η, 218. 
 
 6t(9, 214, D. 
 ου from o. See o. 
 
 -ου. Genitive endintr, 122, 2; 
 128; 134, 2-Conn. Vowel, 
 233,1—2 Pers. Sing. Impel’, 
 ancl Imperf. Mid., 233, 5. 
 ου, ουκ, ουχ, 69, Obs. 1; 52, D. 
 —Atonous, 97,4; 612, etc. 
 —with Prohibitives, 499, 
 Obs.—in questions,608— ού 
 7 lip, ου yetp αλλά, 636, 6 d. 
 — ου δ,,τα, 642, 6 — ουκ άρα, 
 637, 1— οΰ μή, 620 —ου μήν 
 
 ( μέντοι ) αλλά, 622, 6 — ου 
 μόνον-αλ\<ί Καί, 624, 6. 
 ου, οι, 1, etc., Meaning, 471, 
 Obs. b. 
 οόδέ, 625,1. 
 
 οΰδείς, 221 — Attr., C02 — ουδόν 
 622,1. 
 
 ουκέτι, 622, 2. 
 
 οϋκονν and ουκουν, Diu. 99: 
 637, 2. 
 
 οόλόμενος, 319, D. 20. 
 ονν, 637, 2 — Affixed, 218. 
 
 -οΰν, Acc. Sing., 163, D. 
 otlvcKa, 636, 3. 
 ούξ , 65, D. 
 
 3J1 
 
 πάσχω, 
 οϋπω, 622, 2. 
 
 \οόρίω, Augment, 237. 
 
 '-01/9, Adj. in, 183 ; 352, 4— 
 _Nom. of Subs., 172. 
 ot-9, 177, 13 ; 142, 3 — Neut., 
 140. 
 
 οΰτάω, Aor., 316, 20, D. 
 οϋτε, 94— ούτε—ούτε, οντε-ουδε, 
 
 625. 2, and Obs. 
 
 οΰτι, 622,1. 
 οΰτοι, 643,10. 
 
 οοτο9,212; 475;— in address¬ 
 ing, 393— οίτυσί, 212. 
 ouT(o(9),69,Obs.3—with Part., 
 587, 4. 
 
 ουχι, 97, Obs. 
 
 οϋχ ότι, οόχ όπως, 622, 3, 4. 
 ϋφειλω and ΰώιλλω,ϋ.ίι.,253, 
 Obs. 
 
 όφείλω, 326, 32. 
 όφέλλω, 1 Aor., 270, D. 
 όφ\ισκάνω, 322, 22. 
 όφρα, 556; 635,10. — See αα. 
 όφρίς, Acc. Pi., 15S. 
 
 6 χο9, Ρ1., 174, D. 
 όχωκα, 327, D. 6. 
 
 6ψ(09, Comp., 195. 
 οψομαί, 327, 8. 
 οψοψάγ09, Compar., 197. 
 
 -οω, Length, in Contr. Verb, 
 243, D. A. 3 — Attic Fut., 
 263, D.—Verbs in, 353, 1, 
 and Obs. 1. 
 
 π, doubled, 217, D. (62, D.) — 
 Aspir. in Perf., 279. 
 πα~ς, Genit., Plur. and Dual, 
 142, 3—Voc. Sing., 148—of 
 two Genders, 140. 
 παίω, Perf. Mid., 2S8. 
 παλαιός, Compar., 194. 
 πάλα/, in Compos, before σ, 
 49, Obs. 1. 
 
 πάλλω, Aor. 257, D.^—2 Aor. 
 
 Mid., 316, D. 40. 
 παν, 142, b — in Compos, be¬ 
 fore σ, 49, Obs. 1. 
 παντάπασι(ν), 6S, 3. 
 παρά, παραι, πάρ, 44S, III. ; 
 
 465—Apoc., 64, D. 
 πάρα, 90. 
 
 παρανόμι ω, irreg. A llgm.,239. 
 παραπλί σιυς, With Dat., 436 
 b —Compar., 195. 
 παρατίθεμαι , 4S1. 
 παραχωρ 7 ωΛνί11ΐΟθ1)ΐί.,4 19 C. 
 παρέχω and παρέχομαι, 4S0. 
 παρέχω, with Inf., 561. 
 παροινέω, double Allg., 240. 
 παρόν, 586. 
 πάρος, 565; 635,12. 
 παρρησιάζομαι. Atlgin., 239. 
 πΰ9, Genit·. and Dat. Accent., 
 142, 2—meaning with and 
 without Art., 390, and Obs. 
 πάσσω, 250, 01)S.—Fut. 260, 3. 
 πάσσων, 198, D. 
 πάσχω, 327, 9— Γβΐ’ί., 317, D. 
 14, / 
 
392 
 
 GREEK INDEX 
 
 πατέομαι. 
 
 πράττω. 
 
 πατβομαί , 325, Τ. 
 
 •πατήρ, 153. 
 
 •παύομαι, Aorist, 29S — with 
 Genit., 419 e — with Part, 
 mean., 590. 
 
 πείθω, Aorist, 257, D.—Perf., 
 317, D. 15—Fut. and Aor. 
 Part., 326, D. 43 — Mean¬ 
 ing, 330, 3; 503. 
 πεινάω, Contr., 244, 2. 
 πείσομαι, 327, 9. 
 πελάζω, 1 Aor. Impel'., 268, D. 
 πέλεκυς, Masc., 140 ; 157. 
 πέμπω, Perf., 279. 
 πένης, Compar., 192—with 
 Genit., 414, 2. 
 πέποιθα, 317, D. 15. 
 πέπονθα, 317, D. 14. 
 πέπρα-γα and πέπραχα, Diff., 
 330. 
 
 πιπράσκω, 324, 7. 
 πίπτω, 327, 15 — Perf. Part., 
 317, D. 17. 
 πίσιψες, 220, D. 4. 
 πιτνέω, 323, 35. 
 πίτνημι, 312, D. Q. 
 πιφαύσκω, 324, D. 32. 
 πιων, Compar., 196 a. 
 πΧάζω, 251, Obs. 
 πλάσσω, 250, Obs. —Future, 
 260, 3. 
 
 πλείων, πλεΤστος, 199, 5 — 
 πλέον, without ή, 626, Obs. 
 — πλενν, 199, D. 5. 
 πλέκω, Aor. Pass., 295. 
 πλέω, 248—Fut., 260, 2 ; 264 
 —Perf. Mid., 2S8. 
 πλέω?, 184 — with Genitive, 
 414, 2. 
 
 πλήθω, 312, 3 —with Genit., 
 
 πέπρωται, 2S5, D. 
 πίπταμαι, 274, Ex. 
 πεπτωκα, 274, Ex.; 327,15. 
 πέπωκα, 327, 10. 
 πέπων, Compar., 196 a. 
 πέρ, 641, 3—Enclit., 92, 5 — 
 Affix, 218. 
 
 7j-6pa,with Genit., 415—Com¬ 
 par., 200. 
 πέρδω, 326, 33. 
 
 π έρθω, 2 Aor., 257, D.; 59, D. 
 
 —Aor. Inf. Mid., 316, D.41. 
 περί, 448, III.; 466—without 
 Elision, 64, Obs. 1—Anastr., 
 446—Adverb, ibid. — with 
 Augm., 23S. 
 
 περιβάλλομαι, with double 
 Acc., 402. 
 
 περιδένομαι, περίειμι, AA'ith 
 
 Genit., 423. 
 
 πέρνημι, Part., 312, D. e. 
 πέρυσι(ν), 68, 3. 
 πεσείν, 327,15. 
 πέσσω, 250, Obs. 
 πετάννυμι, 319, 3. 
 
 ΠετεωΓ, Genit. Sing., 131, D. 
 πέτομαι, 326,34—2 Aor., 61 c,· 
 257, D.; 310, 5. 
 πεύθομαι, 322, 29. 
 πέψνον, 257,1). 
 πεφυζύτες, 277, D. 
 π ή, Enclit·, 92,4. 
 πή^νυμι, 319, 23 — 2 Aorist 
 Mid., 316, D. 39—Meaning, 
 330, 4. 
 
 πηνίκα, with Genit ,415. 
 πϊ,χνς, Masc., 140 ; 154. 
 πιεζεω, πιέζω, 325, D. li. 
 πίθι, 316,15. 
 
 πίλναμαι, ΑθΓ., 312, D.,/. 
 πίμτλημι, 312, 3—with Gen¬ 
 itive, 41S. 
 πίμπρημι, 312, 4. 
 πίνω, 321, 4; 327,10—Future, 
 265—Aor., 321,4; 316,15- 
 Meaning,329,7—with Gen¬ 
 itive, 419 d, and Obs. 
 πίομαι, 265 ; 327,10. 
 πιπισκω, 324, 20. 
 
 418. 
 
 πλήν, 445 ; 455,9. 
 πλήρης, πληρόω, with Geilit., 
 414, 2; 418. 
 
 πλησίον, Compar., 195— with 
 Genit., 415. 
 
 π λήσσω, 2 Aorist and Future 
 Pass., 295. 
 πλήτο, 316, D. 22. 
 
 -πλοϋί, in Multiplicat., 223. 
 πλούσιος, AVlth Geilit., 414, 2. 
 πλύνω, Perf., 282. 
 πλώω, Aor., 316, D. 24. 
 πνέω, 248—Fut., 260, 2 ; 264 
 —Perf.,2S5, D.—with Acc., 
 400 c. 
 
 Πνύξ , 177,14. 
 ποδός, see πονς. 
 ποθέν, Enel., 92, 4. 
 ποθέω, 301, 4. 
 ποθί, see πού. 
 ποί, Enel., 92, 4. 
 ποιέω and ποιέομαι, 480 — 
 Avith Genit., 417. 
 πόλις, 157, D. — Gender, 138 b 
 —Compos., 1S9, 3. 
 
 πολιτεύω and πολιτεύομαι, 
 
 4S0, Obs. 
 
 πολ\ά/α(ς·), 69, Obs. 3 ; 224. 
 πολύς, 191 — Compar., 199, 5 
 — πολύ, 404, Obs. — πολλώ, 
 Avith Comp., 440. 
 πονέω, 301, 4. 
 πόρρω, with Genit., 415. 
 Ποσείάώΐ', ACC. Smg., 171 — 
 Voc., 148, Obs. 
 ποτέ, Enel., 92,4. 
 πέιτερον ή, 611 — in Depend 
 Iuterr. Sentences, 525. 
 ποτί, see πρός. 
 ποΰ, Avith Genitive, 415. 
 πού ( ποθι ), End., 92, 4. 
 πουλύς, Fern., 185, D. 
 πούς, 142 b; 147, 1, Ex. — 
 Dat. Plur., 49, D.; 141, D.; 
 149, D.—in Compos., 160— 
 Masc., 140. 
 πράος, 191. 
 πράττω, Meaning, 476, 1 — 
 
 πράττομαι, with double 
 Acc., 402. 
 πρέσβυς, 177, 15. 
 πρί,θω, 312, 4. 
 
 πρίαμαι, 2 Aorist, 316, S — 
 Accent, of Aor. Sub. Opt., 
 309. 
 
 πριν, 556 ; 635,11—Avith Inf., 
 565, and Obs. 1, 2. 
 πρίω, Perf. Mid., 28S. 
 πρύ, 448, B; 454 — Crasis, 65 
 —with Augm.,in Compos., 
 238 — Avith Inf. and Art., 
 574, 3— προ τ οΰ, 369, 3. 
 πρός (ποτί, προτι), 448, III.; 
 467— Adv., 446— with Inf. 
 and Art., 574, 2,4. 
 πρόσθεν, πρόσω, with Geilit., 
 415. 
 
 προςί.κον, BS6. 
 
 πρόςωπον, NoiU. AcC. Plur., 
 175, D. 
 
 πρότερος, πρώτος, 200. 
 προίίρδου, Compar., 195. 
 πρώιυς, Compar , 195. 
 πτήσσω, 316, 1). 21. 
 πτίσσω, 250, Obs. — Flltlire, 
 260, 3. 
 πτύω, 301, 1. 
 πτωχόϊ, Compar., 197. 
 πυθισθαι, 322, 29. 
 
 Πωα-όί, 177,14. 
 πύματος, 190, D. (Defect.). 
 πυι θάνομαι, 322, 29 — AVlth 
 Genit., 420. 
 
 πυρ, 142 b; 151; 175; Neut., 
 140. 
 
 πιο, πώ(ς), Enel., 92, 4. 
 πϋ.ς, with Geilit., 415 — πως 
 γάρ ού, 630, 6 d. 
 
 ρ, doubled, 62 — after the 
 Augm. ,234 —afterRednpl., 
 274^4—Metathesis, 59—in 
 2 Aor., 257, D.—p, pp, 13. 
 ρά, Enel., 92,5.—See cipu. 
 ράβδος, Fern., 127, 5. 
 ράδιος, Compar., 199, 7. 
 ραίνω, PI up., 287, D. 
 pt ζω, 327, 3. 
 ρερυπωμένος, 274, D. 
 ρέω, 248 ; 326,35—Fut., 260, 2. 
 ρήγννμι, 319, 24; 278 — Mean¬ 
 ing, 330, 5. 
 
 ρηθήσομαι, etc., 327, 13. 
 ρι^ίω, 325, 1). 1. 
 ρί^ιον, 199, D. 
 ριγοω, Contr., 244, 3. 
 ριπτέω, ρίπτω, 325, 8. 
 ρνσθαι, etc., 314, I). 
 ρώννυμι, 319, 10. 
 
 σ, 2 ; 33 c — effect on preced¬ 
 ing VoAvel and Cons., 46, 
 etc.; 260, etc.; 286—Coin- 
 bin., 48 — Assim. to p, 5 <> b 
 — to λ, μ,ν,ρ 270, D.— bee. 
 Spir. Asp., 60 b; 30S; 327, 
 5 Obs.—from τ, see τ. 
 
GREEK INDEX 
 
 σ, dropped, Cl a, b —in Sigma 
 Stems,ICC—in Pres.Stems, 
 233, 3, 4, 5—iu the Future, 
 262, Ohs., etc. — in the 1 
 Aor., 2G8; 269, D.; 270 — 
 in the 2 Aor. Mid., 307—iu 
 the Perl', aud Plup. Mid., 
 2S4, D. 
 
 σ, inserted in the Perf., 2SS 
 —in the Weak Pass. Stem, 
 298—in the Verb. Adj., 300 
 —in Deriv., 340, Obs. 2—in 
 Compos., 358, 2. 
 σ, doubled iu the Dat. Plur., 
 158, D.—in the Fut., 261, 
 D.—in the 1 Aor., 269, D.— 
 after Syl. Augm., 234, D. 
 
 ?, dropped, 69, Observ. 3—in 
 Compar., 204. 
 
 y, ending of Nom. Sing., 173, 
 1; 113; 122,1; 134,1 ; 141; 
 145; 147, 1; 155; 160 — 
 wanting, 122, D. 1; 147, 2; 
 151; 163. 
 
 y, ending of Dat. Plur., 119; 
 134, S—of Acc. PI., 134,10; 
 173, 7—of 2 Person Sing, 
 in Hist. Tenses Act., 226 
 —Nom. of Fem., 34S; 349, 
 Obs. 
 
 -σα, Fem. ending, 1S7. 
 σαλπίζω, 251, Obs. 
 
 -σαν, 3 PI. in Preter., 302, 7. 
 Σαρπηόών, 174, D. 
 σβ νιυμι, 319, 7—2 Aor., 316, 
 9 ; 318, 5—Meaning, 329, 5. 
 -σβ, Local Suffix, 178. 
 σεαυτ ου, 210 — PoSS., 472 Ot. 
 σέβομαι, Dcp. Pass., 328, 2. 
 -σείω, Verbs in, 353, Obs. 2. 
 σβ<ω, Perf. Mid., 28S. 
 σαύω, 248, D.—1 Aor., 269, D. 
 —Perf. Mid., 274, D., 285, 
 D.—2 Aor., 316, D. 30. 
 σ> πω, Mean, of Perf., 330,6. 
 σής, Gen., PI. and Du., 142, 3. 
 σ0, after Cons.,61 a; 2S6,4. 
 -σθα, iu the 2 Pers. Sing. Sub. 
 and Opt., 233, D. i; 255, 
 D. 1—Ind., 302, D.—in the 
 1 Person Plur. Pres. Mid., 
 233, D. 5. 
 
 -aOe, 2 Pers. Plural, Impel·. 
 Mid., 228. 
 
 -σθον, 1 Pers. Du. Pres. Mid., 
 233, D. 5 —3 Person Dual 
 Imperf., 233, D. 7—2 Pers. 
 Du. Impel*. Mid., 228. 
 
 -σθω, -σθων, -σέλωσαν, 3 Pers. 
 Sing. Du. PI. Imper. Mid., 
 228. 
 
 - σ , , 2 Pers. Sing, of Princ. 
 
 Tenses Act., 226 ; 302, 2. 
 -σ«(ν), Rat. Plur., 68,1; 119; 
 134, S; 141; 160; 173, 0 — 
 3 Pers. Sing. Pres. Subj., 
 233, D. 1 ; 255, D. 1— Local 
 ending, 179 ; 68,2—3 Pers. 
 Plur. aud Sing., 6S, 5. 
 
 σφέ. 
 
 -σια, -σι?, Fem. in, 342,1. 
 σ«γ«ω, Diff. of Pres, and 
 Aor., 498 — Mean, of Fut. 
 Mid., 266. 
 
 -σιμός, Adj. in, 352, Obs. 
 σιωπάω, Meaning of Fut. 
 Mid., 266. 
 
 σκ, in forming Inchoatives, 
 324— Iteratives, 334, L\,etc. 
 σκεδάννυμι, 319, 4. 
 σκβλλω, Aor., 316,10— Mean¬ 
 ing, 329, 6. 
 
 σκίδνημι, 312, D. h ; 319,4. 
 σκοπεω and έομαι, 480. 
 σκότος, 174. 
 
 Σκΰλλη, 115, D. 2. 
 σκώρ, 176. 
 
 σμαω, Contr., 244, 2. 
 
 -σο, 2 Person Sing. Imper. 
 Mirl 298 
 
 σπάω, 301, 1-Perf. Mid., 2SS. 
 σπβνδω, Fut., 260, 1 — Perl. 
 
 Mid., 286, Obs. 
 σπέος, 166, D. 
 σπεσΟαι, etc., 327, 5. 
 σπεύδω, with Illf., 560, 3. 
 σπουδάζω, Meaning of Fut. 
 
 Mid., 266. 
 σσ, 57; 250. _ 
 
 -σσω, Verbs in, 250— Future, 
 260, 3. 
 
 -στα, 307. 
 
 στάζω, 251, Obs.—Fut., 260, 3. 
 στάχυ?, MaSC., 140. 
 στειβω, 326, 36. 
 στβλλω, Perf., 282 —Aorist 
 Pass., 295. 
 
 στενάζω, 251, Obs.—Future, 
 260, 3. 
 
 στενωπό?, MaSC., 127, 2. 
 στερ 7 ω, with Dat., 439, Obs. 
 στερισκω, 324, 26—with Gen¬ 
 itive, 419 e. 
 
 στίζω, 251, Obs.—Fut., 260, 3. 
 στοά, 115 (Ex.), 
 στορεννυμ', 319, 8. 
 στόρνυμι, 319, 25. 
 στοχάζομαι, w r ith Genitive, 
 419 c. 
 
 στρέψω, Perf., 285—Meaning 
 of Aor. Pass., 328,3. 
 στρώννυμι, 319,11. 
 στυγε'ω, 325, D. k. 
 συμβαίνω, Constr. personal- 
 ly, 571. 
 
 συμφωνέω, συνάδω, With Dat., 
 436 a. 
 
 σύν, ξύν, in Compos, bef. σ 
 and ζ, 49, Obs. 1—in Dis¬ 
 tributives, 223. 
 
 -συνη, Fein., 346, 2. 
 σύνοιδά μοι, with Part., 591, 
 Obs. 
 
 συνώνυμος, With Dat., 436 b. 
 σϋ?, 142 6—of two Genders, 
 140. 
 
 σφάλλομαι, with Geil.,419, e. 
 σφέ, 205, D. — σφέτΐρος, 472 5 
 — σφός, 20S, D. 
 
 393 
 
 Tl. 
 
 σφηξ, Masc., 140. 
 σχεθέειν, 33S, D. 
 σχε?, etc., 316,11 ; 327, 6. 
 σχολαΓο?, Compar., 194. 
 σώζω, 1 Aor. Pass., 298. 
 Σωκράτη?, 174. 
 σώ?, 1S4. 
 
 σωτ /pjVoc. Sing., 152. 
 
 τ, Pronunt., 4—bee. Θ, 54 — 
 becomes σ, 60 67 ; 187— 
 
 dropped, 147, 2 ; 169 — in 
 the Perfect, 2S1—changes 
 before, 2S6, 3 — affixed to 
 Verb. Stem, 249—movable, 
 169, D. 
 
 τάν, Defect., 177,16. 
 τάνυμαι, 319, D. 38. 
 τάχα, 212 — τ i/v ταχίστην, 4C5, 
 Obs. 2. 
 
 ταχύ?, Compar. θάσσων, 54 5,' 
 198. 
 
 -σε, 2 Pers. Plur. Act., 226 — 
 2 Plur. Imper. Act., 22S. 
 -re, 624 b — Euclit., 92, 5 — 
 Affix, 94; 624, 5 — τε-και, 
 τέ-δέ, 624, 2, and Obs. 
 ταθνήξω, 291. 
 τειν, 205, D. 
 
 τείνω, Perfect, 282 — 1 Aorist 
 Pass., 298. 
 
 -τειρα, Fem., 341,2. 
 
 τ ίκμήριον δέ, 636, 6 b. 
 
 τελέω, 301,1— Perf. Mid., 2SS. 
 
 τέμΐ,ι, 321, D. 10. 
 
 τέμνω, 321,10. 
 
 τέο, τεΰ, τέω, etc., 214, D. 
 
 τεό?, 208, D. 
 
 -τεο?, Verb. Adj., 300; 590 — 
 with Dat., 434. 
 
 -τερο?, Compar., 192 ; 208, 
 Obs.; 216. 
 
 σέρνομαι, Aorist, 59, D.; 257, 
 D.; 295, D.—with Partic., 
 592. 
 
 τεταγών, 257, D. 
 
 τετακα, 282. 
 
 τετληκα, 317, D. 10. 
 τέτμον, 257, D. 
 τετραινω, Aor., 270, Obs. 
 τετ ρηχά, 277, D. 
 τετυκεϊν, 322, D. 30. 
 τει'χω, 322, 30 — Perf. Mid., 
 285, D. 
 
 τι'κω, Meaning, 330, 7. 
 
 τηλίκοΰτο?, τηλικό?δε, 212 ; 
 
 475. 
 
 -την, Ending of the 3 Person 
 Dual of the Hist. Tenses, 
 Act., 226— of the 2 Person 
 Dual, 233, D. 7. 
 
 -τ up, Masc. iu, 341, 2 ; 137. 
 -τηριον, Neut. in, 345,1. 
 
 -τη?, Nom. of Masc. in, 341, 
 2 ; 349, 2—Voc. Sing., 121 
 —Nom. of Fem. in, 346, 1 ; 
 138. 
 
 τι bee. σσ, 57 —inserted in 
 Derivation, 351. 
 
394 
 
 GREEK INDEX 
 
 -T l. 
 
 -τι, 3 Pers. Sing. Act. in the 
 Frincip. Tenses, 226. 
 τι ; why? 404, Obs.— τί γάρ; 
 
 636, 6 d — τι δή ; 642, 4 cl 
 — τί δήπον ; 642, 5 — τί 
 δζτ α; 642, 6 —τι μαθων ; τί 
 παθών ; 606, Obs. 2— τι μήν ; 
 643,12. 
 
 τίη, 218. 
 
 τιθημι, Aor. Pass., 53 b. 
 τίκτ ω, 249. 
 
 τιμάω, with Genit., 421. 
 τιμωρέομαι and -ι’ω, 481 b — 
 -έομαι, with AcC., 396. 
 τίνυμι, 319, Ο. 35. 
 τίνω, 321, 5. 
 
 Τί7ΓΤ€, 61, D. 
 
 'ϊίρυνς, 50 b, Obs. 2. 
 
 -τίς,Νοηι. Fem., 341,2; 342,1. 
 τις, τί, 214— for όςτις, 609. 
 τις, τι, 214— Enel., 92,1 — -rmi, 
 to be supplied, 568. 
 τιτράω, 32T, 16. 
 τίτρωσκω, 324,16. 
 τιτυσκομαι, o-2, 1). 30; 324, 
 D. 37. 
 
 τλΐ,ναι, etc., 316, 6. 
 τμήγω, 321, D. 10. 
 τό, 379, Obs.; 104; 559 b —τδ 
 μεν, το δέ, 369, Obs. — τύ 
 πριν, 635,11. 
 τόθι, τόθεν, τώς, 217, D. 
 τ οι, 643,10— Enel., 92, 5. 
 
 το<γαρ, τοιγαροΰν, τοιγάρτοι, 
 
 643, 10 ; 637, 5 — τοινυν, 
 
 637, 4. 
 
 τοϊο, etc., 212, D. 
 τοιοντο ς·, τοιόςδε, 212; 4ί5. 
 τ οίςδεσι, 212,1). 
 τόλμα, 115 (Ex.). 
 
 -τον. 2 and 3 Pers. Du. Act., 
 226—3 Pers. Dual Imperf., 
 233, D. 7—2 Pers. Du. Im¬ 
 perf., 22S. 
 
 -τόί, Verbal Adj. in, 300. 
 τοσοντοΐ, τοσόίδε, 212 ; 475. 
 τότε, with Part., 5S7,4. 
 τ ον, τω, 214, Obs..l. 
 
 -τ pa for -τ ερ in the Dat.Plur., 
 153. 
 
 -τρα, Fem. in, 344, Obs. 
 τρέπω, 2 Aorist Act., 257— 
 2 Aorist Pass., 294—Perf., 
 
 τρίψω, 54c—Pevl., 279; 2S5— 
 Aor. Pass., 295—Aor. Act. 
 Meaning, 329, D. 
 τρέχω, 54 c,* 327,11. 
 τρ/,σω, 327, 16. 
 
 -τρία, Fem. in, 341, 2—Quan¬ 
 tity, 117. 
 
 τ pii>p))i, Geuit. PI., 166. 
 
 -τ pu·, Fem. in, 341, 2. 
 
 τριχός, see θρίξ. 
 
 -τρον, Neut. in, 344. 
 τρώγω, 2 Aor. Act., 257. 
 Τρών,Θβη. PI. and Du.,142,3. 
 τρώω, 324, D. 16. 
 ττ, -ττω, see οσ, -σσω. 
 
 φείδομαι. 
 
 τυγχάνω, 322, 30, etc. — With 
 the Genitive, 419 c — with 
 Part., 590. 
 τννη, 205, D. 
 τόπτω, 326, 37. 
 τύφω, 54 C. 
 τυχείν, 322, 30. 
 
 -τω, -των, 3 Pers. Sing, and 
 Du. Impel - . Act., 228. 
 τωρ, Nom. Masc. in, 341, 2; 
 137. 
 
 -τωσαν, 3 Pers. Plur. Imper. 
 Act., 228. 
 
 υ bee. F, 35, D. 2 ; 160 ; 24S, 
 Obs.—bee. », 40 — bee. ευ, 
 40; 278 — bee. ov, 40, D.— 
 of the Stem bee. e, 157— 
 Long by nature, 83, Obs. 1 
 —lengthened, 258, Obs.— 
 dropped, 253 — not drop¬ 
 ped, 64. 
 
 -v, Neut. in, 139; 172. 
 υβρίζω, with Acc., 396. 
 υβριστής, Compar., 197. 
 -vdpiov, Neut. in, 347, Obs. 1. 
 ί/3ωρ, 176—Neut., 140. 
 υε bee. o, 158. 
 υι, Diphth., 28. 
 
 -via, Fem. of Ferf. Partic., 
 18S. 
 
 υιός, 177,17. 
 
 ύμιν, ύμιν, etc., 2C< — νμός, 
 20S, ϋ. 
 
 -υν, Nom. of Masc. and Neut. 
 in, 172. 
 
 -ννω, Verbs in, 853,8. 
 
 υπαί, see υπό. 
 ίιπατος, 200. 
 
 υπέρ ( ύπειρ ), 448, II., A. ; 460 
 — with Inf. and Art., 574,3. 
 έπίσχνονμαι, 323, 36 — With 
 Inf., 569. 
 
 υπό, 448, III.; 468 —Apoc., 
 64, D. 
 
 νποπτεύω, Altgm., 239. 
 
 -υς, Nom. Masc. and Fem., 
 172 — Barytones in Acc. 
 Sing., 156. 
 
 υσμίνη, Dat. Sing., 175, D. 
 
 ί/ατερο9, ίίστατοΓ, νστάτιος, 
 
 200; 199, D. 
 
 ύστερος, ίστερέω. with Gen., 
 416, Obs. 8; 423. 
 
 Φ, Pronunt., 6. 
 φαάνθην, 321, 1). 
 φαεινέις, Superb, 193, D. 
 φαίνω, φαεινω, 321, 1).— Perf., 
 282—M eauing, 330,8—Aor. 
 Pass., 298, D. — Meaning, 
 328, 3 — Diff. of Pres, and 
 Aor., 498. 
 
 φαίνομαι, φανερός ε μι, With 
 
 Part., 590. 
 φάσκω, 324, S. 
 
 φείδομαι, 326, D.45 — Aor. and 
 Fut., 257, D.—with Genit., 
 419 e. 
 
 χρίω. 
 
 φέρτε, 315, D. 4. 
 
 ψέρτερος, φέρτατος, φέριστος, 
 
 199, D. 1. 
 φέρω, 327, 12— Tmperat. of 1 
 Aor. Act., 26S, D.—Mean¬ 
 ing, 476, 2 —φέρων, 5S0. 
 φεύγω, 322, 31—Fut. Mid., 264 
 —Perf. Mid., 2S5t D.—with 
 Acc., 398—with Genit., 422 
 —Meaning, 4S6, Obs. 
 
 Φημί, 312,5—Pres. Ind.Ench, 
 
 92.3. 
 
 φθάνω, 321, 3—2 Aor., 316, 7 
 — with Acc., 398 — with 
 Part., 590. 
 
 φ θείρω, Perf., 282—Meaning, 
 330, D. 11. 
 
 φθίνω, 321, 6—Aor. Mid., 316, 
 D. 26. 
 
 φι\έω, 325, D. 1. 
 φίλος, Compar., 195. 
 φιλοτιμέομαι, Dep. Fass., 
 328, 2. 
 
 -φι(ν), 178, D. 
 
 φοβούμαι, Meaning of Aor., 
 328, 3—with Inf., 560, 3. 
 φοίνιξ, 83, Obs. 1 ; 145. 
 φορήναι, See φέρω, 
 φράγννμι, φάργννμι, 319, 26. 
 φμάζω, Aor., 257, D. 
 φρέαρ, 176. 
 
 Φ-ρήν, Fem., 140. 
 
 φύγαδε, 178, D. 
 
 φυγγάνω, 322, 31, and Obs. 
 
 -φνής, Adj. in, Acc. Sing.,166. 
 
 φυλάττομαι, with ACC., 399. 
 
 φέρω, Fut., 262, D. 
 
 φύω, Aor., 316,17—Meaning, 
 
 329.3. 
 
 φώς, φώς, Genit. Plur. and 
 Dual," 142, 3. 
 
 χαίρω, 326,38 —with Dat ,439, 
 Obs.—with Part., 592. 
 χαλάω, 301, 1. 
 
 ^ c *a t 'v M ,withDat..439 ( Obs. 
 χαλεπός, With Inf., 562. 
 χαλεπώς· φέρω wit 1) Part.,51 2. 
 χανδάνω, 323, I). 41. 
 χανούμαι, 324, 9. 
 χάριν, 404, Obs. 
 χάρίΓ, Compar. of compounds 
 with, 197. 
 χάσκω, 324, 9. 
 χειρ, 177,18—Fem., 140. 
 χειρων, χείριστος, 199, 2. 
 χεισυμαι, 323, D. 41. 
 χέρης, etc., 199, I). 2. 
 χεω, 248 — Fut., 265 — rerf., 
 281 — 1 Aor., 269 — 2 Aor., 
 316, D. 31. 
 
 χραισμέω, 325, D. 171. 
 χράομαι, χράω, Contr., 244, 2 
 —Future, 261—with Dat., 
 438, Obs. 
 
 χρή, 312, 6— χρΐν, 490—with 
 Acc. and Inf., 567, Obs. 1. 
 χριστής, Genit. PL, 123. 
 [χρίω, Petf. Mid., 288. 
 
GREEK INDEX 
 
 395 
 
 χρόα. 
 
 χρόα, 115 (Ex.), 
 χρώι >ννμι, 319, 12. 
 χρως·, 169, 1). 
 
 χώριζα), with Genit., *119 e. 
 χωρίς, 455, 5. 
 
 ψ ,34 ; 4S ; 260. 
 
 -ψ, Subs, in, 172. 
 ψαι'«ο, Perf. Mid., 23S—with 
 Genit., 419 5. 
 ψάω, Conti·., 244, 2. 
 ψεύδομαι, With Genit., 419 (!. 
 
 ω, for o, 276, R.—See Att. 
 Recle .'.—from o, see o — 
 from ii, see η. 
 
 -io, Fem. in, 13S—Nom., 172 
 — Adv. in, 204 — Proper 
 Name<iii Acc. Sing., 163, D. 
 —in the Geuir., 122, D. 3 c 
 — Conn. Vowel, 233, 1 —1 
 _ Pers. Sing. Lid. Act., 233,2. 
 d-ypiat, 327, I). 6. 
 
 =<o<5n?, Adj. in, 359, 2 Ohs. 
 
 tls·. 
 
 ιίΟύω, 325, 9 — Syll. Augm.. 
 _ 237. 
 
 wWoi, 65, D. 
 ώμμαι, 327, 8. 
 
 -cov,Nom. ofMasc. and Fem.. 
 
 172; 345, 3 —Genit., 118 . 
 ; 134, 7 ; 141: 173, 5. 
 w νάμην, etc., 3 4, 1). 
 
 (in/af, 65, I). 
 
 ώι ζέομαι, Syll. Augm., 237— 
 Perf., 275, 2—with Genit.. 
 421. 
 
 ωξυμιαι, 286, 1, Obs. 
 
 -top, Subs, in, 172. 
 ώρασι(ιΛ, 179. 
 
 -cos·, Nom. 172 — Adj., 1S4 — 
 Perf. Part., 276; 1S8 —Fem., 
 138— Adv., 201; 203 —End¬ 
 ing of Genit. Sing, in, 161 
 —with (- and u- Stems, 157 
 —in -ευ Stems, 161 a. 
 laic and J s·, 217. 
 
 (i s· and <7s·, Riff., G9; 217, R.; 
 G31. 
 
 
 ίόφεΧον. 
 
 Is·, Atonon, 97, 3; 98—with 
 Compar., 631 a —with Inf., 
 
 ds· ειπειν,' ους το νυν είναι, 
 
 etc.,564—“as though,’’etc., 
 with Part., 588—“when,” 
 “as,” 556—with Aor. Ind., 
 493—“that,”in Rependent 
 Reclarative Sentences, 525 
 —“in order that,”in Sen¬ 
 tences of Purpose, 530 — 
 with dv, 631 b, Obs.—in 
 expressing a wish, 514. 
 
 •09, Preposit., 445 ; 448, A. ; 
 450. 
 
 'όςπερ, 632—with Part., 5PS. 
 dWre, 94; 560; 632, 4 — with 
 Inf., 566—joined with μή, 
 617, Obs. 2. 
 ωτόΐ, see ot/f. 
 ωυ, Diphth., 26, R. 
 ωντός, etc., 209, R. 
 
 Μφελέω, with Acc., 326. 
 ίίιφελον, 396, 32- in express 
 ing a wish, 515. 
 
ψ 
 
Date Due 
 
 P-7- .3'/ ■ 
 
 <ζΕ /'7T'* ** 7 ^ 
 
 . 
 
 // 
 
 > < -" , · 
 
 I 
 
 NOV -5 ’49 
 
 /JW 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ψ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 -* 
 
 
 
 
 
BOSTON COLLEGE 
 
 3 9031 01392983 
 
 boston college library 
 
 UNIVERSITY HEIGHTS 
 CHESTNUT HILL, MASS. 
 
 * 
 
 Books may be kept for two weeks and may be 
 enewed for the same period, unless reserved. 
 
 TWO cents a day is charged for each book kept 
 overtime. 
 
 ,f you cannot find what you want, ask the 
 Librarian who will be glad to help you. 
 
 The borrower is responsible for books 
 on his card and for all fines accrumg on the · 
 
>; H} ii ': * {l ; * η :ϊ· · : « 
 
 MV 
 
 ’ 
 
 ■ . 
 
 
 
 
 .v, V ■ ; '.'/Λ ■;.·,·■ . :γ!·ν:-ν; ·■: ·. 
 
 • -■· ·. 
 
 •' ■ ~ · .· 
 
 . 
 
 mw 
 
 ■u. 
 
 Λ ^ΜίτΙΐή 
 a ptvini'L· 
 
 mm 
 
 % a- 
 
 * 
 
 ' · · / « · « ( 1 i i; .· · · r ·. < » “ 
 
 J 'Μ-ίΦ'ϊ&ξ 
 
 2 iH 
 M